Specs For Station - and - Buildings - Construction - Spec PDF

RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01000 TRAFFIC CONTROL

01710 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02584 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
02780 UNIT PAVERS
02870 SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS
02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03332 ARHITECTURAL CONCRETE
03365 POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
03532 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
03544 CEMENT-BASED SCREED
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04815 GLASS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
04851 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05121 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05522 ALUMINUM TUBE RAILINGS – PARK-AND-RIDE
05530 GRATINGS
05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS
05811 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 5

S08035-TOC-PM - 1.1.
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07135 APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07162 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
07180 TRAFFIC COATINGS
07190 WATER REPELLENTS
07415 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07531 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENEMONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07920 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08412 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND DOORS
08460 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08712 DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)
08716 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
08800 GLAZING
08830 MIRRORS
08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
08912 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS – PARK-AND-RIDE
08961 SLOPED GLAZED AND METAL ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES
08962 OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
08970 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED STRUCTURAL GLASS CURTAIN WALLS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09250 GYPSUM BOARD
09310 CERAMIC TILE
09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09514 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
09580 SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS

S08035-TOC-PM - 1.1.
09634 STONE FLOORING

09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09661 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS
09671 RESINOUS FLOORING
09750 STONE WALL FACING
09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING
09912 INTERIOR PAINTING
09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
09981 CONCRETE ROOF DECK COATING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS

10245 EXTERIOR SCREENS
10431 SIGNS
10505 METAL LOCKERS
10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10710 EXTERIOR SHADING ASSEMBLIES
10750 TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES
10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12481 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13651 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

13652 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS – PARK-AND-RIDE
13845 LIGHTING CONTROLS
13851 FIRE ALARM
13915 FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13916 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
13921 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, HORIZONTAL FIRE PUMPS
13967 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
13975 STANDPIPES AND HOSES
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

14310 ESCALATORS
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

S08035-TOC-PM - 1.1.
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15081 DUCT INSULATION
15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15122 METERS AND GAGES
15170 MOTORS
15182 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
15191 FUEL OIL PIPING
15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15441 WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS
15444 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
15445 SEWAGE PUMPS
15446 SUMP PUMPS
15450 POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
15485 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
15671 CONDENSING UNITS
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (15 TONS AND SMALLER)
15737 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (LARGER THAN 15 TONS)
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15763 FAN-COIL UNITS
15782 ROOFTOP UNITS
15815 METAL DUCTS
15816 HVAC CASINGS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15836 AXIAL FANS
15837 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
15853 POWER VENTILATORS
15854 CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
15861 AIR FILTERS
15900 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16124 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

S08035-TOC-PM - 1.1.
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16139 CABLE TRAYS
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
16264 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
16265 CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
16280 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR
16312 SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATION
16341 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

16350 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES
16441 SWITCHBOARDS
16442 PANELBOARDS
16450 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
16482 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Initial Date
PM Confirmed
Initial Date
PMC Verified

S08035-TOC-PM - 1.1.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
SECTION 01000 – TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes:
1. Traffic Control Requirements.

2. Quality Assurance.
3. Dust Control.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings for all areas requiring traffic regulation, even if such areas are not
shown on the contract drawings to include but not be limited to:
a. Identify existing services and access to adjacent properties

b. Detail congested areas at a scale of 1:250.
c. Vehicular segregation and routing.
d. Proposed detours during construction.
e. Employee parking areas
B. Method statement for dust control.
1.3 GENERAL TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall maintain and protect vehicular and pedestrian traffic (including plant
staff) through all construction areas.
1. Work shall include but not necessarily be limited to furnishing, erecting and
maintaining temporary traffic control devices including barriers, barricades, cones,
drums, warning signs directional signage and lights.
C. Contractor shall ensure that adequate access is maintained at all times to properties
affected by construction activities.
1. Replace access ways with the same width, standard and surface type as the
existing access facilities.
a. A minimum width of 3 m shall be provided.

b. The Engineer shall agree to the layout, width and construction details of all
access ways prior to construction.
TRAFFIC CONTROL 01000 - Page 1 of 5

S08035-SPC-PMC-01-REV 1
TRAFFIC CONTROL
2. The access locations to be maintained are not shown on the Drawings.

3. All existing access ways; paved or unpaved, shall be maintained at all times during
the contract period unless specifically authorized otherwise by the Engineer in
writing.
D. Detour Works and access to the site shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Field surveys,
2. Construction and maintenance of paved and unpaved detour carriage ways
including earthwork,
3. Providing and installing barriers, drainage, lighting, traffic signals, signs,
barricades, and other traffic control devices.
4. Drawings showing details of the proposed Detour Works shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
5. Temporary protection of existing utility services as required by the Engineer.
6. Restoration of the Detour sites to their original condition (or such other condition
as directed or approved by the Engineer) when the Detours are no longer required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Traffic Safety Supervisor
1. Provide a competent Traffic Safety Supervisor approved by the Engineer, to

oversee the maintenance of vehicular and pedestrian traffic operations. This
supervisor may have collateral duties but he must give adequate time and attention
to traffic safety as required by job site conditions.
a. Supervisor shall be available at all times,

b. Supervisor shall have received traffic safety training or shall have had
previous experience regulating traffic flow through construction work areas.
2. The Traffic Safety Supervisor's duties and responsibilities shall include but not
necessarily be limited to the following:
a. Maintain traffic flow through and around the construction site as required by
these Contract Documents.
b. Coordinate traffic control procedures with all relevant authorities including
the plant operating staff,
c. Inspect the condition and location of traffic control devices to ensure that they
are in proper working order, clean, visible and conform to these specifications.
d. Establish traffic control requirements and develop the appropriate control
procedures.
e. Provide and maintain such devices as are necessary for safe and efficient
traffic movement. Ensure that these devices are in place at the required time.
There will include backup alarms on equipment and haul trucks.
f. Coordinate traffic control operations, including maintenance, with the
Engineer.
g. Review the Contractor's material storage and handling procedures with respect
to traffic safety and operation.

TRAFFIC CONTROL
h. Conduct an initial traffic safety meeting with Contractor, Subcontractor

Superintendents and other Contractors prior to beginning construction.
Review traffic control procedures, safety, barricading, traffic speeds, flagman,
diversion on the site.
i. Conduct periodic meetings at least monthly to review traffic control problems
and implement solutions.
1. Provide the Engineer with minutes summarizing all discussions.

2. The Engineer may elect to attend these meetings.
B. Flagmen
1. Persons acting as flagmen shall be:
a. Physically and mentally qualified

b. Trained in their duties, and
c. Courteous.
2. Each flagman on duty shall wear appropriate and distinctive apparel as approved
by the Engineer.
a. Shall be equipped with a STOP/GO sign conforming to these Specifications.

b. Reflective apparel is required for flagging during darkness.
1.5 DUST CONTROL
A. Contractor shall prevent nuisance conditions from developing as a result of dust.
B. Dust control shall be by watering using tanker trucks with spray attachments or by
other approved methods at no additional cost to the Employer.
C. Submit for approval by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All traffic control devices shall be approved by the Engineer before being used on the
Site.
1. After the initial use is complete, the Contractor may reuse any approved items as
the need arises.
B. All sign panels, barricades, drums, vertical panels and flagmen's paddles shall be
reflectorized.
1. Painting shall not constitute an approved substitute for reflectorization.

TRAFFIC CONTROL
C. Barricades shall be made of metal or plastic and shall collapse when tipped over.
1. Barricades made of wood will not be permitted.
D. Cones shall be manufactured of a material capable of withstanding impact without

damage to the cones or vehicles.
1. All cones shall be red and shall have a white reflectorized band.
2. Cones shall be capable of remaining upright during normal traffic flow and wind
conditions in the area where they are used.
E. Vertical panels shall be constructed of metal or plastic.
1. Wood construction will not be permitted.
F. Warning lights shall be Type A (low intensity flashing), or Type C (steady burn).
1. Shall meet the minimum requirement of the Institute of Transportation Engineers

"Standard for Flashing and Steady-Burn Barricade Warning Lights".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
A. Provide and maintain traffic control devices, both inside and outside the Contract
Limits, as needed to direct traffic and ensure vehicular and pedestrian safety.
B. Prior to beginning construction, erect the necessary signs, barricades, and other traffic
control devices.
1. Remove or cover all warning signs except those required for public safety during
non-working hours or when construction in that area is completed.
2. Cover signs with either metal or plywood sheets so that the entire sign cannot be
seen by on-coming traffic.
C. Use traffic Control devices only as long as they are needed.
1. Only those devices that apply to conditions actually in existence shall be in place.
D. Reflective materials on signs, drums, barricades, and other devices shall be kept clean,
free from dirt, mud and road grime.
1. Scratches, rips, and tears in the sheeting shall be promptly repaired by the
Contractor to the Engineer's satisfaction.
2. Reflective sheeting materials shall maintain a reflectivity of not less than 50% of
their design intensity values.
E. Traffic Control Devices
1. Shall be supplied and maintained by the Contractor.

TRAFFIC CONTROL
2. Shall be relocated, realigned or replaced as necessary.

3. Which are damaged, lost, stolen, destroyed or deemed unacceptable shall be
promptly replaced by the Contractor without additional payment or compensation.
F. Warning lights shall be securely fixed to barricades or drums used singly or in

combination with other devices, unless otherwise specified.
END OF SECTION 01000

SECTION 01710 - HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Employer and Engineer are committed to the safety and health of all persons
associated with the operations of the Riyadh Metro Project and its surroundings.
However, the Contractor has the sole responsibility for developing and implementing
the health and safety plan for all work. Safety is a cornerstone of operations and must be
regarded as a paramount priority for every Contractor engaging in work at the Project.
These Contract specifications must not be considered as inclusive of all safety and
health requirements for work at the Project. Instead they are a guideline that must be
addressed while developing the approved Contractor site specific health and safety plan
(SSSP). The Contractor’s SSSP shall be submitted and approved by Engineer prior to
mobilization to the Site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY OBLIGATIONS
A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for safety conditions on the
site including the safety of all persons and property inside and adjacent to the site during
the Contract. These requirements shall apply continuously for the duration of the
Contract and shall not be limited to normal business hours or other time constraints, nor
be reduced or diminished in any way because the Contractor is not given sole
occupation of the site (total or partial). The Contractor is fully responsible for the safety
of workers engaged upon the works, and of all other persons working at or visiting the
site including any employees of other contractors working within the site, and for the
protection of the public in the vicinity of the site. The Contractor shall formulate and
implement their safety plan, in accordance with the requirements of this section.
B. In accordance with the Contract documents, the Contractor shall submit the proposed
Contractor SSSP and following receipt of Engineer’s Representative’s written notice of
“no objection” it shall become the Contractor’s SSSP.
3.2 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall ensure that all operations carried-out under the Contract shall, at all
times, comply in all respects with all applicable laws and best industry practices.
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01710 - Page 1 of 14

S08035 -SPC-PMC-01 REV 1
3.3 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY ORGANIZATION
A. The Contractor shall designate a senior member of its staff who shall be responsible and
directly accountable to the Engineer’s Representative in all matters concerning safety.
B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an organizational structure of safety staff to
effectively implement and manage occupational safety and health on site. Such staff
shall be engaged solely in safety assurance. Responsibilities and task subdivision shall
be clearly identified in the SSSP, and shall show direct lines of communication and
reporting between the Contractor’s safety manager and the Contractor’s representative.
C. The Contractor shall, within 30 days of the notice to proceed, appoint a safety manager
whose full-time duties shall be solely connected with the safety (environmental,
industrial health, and hygiene) aspects of the works and who shall report directly to the
Contractor’s designated program manager. Such an appointment shall be subject to a
statement of no objection by the Engineer’s Representative. The safety manager shall be
suitably qualified and experienced, and shall implement, maintain, and monitor
compliance with the SSSP and all safety procedures, and be based full-time on site.
D. The Contractor shall not remove the appointed safety manager without the prior written
consent of the Engineer’s Representative, and any replacement shall be nominated by
the Contractor at the same time consent is sought.
E. The Contractor shall authorize the safety manager and safety staff to issue stop orders to
employees of the Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, including labor-only, to
cease operations and take urgent and appropriate action to make safe the site and
prevent unsafe working practices or other infringements of the SSSP or breach of any
applicable laws.
F. The Contractor shall ensure that each Subcontractor of every tier, including labor-only,
shall have safety supervisory staff that shall have appropriate experience and training.
Such staff shall be responsible for implementing and maintaining the appropriate
elements of the SSSP. They shall devote a substantial amount of their time to such
duties. All Subcontractors shall, at all times, conform to the SSSP.
G. The Contractor shall not commence any work on site until the safety manager has been
appointed, and commenced duties on the site and the appropriate Subcontractor’s safety
staff are in place and the Contractor’s SSSP has been reviewed and approved by the
Engineer.
3.3 RISK ASSESSMENT
A. In order to formulate a specific and competent SSSP, the Contractor shall carry-out a
detailed risk assessment against the scope and nature of the Contracted works and the
particular site conditions. The risk assessment shall be conducted by a qualified and
suitably experienced team comprising planning, design, and supervisory staff led by the
safety manager. The documentation arising from this process shall contain a
comprehensive schedule of all perceived risks and the proposed elimination and
mitigation measures necessary to reduce the risk to a minimum. Risk assessment
documentation shall form part of the auditable safety records.

3.4 THE SITE SPECIFIC SAFETY PLAN
A. Content of the SSSP.
− The SSSP shall be subject to regular review against evolving regulations, the
scope and program of the works, ambient conditions, or as directed by
Engineer’s Representative. For it to be considered adequate, the SSSP shall
contain, but not be limited to, the following elements developed to suit the
works:
− A policy statement signed by the Consortium’s Authorized Representative
declaring that occupational health and safety shall be given the highest
practicable priority in all aspects of the Contract and in the discharge of their
contractual obligations. It shall also clearly state that the Contractor’s
representative shall be directly accountable in all matters of safety at the site.
− An organization chart identifying all full-time safety personnel and all site staff
with particular responsibilities for safety under the Contract and the SSSP. The
chart shall indicate seniority and show reporting lines. In particular, the direct
relationship between the safety manager and the Contractor’s representative
shall be clearly shown. A safety responsibility statement for each position
shown on the chart shall be appended to the chart.
− Details of the authority vested in the safety manager and their staff, which
would enable them to take or instruct appropriate action, including the stoppage
of activities likely to cause injury, in the event of a contravention of the SSSP.
− Details of radio or other communication facilities necessary to enable the safety
manager and the Contractor’s key staff to communicate efficiently and
effectively on safety matters with the Contractor’s personnel at all Site
workplaces and with Engineer’s staff.
− The means by which the Contractor shall ensure that specialist health and safety
procedures proposed by Subcontractors of all levels will be reviewed and
assimilated into the Contractor’s safety plan.
− The means by which the Contractor shall ensure that Subcontractors of all levels
comply with their occupational health and safety standards, and all applicable
laws. This section should include details of any health and safety promotion
initiatives and award scheme.
− Emergency procedures that detail the organization of rescue and damage
limitation teams to deal with emergency situations on site such as, but not
limited to: seismic activity, fire, loss of power, flooding, or the evacuation of a
seriously injured person from a remote or difficult site location, etc. The
emergency procedures shall specify the equipment, its location and the
frequency of practice drills. The Contractor shall also detail how information on
such services and arrangements will be made known to those at work on the
Site.
− Arrangements for training the Contractor’s entire site staff to enable them to
properly undertake their health and safety responsibilities. The Contractor shall
keep records of such training for health and safety audit purposes. Upon
completion of their training, the Contractor’s site staff shall sign a copy of their
assigned safety responsibilities statement which shall also be kept by the
Contractor for audit purposes.

− Arrangements for the induction and job specific health and safety training of all
workers including those of Subcontractors at all level. The proposals shall
include the syllabus, frequency, and application of such training courses. Such
training shall be conducted by suitably qualified persons and repeated at
intervals of six months. All workers shall receive the agreed induction training
before they are allowed to commence work on Site. The identification card
numbers and names of attendees shall be kept for audit purposes. In addition, all
visitors shall receive the agreed to induction safety training prior to being
allowed onto the construction site.
− Arrangements which allows the Contractor to positively identify each individual
who has successfully completed safety training. Those who can not be
identified positively shall not be allowed to work on site.
− Arrangements to ensure that, at least once every week, all workers shall receive,
and participate in, a toolbox talk with their immediate supervisor. Records of
this activity shall be kept for audit purposes. The topic of these talks shall be
decided at the site safety meeting. Guidance notes and advice on how to present
the talks shall be prepared by the Contractor’s safety manager and issued to
those giving the talk. The names of those attending the toolbox talk shall be
noted on the toolbox talk form and initialled by all attending.
− Details of the quantity and specification of all necessary safe condition
monitoring equipment which shall include as a minimum, but is not be limited
to, temperature and sound level meters and appropriate gas monitors.
− The means and frequency by which safety facilities such as scaffolds,
guardrails, working platforms, ladders and other means of access, lifting
appliances, lighting, signing and guarding equipment, shall be inspected, tested,
and maintained. Maintenance and monitoring records for all of the
aforementioned equipment shall be kept for audit purposes. The Contractor
shall ensure that all the inspections and verifications are undertaken by qualified
and competent persons.
− Details of how the Contractor will ensure the protection of authorized visitors
and the prevention of unauthorized entry to site.
− Details of the proposed first aid provisions including medical personnel and
facilities appropriate to site conditions. This shall include arrangements for
transporting the injured (ambulance, stretcher, etc).
− Details of how where and by whom auditable health and safety related records
shall be kept and maintained. In addition to these records, the safety manager
should keep a safety diary to record all safety-related activities and events on a
daily basis. The diary shall be made available to Engineer’s staff on request.
− Details of the Contractor’s arrangements for site safety inspections to be
conducted by the Contractor’s representative. These inspections shall take place
at least monthly by the safety manager and daily by the supporting safety staff.
Reports of these inspections shall include the actions taken to resolve any
problems or shortcomings discovered during the inspection, shall be made
available for audit purposes.
− Details of material and equipment storage.
− Terms of reference, membership, and the proposed frequency of site safety
committee meetings. These meetings shall be chaired by the Contractor’s
representative.

− A comprehensive health and safety inspection checklist for the use of the
Contractor’s site staff when inspecting the site. The checklist shall indicate the
standard to be achieved on any particular aspect of health and safety and be
compiled in such a way that will allow the inspector to easily record actual
findings. Critical substandard items shall be rectified on the spot and signed off
as such. Non-critical substandard items that are not rectified on the spot shall be
brought to the attention of the appropriate manager via the sign off portion of
the checklist for subsequent rectification. When completed the checklist shall be
kept for audit purposes.
− Details of the Contractor’s internal safety audit scheme to be implemented
regarding the safety management system and the physical Site conditions. The
audits shall be performed, against the conditions specified in the SSSP at least
every three months. The audit shall include the work of Subcontractors of all
levels. The documentation generated by the audit process, including score
sheets, shall be made available to Engineer for audit purposes.
− Detailed procedures covering all health and safety aspects of the Contract are
included, but not limited to, the following list when applicable. The Contractor
is advised that, in order to facilitate efficient document and standards review,
they shall consult with Engineer’s safety staff and use Client/Engineer’s
construction health and safety manual for guidance and assistance when
formulating these procedures for inclusion in the SSSP.
i. Work at height,
ii. Control of noise,
iii. Control of dust,
iv. Temporary illumination,
v. Worker welfare and hygiene facilities,
vi. Housekeeping,
vii. Traffic control and site transportation,
viii. Fire control precautions and fire procedures,
ix. Working in confined spaces,
x. Excavation,
xi. Tunneling Works,
xii. Hand held electrical tools,
xiii. Temporary electrical distribution network,
xiv. Welding/cutting operations and equipment,
xv. Personal protective equipment and clothing,
xvi. Lifting accessories (slings and shackles, etc.),
xvii. Cranes, hoists and lifting appliances,
xviii. Scaffolding and work platforms,
xix. Ladders,
xx. Contractor’s plant, machinery and vehicles,
xxi. Work over water,

xxii. Structural steel erection,

xxiii. Blasting and explosives,
xxiv. Control of hazardous substances,
xxv. Hot working,
xxvi. Floor and wall openings and stairways, and
xxvii. Protection from falling objects.
B. Revisions of safety plan including procedures.
− 1. At any time, and in accordance with Contract Documents, a revision to the

safety plan or any safety procedure may be required in order to ensure
compliance with the Contract, the Contractor shall, following discussion with
the Engineer’s Representative, issue such revision which shall include an
addition, omission, or revision as applicable.
− 2. The Contractor shall review, on a continuous basis, the safety plan and
procedures and shall revise them as required in accordance with activities and
experiences on site. Such revisions, from time to time, shall enhance the
standards of safety being implemented on site. Procedures shall be reviewed
and new procedures issued whenever the character or extent of any activity is
changed or a new activity of different nature is introduced which necessitates
such revision.
− 3. In addition to revisions, the Contractor shall make a formal review once
every 12 months on the anniversary of the notice to proceed date. Such formal
review, which shall take no more than 30 days, shall consider all matters
pertaining to safety planning and implementation including accident reports,
inspections, audits, suggestions from meetings, and other sources including the
Engineer’s Representative and the Engineer’s insurance representative and
hazard analysis reviews. Within seven days of finishing this review, the
Contractor shall issue a review report to the Engineer’s Representative giving
the conclusions of the review and identifying the revisions to be made to the
safety plan.
− 4. Within 30 days of the issue of the review report, if required, the Contractor
shall issue a revised safety plan for consideration by the Engineer’s
Representative in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.5 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Emergency and rescue procedures.
− 1. The Contractor shall develop site emergency response and rescue

procedures before any work commences at the site, but in any event not later
than three months after the notice to proceed. These procedures shall provide
clear instructions to be followed in the event of an emergency, naming of
responsible personnel, notification and cooperation proposals with appropriate
rescue services, and other authorities who would be involved and methods of
evacuation including use of helicopters and other necessary measures. The
procedures shall be coordinated with local fire and rescue and emergency
services as required. Emergency procedures giving full instructions and

telephone numbers shall be posted at appropriate locations and in the languages

in common usage on site.
− 2. For underground works, trained rescue teams shall be designated for each
working shift. These teams shall receive professional training in emergency
response, rescue and first aid, particularly suited for the work at hand. Members
of the rescue teams may be workers assigned to underground work or other
duties.
− 3. Emergency drills including both the rescue teams and outside rescue and
emergency services shall be executed within one month of commencing
construction on any section and shall be repeated at no less than 6-month
intervals. Where circumstances justify it, the Contractor may be required to
carry out emergency drills more frequently.
B. Public convenience and safety.
− 1. All work shall be conducted so obstructions to traffic are minimized. The

safety and convenience of the public and the protection of persons and property
shall be provided as specified in the Contract Documents.
− 2. Barriers, barricades, and warning signs: The Contractor shall provide,
erect, and maintain barriers, barricades, lights, signals, signs, and other traffic
control devices in accordance with the applicable laws and to the extent
necessary to enable the Contractor to meet their obligations under the Contract
Documents.
− 3. Structural steel beams and other major structural components or heavy and
potentially hazardous components shall not be lifted and/or placed over
roadways or walkways that are open to the public.
C. Personal protective equipment (PPE).
− The Contractor shall ensure that all persons working on or visiting the site wear,
at least, a safety hard hat of an approved type, safety glasses, strong appropriate
footwear, and high visibility vest. The Contractor shall assess all works areas
and specify the appropriate personal protective equipment according to the
applicable laws, standards and codes of practice. The Contractor shall ensure
that Subcontractor’s workers of any tier, including labor-only, are issued with
the specified PPE.
− The hard hat designation on site is as follows:
o Engineer - White Helmet
o Contractor’s Supervisors/Foremen - Yellow Helmet
o Contractor’s Safety Staff - Green Helmet
o Contractor’s Banksmen - Red Helmet
o Contractors Other Labor - Color other than those listed before.

Changes to the project helmet color scheme are at the discretion of Engineer.
−

− All PPE shall be properly maintained and replaced before the period of
permitted use expires.
− The Contractor shall ensure that all persons on site use the appropriate PPE at
all times. Training in its use shall be provided where necessary. Failure to use
such equipment shall be considered as conduct prejudicial to safety. The use of
safety helmets on site shall be mandatory except in designated areas such as
offices and canteens.
D. No minors (under 18 years of age) are to be permitted access.
E. Control of substances hazardous to health.
− The Contractor shall assess all materials for their occupational health and
environmental compatibility. A less hazardous product shall be used to replace
any material that is toxic, explosive, carcinogenic, flammable, or which may
otherwise create a hazard. Where this cannot be done, the Contractor shall
conduct a risk assessment and, if appropriate, produce a method statement
specifying the safe method of use or application which shall be sent to the
Engineer’s Representative, in advance, for a statement of no objection. The
Contractor shall maintain a material safety data sheet (MSDS) for all such
materials in the auditable health and safety records.
− Non-prescription drugs and alcohol. Controls shall be established and
maintained to prevent persons under the influence of drugs or alcohol entering
and/or working on the site. No alcohol or non-prescription drugs shall be
allowed on the site.
F. First aid.
− All parts of the Site where work is being carried out and all site offices shall be
provided with appropriately equipped first aid kits. First aid kits shall be in
sturdy weatherproof containers clearly identified and fixed in an obvious and
readily accessible location. All work sites shall have readily accessible first aid
facilities fully equipped and staffed during working hours by appropriately
qualified medical personnel. At all times, at least one person staffing the facility
shall be at least qualified as a registered medical technician. Such facility shall
be able to provide immediate medical assistance for serious injuries, and to deal
with minor injuries. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate number of
personnel trained in basic first aid. Such number shall be not less than one
trained personnel per 50 employees.
G. Fire prevention.
− The Contractor shall establish a fire prevention strategy for all of the Works
under its control and shall provide all necessary and appropriate fire detection
and fire fighting equipment, facilities, and personnel trained in fire fighting.
Warning systems shall be installed at all places where persons may be at risk
from fire and all personnel shall be given instruction in evacuation procedures
and basic fire fighting.
−

H. Noise.
− In addition to complying with this section, all necessary procedures shall be

established and maintained to prevent people working on site or members of the
public in the area being exposed to unreasonable levels of noise. Such
procedures shall, where necessary, include the provision of noise containment
barriers and the issue of protective equipment to people working on site.
I. Contractor’s plant, equipment, and vehicles.
− All construction plant, equipment, and vehicles brought onto site shall be
inspected and tested, as appropriate. Each vehicle, item of Contractor’s Plant,
and equipment shall be given a unique identity number. This number shall be
clearly displayed on the machine at all times. The Contractor’s Plant,
equipment, and vehicles shall fully comply with the applicable laws, be
properly licensed and certificated, and be maintained in line with the
manufacturer’s specification. Copies of all such licences, certificates, and
maintenance sheets, etc. shall be kept in the safety-related documentation files
in the main site office. A system to control delivery vehicles and short term
hired plant shall also be established.
J. Communications and signs.
− General communication requirements.

o All signs, labels, warnings, posters, and safety information directed at
people working on site shall be in English and in any other language
used by a significant number of people working at the site.
o Communications regarding sub standard safety items may be verbal in
the first instance to be followed by written communication, as
necessary.
− Electronic communications.
o The Contractor shall ensure that radio and telephone communication is
available at all times between all parts of the site and the main site
offices. Such communication system shall provide a dedicated channel
for use in case of emergencies involving accidents, injuries, fatalities,
serious damage or dangerous occurrences.
K. Temporary access and temporary work.
− The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary access facilities, which
shall be constructed, installed and maintained in accordance with the applicable
laws and codes of practice. In particular, ladders and any supporting structures
shall be regularly inspected to ensure that they are fit for purpose and free from
defects. Any temporary access shall be secured against movement, provide a
good walking surface and incorporate fall protection measures.
− All temporary works shall be checked, approved and marked as approved, prior
to use.

L. Control of employees and visitors.
− All Contractor employees and Subcontractors of every tier, including labor-

only, all other Contractor employees of Engineer who are working within the
site, and all visitors to the site, including staff and agents of Engineer, shall be
obliged to conform to the provisions of the safety plan.
− The Contractor shall provide visitors viewing or inspecting any work site with
personal protective equipment and shall provide appropriate safety instruction
to the visitors. They shall be accompanied at all times by a full-time site
employee of the Contractor or Subcontractor as the case may be. They shall not
be permitted to enter high-risk areas unless for purposes of inspection and with
written permission of appropriate parties. Such high-risk areas shall include
areas requiring the use of safety harness, uncertified areas of temporary works,
lifting zones and other areas as designated from time to time by the safety
manager.
− All employees of the Contractor and all Subcontractors of every tier, including
labor-only, and all employees of other contractors who are working within the
site shall at all times wear suitable identification when on site and display a
permit. The permit shall be dated and clearly show the person’s name and their
employer.
M. Electrical equipment.
− All electrical equipment, including the construction site supply layout, shall be
supplied, operated, and maintained in accordance with the applicable laws,
manufacturers' instructions, and site procedures. Procedures for the operation of
the construction supplies, and the repair and maintenance of electrical
equipment shall be developed as part of the safety plan.
N. Hoisting and lifting operations.
− Competent operators and lifting supervisors.

o Only persons holding valid certificates or licences issued by a
recognized training body, and authorized in writing by the Contractor’s
safety manager, shall be allowed to operate Contractor’s Plant,
equipment, and vehicles. In addition, a trained and authorized person
shall be assigned to supervise every lifting operation. Lifting
supervisors shall be equipped with radio equipment to enable
uninterrupted communication with the crane operator. All cranes shall
have appropriate certifications and current inspection records on site.
Lift plans shall be developed for all major lifts. Crane lift equal to or
greater than 75% of the crane’s net capacity shall be considered a
‘critical lift’. All critical lift plans shall be prepared according to ASME
standards and reviewed by a competent engineer.
− Lifting accessories.
o Prior to use on site, lifting accessories, such as chains, slings, shackles,
etc., shall be tested and certified to an approved safety margin
according to the applicable laws. Each item must be clearly and
indelibly marked with a unique identifier and its safe working load

(SWL). The original certificate shall be kept in the lifting accessory

register as part of the Contractor’s auditable safety records. The
Contractor shall arrange for a thorough examination to be carried out
every three months during the course of the Contract. All such items
should be color-coded to aid inspection. Any lifting accessory found
unmarked or unregistered shall immediately be put out of use until re-
certified.
o Procedures for operation of hoists shall be prominently displayed by
each hoist. Only trained and authorized personnel shall operate hoists.
O. Explosives.
− Explosives shall not be used unless unavoidable. Such use shall only be
permitted upon approval from the Employer and the relevant authorities.
Storage and use of explosives shall be in compliance with safety regulations and
permits and all applicable laws.
P. Work at height and over water.
− All work at a height shall be executed within a properly secured and otherwise
protected area. If such enclosure and protection is impracticable, work shall
only be permitted with the use of well-secured safety lines and safety harness
that meets industry standards or equivalent and appropriate local government
regulations. All personnel in such locations must wear approved and tested
safety harness 100% of the time secured to such safety lines. All personnel
required to wear a safety harness shall be adequately trained in fall protection
before they are allowed to wear the harness and work at heights.
− Where work is being carried out on, over, or adjacent to water, a safe system of
work shall be devised to prevent persons from falling into the water. A suitably
designed and equipped safety boat, or boats as appropriate, shall be provided
and used solely for rescue work. They shall be continuously manned with
appropriately trained staff and be ready to work whenever personnel are at risk
of falling into the water. Suitable and sufficient back-up staff and equipment
should be planned into the operation.
Q. Tunneling operations.
− The safety requirements for tunnelling operations shall comply with the
requirements of the safety plan and applicable standards.
R. Sanitation, housekeeping, and inspection.
− The site shall be kept in a clean, clear, and uncluttered condition, free of
obstructions and hazards at all times. All material and equipment that is not
used shall be removed, particularly on access routes and walkways. Sanitary
facilities shall be provided within a five minute walk from all intensive work
sites.
− The Contractor shall regularly inspect, test, and maintain all safety equipment,
scaffolds, guardrails, working platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of
access, lifting, lighting, signing and guarding equipment. Such inspection shall
include checks on temporary works certificates, safe working procedures and
personnel protection equipment. Inspection reports shall be filed for each

individual inspection. Lighting shall clearly and uniformly illuminate the

working site. Signs shall be kept clear of obstructions and easy to read.
Equipment that is damaged, dirty, not presently required in that location, or not
in working order shall be repaired, removed, or replaced immediately.
− The Contractor shall establish and maintain a system for the issue of non
compliance notices by their safety manager regarding safety violations and
procedures for expeditiously rectifying such violations. The processing of
notices of non compliance from the Engineer’s Representative shall also be
included within the same system.
S. Radiation protection.
− The use of radioactive substances and irradiating apparatus shall comply with
the applicable laws. No operation involving ionizing radiation shall be carried
out without the approval of the Engineer’s Representative. The Contractor shall
ensure that site personnel and members of the public are not exposed to
radiation.
T. Health and safety publicity.
− The Contractor shall ensure that health and safety matters are given a high
degree of publicity on site. Posters and signs written in the languages
understood by the workers which draw attention to site safety, rescue, and
occupational health, shall be made or obtained from appropriate sources and
shall be displayed prominently in relevant areas of the site.
3.6 SAFETY MEETINGS
A. Contractor site safety meetings.
− The Contractor shall establish site safety meetings chaired by the Contractor’s
representative. Attendance shall include the Contractor’s safety manager and
appropriate senior construction personnel. Attendance shall also include senior
representatives of each of the currently active Subcontractors. These meetings
shall be held at least once each month and be scheduled to precede Engineer’s
safety management committee meeting. All such meetings and the agenda shall
be notified in advance to Engineer’s Representative who may attend in person
or send a representative at their discretion. Minutes of meetings shall be kept for
audit purposes and forwarded to Engineer for discussion.
B. Engineer's safety meetings.
− Engineer shall establish a safety management committee to formally review the

safety management performance of the Contractor and to monitor the
implementation and sufficiency of the safety plan. Engineer’s Representative,
or their nominee, shall act as chairman of this committee with members of
Engineer’s staff attending as appropriate. Mandatory attendance from the
Contractor shall include the Contractor’s Representative, the safety manager,
and key staff as appropriate. Representatives from third parties, including
statutory bodies, may be invited as necessary by Engineer. The committee shall
meet at least once per month. The Contractor shall act without delay upon such
decisions or recommendations as may be made by the committee on matters of

health and safety. The meeting may, from time to time at the discretion of
Engineer’s Representative, be held as a regional or central forum. In such a case
the same obligations will apply.
3.7 SAFETY RELATED DOCUMENTATION
A. All safety related documentation including, but not limited to, permits, certificates,
reports, and records shall be kept at the site office in a readily accessible location in an
auditable indexed system.
B. All safety records shall be kept in a properly indexed and readily accessible system.
C. Site safety diary.
− The safety manager will maintain a daily site safety diary. It shall
comprehensively record all matters pertaining to safety including, but not
limited to: records of inspections, audits, injuries, dangerous occurrences, and
safety violations. It shall be brought up to date by the end of each shift.
− The supporting safety staff shall maintain a daily site safety diary. This diary
shall comprehensively record all matters pertaining to safety including records
of inspections, audits, accidents, dangerous occurrences, safety violations and
rectification, notices of non compliance, stop orders, and other related matters.
D. Non-compliance notice system.
− The Contractor shall establish a system for the safety manager to issue non
compliance notices for safety violations and procedures for expeditiously
rectifying such violations.
E. Reporting adverse events.
− The Contractor shall notify the Engineer’s Representative immediately of any

dangerous occurrence or incident that results in, or had the potential to cause,
bodily injury or incapacity of any person for more than three days. This will
include, but not be limited to: the overturning, collapse, or failure of any lifting
equipment or structure. Initial notification may be verbal but shall, in every
event, be followed by a written initial report within 24 hours and a detailed
resolution report within five days. The Contractor shall at the same time,
provide the Engineer’s Representative with a copy of any statutory accident,
injury, or dangerous occurrence report that they submit to any statutory
authority.
F. Monthly safety report.
− The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive safety report to the Engineer’s

Representative each month in an agreed format. The report shall be submitted in
line with a timescale agreed with the Engineer’s Representative. Prior to
submission, the Contractor’s Representative shall endorse the report. The report
shall comprehensively address all relevant aspects of occupational health and
safety, and shall contain certain standard forms supplied by the Engineer’s

Representative for use in statistical analysis of the whole project. The report
should include a 90-day forward planning section in which construction issues
with a significant safety implication can be discussed.

STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 02584 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, duct banks, pull boxes and
handholes, manholes, and other underground utility structures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, backfill, and related items for ducts,
manholes, and handholes.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete requirements.
3. Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing of
manholes and handholes.
4. Division 7 Section "APP Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing" for
waterproofing of manholes and handholes.
5. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing of manholes and
handholes.
6. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
7. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for ground rods at manholes.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Underground Ducts for Electrical Utility Service: PVC encased in concrete.
B. Underground Ducts for Electrical Feeders: PVC encased in concrete.
C. Underground Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: PVC conduit [encased in concrete].
D. Underground Ducts for Telephone Utility Service: PVC utility duct encased in concrete.
E. Underground Ducts for Communication Circuits: PVC underground conduit encased in

concrete.
F. Manholes: Cast-in-place concrete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal accessories for manholes and handholes, conduits and ducts, duct-
bank materials, and miscellaneous components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and
underground structures. Include plans and sections drawn to scale.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 02584 - Page 1 of 6

S08035-SPC-EL-01 REV 1
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Record (as-Built) Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts,

handholes, and manholes.
A. Comply with specified Standards.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to
prevent bending, warping, and deforming.
B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and handholes with final arrangement
of other utilities as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes and handholes with
final profiles of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and underground
obstructions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) DUCTS
A. PVC Ducts for Outdoor Power and Lighting Cable Installations: Non-sparking type,
suitable for direct burial in ground, minimum tensile strength 500 kg/cm2, impact strength 5
kg/cm2, supplied in standard 6 m lengths, with one end of each length tapered.
1. Nominal Size: As shown on Drawings.

2. Minimum Wall Thickness: 3.2 mm for 100-mm ducts; 4.7 mm for 150-mm ducts.
B. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete
cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.
C. Duct Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to
cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 1 deg C. Capable of withstanding
temperature of 149 deg C without slump and of adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts,
metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets,
insulation materials, and common metals.

2.2 COVERS FOR MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A. Frames and Covers: BS 497, checkered cast iron or cast steel, recessed type, and of suitable
duty for the particular application. Machine cover-to-frame bearing surfaces
1. Covers: Cast-in legend "ELECTRIC" or "TELEPHONE" as appropriate..
2.3 COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Concrete: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete and
reinforcement.
B. Concrete Envelope: For duct banks for power distribution systems and outdoor lighting
cable installations crossing water, gas and sewage mains, under roadways and where
required or shown on the Drawings, is to be 21 MPa, 28-day, compressive-strength
reinforced concrete using sulfate-resisting Portland cement. Reinforcement is to consist of
12-mm diameter longitudinal bars at approximately 300-mm centers along bottom and sides
of duct bank with 10-mm diameter U-shaped transversal bars at 400-mm centers. Extend
concrete envelope at least 300 mm beyond each side of crossing, etc.
C. Cable Manholes and Handholes: 21 MPa, 28-day, compressive strength reinforced concrete
using sulfate-resisting Portland cement, with approved waterproof membrane on external
surfaces, and with cable supports where necessary, pull-eyes, and drain pit and drain pipe as
required. Dimensions and reinforcement are to be as shown on the Drawings or in
accordance with approved standard details shown on shop and construction drawings.
2.4 UNDERGROUND, PRECAST CONCRETE UTILITY STRUCTURES
A. Precast Units: Interlocking, mating sections, complete with accessory items, hardware, and
features as indicated. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for
ground rod.
B. Design structure according to details on Drawings.
C. Structural Design Loading: Light traffic.
D. Covers: Recess on cover accepts finish material in landscaped and paved areas.
E. Joint Sealant: Continuous extrusion of asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion,

flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures
at the installation location with the ground water level at grade.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing: Comply with Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing."
B. Waterproofing: Comply with Division 7 Section "APP Modified Bituminous Sheet

Waterproofing."
C. Dampproofing: Comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to receive ducts and utility structures for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of underground ducts and utility structures. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 2 Section "Earthwork" but do not use
heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
B. Trenches: Width is to be as small as practicable with sides vertical. Remove mud, rock
projections, boulders and hard spots from trench bottom and trim level. Inform the Engineer
in advance to give him reasonable opportunity to inspect trench for each section of the work.
C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades,
unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is
completed.
D. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.
Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding,
sprigging, and mulching. Perform according to Division 2 Section "Landscaping."
E. Restore Disturbed Pavement. Refer to Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
3.3 DIRECTLY BURIED PVC CABLE DUCTS
A. Lay and join ducts to required line and level on sand bed, cover with sand and backfill
trench to ground level with excavated soil, free from stones and other debris, well
compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick.
B. Lay approved concrete tiles to fully cover cable duct, extending minimum 50 mm beyond
sides of duct and placed 300 mm below ground level.
C. Provide warning tape or galvanized steel mesh along duct runs at a depth 200 mm below
ground level.
3.4 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT ASSEMBLIES
A. Install duct as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form duct assembly to required line and level, using duct supports spaced to prevent
sagging of ducts and breaking of couplings and watertight seals, and secured with cords (not
tie wires) where necessary.
C. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum of 1:300 (preferably 1% slope) to drain toward manholes and
handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs
between 2 manholes to drain in both directions.

D. Join ducts using waterproof cement, to manufacturer's recommendations, to give waterproof

and sand-proof joint with at least 80 mm overlap.
E. Provide 3 mm galvanized steel wire inside empty ducts, for future pulling of cables,
extending 1 m beyond duct banks at both ends and securely fixed to wooden bungs sealing
the duct.
F. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and
required duct spacing, and install according to the following:
1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and

deforming of ducts, and secure separators to the earth and to ducts to prevent floating
during concreting. Do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive
or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
2. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and
between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power-driven
agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. Pour each
run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.
When more than 1 pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and
install 19-mm reinforcing rod dowels extending 450 mm into the concrete on both
sides of joint near the corners of the envelope.
3. Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed-earth and where
indicated.
4. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where the
soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions;
otherwise, use forms.
5. Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 75 mm between ducts and exterior envelope
wall, 50 mm between ducts for like services, and 100 mm between power and signal
ducts.
G. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal
spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs.
3.5 ENDS OF DUCTS
A. Ducts ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be neatly cut and reamed and set behind
chamfered precast concrete duct end blocks or terminated with appropriate bell-mouth
bushing set in concrete wall. Ducts not ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be
properly capped.
B. Sealing Ends Of Ducts: Completely seal conduits and ducts, active or spare, at entry into
buildings or manholes, with approved plastic moulds or wooden bungs to prevent entry of
rodents, gas and vapor.
3.6 SLEEVES OR DUCTS IN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS
A. Provide sleeves or ducts in equipment foundations, whether or not shown on Drawings, in

accordance with approved shop and construction drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
Obtain approval of sleeve or duct installation prior to pouring concrete.

3.7 UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURE INSTALLATION
A. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.
B. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured at
least 3 days. Apply according to Division 7 Section <"Self-Adhering Sheet
Waterproofing."> <"APP Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing."> After ducts have
been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and
touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole and handhole chimneys after
brick mortar has cured at least 3 days.
C. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured at
least 3 days. Apply according to Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing." After
ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and
connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole and
handhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least 3 days.
D. Cast-in-Place, Underground Structure Installation: Comply with applicable requirements of

Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Finish interior surfaces with a smooth troweled finish.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection of Duct Systems: Inspect directly buried ducts and underground duct assemblies
in the presence of the Engineer, before backfilling or concreting. Steel mandrel or other
approved device, diameter equal to 90% of inside diameter of duct and 500 mm long, is to
be pulled through entire run of duct and is to pass through without getting stuck. Ducts,
which do not allow mandrel to be pulled through, are to be repaired or replaced to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of

installation of underground ducts and utility structures.
C. Correct installations where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and
replace defective products and retest.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean ducts with stiff bristle brush pulled through each duct prior to pulling in cables. Pull
brush through full length of ducts. Use round-bristle brush with a diameter 12 mm larger
than the ID of duct.
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Brick pavers set in aggregate setting bed (interlocking).

2. Rough-stone pavers set in mortar setting bed.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any,
under unit pavers.
2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete base course under unit
pavers and for cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraint for
unit pavers.
3. Division 9 Section "Stone Paving and Flooring" for dimension stone paving set in
mortar.
4. Division 7 Section "Composite Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing and
protection board under plaza deck pavers.
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
pavers with elastomeric sealants.
6. Division 9 Section "Brick Flooring" for brick flooring for interior applications where
chemical-resistant performance is not the primary requirement.
7. Division 9 Section "Chemical-Resistant Brick Flooring" for brick flooring set with
chemical-resistant materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Brick pavers.
2. Concrete pavers.
3. Asphalt pavers.
4. Stone pavers.
5. Bituminous setting materials.
6. Mortar and grout materials.
7. Edge restraints.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit
paver indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color
selection.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 - Page 1 of 14

S08035-SPC-LS-01 REV 1
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for
each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in
these characteristics.
1. Provide Samples with joints grouted and cured, showing the full range of colors to be
expected in the completed Work.
2. Include Samples of exposed edge restraints.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From latex-additive manufacturer indicating the
following:
1. Mortar and grout containing latex additives have been tested with pavers for
compatibility and adhesion.
2. Interpretation of test results relative to mortar and grout performance and written
recommendations for installation practices needed for adhesion.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from
one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to latex-additive

manufacturer, for testing indicated below, samples of paving materials that will contact or
affect mortar and grout that contain latex additives.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether mortar and grout
materials are required to obtain optimum adhesion with, and will be nonstaining to,
installed pavers and other materials constituting paver installation.
2. Submit a sufficient number of pavers and other materials involved in installation to
allow comprehensive testing.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain mortar and grout manufacturer's written instructions
for corrective measures, including the use of alternative materials to obtain optimum
bond and prevent staining.
D. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit
pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including
same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as
indicated:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or
contamination from earth and other materials.
1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust
marks from steel strapping.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do
not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.
D. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver
work damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply asphalt adhesive when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and
when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately
before application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture.
2. Install bituminous setting bed only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F
(4 deg C) and when base is dry.
C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when

atmospheric temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling. Heat materials to provide
mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Provide
the following protection for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation
when the mean daily air temperature is as indicated: below 40 deg F (4 deg C), cover
with weather-resistant membrane; below 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C), cover with
insulating blankets; below 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C), provide enclosure and
temporary heat to maintain temperature above 32 deg F (0 deg C).
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial

shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to
substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher.
a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 or 90 deg F (38 or 32 deg C) with a

wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), set pavers within 1 minute of
spreading setting-bed mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following or similar approved:
1. Brick Pavers:
a. Acme Brick Co.

b. Belden Brick Co.
c. Boral Bricks, Inc.
d. Canada Brick.
e. Endicott Clay Products Co.
f. General Shale Products Corp.
g. Glen-Gery Corporation.
h. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc.
i. I-XL Industries, Ltd.
j. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc.; Interstate Brick Div.
k. Pine Hall Brick Co.
l. Redland Brick Inc.; subsidiary of Belden Brick Co.
m. Richtex Corp.
n. Whitacre-Greer.
2. Concrete Pavers:
a. Licensee of Symrah Licensing Inc. that markets unit pavers in Project location.
b. Licensee of Uni-Group U.S.A. that markets unit pavers in Project location.
c. Capitol Ornamental Concrete Specialties, Inc.
d. Hanover Architectural Products, Inc.
e. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc.
f. Nicolock.
g. Oldcastle Architectural Products.
h. Sunny Brook Pressed Concrete Co.
i. Wassau Tile, Inc.; Terra-Paving Div.

3. Rough-Stone Pavers:
a. Buechel Stone Corp.

b. Cold Spring Granite Co.
c. New England Stone Industries, Inc.
d. North Carolina Granite Corp.
4. Plastic Edge Restraints:
a. Pave Tech Inc.

b. Ryerson: J. T. Ryerson & Son, Inc.
5. Steel Edge Restraints:
a. Border Concepts, Inc.

b. Ryerson: J. T. Ryerson & Son, Inc.
6. Aluminum Edge Restraints:
a. BrickStop Corporation.
b. Permaloc Corporation.
c. Sure-loc Aluminum Edging.
7. Precast Concrete Edge Restraints:
a. Hanover Architectural Products, Inc.
8. Latex-Portland Cement Mortars and Grouts:
a. American Olean Tile Co.

b. Boiardi Products Corp.
c. Bonsal: W. R. Bonsal Company.
d. Bostik.
e. C-Cure Corporation.
f. Custom Building Products.
g. Dal-Tile Corporation.
h. DAP Inc.
i. Laticrete International, Inc.
j. Mapei Corp.
k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
l. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
m. TEC Incorporated.
2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 UNIT PAVERS
A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX MX, Type I II III,
Application PS PX PA. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in
the completed Work.

B. Brick Pavers: Heavy vehicular paving brick; ASTM C 1272, Type F, Application PX
Type R, Application PS Type R, Application PX Type R, Application PA. Provide brick
without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.
1. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a

continuous film of a temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick,
mortar, and grout products and can be removed without damaging grout or brick. Do
not coat unexposed brick surfaces; handle brick to prevent coated surfaces from
contacting backs or edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does
contact bonding surfaces of brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before
setting brick.
C. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight
aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated.
D. Stone Pavers: as indicated on drawings, made from granite complying with ASTM C 615.
1. Granite Color and Grain: Mid gray, Light beige and light grey.
2. Size: Mid grey and Beige Granite Pavers; 20 by 500 by 500 mm, 15mm thick.
3. Size: Light Grey Granite pavers; 200 by 200mm, 30mmthick.
E. Asphalt-Block Pavers: Manufacturer's standard solid units consisting of coarse aggregate,

inorganic dust as filler, and asphalt cement; in sizes and shapes indicated.
1. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard, unweathered stone crushed into angular particles
varying in size up to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2. Filler: Dust produced from limestone or other material as standard with
manufacturer.
3. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 312, Type III.
4. Dimensional Tolerances: Manufacture unit to standard dimensions indicated with
deviations in any dimension not exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
5. Finish: Natural smooth finish.
6. Finish: Ground finish.
7. Finish: Ground and sandblasted finish.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Plastic Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard triangular PVC extrusions designed to

serve as edge restraints for unit pavers; rigid type for straight edges and flexible type for
curved edges, with pipe connectors and 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) diameter by 12-inch- (300-mm-)
long steel spikes. Size of edging is as follows:
1. 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) high by 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide.
2. 3-1/8 inches (79 mm) high by 9-1/2 inches (241 mm) wide.
B. Steel Edge Restraints: Painted commercial steel edging with loops pressed from or welded
to face to receive stakes at 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches (380 mm)
long for each loop. Size of edging is as follows:
1. 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) high.

2. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 5 inches (125 mm) high.

C. Aluminum Edge Restraints: Extruded-aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to
receive stakes at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., and aluminum stakes 12 inches (300 mm) long
for each loop. Type and size of edging is as follows:
1. Straight, 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) high.
2. L-shaped, 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high.
D. Precast Concrete Edge Restraints: Precast concrete curbing, made from normal-weight
aggregate, in shapes and sizes indicated.
E. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with
minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).
F. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
G. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
2.5 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57.
B. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: ASTM D 2940, subbase material.
C. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448
for Size No. 8.
D. Graded Aggregate for Base: ASTM D 2940, base material.
E. Geotextile: Woven or nonwoven geotextile manufactured from polyester or polypropylene

fibers, with a permeability rating 10 times greater than that of soil on which paving is
founded and an apparent opening size small enough to prevent passage of fines from
leveling course into graded aggregate of base course below.
F. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying
with gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
G. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10.
H. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent
passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm)
sieve.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
2.6 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit paver
manufacturer.
B. Fine Aggregate for Setting Bed: ASTM D 1073, No. 2 or No. 3.

C. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 946, for penetrating graded materials; Grade 60-70 (mixing
temperature 145 deg C – 165 deg C).
D. Neoprene-Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Paving manufacturer's standard adhesive consisting

of oxidized asphalt combined with 2 percent neoprene and 10 percent long-fibered mineral
fibers containing no asbestos.
E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent
passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm)
sieve.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
2.7 PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144.
D. Latex Additive: Styrene-butadiene-rubber or acrylic-resin water emulsion serving as

replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by
manufacturer for use with job-mixed portland cement and aggregate, and not containing a
retarder.
E. Water: Potable.
2.8 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, composition as follows:
1. Packaged, dry grout mix consisting of portland cement, graded aggregate, and
ethylene vinyl acetate in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is
added at Project site.
2. Dry grout mixture indicated below combined at Project site with styrene-butadiene-
rubber or acrylic-resin water emulsion serving as replacement for part or all of gaging
water.
a. Dry Grout Mixture: Factory-mixed, sanded grout complying with ANSI

A118.6 and recommended by latex-additive manufacturer; in color indicated.
Use latex additive without retarder with dry-set grout.
b. Dry Grout Mixture: Factory-mixed or job-mixed sanded grout consisting of
the following:
1) Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, of natural color or white

as required to produce color indicated.
2) Aggregate: ASTM C 144, graded to comply with latex-additive
manufacturer's requirements.
a) White Aggregate: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

b) Colored Aggregate: Ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone; selected to produce required grout color.

3) Colored Mortar Pigments for Grout: Natural and synthetic iron and
chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar and grout mixes. Use
only pigments that have proved through testing and experience to be
satisfactory for use in portland cement grout.
B. Water: Potable.
2.9 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MIX
A. Mix bituminous setting-bed materials at an asphalt plant in approximate proportion, by

weight, of 7 percent asphalt cement to 93 percent fine aggregate, unless otherwise indicated.
Heat mixture to 300 deg F (149 deg C).
2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for
mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and
other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and
with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout when they have
reached their initial set.
B. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix bond coat to a consistency similar to that of thick cream and
consisting of either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for
part or all of water per directions of latex-additive manufacturer.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270,

Proportion Specification.
D. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with directions of latex-additive
manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is
ready to receive pavers.
E. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with directions of latex-additive
manufacturer.
F. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Grout: Add latex additive to dry grout mix in proportion
and concentration recommended by latex-additive manufacturer. Proportion cement and
aggregate to comply with directions of latex-additive manufacturer.
1. Job-Mixed, Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients
to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 to 10, by
weight.
2. Job-Mixed, Colored-Aggregate Grout: Produce color required by combining colored
aggregates with portland cement of selected color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing

installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving
operations. Examine areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed
against vertical surfaces and horizontal waterproofing. Proceed with installation only
after protection is in place.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances, from concrete substrates, that could impair mortar bond, including
curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring
additional compaction. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades
have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might
be visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of
colors and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D. Joint Pattern: As indicated.
E. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over
waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured
or otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced and
arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving.
1. Provide joint filler, where indicated, at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical

surfaces; or, if not indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until paver
installation is complete.
F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage)
nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of
paving.

G. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage)
nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from
level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide joint filler as backing for sealant-filled joints where indicated. Install
joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated.
Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
J. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install

stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver
installation.
2. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 1 inch (25 mm)
below top edge.
3. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
4. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before
placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep
angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
5. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow concrete to cure
before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Hold top of concrete
below aggregate setting bed.
K. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent
pavers.
1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers
set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing
aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so
it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density.
B. Place geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300
mm).
C. Place aggregate subbase and base in thickness indicated. Compact by tamping with plate
vibrator and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers.
D. Place aggregate subbase and base over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness
indicated. Compact subbase and base to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum
laboratory density and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers.
E. Place geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches
(300 mm).

F. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking
care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers
are set and compacted.
G. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
H. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3
mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers
hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between
units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with
spacer bars on sides of each unit.
I. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes
across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions:
1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is
exposed to rain.
2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36
inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic
sheets overlapped 48 inches (1200 mm) on each side of the laying face to protect it
from rain.
J. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course.
Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand.
Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
K. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
L. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.
3.5 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed.
B. Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) deep control bars
approximately 11 feet (3.3 m) apart and parallel to one another, to serve as guides for
striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades required for accurate setting of paving units to
finished grades indicated.
C. Place bituminous setting bed where indicated, in panels, by spreading bituminous material
between control bars. Strike setting bed smooth, firm, even, and not less than 3/4 inch (19
mm) thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each pass of striking
board. After each panel is completed, advance first control bar to next position in readiness
for striking adjacent panels. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth-
control bars.
1. Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch (19 mm) while still
hot. Adjust thickness as necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished
grades indicated.

2. Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or

troweling. If troweled on, use trowel with serrations not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6
mm). Proceed with setting of paving units only after adhesive is dry to the touch.
D. Place pavers carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and
uniform top surface. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can
stand. Advance protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas
subject to continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or
disrupting alignment of pavers. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before
treating joints, roll paving with power roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface
from several days of hot weather.
E. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints with sand by sweeping
over paved surface until joints are filled.
F. Joint Treatment: Place brick pavers with spaced joints of 3/8-inch (10-mm) width. Fill
joints solid with grout, free of voids and pits. Tool joints as indicated. Clean excess grout
from face of paving units as work progresses. Cure joints to comply with grout
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.
Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply cement-paste bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before
placing setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting
bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) thickness for bond coat.
C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat immediately after applying bond coat. Spread and screed
setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of
pavers to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial
set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial
set before placing pavers.
E. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30
g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they
are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on
setting bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of
each paver with a flat trowel.
G. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single
operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb pavers for
purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
H. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 3/8 inch (10 mm) nominal joint width with variations not
exceeding plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

I. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, taking
care not to smear grout on adjoining pavers and other surfaces. After initial set of grout,
finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free from drying cracks.
J. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days, unless otherwise
recommended by latex-additive manufacturer.
3.7 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and
with no evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with mortar or
grout. Point up joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly
prepared for sealant application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
1. Remove protective coating as recommended by protective coating manufacturer and

acceptable to unit paver and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent
it from clogging drains.

SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers and devices, specialties, controls, and
wiring for the irrigation system.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthworks" for excavating, trenching and backfilling.
2. Division 2 Section 02510 “Water Distribution” for butterfly valves and valve
chambers and related accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Irrigation System: Exterior water piping for irrigation piping.
B. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain
valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.
C. Pressure Piping: Downstream from point of connection to irrigation system control

valves.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for materials:
1. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

2. DI: Ductile iron.
3. HDPE : High Density Poly Ethylene.
4. LDPE: Low Density Poly Ethylene.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Water Coverage: 100 percent of planting areas.
B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor

adjustments, acceptable to the Engineer, necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions
such as signs and light standards.
C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for
piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Main Pressure Piping: 10 bars

2. Circuit Piping: 6 bars.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 1 of 19

S08035-SPC-ENV-01 REV B
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include pressure rating, rated capacity, settings, and electrical data of
selected models for the following:
1. Water regulators.
2. Valves. Include underground; general-duty, manual control, and quick-coupler types.
3. Valve boxes.
4. Site control including remote control pressure reducing valves-RCPRV, controllers,
drip emitters, drip lines, bubbler assemblies, weather stations, sprayers and sprinklers
B. Shop Drawings: Show combined irrigation system, including plan layout and
locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of piping components.
Include valves, piping, irrigators, accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas of
sprinkler spray and overspray.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show piping and major system components. Indicate

interface and spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent
utilities, and proximate structures.
D. Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section
“Closeout Procedures”, and “Operation and Maintenance Data”, include the
following:
1. Automatic, pressure-reducing control valves.

2. Irrigators.
3. Specialties.
4. Controllers.
5. Site control
6. Valves
F. As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit record drawings of installed pipe

work and products, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
G. Certificate of Compliance
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

irrigation system components and are based on specific types and models selected.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water and authorities having

jurisdiction for preventing backflow and back siphonage.
2. Comply with ASTM F 645, "Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation
of Thermoplastic Water Pressure Piping Systems."
C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
D. Special Tests: Whenever required by the Engineer, supply and transport to a testing
laboratory samples of materials selected by the Engineer. Number of samples is not to
be more than 0.5% of total supplied, with at least one from each class, diameter and
manufacturer. Failure of any sample is to be followed by a second and if necessary a
third test from the same batch. A third test failure will result in all material from that
manufacturer being rejected and replaced by material from a different manufacturer,
subject to approval and satisfactory tests. Provide laboratory test report in an
approved form.
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then, reinstall for
storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient
dew-point temperature. Support off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures
when outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting
or rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,
debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
H. Manufacturer’s recommendations on handling, repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring,

cutting and other works for pipes and fittings are to be strictly followed.
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility
locations.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt or interfere with utilities serving facilities on the
Project site or on adjoining property unless permitted by the Engineer under the
following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated or directed:

1. Notify the Engineer not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Engineer's written permission.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate landscape irrigation system installations with Landscaping work, "Lawns

and Grasses", "Trees and Shrubs" and "Ground Cover and Plants."
B. Coordinate irrigation piping installations with work of other utilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" and "Valve Applications" articles for

application of pipe and tube materials, joining methods, and valve applications.
B. Marking: Unless otherwise specified in the relevant Standards products are to have
legibly cast, stamped or indelibly painted on, the following marks, as appropriate:
1. Manufacturer’s name, initials and identification mark,

2. Nominal diameter,
3. Class designation,
4. Initials and number of relevant standard,
5. Length of pipe if shorter that standard length,
6. Angle of bends in degrees,
7. Date of manufacture.
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Ductile Iron: Pipes and Fittings:
1. Ductile iron pipe for water shall be to BS EN 545 or equivalent. Unless otherwise
indicated in the Bill of Quantities or the Drawings, Class K9 shall be used.
2. Spigot and socket ended pipes shall be used for straight runs and adjacent to elbows
or fittings. These joints shall be provided with rubber gaskets, and an external
thrust block is required at elbows or fittings. Anchored or self restrained joints shall
be used for sections adjacent to elbows in areas where space is restricted or indicated
on the Drawings or BOQ. Anchored joints are to be push-in, self anchored type able
to take up the axial forces thus allowing concrete thrust blocks to be dispensed with.
The Contractor shall submit calculations verifying the number of restrained joints
required noting that pipe pressure testing will be made when pipes are partially
backfilled.
3. Flanged pipes wherever specified shall have screwed-on or cast-on flanges to sustain
working pressure of NP 16 minimum.
4. Flanges shall conform to BS EN 1092, Part 2.
5. Factory protection for pipes:
- Pipes shall be internally cement lined to BS EN 545 with ordinary Portland

cement to BS EN 197-1 to specified thicknesses

- Externally, pipe shall be coated with metallic zinc to BS EN 545 and followed
by a bitumen coat to BS 3416 of minimum thickness 120 microns. A hot
applied coal tar based material to BS 4164 may replace the bitumen coat.
6. Factory protection for fittings:
- Fittings shall be coated internally and externally by dipping, or other method,

using hot applied coal tar based material to BS 4164 or hot applied bitumen to
BS 4147, Type 1, grade d, minimum thickness 200 microns.
B. HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS
1. PIPE, Pressure Pipe: DIN 8074 and DIN 8075, Class 10 or 16 kg/cm2 (as applicable)
or BS 3284 with straight ends for butt welding.
2. FITTINGS for PE Pipe: to be moulded and suitable for class of pipe. IN-line fittings
including couplings, unions, bushing and nipples may be extruded or machined from
extruded stock.
3. JOINTS: for fittings are to be socket or insert fused.
4. TESTS ON PE COMPUNDS: PE compounds are to be tested and certified suitable

for potable water by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Testing Laboratory –
USA or the Canadian Standard Association (CSA) Testing Laboratory. Or other
accredited testing agency. Tests are to be made in accordance with requirements no
less restrictive than those in NSF 14, Sections 3 and 4. The seal and mark of the
testing laboratory are to be included on pipes and fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods" for
commonly used joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings:
1. Underground Piping, DN 40 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size

as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be
joined.
2. Underground Piping, DN 50 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling
same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to
be joined.
3. Aboveground Piping: Pipe fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to
and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
C. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material of gaskets to be as
recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Bolts, nuts
and washer to be stainless steel grade 316.
D. Pipes utilities inside culverts should be joined using SADIP anchored standard/triduct
joints or approved equal as specified by the manufacturer.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or

plain end types; and matching piping system materials.
1. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 10 bars

minimum working pressure at 82 deg. C (180 deg. F). Include insulating material
that isolates dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to
ASME B1.20.1.
2. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 1035 or 10
bar minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-
face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or
polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 10 bar
minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.
4. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings with inert and noncorrosive
thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 10 bar minimum working pressure at
107 deg C.
5. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive
thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and
10 bar minimum working pressure at 107 deg. C (225 deg. F).
2.5 VALVES AND VALVE SPECIALTIES
A. Non-rising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: BS 5163, or

AWWA C509, ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate,
resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
a. Minimum Working Pressure: 16bars.

b. End Connections: Flanged, push-on or mechanical joint.
c. Interior and exterior Coating: To be 300 microns fusion bonded epoxy coating.
B. Cast-Iron Gate Valves: AWWA C500, cast-iron double disc, bronze disc, and seat
rings or AWWA C509, resilient seated; bronze stem, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body
and bonnet, stem nut, 16 bar working pressure; and ends that fit HDPE pipe flanged
push-on or mechanical joint. Include elastomeric gaskets.
C. Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, solid wedge; nonrising
stem and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim; Class 125, ASTM A 126, cast-iron
body; and handwheel. Interior and Exterior coating to be 300 microns fusion bonded
epoxy coating.
D. Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, solid wedge; rising stem
and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim; Class 125, ASTM A 126, cast-iron body;
and handwheel.
E. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: Comply with MSS SP-60. Include sleeve and valve
compatible with drilling machine.
1. Tapping Sleeve: Ductile-iron or stainless steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with flanged
outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe
material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.
2. Valve: AWWA, ductile-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one
raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
F. Electric Remote Control Valves with Pressure Regulation: Heavy-duty, glass-filled, UV-
resistant, nylon body and bonnet with stainless steel studs and flange nuts, and a nylon
reinforced rubber diaphragm. Normally closed, and operated by 24 V, ac solenoid actuated
globe pattern with balanced pressure diaphragm design. Remote Control Valves shall have a
self cleaning scrubber and screen. The Solenoid shall generally be from Rainbird, Hunter,
Toro companies, or approved equal
1. Operating Pressure Range: Between 1.5 and 14 bars.

2. Outlet Pressure Regulating Capability: Between 1 and 7 bars.
G. Automatic Drain Valves: Spring-loaded, ball valve of corrosion-resistant

construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 10 bar.
H. Quick-Couplers: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include

coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted,
rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden
hose on outlet; and operating key.
1. Locking Top Option: Include vandal-resistant, locking feature with two matching
keys.
I. Curb-Stop Service Boxes: Cast iron with telescoping top section of length required
for depth of bury of valve, cover with lettering "IRRIGATION," bottom section with
base of size to fit over curb stop, and 75- mm diameter barrel. Include steel tee-
handle shutoff rod with one pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and
slotted end fitting curb-stop head.
J. Valve Boxes for gate valves: Cast iron with top section and cover with lettering
"IRRIGATION," bottom section with base to fit over valve, 127 mm diameter barrel,
and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.
Include steel tee-handle, shutoff rod with one pointed end, stem of length to operate
valve, and end fitting valve operating nut.
K. Control-Valve Boxes: PE, ABS, fiberglass, polymer concrete, or precast concrete

box and cover, with open bottom, openings for piping, and designed for installing
flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service.
1. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 75 mm maximum

to 19 mm minimum.
L. Butterfly Valves: Cast Iron
1. Type: To BS EN 593 [27], double flange with resilient seating, for horizontal use and
suitable for NP 16.
2. Size: For 350 mm and larger.
3. Material of component parts shall be from basic materials listed in BS EN 593 [27]
Table 3.
4. End Connections: Flanged to BS 4504: PT3 [2].
5. Operation by hand wheel. Maximum shut off pressure against which valve is
operated is to be 15 kg/cm2.
6. Factory Protection: Casting surfaces are to be given an initial coat of protective paint
immediately after shot blasting and a second coat on assembly. Protective coating is
to be hot applied coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164 [5], or BS 3416 [4] respectively.
Thickness of coat shall be 250 microns.
M. Flap Valves
1. Type: To be flange mounted, designed for use on end closures to prevent entrance of
backwater. Seating plane is to have 10 deg. inclination.
2. Materials: Cast iron body and cover, bronze seat faces, bronze hinge pins and spring
pins, cast iron follow ring and plated steel ring draw bolts. Materials subject to de-
zincification or de-aluminuzation are not to be used.
3. End Connections: If flange mounted, flanges are to be to BS 4504.
4. Factory Protection: Casting surfaces are to be given an initial coat of protective paint
immediately after shot blasting and a second coat on assembly. Protective coating is
to be hot applied coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164 or BS 3416 respectively. Thickness
of coat shall be at least 250 microns.
2.6 IRRIGATORS
A. Description: Manufacturer's standard sprinklers designed for uniform coverage over

entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure.
B. Components: Brass or plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts.
C. Irrigators shall generally be from Rainbird, Hunter, Toro companies, or approved

equal
D. Root area watering system with associated bubblers
1. Type: Subsurface Root Area Watering System with associated pressure compensating
bubblers.
2. Construction: it shall consist of a perforated polyethylene cylinder with approximate

length of 36 inch (91 cm). The rigid mesh material shall help support the horizontal
movement of water into the root zone and adjacent soil. The cylinder shall support
gravel fill to provide better top-to-bottom water dispersion and firmness against root
compression. The factory-assembled Root Area Watering System shall come
configured with swing assemblies and/or spiral barbed fittings. The Root Area
Watering System shall be installed at finish grade level and shall support an extra-
wide molded collar to provide convenient access to the bubbler and drip line fastener.
It shall support a locking grate cover to help deter vandalism.
3. Performance: bubbler to operate at constant flow discharge over a pressure range

specified on the Drawings.
E. Emitters
1. Type: pressure compensating, single outlet.
2. Construction: emitter shall have self piercing inlet barb constructed of durable ultra-
violet resistant plastic.
3. Performance: the emitter shall have a self flushing action to minimize clogging, and
shall operate at a constant flow discharge over a pressure range specified on the
Drawings.

4. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Pop-Up Spray Sprinkler
1. Type: fixed, non-rotating spray or stream spray adaptable for full circle, part circle, or
strip wetting pattern, suitable for installation on a pop-up mechanism. Spray head to
have built in check valve and pressure regulated stem.
2. Material: the sprinkler body, stem, nozzle, and screen shall be constructed of heavy
duty, ultra-violet resistant plastic, with a heavy-duty stainless steel retract spring.
3. Construction: spray head to retract flush with the finished ground level when not in
operation. When spraying, net pop-up height to be 150 mm from finished ground
level.
4. Performance: to meet requirements of discharge and spray radius as specified on the

Drawings for the given nozzle pressure. The sprinkler shall have a matched
precipitation rate nozzle with an adjusting screw capable of regulating the radius of
flow.
5. Tests: provide test results carried out at factory substantiating required performance
(discharge and radius of throw at prescribed operating pressure and height above
ground) and giving actual precipitation rate and its uniformity as obtained for
uniformity test carried out using catch cans.
G. Pop-Up Rotor Sprinkler
1. Type: full or part circle pop-up rotor sprinkler, single nozzle. The part circle sprinkler
shall have adjustable arc coverage from 25° to 360°. The sprinkler shall have a built
in check valve and pressure regulated stem.
2. Material: the sprinkler body, stem, nozzle, and screen shall be constructed of heavy
duty, ultra-violet resistant plastic, with a heavy duty stainless steel retract spring.
3. Construction: sprinkler head to retract flush with the finished ground level when not
in operation. When operating, net pop-up height to be 100 mm from finished ground
level.
4. Performance: to meet requirements of discharge, radius and rotation angle as

specified on the Drawings for the given nozzle pressure. The sprinkler shall have a
matched precipitation rate nozzle, with an adjusting screw capable of regulating the
radius and the flow.
5. Tests: provide test results carried out at factory substantiating required performance
(discharge and radius of throw at prescribed operating pressure and height above
ground) and giving actual precipitation rate and its uniformity as obtained for
uniformity test carried out using catch cans.
2.7 SPECIALTIES
A. Single and Multiple-Outlet Emitters: Plastic body, with pressure compensation

feature.
B. Drip Tubes: DN15 to DN25 flexible PE or PVC for emitters and other devices, of
length indicated, and with plugged end.
2.8 CHECK VALVES
A. Check Valves:
1. Check Valves: AWWA C508, swing-check type with 16 bar working-pressure rating
and resilient seat. Include interior and exterior protection to be 300 microns fusion
bonded epoxy coating" and ends to match piping.
2.9 RELIEF VALVES
A. Air-Release Valves: AWWA C512, hydromechanical device to automatically release

accumulated air. Include 16 bar working-pressure design.
B. Air/Vacuum Valves: AWWA C512, direct-acting, float-operated, hydromechanical

device with large orifice to automatically release accumulated air or to admit air
during filling of piping. Include 16 bar working-pressure design.
C. Combination Air Valves: AWWA C512, float-operated, hydromechanical device to

automatically release accumulated air or to admit air. Include 16 bar working-
pressure design.
D. Interior and Exterior coating to be 300 microns (minimum) fusion bonded epoxy.
2.10 Ball Valves
A. 50 mm and under to be full port of 2-piece construction, lever operated with bronze
body and stem, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable PTFE seats and packing, plastic
coated steel handle, threaded end connection for stell piping, and copper compression
or solder end connections for copper piping.
2.11 SPECIALTIES
A. Single and Multiple-Outlet Emitters: Plastic body, with pressure compensation

feature.
B. Drip Tubes: DN13 to DN18 flexible PE for emitters and other devices, of length
indicated, and with plugged end.
2.12 CONTROL SYSTEM
2.12.1 Individual Programme Controllers for Streetscape
A. TYPE: solid state or hybrid (combining electro-mechanical and micro-electronic circuiting),

capable of fully automatic or manual operation of the remote solenoid valves, with dual
programmed, independent station timing, 14-day calendar dial for every day or every other
day or any sequence starts, time-setting control up to 60 minutes per station in 2 minutes
increments 23 starts per day. Number of stations to be as indicated. Maximum number of
24 VAC solenoid valves that can be controlled by a station is 4. Controller is to allow for
valve power output to be interrupted without affecting the controller timers.

B. OPERATION: the controller shall have a remote pump start circuit to activate a remote
pump start relay to run the pump during the irrigation cycle.
C. OPERATION: the controller shall allow for opening the first remote control valve before
operating the pump and also for closing the last remote control valve within 15 seconds after
stopping the pump.
D. INSTALLATION: controller to be installed in pedestal weatherproof, heavy-duty, locking,

steel cabinet adequately protected. Pedestal mount is to include terminal strips for the quick
connection of cables.
E. ELECTRICAL FEATURES: to accept 220 V 50/60 cycle current; to command 24 VAC

solenoid valves; to include output surge protection to protect controller from power surges; to
include one arrestor for each valve wire and one for the common or ground wire; to include a
master on-off switch.
F. THE CONTROLLER without exception shall be of the same manufacturer as the remote
control valve.
2.12.2 Central Control for Street Scape
2.12.2.1 Main Control System
The system shall be Rainbird, Hunter, Toro or approved equal.
The computerized central control system shall be capable of controlling a single site with up
to at least 8 locations, upgradable to 16. The control shall include a computer system, as
hereinafter specified. The control equipment shall include Two-wire decoder interface,
decoders, solenoids, isolation valves and flow sensors. The decoder interface shall be
upgradable from 1 wire group to 4 wire groups with the purchase of an “additional wire path”
software module.
Software Specifications
The Site Control software shall operate in the Microsoft® Windows® operating system
environment and shall be capable of operating the "hard-wired" Two-wire interface units. The
control system shall provide continuous "on-line", two-way communication between the
central computers, the interface unit providing "true" central control.
Continuous field unit "feedback" status information shall register at the computer and also at
the decoder interface unit (TWI).
Site Control system shall be capable of operating 50 programs residing in the system at any
one time. The system shall provide up to 6 “start times” per individual schedule and up to 6
“start times” per individual program.
The weather station shall provide automatic response or alarm to the PC. Water Budget
function shall adjust watering time from 0 to 200% in 1% increments. Automatic Rain
Shutdown shall function with the integration of a Rain Sensor. “Dry run” feature shall provide
data for testing and adjustments. Built-in rotor and spray head database shall provide custom
irrigation programs and automatically calculate precipitation rates for each sprinkler model.
Software to allow wireless access via a wireless phone or handheld is required. (Software
shall come pre-installed on a computer)
Software Module Options
The software shall have the following options:

• Connection to weather station
• Automatic ET
• Smart Sensors
• Map Utilities
TWI Hardware specifications
The Two-Wire Interface (TWI) shall serve as an interface between the central controller and
the Two-Wire Decoder interfacce on the Site Control System.
Features
• TWI operates up to 500 decoder and up to 1000 solenoids, pulse decoders or sensor
decoders per wire group.
• UL-Listed
• Wall Mount: drawn steel, seamless, cabinet with hinged front panel
• Computer data path: hardwire
• Satellite data path: hardwire/2-wire path
Electrical Specifications
As per manufacturer recommendations
Grounding – Surge protection for each wire path.
2.13 FLOW MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The system shall have flow meters on the main line connected by sensors to the main control
system. The main isolation gate valves shall be replaced by isolation valves that are
electrically operated. They are to be connected also to the main control system. The system
shall be capable of sensing an excessive flow in the system and shall shut down the section
that has breakage.
2.14 WEATHER STATION
Weather station is to have the following features
Superior ET Model –weather sensor input to determine evapotranspiration (ET) rates based
upon a field-proven proprietary equation for ET.
Automatic ET Download/Selective Usage – Automatically download weather data daily and

calculate ET to determine irrigation times for the entire system or specific areas, holes or
stations.
ET Override – Allows you to easily set certain programs to ignore ET values when
determining run times.
Rain Bucket – Allows rainfall from one day to be carried over to the following day(s) for
more accurate ET calculations.

Max Rain Fall – User-defined Max Rain Fall can be set to limit the amount of acceptable
rainfall for clay soil types or other areas that are subject to high runoff.
Weather Data Reports – Generate reports to show current or past weather conditions by the
hour, day, week, month or year.
Unlimited Data Storage – Store unlimited weather data at the central control.
Metric Measurement Units –Metric units of measure.
The Weather Station should be capable of working with the central control system, generating
alarms that exceed user-defined thresholds in user-defined time periods for:
• Rain
• High or Low Ambient Temperatures
• High Winds
• Rainfall Intensity
The system will reset alarms automatically when temperature, rain or wind conditions are
again within acceptable ranges for irrigation.
• Automatic Shut Off/Turn On – the Control Systems shall automatically shut OFF irrigation
to the entire system or to specific areas only, when alarm conditions are detected at the
weather station. They also automatically turn ON irrigation when weather conditions return to
the acceptable range for irrigation.
• Automatic Pause/Resume – the Central Control Systems automatically suspend irrigation to

the entire system or specific areas only when alarm conditions are detected by the weather
station. They also automatically resume irrigation when weather conditions return to the
acceptable range for irrigation.
• Automatic Notification – The Weather Station can automatically notify via paging, text
messaging or e-mail when alarm conditions exist.
2.15 IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for plastic underground warning-tape materials.
1. Solid blue film with metallic core and continuously printed black-letter caption,
"CAUTION--WATER LINE BURIED BELOW."
2.16 ITEMS RELATED TO IRRIGATION RESERVOIR
A. GALVANIZED STEEL STEPS: to comply with the latest edition of BS 970.
B. LADDERS : to be fabricated in GRP as shown on the Drawings.GRP ladders shall be

obtained from an approved experienced manufacturer, fabricated to an approved
pattern and purpose made to suit the depth of each installation as shown on the
drawings. The ladders shall be drilled for wall fixing at both ends and additional
intermediate fixing connections shall be provided at centers not greater than 1.5
meters. Rungs shall be at 300 mm centers and at a distance of not less than 150 mm
from the wall. The resins, glasses and synthetic fabrics used in the manufacture of the
ladders shall be chosen to produce a chemically resistant product with a resin-rich
surface layer suitable for use in aggressive atmospheres likely to the encountered in
sewers and sewage pumping stations. Rungs of tubular construction shall be no less
than 30 mm outer diameter and stringers shall be of a rectangular or channel section,
no less than 70 mm x 25 mm in size. The upper face of non-tubular rungs shall be
finished with a non-slip surface such as silica sand. All remaining surfaces shall be
free of sharp edges, protrusions etc. Each rung shall be able to withstand a point load
of 5000 N. When supported horizontally over a span of 1 m with the climbing face
uppermost and with a load of 1000 N applied at the centre of the span the ladder shall
not deflect more than 15 mm at the point of application of the load and shall show no
permanent deflection after removal of the load. Each ladder fixing shall be capable of
withstanding shear and pull-out loads of 5000 N. All ladders shall comply with BS
5395: Part 3. All fixings shall be stainless steel. When the height of the ladder
exceeds 6m, safety cages shall be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Installation and testing shall be according to NFPA 14 and 24 and according to the
articles of this part. In case of contradiction, the most stringent standard shall apply.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system components. Obtain the
Engineer's approval before excavation.
3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 300 mm below finished grades,
except 150 mm below subgrade under pavement and slabs.
C. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and the
like.
D. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated or required. Backfill with cleaned gravel
or crushed stone, graded from 75 to 19 mm minimum, to 300 mm below grade.
Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill
remainder with excavated material.
E. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:
1. Pressure Piping: Minimum of 1200 mm below finished unless otherwise indicated.

2. Circuit Piping: 300 mm.
3. Drain Piping: 300 mm.
4. Sleeves: 600 mm.
3.4 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead of
joints indicated.
C. Underground, Pressure Piping: Use the following:
1. DN 65 and Smaller: PE controlled ID pipe, PE threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

2. DN 250 and Larger: DI to BS EN 545 to withstand at least 16 bars pressure-rated
pipe, with flexible tensile resistant rubber seal lock joint.
D. Circuit Piping: Use the following:
1. DN65 and Smaller: PE to BS 6437 Class C or DIN 8074 and DIN 8075 Class 10 or 6
bars pipe (as applicable), PE socket or butt-fusion fittings, and heat-fusion joints.
E. Risers to Aboveground Specialties: DIN 8074/8075 Class 10 kg/cm² HDPE pipe.

Straight with straight ends suitable for heat fusion. HDPE socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
F. Sleeves: DIN 8074/8075 Class 6 kg/cm² HDPE pipe. Straight with straight ends
suitable for heat fusion. HDPE socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, Shutoff-Duty Valves: Use the following:
1. DN50 and Smaller: Bronze ball valve.

2. DN65 and Larger: Cast-iron, nonrising-stem gate valve.
B. Underground, Shutoff-Duty Valves: Use the following:
1. DN80 and Larger: Gate valve, with elastomeric gaskets and stem nut, valve box, and
shutoff rod.
C. Underground, Manual Control Valves: Bronze globe valve with control-valve service
box and valve key.
D. Control Valves: Use the following:
1. DN50 and Smaller: Bronze ball valve.

2. DN65 and DN80: Cast-iron, nonrising-stem gate valve.
3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for pipe
joint construction requirements.
B. HDPE Piping Gasketed Joints: Construct underground joints between cast-iron

valves and HDPE pipe with elastomeric seals that fit pipe and valve ends. Use
lubricant according to ASTM D 3139.

C. Dissimilar Piping Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings that
are compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working
pressure.
D. DI piping, as recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Follow the manufacturer's instructions regarding placement of bedding and

backfilling, cleanliness of joint surfaces, lubricant used, correct location of
components, provision of correct gaps between end of spigot and back of socket,
maximum permissible deflection of joints for detachable couplings and flexible joints,
provision of flexible joints for connections to pipes built into structures.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping

systems, which were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations are approved on the
Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at uniform slope of 0.5 percent minimum, wherever possible.
D. Install piping free of sags and bends.
E. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G. Install unions adjacent to valves and final connections to other components with
DN50 or smaller pipe connection.
H. Install flanges adjacent to valves and final connections to other components with
DN65 or larger pipe connection.
I. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774 and

ASTM F 690.
J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.
K. Install HDPE piping in dry weather when temperature is above 4.4 deg. C (40 deg. F).
Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 4.4 deg. C (40 deg. F)
before testing, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
3.8 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant
branches.
B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces

of installed ferrous anchorage devices.
3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Underground Gate Valves: Install valve with stem pointing up in a valve box with
top flush with grade, comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.
1. Install valves and HDPE pipe with restrained, gasketed joints.
B. Drain Valves: Install in a control-valve box.
3.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install controllers according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as

indicated.
B. Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases not less than 914 by 610 by
100 mm thick, and not less than 150 mm greater in each direction than overall
dimensions of controller.
C. Install control wiring in same trench with piping. Install wiring with loops at control
valves and controllers, at intervals not greater than 30 m, and changes in direction to
allow for expansion. Bundle wiring in same trench at 3 m intervals.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect piping to valves, sprinklers, and specialties.
B. Connect irrigation system to lawn sprinkler piping.
C. Ground electric-powered controllers, valves, and devices.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to the manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If the manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Arrange for electric-power connections to controllers, control valves, and devices that
require power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
A. Field testing generally:
1. Provision of test equipment: All items for test have to be provided on site before the
test i.e. pressure gages, instruments, water etc.
2. Carry out tests in the presence of the Engineer's Representative.
3. Fittings and joints: Permanently anchor fittings before testing and leave all joints
exposed for checking.
4. Test sections: Limit test sections to not more than 500 m.
5. Test sections: Test pressure lines between valve chambers whenever possible.
6. Test sections: No testing shall be carried out against or through the pressure reducing
valves. The setting of the pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing
purposes.
7. Test plug: Secure end of main and test plug by struts.
8. Closed valve: Do not test against a closed valve unless there is no acceptable
alternative.
9. Apply pressure by manually operated test pump or, in the case of large diameter
mains, by power driven test pump, if approved.
10. Examine exposed joints and repair visible leaks.
11. Failure: Should a test fail, locate and replace or make good defective pipe or replace
and make good faulty joint. Retest main.
12. Records: Keep test records in an approved form. Hand original copy to the Engineer
immediately after completion of test.
13. Carry out hydrostatic test while pipeline is partially backfilled.
B. Hydrostatic testing of pressure pipelines:
1. Fill pipe slowly with water from lowest point. Do not use power-driven pump unless
approved.
2. Fill absorbant pipes with water and allow to stand for at least 24 hours to allow
complete absorption.
3. Entrapped air is to be bled before pressurizing.
4. Pressurizing is to continue until specified test pressure is reached in lowest part of
section under test. Bleed further quantities of entrapped air while raising pressure.
5. Maintain test pressure for specified test duration with pumping stopped.
6. Repressurize to original test pressure and record respective volumes of water
pumped.
7. Failure: Pipeline will be deemed to have failed test if:
a. Visible leaks are detected, regardless of leakage being within specified limits.
b. Volume of water lost during period when pumping was stopped exceeds
allowable leakage.
8. Test pressure: Generally 1.5 times the maximum sustained pressure, minimum
12 kg/cm2 for main lines and 8 kg/cm2 for circuit piping.
9. Test period: 2 hours.
10. Allowable leakage: 0.1 liter/mm diameter/km length/day/30 m of applied pressure.
C. Visual Inspection Test:
1. Timing: Carry out test after total backfilling of length under test.
2. Limit of length to be tested at one time is 3 full length pipes unless otherwise
approved.
3. Apparatus: Use rubber ty`red bogies which do not damage lining of pipe and an
adequate supply of electric lamps.
4. Check joints by means of feelers to ensure rubber rings are correctly located.
5. Check pipe barrel for visible cracks.
3.13 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench

for underground irrigation piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.
See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for underground warning tapes.
3.14 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.
B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure
required for each sprinkler circuit.

C. Carefully adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 13 mm above,
finish grade.
D. Adjust settings of controllers and automatic control valves.
3.15 COMMISSIONING
A. Starting Procedures: Follow the manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures

are prescribed by the manufacturers, proceed as follows:
1. Verify that specialty valves and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.
2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
3. Verify that sprinklers and devices are correct type.
4. Verify that damaged sprinklers and devices are replaced with new materials.
5. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
6. Adjust operating controls.
B. Operational Tests: Measure and record water flow rate and area coverage at each
sprinkler. Adjust to achieve indicated values.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

irrigation system controls and equipment, sprinklers, specialties and accessories.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training” and “Closeout Procedures”

SECTION 02870 - SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERALLY
A. This Section includes the following site and street furnishings:
1. Benches.
2. Trash receptacles.
3. Phone Booths
4. Banner Poles
5. Bollards
6. Map Boards and Signs
7. Shade Structures
1.2 PROJECT INCLUDES
A. Reinforced stone benches
B. Reinforced stone trash receptacles
C. Walk-up Aluminum phone enclosure
D. Aluminum Banner Poles
E. Concrete Bollards
F. Illuminated Map Board and signage system
G. Steel Shade Structures with Teflon material shades.
H. Steel tree grate
A. Design Criteria: Design, fabricate, and install site furniture to withstand high climate
temperatures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field-assembly
requirements, and installation details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.
SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS 02870 - Page 1 of 5

1. Size: Not less than 150-mm long linear components and 100-mm square sheet
components.
2. Full Size: Bench, Trash receptacle, signs & phone booths.
D. Product Schedule: For site and street furnishings. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
E. Material Certificates: For site and street furnishings, signed by manufacturers.
F. Maintenance Data: For site and street furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site and street furnishings through one source from
a single manufacturer or as indicated on drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BENCHES
A. Seat: Stone.
B. Base: Concrete
C. Installation Method: Attached below finished grade.
D. Manufacturer / product: Escofet Mayo bench or similar approved
2.2 TRASH RECEPTACLES
A. Facing Surrounds: Stone.
B. Support Frames: Stainless Steel.
C. Installation Method: Freestanding with weighted base.
D. Manufacturer / product: Escofet Net or similar approved
2.3 WALK-UP PHONE ENCLOSURE
A. Dimensions: 87.5 cmH x 43.00 cm W x 28.50 cm D
B. Frame: Aircraft grade aluminum
C. Finish: Silver Powder Coat Paint Finish
D. Installation Method: Wall mounting bracket

2.4 BANNER POLES
A. Dimensions: 5m H x 20cm dia. Pole
B. Material: Aircraft grade aluminum
C. Finish: Silver Powder Coat Paint Finish
D. Installation Method: Attached below finished grade.
2.5 CONCRETE BOLLARDS
A. Dimensions: 750 x 400 x 150mm
B. Materials: Cast concrete with smooth Cement Finish.
C. Installation method: Attached below finished grade.
D. Manufacturer / product: Escofet Borne Icaria or similar approved
E.
2.6 ILLUMINATED MAP BOARD AND SIGNAGE SYSTEM
A. Placement: At locations indicated on drawings
B. Technical details as required by transit authorities.
2.7 SHADE STRUCTURES
A. Frame: Mild steel power coated or hot dipped galvanized
B. Fabric: Architectural PVC coated polyester (15 years life)
C. Fittings: Cables and connections 316 stainless steel
D. Installation method: Attached below finished grade
E. Shape: As Drawn.
2.8 Tree Grate
A. Dimensions: 1200mm dia.
B. Materials: Cast Iron
C. Manufacturer / product: Broxap BX1201 -STD

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent

requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site and street furnishings, where
required.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site and street furnishings after landscaping and paving
have been completed.
C. Install site and street furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored or positioned at
locations indicated on Drawings.

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are
set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts
in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
E. Provision of warranties on all site furniture

SECTION 02930 - EXTERIOR PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Trees and palms trees.

2. Shrubs.
3. Ground cover.
4. Plants.
5. Edgings.
1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and planting,
topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.
2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for
subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.
3. Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas,
paved areas, and wall perimeters.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which
they are grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated and diameter and depth
recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied,
rigidly supported, and drum-laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
B. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they
are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than sizes indicated and
diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant
required.
C. Bare-Root Stock: Exterior plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by

transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than
minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind and size of exterior plant required.
D. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a

container with well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a
firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape
and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type,
and size of exterior plant required.
E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants established and
grown in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of
EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - Page 1 of 16

fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant.
F. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
G. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or

sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
H. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to
become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top

surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:
1. 5 lb (2.2 kg) of mineral mulch for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled
plastic bags.
2. Edging materials and accessories, of manufacturer's standard size, to verify color
selected.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product

manufacturer, and complying with the following:
1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods
established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
D. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.
E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil.
F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.
G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for

maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in

successful establishment of exterior plants.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress.
B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State

Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating

percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange
capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient
content of topsoil.
1. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to
produce a satisfactory topsoil.
D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying
with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
1. Selection of exterior plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect,

who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.
E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and
trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper
measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above ground for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper
size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or
shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.
F. Observation: Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site
before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and
quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of
balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or
defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs
immediately from Project site.
1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to

site.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Deliver exterior plants freshly dug.
1. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or
other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Architect. Protect
bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other
handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to
destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery.
Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.
C. Handle planting stock by root ball.
D. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants
trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for two hours if dried out.

2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as
often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting
periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial
Completion.
1. Spring Planting:
2. Fall Planting:
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit.
C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and
before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair
damage caused by planting operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated,
against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from
lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: Six months from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to
plant in the succeeding planting season.
4. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition at end of warranty period.
5. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating,
watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and
guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish
healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and
disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain for the following maintenance period by watering,
weeding, fertilizing, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings:
1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy
root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully
branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as
knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of
trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to
Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation
of botanical and common name.
D. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached,
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for
uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.
2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader,
of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.
1. Provide bare-root or container-grown trees and palm trees as per Engineer’s approval.
2. Branching Height: One-third to one-half of tree height.
B. Small Upright and Spreading Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and
type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem
form as follows:
1. Stem Form: Single stem, Multistem, clump, with two or more main stems and
Multistem, shrub, with multiple stems.
2. Provide balled and burlapped, balled and potted, bare-root, container-grown and
fabric bag-grown trees.
C. Multistem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with
relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as
follows:
1. Stem Form: Clump and Shrub.

2. Provide balled and burlapped, balled and potted, bare-root, container-grown and
fabric bag-grown trees as per Engineer’s approval.

2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required
by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.
1. Provide container-grown shrubs.
2.4 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height,

spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.
1. Provide bare–root or container-grown fabric bag-grown trees.
2.5 GROUND COVER PLANTS
2.6 Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated on drawings, established and well
rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1 PLANTS
A. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed.
Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in
bud but not yet in bloom.
B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and
variety shown or listed.
C. Fast-Growing Vines: Provide vines of species indicated complying with requirements in

ANSI Z60.1 as follows:
1. Two-year plants with heavy, well-branched tops, with not less than 3 runners 18
inches (450 mm) or more in length, and with a vigorous well-developed root system.
2. Provide field-grown vines. Vines grown in pots or other containers of adequate size
and acclimated to outside conditions will also be acceptable.
2.7 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 6 percent organic material

content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of

stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod,
stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when

quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-
drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100
mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.
2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain
topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where

topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land,
bogs or marshes.
3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify
suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod,
stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from

off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained
construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm)
deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.
2.8 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium

carbonate equivalent and as follows:Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing
through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-
mm) sieve.
1. Class: Class O, with a minimum 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve
and a minimum 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
2. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.
B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a

minimum 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum 10 percent
passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.
C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10
percent sulfur.
D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
F. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate.
G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials.
H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately

140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.
I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.
2.9 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;

moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-
mm) 3/4-inch (19-mm) 1/2-inch (13-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10
decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to
plantings; and as follows:
1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or
source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Peat: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a
pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
C. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially
decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing
capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.
D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of

uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood derivatives

with at least 0.15 lb (2.4 kg) of ammonium nitrate or 0.25 lb (4 kg) of ammonium
sulfate per cubic foot (cubic meter) of loose sawdust or ground bark.
E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25
percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances,
stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
2.10 FERTILIZER
A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen

and 20 percent phosphoric acid.
B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent

available phosphoric acid.
C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,

consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent
phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in
soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-

insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent

potassium, by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in
soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.11 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Shredded hardwood, Ground or shredded bark, Pine straw, Salt hay or
threshed straw, Wood and bark chips, Pine needles, Peanut, pecan, and cocoa-bean
shells as per Engineer’s approval.
B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to
8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-

mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert
contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or
source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.
C. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign
substances, of following type, size range, and color:
1. Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone, Crushed stone or gravel

Marble chips or Granite chips as per Engineer’s approval.
2. Size Range: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) maximum, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum 3/4 inch
(19 mm) maximum, 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum.
3. Color: Uniform tan-beige color range, acceptable to Architect Readily available
natural gravel color range as per Engineer’s approval.
2.12 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A. Polyethylene Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, black, 0.006-inch- (0.15-mm-) minimum thickness.
B. Nonwoven Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. (101 g/sq. m) minimum.
C. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven

polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m).
2.13 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-
preservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2
inches (50 by 50 mm) by length indicated, pointed at one end.
B. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand,
twisted, 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter.
C. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-
coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) long, with two 3/8-inch (10-mm)
galvanized eyebolts.
D. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) in
diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.
E. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long.
2.14 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS
A. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, rolled edge, fabricated in sections of

standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.
1. Edging Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep.
2. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 15 inches (380 mm) long.
3. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers.
4. Finish: Zinc coated.

5. Paint Color: Brown.
B. Polyethylene Edging: Standard black polyethylene edging, V-lipped bottom horizontally

grooved, extruded in standard lengths, with 9-inch (228-mm) steel angle stakes.
1. Edging Size: 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep.
2. Top Profile: Straight, with top 2 inches (50 mm) being 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
3. Top Profile: Round top, 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter.
4. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard connecting clips or plugs.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

following:
D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following or similar approved:
1. Steel Edging:
a. Border Concepts, Inc.

b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc.
c. Russell, J. D. Company (The).
d. Ryerson Tull, Inc.
e. Sure-loc Aluminum Edging Corporation.
2. Aluminum Edging:
a. Curv-Rite Aluminum Edgings.

b. Permaloc Aluminum Edging.
c. Russell, J. D. Company (The).
d. Sure-loc Aluminum Edging Corporation.
3. Plastic Edging:
a. Oly-Ola Sales, Inc.

b. Valley View Industries.
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for

trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous
material, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent.
C. Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48, Class 35 (ASTM A 48M, Class 250) or better, gray-
iron castings of shape, pattern, and size indicated.
D. Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48, Class 35 (ASTM A 48M, Class 250) or better, gray-
iron castings and ASTM A 36/A 36M steel-angle frames of shape, pattern, and size
indicated.

2.16 PLANTING SOIL MIX
A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the
following quantities:
1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: to be approved by Engineer’s.

2. Ratio of Loose Peat to Topsoil by Volume to be approved by Engineer’s.
3. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: to be approved by
Engineer’s.
4. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): to be approved by Engineer’s.
5. Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m):
6. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m)
7. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m)
8. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m):
9. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m):
10. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m):
11. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m):
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions
affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and
existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge

of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake
locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance
of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.
D. Lay out exterior plants at locations directed by Landscape Architect. Stake locations of
individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.
E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over
trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and
transportation.
1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery
before moving and again two weeks after planting.

3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT
A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 8 inches (200 mm). Remove
stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other
extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

2. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply
soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix.
a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a
few days.
b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.
3. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 8 inches (200 mm) but not less than required to
meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade
is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened
subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread
remainder of planting soil mix.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish
grades.
C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before
planting.
3.4 TREE AND SHRUB EXCAVATION
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving
center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb
base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and
burlapped, balled and potted, container-grown and fabric bag-grown stock.
2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to
accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.
3. If drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous
backfill over tile.
B. Subsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill. Subject to Engineer’s
approval.
C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or

shrubs are encountered in excavations.
1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter holes into free-draining strata or to
a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.
D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or

retention in tree or shrub pits.
E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING
A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1
inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but
do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not
use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate
voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water
thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water
is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.
B. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch
(25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
C. Set fabric bag-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch
(25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do
not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
D. Set and support bare-root stock in center of pit or trench with root collar or trunk flare 1 inch
(25 mm) below adjacent finish grade. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward
surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill
layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while
working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. Tamp final layer of backfill.
Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
E. Organic Mulching: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of organic mulch extending 12
inches (300 mm) beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches
(75 mm) of trunks or stems.
F. Wrap trees of 2-inch (50-mm) caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk
and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width,
and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper
pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping.
3.6 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Architect.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune
trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not
cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs
to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning.
3.7 GUYING AND STAKING
A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch (50- through 125-mm) caliper.
Stake trees of less than 2-inch (50-mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out.
Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm)
below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches (1830 mm) above
grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Support
trees with two strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk.
Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Use the number of stakes as follows:
1. Use 2 stakes for trees up to 12 feet (3.6 m) high and 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or less in
caliper; 3 stakes for trees less than 14 feet (4.2 m) high and up to 4 inches (100 mm)
in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.
B. Guying and Staking: Guy and stake trees exceeding 14 feet (4.2 m) in height and more
than 3 inches (75 mm) in caliper, unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than
3 guys to stakes 30 inches (760 mm) long, driven to grade.
1. For trees more than 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper, anchor guys to pressure-
preservative-treated deadmen 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter and 48 inches (1200
mm) long buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below grade. Provide turnbuckles for
each guy wire and tighten securely.
2. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches (760 mm) above finish grade.
3. Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.
3.8 PLANTERS
A. Planters: Place a layer of gravel at least 4 inches (100 mm) thick in bottom of planters,
cover with nonwoven fabric, and fill with planter soil mix. Place soil in lightly compacted
layers to an elevation of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below top of planter, allowing natural
settlement.
1. Planter Soil Mix: One part topsoil, one part coarse sand, one part peat, and 3 lb (1.36
kg) of dolomitic limestone per cubic yard (cubic meter) of mix.
3.9 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated.
B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil.
C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around
plants to hold water.
D. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery
from transplanting shock.

3.10 PLANTING BED MULCHING
A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6
inches (150 mm).
1. Material and Seam Treatment: Nonwoven fabric with seams pinned.
B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated.
1. Organic Mulch: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of organic mulch, and
finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.
2. Mineral Mulch: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of mineral mulch, and
finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.
3.11 EDGING INSTALLATION
A. Wood Edgings: Install wood headers or edgings where indicated. Anchor with wood stakes
spaced up to 36 inches (900 mm) apart, driven at least 1 inch (25 mm) below top elevation
of header or edging. Use 2 galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging; length
as needed to penetrate both members and provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clinch at point. Predrill
stakes if needed to avoid splitting.
B. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches (760 mm) apart,
driven below top elevation of edging.
C. Aluminum Edging: Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Anchor with aluminum stakes spaced approximately 36 inches (900
mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging.
D. Plastic Edging: Install plastic edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 36 inches (900 mm) apart,
driven through upper base grooves or V-lip of edging.
3.12 TREE GRATE INSTALLATION
A. Tree Grates: Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim
from supporting substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 3-inch- (75-mm-) minimum
growth radius around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to
3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition.
B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other
contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance
periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.

3.14 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete

materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks.
3. Division 3 Section "Concrete Floor Toppings" for metallic and nonmetallic concrete
floor toppings.
4. Division 3 Section "Lightweight Concrete Roof Insulation" for cast-in-place
lightweight concrete roof insulation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of

blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace
slag, and silica fume.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics
of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
adjustments.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement,

prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and
supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings
through concrete structures.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering
of formwork are Contractor's responsibility.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping

formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - Page 1 of 27

S08035-SPC-ST-01 REV 1
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
any other information required by Engineer.
G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on
comprehensive testing of current materials:
H. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.

2. Form materials and form-release agents.
3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
4. Fiber reinforcement.
5. Admixtures.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing materials.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
11. Vapor retarders.
12. Epoxy joint filler.
13. Joint-filler strips.
14. Repair materials.
I. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Engineer and

qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture
from the same manufacturer.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding
Code--Reinforcing Steel."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are
indicated:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
G. Mockups: Before casting concrete that is exposed to view on surfaces of the completed
structure or building, cast a mockup for each exposed element, including slabs if applicable,
to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, tolerances, quality of materials
and standard of workmanship in the completed Work.
by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. In presence of Engineer, damage parts of exposed surfaces as selected by Engineer,
and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repairs to match adjacent
undamaged surfaces
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting cast-in-place concrete
elements exposed to view.
5. If Engineer determines that any mockup does not meet requirements, demolish and
remove from the site and cast another until the mockup is approved.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine procedures
for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity
directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true,
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with
DOC PS 1, and as follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced

plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities
not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness
to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally
sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 20 by 20 mm, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent
spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 25 mm to the plane of the
exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 25 mm in diameter
in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: BS4449 or ASTM A615M, Grade 420, deformed.
1. Maximum Carbon Content: 0.3%
B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184M, assembled with clips.
1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615M, Grade 420, deformed bars.
a. Maximum Carbon Content: 0.3%
C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.

E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into
flat sheets.
F. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast
concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as
follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615M, Grade 420. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray color, of same type, brand, and source for
entire Project.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M
C. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
D. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, from the same source for entire Project, uniformly
graded, and as follows:
1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M.

2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 38 mm as shown on drawings.
3. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 25 mm. as shown on drawings.
5. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more
than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that
less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on 0.3-mm sieve, and less
than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than 0.3 mm.
a. Material passing the 0.075-mm sieve must not, in any case, exceed 3 percent,
by weight, of the combined aggregate.
E. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.

F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

1. Non-potable water may be used when potable water is not available, provided its
impurities do not exceed any of the following values:
a. Chloride (Cl): 500 ppm.

b. Sulphates (SO 4 ): 300 ppm.
c. Alkalis (Na2O + 0.658K2O): 600 ppm.
d. Total Solids: 5000 ppm.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Water-Reducing Admixture (Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type A.
C. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F.
D. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
E. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
F. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed

cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Axim Concrete Technologies.

b. Cortec Corporation.
c. Fosroc.
d. W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
e. Master Builders Technologies.
f. Sika Corporation.
2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Carbon-Steel Fiber: ASTM A 820, deformed, minimum 60 mm long, and of diameter or

effective diameter indicated.
1. Fiber: Type 1, cold-drawn wire.

2. Fiber: Type 2, cut sheet.
3. Fiber: Type 1, cold-drawn wire, or Type 2, cut sheet.
B. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in
concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 15 to 40 mm long.
C. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed

for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 15 to 40 mm long.

D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

following:
1. Carbon-Steel Fibers:
a. Bekaert Corporation.
b. Fibercon International.
c. Novocon International Inc.
2. Fibrillated Fibers:

b. Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries.
c. Forta Corporation.
d. W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
3. Monofilament Fibers:

b. Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries.
d. Forta Corporation.
e. W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
f. Hi-Tech Fibers, Div. of Martin Color-Fi, Inc.
g. Metalcrete Industries.
2.7 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage
of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.

2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell without center bulb.
3. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.
4. Profile: Ribbed without center bulb.
5. Profile: As indicated.
B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.

2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell without center bulb.
3. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.
4. Profile: Ribbed without center bulb.
5. Profile: As indicated.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

following:
1. Rubber Waterstops:
a. Fosroc.

b. Greenstreak.
c. Progress Unlimited Inc.
d. Sika Corporation.
e. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc.
f. Williams Products, Inc.
2. PVC Waterstops:
a. Fosroc.
b. W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
c. Greenstreak.
d. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
e. Paul Murphy Plastics Co.
f. Progress Unlimited Inc.
g. Sika Corporation.
h. Sternson Group.
i. Tamms Industries Co.; Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals North
America, Inc.
j. Vinylex Corporation.
k. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc.
D. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium

bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete.

to, the following:
a. Colloid Environmental Technologies Co.

b. Concrete Sealants Inc.
c. De Neef Construction Chemicals (U.S.) Inc.
d. Fosroc.
e. Greenstreak.
f. Mirafi Moisture Protection, Div. of Royal Ten Cate (USA), Inc.
g. Mitsubishi International Corporation.
h. Progress Unlimited Inc.
i. Sika Corporation.
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene
sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 0.25 mm thick:
1. Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 0.25 mm thick.

2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene
sheet; 0.18 mm thick.
B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B, five-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced,

high-density polyethylene sheet; 0.25 mm thick.
C. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced,

high-density polyethylene sheet; laminated to a nonwoven geotextile fabric, 0.76 mm thick.

D. Vapor Retarder: 2.8-mm- thick, semiflexible, seven-ply sheet membrane consisting of

reinforced core and carrier sheet with fortified asphalt layers, protective weathercoating, and
removable plastic release liner. Furnish manufacturer's accessories including bonding
asphalt, pointing mastics, and self-adhering joint tape.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: 0.00 ng/Pa x s x sq. m; ASTM E 154.

2. Tensile Strength: 24.5 kN/m; ASTM E 154.
3. Puncture Resistance: 400 N; ASTM E 154.
E. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 4.75-mm
sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a 0.15-mm sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of
ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
F. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel;

ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 38-mm sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a
2.36-mm sieve.
2.9 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS
A. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive

aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate
containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric
oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
B. Unpigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of

portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, and plasticizing admixture.
C. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of

portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture.
Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with
cement.
1. Colors: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range for these

characteristics.
D. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic

silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that
penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

following:
1. Unpigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener:
a. Burke Group, LLC (The).

b. ChemMasters.
c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Dayton Superior Corporation.
e. Euclid Chemical Co.
f. Foscroc.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.
h. Lambert Corporation.

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

j. Master Builders Technologies.
k. Metalcrete Industries.
l. Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
m. L. M. Scofield Co.
n. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
o. Sternson Group.
p. Symons Corporation.
2. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener:

b. ChemMasters.
f. Fosroc.
k. Metalcrete Industries.
l. L. M. Scofield Co.
m. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
n. Sternson Group.
3. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment:

b. ChemMasters.
d. Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation.
f. Euclid Chemical Co.
g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
h. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
2.10 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 305 g/sq. m when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

18 to 22 percent solids.

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,

Type 1, Class A.
H. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

following:
1. Curing Materials:
a. Burke Chemicals.
b. ChemMasters.
f. Fosroc.
k. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
l. Metalcrete Industries.
m. Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
n. Sika Corporation.
o. Symons Corporation.
p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
2.11 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752,

cork or self-expanding cork.
B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
D. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid

curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as
follows:
1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.55-mm- thick galvanized steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.85 mm thick, with
bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.

2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 3 mm and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,
conditions, and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6 mm or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 30 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109M.
B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product

that can be applied in thicknesses from 6 mm.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6 mm or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.
ASTM C 109M.
2.13 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory
trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.

2. Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Blinding and Cyclopean Concrete: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 14 MPa.

2. Maximum Slump: 100 mm.
D. Footings, Upstands, Parapets, Fascia Elements and slab on grade: Proportion normal-
weight concrete mix as follows:

3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture:
200 mm after admixture is added to concrete with 50- to 100-mm slump.
E. Abutment Walls, Underpass Walls, Retaining Walls, Station Building Frame Members,
Suspended Sabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:


2. Minimum Cementations Materials Content: 390 kg/cu. m.
F. Viaduct and Bridge Piers, Special Station Columns, Bearing Plinths: Proportion normal-

2. Minimum Cementations Materials Content: 410 kg/cu.m
G. Prestressed Concrete Viaduct and Bridge Decks and Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 420 kg/cu.m
4. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture:
200 mm after admixture is added to concrete with 50- to 100-mm slump.
H. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50
percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25
percent.
5. Silica Fume: 10 percent.
6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans
not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica
Fume: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolans not
exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
I. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low
water permeability.
J. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete subject to moderate

sulfate or chloride exposure.
K. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete subject to severe or very
severe sulfate or chloride exposure.
L. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of

cement.
M. Steel-Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mix, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, at a rate of 30 kg/cu. m.
N. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate,

but not less than 0.60 kg/cu. m.

O. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate,

but not less than 0.90 kg/cu. m.
P. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture

(superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be
watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated.
2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.15 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 30 and 32 deg C, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 32 deg C, reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1. For mixer capacity of 0.75 cu. m or smaller, continue mixing at least one and one-
half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any
part of batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 0.75 cu. m, increase mixing time by 15 seconds for
each additional 0.75 cu. m.
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and
amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until concrete structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as

follows:

1. Class A, 4 mm.
2. Class B, 6 mm.
3. Class C, 10 mm.
4. Class D, 25 mm.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood
inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely
braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at
inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of concrete receiving applied waterproofing

membranes.
I. Do not chamfer corners or edges of concrete unless otherwise indicated.
J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks
and maintain proper alignment.
M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.

2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive
through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where
flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that
does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 10 deg C for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field-
or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Engineer.
3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318M, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design,
installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to

distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material,
moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or
minus 20 mm.
C. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with
mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or minus 20 mm.
1. Place and compact a 15-mm- thick layer of fine-graded granular material over
granular fill.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of
adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead
forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 40 mm into
concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams,
and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with
walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least
one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 3 mm Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete
develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at

slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 12 mm or more than 25 mm
below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length
is required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at
joints where indicated.
1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent

concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.8 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous

diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops
during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations

indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically
fastening and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless
approved by Engineer.
C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mix.
D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a
section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 600 mm and in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to
avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment

and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 150 mm into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun
to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mix constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater
appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing
operations.
G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 5 deg C, uniformly
heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of
not less than 10 deg C and not more than 27 deg C at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as

follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 32 deg C at

time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing
water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie
holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections
exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and

patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 3 mm in
height.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or

covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing,
veneer plaster, or painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a
uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the
rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of
thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one
and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add
white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout
will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When
grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for
at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part
portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and
water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of
dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding
surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo,
and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low
spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,
granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-
up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete
by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is
free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to
view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to
ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-
on-grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for
suspended slabs.
d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled freestanding 3-m long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 5 mm.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second
troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be
installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and
when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming

with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required
final finish with Engineer before application.
G. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish
where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly spread 12 kg/10 sq. m of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in

one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below
surface.
2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.
3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and
water to expose slip-resistive aggregate.
H. Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply mineral dry-shake
materials to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly apply mineral dry-shake materials at a rate of 49 kg/10 sq. m, unless

greater amount is recommended by manufacturer.
2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of mineral dry-shake materials over
surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow
power floating with a second mineral dry-shake application, uniformly distributing
remainder of material, and embed by power floating.
3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound
recommended by dry-shake material manufacturer and apply immediately after final
finishing.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend
with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or
required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations
as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated
items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-
finish concrete surfaces.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,
or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 1 kg/sq. m x h before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or
a combination of the following methods:
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with
the following materials:
a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 300-mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends
lapped at least 300 mm, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using
cover material and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-
retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for
use with floor coverings.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or

roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor
treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and
complete surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;
and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until
surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to
hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.15 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 50 mm deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to
two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a 1.2-mm sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more
than 13 mm in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 25 mm in depth.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and
brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or
cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly
higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Engineer.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test
surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.25 mm wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out
low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 6 mm to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas
with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 20 mm clearance

all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete
except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent
finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust,
dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and
finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least
72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive
and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's
approval.
3.17 WATER-RETAINING CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Water-retaining construction shall comply with this Specification.
B. Joints: Joints shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ACI 504R. Details and
positioning of joints, together with the materials to be used, shall be shown on the
Drawings.
1. Waterstops shall be in accordance with Paragraph 2.7.A. Jointing of waterstops shall

be made by welding in an approved fashion. Lapping of waterstops at joints and the
use of adhesives for jointing purposes shall not be permitted unless specifically
authorized. Waterstops shall not be perforated or damaged. Concrete shall be
carefully placed and compacted to ensure dense impervious concrete, particularly
around the ribs of waterstops. At all joints the concrete shall be placed up to the
centerline of the waterstop. All starters to walls of watertight construction shall be
cast using hung formwork so that the concrete in the starters is placed simultaneously
with the concrete in the slab.
C. Testing: In addition to the testing required in Paragraph 3.18.C, further tests to determine
the water tightness of the structure shall be performed based on the requirements of ACI
350.1-01. Testing shall be performed after completion of the structure, installation of fittings
and accessories, but before the application of internal waterproofing, and before any
backfilling behind the structure's walls has taken place. The following measures should be
considered:
1. All tank penetrations and outlets shall be securely sealed to prevent loss of water
from the tank during the test. Tank penetrations and outlets shall be monitored before
and during the test and shall be repaired from leakage (if any) prior to taking test
measurements.
2. Rate of initial filling of a new tank should not exceed 1.2m/hr (of the tank height).
Tank filling shall be continued until the water surface is at the design maximum water
level or 100 mm below any fixed overflow level, whichever is lower.
3. Test measurements shall be recorded at 24 hr intervals. The test period shall be at
least the theoretical time required to record a drop in the water surface of 10 mm,
which is, according to the acceptance criterion, ( ) days, rounded up, where
h is the water depth in (mm). Test period need not exceed five consecutive days.

4. The change in water volume in the structure shall be calculated and corrected, if
necessary for evaporation, precipitation and temperature. If loss exceeds the required
criterion, the structure shall be considered to have failed the test. The structure shall
also be considered to have failed the test if observed flowing or seeping from the
structure or if moisture can be transferred from exterior surface to a dry hand. The
structure shall not be considered to have failed the acceptance criterion if dampness
or wetness on top of a footing, in the absence of flowing water, is observed.
5. Acceptance criterion and performance of test shall be in accordance with the
requirements of ACI 350.1, standard criterion HST-050, which requires that the drop
in the water surface not exceed 0.05% in 24 hours.
6. Retesting shall be permitted if the first test fails to satisfy the criterion. A second test
may be performed immediately following the first test, provided that no visible
leakage is exhibited. If the tank fails the second test or if it was not tested
immediately after the first test failure, the tank shall only be retested after probable
areas of leakage have been detected and repaired. Tanks shall be retested until they
meet the required criterion.
A. Testing : Sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete
placement according to requirements specified in this Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 4 cu. m, but less than 20 cu. m, plus one set for each
additional 40 cu. m or fraction thereof.
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 75 cu. m or
fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength

tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five
randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 5
deg C and below and when 27 deg C and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one
test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mix.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set
of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7

days and two at 28 days.
a. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for
protecting and curing in-place concrete.
D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 3.4
MPa.
E. Report test results in writing to Engineer within 48 hours of testing. Reports of

compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of
concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete
batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and
materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.
F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
G. Additional Tests: Make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump,
compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer.
Conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Engineer.

SECTION 03332 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exterior cast-in-place architectural concrete, smooth-formed finish.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete materials, mixes and
admixtures and other cast-in-place concrete materials required to achieve
architectural cast-in-place concrete, and; for reinforcement and formwork including
embedded items, shoring and re-shoring.
2. Division 10 Section “Exterior Screen Assemblies,” for anchoring requirements for
exterior screens attached to cast-in-place architectural concrete.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Architectural Concrete or Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Formed concrete that is
exposed to view on surfaces of completed structure or building and that requires special
concrete materials, formwork, placement, or finishes to obtain specified architectural
appearance for both load bearing and non-load bearing elements.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide architectural concrete finishes to match appearance qualities of samples and mock-
ups and of consistent quality in appearance for each type of finish, approved by Engineer.
B. General: Unless the specified standards contain more stringent requirements, provide as-cast
smooth-formed finish, as follows:
1. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams arranged in
an approved pattern.
2. Surfaces shall be free from discolouration caused by release agents, grout leakage or
other sources.
3. Pigmented Colored Concrete: As selected by Engineer, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Generally, surfaces shall be free of voids, honeycombing, segregation and other
defects. Voids shall be kept to an absolute minimum whilst ensuring compliance with
other specified requirements.
a. No voids larger than 5 mm in diameter permitted, and not more than 6 in any
square metre of surface area.
b. No surface blemishes visible to the eye at 3 m.
c. Formwork Tie Holes: Arranged in approved uniform pattern, filled with
matching prepared cement/fine aggregate paste to match approved sample.
5. Fins and Projections: Carefully removed; surface then thoroughly rinsed and most
noticeable surface blemishes filled with cement and fine aggregate paste to match
color and texture of adjacent concrete; as approved by Engineer.
6. Exterior Corners And Edges: With or without chamfers as selected by Engineer,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Formwork:
1. Comply with ACI 303.1 limits on form-facing panel deflection, limit cast-in-place
architectural concrete surface irregularities designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or
gradual, as follows:
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03332 – Page 1 of 4

S08035-SPC-AR-01 REV 0
a. Smooth-Formed Finish: Class A, 3.2 mm.

2. Fabricate forms to result in cast-in-place architectural concrete that complies with
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials,"
and appearance specified.
3. Form panels: Comply with the following, as approved by Engineer.
a. Joint lines smooth and consistent with surface geometry,
b. Use same size panels for formwork for each finish, in joint pattern approved by
Engineer.
D. Repairs:
1. Develop appropriate repair mixtures and techniques during production sample
submittal process.
2. Repair and cure damaged finished surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete
when approved by Engineer. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of
surrounding surfaces and to repairs on approved mockups.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Before submitting design mixtures, Convene a meeting at Project site to review concrete
design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require
the following persons to attend:
1. Contractor's superintendent.
2. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
3. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
4. Cast-in-place architectural concrete subcontractor.
5. Formwork designer.
6. Engineer.
B. Review concrete finishes and finishing, hot-weather concreting procedures, curing
procedures, construction joints, forms and form-removal limitations, reinforcement
accessory installation, concrete repair procedures, and protection of cast-in-place
architectural concrete.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction including form-facing joints,
construction and contraction joints, form tie locations and patterns, and items that visually
affect architectural concrete.
C. Placement Schedule: Submit concrete placement schedule before start of placement
operations. Include locations of joints including construction joints.
D. Samples: For each of the following materials:
1. Form facing panel.
2. Form ties.
3. Coarse and fine aggregate gradations.
4. Joints and corners.
5. Formwork release agent.
E. Samples of Architectural Concrete: Cast vertically, approximately 600 by 600 by 50 mm for
each finish, color, and texture. Include range samples showing expected variations.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each of the following:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Repair materials.
C. Material Test Reports: For the following, by a qualified testing agency:
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion
of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities
and equipment.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 303.1, "Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural
Concrete." unless otherwise specified.
C. Source Limitations for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Obtain each color, size, type,
and variety of concrete material and concrete mixture from single manufacturer with
resources to provide cast-in-place architectural concrete of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
D. Mockups: Before casting architectural concrete, build mockups to verify selections made
under Sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, expected range of finish, color,
and texture variations, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply
with the following requirements, using materials specified.
1. Build mockups in the locations as directed by Engineer.
2. Build mock-ups representing three structural bays for each type of smooth finish cast-
in-place architectural concrete, including construction joints.
3. Demonstrate method of placement and compaction, appropriate choice of mix design,
curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place architectural concrete, finishes,
construction and contraction joints, as applicable.
4. Illustrate corners, joints, formwork workmanship quality, and form tie appearance in
finished surface.
5. In presence of Engineer, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish,
color, and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of
tie holes and surface blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.
6. Repeat mock-ups until finishes are approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Form-Facing Panels: Panel materials that will provide continuous, true, and smooth
architectural concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints.
B. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, internally disconnecting ties designed to resist lateral
pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish ties with tapered tie cone spreaders that, when removed, will leave holes 19
mm in diameter on concrete surface.
2. Furnish internally disconnecting ties that will leave no metal closer than 38 mm, after
exposing aggregate, from the architectural concrete surface.
C. Form Release Agents: Commercially formulated, colorless form-release agents that will not
bond with, stain, discolor or adversely affect architectural concrete surfaces and will not
impair subsequent treatments of those surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
D. Form Sealers: Types that that will not stain, discolor or adversely affect architectural
concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of those surfaces.
E. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800,
"Specification 810.1, Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape"; minimum 6 mm thick.
F. Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or Type S,
Grade NS, that adheres to form joint substrates.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND MIXES

A. Refer to Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” and as follows.
B. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures; color stable, non-fading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1. Colors: As selected by Engineer.

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
non-dissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of
floor covering.
2.4 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Materials: Specially formulated mortar matching concrete color, non-shrink; same
compressive strength as concrete being repaired.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

SECTION 03365 - POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Work included:
1. Provide prestressing components and accessories and carry out post-tensioning

operations for concrete post-tensioned elements as shown on the drawings, as
specified herein or as required to complete the Work.
2. Work includes post-tensioned concrete for the station floors and any other post-
tensioned elements as indicated on the drawings.
B. Related work:
1. Cast-in-Place Concrete is specified in Section 03300.
C. Related documents:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS:
A. For the purpose of this Contract, cable and tendon both refer to a bundle of prestressing
strands of the same type and size bundled together to be contained within a duct and
stressed collectively from the same anchorage.
B. A prestressing system is defined as a proprietary system of applying prestress and includes

anchorages, couplers and jacks but does not necessarily include prestressing steel and cable
ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1.
B. Prestressing System: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval; full
details of the proposed prestressing system, suppliers of the basic materials and
components and shop drawings for main components. No system shall be incorporated in
the Works until approved by the Engineer.
C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates for all materials to show compliance with the
specification.
D. Friction Losses: Submit calculation of friction losses in the jack and tendon extensions as
applicable to the ducts and prestressing jacks to be used in the works for the approval of the
Engineer who may order the contractor to carry out a friction test.
E. Method Statement: Submit a method statement including the method of handling,

transportation, storage, tensioning and grouting.
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 03365 - Page 1 of 15

F. Testing Report: Submit a report on the testing of the strands and anchorages, if required,
prepared by an independent testing body/laboratory. The report shall include descriptions of
the test rigs, instrumentation, a comparison of test results and the requirements of the
specification, as well as conclusions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. BS 5400 British standard “Steel, Concrete and Composite Bridges”.

2. Prestressing steel shall be low—relaxation super-stabilized strands, conforming to the
requirements of BS 5896, or ASTM-A-416-90 Grade 270.
B. Prestressing operations shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and
competent supervisor (minimum experience of 10 years) and all personnel operating the
stressing equipment shall have been properly trained in its use. As an addition to the normal
precautions against accident for the whole of the work, special precautions shall be taken
when working with or near tendons, which have been tensioned or are being tensioned.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 PRESTRESSING STRANDS:
A. All prestressing strands shall be seven-wire super stabilized low relaxation strands -
complying with BS 5896, or ASTM-A-416-90 Grade 270.
2.2 PRESTRESSING COMPONENTS – GENERAL:
A. Prestressing components, such as ducts, anchorages and couplers, shall be of approved

types suitable for types of strands used.
2.3 DUCTS:
A. Ducts for prestressing strands shall be either high density Polyethylene (PE) ducts, or
galvanized steel ducts and shall be clean and free from pitting. They shall be capable of
withstanding concrete pressures without excessive deformations and possess sufficient
rigidity to maintain the required profile between supports. They shall have sufficient bond
with concrete and tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that a force equal to 40 per cent
of the ultimate tensile force of the prestressing tendon can be transferred from the tendon,
through the duct to the surrounding concrete at a length of 750 mm.

2.4 ANCHORAGES:
A. Anchorages shall be epoxy coated cast steel anchorages and shall be tested in accordance
with BS 4447. No testing is required if certificates are provided. For each anchorage system
used in the works, the characteristic value of anchorage efficiency shall be not less that
90%. Proprietary anchorages shall be handled and used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
2.5 GROUT:
A. The grout shall consist only of ordinary Portland cement and water. The water/cement ratio
shall be as low as possible consistent with the necessary workability. Admixtures may be
used with the written permission of the Engineer and shall be applied strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and shall not
release hydrogen ions. Dry materials shall be measured by weight. Refer to section 03300
for compliance with the specifications for cement, admixtures and water for constituents of
grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free from pitting, loose rust and loose scale at the
time of incorporation in the work.
B. Prestressing strand shall be in coils of sufficiently large diameter to ensure that the strand
pays off reasonably straight.
C. All cutting of strands shall be carried out using a high-speed abrasive cutting wheel or
friction saw at not less than one diameter from the anchor.
D. Care shall be taken to avoid mechanically damaging, work hardening or heating

prestressing tendons while handling. All prestressing tendons shall be stored clear of the
ground and protected from the weather, and from splashes from any other materials, and
from splashes from the cutting operation of an oxy-acetylene torch, or arc-welding
processes in the vicinity.
E. In no circumstances shall prestressing tendons after manufacture be subjected to any

welding operation, or heat treatment or metallic coating such as galvanising. This does not
preclude cutting as described in Clause D above.
F. Tendons and duct former shall be accurately located and maintained in position both
vertically and horizontally as described in the Contract document. Unless otherwise
described in the Contract document the tolerance in the location of the centre line of duct
shall be within +/-5mm.
G. All strands stressed in one operation shall be taken, where possible, from the same parcel.
Each cable shall be tagged with its number from which the coil numbers of the steel used
can be identified. Cables shall not be kinked or twisted. Individual strands for which
extensions are to be measured shall be readily identifiable at each end of the member. No
strand that has become unraveled shall be used.

H. Anchor cones, blocks and plates shall be positioned and maintained during concreting so
that the centerline of the ducts passes axially through the anchorage assembly. They shall be
fixed in place securely such that the reinforcement is not in direct contact with any part of
the anchorage. Plastic spacers may be used to achieve this.
3.2 TENSIONING:
A. The tensioning apparatus shall meet the following general requirements:
1. The means of attachment of the tendon to the jack shall be safe and secure;
2. Where two or more strands are stressed simultaneously, they shall be approximately
of equal length between anchorage points at the datum of load and extension
measurement;
3. The tensioning apparatus shall be such that a controlled total force is imposed
gradually and no dangerous secondary stresses are induced in the tendons, anchorage
or concrete;
4. The force in the tendons during tensioning shall be measured by direct-reading load
cells or obtained indirectly from gauges fitted in the hydraulic system to determine
the pressure in the jacks. Facilities shall be provided for the measurement of the
extension of the tendon and of any movement in the gripping devices. The load-
measuring device shall be calibrated to an accuracy within +/-2% and checked at
intervals to the approval of the Engineer; Elongation of the tendon shall be measured
to an accuracy within 2% or 2mm, whichever is the more accurate.
5. The tensioning equipment shall be calibrated before the tensioning operation and at
intervals approved by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the anchorage reinforcement provided on the
Contract drawings is sufficient to resist anchor block stresses and stresses in the anchorage
zone for the type of anchorages to be used in the Works.
C. The prestressing tendons shall be protected in their permanent positions from both
mechanical damage and corrosion.
D. Before tensioning, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all tendons are free to move in the
ducts unless the geometry of the ducts make this impracticable as agreed by the Engineer.
Tensioning shall be carried out in such a manner that the stress in the tendons increases at a
gradual and steady rate.
E. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, concrete shall not be stressed until it has
reached at least the age at which 2 test cubes taken from it attain the specified transfer
strength. The test cubes shall be made and tested as described in BS 1881. They shall be
cured in similar conditions to the concrete to which they relate, and in a manner approved
by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall cast sufficient cubes to demonstrate that the required strength of the
concrete at transfer has been reached.
G. The Contractor shall ensure that personnel carrying out the stressing are provided with
particulars of the required tendon loads, order of stressing and extensions. Allowance shall
be made during stressing for the friction in the jack and in the anchorage, although the
former is not necessary when using load cells.
H. Any allowance for draw-in of the tendon during anchoring shall be in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions.

I. Stressing shall continue until the required extension and tendon load are reached or are
approved by the Engineer.
J. The extension shall allow for any draw-in of the tendon occurring at the non-jacking end,
but measurement shall not commence until any slack in the tendon has been taken up.
K. Immediately after anchoring, the forces in the prestressing tendons shall not exceed 75% of
their characteristic strength. During stressing the value may exceed 75% of their
characteristic strength, with the approval of the Engineer, but shall not exceed 80%.
L. After the tendons have been anchored, the force exerted by the tensioning apparatus shall be
decreased gradually and steadily so as to avoid shock to the tendon or the anchorage. Full
records shall be kept of all tensioning operations, including the measured extensions,
pressure-gauge or load-cell readings, and the amount of draw-in at each anchorage. Copies
of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer within 24 hours of each tensioning
operation.
M. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer tendons shall not be cut less than 3 days after
grouting.
N. If the measured extension differs by more than 5 percent from the estimated extension,
corrective action shall be taken as directed by the Engineer.
O. If the pull-in of the tendons at completion of anchoring is greater than that stipulated by the
Engineer, tensioning shall be carried out afresh.
P. If it is necessary to cut the tendons to enable the ducts to be grouted, this shall be delayed as
long as practicable up to the time of grouting. In all other cases, unless agreed otherwise by
the Engineer, the tendons shall not be cropped less than 3 days after grouting.
Q. Tendons shall be protected and bonded to the member.
R. Anchorages block-outs shall be filled with dense concrete of low permeability of grade
similar to that of the prestressed element.
3.3 GROUTING:
A. The Contractor shall undertake grouting trials.
B. Air vents with transparent standpipes shall be provided at crests in the duct profile and
elsewhere as specified. All ducts shall be thoroughly clean before grouting. Ducts formed
without metal sheathing shall be provided with effective drainage and, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer, shall be flushed with water before grouting. All surplus water
shall be removed by compressed air injection. All anchorages shall be sealed or fitted with
grouting connections.
C. The mixing equipment shall produce a grout of homogeneous consistency and shall be
capable of providing a continuous supply to the injection equipment.
D. The injection equipment shall be capable of continuous operation with little variation of
pressure and shall include a system for re-circulating the grout while actual grouting is not
in progress. Compressed air shall not be used.

E. The equipment shall have a sensibly constant delivery pressure not exceeding 1 N/mm2. All
piping to the grout pump shall have a minimum of bends, valves and changes in diameter.
All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with 1.18 mm sieve strainers. All equipment,
especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed through with clean water after every series of
operations and at the end of use for each day. The interval between washings shall not
exceed 3 hours.
F. The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on completely grouted ducts and
shall be fitted with a valve that can be locked off without loss of pressure in the duct.
G. During the grouting operation the Contractor shall provide adequate flushing-out plant to
facilitate complete removal of the grout in the event of breakdown of the grouting
equipment or other disruption before the grouting operation has been completed.
H. Water shall be added to the mixer first, then the cement. When these are thoroughly mixed,
the admixture if any, shall be added. Mixing shall continue until a uniform consistency is
obtained. The water/cement ratio of the mix shall not exceed 0.45 by weight unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer. Mixing shall not be by hand.
I. Grouting of the ducts shall be carried out as soon as is practicable after stressing and the
Engineer's permission to commence has been obtained. Injection shall be continuous, and it
shall be slow enough to avoid producing segregation of the grout. The method of injecting
grout shall ensure complete filling of the duct and complete surrounding of the steel. Grout
shall be allowed to flow from the free end of the duct until its consistency is equivalent to
that of the grout injected. The opening shall then be firmly closed. Any vents shall be
closed in a similar manner one after another in direction of the flow. The injection tubes
shall then be sealed off under pressure until the grout has set.
J. The filled ducts shall not be subjected to shock or vibration within 1 day of grouting.
K. Not less than 2 days after grouting, the level of grouting, the injection and vent tubes shall
be inspected and made good as necessary.
L. The Contractor shall keep full records of grouting including the date each duct was grouted,
the proportion of the grout and any admixtures used, the pressure, details of any
interruptions and topping up required. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the
Engineer within 3 days of grouting.
M. Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide facilities and attendance for
the radiographic testing of ducts.
3.4 TESTS:
A. Strands:
Prestressing strands shall be tested as follows:
1. A sample shall be taken from each reel of material on site in the presence of the
Engineer for strength test at an independent laboratory approved by the Engineer. A
reel shall only be accepted if both the breaking load and the 0.1% proof load of the
sample exceed the specified characteristic load given in BS 5896 Table 6.
2. A minimum of 3 samples shall be taken at random from the reels on site in the
presence of the Engineer for relaxation test at an independent laboratory approved by
the Engineer. The reels on site shall only be accepted if the relaxation values

determined by the tests are equal to or lower than the specified relaxation class of BS
5896.
2. These requirements shall be additional to any other requirements of the Contract.
B. testing OF GROUT:
1. General Conditions – The grouts shall be tested by competent personnel experienced

in the subject, and in laboratory conditions of temperature and humidity as follows:
Temperature (20 ± 2) °C
Humidity > 65% R.H.
The grout for the tests shall be made from the materials specified in and mixed in
accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The temperature of the
freshly mixed grout is to be given in all test reports.
2. Fluidity Test – Immersion Method
Principle – The test consists of measuring the time a plunger needs to drop through a
defined amount of grout in a tube.
Apparatus
• Calibrated immersion equipment according to figure 1.

• Wooden measuring rod according to figure 1.
Calibration Procedures – The immersion equipment shall be calibrated with glycerol

(analytical grade) having a density of 1.23 T/M³ at 20 ºC. The temperature of the
room, immersion equipment and glycerol shall be (20 ± 1) ºC during the calibration.
The cylinder shall be filled with about 1.9 liters of glycerol up to approximately
250mm below the rim. After filling the immersion equipment the glycerol shall be
allowed to rest for about 1 hour. The plunger then shall be immersed to expel any air
bubbles from the glycerol, which may have been introduced during the filling of the
cylinder.
After one hour the plunger shall be positioned so that its stop on the tail rod lies on
the spacer placed at the top of the tube. The spacer shall then be pulled away to allow
the plunger to sink to the top of the tube. The immersion time (the time taken for the
plunger to sink shall be recorded in seconds to the nearest second.
The calibration shall be repeated at least 3 times.
The mean value of all measured immersion times shall be (34 ± 1)s. If the mean
value deviates for this figure, the weight of the plunger shall be increased where t
>35s or educed where t <33s. This is done by varying the quantity of the lead pellets
in the plunger. Repeated calibration procedures shall be delayed for at least 30
minutes to ensure expulsion of any air bubbles that may be have been introduced
during a preceding calibration procedure.
Test Procedure
Preparation – The immersion equipment shall be calibrated before it is used.

Calibration of the immersion equipment shall be performed subsequently once a year
and/or after any damage.

Directly before the test, the inside of the tube and the plunger shall be slightly wetted.
Procedure – The cylinder shall be filled with approximately 1.9 litter of grout up to
approximately 260mm below the rim, so that on introduction the plunger is fully
immersed when its stop on the tail rod lies on the spacer placed at the top of the tube.
The spacer should be pulled away to allow the plunger to sink to the stop on the tube.
Thereafter the plunger should be raised back to its initial position, the spacer inserted
and again pulled away. The immersion time shall be measured, i.e. the time it takes
for the plunger to sink to the point where its tail stop touches on top of the tube. The
immersion times of the grout shall be measured immediately after the mixing process
and after a further 30 minutes. For the latter test, unused grout from the same mix as
that used for the former immersion test shall be used. The grout is to be kept in
motion while carrying out all tests. Each test shall be carried out three times in
succession with the same filling.
Reporting the Results – the result shall be reported as the average of the immersion
times to the nearest second of the second and third immersion, i.e. ignoring the first
immersion time.
3. Fluidity Test – Cone Method
Principle – The fluidity of grout, expressed in seconds, is measured by the time

necessary for a stated quantity of grout to pass through the orifice of the cone, under
stated conditions.
Apparatus – The following apparatus is required for the test:
a) Cone – A cone of dimensions shown in figure 2. The cone shall be robust

and manufactured from materials not reactive with any duct grout materials
specified in these Specifications. The volume of the cone (excluding the
cylindrical portions at top and bottom) shall be 1.7 litters ± 10%.
b) Sieving Medium – The sieving medium aperture shall be 1.5mm and the
medium shall be fitted as shown in figure 2.
c) Stopwatch.
d) Container of 1 liter capacity.
Test Procedure
Preparation – The cone shall be mounted with its axis vertical and its largest diameter
uppermost. The sieving medium shall be fixed at the position indicated in figure 2.
During the test the cone shall be prevented from vibrating the container under the
cone outlet. All surfaces of the cone shall be clean and slightly moistened. Close the
lower cone orifice.
Procedure – Pour 1.5 liters of the grout through the sieving medium into the cone
sufficiently slowly to prevent the build-up of air in the grout in the cone. Open the
lower cone orifice and at the same time, start the stopwatch. Measure the time taken
to the nearest 0.5s to fill the container. The presence of lumps on the sieving medium
shall be reported. Two tests shall be carried out, the second 30 minutes thereafter or
alternatively at the end of the grouting period.
Reporting of Results – Report the time taken to the nearest 0.5s. Report also the
presence of lumps.
4. Bleeding Tests

Principle – The test consists in measuring the quantity of water remaining on the
surface of the grout, which has been allowed to stand protected from evaporation.
Apparatus – A transparent 100 ml cylinder 25mm in diameter and 250mm in height

graduated in ml. Alternatively a transparent cylinder 50mm in diameter and 200mm
in height graduated in mm.
Procedure
Preparation – Place the cylinder on a surface free from shocks or vibration. The grout
used may be from the same batch as that used for the fluidity test.
Procedure for 25mm diameter cylinder - Pour 95ml to 100ml of grout into the
cylinder. Note the precise level of the grout (v) ignoring the meniscus. After 3 hours,
measure the quantity of water on top of the grout (vl). Taking appropriate measures
to prevent evaporation. The test is carried out on one sample of grout.
Procedure for 50mm diameter cylinder - Pour grout into the cylinder to a height of
approximately 150mm. Note the height to the top of the grout (h) ignoring the
meniscus. After 3 hours, measure the height of water on top of the grout (hl) taking
appropriate measures to prevent evaporation. The test is carried out on one sample of
grout.
Reporting of Results – Bleeding at the end of 3 hours is given by:
vl x 100% for 25mm diameter cylinder

v
and
hl x 100% for 50mm diameter cylinder
h
where
vl is the volume of water on the surface of the grout after 3 hours in ml)
v is the initial volume of grout (in ml)
hl is the height of water on the surface of the grout after 3 hours (in ml)
h is the initial height of grout (in mm)
The report shall state the temperature at the time of test.
5. Volume Change Test
Principle – The volume change is measured as a percentage of the volume of grout

between the start and the end of the test. The test measures mainly the volume
change caused by segregation or expansion.
The grout used in this test may have been used for the bleeding test (see Test 4).
Cylinder Method

Apparatus – A transparent cylinder 50mm in diameter and 200mm in height as

required for test 4.
Procedure – Place the cylinder on a surface free from shocks and vibration. Fill it
with the grout to a height (h). Twenty-four hours after filling the cylinder measure
the height (h2) to determine the change in volume.
Reporting of Results – The volume change at the end of 24 hours is given by:
h2 − h
Where x100%
h
h is the initial height of grout (in mm)
h2 is the height of grout after 24 hours (in mm)
Can Method
Apparatus
a) Three cans, 120mm high and approximately 100mm in diameter, with lids
capable of preventing the loss of moisture.
b) Measuring rod or sliding callipers
c) Plates
• Stop plate for placing on the can with a diameter of 120mm (see figure
3)
• Stop plate for placing on the grout with a diameter of 96mm (see
figure 4)
d) Filling gauge 100mm high
Procedure – Place the cans on a surface free of vibration and heat radiation and store
for 24 hours. Immediately after mixing pour the grout into each can using the filling
gauge, to a depth of 100mm. The measurement of the distance form the top edge of
the can to the top of the grout is to be taken:
• Immediately after the containers are filled and

• 24 hours after the containers are filled by one of the following
methods:
a) Measurement with the Stop Plate on the Can – immediately
after the cans have been filled with grout, measure the distance
between the surface of the grout and the stop plate on the can in
at least six places with the depth gauge (first measurement).
The marking must coincide with the top edge of the can
(reference point). Then the cans are sealed by covering with the
lid weighted with approximately 300g until the second
measurement is carried out 24 hours after the filling of the cans.
b) Measurement with the Stop Plate on the Grout – Immediately
after filling the cans, put the stop plate (figure4) on the fresh
grout and measure with the depth gauge the distance between
this plate and the top edge of the can in at least six places (first
measurement). Then the cans are sealed. The second
measurement shall be carried out 24 hours after the filling of the
cans. In the second measurement the distance between the stop
plate and the top edge of can is measured at the same places as
for the first measurement. After the second measurement the

cans are sealed as before, and used as necessary for the

compression strength tests (6).
Reporting of Results – The difference of the average values between first and second
measurement(s) in mm corresponds at 100mm grout level to the volume change in
percent and is reported as the percentage change in volume. Report the percentage
change in volume as the average of the three containers to the nearest 0.1%. Report
increase of volume as (+) and decrease as (-).
6. Compression Strength Test
a) Compression Strength Test - Prism
Principle – The compression strength of grout in this test (which is an adaptation to

grouts of the mechanical tests described in BS EN 196-1) is determined on the broken
halves of prisms.
Apparatus
a. Mixer for grout in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications

for hatching and mixing of grout.
b. Air conditioned cabinet at (20 ± 1) °C and (95 ± 5) % relative humidity.
c. Test machine and the device in accordance with 4.7 and 4.8 of B.S. EN 196-
1.
d. Metal molds in accordance with 4.5 of BS EN 196-1.
e. Metal straight edge in accordance with figure 3 of BS EN 196-1.
Procedure
Molding of the Test Specimens – File moulds and accessories shall be prepared and
the specimens made in accordance with BS EN 196-1, with the exception noted
below.
Each mould (fitted with a hopper) shall be filled with the prepared grout. As an
exception to the procedure in B.S. EN 196-1 and in view of the liquidity of the grout
the test specimens shall not be subjected to any vibration or shock so as to prevent
rapid deterioration of the grout (loss of grout, drying out, bleeding or sedimentation).
Remove the hopper gently. Immediately strike off the excess grout with the metal
straight edge held almost vertically and moved slowly, with a transverse sawing
motion once in each direction. Smooth the surface of the specimens using the same
straight edge held almost flat.
Label or mark moulds to identify the specimens.
Curing of Test Specimens – The curing of test specimens shall be carried out in
accordance with BS EN 196-1, until they are tested.
Compression Test – The compression tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS
EN 196-1. The compression strength shall be measured on six test specimens from
three prisms broken in flexure.
Reporting of Results – The report shall provide all the results of the compression
tests, in Mpa. The value obtained for each test shall be the mean of the individual
results.

b) Compression Strength Test – Cylinders
Principle – The compressive strength of grout in this test is determined on the three
cylinders used in the volume change test given in Test 5.
Apparatus
a) The cans as described in Test 5.

b) An air conditioning cabinet as described in Test 6.
c) A compression test machine as described in BS EN 196-1
d) Implements for sawing and grinding test specimens.
Procedure
After measuring the volume change (see 5) the three cylinders shall be stored in the
air conditioning cabinet at (20 ± 1) °C until they are to be prepared for test.
Immediately prior to test the specimens shall be carefully demolded.
Each specimen is prepared for test by sawing through the cylinder near the upper
surface and then grinding both circular surfaces of the cylinder until the disc to be
loaded in the test has a thickness of 80mm.
Each specimen shall then be placed in the compression test machine and loaded, at a
uniform rate of 0.5 Mpa/s, on its ends until the maximum load (Fc) is reached.
Reporting of Results – The compressive strength Rc is calculated in Mpa from
Rc = Fc / A
Where
Fc is the failure load
A is the cross sectional area
And shall be measured on three specimens, the mean value of which shall be reported
as the compressive strength.
7. Frequency of Testing – The testing of the grout made from certified or otherwise
quality assured materials shall be carried out prior to the start of grouting operations
and at the following minimum of testing in the course of grouting.
Bleeding: 2 tests per day. One sample is to be taken at the mixer and one sample at
the duct outlet when the grout there has a satisfactory fluidity value.
Volume Change: 1 test per day.

Strength: 1 test per 7 days or a minimum of two tests per grouting operation
whichever is greater.
Fluidity: 1 test per 8 hours.


Figure 2: Cone for Fluidity Test.

Figure 4: Plate on the Grout.

SECTION 03532 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes cement concrete toppings for internal use as follows::
1. Standard aggregate concrete floor topping
1. Division 1 Sections for contractual requirements.

2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs-on-grade concrete construc-
tion and finish.
3. Division 3 Section "Cement-Based Screed" for cementitious screed
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"
5. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for medium-set and thickset mortar beds for tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each stamped concrete topping mix. Include alternative mix designs
when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other cir-
cumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on compre-
hensive testing of current materials:
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following ma-
terials complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.

2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Applied finish materials.
6. Curing compounds.
E. Prepare shop drawings showing proposed patterns and colours indicating embeded ser-
vices, utilities and proposed joints.
F. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is ap-

proved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - Page 1 of 11

G. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out suc-
cessfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s repre-
sentative.
1.4 DEFINITION
A. Topping: topping means a layer of cement-sand with or without coarse aggregate or other
material laid on the structural floor or roof to achieve correct level and not receive any
further finish material
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Sec-
tion with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized,
or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to re-
ceive manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses
of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
B. Ready-Mixed Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete prod-

ucts complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Engineer,

and qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indi-
cated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform ma-
terial evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
E. Mockups: Place concrete floor topping mockups to demonstrate typical joints, surface
finish, bonding, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Cast mockups approximately 10 sq. m in the location indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Engineer.
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. If Engineer determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish and
remove them from the site and cast others until mockups are approved.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other
components, and application.

B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for

substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity,
ventilation, and other conditions affecting concrete floor topping performance.
1. Place concrete floor topping only when ambient temperature and temperature of
base slabs are between 10 and 30 deg C.
B. Close areas to traffic during topping application and, after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type

materials to provide full-depth, continuous, true, and smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms that will provide uniform curvature for curves of a
radius of 30.5 m or less.
B. Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face design, size, arrangement, and confi-
guration indicated. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured
form liners.
C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treat-
ments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 STANDARD AGGREGATE TOPPING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.
B. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, and as follows:
1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free of
deleterious matter. Grade by weight to conform to ACI 302 and to pass sieves as
follows:
a. 9.5 mm: 100 percent

b. 4.8 mm: 95-100 percent
c. 2.4 mm: 80-90 percent
d. 1.2 mm: 50-75 percent
e. 600 µ m: 30-50 percent
f. 300 µ m: 10-20 percent
g. 150 µ m: 2-5 percent

2. Coarse aggregate, consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free of delete-
rious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:

C. Fibrous Reinforcement: 100 % virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing no re-

processed olefin materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use
as concrete secondary reinforcement. Proportion shall be not less than 0.9 Kg per m3 of
concrete to give the required strength. Fibrous reinforcement shall be as follows:
1. Specific gravity: 0.91

2. Tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm2
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not li-
mited to, the following:
a. Fibermesh Company; Fibermesh
D. Steel Reinforcement
1. Deformed Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 420, deformed.
3. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 420,
deformed bars; assembled with clips.
4. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 420. Cut bars
true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
5. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place.
Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from
steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater
compressive strength than concrete.
6. Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
2.3 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent wa-
ter-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.
Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. High Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494.
D. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
E. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.4 COLOR MATERIALS

A. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-

reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
B. Colored Dry-Shake Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of portland cement,

graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use coloring
pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement.
C. Colored-Powder Release Agent: Factory-packaged dry combination of surface condition-

ing and dispersing agents interground with coloring pigments that facilitates release of
stamp mats. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides in-
terground with cement.
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

Class B, 25 percent solids content, minimum.
A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752,

cork or self-expanding cork.
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
D. Sand: ASTM C 404, fine aggregate passing 1.18-mm sieve.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or

styrene butadiene.
G. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable
of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.

H. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
I. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 0.025 mm thick, clear.
2.7 TOPPING MIX
A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type
and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field
test data bases.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix de-
signs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): submit mix for approval to give a 28 day com-
pressive strength of not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be
not less than 1 : 4 by volume.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.51.
D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other

than portland cement in concrete as follows:
E. Add coloring admixture to mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended

rate, but not less than 0.90 kg/cu. m.
2.8 MIXING
A. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part portland cement and 2 parts sand with water and an acrylic-
bonding agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint
consistency.
B. Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and water in appropriate drum-type
batch machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions and
as per division 3 section “Cast In Place Concrete”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of

concrete floor topping.
B. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
the plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
C. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound
concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile
with an amplitude of 6 mm.
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor topping
manufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond
of floor topping.
3. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 13
mm and fill with semirigid joint filler.
4. To both sides of joint edges and at perimeter of existing base slab mechanically
remove a 100-mm- wide and 0- to 25-mm- deep, tapered wedge of concrete and
retexture surface .
B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with
topping surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width, joint-filler strips 13 mm below topping surface where joint
sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pave-
ment to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress
of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after placing concrete.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and
with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Comply with division 3 section “ Cast In Place Concrete for placing steel reinforcement
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface
plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless other-
wise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and
at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless
pavement terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do

not continue reinforcement through sides of strip pavement, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where in-
dicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 15.25 m, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate joint filler not less than 13 mm or more than 25 mm below finished sur-
face if joint sealant, specified in Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants," is
indicated.
3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed where possi-
ble. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections to-
gether.
4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or
other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been
placed on both sides of joint.
D. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at
joints where indicated.
1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent

concrete from bonding to one side of joint.
E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into

areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints as indicated on shop drawings for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and fi-
nishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat groov-
ing of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks
on concrete surfaces.
a. Radius: to suit final pattern and layout.
F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edg-
ing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
1. Radius: to suit final pattern and layout.
3.6 FLOOR TOPPING APPLICATION
A. Start floor topping application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
B. Fibrous Reinforcement: For fibrous-reinforced toppings, apply fibrous reinforcing as per

manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Deferred Floor Topping: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding
slurry into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.6 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place
floor topping while slurry is still tacky.
D. Existing Concrete: Apply epoxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs to a thickness of 1.6 to 3 mm, without
puddling. Place floor topping while adhesive is still tacky.
E. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to
achieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop
within pour strip.
1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane free of humps or hollows.
F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as concrete floor

topping can support equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill
low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until concrete floor topping surface
has a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and
consolidate concrete floor topping by power-driven trowel without allowing
blisters to develop. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is
smooth and uniform in texture.
a. Finish surfaces to specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and

levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and
levelness, F(L) 15, and notify independent testing agency to permit
measurement within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155M for a randomly
trafficked floor surface.
b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between surface and an
unleveled freestanding 3-m- long straightedge, resting on 2 high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 6 mm.
G. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface
plane of concrete floor topping, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where concrete
floor topping is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete floor
topping.
H. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped
with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm- wide joints into
concrete floor topping when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before random contraction cracks develop.
1. Form joints in concrete floor topping over contraction joints in base slabs, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth equal to topping thickness and
not less than one-fourth of base-slab thickness.
3. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of concrete floor topping
thickness, but not less than 13 mm deep.

3.7 INITIAL CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General: Wetting concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing opera-
tions is prohibited.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disap-
peared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Finish
surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat sur-
face to uniform granular texture.
C. Colored Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply colored dry-shake ma-
terial to plastic concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
follows:
1. Uniformly apply at a rate of 49 kg/10 sq. m unless greater amount is recommend-

ed by manufacturer to match pavement color.
2. Distribute approximately two-thirds of colored dry-shake material and embed by
floating. Follow with a second application of colored dry-shake material distri-
buted at right angles to the first to ensure uniform color, and embed by floating.
3. After final floating, apply a light-trowel finish followed by a broom finish. Apply
curing compound immediately after final finishing.
3.8 PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperatures.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete floor topping surfaces in

hot, dry, or windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying
floor topping, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete floor topping. Cure by one or a
combination of the following methods, according to concrete floor topping
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with
water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover
topping surfaces and edges with 300-mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 300 mm, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure
for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by
power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, once topping has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim
semirigid joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.10 REPAIRS
A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including
areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of concrete floor

toppings shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as
follows:
1. Sample Sets: At point of placement, a set of 3 molded-cube samples shall be taken

from the topping mix for the first 93 sq. m, plus 1 set of samples for each
subsequent 464 sq. m of topping, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples
for each day's placement. Samples shall be tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compliance with compressive-strength requirements.
2. Concrete floor topping shall be tested for delamination by dragging a steel chain
over the surface.
3. Concrete floor topping shall be tested for compliance with surface flatness and
levelness tolerances.
C. Remove and replace applications of concrete floor topping where test results indicate that
it does not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

SECTION 03544 - CEMENT-BASED SCREED
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Screed: a layer of cement-sand, or concrete mix, and other materials, with or without rein-
forcement, laid on the structural floor or roof slab to achieve correct level and receive
another finish material.
1.3 SUMMARY
1. Standard aggregate concrete floor screed underlayment for interior finish flooring.

2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Floor Toppings" for cementitious wear toppings applied
over base slabs
3. Division 9 Sections "Resinous Flooring" and "High-Performance Coatings".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or li-
censed by the product manufacturer to install his product. Include project names and ad-
dresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manu-
facturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other compo-
nents, and application.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration

from moisture or other detrimental effects.
CEMENT-BASED SCREED 03544 - Page 1 of 7

A. Environmental Limitations: For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's written

recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and
humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting screed performance.
B. Close areas to traffic during screed application and for appropriate time period after applica-
tion as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate cement-based screed with requirements of finish flooring products, including

adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCREED MATERIALS
A. Site-Prepared Mix: Cement-sand mix with admixtures applied over structural deck to re-
ceive another finishing material.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.

ASTM C 109M.
3. Slump: Maximum 125 mm
4. Screed Additive: Plasticisers and water-retaining agents formulated for use with
screed when applied to substrate and conditions indicated, and to approval.
5. Mix proportions: submit mix for approval to give a 28 day compressive strength of
not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be not less than 1 : 4 by vo-
lume.
6. water-cement ratio: adjust ratio to achieve the required compressive strength and
slump.
7. Where the thickness of the screed exceeds 70 mm, use fine concrete if directed. Sub-
mit mix proportions for approval.
B. Premix Mix: Factory prepared mix with fibrous reinforcement and admixtures applied over
structural deck to receive another finishing material.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III.

C 109M.
3. Water-cement ratio: Adjust ratio to achieve the required compressive strength and
slump and as per manufacturer’s printed instructions.
4. Where the thickness of the screed exceeds 70 mm, use fine concrete if directed. Sub-
mit mix proportions for approval.
C. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33 and as follows:
1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free of de-
leterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:


e. 600 µm: 30-50 percent
f. 300 µm: 10-20 percent
g. 150 µm: 2-5 percent
2. Coarse aggregate, consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free of delete-
rious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 12.5 mm : 100 percent

b. 9.5 mm : 30-50 percent
c. 4.8 mm : 0-15 percent
d. 2.4 mm : 0-5 percent
D. Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
E. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 21 deg C.
F. Fibrous Reinforcement: 100 % virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing no repro-

cessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use as
concrete secondary reinforcement. Proportion shall be 0.9 Kg per m3 of concrete. Fibrous
reinforcement shall be as follows:
1. Specific gravity: 0.91

2. Tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm2
to, the following:
a. Fibermesh Company; Fibermesh
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weigh-
ing approximately 305 g/sq. m when dry.
B. Water: Potable.
2.3 DESIGN MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of lightweight concrete screed by either la-
boratory trial batch or field-test data methods. For trial batch method, use a qualified inde-
pendent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or ce-
mentitious material permitted by ACI 301.
A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork
or self-expanding cork.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or sty-
rene butadiene.
E. Admixtures: admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 % water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and compatible with other admixture
and cementitious materials. Do not admixtures containing calcium chloride.
F. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
2.5 MIXING
A. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part portland cement and 2 parts sand with water and an acrylic-
bonding agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint consistency.
B. Screed Mix: Design mix, with or without admixture, to produce concrete floor topping ma-
terial with the following characteristics:
1. Compressive strength: at 28 days not less than 20 Mpa.

2. Slump: maximum 125 mm
3. Mix proportions : submit mix for approval to give a 28 day compressive strength
of not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be not less than 1:4 by
volume.
4. Maximum w/cm ratio: 0.51.
5. Mix screed materials, admixtures and water in appropriate drum-type batch machine
mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of screed.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that base slabs meet finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound con-
crete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an
amplitude of 6 mm.
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to topping manufacturer's written in-
structions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond of
topping.

3. Saw cut existing contraction and construction joints to a depth of 13 mm and fill with
epoxy joint filler.
B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with screed
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips 13 mm below screed surface where joint sea-
lants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length
is required, lace or clip sections together.
3.3 SCREED APPLICATION
A. Start screed application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
B. Fibrous Reinforcement: For reinforced screeds, apply fibrous reinforcing as per manufactur-
er’s written instructions.
C. Deferred Screed: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding slurry into
dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.5 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place screed while
slurry is still tacky.
D. Place screed continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight con-
tact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip.
1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane free of humps or hollows.
E. Finishing: Consolidate surface with hand float as soon as screed can support equipment and
operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and re-
straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
screed by power-driven trowel so no blisters develop. Continue troweling passes and
restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in texture.
a. Finish surfaces to specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness,
F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness,
F(L) 15, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155
(ASTM E 1155M) for a randomly trafficked floor surface.
b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between screed surface and an
unleveled freestanding 3-m- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 6.4 mm.
F. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
screed, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where screed is
placed against hardened or partially hardened screed.

G. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm- wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before screed develops
random contraction cracks.
1. Form joints in screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of screed thickness, but not
less than 13 mm deep.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed screed from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Begin curing immediately after finishing screed. Cure by one or a combination of the fol-
lowing methods, according to screed manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with
water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover screed
surfaces and edges with 300-mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
3.5 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install epoxy joint filler, according to manufactur-
er's written instructions, once screed has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install epoxy joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler
flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.6 REPAIRS
A. Defective Screed: Repair and patch defective screed areas, including areas that have not
bonded to concrete substrate.
A. Sample Sets: At point of placement, testing and inspecting agency shall take a set of 3
molded-cube samples from the screed mix for the first 90 sq. m plus 1 set of samples for
each subsequent 460 sq. m of screed, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples for each
day's placement. Samples shall be tested according to ASTM C 109M for compliance with
compressive strength requirements.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Protect screeds from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use
protective methods and materials approved by Engineer, including temporary covering.
B. Clean screeds not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to in-
stall final finishes.

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Pre-faced concrete masonry units.
3. Mortar and grout.
4. Ties and anchors.
5. Embedded flashing.
6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry
anchors.
3. Division 4 Section "Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies" for glass block.
4. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for installing anchor sections of adjustable
masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.
5. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at tops of
masonry walls and at openings in masonry walls.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days indi-
cated in part 2. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms ac-
cording to ASTM C 1314.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with spe-
cified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - Page 1 of 21

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to
ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention,
and ASTM C 91 for air content.
3. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special
applications.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Pre-faced CMUs.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following showing the full range of exposed colors, tex-
tures, and dimensions:
1. Exposed CMUs.
2. Pre-faced CMUs.
3. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,
source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix
proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup
constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such
deviations are specifically brought to the attention of the Engineer and approved in
writing.
F. Include Qualification Data: For testing agency.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test re-
sults of the following for compliance with requirements indicated:
1. Each type of masonry unit required.
a. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area com-

pressive strength of masonry units.
2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.

3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476.

Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
I. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area
compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
a. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area com-

pressive strength of masonry units.
8. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer,
brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
9. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net-
area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net-area compressive
strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
10. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
11. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.
J. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for
water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply
with compressive strength requirement.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Engineer,

qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented ac-
cording to ASTM E 548.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from sin-
gle source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from singlemanufacturer for each cementitious com-
ponent and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
E. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform

the following preconstruction testing:
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per
ASTM C 140.
2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, per ASTM C 1314.
3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270.
F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to

those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing
and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as
acceptable to Engineer.
G. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements" for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately
1500 mm long by 1200 mm high by full thickness.
2. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;
aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by Engineer in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are
H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for each type of unit masonry construction in sizes approximately
2400 mm long by 1800 mm high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes
and accessories.
a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 400 mm long in exterior wall mockup.

b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 600-mm length in corner of wall
mockup where directed by Engineer, approximately 400 mm down from top of
mockup, with a 300-mm length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry
above half of flashing).
c. Include pre-faced CMUs on one face of interior unit masonry wall mockup.
2. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.

3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and
aesthetic qualities of workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities


b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are
I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Unit Masonry Warranty: Provide warranty in which Manufacturer and Contractor are jointly
and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations, all or any part
of the unit masonry which fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to cracking, failure of bonding
to concrete structure, and failure to support safely the required loads.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an en-
closed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of
installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time
of delivery.
B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with wea-
therproof cover.
C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of
dirt and oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at
least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be
left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact
with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings
spread on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted
and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial
shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 38 deg C, or 32 deg C with a wind velocity

greater than 13 km/h, do not spread mortar beds more than 1200 mm ahead of
masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do
not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for
fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by
equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose.
B. CMU units designations: Currently, six ASTM standards apply to units intended primarily
for construction of concrete masonry walls, beams, columns, or specialty applications:
1. Type of Unit ASTM Designation

2. Concrete C 55
3. Non-load bearing Concrete Masonry Units C 129
4. Catch Basins and Manhole Units C 139
5. Prefaced Concrete Units C 744
C. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 129 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 13.1 MPa [7.5 MPa on gross area].
a. Normal-weight units: more than 125 lb/cu. ft. (2002 kg/cu. m):

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Pre-faced concrete masonry: light weight hollow units with smooth facing
4. Fire rating for concrete masonry units including 15 mm cement plaster facing on both
sides shall be as follows:
a. 100 mm solid blocks 2 hrs.

b. 150 mm solid blocks 4 hrs.
c. 100 mm hollow blocks 0.5 hrs.
d. 150 mm hollow blocks 1.00 hrs.
e. 200 mm hollow blocks 2.00 hrs.
5. Typical STC rating of concrete masonry walls are as follows:
Thickness w 15 mm plaster
Hollow kg/m2 bare one side both sides
(PSF)
100 mm 90 (18.5) 43 44 45
150 mm 135 45 46 47
(27.75)
200 mm 180 (37) 47 48 49
250 mm 225 48 49 50
(46.25)
300 mm 270 (55.5) 50 51 52
Thickness w 15 mm plaster
Solid kg/m2 bare one side both sides
(PSF)
100 mm 200 47 48 48
(41.50)
150 mm 300 51 52 53
(62.25)
200 mm 400 (83) 55 56 57
250 mm 500 58 59 60
(103.75)
300 mm 600 62 63 64
(124.5)
6. Thermal conductivity for Lightweight units, K: less than 0.29 Watt/m2 deg K
7. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:
a. 200 mm nominal; 190 mm actual.
8. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the
range represented by Engineer's sample.
9. Where masonry units are to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-
face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
D. Insulated Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 129 (non-load bearing) and as follows:
1. Sandwich construction comprising two leaves of 95 mm masonry units bonded to an

inner core of 60 mm injected expanded polystyrene thermal insulation.

2. thermal insulation value: U Value 0.474 w/m2

3. compressive strength: 7.5 N/m2
4. injected polystyrene Density: 22-24 kg/m3
5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
to, the following:
a. CBIS/Korfil www.cbisinc.com
b. Thermo Block; Emirates Concrete Products (Emcon)
http://www.emconblocks.com
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color in-
dicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: Do not use lime.
C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand
or crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 6 mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
1.18-mm sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend in-
gredients before delivering to Project site. Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specifica-
tion as specified in other Part 2 Articles.
G. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification as specified in
other Part 2 Articles.
H. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
(Grade 420).
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: (4.76-mm) diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: (4.76-mm) diameter.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than (407 mm) o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with
single pair of side rods.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/
A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, Z180 zinc
coating.
4. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
5. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
6. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
7. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304.
B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22 mm wide with corrugations having a
wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made from 1.52-mm-
thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
C. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 16-mm cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent
90 degrees and extend 50 mm parallel to face of veneer.
D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 100 mm wide.
1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 50 mm long
may be used for masonry constructed from solid units.
2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections
having a maximum adjustment of 32 mm.
3. Wire: Fabricate from 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 25 mm of masonry
face, made from 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
F. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of
wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and
attached to tie section; formed from 2.66-mm- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 25 mm of masonry
face, made from 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

3. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22 mm wide with corrugations
having a wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made from
2.66-mm- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for
inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 25 mm of
masonry face.
G. Partition Top anchors: 2.66-mm- thick metal plate with 9.5-mm- diameter metal rod 152
mm long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to
move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
H. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 38 mm wide by 6.35 mm thick by 610 mm long,
with ends turned up 51 mm or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
I. Where indicated and directed by Engineer, provide Stainless-Steel for ties and anchors.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated,
fabricated from 0.86-mm, galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6; with ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip
galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
D. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.
3. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group
A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.
2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.40 mm thick.

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 2400 mm long minimum, but not
exceeding 3.7 m. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel ,
with ribs at 76-mm intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar
bond.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail) or Cheney 3-

Way Flashing (Sawtooth).
2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking
Thruwall Flashing.
3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically Keyed Flashing.
4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where

indicated to receive counterflashing.
5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate
by extending flashing 13 mm out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees.
6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated and directed by
Engineer. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 19 mm at exterior face of wall
and down into joint 6 mm to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
7. Fabricate metal drip edges for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of
same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 76 mm into wall with hemmed
inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper
surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water.
8. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76 mm into wall and
13 mm out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees.
9. Metal Sealant Stop where indicated and directed by Engineer: Fabricate from
stainless steel. Extend at least 76 mm into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At
exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 19 mm and down into joint 6 mm
to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
10. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene

terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 1.0 mm thick.

following:
1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall

Flashing.
2) Firestone Specialty Products; FlashGuard.
3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.
4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Epra-Max EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.
5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; EPDM Flashing.
C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal
flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use
metal flashing with a drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge.
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.

D. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking
CMU web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers
that prevent UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed
to be built into mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls
and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Blok-Flash.
E. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type
recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
F. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to
each other and to substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene,
urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, Made from styrene-

butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or
PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406, designed to fit standard sash block
and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning ma-
sonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 3.77-mm
steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars
indicated.

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or

D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, re-
tarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use mortar cement mortar.
B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
tion:
1. Wet mix life: <1.5 hours

2. Initial adhesion at 28 days: > 0.3N/mm2
3. Bending strength: around 1N/ mm2
4. Compressive strength : not less than 5 ±1 N/ mm2
5. Min. cement sand mix: 1:3-4
6. Testing: ASTM C 780
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification. For job-
mixed mortars, minimum properties shall be as follows:

D. Property specification ASTM C 270
Mortar Type Average Compressive Air Content

Strength at 28 days, min, Max %
psi (MPa)
Mortar Cement M 2500 (17.2) 12

S 1800 (12.4) 12
N 750 (5.2) 14
Aggregate Ratio (Measured in Damp, Loose Conditions): Not less than 2 1⁄4 and not more
than 3 1⁄2 the sum of the separate volumes of cementitious materials
1. Minimum water retention 75 %

2. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
3. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
4. For mortar parge coats, use Type S or Type N.
5. For exterior, above-grade, non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior non-
load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated,
use Type N.
E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that
will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of
grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 14 MPa.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 203 to 279 mm as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of
widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing
masonry.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 12 mm or
minus 6 mm.

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 12 mm.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 6 mm in a story height or 12 mm total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 6
mm in 3 m, or 12 mm maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9 mm in 6
m, or 12 mm maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 6
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by
more than 1.5 mm except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 3
mm, with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by
more than 3 mm.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 9
mm or minus 6 mm.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 3 mm. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by
more than 3 mm.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight
line by more than 1.5 mm from one masonry unit to the next.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond unless otherwise indicated; do not use units with less than nominal 100-mm
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not
less than 50 mm. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use
units with less than nominal 100-mm horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those
in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to
receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before
laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 600 mm under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,
and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or
roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout
cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout
to provide 13-mm clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space
anchors 1200 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile,
slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above
approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course
on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or
slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other
than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
16 mm on exterior side of walls, 13 mm elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 150
mm.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 406 mm o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 203 mm o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 203 mm above and below wall openings and
extending 305 mm beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural
steel or concrete to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 25 mm wide between masonry and structural
steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and
other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 610 mm o.c. vertically and 915 mm
o.c. horizontally.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry
progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision
to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control
joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of
sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 10 mm.
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
3.9 LINTELS
A. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 305 mm for brick-
size units and 610 mm for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other
supporting lintels.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 200 mm at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 FLASHING
A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing
on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 150 mm into masonry at
each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 150 mm at ends and turn up not less
than 50 mm to form end dams.
3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 38
mm or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
4. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed
edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges
located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face
of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at
CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to
be built into masonry.
3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and
curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them
during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 1520 mm.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 464 sq. m of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according
to ASTM C 780.
G. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days
and at 28 days.
3.13 PARGING
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a
total thickness of 19 mm. Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to
ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface
variation of 3 mm per 300 mm. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units;
install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with
fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 100 mm in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 450 mm of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

SECTION 04815 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glass block set in mortar.

2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel channel frames and loose steel
lintels at glass unit masonry assemblies.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows" for aluminum windows installed within
glass unit masonry assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include glass block , cementitious
materials, , waterproofing admixtures for mortar, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for glass unit masonry, including
vertical and horizontal coursing, anchors, reinforcement, and expansion strips.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's actual glass-block units and joint materials
involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: Panels consisting of four full-size glass-block units with mortar
joints.
1. Provide Samples for each form, pattern, and color of glass block and color of joint
material indicated or selected by Engineer.
A. Source Limitations for Glass Block: Obtain each type and pattern of glass block through
one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations for Accessory Materials: Obtain each cementitious material, admixture
and accessory component through one source from a single manufacturer and each
aggregate from one source or producer.
GLASS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04815 - Page 1 of 7

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of typical exterior and interior panel, 1200 by 1200 mm in size.
A. Store glass block in unopened cartons on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with
waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do
not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and
oil.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of glass unit masonry assemblies only when
ambient and material temperatures are 5 deg C or higher.
1. Maintain temperature in installation areas at 5 deg C or above for 48 hours after

installing.
A. Sequence and coordinate completion of glass unit masonry assemblies so sealants can be
installed immediately after mortar has attained final set.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS BLOCK
A. Hollow Glass Block: Hollow units made from transparent glass, with manufacturer's
standard edge coating.

to, the following:
a. Fidenza Vetraria SpA.

b. K.I.G.
c. Mulia.
d. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd.
e. Oberland Glas AG, Bauglas Div.; Solaris Glasstein.

f. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

g. J. Weck GmbH.
2. Glass-Block With Plastic Trim
a. SMEB- Curbiver; Bativer
3. Glass Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

4. Pattern: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
5. Edge-Coating Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
6. Unit Sizes: Manufacturer's standard sizes for Thick-faced hollow units corresponding
to nominal sizes indicated on Drawings.
B. Glass Blocks With Plastic Trim: Transparent or translucent proprietary hollow glass blocks
with plastic trim, providing good thermal insulation and protection against burglary and fire,
to the sizes, pattern and color shown on the Drawings and to approval. Provide
manufacturer's standard accessories.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, natural color, white, or a blend to
produce mortar color indicated.
1. Where joints are indicated to be raked out and pointed, gray cement may be used for
setting mortar.
B. Hydrated Lime: Do not use lime.
C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
D. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
tion as specified in other Part 2 Articles.
E. Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification as specified in other Part 2 Ar-
ticles.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for
use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in
masonry mortar.

to, the following:
a. Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.

b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
c. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
G. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, with 100 percent passing 2.36-mm sieve.
1. For pointing mortar and joints narrower than 6 mm, use aggregate graded with 100
percent passing 1.18-mm sieve.
2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

H. Water-Repellent Admixture: One of the following as approved by Engineer for type of

application:
1. Manufacturer's standard dry mixture of stearates, water-reducing agents, and fine

aggregates intended to reduce capillarity in mortar.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Hydrocide Powder.
2. Liquid polymeric water-repellent mortar admixture that does not reduce flexural bond
strength of mortar.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
1) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-

Block Mortar Admixture.
2) Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 8510 Bonding Admix.
3) Master Builders, Inc.; Color Cure Mortar Admix or Rheomix Rheopel.
I. Water: Potable.
2.3 GLASS UNIT MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Panel Reinforcement: Ladder-type units, butt welded, not lapped and welded; complying
with ASTM A 951 in straight lengths of not less than 3 m, and as follows:
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire.

2. Exterior Walls: Stainless-steel wire.
3. Wire Size: W1.7 or 3.8-mm diameter.
4. Width: 50 mm.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 407 mm apart.
B. Panel Anchors: Glass-block manufacturer's standard perforated steel strips, 0.9 mm by 44

mm wide by 600 mm long, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
C. Fasteners, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-
steel fasteners at exterior walls and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at interior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
D. Carbon-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6 with hex nuts, ASTM A 563M, if
applicable.
E. Stainless-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 738M, Alloy Group A1 or A4 with hex nuts,

ASTM F 836M, if applicable.
F. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide metal expansion sleeve anchors or metal impact expansion
anchors of type and size necessary for installation indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Asphalt Emulsion: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 or

ASTM D 1227.
H. Plastic-Foam Expansion Strips: Polyethylene foam complying with requirements of glass-

block manufacturer; 9 mm thick by 100 mm wide.
1. Use plastic-foam expansion strips for non-fire-rated assemblies.
I. Sealants: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer

and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Sealant Accessories: Provide sealant accessories, including primers, bond-breaker tape, and
cylindrical sealant backing, that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
2.4 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, or antifreeze compounds, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.

2. For pointing mortar in exterior panels, use water-repellent admixture according to
admixture manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification for Type S mortar.
1. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a

mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Mix mortar to produce a stiff
but workable consistency that is drier than mortar for brick or concrete masonry.
Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
C. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
tion:
1. Wet mix life: <1.5 hours

2. Initial adhesion at 28 days:> 0.3N/mm2
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with
other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement
products.
1. Mix to match Engineer's sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine sills, jambs, and heads surrounding glass unit masonry assemblies for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLING GLASS BLOCK WITH MORTAR
A. Apply a heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to sill and adhere expansion strips to jambs and
heads with asphalt emulsion. Allow asphalt emulsion to dry before placing mortar. Trim
expansion strips to width required to fit glass block and to full lengths of heads and jambs.
B. Set glass block with completely filled bed and head joints, with no furrowing, accurately
spaced and coordinated with other construction. Maintain 6-mm exposed joint widths,
C. Install panel reinforcement in horizontal joints at spacing indicated and continuously from
end to end of panels; comply with the following requirements:
1. Vertical Spacing of Panel Reinforcement for Exterior Panels: Every other course but
not more than 407 mm o.c., starting with first course above sill.
2. Vertical Spacing of Panel Reinforcement for Interior Panels: Not more than 407 mm
o.c..
3. Do not bridge expansion joints with panel reinforcement.
4. Place panel reinforcement in joints immediately above and below all openings within
glass unit masonry assemblies.
5. Lap panel reinforcement not less than 150 mm if more than 1 length is necessary.
6. Embed panel reinforcement in mortar bed by placing lower half of mortar bed first,
pressing panel reinforcement into place and covering with upper half of mortar bed.
D. Install panel anchors at locations indicated and in same horizontal joints where panel
reinforcement occurs. Extend panel anchors at least 300 mm into joints, and bend within
expansion joints at edges of panels and across the head. Attach panel anchors as follows:
1. For in-place unit masonry assemblies and concrete, attach panel anchors with 6-mm-
diameter bolt-size, postinstalled anchors, 2 per panel anchor.
2. For new unit masonry assemblies, embed other ends of panel anchors, after bending
portions crossing expansion joint, in horizontal mortar joints closest in elevation to
joints in glass unit masonry assemblies containing panel anchors.
3. For steel members, attach panel anchors with 6-mm- diameter through bolts and nuts
or bolts in tapped holes in steel members.
E. Use rubber mallet to tap units into position. Do not use steel tools, and do not allow units to
come into contact with metal accessories and frames.
F. Use plastic spacers or temporary wedges in mortar joints to produce uniform joint widths
and to prevent mortar from being squeezed out of joints.
1. If temporary wedges are used, remove them after mortar has set and fill voids with
mortar.

G. Keep expansion joints free of mortar.
H. Rake out joints indicated to be pointed to a uniform depth sufficient to accommodate

pointing material, but not less than joint width.
1. If temporary wedges are used, remove them before raking out and pointing joints.
2. Point joints at both faces of exterior panels with mortar.
I. Point joints with mortar by filling raked joints and voids. Place and compact pointing
mortar in layers not more than 10 mm thick. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
1. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. Use a
smooth plastic jointer larger than joint width.
J. Clean glass unit masonry assemblies as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
immediately, using a clean, wet sponge or a scrub brush with stiff fiber bristles. Do not use
harsh cleaners, acids, abrasives, steel wool, or wire brushes when removing mortar or
cleaning glass unit masonry assemblies.
K. Install sealant at jambs, heads, mullions and other locations indicated. Prepare joints,
including installation of primer and bond-breaker tape or cylindrical sealant backing, and
apply elastomeric sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
L. Construction Tolerances: Set glass block to comply with the following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of vertical elements and arris, do not
exceed 6 mm in 3 m, 9 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
2. Variation from Level: For bed joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6
mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions
of walls and partitions, do not exceed 12 mm in 6 m or 19 mm in 12 m or more.
4. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint thickness indicated by
more than plus or minus 1.5 mm.
3.3 CLEANING
A. On surfaces adjacent to glass unit masonry assemblies, remove mortar, sealants, and other
residue resulting from glass-block installation, in a manner approved by manufacturers of
materials involved.
B. Remove excess sealants with commercial solvents of type recommended by sealant

manufacturer. Exercise care not to damage sealant in joints.
C. Perform final cleaning of glass unit masonry assemblies when surface is not exposed to
direct sunlight. Start at top of panel using generous amounts of clean water. Remove water
with clean, dry, soft cloths; change cloths frequently to eliminate dried mortar particles and
aggregate.

SECTION 04851- EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exterior stone panels secured with individual anchors.

1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete surfaces to receive stone wall
facing.
2. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry,” for masonry walls to receive stone wall facing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Stone Cladding Assembly: An exterior wall covering system consisting of
dimension stone panels together with anchors, fasteners, and sealants used to secure the stone to
the building structure and to produce a weather-resistant covering.
A. Product Data:
1. For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced
ASTM standards, and chemical analysis.
2. For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
3. Setting and jointing materials.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
with requirements for regional materials.
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone paneling system, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units.
1. Show locations and details of joints both within stone paneling system and between stone
paneling system and other finish materials.
2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction.
3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern.
D. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least five samples in each set for each type of
stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics
EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 04851 - Page 1 of 6

expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone
provided will be judged.
2. For each color of joint material required. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of
pigments used.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dimension stone cladding assembly indicated, to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For installer and professional engineer.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency, as follows:
1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, provide test data
indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance,
according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous
three years.
2. Compatibility Test Report: From manufacturers’ test laboratories, indicating that
jointing, setting and sealer materials will not discolor or adversely affect the adjoining
stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified company specializing in performing the specified work,

able to custom fabricate stone of the kind and form indicated, and employing installers having
minimum 5 years successful experience installing the stone by the methods indicated.
1. Fabricator shall employ a professional engineer to assume engineering responsibility.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional

engineer.
C. Installer Qualifications: Stone fabricator.
D. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from one
quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section, with resources to provide
materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
E. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
F. Initial Stone Selection:

1. To be selected from uncut stone at quarry by Engineer in presence of stone supplier, to

verify desired appearances. Supplier to verify sufficient quantities, inclusive of reserves
for breakage.
2. Subsequent pieces to be selected from cut blocks following Engineer’s verification at
quarry.
G. Mockups: Build 2 m by 2 m mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of each type of wall facing of not less than one structural bay.
a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of

installation.
b. Include an opening with stone returns.
c. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements in Section specifying joint
sealants.
H. Source Quality-Control Testing Service: Engage an Owner-approved qualified independent

testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below.
1. Flexural Strength Tests: ASTM C 880, performed on specimens of same thickness,

orientation of cut, and finish as installed stone. One set of test specimens is required to
be tested for every 1000 sq. m, but not fewer than 2 sets for each stone variety.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, experienced in design and

installation of this work and licensed in the place where the Project is located, to design
dimension stone cladding assembly.
B. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.
1. Stone anchors shall withstand not less than two times the weight of the stone cladding in
both compression and tension.
C. Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity loads, wind loads and equipment loads, as indicated.
D. Seismic Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 and authorities having
jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1. Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.

F. Horizontal Building Movement (Interstory Drift): Allow for maximum horizontal building
movement equal to quotient resulting from dividing floor-to-floor height at any floor by 400.
G. Shrinkage and Creep: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of building frame equal to 3
mm in 3 m.
H. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated
without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average
ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following minimum safety factors:
1. Safety Factor for Oolitic Limestone: 8.

2. Safety Factor for Dolomitic Limestone: 6.
3. Safety Factor for Concentrated Stresses: 10.
I. Design stone anchors to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working
stresses established by the following:
1. For Cast-in-Place and Post installed Fasteners in Concrete: One-fourth of tested capacity
when installed in concrete with compressive strength indicated.
2. For Post-Installed Fasteners in Masonry: One-sixth of tested capacity when installed in
masonry units indicated.
J. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection
tolerances of building's structural system specified in other Sections.
K. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as
staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.
L. Joint Appearance:
1. Joint Widths: 3 mm, uniform in width, slightly concave.

2. Joints pointed with pointing mortar, except control joints.
M. Installation Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 6 mm in
3 m, 10 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm in 12 m or more. For external corners, corners and jambs
within 6 m of an entrance, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3
mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm in 12 m or more.
2. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of
walls and partitions, do not exceed 6 mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions
indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 6 mm.
5. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus
3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 1500 mm
of each other, do not vary more than 3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever
is less from one to the other.

6. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1.5-mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Use materials that will not stain, discolor or adversely affect mortar and stone.
B. Sustainable Design:
1. Regional Materials: Provide pointing materials that comply with requirements of

Credit MR 5.
2. Maximum VOC Content: Provide sealants with VOC content in compliance with
requirements of Credit IEQ 4.1.
2.3 STONE
A. Stone Types: As selected by Engineer from the specified types. Stone to comply with the
following.
1. Limestone: ASTM C 568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone.
a. Classification: III High-Density.
B. Colors, Color Ranges and Finishes: To match Engineer's samples. Natural variations in
appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance
characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups.
C. Thickness: To comply with performance requirements and not less than thicknesses indicated.
2.4 POINTING MORTAR
A. General: Provide packaged pointing mortar or individual materials for pointing mortar mixed at
Project site, complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N or Type S as
applicable to stone type, and the following:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
a. Use low-alkali cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114, to limit staining, when recommended by stone
source.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

3. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Pigments shall have a record
of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortar.
4. Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Blend of Portland cement and hydrated lime, of
color selected by Engineer.

5. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, except with 100 percent passing 1.18 mm sieve.
a. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

b. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other
sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
6. Water: Potable.
2.5 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304,
temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses.
Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.
B. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
ASTM F 738M for bolts and ASTM F 836M for nuts, Alloy Group 1 A1.
2.6 STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, non-staining to stone, of thickness needed to
prevent point loading of stone on anchors, and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into
required depths of pointing materials.
B. Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants,” and that do not stain stone.
C. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, hydrophobic water-based impregnating no-sheen type suitable for natural stone.
Sealer shall protect the stone from staining during setting and grouting process and allow
evaporation of water from setting materials, as demonstrated by tests performed by qualified
testing agencies.
2.7 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, and on Shop Drawings.
1. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
B. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural
markings on approved mockups.
C. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to match approved samples and mockups.

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes structural steel.
B. This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Assurance/Quality Control" for independent testing

agency procedures and administrative requirements.
2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors.
3. Division 7 Section "Cementitious Sprayed-On Fire Proofing" for fire-resistance-rated
intumescent mastic materials
A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract

Documents to be completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engi-

neer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for structural steel
connections subject to the contractor’s design.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing
connections.
4. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer re-
sponsible for their preparation.
5. Methods of erection and calculations of erection stresses
6. Methods of bracing and temporary guys.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 1 of 14

7. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate
welds by standard AWS A2.1 and A2.4 symbols, and show size, length, and type of
each weld.
8. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and
other anchorage to be installed as work of others sections.
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
other information specified.
E. Product Data: Submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instruc-

tions. Include mill test reports in accordance with ASTM A6, laboratory test reports and
other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards) for the
following products
1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemi-
cal and physical properties.
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
3. Direct-tension indicators.
4. Shear stud connectors.
5. Shop primers.
6. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
7. Welding electrodes
F. Test Reports: Submit copies of reports of tests conducted on shop and field bolted and
welded connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results. State com-
pliance or non-compliance with specifications.
G. Fabricator and Erector: submit the name of the proposed fabricator and erector with refer-
ence of work of a similar nature carried out by him on other projects, with relevant dates.
H. Surveys: Submit for information certified copies of each survey conducted by an approved
engineer, showing elevations and locations of base plates and anchor bolts to receive struc-
tural steel, and final elevations and locations for major members. Indicate discrepancies be-
tween actual installation and contract documents.
I. Paint: Submit manufacturer's full technical specification, method of application and guaran-
tee.
J. Method Statement: Submit for approval, Quality Control method statement in accordance
with quality assurance procedures, and Erection method statement.
K. No fabrication work is to commence before approval of test reports and submittals .
L. As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit record “As- Built” drawings of completed
work products, in accordance with requirements of the Specification as indicated in Division
1.

A. Quality System: Comply with ISO 9001/9002 Quality System as a minimum. Incorporate all
the standard procedures supplied by the Engineer and the Employer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar
to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the
Work.
a. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdic-

tion.
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and

Plastic Design." including "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued.
2. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
3. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings."
4. ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel
Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
5. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
6. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
7. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
8. AISC "Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel".
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to

practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing en-
gineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those per-
formed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
Code-Steel."
1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests
for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

of Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
H. Quality Control: Submit for approval a method statement of the system of quality control to
be used in fabrication and erection, complying with AISC, and AWS including proposed
welding procedure. An approved quality control engineer is to be assigned for the complete
duration of the work to ensure proper performance.

A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continui-
ty of installation.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members
off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and pack-
aged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that be-
come dry or rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage
to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or struc-
tures as directed.
C. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place con-
crete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.
D. Manufactured items are to be delivered in original packages, containers etc. bearing name of
manufacturer and brand. Each piece of material is to bear the official grade and trade mark
of the association under whose rules it is graded or is to be accompanied by a certificate of
inspection issued by that association.
E. Protect structural steelworks by approved adequate measures from constructional hazards

during and after erection.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delay-

ing the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required,
for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only
materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by
grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface
finishes.
B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows:
1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36M having a minimum yield stress of 240 N/mm2 or equal,
to be used only when specified.
2. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel: ASTM A 572M, Grade 50
having a minimum yield stress of 345 N/mm2 or equal typically used unless other-
wise noted.
3. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 913 having a minimum yield
stress 460 N/mm2 or according to BS5950-1:2000 with a minimum yield strength of
460 N/mm2 or equal.

C. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade C. Having a minimum yield
stress of 345 N/mm2 or equal.
D. Hot rolled steel hollow circular sections are to be:
1. ASTM A53 type E, Grade B, having a minimum yield stress of 246 N/mm2 or equal.
To be used only when specified.
2. ASTM A618, Grade III, having a minimum yield stress of 345 N/mm2 or equal.
3. ASTM A 913 having a minimum yield stress 460 N/mm2 or according to BS5950-
1:2000 with a minimum yield strength of 460 N/mm2 or equal.
E. Cold rolled steel Z and C sections to be ASTM A653M grade HSLAS, type A, Grade 50
(340) and ASTM A924/A924M, having a minimum yield stress 345 Mpa, or equal, and
shall be galvanized in accordance with the ASTM A653 M with zinc coated to achieve the
specified life to first maintenance.
F. Stainless steel plates for Teflon bearings to conform to AISI TP 316 or BS 970, grade 316
S16.
G. Polytetra fluoroethylene (PTFE) sheets are to conform to ASTM D4894 and ASTM D 4895.
H. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: to AWS D1.1, type B, minimum yield strength of
345 N/mm2 [50000 PSI] at 0.2% offset, made from steel to ASTM A108, with mechanical
properties to ASTM A370, and applied in accordance with Recommended Practices for Stud
Welding.
I. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows:
1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM F1554 with minimum yield strength of 248 N/mm2,
2. Unheaded Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 55 with minimum yield strength of 345
4T T 4
N/mm2.
3. Unheaded Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 105 with minimum yield strength of 634
N/mm2, to be used only when specified.
4. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 490M, Type 1, or DIN 6914 gradeb10.9 heavy hex steel
4T 4T
structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts.
J. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low-carbon
4T
hexagonal head steel bolts and nuts and washers, to be used only when specified.
K. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490M, Type 1, or DIN 6914 grade 10.9
4T 4T
heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel
washers, uncoated. Typically used unless otherwise noted.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, uncoated.
L. High Strength Steel castings: conform to ASTH A148M grade 795-655 or approved equal.
M. Welding Materials: Conform to AWS Code and AWS Filler Metal Specifications. Select
materials which are suitable for use with types of steel to be joined. Unless otherwise indi-
cated, connections are designed for:
1. Metal-Arc Welding Electrodes: to E70XX series of the Specification for Mild Steel
Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.1, or the Specification for Low-Alloy
Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.5.

2. Bare Electrodes and Granular Flux used in the submerged-arc process are to conform
to F7 X-EXXX AWS flux classifications of the Specification for Base Mild Steel
Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, AWS A5.17, or A5.23 or the of
AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings".
N. Carbon - Steel Castings :
ASTM A27 M - Grade 450 - 240, medium - strength carbon steel
O. High Strength Steel Castings:
ASTM A148M, Grade 550 - 345
ASTM A148 M, Grade 795 - 655
P. Structural Steel Painting: the protective coating system is to be one of the systems recom-
mended in SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) to give a life to first maintenance of 20
years taking into consideration climatic conditions on site and exposure of the steelworks.
Q. Non-shrink Rheoplastic Expansive Cement Grout: Free flowing, non-shrink, non-ferrous

rheoplastic, oil resistant, water resistant, complying with CE-CRD-C621, having minimum
compressive strength of 60 Mpa.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate struc-
tural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Draw-
to be
ings. used only when specified.
1. Camber structural steel members where indicated.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6M and maintain mark-
ings until steel has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field han-
dling of structural steel.
5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations.
6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.
B. Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and
free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled
trade names, and roughness.
1. Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning,

treating, and shop priming.
2. Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed struc-
tural steel.
C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.

D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bear-
ing.
E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear con-

nectors. Shop weld shear connectors, spaced as shown, to beams and girders in composite
construction. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's printed instructions.
F. Steel Wall Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall framing to
be attached to structural steel framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square,
and true members in completed wall framing.
G. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing.
Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to
frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine
screws, uniformly spaced not more than 250 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for
passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or
enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other
work.
I. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of
finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of
markings, burrs, and other defects.
J. Materials and workmanship are subject to inspection and test by the Engineer, who is to
have access at all times to all parts of the workshop where steelworks is being fabricated and
is to be provided with reasonable inspection facilities.
K. Obtain permission of the Engineer before starting fabrication.
L. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections.
M. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.
- do not distort or enlarge holes when using drifts

- do not use drifts of larger diameter than holes
- report any misalignment of holes
- reaming of holes will not be allowed except for minor connections
and subject to written approval from the Engineer.
- holes for concrete-inserted anchors are to be furnished with enough
tolerance at the fabrication shop.
- reaming of holes of concrete-inserted anchors will only be allowed
subject to a written approval from the engineer, at no extra cost.
N. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance

with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using A 490 Bolts" (RCSC).
O. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Unless shown on the drawings site welding will only be permitted for minor connec-
tions subject to written approval from the Engineer.
2. Do not place any welds, except those shown on the drawings, without approval even
for temporary attachment and repair of faulty plates.
3. Use run on and run off plates to ensure full throat thickness at ends of butt welds as
follows:
- material for plates is to be identical to material being welded

- prepare plates in same manner as parts being joined
- size of run on and run off plates to be 75 mm x 75 mm
- after completion of welding remove plates and grind surfaces of joined parts
where plates are attached to make smooth
- retain and identify plates for inspection when requested.
4. Provide evidence of welder's competence to undertake specified work. Welders must

have been tested to the Standard Code for Welding in Building Construction of the
American Welding Society using same electrodes class and welding positions which
will be used in the work.
5. Test Welders to the Standard Code of Welding in Building Construction of the Ameri-
can Welding Society when instructed using:
- thickest plate specified and/or

- material with highest carbon content
- electrodes of appropriate class
- welding positions which will be used in the
work.
6. Test Welder's competence to undertake special welding procedures when instructed.
2.3 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Struc-
tural Joints Using ASTM A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 490M high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Connection Type: Slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connec-
tions as indicated.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without warp.
2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds 13 mm and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 50 mm.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Apply all specified coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erec-
tion. Change color of successive coats to distinguish them from previous ones.
C. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelworks to be painted.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accor-
dance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) to SP-10 "Near - White Blast Clean-
ing" (equivalent to SA 2 1/2).
D. For surfaces to receive fire proof spraying, compatibility of the primer material and the fire
proof spraying should be ensured.
E. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation (in any case within four hours), apply struc-
tural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to pro-
vide the specified dry film thickness. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of
joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces.
F. Painting: Provide all paint coatings in shop except the final finish coat (which has to be ap-
plied after erection) all in accordance with the requirements of the Steel Structure Painting
Council (SSPC), as specified in Clause 2.1, and as per manufacturer's recommendation.
G. Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee that the protective coating system on all steel
works, including the works subject to fire proof spraying, will give a minimum life to first
maintenance of 20 years in the climatic conditions prevailing on site and for the exposure of
the steel work.
2.5 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel in-
dicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop in-
spections and tests and to prepare test reports, subject to the engineer approval, on contrac-
tor expense.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test
specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.
2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fa-
bricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test re-
ports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected Work with specified requirements.
D. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to AISC specifications and
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 490 Bolts."

1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2.
E. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however. Engineer re-
serves right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with speci-
fied requirements.Retain above or below.
F. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and loca-
tions of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct defi-
ciencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform non destructive tests of welds on 10% of all fillet weld lengths as a first test-
ing round, depending on its results, the Engineer might instruct the Contractor to ex-
tend the testing process and/or to replace welder at no extra cost. Selection of tested
samples to be approved by the Engineer. Non-destructive tests of butt welds to be
done on 100% of the welded lengths.
3.1 Fillet Welds
- Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165, or,

- Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass
and on finished weld of fillet welds at random. Cracks or zones of in-
complete fusion or penetration not acceptable.
3.2 Butt Welds
- Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum

quality level "2-2T", or,
- Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164 for 100% of full penetration and
partial welds.
G. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be inspected and tested
according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a conti-
nuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on
shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS D1.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete
and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with require-
ments.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structur-
al steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads
equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural
steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-
in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom sur-
face of base and bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts
as required.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish
exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
1. Maintain erection tolerances of architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's

"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before per-
manently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating tempera-
ture of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of
erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in ser-
vice.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with
plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
H. Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance.
I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.

J. Do not use welding equipment on site without approval.
K. Ensure bolts are in centre of slotted holes after erection of structure.
L. Treat sliding surfaces of proprietary joints in accordance with manufacture's recommenda-

tions before connecting.
M. Raise or lower to correct level using sawn steel packs not larger than necessary for the pur-
pose
N. Notify the Engineer when space beneath any column base is less than 10 mm or more than
50 mm.
O. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for
shop painting.
P. Apply final coat of paint only in accordance with the requirements of the Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC), as specified in Clause 2.1 and 2.3, and as per manufacturer's rec-
ommendation.
Q. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, align-
ment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
R. Ensure that the capacity of plant and equipment used for erection are suitable and are in
first class working order.
S. Obtain permission before starting erection of steel work.
T. Inspect foundations before starting erection for line and level, anchor bolts for position, pro-
truding length, condition and slackness.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 490M high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Connection Type: Slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connec-
tions as indicated.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without warp.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds 13 mm and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.

A. On the contractor’s expenses, employer will engage an independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test re-
ports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected Work with specified requirements.
D. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 490 Bolts."
1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2.
E. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and loca-
tions of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct defi-
ciencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform non destructive tests of welds on 10% of all fillet weld lengths as a first test-
ing round, depending on its results, the Engineer might instruct the Contractor to ex-
tend the testing process and/or to replace welder at no extra cost. Selection of tested
samples to be approved by the Engineer. Non-destructive tests of butt welds to be
done on 100% of the welded lengths.
3.1 Fillet Welds
- Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165, or,

- Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass
and on finished weld of fillet welds at random. Cracks or zones of in-
complete fusion or penetration not acceptable.
3.2 Butt Welds
- Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum

quality level "2-2T", or,
- Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164 for 100% of full penetration and
partial welds.
F. Weld defects: cracks, overlaps, lack of penetration or incomplete fusion shall not be al-
lowed.
G. Lamination tests: carry out ultrasonic testing for lamination on all head plates for moment
connections (15 mm thick or above) in accordance with DIN 54120 or ASTM E164.
H. Non-shrink grout: prepare 50 mm cubes and test for compressive strength in accordance
with ASTM C109.
I. In addition to visual inspection, field-welded shear connectors will be inspected and tested
according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:

1. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a conti-
nuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on
shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS D1.1..
J. Tolerances: The permissible deviation of fabricated and erected structures are to be in ac-
cordance with the limitations of the AISC.
K. Equipment: provide necessary facilities and equipment for specified tests in the fabrication
shop and on site. Calibrate load measuring equipment at regular intervals agreed with Engi-
neer.
L. Results: submit three copies of test and examination results to Engineer immediately they
are available.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for
shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038
mm).
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel are included in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.

SECTION 05121 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Architecturally exposed structural-steel framing, including shop painting and
field touch-up painting..
1. Requirements in Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS

framing.
1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel," for additional requirements applicable to AESS.

2. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications,” for loose steel-bearing plates and
miscellaneous steel framing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Base category definitions on requirements specified in the referenced Quality Standard,

supplemented as follows:
1. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is within 6 m vertically and horizontally of a walking

surface and is visible to a person standing on that walking surface.
2. Category 3 AESS: AESS that is not defined as Category 2 or that can be viewed at a
distance greater than that specified in Category 2.
1.3 BID SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to demonstrate an ability to perform the work as specified.
1. Design Concept Drawings: Plans, sections, elevations, full size framing details and
details at adjoining construction, and erection tolerances.
2. Outline technical specifications describing proposed materials.
3. Method Statement: For fabrication, handling, installation and protection. Indicate
factory-fabricated and site-assembled items.
4. Maintenance Program: Outline maintenance program identifying service life of products
and maintenance requirements.
5. Quality Control/Assurance:
a. List and details of key personnel to be assigned to the project and a list of previous
projects completed of similar in scope and type to the work indicated.
b. List of tests and inspections included.
6. Items of non-compliance with the specification.
7. Proposed fabricators and installers.
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05121- Page 1 of 6

1.4 CONTRACT ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials.
1. Structural steel primer, intermediate and finish paint systems. Submit paint
manufacturer's certification that specified paint will achieve required slip coefficient for
friction type connections and complies with referenced standards.
2. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For paints, primers, coatings, adhesives and sealants,
required to have low VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel
may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements
below are met for AESS.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate grinding, finish,
and profile of welds.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. Indicate
orientation of bolt heads.
5. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used.
6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements.
D. Samples: Submit finished samples of AESS category to set quality standards for exposed welds,
bolts and finishes.
1. Two steel plates, 9.5 by 200 by 100 mm, with long edges joined by a groove weld, and
with weld ground smooth.
2. Steel plate, 9.5 by 200 by 200 mm, with one end of a short length of rectangular steel
tube, 100 by 150 by 9.5 mm, welded to plate with a continuous fillet weld, and with weld
ground smooth and blended.
3. Two bolted connections illustrating bolt heads, nuts, washers and threads, and alignment
of bolts in close proximity.
4. Round steel tube or pipe, of typical diameter, with end of another round steel tube or
pipe, of typical diameter, welded to its side at a 45-degree angle with a continuous fillet
weld, and with weld ground smooth and blended. Include a sample of a reprepresentative
continuous fillet weld joining two tubes or pipes, finished in accordance with AESS
Category 3 AESS.
E. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit calculations of connections according to the requirements

indicated. Calculations shall bear the seal of a qualified professional egineer licensed in the
place where the project is located, and who is responsible for their preparation.

1.5 CONTRACT INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and paint applicator
B. Welders’ certificates.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum five years documented experience or, an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience or, an AISC-Certified
Plant, Category STD.
C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for

Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."
D. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents,
comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
1. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings" (including all supplements).
2. AISC "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel".
3. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", except in Paragraph
4.2.1, delete the first and second sentences.
4. Industrial Fasteners Institute "Fastener Standards Book".
5. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
6. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code".
7. SSPC "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications".
8. Where the language in the documents specified is in the form of a recommendation or
suggestion, such recommendations or suggestions shall be deemed to be mandatory under
this Contract.
E. Mockups: Build mockups of AESS to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical portion of AESS as shown on Drawings.

2. Demonstrate proposed range of aesthetic effects regarding each element.
3. Provide finished surfaces, including specified surface preparation, priming and field
painting.
4. Mock-ups shall be representative of the finished work in all respects.
5. Replace unsatisfactory work as directed until final acceptance by the Engineer.
6. Maintain accepted mock-ups throughout Project construction.
7. Mock-up assemblies will be used as a standard for judging acceptability of Work on the
Project.

F. Preinstallation Meeting:
1. Arrange and conduct meeting at Project site at least 2 weeks prior to the starting of AESS
fabrication operations.
2. Require attendance of Engineer, installer, fabricator, primer manufacturer’s
representatives, painting manufacturer’s field representatives and installers of related
work.
3. Review shipping, special handling, attachment of safety cables and temporary erection
bracing, touch up painting, protection, sequence of work, and other requirements for
AESS.
A. Source Quality Control: Testing and inspection of architecturally exposed structural steel will
be performed by a testing agency retained by the Owner, as specified in . Source Quality
Control in Division 05 Section “Structural Steel.”
1. Field Quality Control: Consultant will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability
relating to aesthetic effects, including appearance quality of welds, bolts and surface
finishes including locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Performance Criteria: Architecturally exposed structural steel, serves as a support for the
exterior walls and is subject to compliance with performance criteria shown and specified for
the exterior walls. Coordinate with performance criteria on drawings, or specified in Division
08, exterior wall sections as required to provide a complete installation complying with
performance criteria.
B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical and apply to similar
conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site without causing a delay in
the work. Dimensions are shown based on an assumed design temperature of 21 deg. C.
Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the
time of the respective operations.
C. Appearance:
1. Set AESS structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated, and free of for
twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections, and compliant with specified
requirements.
2. Treatment of Exposed Bolts: Conceal bolts to greatest extent possible. Where exposed
bolts are permitted, use minimal number of bolts, orient in acceptable layout and finish as
selected by Engineer.
3. Finished shop and field-applied touch-up painting shall completely cover surfaces to
provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.

Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections are not acceptable.
D. Erection Tolerances:
1. Individual Pieces: Plumbed, leveled and aligned in accordance with the requirements of
the "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" except as follows:
a. Plumbness of individual columns shall be held to 1:1000.
b. All measurements relating to the above shall be on the theoretical centerline of the
columns.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: ASTM A36 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, custom-formed to profiles and radii indicated.
C. Other Materials: Comply with the requirements Division 05 Section “Structural Steel”,
supplemented by the requirements of this Section.
2.3 SHOP PAINTING
A. Apply prime coats, intermediate coats and finish coats of paint, utilizing contrasting colors
between primer and intermediate coats, to maximum extent possible, in the shop; minimize field
touch painting. Coordinate commencement of painting with requirements of Part 1 “Source
Quality Control” article.
B. Prepare surfaces and apply materials in compliance with paint manufacturer’s instructions;
prepare surfaces to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 commercial blast-cleaning, or better and provide
24 hours' drying before recoating.
C. Block out high-strength bolted connections after receiving prime coats, for finishing with
specified intermediate and final coats of paint in the field.
D. Provide the following:
1. Zinc rich primer in a crosslinked epoxy or organic resin, two coats, using one of the
following:
a. "859" (Carboline Co.); 2.5 - 4.0 mils minimum dry film thickness.
b. "90-97 Tneme-Zinc" (Tnemec Company, Inc.); 2.5 - 3.5 mils minimum dry film
thickness.
c. "Amercoat 68HS" (Ameron Protective Coatings), 3 mils minimum dry film
thickness.
2. Intermediate Coat: Compatible with, and of the same manufacturer as, the primer.
Provide the respective dry film thickness specified; satin gloss finish coat; using one of
the following:
a. "Carboguard 888" (Carboline Co.). 4.0 - 6.0 mils dry film thickness.

b. "Tnemec 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II" (Tnemec Co. Inc.); 4.0 - 6.0 mils dry film
thickness.
c. "Amerlock 400" (Ameron). 5.0 - 8.0 mils dry film thickness.
3. Final Coat: Compatible with, and of the same manufacturer as, the primer. Provide the
respective dry film thickness specified; satin finish coat; one of the following:
a. "Carbothane 133 Series " (Carboline Co.). 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness.
b. "Series 175 Endura-Shield III" (Tnemec Co. Inc.); 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film
thickness.
c. "Amershield" (Ameron Products). 4.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness.
E. Field Touch Paint: Same materials as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces; clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning
or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Fabricate items of
Architecturally exposed structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as
indicated on final shop drawings.
1. Welded members and componenents to greatest extent possible; minimize field weling
and bolting.
2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start
of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure
free of markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Architecturally exposed structural steel members including built-up members shall conform to
the tolerance requirements specified in "Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural
Steel". Grind abrasions and other defects where finished appearance will be affected.
C. Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape in
fabrication shop.
1. Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible
from a distance of 6 m under any lighting conditions.
2. Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 13 mm.
D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfacesnot more that
1/16 in. larger than the connector diameter. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning.
Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling operations.
E. Fill dents in architecturally exposed structural steel with metallic filler and grind flush and
smooth.
F. Holes: Provide holes, threaded-studs and nuts required for securing other work to structural
steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members.

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.

2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections.
3. Metal ladders.
4. Metal ships' ladders.
5. Metal floor plate and supports.
6. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards.
7. Metal bollards.
8. Pipe guards.
9. Abrasive metal nosings.
10. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in
other Sections.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are
not specified in other Sections.
C. Related Sections include the following:

2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe
sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts and other items cast into concrete.
3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing anchor bolts, and other
items built into unit masonry.
4. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."
5. Division 5 Section "Gratings."
6. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings."
A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - Page 1 of 14

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.

2. Metal nosings and treads.
3. Paint products.
4. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
E. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
H. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified re-
quirements, and stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into
concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to
be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Metal Fabrications Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer, Contractor

and Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without
limitations, all or any part of the metal fabrications specified in this section which fails or
becomes defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. All metal fabrications are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and
free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.
2. Warranty shall also include:
a. Installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of

defective metal fabrications.
b. Metal, sealants, insulation, fasteners, and all other components of metal
fabrications specified in this section.
3. Failure includes, but is not limited to:
a. Deterioration in metal fabrications materials and coatings; other than due to

normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in sealants, fixings, coverings
and other components of the work.
4. To be protected by the guarantee, metal fabrications products must be stored suitable

dry enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of metal fabrications
items.
5. Warranty Period: five (5) years Total Warranty from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty signed by Contractor and
backed up by coating Manufacturer in which the contractor agrees to repair finishes that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
H. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: As indicated.

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with
Z275 coating; 2.8-mm nominal thickness.
3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; 2.5-
mm minimum thickness; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
I. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
E. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz
metal, 60 percent copper).
F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).

G. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400
(leaded semired brass).
H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500.
I. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
bronze).
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with
hex nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325M, Type 3; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F 836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy
Group A1.
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
F. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
H. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M.
K. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M.
L. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times
the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
M. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or

ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
N. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group
O. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)

complying with MFMA-4, 41 by 22 mm by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not
less than 75 mm long at not more than 200 mm o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-
head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with

ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading
applications.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for

normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20
MPa.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 3.2 by 38 mm, with a minimum 150-mm
embedment and 50-mm hook, not less than 200 mm from ends and corners of units
and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Division 9 Section
"High-Performance Coatings" where indicated.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 457 mm apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Siderails: Continuous, 12.7-by-64-mm steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 19-mm- diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
metallically bonded to rung.

following:
1) IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.

2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT.
6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar

grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm
in least dimension.
7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 1500 mm o.c. with welded
or bolted steel brackets.
8. Galvanizeladders, including brackets and fasteners.
9. Primeladders, including brackets and fasteners, with primer specified in Division 9
Section "High-Performance Coatings."
2.9 METAL SHIPS' LADDERS
A. Provide metal ships' ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with
channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide
brackets and fittings for installation.
1. Fabricate ships' ladders, including railings from steel.

2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating.
Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm in least dimension.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms from rolled-steel floor plate.
4. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube
Railings."
B. Galvanize steel ships' ladders, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners.
C. Prime steel ships' ladders, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with primer
specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings."
2.10 METAL FLOOR PLATE
A. Fabricate from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:
1. Thickness: As indicated.
B. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel
bar grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm in least dimension.
C. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.

D. Include steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
E. Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each
section.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or
masonry construction.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Division 9 Section "High-
Performance Coatings."
2.12 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe .
1. Cap bollards with 6.4-mm- thick steel plate.

2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary
cutouts for controls and holes for wire.
3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for
fixtures and holes for wire.
B. Fabricate bollards with 9.5-mm- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill
baseplates at all four corners for 19-mm anchor bolts.
1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for
plumb alignment of bollards.
C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 6.4-mm- thick steel
plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 200 mm deep and 19 mm
larger than OD of bollard.
D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 6.4-mm
wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1.5 mm less than ID of bollards.
Match drill sleeve and bollard for 19 mm steel machine bolt.
E. Prime bollards with primer specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings."
2.13 PIPE GUARDS
A. Fabricate pipe guards from 9.5-mm- thick by 300-mm- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat
against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 50-mm clearance
between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 19-mm anchor bolts.

B. Galvanize pipe guards.
C. Prime pipe guards with primer specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance

Coatings."
2.14 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS
A. Extruded Units: Aluminum, with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.

to, the following:
a. ACL Industries, Inc.

b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
c. Amstep Products.
d. Armstrong Products, Inc.
e. Balco Inc.
f. Granite State Casting Co.
g. Wooster Products Inc.
2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1.5 mm above aluminum
extrusion.
3. Nosings: Square-back units, 75 mm wide, for casting into concrete steps unless
B. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 100 mm from
ends and not more than 300 mm o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer.
1. Provide two rows of holes for units more than 125 mm wide, with two holes aligned
at ends and intermediate holes staggered.
C. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units.
2.15 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
C. Prime plates with primer specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings."
2.16 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no
fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on
fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 9 painting Sections unless primers
specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated
below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 9 Section "High-
Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Division 9 painting Sections
unless primers specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are
indicated.
E. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings."
2.19 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B. Bright, Directional Satin: No. 4 finish.

C. When removing tool and die marks is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2.20 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. As-Fabricated Finish for concealed: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated,

unspecified).
C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established
lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners
for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood
screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact
with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop
Drawings.
B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure
girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through
top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete
or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
C. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout
column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1. Grout base plates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
leveled.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days
before installing.
1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill
annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to
comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 3 mm
toward bollard.
C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings for bollards located in landscaping areas.
Center and align bollards in holes 75 mm above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has
cured.
D. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves
preset into concrete . Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written
instructions. Slope grout up approximately 3 mm toward internal sleeve.
E. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 19-mm machine bolts and
nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Employer will furnish
padlocks.
3.4 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS
A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by
curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors.
Provide four 19-mm bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 660 mm
above driving surface.

3.5 INSTALLING NOSINGS
A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.
B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and
level with tread surfaces.
3.6 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims
but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not
exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.

2. Stainless-steel pipe and tube railings.

2. Division 6 Section " Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring
railings.
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

2. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m.

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - Page 1 of 11

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes on stainless steel.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top
rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
a. Show method of finishing and connecting members at intersections.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance

F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and testing agency.
G. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.
H. Welding certificates.
I. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
K. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified re-
quirements, and stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Pipe and Tube Railings Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer,
Contractor and Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace
without limitations, all or any part of the metal fabrications specified in this section which
fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. All pipe and tube railings are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and

b. Metal, sealants, adhesive, insulation, fasteners, and all other components of
pipe and tube railings specified in this section.
a. Deterioration in pipe and tube railings materials and coatings; other than due to
normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesives, sealants, fixings,
coverings and other components of the work.
4. To be protected by the guarantee, pipe and tube railings products must be stored in a
suitable enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of pipe and tube
railings items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

following:
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Pisor Industries, Inc.

b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2. Stainless-Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.

b. Paragon Aquatics; Division of Pentair, Inc.
c. Pisor Industries, Inc.
d. Stainless Fabricators, Inc.
e. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc.; Div. of Kane Manufacturing.
f. Tri Tech, Inc.
g. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
h. Tuttle Railing Systems; Div. of Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze, Inc.
i. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish
as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316L.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316L.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M or CF 3M.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel

fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
2. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable

of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group
welded.
1. For stainless-steel railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of

metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in
fabricated items.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
E. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Division 9 Section
"High-Performance Coatings."
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections unless

H. Welded Connections (for steel handrails): Cope components at connections to provide close
fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at
fittings.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Nonwelded Connections (for stainless steel handrails): Connect members with concealed
mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth,
rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
J. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings unless otherwise indicated.

K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long
with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with
metal plate forming bottom closure.
Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless-steel tube or pipe whose
ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured
at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and
fabricated to resist being dislodged.
1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable
railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
R. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below:
1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Railings Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 9 Section "High-
Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Railings: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not
be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Division 9 Section "High-
Performance Coatings" are indicated.
2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings."
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to
verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer.
Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of
rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3
m.
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections (for stainless steel handrails): Use mechanical or adhesive joints
for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking
screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections (for steel handrails): Use fully welded joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in
"Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate
joint within 150 mm of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular
space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing
anchoring material.
D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 3-mm buildup, sloped away from post.
E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
2. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to
railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections as applicable to type
of railing.
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to
railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections as applicable to type
of railing.
C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide
brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger
bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing
or through concealed steel reinforcements.
A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with
clean water.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 05522 - ALUMINUM TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Aluminum tube railings with aluminum mesh infill.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete surfaces to receive railings.

2. Division 05 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings,” for steel railings.
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including top rails, posts, and
infill materials.
2. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,
post, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
a. Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer, and organic-coating applicator.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of metal products certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
ALUMINUM TUBE RAILINGS 05522 - Page 1 of 5

D. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying

organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent
control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance
with requirements.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical railing approximately one bay wide.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
B. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct meeting at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design railings, including

attachment to building construction.
B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, or required by
applicable code.



C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
D. Installation Tolerances:
1. Posts: Plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.

2. Rails: Aligned so variations from level for horizontal members do not exceed 6 mm in
3.5 m.
A. Recycled Content: Provide metal materials having recycled content in compliance with Credit
MR 4.
B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
2.3 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. Increase
alloy and temper values to suit structural performance requirements.
B. Extruded Square Tubing: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
C. Extruded Structural Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6, Standard Weight
(Schedule 40) pipe.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6. Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet free
from alloy and mill stamps.
E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.
F. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.
G. Mesh Infill:
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Futura 240 PC mesh
manufactured by GKD Metal Fabrics, distributed by Fryer Noble, www.fryernoble.com,
and as follows.
a. Base Metal: Aluminum, paint grade, and to comply with structural performance
requirements.
2. Mesh Perimeter Trim: Unless otherwise indicated, edge panels with minimal appearance
U-shaped channels made from aluminum sheet, not less than 1.1 mm thick; welded.
Welds not visible in final construction.

2.4 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railings: Provide concealed fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for securing adjoining railing sections indicated and
capable of withstanding design loads.
1. Where exposed fasteners are permitted, provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine

screws with finish matching appearance, including color, of railings.
B. Anchors for Attaching Railings to Other Construction:
1. Provide post-installed anchors to attach brackets and flanges to vertical substrates, and as
follows:
a. Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load

equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
b. Material: Stainless steel, Alloy Group A1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and
nuts, ASTM F 836M.
welded.
1. Provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as

required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic-controlled

expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable grouting
compound for posts.
1. Water-Resistant Product: Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water

exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is
recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.6 FABRICATION
B. Shop weld railings in largest units possible; minimize field assembly. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Weld infill panels to adjoining rails and post as
indicated.
1. Cope components at connections to provide close fit. Weld all around at connections.
2. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and
welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Form changes in direction by bending to uniform radii selected by Engineer, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Cap flush, exposed ends of railing members.
H. Fabricate railing posts for setting in concrete. Provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150
mm long with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post,
with metal plate forming bottom closure.
I. Brackets and Flanges: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported
rails.
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
B. Control of Corrosion: Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of
aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
1. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Metal bar gratings.

2. Heavy-duty metal bar gratings.
3. Metal frames and supports for gratings.

2. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings"” for painting to steel surfaces.
A. Structural Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the following structural

loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, in-
cluding anchors and connections:
1. Floors: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 11.97 kN/sq. m or a concentrated

load of 13.40 kN, whichever produces the greater stress.
2. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Capable of withstanding a uniform
load of 4.79 kN/sq. m or a concentrated load of 1.33 kN on an area of 25.8 sq. cm,
whichever produces the greater stress. Limit deflection to L/360 or 6.4 mm, whi-
chever is less.
3. Sidewalks and Vehicular Driveways: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of
11.97 kN/sq. m or a concentrated load of 35.60 kN, whichever produces the greater
stress.
4. Heavy Vehicular Driveways: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 20 kN/sq. m
or a truck wheel load of 130 kN, whichever produces the greater stress.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings.

2. Paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for gratings. Include plans, eleva-
tions, sections, and details of connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide
templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
GRATINGS 05530 - Page 1 of 8

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analy-
sis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to dem-
onstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/ engineers and Employers, and any
other information specified or required by Engineer.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engi-
neering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of gratings that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, de-
sign, and extent.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing gratings similar to those indi-

cated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as suf-
ficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following:
1. Non-Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar
Grating Manual for Steel, Stainless Steel, and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads."
2. Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty
Metal Bar Grating Manual."
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
A. Field Measurements: Where gratings are indicated to fit to other construction, verify di-
mensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate mea-
surements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delay-

ing the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating gratings without
field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions corres-
pond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, con-
crete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in con-
crete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Gratings Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer, Contractor and In-
staller are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without limita-
tions, all or any part of the gratings specified in this section which fails or becomes defec-
tive in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. All gratings are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and free from
defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.

defective gratings.
b. Metal, sealants, fasteners, and all other components of gratings specified in this
section.
a. Deterioration in gratings materials and coatings; other than due to normal age-
ing and weathering; and any defects in sealants, fixings, coverings and other
components of the work.
4. To be protected by the guarantee, metal bar gratings products must be stored suitable
dry enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of gratings items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the follow-
ing:
1. Metal Bar Gratings:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.

b. All American Grating, Inc.
c. Brickhouse Access Covers And Gratings .
d. IKG Borden.
e. Klemp Corp.
f. Ohio Gratings, Inc.
g. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc.
2.2 FERROUS METALS

B. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510M.
C. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 33.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 230, with Z275
coating.
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
to be welded.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
B. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316.
2.4 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: to comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings".
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except con-
taining no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
D. Painting to Steel Surfaces: as follows in accordance with Division 9 Section "High-

Performance Coatings."
1. Epoxy Coating System - MPI INT 5.3D:
a. Prime Coat: Cold-curing epoxy primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss.
c. Topcoat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exte-
rior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22M.
D. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.2M.
E. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with ca-
pability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as de-
termined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for interior applications: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply

with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for exterior applications: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying
with ASTM F 738M and nuts complying with ASTM F 836M.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to
support indicated loads.
C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
F. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-
sion resistance of base metals.
G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to sup-
port indicated loads.
1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop, unless otherwise in-
dicated.
2. Toeplate Height: 100 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. Medium duty gratings manufactured from Hot-dip galvanized steel. Bearing bars and cross
bars are to be of rectangular section with size and spacing as per manufacturer's written rec-
ommendation for the span and type of loading indicated. Cross bars are to be locked at right
angles to and in the same plane as, the top surface of bearing bars. Properties shall be as fol-
lows:
1. Grating Mark: As indicated, but with bearing bar size not less than that required com-
plying with structural performance requirements.
2. Type: Pressure locked
3. Traffic Surface for steel Bar Gratings: Plain
4. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 550 g/sq. m of
coated surface. Shop paint with epoxy primer, intermediate and top-coats of epoxy
high build coating.
5. Cut Outs: Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange
cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings

6. Fabricate removable grating sections with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
a. Provide not less than four weld lugs for each heavy-duty grating section, with
each lug shop welded to two bearing bars.
b. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.
B. Medium and Heavy duty gratings manufactured from Hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless
steel grade 316. Bearing bars and cross bars are to be of rectangular section with size and
spacing as per manufacturer's written recommendation for the span and type of loading indi-
cated. Cross bars are to be locked at right angles to and in the same plane as, the top surface
of bearing bars. Properties shall be as follows:
1. Grating Mark: As indicated, but with bearing bar size not less than that required com-
plying with structural performance requirements.
2. Type (for steel): Welded.
3. Type (for stainless steel): Pressure locked.
4. Traffic Surface for steel Bar Gratings: Plain or serrated as indicated.
5. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 550 g/sq. m of
coated surface. Shop paint with epoxy primer, intermediate and top-coats of epoxy
high build coating.
6. Cut Outs: Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange
cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings
7. Fabricate removable grating sections with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
a. Provide not less than four weld lugs for each heavy-duty grating section, with
each lug shop welded to two bearing bars.
b. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.
2.8 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS
A. Steel Frames and Supports: Fabricate from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive grat-
ings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to re-
ceive hardware and similar items.
B. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into maso-
nry.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 600 mm o.c. and provide minimum anchor
units in the form of steel straps 32 mm wide by 6 mm thick by 200 mm long.
C. Galvanize frames and supports in the following locations:
1. Exterior.
2. Interior, where indicated.
2.9 FINISHES

B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.
C. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip
process complying with ASTM A 123.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with min-
imum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and envi-
ronmental exposure conditions of installed items:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of gratings, frames, and supports, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise in-
dicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop paint-
ing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where neces-
sary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete
and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from estab-
lished lines and levels and free from rack.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into con-
crete or masonry.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limi-
tations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip gal-
vanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating
standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clear-
ances and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners in-
dicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation
conditions shown.
C. Attach non-removable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are the
same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coat-
ings."
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

SECTION 05721 - ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Glass-supported railings.

2. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and
tube components.
3. Division 6 Section " Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring
railings.
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-
sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.

2. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage),
as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series
No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass."
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - Page 1 of 11


3. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three

glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups. Payment for these services will be made by
Contractor. Retesting of products that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
2. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory
mockups will be tested.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Each type of glass required.
3. Fittings and brackets.
4. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including
top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at
intersections. Samples need not be full height.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance


F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and testing agency.
G. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
I. Preconstruction test reports.
J. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified

requirements, and stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing ornamental railings similar to

that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer with

the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
manufacturer.
E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements

for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are
indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and
assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more
methods including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service
performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.
F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or
another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with
which glass complies.
G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockups as directed by Engineer.

2. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail,
infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than
600 mm in length.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance requirements.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Ornamental Railings Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer,

without limitations, all or any part of the ornamental railings specified in this section which
fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. All ornamental railings are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and

b. Metal, glass, sealants, fasteners, and all other components of ornamental
railings specified in this section.
a. Deterioration in ornamental railings materials and coatings; other than due to

normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in glass, sealants, fixings,
4. To be protected by the guarantee, ornamental railings products must be stored

suitable dry enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of
ornamental railings items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Glass- Supported Railings:
a. Architectural Metal Works.

b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
c. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh.
d. Clearail, Inc.
e. CraneVeyor Corp.
f. Livers Bronze Co.
g. Newman Brothers, Inc.
h. Platers Polishing Company; a division of Rippel Architectural Metals.
i. TACO Metals Inc.
j. Tri Tech, Inc.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt.
2. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt
anchorage.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316.
D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316.
F. Wire Rope and Fittings:

to, the following:
a. Cable Connection (The).

b. Carl Stahl DecorCable, Inc.

c. Esmet, Inc.
d. Feeney Wire Rope & Rigging.
e. Hayn Enterprises, LLC.
f. Johnson, C. Sherman, Co., Inc.
g. Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Division.
h. Ronstan International Inc.
i. Secosouth, Inc.
2. Wire Rope: 7-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492,
Type 316.
3. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel,
and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking
strength of wire rope with which they are used.
2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing".
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
railings to other work unless otherwise indicated.
D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times
the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous


2.7 FABRICATION
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings

machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment
so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and
fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation.
D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
exposed surfaces.
E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous
locations.
G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
H. Connections: Fabricate railings with nonwelded connections unless otherwise indicated.
I. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and

fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
J. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long
with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with
metal plate forming bottom closure.
Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.8 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite
on glazing panels.
1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges

with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces
2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
B. Structural Balusters: Provide laminated, tempered glass panels for both straight and curved
sections.
2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
C. When removing tool and die marks is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to
verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer.
Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of
rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in
3 m.
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting

railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members
and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler
colored to match finish of railings.
B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate
joint within 150 mm of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts
have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular
space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with flanges connected to railing ends and
anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and connected to
railing ends using nonwelded connections.
C. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used. Provide
brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger
bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel
reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support
structural loads.
4. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through flanges
of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.
3.6 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS
A. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written

instructions.
1. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert and connect factory-fabricated
and -assembled glass panels.
2. Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in
position.
3. Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized technical
personnel.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing
assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in
the completed Work. Railings will be tested according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935
for compliance with performance requirements.
C. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Engineer and
will comply with specified requirements.


3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean
water, and wiping dry.
B. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed
surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence

remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;
make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

SECTION 05811 - ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Architectural joint systems for building interiors.

2. Architectural joint systems for building exteriors.

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry wall joint systems.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for liquid-applied joint sealants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs
its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.
B. Construction joint: The surface where two successive placements of concrete meet, across
which it may be desirable to achieve bond and through which reinforcement may be
continuous.
C. Contraction Joint or Control joint: Formed, sawed, or tooled groove in a concrete structure
to create a weakened plane and regulate the location of cracking resulting from the
dimensional change of different parts of the structure.
D. Expansion joint:
1. A separation provided between adjoining parts of a structure to allow movement

where expansion is likely to exceed contraction;
2. A separation between pavement slabs on grade, filled with a compressible filler
material;
3. An isolation joint intended to allow independent movement between adjoining parts.
E. Isolation joint: A separation between adjoining parts of a concrete structure, usually a

vertical plane, at a designated location such as to interfere least with performance of the
structure, yet such as to allow relative movement in three directions and avoid formation of
cracks elsewhere in the concrete and through which all or part of the bonded reinforcement
is interrupted.
F. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it
performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.
ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811 - Page 1 of 10

G. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between widest and narrowest
widths of a joint opening typically expressed in numerical values (mm or inches) or a
percentage (plus or minus) of nominal value of joint width.
H. Nominal Joint Width: The width of the linear opening specified in practice and in which the
joint system is installed. For joint widths refer to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide the following for each joint system specified:
1. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing plans, elevations, sections,

details, splices, blockout requirement, entire route of each joint system, and
attachments to other work. Where joint systems change planes, provide isometric or
clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.
2. Architectural Joint System Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the
supplier. Include the following information in tabular form:
a. Manufacturer and model number for each joint system.

b. Joint system location cross-referenced to Drawings.
c. Nominal joint width.
d. Movement capability.
e. Classification as thermal or seismic.
f. Materials, colors, and finishes.
g. Product options.
h. Fire-resistance ratings.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of joint system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes
available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of architectural joint system indicated.
1. Full width by 150 mm long, for each system required.
D. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for current products.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain architectural joint systems through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

architectural joint systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural joint system and

fire-barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling assemblies shall be subjected to

hose stream testing.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Architectural Joint Systems Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer,

without limitations, all or any part of the architectural joint systems specified in this section
which fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. All Architectural Joint Systems are guaranteed to be of good material and

workmanship and free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which
it is intended.

b. Metal, sealants, fasteners, and all other components of architectural joint
systems specified in this section.
a. Deterioration in architectural joint systems materials and coatings; other than

due to normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in glass, sealants,
fixings, coverings and other components of the work.
b. Failure to withstand structural movement.
4. To be protected by the guarantee, architectural joint systems products must be stored

suitable dry enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of ornamental
railings items.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall and soffit joint systems with roof expansion
assemblies to ensure that wall transitions are watertight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6
for sheet and plate.
1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed

in contact with cementitious materials.
2. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
B. Elastomeric Seals: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal

frames.
C. Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed rectangular elastomeric extrusions having

internal baffle system and designed to function under compression.
D. Strip Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membrane or tubular extrusions having
an internal baffle system and secured in or over a joint by a metal locking rail.
E. Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under

compression.
F. Elastomeric Concrete: Modified epoxy or polyurethane extended into a prepackaged

aggregate blend, specifically designed for bonding to concrete substrates.
G. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling,
designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to
meet performance criteria for required rating period.
H. Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material, PVC , minimum 30 mils thick, EPDM,
minimum 45 mils thick or Santoprene.
I. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and
other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete
installations.
2.2 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide architectural joint systems of design, basic profile, materials, and
operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent
surfaces.
1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with
hairline mitered corners where joint changes direction or abuts other materials.
2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners,
curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous
joint systems.
B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics:
1. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Maximum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Minimum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Type of Movement: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS

following:
1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.

2. Balco, Inc.
3. Construction Specialties, Inc.
4. JointMaster/InPro Corporation.
5. Michael Rizza Company, LLC.
6. MM Systems Corporation.
7. Nystrom, Inc.
8. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
B. Wall-to-Wall Joint Systems:
1. Type: Vertical cover plate unless otherwise indicated.
a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.
1) Finish: Class I, clear anodic.
2. Type: Elastomeric seal, Dual elastomeric seal or Accordion.
b. Seal Material: Santoprene or PVC as directed and approved by Engineer.
1) Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
3. Type: Flat seal.
a. Seal Material: Santoprene.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that indicated in fire zoning plans.
5. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Wall Corner Joint Systems:
1. Type: Vertical cover plate unless otherwise indicated.

3. Type: Flat seal.
D. Wall-to-Ceiling Joint Systems:
1. Type: Cover plate unless otherwise indicated.
3. Type: Flat seal.
E. Ceiling-to-Ceiling Joint Systems:
1. Type: Cover plate unless otherwise indicated.

3. Type: Flat seal.
2.4 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS

following:
1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.

2. Balco, Inc.
3. Capital Services.
4. Construction Specialties, Inc.
5. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.
6. E-Poxy Engineered Materials, LLC.
7. Erie Metal Specialties.
8. JointMaster/InPro Corporation.
9. LymTal International, Inc.
10. Michael Rizza Company, LLC.
11. MM Systems Corporation.
12. Nystrom, Inc.
13. R. J. Watson, Inc.
14. Schul International, Inc.
15. Stellar-Mark, Inc.
16. Thermal-Chem.
17. Tremco Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
18. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
19. Williams Products, Inc.
B. Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Walls and Soffits:
1. Type: Vertical cover-plate.

b. Secondary Seal: Manufacturer's standard extruded-elastomeric seal designed

to prevent water and moisture infiltration.
2. Type: Flat seal.
a. Seal Material: Santoprene or Silicone as directed and approved by Engineer.
b. Secondary Seal: Manufacturer's standard extruded-elastomeric seal designed

to prevent water and moisture infiltration.
c. Pantograph Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard nylon pantographic wind-
load support mechanism with stainless-steel fasteners.
3. Type: Preformed cellular foam.
a. Foam Material: Manufacturer's standard.
2.5 FINISHES

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and blockouts where architectural joint systems will be installed for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout of
compressive strength adequate for anticipated structural loadings.

C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint
systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and
to provide for secure attachment of joint systems.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Engineer where discrepancies
occur that will affect proper joint installation and performance.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.
4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
5. Heavy-Duty Systems: Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame
support and to bring frame to proper level. Shimming is not allowed.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 75 mm
from each end and not more than 600 mm o.c.
C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.

2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-
weld field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Compression Seals: Apply adhesive or lubricant adhesive as recommended by

manufacturer to both frame interfaces before installing compression seals.
E. Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.
F. Terminate exposed ends of joint assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated termination

devices.
G. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of architectural joint assembly

materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance
requirements.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance
throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
H. Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints and where called for on Drawings.
Provide drainage fittings at a maximum of 15.2 m or where indicated.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When
protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to
heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install
temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial
Completion of the Work.

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
3. Wood furring and grounds.
4. Interior wood trim.
5. Wood shelving and clothes rods.
6. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 38 mm actual or greater but less than 114 mm actual in
least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
7. TRADA-Timber Research And Development Association
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer

and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - Page 1 of 9

Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified

independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type include
physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to
ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project
site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
4. Powder-actuated fasteners.
5. Expansion anchors.
6. Metal framing anchors.
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for
air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading

agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-
writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules
indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp
on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum
dressed sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing

no arsenic or chromium.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or
otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back
of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued
by inspection agency.
D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 460 mm above the ground in crawl spaces
or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood).
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in
attic spaces, and where indicated.
4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back
of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued
by inspection agency.
C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 38-mm actual thickness or less, 19 percent for
more than 38-mm actual thickness.
B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and the following

species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.

2. Northern species; NLGA.
3. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade and the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
4. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
5. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
6. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
7. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
8. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
6. Utility shelving.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content and the following species:

2. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Northern species; NLGA.
4. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the
following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or
2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB,

or WWPA.
4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content andthe
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade
lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects
that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM
A. General: Provide kiln-dried finished (surfaced) material without finger-jointing, unless

B. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Provide one of the
following species and grade:
1. Grade Superior or C & Btr Finish Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-south; NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Clear Heart western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Clear closed grain
hardwoods.
D. Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted) Finish: Either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of the
1. Grade Premium eastern white pine; NeLMA or NLGA.
E. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7 and graded according to

WMMPA WM 4.
1. Moldings for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: N-grade closed grain hardwoods,
selected for compatible grain and color.
2. Moldings for Opaque (Painted) Finish: P-grade white pine.
2.7 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Shelving: Made from the following material, 19-mm thick.

1. Medium-density fiberboard with radiused or solid-wood front edge.
B. Shelf Cleats: 19-by-140-mm boards with hole and notch to receive clothes rods, of same
species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for opaque finish.
C. Shelf Brackets: Prime-painted formed steel with provision to support clothes rod where rod
is indicated.
D. Clothes Rods: 32-mm- diameter, stainless-steel tubes.
E. Rod Flanges: Stainless steel.
2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-
retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 19-mm nominal
thickness.
2.9 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc
coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being
fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with
ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for more corrosive environments and where directed by Engineer: Stainless
steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M,
Grade A1 or A4.

2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.

2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
3. KC Metals Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
6. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with

ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density,

polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.6 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements
for attaching other construction.
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections
where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels.
Space clips not more than 406 mm o.c.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than
2438 mm o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted
to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level,
at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 2438 mm o.c. Where fire blocking
is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of
same width as framing members and 38-mm actual- thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not
more than 6 m o.c.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints
or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
J. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not
fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber

not less than 38 mm wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 19-by-63-mm actual- size

furring horizontally and vertically at 600 mm o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 19-by-38-mm actual- size furring vertically at
400 mm o.c.
3.4 WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 610 mm long except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns
and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout
length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.

2. Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads and fill holes.
4. Install to tolerance of 3 mm in 2438 mm for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 0.8-mm maximum offset for flush installation and 1.6-mm maximum
offset for reveal installation.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,
apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with
EPA-registered label.

SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior standing and running trim.

2. Interior frames and jambs.
3. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For panel products, fire-retardant-treated materials and finishing materials
and processes.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.

2. Shop-applied opaque finishes.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - Page 1 of 9

D. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 300 sq. cm, for each species and
cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-
finished woodwork.
3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 300 by 600 mm, for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.
4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 300 sq. cm for lumber
and 200 by 250 mm for panels, for each finish system and color, with exposed
surface finished.
5. Submit samples for choice and approval of veneer matching.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program

certificates.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products and Certified participant in AWI's Quality

Certification Program .
C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided

responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched
wood veneers.
D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for
construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are

indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as
determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable
paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of
materials that will be concealed from view after installation.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: not exceeding values indicated below, when

subjected to accelerated weathering test ASTM D 2898, Method A, and then tested
per ASTM E 84 for 30 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion. In
addition, the flame front shall not progress more than 3.2m beyond the center line of
the burner at any time during the test.

a. Flame Spread: 25.

b. Smoke Developed: 450.
F. Mockups: Before fabricating and installing interior architectural woodwork, build mockups
for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
completed Work:
by Engineer.
fabricated and installed.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting interior architectural
woodwork fabrication.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and installer are
jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace architectural woodwork that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, discoloration, fading, moisture
penetration or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
1. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by

manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to
ASTM D 2244.
2. Warping, distortion or twist, if installed in controlled environment or stored in similar
environment
B. Warranty Period: five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Employer may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other
than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with
requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,

wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and
relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by

field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural
woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for
each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: American Red oak, Douglas Fir, western red
cedar and suede.
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Douglas fir, white pine and white hardwoods.
D. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
4. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.
5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with
fire-test-response characteristics specified.
1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of
UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with

performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the
following treatment type for all locations:
1. Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.

2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations
from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of
treated woodwork.
3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated
materials.
C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made

from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel
manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25
or less per ASTM E 84.
1. For panels 19 mm thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except
for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 11 MPa; modulus of
elasticity, 2070 MPa; internal bond, 550 kPa; and screw-holding capacity on face
and edge, 1100 and 1000 N, respectively.
2. For panels 20 to 32 mm thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for
the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 9 MPa; modulus of
elasticity, 1720 MPa; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on
face and edge, 1100 and 780 N, respectively.
3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by
Weyerhaeuser.
D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with

ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals
mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and
smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by

SierraPine Ltd.; Medite Div.
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: as specified in Division 6 Section

"Miscellaneous Carpentry.".
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside
face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-
steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior

woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for
wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in
installation areas.
C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum

extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance
for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication
will be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Douglas fir, western red cedar and red oak.
1. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching
each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width or thickness.
E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require
field assembly.
G. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and
prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.

2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species: Douglas fir, white pine and white hardwoods.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require
field assembly.
E. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and
prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Suede.
C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue
for width.
D. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard
or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Fire Rating: 20 minutes.
2.8 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species: White pine.
2.9 SHOP FINISHING
A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.

Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent-
finished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 9 painting Sections for
material and application requirements.
D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-
grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset
decorative panels.
E. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: Match Engineer's sample.
4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from
closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
5. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler
to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
a. Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling.
6. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
F. Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
4. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in
Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements
for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to

comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for
adhesives used to install woodwork.
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure

with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete
installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk
and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-
length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do
not use pieces less than 2400 mm long, except where shorter single-length pieces are
necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth,
and finish same as wood base if finished.
2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 3
mm in 2400 mm.
H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail
holes with matching filler where exposed.
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.

SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hot-applied cold-applied, cut-back and cold-applied, emulsified-

asphalt dampproofing applied to the following below-grade surfaces, generally in contact
with soils:
1. Below-grade surfaces of concrete footings, foundations and columns.

2. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete and masonry foundation walls.
3. Back side of concrete and masonry retaining walls, below grade.
1. Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing."

2. Division 7 Section "Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing."
3. Division 7 Section "APP-Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one
source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers'
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed

spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - Page 1 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Asphalt Dampproofing:
a. Cormix.
b. Fosroc.
c. Master Builders Technologies.
d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
e. Owens Corning; Trumbull Division.
f. Sika Corporation.
g. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
2. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type:
a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div.

b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
c. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
3. Protection Course, Polystyrene Type:
a. Dow Chemical Company.

b. Owens Corning.
4. Protection Course, Plastic Panel Type:
a. Cartonal.
b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div.
2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A. Hot-Applied Asphalt Dampproofing: ASTM D 449, Type I.
B. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back (Solvent-Based) Asphalt Dampproofing:
1. One of the following at Contractor's option:
a. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I.

b. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I.
C. Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Dampproofing:
1. One of the following at Contractor's option:
a. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

b. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
c. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.

A. Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Asphalt-Coated, Woven Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
D. Protection Course: One of the following, at Contractor's option:
1. Asphalt-Board Type: Premolded, multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-

stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced
on 1 side with polyethylene film; thickness not less than 3 mm.
2. Polystyrene Type: Fan-folded, rigid, extruded-polystyrene board insulation
sandwiched between 2 sheets of plastic film; nominal thickness not less than 6 mm.
3. Plastic Panel Type: Semi-rigid, extruded or molded, non-biodegradable plastic
panels with a cellular drainage core; overall thickness not less than 4 mm.
a. Puncture Resistance: 1000 N minimum; ASTM E 154.
E. Protection Course, Roll-Roofing Type: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with

ASTM D 224, Type II.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from
being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from
entering and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints,
and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements

are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of
dampproofing.
1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve

coverages indicated.
2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.

B. Apply dampproofing to surfaces of footings, foundations, foundation columns and

foundation walls in contact with soils whether indicated or not.
1. Apply vertically from finished-grade line to top of footing or foundation, extend over
top and down face of footing or foundation.
2. Extend onto blinding beds, intersecting walls andfootings, but do not extend onto
surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as "reinforced," by
embedding an 200-mm wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of
dampproofing. Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to
other coats required.
C. Contractor's Options: Provide hot-applied cold-applied, cut-back or cold-applied,

emulsified- asphalt dampproofing, as specified in subsequent articles for substrates
indicated, and indicated on the drawings:
3.4 HOT-APPLIED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Do not apply hot asphalt when substrate condition causes foaming.
B. Prime masonry and other porous substrates.
C. Apply a uniform coat of hot asphalt by mopping or spraying at not less than 98 kg or
1 L/sq. m.
D. Apply a second coat as specified above. Apply double thickness of second coat where first
application has failed to produce a smooth, shiny, impervious coat.
3.5 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Footings, Foundations, Foundation Columns and Walls: Apply two brush or
spray coats at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, or one
trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray coats at not
less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, or primer and one
trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
C. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not less
than 1.6 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.5
L/sq. m.
E. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not
less than 0.5 L/sq. m.

3.6 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Footings, Foundations, Foundation Columns and Walls: Apply two brush or
spray coats at not less than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, one
fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or one trowel coat at not less than
1.6 L/sq. m.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray coats at not
less than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, primer and one fibered
brush or spray coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or primer and one trowel coat at not less
than 2 L/sq. m.
C. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not less
than 2 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.5
L/sq. m.
E. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not
less than 0.5 L/sq. m.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE
A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing.

Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching
protection course. Support protection course with spot application of trowel-grade mastic
where not otherwise indicated.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.

SECTION 07131 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing.
1. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage panels and geotextile
filter fabrics.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete curing and finishing.
3. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for expansion-joint systems.
4. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for asphalt damproofing to below-
grade surfaces.
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of
waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with
adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
C. Samples: For the following products:
1. 300-by-300-mm square of waterproofing and flashing sheet.
D. Installer Certificate: Signed by sheet waterproofing manufacturer certifying that Installer

complies with specified requirements.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer,
indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - Page 1 of 7

F. Sample Warranty: Before starting waterproofing, copy of sheet waterproofing

manufacturer's and Installer's warranty, stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and
exclusions.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed by]

sheet waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to
receive waterproofing warranty specified.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Mockup: Apply waterproofing to at least 15 sq. m of deck and/or wall to demonstrate

surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and execution quality.
1. Construct mockup in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockup will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockup before starting sheet waterproofing.
4. If Engineer determines mockup does not comply with requirements, reapply
waterproofing until mockup isapproved.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review requirements for
waterproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate
condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special
details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and
protection and repairs.
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected
location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to
a damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing

materials.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer

and Installer, and countersigned by Contractor, agreeing to replace waterproofing material
that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight during specified
warranty period. Warranty includes responsibility for removing and replacing construction
and other work that conceals self-adhering sheet waterproofing.
1. Warranty Period: Ten years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet Waterproofing:
a. American Hydrotech, Inc.

b. American Permaquik Inc.
c. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.
d. Cetco.
e. W. R. Grace & Co.
f. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
g. T. C. Miradri.
h. Monsey Bakor.
i. Pecora Corporation.
j. Polyguard Products, Inc.
k. Progress Unlimited, Inc.
l. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.
2. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type:
a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div.

b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
c. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.

3. Protection Course, Polystyrene Type:
a. Dow Chemical Company.

b. Owens Corning.
a. Cartonal.
2.2 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet: 1.5-mm thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 1.4 mm of

rubberized asphalt laminated to a 0.10-mm thick, polyethylene film with release liner on
adhesive side.
1. Physical Properties: As follows, measured per standard test methods referenced:
a. Tensile Strength: 1.7 MPa minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.

b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 29 deg C; ASTM D 1970.
d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 3-mm movement;
ASTM C 836.
e. Puncture Resistance: 180 N minimum; ASTM E 154.
f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 45 m minimum; ASTM D 5385.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour
immersion at 21 deg C; ASTM D 570.
h. Vapor Permeance: 2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m; ASTM E 96, Water Method.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for

intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by

manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by

manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
D. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet strips of same material and
thickness as sheet waterproofing.
E. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or
low viscosity.
F. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.
G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 25 by 3 mm thick, predrilled at

225-mm centers.

I. Protection Course: One of the following, at Contractor's option:
1. Asphalt-Board Type: Premolded, multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-

stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced
on 1 side with polyethylene film; thickness not less than 3 mm.
2. Polystyrene Type: Fan-folded, rigid, extruded-polystyrene board insulation
sandwiched between 2 sheets of plastic film; nominal thickness not less than 6 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and
cracks exceeding a width of 1.5 mm.
F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-
to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips.
1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second
sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.

G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 20-mm fillets of
liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:
a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from

corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.
b. At deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet strips onto deck
waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
3.3 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET APPLICATION
A. Install self-adhering sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions

and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will
be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets
and maintain uniform 75-mm- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams
and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between minus 4 and plus 5 deg C,
install self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheets produced for low-temperature
application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is
higher than 16 deg C.
D. Two-Ply Application: Install sheets to form a membrane with lap widths not less than 50
percent of sheet widths to provide a minimum of 2 thicknesses of sheet membrane over
areas to receive waterproofing.
E. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point of decks to ensure that
side laps shed water.
F. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
contraction joints.
G. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or

ending in reglets with mastic or sealant.
H. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements.
Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheets extending 150 mm beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
J. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

3.4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written

instructions and before starting subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure of
membrane.
A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed.
Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
1. Flood to an average depth of 65 mm with a minimum depth of 25 mm and not

exceeding a depth of 100 mm. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet
flashings.
2. Flood each area for 72 hours.
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
waterproofing installation is watertight.
B. Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer, to observe flood testing and
examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected horizontal membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed waterproofing and protection course from damage due to ultraviolet light,
harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where installation may be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

SECTION 07135 - APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Two-ply, modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage panels and geotextile
filter fabrics.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete curing and finishing.
3. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for expansion-joint systems.
4. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for asphalt damproofing to below-
grade surfaces.
A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of
waterproofing.
1. 300-by-300-mm square of waterproofing.
D. Installer Certificate: Signed by sheet waterproofing manufacturer certifying that Installer

complies with specified requirements.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer,
indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 07135 - Page 1 of 6

F. Sample Warranty: Before starting waterproofing, copy of waterproofing manufacturer's and

Installer's warranty, stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed by

sheet waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to
receive waterproofing warranty specified.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Mockup: Apply waterproofing to at least 15 sq. m of deck and/or wall to demonstrate

surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and execution quality.
1. Construct mockup in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockup will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockup before starting sheet waterproofing.
4. If Engineer determines mockup does not comply with requirements, reapply
waterproofing until mockup is approved.

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review requirements for
waterproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate
condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special
details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and
protection and repairs.
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected
location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within range of ambient and substrate

a damp or wet substrate.

1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing

materials.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer

and Installer, and countersigned by Contractor, agreeing to replace waterproofing material
that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight within specified
warranty period. Warranty includes responsibility for removing and replacing construction
and other work that conceals modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. APP-Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing:
a. Attab.
b. Bitumat.
c. Derbit, SpA.
d. Nord Bitumi, SpA.
a. Cartonal.
2.2 SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. APP-Modified Bituminous Sheet, Smooth Surfaced: ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I or II,
polyester reinforced, atactic-polypropylene-modified bituminous sheet, smooth surfaced;
suitable for application indicated and installation method specified; for use as follows
1. Use: Base and top plies of two-ply, modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.
B. Physical Properties: Provide APP-modified bituminous sheet materials with the following
properties when tested according to ASTM D 5147:
1. Thickness: 4.5 mm.

2. Tensile Strength: 15.75 kN/m at minus 18 deg C in each direction.
3. Elongation at Maximum Load: 20 percent minimum at minus 18 deg C in each
direction.
4. Tear Strength: 378 N minimum.
5. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg C.

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for

intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
C. Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV, as recommended by sheet waterproofing
manufacturer.
1. Label each container or provide certification with each load of bulk asphalt
identifying type of asphalt and indicating softening point, minimum flash point,
equiviscous temperature, and finished blowing temperature.
D. Cants and Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide cants and miscellaneous accessories

recommended by sheet waterproofing manufacturer for intended use.
E. Waterproofing and Sheet Flashing Accessories: Provide sealants, pourable sealers, cone
and vent flashings, inside and outside corner flashings, termination reglets and bars, and
other accessories recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use.
F. Protection Course: The following or, at Contractor's option, alternative means of protection
as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use, and acceptable to
Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Do not proceed with installation until after the minimum concrete curing period
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Notify Engineer in writing of anticipated problems using waterproofing over
substrate.
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
E. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
G. Install and secure cants, reinforcement strips, flashings and miscellaneous accessories to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements for treatments at
construction joints, horizontal to vertical surface intersections, inside and outside corners,
perimeters, and edges.
3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET INSTALLATION
A. Install modified bituminous sheet over areas to receive waterproofing, according to

manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations.
1. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for the minimum time period required by
manufacturer.
B. Two-Ply, Modified Bituminous Membrane: Install 2 plies of modified bituminous sheet

waterproofing, consisting of a base ply and a finish ply.
1. Base- and Finish-Ply Application: Torch apply each ply to substrate.
C. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point to ensure that side laps
shed water
D. Laps: Accurately align sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps
of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. Heat-weld side and end laps and
completely seal by rolling, leaving no voids.
1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
E. Repair tears and voids in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 150 mm beyond repaired
areas in all directions.
F. Correct deficiencies to satisfaction of Engineer, or remove sheet waterproofing that does not
comply with requirements, repair and prepare substrates, re-apply waterproofing and repair
flashings.

3.4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written

instructions and before beginning subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure
of membrane.
A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to ASTM D 5957, after
completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary
containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.

flashings.
B. Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer, to observe flood testing and
examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected horizontal membrane.
B. Protect installed waterproofing and protection course from damage due to ultraviolet light,
harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where installation may be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

SECTION 07141 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Two-component polyurethane waterproofing.

2. Molded-sheet drainage panels.
3. Insulation.
4. Plaza deck pavers.
B. Related Section:

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written
instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested
physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
1. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of
pedestal-supported concrete pavers.
1. Flashing sheet, 250 by 200 mm.

2. Insulation, 250 by 200 mm.
3. Drainage panel, 100 by 100 mm.
4. Plaza deck paver, full sized in each color and texture required.
5. Paver pedestal assembly.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
E. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - Page 1 of 8

G. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course and molded-sheet

drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Coverage Rate: for liquid applied coatings, calculate the quantity of material needed for the
work in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Submit calculations for
Engineer’s approval. Divide the areas to be coated and allocate the appropriate quantity of
coating material for each area.
D. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 9.3 sq. mof deck to
demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness,
texture, and execution quality. Install pavers and paver supports to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. If Engineer determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply

waterproofing and reinstall overlaying construction until mockups are approved.
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate

condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions,
special details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection
procedures, and protection and repairs.
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures
are less than 3 deg C above dew point.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather
conditions are imminent during application and curing period.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer

Installer and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace,
without limitations, all or any part of the liquid applied system which fails or becomes
defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes,
but is not limited to: water penetration, deterioration in membranes and coatings; other than
due to normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesion, sealants, flashings,
fixings, coverings and other components of the work.
1. Warranty includes liquid applied system, base flashings, accessories, insulation,roof

pavers, and other components of liquid applied system.
3. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate
prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks
in substrate that exceed 1.6 mm in width.
4. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels,
insulation, pedestals, and pavers on plaza decks and finishes in wet areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TWO-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING
A. Two-Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836

and with manufacturer's written physical requirements.

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW 703 Liquiseal.

b. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Deck B.T. 1000.
c. 3M; FC 100.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 102.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with

one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based
on testing and field experience.

B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer.
C. Sheet Flashing: 1.3-mm- minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene.
1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.
E. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing,

complying with ASTM C 920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical
applications or Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by
manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions.
1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
2.3 PROTECTION COURSE
A. Protection Course for interior areas: board, one piece cellular extrusion of polypropylene
copolymer 4 mm thick.

to, the following:
a. Cartonal; Protecnal boards

b. Carlisle
B. Protection Course for plaza deck pavers location: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of
fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-
saturated fibrous liners and as follows:
1. Thickness: 6 mm, nominal.

2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer
for type of protection course.
2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite

subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent
opening size not exceeding 0.43-mm sieve, laminated to one sidewith or without a
polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-
sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 35 L/min. per m.
2.5 INSULATION
A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578,

square edged.

to, the following:
a. DiversiFoam Products.

b. Dow Chemical Company (The).

c. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Corporation.
e. T. Clear Corporation.
2. Type VII, 414-kPa minimum compressive strength.
2.6 PLAZA DECK PAVERS
A. Plaza Deck Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged,
manufactured for use as plaza deck pavers; minimum compressive strength of 52 MPa,
ASTM C 140; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and
maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to
ASTM C 67.
1. Thickness: 60 mm unless otherwise indicated.

2. Face Size and Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
B. Paver Pedestals unless otherwise detailed: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-
density polyethylene, or polyurethane paver support assembly, including adjustable or
stackable pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs for joint spacing of 3 to 5 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide

clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray
C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of
waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues,
and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine
aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-
cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance,

glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents.

Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other
voids.
3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through

waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and
ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the
first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt
joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898and
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and
cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces.
1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip.
3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a
minimum of 75 mm along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate
applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required
according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating
substrate according to ASTM C 898.
3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
C. Apply primer over prepared substrate.
D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by

spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of
substrate.
1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of

entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 1.5 mm and a minimum dry
film thickness of 1.3 mm at any point.

2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.

3. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 9.3 sq. m.
E. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting
subsequent construction operations.
3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or
deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not
penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity.
Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.
3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over
waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 19 mm of projections and penetrations.
B. On horizontal surfaces, place insulation units unadhered according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
3.8 PLAZA DECK PAVER INSTALLATION
A. Install concrete pavers, in locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Accurately install adjustable-height paver pedestals in locations and to elevations required.

Adjust for final level and slope with shims.
1. Fill paver pedestal with concrete mix, strike smooth with top of pedestal, and cure
according to ACI 301.
C. Loosely lay pavers on pedestals, maintaining a uniform open joint width. Tightly seat
pavers against spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align
joint patterns parallel in each direction.
1. Lay out pavers to avoid less-than-half-width pavers at perimeter or other

terminations.
D. Install pavers to not vary more than 1.6 mm in elevation between adjacent pavers or more
than 1.6 mm from surface plane elevation of individual paver.
E. Maintain tolerances of paving installation within 1:48 of surface plane in any direction.
A. Engage a full time site representative qualified by the waterproofing membrane

manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, and application of the
membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to
Engineer.

B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed.

flashings.
C. Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of
decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
3.10 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING
A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to

prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Immediately after installation, provide
temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and
protected by permanent construction.
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

SECTION 07162 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes crystalline waterproofing.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, waterstops, and finishing

concrete walls and slabs to receive waterproofing.
2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Toppings" for concrete floor topping to be applied over
waterproofing.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric and preformed sealants in
concrete and masonry walls and floors.
4. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for plaster finishes to be applied over
waterproofing.
5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint finishes to be applied over waterproofing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include recommendations for substrate
preparation, method of application, number of coats and coverage.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of waterproofing Applicator's proposed warranty stating

obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and details of waterproofing preparation and application.
Show expansion joint details and waterproofing application at obstructions and penetrations.
C. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
A. Applicator Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has completed crystalline

waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in application with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain crystalline waterproofing products and materials through one
source from a single manufacturer.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07162 - Page 1 of 5

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and
other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed
only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks,
have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal
inserts.
B. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at

5 deg C or above during work and cure period and space is well ventilated and kept free of
water.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by Applicator and countersigned by Contractor,

agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that
fails to perform as required, and to maintain watertight conditions within specified warranty
period. Warranty includes responsibility for removing and replacing construction and other
work that conceals crystalline waterproofing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. American Permaquik, Inc.

2. Anti Hydro International, Inc.
3. Burke Group.
4. Conproco Corporation.
5. Gemite Products, Inc.
6. IPA Systems, Inc.
7. Tamms Industries Co.
8. Vandex Sales & Services, Inc.
9. Xypex Chemical Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B. Slurry-Coat Aggregate: ASTM C 144, sand.
C. Trowel-Coat Aggregate: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Crystalline Waterproofing: A blend of portland cement, specially treated sand, and active
chemicals formulated to penetrate by capillary action into concrete and to chemically react

with free lime in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within concrete
capillaries. This produces impervious, dense, waterproof concrete with properties meeting
or exceeding the following criteria:
1. Permeability: 9 m when tested according to CE CRDC 48.

2. Compressive Strength: 62 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM
C 109/C 109M.
3. Flexural Strength: 41 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
4. Bond Strength: 5 MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.
F. Patching Compound: Ready-mixed cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar for filling
and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections with properties
meeting or exceeding the following:
1. Compressive Strength: 52 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM

C 109/C 109M.
2. Flexural Strength: 4900 kPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
3. Shrinkage: Minus 0.01 percent at 28 days and plus 0.07 percent at 90 days when
tested according to ASTM C 596.
G. Plugging Compound: Cementitious, ready-mixed, efflorescence-free, surface waterproofing

compound with hydrophobic properties that requires only the addition of water, and is
resistant to water and moisture but is vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical,
overhead and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); with properties meeting
or exceeding the following criteria:
1. Permeability: 9 m when tested according to CE CRDC 48.

2. Compressive Strength: 41 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
3. Flexural Strength: 7 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
4. Bond Strength: 2 MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and other surfaces where waterproofing is to be applied, for
compliance with requirements for surface preparation, cleaning, and other conditions
affecting waterproofing performance.
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect other work from dripping or splatter from crystalline waterproofing during
application. Provide temporary enclosure to confine operation, to prevent polluting the air,
and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Stop active water leaks with plugging and patching compounds according to waterproofing
C. Schedule cleaning and surface preparation so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
and preparation process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

D. Surface Preparation of Concrete: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written

instructions and requirements indicated below to ensure that waterproofing bonds to
concrete surfaces. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258 by using one or a
combination of procedures as needed to effectively remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
mortar spatter, grease, oils, curing compounds, and form-release agents.
1. Prepare smooth-formed and trowel-finished concrete by mechanical abrading or

abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.
2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Mask-off surfaces adjoining areas to receive waterproofing treatment where surface damage
or discoloration might result from application of waterproofing. Do not allow crystalline
waterproofing or crystalline compound to migrate into reveals or annular spaces intended
for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.
F. At cracks in concrete, remove loosened chips and cut square reveal approximately 25 mm
deep.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions, unless more

stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Mix waterproofing components according to waterproofing manufacturer's written

instructions.
C. Protect all adjacent surfaces. Dampen surfaces with water before applying waterproofing.
D. Apply waterproofing coating evenly and fill voids and pores of substrate with waterproofing
slurry. Keep tools clean and free from build-up.
E. Apply the number of coats at the rates recommended by the manufacturer for each coat.
After allowing previous coat to cure, dampen the wall before applying additional coats.
F. Mist-cure waterproofing for two to three days immediately after application as

recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Apply treatment to columns that are integral with
walls to be treated, and extend treatment onto interior, nontreated walls that intersect
exterior, treated walls, for a distance of 600 mm for cast-in-place concrete and 1200 mm for
masonry. Where floors (but not walls) are treated, extend treatment 300 mm high onto
exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns. Unless otherwise indicated,
extend treatment to every surface of substrate in area indicated for treatment, including stair
treads and risers, pipe trenches, pipe chases, pits, sumps, and similar offsets and features.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect applied crystalline waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather exposure, and
water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition for not less than seven
days by covering with impervious sheeting or by other curing procedures recommended by

SECTION 07180 - TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications:
1. Interior and exterior, pedestrian traffic.

2. Vehicular traffic.
3. Pavement markings.

2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Floor Topping" for traffic-bearing toppings applied
over base slabs or precast concrete units.
3. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for expansion and seismic joints in
surfaces to receive traffic coatings.
4. Division 9 Section "Resinous Flooring" for high-performance resinous floorings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of each traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate
joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions.
1. Indicate layout of pavement markings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of finish product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid
backing and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
1. Provide stepped samples on backing large enough to illustrate build-up of traffic

coatings.
E. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer
indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of traffic coatings with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years.
G. Material Certificates: For each traffic coating, signed by manufacturers.
TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - Page 1 of 8

H. Field quality-control test reports.
I. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to be included in maintenance manuals. Identify

substrates and types of traffic coatings applied. Include recommendations for periodic
inspections, cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings.
J. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
K. Applicator Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Applicator is

approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.
L. Applicator Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the Applicator with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
A. Applicator Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

Section with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized,
or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
1. Certification: Written approval or license of applicator by traffic coating

manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: As follows:
1. Obtain traffic coatings from a single manufacturer.

2. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating
manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint
sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended in
writing by primary material manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic coating materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method below
for deck type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Class A roof covering per ASTM E 108.
D. Mockups: Apply mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Engineer will select one representative surface for each traffic coating and each
substrate to receive traffic coatings. Apply each coating to at least 20 sq. m of each
substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness,
texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
2. Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved by Engineer.
3. Keep approved mockups undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging
completed traffic coatings.
E. Coverage Rate: for liquid applied coatings, calculate the quantity of material needed for the

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels showing the following information:
1. Manufacturer's brand name.

2. Type of material.
3. Directions for storage.
4. Date of manufacture and shelf life.
5. Lot or batch number.
6. Mixing and application instructions.
7. Color.
B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In
storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and
substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic
coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 5 deg C, when relative
humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 3 deg C above dew point.
1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather
conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when
frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of the substrate.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer of
other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Applicator

and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without
limitations, all or any part of the traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified
warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to
unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new
substrate cracks exceeding 1.6 mm in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow,
maintenance equipment, and truck traffic.
1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.

b. Abrasion or tearing failures.

c. Surface crazing or spalling.

d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into
deck substrate.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and

miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and
field experience.
C. VOC Content: Provide traffic coatings and pavement marking paints, for use inside the
weatherproofing system, with VOC content of 150 g/L when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 TRAFFIC COATING
A. Coatings are to be high-solids, cold liquid-applied, elastomeric membranes, to ASTM C 957

/ C836 and ASTM C 1127, that produce a wearing, surface for pedestrian or vehicular
traffic. The coatings shall form a protective, waterproof barrier capable of bridging minor
reinforced cracks and resisting various chemicals. They shall resist UV-degradation and
abrasion, and exhibit slip-and-skid resistance and low-temperature flexibility, have high
substrate and intercoat bond strength, and withstand pedestrian or vehicular loadings.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.

2. Degussa (BASF) Building Systems, Sonneborn Brand Products; Conipur II Deck
Coating System.
3. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto- Deck 5000 HT.
4. Vulkem traffic deck coating System; Tremco
5. Scotch-Clad; 3M Construction Markets.
C. Vehicular Traffic Coating Grade: Use heavy-duty grade at ramps and turning areas; use
medium duty grade at driving aisles and parking bays, all as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate and

conditions indicated.
1. Material: Epoxy.
E. Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multicomponent aromatic liquid urethane elastomer.
F. Intermediate Coat: Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer.

G. Topcoat: Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer for internal use
and Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer with UV inhibitors for
external use.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range .
H. Component Coat Thicknesses: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service

conditions indicated, but not less than the following (measured excluding aggregate):
1. Base Coat: 0.65-0.80 mm minimum wet film thickness.

2. Intermediate Coat: 0.40 mm minimum wet film thickness.
3. Topcoat: 0.40 mm minimum wet film thickness.
I. Aggregate: Uniformly graded washed silica sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum
hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service

conditions indicated, but not less than the following:
a. Intermediate Coat: 4.5 to 5.44 kg/10 sq. m .
J. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Class A roof covering per ASTM E 108.
A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Sheet Flashing: Nonstaining.
1. Minimum Thickness: 1.5 mm.

2. Material: Sheet material recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic coating

manufacturer.
2.4 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range.
a. Use blue for spaces accessible to people with disabilities.
B. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and for
other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Applicator, listing conditions
detrimental to performance.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.
3. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period
recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry.
4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.
a. Test for moisture vapor transmission by plastic sheet method according to

ASTM D 4263.
b. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by manufacturer.
5. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application.
1. Acid etching of concrete surfaces shall not be allowed.
B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate
penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings.
C. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according

to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.
1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-
release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.
4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces
according to ASTM D 4258.
3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic
coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced deck-to-wall butt
joints.
C. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.

D. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and
wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and
traffic coating manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove
dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
3.5 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION
A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1. Start traffic coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

2. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements
every 9 m2.
3. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height
indicated and omit aggregate on vertical surfaces.
B. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent

contamination and damage during application and curing stages.
3.6 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Do not apply traffic paint for striping and other markings until traffic coating has cured
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce
uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates for a (0.38-mm-)
minimum wet film thickness.
C. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet traffic paint at a rate of (0.72 kg/L).
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in presence of Engineer.
2. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable
referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using tests cited in manufacturer's
product data.
3. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic coating application.
4. If test results show traffic coating materials do not comply with requirements, remove
noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces, and reapply traffic coatings.

B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after traffic coating has completely cured. Install temporary containment
assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.

exceeding a depth of 100 mm.
traffic coating installation is watertight.
4. Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine
underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
C. Final Traffic Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic coating manufacturer's technical
personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion.
1. Notify Engineer or Employer 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

3.8 CURING, PROTECTINGAND CLEANING
A. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent

contamination and damage during application and curing stages.
B. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and
horizontal surfaces:
1. Concrete (unpainted).
B. Related Sections:
A. General Performance: Water repellents shall meet performance requirements indicated

without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation.
1. Water Repellents: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined

by preconstruction testing on manufacturer's standard substrate assemblies
representing those indicated for this Project.
B. Water Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours in

comparison of treated and untreated specimens.
1. Cast-in Place Concrete: ASTM C 642.

2. Precast Concrete: ASTM C 642.
C. Water-Vapor Transmission: Comply with the following:
1. Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated

and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 96/E 96M.
2. Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission in comparison of treated and
untreated specimens, according to ASTM D 1653.
D. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent properties after 2500 hours of

weathering according to ASTM G 154 in comparison to water-repellent-treated specimens
before weathering.
E. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests.
1. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent.

2. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent.
WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - Page 1 of 6

A. Preconstruction Testing: Installed water repellents shall comply with performance

requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific preconstruction
testing of existing substrate assemblies by a qualified testing agency.
1. Select sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate capability of

water repellents to comply with performance requirements.
2. In addition to verifying performance requirements, use test applications to verify
manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure and optimum rates of
product application to substrate assemblies.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when assemblies will
be tested.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content.

2. Include manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and
spreading rate for each separate coat.
B. Field Samples: Engineer will select one representative surface for each substrate to receive
water repellents. Apply water repellent to each substrate, with either partial or full coverage
as directed. Comply with application requirements of this Section.
1. Obtain Engineer's approval of field samples before applying water repellents.

2. Apply water-repellent to 10 sq. m of wall to demonstrate surface preparation, and
execution quality.
3. If Engineer determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply water-
repellent until mockups are approved.
4. Maintain field samples during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Applicator and testing agency to comply with
"Performance Requirements" and as supplemented in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Applicator Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the applicator is approved,

representative.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent, from manufacturer.
G. Preconstruction Testing Reports: For water-repellent-treated substrates.
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

A. Applicator Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

Section with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized,
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
B. Mockups: Apply water repellent to each type of substrate required.
1. Locate each test application as directed by Engineer.

2. Size: 9.3 sq. m.
3. Final approval by Engineer of color and water-repellent application will be from test
applications.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted
weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements:
1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.
2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies.
3. Ambient temperature is above 4.4 deg C and below 37.8 deg C and will remain so
for 24 hours.
4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 4.4 deg C and
below 37.8 deg C.
5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.
6. Not less than seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet.
7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto
vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Water Repellents Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer

Installer and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace,
without limitations, all or any part of the water repellents system which fails or becomes
defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes,
but is not limited to: water penetration, deterioration in coatings; other than due to normal
ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesion, sealants, and other components of the
work.
1. Warranty includes coating, accessories, and other components of water repellents

system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS
A. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with
400 g/L or less of VOCs.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

to, the following:
a. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.; Sil-Act Dri-Treat.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC.
c. Conproco Corporation.
d. Degussa Corporation; Protectosil Aqua-Trete EM.
e. Fabrikem Manufacturing Ltd.
f. Karnak Corporation.
g. Kryton International Inc., Kryton Group of Companies (The); Hydrostop WB.
h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 628.
j. OKON Co., Inc., Division of ZINSSER Co., Inc., an RPM company.
k. Pecora Corporation.
l. Price Research, Ltd.
m. PROSOCO, Inc.
n. Rainguard Products Company.
o. SaverSystems
p. Sika Corporation, Inc..
q. Symons by Dayton Superior.
r. Tamms Industries, Inc..
s. Tnemec Inc.
t. Wacker Chemical Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's
requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method
2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance
of water repellents.
3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be
trapped beneath the application of water repellent.
4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water
repellent.
B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could
impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's
written instructions and as follows:
1. Cast-in-Place Concrete and Precast Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds,

laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water
repellents according to ASTM E 1857.
B. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-
over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there
is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.
C. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and
sealant materials identical to those required.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product
and application method to be used.
B. Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment,

using 103 kPa- pressure spray with a fan-type spray nozzle to the point of saturation.
Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do
not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated.
1. Precast Concrete: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent on units

may be completed before installing them. Mask mortar and sealant bond surfaces to
prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting
of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written
instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.
A. Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following
procedure at any time and as often as Employer deems necessary during the period when
water repellent is being applied:
1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water-repellent material

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with
product requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show
material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct
deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Engineer..
B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Engineer, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to
verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate
incomplete application.
1. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be
tested.
2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged
by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades
caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Engineer.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

SECTION 07415 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal-faced composite wall panels.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panel Assembly: Metal-faced composite wall panels,

attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for
a complete weathertight wall system.
A. General Performance: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall comply with
performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design metal-faced composite wall panel assembly, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3 L/s per sq. m of wall
area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 75 Pa.
D. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 300 Pa.
E. Structural Performance: Provide metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies capable of

withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition
unless otherwise shown on structural drawings.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - Page 1 of 12

2. Seismic Loads: Seismic Zone 2A according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise
shown on structural drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind
loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/175 of the span at the perimeter
and 1/60 of the span anywhere in the panel.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type
of metal-faced composite wall panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal-faced composite wall
panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment
system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among
factory-, shop-, and field-assembled work.
1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1:10:
a. Flashing and trim.

b. Anchorage systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal-faced composite wall panel indicated
with factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the
full range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Minimum 300 x 300 mm. Include fasteners,
closures, and other metal-faced composite wall panel accessories.
a. Composite Panels: Include four-way joint.
2. Trim and Closures: 300 mm long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Accessories: 300-mm- long Samples for each type of accessory.
4. Exposed Gaskets: 300 mm long.
5. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint
sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long strips of material
matching the appearance of metal-faced composite wall panels adjacent to joint
sealants.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-faced composite wall panel assembly indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Wall panels and attachments.

2. Girts and Stud framing.
3. Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
4. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
G. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.
J. Field quality-control reports.
K. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.
L. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal-faced composite wall panel from single
source from single manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will
contact joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing indicated in subparagraphs
below:
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion
of joint sealants to joint substrates.
a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist
during installation.
2. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of typical wall panel as directed by Engineer; approximately one bay
wide by one story high by full thickness, including supports, attachments, and
accessories.
a. Include four-way joint for metal-faced composite wall panels.
2. Conduct water-spray test of mockup of metal-faced composite wall panel assembly,

testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
1. Meet with Employer, Engineer, Employer's insurer if applicable, testing and

inspecting agency representative, metal-faced composite wall panel Installer, metal-
faced composite wall panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer,
and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal-faced composite wall
panels including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal-faced composite wall panel
installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that will affect metal-faced composite wall panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests
and inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal-faced composite wall panel
assembly during and after installation.
8. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal-faced composite
wall panel installation.
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal-faced composite wall panels, and other manufactured
items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal-faced composite wall panels for
protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Store metal-faced composite wall panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal-faced composite wall panels to ensure dryness, with
positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal-faced composite wall panels in
contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Do
not allow storage space to exceed 49 deg C.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal-faced composite wall panel for period of
panel installation.
conditions permit assembly of metal-faced composite wall panels to be performed according
to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions
by field measurements before metal-faced composite wall panel fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing,
trim, and construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer and Installer
are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace components of metal roof
panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. water penetration
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal-faced composite wall panels that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209M, alloy as standard with manufacturer,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:
a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-

colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat
with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.013 mm.
B. Panel Sealants:
1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone

sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal-
faced composite wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing
by panel manufacturer.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel

sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion
resistance unless otherwise indicated.
B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections 1.63-mm nominal thickness.
C. Zee Clips: 2.01-mm nominal thickness.
D. Base or Sill Angles and Channels: 2.01-mm nominal thickness.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:
1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.

2. Depth: As indicated.
F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 13-mm- wide flange.
1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.

2. Depth: As indicated.
3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with nominal
thickness of 1.02 mm.
4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.57-mm-
diameter wire, or double strand of 1.22-mm- diameter wire.

G. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing
members to substrates.
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer

for type of use and finish indicated.
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs,
and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners
with heads matching color of metal-faced composite wall panels by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.4 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal-faced composite wall panels

fabricated from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded
thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include
attachment system components and accessories required for weathertight system.

a. Alcan Composites USA Inc.; Alucobond.

b. Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond PE.
c. ALPOLIC, Division of Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc.; ALPOLIC.
d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System.
e. Citadel Architectural Products, Inc., Envelope 2000 (RS).
f. Protean Construction Products, Inc.; ACM 100.
B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.50-mm- thick, coil-coated

aluminum sheet facings.
1. Panel Thickness: 6 mm.

2. Core: Standard.
3. Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
C. Attachment System Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.
1. Include manufacturer's standard perimeter extrusions with integral weather stripping,

panel stiffeners, panel clips and anchor channels.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal-faced composite
wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and
finish of metal-faced composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.46-mm- minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed
openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim
with same finish system as adjacent metal-faced composite wall panels.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal-faced composite wall panels and accessories at the
factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as
necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing.
Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on

interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no
glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no
displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from
warp and buckle.
2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or
protrusion of core material.
3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits,
attached to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.
4. Dimensional Tolerances:
a. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width.

b. Squareness: 5 mm maximum.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer for application, but not less
than thickness of metal being secured.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-
half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed
to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, metal-faced composite wall panel supports, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment
tolerances required by metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer.
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer.
3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal-faced composite wall
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before
panel installation.
C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous
wall panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal-faced composite wall panels according to manufacturer's written

instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels
perpendicular to girts and subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor panels and other

components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural
movement.
1. Commence metal-faced composite wall panel installation and install minimum of

27.8 sq. m in presence of factory-authorized representative.
2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal-faced composite wall panels.
3. Flash and seal metal-faced composite wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Do
not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by
panels are installed.
4. Install flashing and trim as metal-faced composite wall panel work proceeds.
5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for
waterproofing.
6. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Wall Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces

exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal-faced composite wall panel
manufacturer.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required
for weathertight performance of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies. Provide
types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by
panel manufacturer.
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
E. Attachment System Installation, General: Install attachment system required to support

metal-faced composite wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system,
including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor
channels.
1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material

joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
2. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by
composite panels are installed.
F. Provide one of the following installations to comply with design and as approved by
Engineer:
1. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at each metal-faced composite wall
panel joint at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's
standard fasteners.
a. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant
backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

2. Track-Support Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal and vertical

tracks that provide support and complete secondary drainage system, draining to the
exterior at horizontal joints. Install support system at locations, spacings, and with
fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach panels to wall by interlocking
tracks with perimeter extrusions attached to wall panels. Fully engage integral
gaskets and leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal.
a. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to perimeter extrusions with

manufacturer's standard fasteners.
b. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and
removed without disturbing adjacent panels.
c. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Subgirt-and-Spline Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard subgirts and splines

that provide support and complete secondary drainage system, draining to the exterior
at horizontal joints. Install support system at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Attach wall panels by interlocking perimeter
extrusions attached to routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels with subgirts and
splines. Fully engage integral subgirt-and-spline gaskets and leave horizontal and
vertical joints with open reveal.
a. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and
removed without disturbing adjacent panels.
b. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting
and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel

assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets,
fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result
in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 3 m with no joints allowed within 610 mm
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or
would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25 mm deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal-faced composite wall panel units within
installed tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as
indicated and within 3-mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance
with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential
pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure as defined by
SEI/ASCE 7, but not less than 300 Pa.
C. Water-Spray Test: After completing the installation of 23-m- by-2-story minimum area of
metal-faced composite wall panel assembly, test assembly for water penetration according
to AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area directed by Engineer.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust completed metal-faced composite wall panel installation, including
accessories.
E. Metal-faced composite wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal-faced

composite wall panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written
installation instructions. On completion of metal-faced composite wall panel installation,
clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
B. After metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels
of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal-faced composite wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 07531 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system.

2. Loosely laid and ballasted EPDM membrane roofing system.
3. Vapor retarder.
4. Roof insulation.

2. Division 6 Section " Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint
preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand
specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component

materials that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as
part of a membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for
Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM
Approvals' markings.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - Page 1 of 12

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
E. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70
and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing
and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
2. Roof insulation.
3. 4.5 kg of aggregate ballast in gradation and color indicated.
4. Roof paver, full sized, in each color and texture required.
5. Termination bars.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing

system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane
roofing system.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-
ES.
I. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane

roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by

membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible
to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners for membrane
roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer.
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified
testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct

conference at Project site.

inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
delays.
4. Review requirements for deck substrate conditions and finishes, including flatness
and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
F. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect
stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Roofing Warranty: Provide complete total system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer
and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without
limitations, all or any part of the membrane roofing system which fails or becomes defective
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not
limited to: water penetration, deterioration in membranes and coatings; other than due to
normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesion, sealants, flashings, fixings,
1. Warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories,

roof insulation, fasteners, vapor retarder, roof pavers, walkway products, and other
components of membrane roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years Total System Warranty from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.

to, the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. ERSystems.
c. Firestone Building Products.
d. GAF Materials Corporation.
e. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
f. International Diamond Systems.
g. Johns Manville.
h. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.
i. Protective Coatings, Inc.
j. Roofing Products International, Inc.
k. StaFast Building Products.
l. Versico Incorporated.
2. Thickness: 1.5 mm, nominal for adhered applications.

3. Thickness: 1.2 mm, nominal for loosely laid applications.
4. Exposed Face Color: Black.
5. Provide Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced membrane for mechanically
fastened/adhered membranes or where recommended by the manufacturer for the
particular use,application or condition indicated.
2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system

manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: 1.5-mm- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.
C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene non-reinforced flexible sheet, 1.4- to 1.5-

mm- thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-
aromatic solvents, grease, and oil.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.
E. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 75-mm-

wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.
F. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match

membrane roofing.
G. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum

bars, approximately 25 by 3 mm thick; with anchors.
I. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel

sheet, approximately 25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick, prepunched.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM
securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and
other accessories, all from the manufacturer of the roofing system or as approved by him.

K. Liquid coating, specifically formulated for coating EPDM membrane roofing, as follows:
1. Type: Hypalon.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 0.15 mm thick, minimum, with maximum permeance
rating of 7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m.
1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer

for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Approvals approved for vapor-
retarder application.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane

roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application,
of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below,
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. DiversiFoam Products ( http://www.diversifoam.com/).

b. Dow Chemical Company. (www.styrofoam.com)
c. Escofoam (Kuwait).
2. Type VI, 29 kg/cu. m. (40 psi, 1.8 lbs/cu. ft. minimum) for roof covered with ballast.
3. Type VII, 35 kg/cu. m (60 psi, 2.2 lbs/cu. ft. minimum) for roof covered with
concrete pavers.

2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for

intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
B. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water

permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
2.6 AGGREGATE BALLAST
A. Aggregate Ballast: Provide aggregate ballast that will withstand weather exposure without
significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation, of the following
type and size:
1. Aggregate Type: Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced

stone.
2. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 3, ranging in size from 25 to 50 mm.
2.7 ROOF PAVERS
A. Heavyweight Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square

edged, factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent,
ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw
resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows:
1. Size: 600 by 600 mm unless otherwise indicated. Manufacture pavers to

dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1.6 mm in length, height, and thickness.
2. Weight: 110 kg/sq. m.
3. Compressive Strength: 52 MPa, minimum.
4. Colors and Textures: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.8 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged,
factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no
breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance,
ASTM C 67; and as follows:
1. Size: 600 by 600 mm unless otherwise indicated. Manufacture pavers to

dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1.6 mm in length, height, and thickness.
2. Weight: 110 kg/sq. m.
3. Compressive Strength: 52 MPa, minimum.
4. Colors and Textures: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced
and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
4. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
5. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing
components to roof deck have been removed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is
taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain
is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining
roofing.
3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area
to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 50 mm and 150
mm, respectively.
1. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air
movement into membrane roofing system.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions
for installing roof insulation.
C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall
insulation thickness is 68 mm or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 150 mm in each
direction.
1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers,

install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if
applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 6
mm with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 6 mm of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
F. Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units over substrate.
3.5 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax
before installing.
B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system

manufacturer's technical personnel.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required
by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not
apply to splice area of membrane roofing.
E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeters.
F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G. Mechanically and adhesively fasten sheet securely at the perimeter of each roof level, roof
section, expansion joint, curb, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, at any angle change which
exceeds 16 cm/m, and at other penetrations in accordance with manufacturer’s details. The
additional membrane securement may be provided by angle membrane reinforcing strip or
Seam Fastening Plates
1. Install additional membrane securement at roof-to-upstand angle, and then turn the
roof membrane onto the upstand.
2. Washers/pressure plates to lie completely flat and not less than 10 mm from edge
being fixed.
3. Extend Overlapping sheet beyond washers/pressure plates by not less than 50 mm.

H. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.
1. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by

membrane roofing system manufacturer.
I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal
membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
K. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing membrane roofing to
maintain weather-tightness of transition.
L. Adhere protection sheet over membrane roofing at locations indicated.
3.6 LOOSELY LAID AND BALLASTED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Loosely lay membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before
installing.
1. Comply with requirements in SPRI RP-4 for System 1 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's

technical personnel.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end
laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Mechanically fasten or adhere perimeter of membrane roofing according to requirements in

SPRI RP-4.
E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible.
F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.
G. Leave seams uncovered until inspected by testing agency.
H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal
membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
J. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain
weather-tightness of transition.
K. Adhere protection sheet over membrane roofing at locations indicated.

L. Install protection mat over membrane roofing, overlapping a minimum of 150 mm. Install
an additional protection mat layer at projections, pipes, vents, and drains, overlapping a
minimum of 300 mm.
M. Aggregate Ballast: Apply uniformly over membrane roofing at the rate required by
membrane roofing system manufacturer, but not less than the following, spreading with care
to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofing system. Lay ballast as membrane
roofing is installed, leaving membrane roofing ballasted at the end of the workday.
1. Ballast Weight: 50 to 60 kg/sq. m, Size 3 aggregate.
N. Roof-Paver Ballast: Install heavyweight roof-paver ballast according to manufacturer's

3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of
sheet flashing terminations.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.8 COATING INSTALLATION
A. Apply coatings to membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations,

by spray, roller, or other suitable application method.
3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written

instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 75 mm of space between
adjacent roof pavers.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform inspections.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.
C. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed.

1. Notify the Engineer 48 hours in advance of the date and time of each test.
2. Subject to the Engineer’s approval, divide large roof areas into sections with ap-
proved barriers.
3. Externally cover and seal all roof outlets and protect against damage from water pres-
sure with temporary curbs. Do not use plugs to seal outlets.
4. Flood to an average depth of 100 mm, or as agreed with Engineer, but in no case
higher than existing kerb level. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet
flashings.
5. Maintain test for 48 hours. Monitor water level and inspect for leaks at regular inter-
vals.
6. On completion of test, slowly drain roof area, ensuring that outlets do not overload or
flood.
7. Where leaks have occurred, submit detailed proposals and obtain approval for re-
medial measures.
8. After completion of remedial works, retest the affected roof areas.
D. Engage an independent testing agency to observe testing and examine underside of decks
and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
E. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
F. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance

of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing
for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies
to Engineer and Employer.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according
to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the fol-
lowing fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings con-
taining penetrating items:
1. Floors.
2. Roofs.
3. Walls and partitions.
4. Smoke barriers.
5. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for construction of openings in concrete

slabs and walls.
2. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
3. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
A. General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that
are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist
passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly
penetrated.
1. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-

protection-rated openings.
2. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies.
3. Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies.
B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as

determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rat-
ing of constructions penetrated.
C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop sys-
tems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where
systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in oc-
cupiable floor areas:
1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.

2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - Page 1 of 10

4. Penetrating items larger than 100-mm- diameter nominal pipe or 100 sq. cm in
overall cross-sectional area.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these condi-
tions both during and after construction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 100 mm in width and exposed
to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor
loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop
systems not requiring removal of insulation.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-
spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined
per ASTM E 84.
F. Provide through-penetration firestop systems complying with speccified US standards or

any approved equivalent European standards such as Euronorm or ISO.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construc-
tion condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating
item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to En-
gineer that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration
for construction and penetrating items.
2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

D. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out success-
fully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s representative.
Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of engineers and employers, and
other information specified
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system prod-

ucts certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration fire-
stop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current prod-
ucts.

G. Field-Constructed Mockup: Prior to installing firestopping, erect mockups for each different
through-penetration firestop system indicated to verify selections made and to demonstrate
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following require-
ments, using materials indicated for final installations.
1. Locate mockups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
erected.
3. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
4. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging completed unit of Work.
a. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial

Completion may become part of completed unit of Work.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is qualified by having the necessary

experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
The installer should have completed through-penetration firestop systems similar in materi-
al, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in con-
struction with a record of successful in-service performance. Firestopping work shall be ex-
ecuted by one specialized subcontractor
B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetra-
tion and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that

comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Re-
quirements" Article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing
and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of

qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by
reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the
following:
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
D. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the me-

thod specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Mi-
croscopy."

A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing in-
structions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deteri-
oration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when am-

bient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by

natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-

penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

through-penetration firestop systems.
C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become con-
cealed behind other construction until Employer's inspecting agency and building inspector,
if required by Engineer, have examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

ing:
1. Nelson Firestop Products.

2. 3M Fire Protection Products.
3. Hilti.
4. Tremco.
5. Nullifire Ltd.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Only firestop products which have been third party tested in accordance with UL1479 -
ASTM E-814 for specific fire rated construction penetrations shall be considered and used.
Items shall be tested to specific parameters including the type and number of penetrating
items, the size of the penetrating items, the maximum allowable annular space, and rated for
the hourly requirement of the structure.
B. Openings in fire resistant walls shall be provided with appropriate fire stop compounds that
maintain the specified fire resistance and prevent the passage of smoke. Non metallic pipes
exceeding 40mm in diameter shall be provided with fire stop jackets on both sides of the fire
resistant wall. Ducts protection shall be as specified in mechanical specification.
C. Openings in floor slabs shall be provided with appropriate fire stop compounds that main-
tain a minimum fire resistance rating of 60 min. Non metallic pipes exceeding 40 mm in di-
ameter shall be provided with fire stop jackets on floors underside. Ducts protection shall
be as specified in mechanical specification.
D. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating
through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demon-
strated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field expe-
rience.
E. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are
needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.
Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and
approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Ac-
cessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials
to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
F. Temporary forming materials.
1. Substrate primers.
2. Collars.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial ex-
tended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a
neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Intumescent single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-
emulsify during exposure to moisture. Use for sealing nominal openings with penetrations
of non-combustible items including; cast and steel pipe, copper pipe, conduit, electrical me-
tallic tubing (EMT)

1. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

to, the following:
a. Nelson LBS Firestop Intumescent Latex Based Sealant.

b. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB+.
c. Tremstop 33/ Tremstop IA.
C. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elas-

tomeric sealants of grade indicated below:
1. Use Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces.
2. Use nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a
nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag
grade for both opening conditions.
to, the following:
a. Nelson CLK Firestop Silicone Sealant for horizontal applications.

b. Nelson CLK non sag Firestop Silicone Sealant for vertical applications.
c. 3M Fire Firestop Sealant 2000.
d. FyreSil & FyreSil S/L.
D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with in-
tumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
to, the following:
a. Nelson PCS Pipe choke system.

b. Nelson WRS wrap strip.
c. 3M fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device.
d. Tremstop D.
E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric

sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. Use for large size - complex penetrations which ac-
commodate individual or combinations of cable trays, multiple steel or copper pipes, elec-
trical conduits, busways, or electrical/data/telecommunications cables.

to, the following:
a. Nelson CPS Composite Sheet.

b. 3M Fire Barrier CS 195+ Composite Sheet.
F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.


to, the following:
a. Nelson FSP Firestop Intumescent Putty.

b. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable putty.
c. Tremstop 11.
G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum

foil on one side.

to, the following:
a. Nelson WRS wrap strip.

b. 3M Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap Strip.
c. Tremstop WS.
H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic ce-
ment, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to
form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. Use for large size - complex penetrations which
accommodate individual or combinations of cable trays, multiple steel or copper pipes, elec-
trical conduits, busways, or electrical/data/telecommunications cables

to, the following:
a. Nelson CMP Firestop Compound.

b. Tremstop M.
I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases

filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-
retardant additives. Use for large size - complex penetrations which accommodate individ-
ual or combinations of cable trays, multiple steel or copper pipes, electrical conduits, bus-
ways, or electrical/data/telecommunications cables.

to, the following:
a. Nelson PLW Intumescent Firestop Pillows.

b. Tremstop PS 1 & 2.
J. Openings in hazardous location: for sealing openings in area’s requiring hazardous location
protection , or in those which require an environmental seal against water or dust, or for
clean room applications, or for those area’s where cables - electrical/data telecommunica-
tions - require strain relief security against cable pull out. Use for sealing multiple cables
passing through a single opening.

to, the following:

a. Nelson MCT Firestop Multi-Cable Transit System Assemblies.

b. Nelson MPS Firestop Multi-Plug System Assemblies.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration
firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality
with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting per-
formance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration

firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer
and the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop

system manufacturer using manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from con-
tacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used
to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Re-

quirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and
published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to sup-

port fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-
sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following re-
sults:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect through-

penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports.
1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through-penetration

firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements.
B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only
after inspection reports are issued.
C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, pre-

printed vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on
both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking
to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on la-
bels:
1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb.

Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system man-
ufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substan-
tial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and re-
move damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install
new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified re-
quirements.

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Preformed joint sealants.
4. Acoustical joint sealants.

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion
joint fillers and gaskets.
3. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for building expansion joints.
4. Division 8 Sections of curtain walls, sloped glazing and similar construction, for
related sealant requirements.
5. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
7. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints.
8. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Metal Pan Ceilings" for sealants required in metal
panel ceilings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TRAFFICABLE SEALANT: To qualify for traffic use under ASTM C 920 requirements,
elastomeric sealants must demonstrate a Shore A hardness of not less than 25 or more than
50.
B. LOW MODULUS: Tensile strength of 310 kPa or less.
C. MEDIUM MODULUS: Tensile strength of not less than 310 kPa or more than 517 kPa.
Movement capabilities of ±50%.
D. HIGH MODULUS: Tensile strength of more 517 kPa. Joint movement is limited to ±25%
or less.
A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant

manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect
joint sealants.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - Page 1 of 14

S08035-SPC-AR-01 REV 1.1
1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint
substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous
materials.
Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation
data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products
for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching
those submitted.
B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion
to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied

Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A,
Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite
side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include
data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For
sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere
to joint substrates during testing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide
Samples with joint sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that installer is approved,

representative.
F. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of engineers and employers, and any other information
specified or required by Engineer.
H. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
I. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each
sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
K. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,

indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
L. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.
M. Preconstruction Non- Staining Test Reports: provide laboratory test report showing that
proposed sealants do not stain natural stones used.
N. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
O. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with
requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under
cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation
methods specified in this Section.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 5 deg C.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer and Contrac-
tor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations,
all or any part of the elastomeric joint sealant assembly that do not comply with perfor-
mance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
Failure includes, but is not limited to: water penetration, adhesive and cohesive failures, de-
terioration in sealants; other than due to normal ageing and weathering; and any other de-
fects in other components of the work.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric

joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused
by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized
water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to

porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248
and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single component High-Modulus Neutral-Curing Structural Silicone Sealant: Where joint

sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with ASTM C1184 and the
following:
1. Single-component, neutral-cure, silicone rubber sealant for structural and non-

structural glazing.
a. Type and Grade: M (multi component) and NS (nonsag).

b. Class: 25.
c. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
d. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
1) Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, clear anodic aluminum.
e. Applications: 4-sided Structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system.

f. Properties:
Movement Capability % ASTM C 719 ±25

Durometer - Shore A ASTM C 661 40-45 Shore A
Elongation ASTM D 412 275-300 %
Flow/Sag (Slump) < 5.1 mm
Shelf Life 360 Days
Specific Gravity @ 25C 1.33

Tack-Free Time-50% RH ASTM C679 65 Minutes

Tear Strength ASTM D 624 7.88-8.76 kN
Tensile Strength at Max Elongation ASTM D-412 1.37-
1.44 MPa (200-210 psi)
Tensile Strength- 100% elongation ASTM D 412 0.72-
0.79 Mpa [105- 115 psi]
Tensile Adhesion, ultimate ASTM C 1135 1.2 Mpa [170 psi]
Volatile Organic Content 16.7 – 18.6 g/liter
Working Time 10 to 20 Minutes
g. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

following:
1) Dow Corning Corporation; 993.

2) Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze II.
B. Single-Component, medium modulus Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Weatherseal Sealant: Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation

that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it
comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weather seal-sealant, and
structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use:
2. Application Temperature Range -25 Deg C to +50 Deg C, as recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
3. Applications weather sealing applications
4. Minimum proprieties as follows:
Color Translucent
Durometer - Shore A ASTM D 22 = 45 Shore A
Elongation ASTM D 412 = 500 %
Peel Strength ASTM C 794 = 25 ppi 446 kg/m
Room Temperature Cure – Hours 168 Hours to 336 Hours
Service Temperature High = 177 Deg C
Service Temperature Low = -62 Deg C
Shelf Life = 360 Days
Tack-Free Time-50% RH 15 Minutes
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 = 1.40 MPa [200 psi]
Water Resistant yes
Working Time 5 to 10 Minutes

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600.
C. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,

Grade NS, Class 50, for Use T.

a. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.
B. Immersible Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant:

ASTM C 920. Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I.

a. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 880 GB.

b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 SL.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 245.
2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured

low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a
neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraSpan US1100.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Silbridge 300.
d. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
e. Sealex, Inc.; ImmerSeal.
B. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-

cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 160 kg/cu. m
and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in
precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side
with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard.

b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.
c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.
d. Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite.
e. Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150.

2.5 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant with a
solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and
complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
liquid sealant.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated
by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion

of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer),
old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and
frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining
after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that
do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of
joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or

as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply

primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to

areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following

requirements:

1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant
system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with
preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a
bonding area of not less than 10 mm. Hold edge of sealant bead 6 mm inside
masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet
extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform
contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in
vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut
silicone extrusion with a razor knife.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at
ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply
heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to
joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test
each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if
adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are
clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with
indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.
c. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
d. Tile control and expansion joints.
e. Joints between different materials listed above.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, traffic grade, Class 50 .

3. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed foam sealant.
4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water

immersion.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints in pedestrian plazas.

b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Immersible, multicomponent, pourable, traffic grade.

colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
c. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
d. Joints between metal panels.
e. Joints between different materials listed above.
f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows
and louvers.
g. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 25 .

3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag,, Class 50 .
4. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed silicone.
colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, traffic grade, Class 50.

3. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed foam.
colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls
and partitions.
e. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks.
f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows and elevator entrances.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant for horizontal applications: Single component, nonsag,

neutral curing, Class 25.
3. Urethane Joint Sealant for vertical applciations: Multicomponent, nonsag,,
Class 50.


colors.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and

horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant Location:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone.
colors.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Location:
a. Acoustical joints where indicated.

b. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Steel doors.
2. Steel door frames.
3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies.
4. Louvers in doors.
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing anchors and grouting
frames in masonry construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for door
hardware and weather stripping.
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in
steel-framed gypsum board partitions.
5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed interior doors and
frames.
6. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for field painting factory-primed
exterior doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in

ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated
steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.
B. Fire Resisting Door: A door which has been constructed in such a manner that when in-
stalled in an assembly and tested, it will pass ASTM 2074, NFPA 252 or UL 10B and 10C,
and can be rated as resisting fire for the specified duration. A fire resisting door must have
been tested and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspec-
tion agency or laboratory, confirming its fire resistance rating.
C. Fire Door Assembly: The door frame, door leaf, all hardware and accessories and vision
lites tested as one assembly.
D. Smoke Door: A fire resisting door which, in addition to having intumescent seals to seal hot
smoke, also has approved quality draught seals to seal cold smoke, installed in accordance
with NFPA 105 “Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies”. A smoke door must
have been tested and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and in-
spection agency or laboratory, confirming its rating.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - Page 1 of 9

E. Direction Of Opening: on Architectural Drawings, the indications for direction of opening

are as follows:
1. Sliding doors are indicated by an arrow indicating the direction of slide.

2. Hinged or pivoting doors are indicated by a dotted triangle, the vertex of which indi-
cates the hinge or pivot side.
A. Fire Resisting Doors and Assemblies: all fire resisting doors, shutters, grilles, screens, pa-
nels and the like, together with associated component assemblies shall have been tested and
must carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or
laboratory, confirming their fire resistance rating. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the
selected independent testing agency will conduct random field inspection follow-ups to con-
firm that the submitted doors are identical to the tested specimens. Alternatively, if the se-
lected approved independent testing agency does not support a follow-up program then the
Contractor can select a further approved agency, local or international, to fulfill this obliga-
tion. In addition, fire doors are to be designed and manufactured in a system conforming to
ISO 9001.
B. Fire Labels: all fire labels shall be issued by the testing laboratory. Alternatively, labels may
be produced by the door assembly manufacturer provided:
1. The manufacturer has a quality assurance system to ISO 9002 or approved equal.
2. The label produced shall bear a serial number, the name of the testing laboratory and
the date and number of the license.
3. The testing laboratory or a certified quality control office shall certify the consistency
of the door assembly production as per the tested specimen.
4. The testing laboratory authorizes the manufacturer to produce the labels on the condi-
tions listed above.
C. Fire Resisting Door Components: all components of fire resisting doors and assemblies, in-
cluding but not limited to: door leaves, frames, ironmongery, hardware and glazing, shall
carry identifying labels of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or labora-
tory, confirming their individual fire resistance rating. The rating of all door components
shall be equal to the rating of the door assembly and to the same standard.
1. Door leaves and frames shall be labeled and from same manufacturer.
2. Door Hardware shall be as tested or labeled.
3. Latch throw shall be as per test report or label
D. Fire Resisting Door Closers: all fire resisting doors shall be fitted with door closers that au-
tomatically close and positively latch the door by means of electro magnetic devices con-
nected to fire alarm system.
E. Fire Resisting Door Enclosures: the space between the top of the fire resisting door assem-
bly and the structural soffit above shall be closed by a wall or an appropriate panel with a
fire rating equal to or exceeding that of the door.
F. Weather Stripping: provide weather seals to all external doors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type,
level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label com-
pliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Test Certificate: certificate of test from approved independent testing laboratory describing
the fire test and confirming the fire rating of the fire door system and its components.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.

2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details.
3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.
4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for factory-finished doors and frames.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepare a sample not
less than 75 by 125 mm and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work.
F. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing sche-
dule for doors and frames.
G. Oversize Construction Certificates: For door assemblies required to be fire-protection rated

and exceeding size limitations of labeled assemblies.
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent re-
quirements are indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufactur-
er.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and la-
beled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at
positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assem-
blies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with stan-
dard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies ex-
cept for size.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum
transmitted temperature end point of not more than (250 deg C) above ambient after
30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply withNFPA 105 or UL 1784 .
E. Mockups: Before installing steel doors and frames, build mockups to verify selections made
under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and

execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indi-
cated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
2. Build mockups for each steel door and frames, and anchorage system components.
constructed.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before fabricating custom steel doors and
frames.
F. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Sub-
stantial Completion.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written Warranty, signed by manufacturer, Installer,

and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that do not fulfill quality and
performance requirements or do not comply with tolerances in referenced quality standard
such as, but not limited to:
1. Structural failures.
2. Faulty operation of movable parts and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weather-
ing.
B. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit
and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-
finished doors and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage
is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and
are acceptable to Engineer. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as
directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 100-mm-
high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a
humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide
minimum 6-mm spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

ing:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Al Kuhaimi
b. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
c. Benchmark Commercial Doors; a division of General Products Co., Inc.
d. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.
e. Copco Door Co.
f. Curries Company.
g. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc.
h. Fitzpatrick
i. Kewanee Corporation (The).
j. Mesker Door, Inc.
k. Pioneer Industries Inc.
l. Republic Builders Products.
m. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
n. Overly
o. IR Martin Roberts
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with
an ZF120 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
B. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness where used for face sheets.
2.3 DOORS
A. Fire Doors: Fire resisting doors, as indicated on the Drawings, satisfying the requirements of
ASTM E 152 and NFPA 80; flush fitting steel construction with welded internal frame, in-
ner and outer skins galvanised steel sheets and infill of approved thermal insulating material
complete with frame, vision panel, fire resisting hardware, and all necessary accessories and
fixings. Raised thresholds are not permitted.
1. Provide intumescent strips either on door edges or on the door frame where required
by the relevant codes and standards.
2. Doors are to be self-closing and are to be released automatically from hold-open posi-
tion in case of fire by electro magnetic devices connected to fire alarm system.
B. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
C. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
D. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
E. Door Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with
SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.5-mm- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into
0.8-mm- thick steel frame.
1. Sightproof Louvers: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-

shaped blades.
2. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by
actuating fusible links and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of
type and fire-resistance rating indicated by the same testing and inspecting agency
that established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.
2.4 FRAMES
A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Frames of 1.3-mm- thick steel sheet for:
1. Level 2 steel doors.

2. Wood doors, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers
on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.
D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.4-mm- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close
off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials
might obstruct hardware operation.
E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 1.0-mm- thick, electrolytic zinc-
coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 4.5-mm- diameter, steel wire complying

with ASTM A 510M may be used in place of steel sheet.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to
be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid,
neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit
and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanent-
ly factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate
doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of

doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 1.3-mm- thick, metal-
lic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges.
C. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles
and rails of nonflush units, from the following material:
1. Metallic-coated steel sheet where indicated.
D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door comply-
ing with SDI standards.
E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 3.2 mm at jambs and heads, except
not more than 6.4 mm between pairs of doors. Not more than 19 mm at bottom.
F. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.
G. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge, unless beveled edge is indicated.
H. Double-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Round vertical edges with 54-mm radius.
I. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
J. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from ei-
ther cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
K. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for
exposed screws and bolts.
L. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or

scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and
tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 1.88

W/sq. m x K or better, for mineral fiber core doors.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 1.12
W/sq. m x K or better, for polyurethane core doors.
M. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hard-
ware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware suppli-
er. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifica-
tions for door and frame preparation for hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and pro-
visions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
N. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seam-
less face joints.
2. Fabricate knock-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions.
3. For exterior applications, fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously
welded corners and seamless face joints.
4. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.
5. Provide terminated stops where indicated.

O. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.
P. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to

ANSI A250.8.
Q. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer com-

plying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufac-
turer's data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set
frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anc-
hors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders,
leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before con-
struction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent
to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Accept-
able anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.
3. Fill space behind welded steel frames with cement grout.
4. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent
to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach
wall anchors to studs with screws.
5. For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames.
6. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
7. For openings 2286 mm or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and
strike jambs.
C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in
frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with
SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80.

2. Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105.
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings

from doors and frames.

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Solid-core doors with hardboard faces.

2. Hollow-core doors with hardboard faces.
3. Wood door frames.
4. Shop priming flush wood doors.
5. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
6. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
7. Louvers for flush wood doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fire Resisting Door: A door which has been constructed in such a manner that when in-
stalled in an assembly and tested, it will pass ASTM E 2074 and NFPA 252 or UL 10B and
10C, and can be rated as resisting fire for the specified duration. A fire resisting door must
spection agency or laboratory, confirming its fire resistance rating.
B. Fire Door Assembly: The door frame, door leaf, all hardware and accessories and vision
lites tested as one assembly.
C. Smoke Door: A fire resisting door which, in addition to having intumescent seals to seal hot
smoke, also has approved quality draught seals to seal cold smoke, installed in accordance
with NFPA 105 “Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies”. A smoke door must
spection agency or laboratory, confirming its rating.
D. Direction Of Opening: on Architectural Drawings, the indications for direction of opening

are as follows:
1. Sliding doors are indicated by an arrow indicating the direction of slide.

2. Hinged or pivoting doors are indicated by a dotted triangle, the vertex of which indi-
cates the hinge or pivot side.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - Page 1 of 8

A. Fire Resisting Doors And Assemblies: all fire resisting doors, shutters, grilles, screens, pa-
nels and the like, together with associated component assemblies shall have been tested and
must carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or
laboratory, confirming their fire resistance rating. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the
selected independent testing agency will conduct random field inspection follow-ups to con-
firm that the submitted doors are identical to the tested specimens. Alternatively, if the se-
lected approved independent testing agency does not support a follow-up program then the
Contractor can select a further approved agency, local or international, to fulfill this obliga-
tion. In addition, fire doors are to be designed and manufactured in a system conforming to
ISO 9001.
B. Fire Labels: all fire labels shall be issued by the testing laboratory. Alternatively, labels may
be produced by the door assembly manufacturer provided:
1. The manufacturer has a quality assurance system to ISO 9002 or approved equal.
2. The label produced shall bear a serial number, the name of the testing laboratory and
the date and number of the license.
3. The testing laboratory or a certified quality control office shall certify the consistency
of the door assembly production as per the tested specimen.
4. The testing laboratory authorizes the manufacturer to produce the labels on the condi-
tions listed above.
C. Fire Resisting Door Components: all components of fire resisting doors and assemblies, in-
cluding but not limited to: door leaves, frames, ironmongery, hardware and glazing, shall
carry identifying labels of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or labora-
tory, confirming their individual fire resistance rating. The rating of all door components
shall be equal to the rating of the door assembly.
1. Door leaves and frames shall be labeled and from same manufacturer.
2. Door Hardware shall be as tested or labeled.
3. Latch throw shall be as per test report or label
D. Fire Resisting Door Closers: all fire resisting doors shall be fitted with door closers that au-
tomatically close and positively latch the door.
E. Fire Resisting Door Enclosures: the space between the top of the fire resisting door assem-
bly and the structural soffit above shall be closed by a wall or an appropriate panel with a
fire rating equal to or exceeding that of the door.
F. Weather Stripping: provide weather seals to all external doors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for
openings, and louvers.
1. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware
blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
4. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections
for the following:
1. Faces of factory-finished doors with opaque finish. Show the full range of colors
available.
D. Samples for Verification: As follows:
1. Corner sections of doors approximately 200 by 250 mm with door faces and edgings
representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid
lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished
doors.
2. Louver blade and frame sections, 150 mm long, for each material and finish speci-
fied.
3. Frames for light openings, 150 mm long, for each material, type, and finish required.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufactur-
er.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for

grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure: Test at positive pressure unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

2. Oversized, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested as-
semblies, provide manufacturer's certificate stating that doors comply with all stan-
dard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-door assemblies except for
size.
3. Temperature-Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors that have a tempera-
ture-rise rating of 250 deg C maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deteriora-
tion. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
1. Individually package doors in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable
tags or concealed markings.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature
and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation
areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the re-
ferenced quality standard for Project's geographical location.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written Warranty, signed by manufacturer, Installer,

and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or
twist) more than 6.35 mm in a 1067-by-2134-mm section or that show telegraphing of core
construction in face veneers exceeding 0.25 mm in a 75-mm span, or do not comply with
tolerances in referenced quality standard.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to re-
pair or replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of Sub-
stantial Completion:
a. Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Five years.

b. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
c. Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

ing:
1. Flush Wood Doors:
a. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.

b. Graham Manufacturing Corp.
c. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
d. Vancouver Door Company, Inc.
e. Malerba Dugelet
f. NT Shapland & Petter
g. Bridgman Doors Ltd.
h. Graefe, Richard Ltd.
i. Noberne Doors Ltd.
j. Weyerhauser Co.
2. Metal Louvers for Doors:
a. Air Louvers, Inc.

b. Anemostat Door Products.
c. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Leslie-Locke, Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Medium-density overlay over standard thickness, hardwood face veneers for
exterior doors; hardboard for interior doors.
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking at particleboard-core doors as follows:
a. 125-mm top-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have closers.

b. 125-mm bottom-rail blocking, at exterior doors and doors indicated to have
kick, mop, or armor plates.
c. 125-mm midrail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices.
B. Exterior Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Core: Particleboard core.

2. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
C. Interior Hardboard-Faced Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Core: Particleboard core.

2. Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core with stiles and rails bonded to
core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces are applied.
D. Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as required to provide fire rating
indicated.
2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-
holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated and as follows:
a. 125-mm top-rail blocking.

b. 125-mm bottom-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor
plates.
c. 114-by-250-mm lock blocks.
d. 125-mm midrail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices.
e. As necessary to eliminate need for through-bolting hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge

construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with
outer stile matching face veneer.
a. Doors are to be complete with concealed intumescent seals either on all door
edges or on the door frame where required by code.
4. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and astragals for pairs of fire-rated doors, unless

a. Doors are to be complete with concealed intumescent seals either on all door
edges or on the door frame where required by code.
5. Pairs for fire-rated doors: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles that are la-
beled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and as-
tragals.
2.4 HOLLOW-CORE DOORS
A. Interior Hardboard-Faced Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Core: Institutional hollow core.

2. Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core.
3. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:
a. 250-mm bottom-rail blocking.

b. 125-by-460-mm lock blocks.
c. 64-mm midrail blocking.
2.5 DOOR FRAMES
A. Wood Door Frames And Linings: Frames, complete with casings, fabricated from solid pre-
servative treated western red cedar or douglas fir members finished to receive paint or clear
finish, as shown on the Drawings.
B. Fire-Rated Interior Door and Sidelight Frames: Frames, complete with casings, fabricated
from solid fire-retardant-treated wood western red cedar or douglas fir. Frame units are
identical in construction to units tested in fire door assemblies per ASTM E 152 by UL,
Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable Engineer. Identify
fire-rated frames with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
2.6 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid wood louvers, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
B. Metal Louvers: As follows:
1. Blade Type: Vision proof, inverted V unless otherwise indicated.

2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 1.0 mm thick, hot-dip zinc coated and factory
primed for paint finish unless otherwise indicated.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors and color
densities.
C. Wood Frames for Light Openings: As follows:
1. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.

2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.
3. Frames for Openings in Fire Doors: Wood frames and metal glazing clips approved
for use in 20-minute fire-rated wood-core doors.

D. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of
1.2-mm- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet, factory primed and approved for use in doors of fire
rating indicated.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clear-
ances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comp-
ly with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions

and alignment before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs
of fire-rated doors.
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed sur-
faces, and finish as specified for associated doors.
1. Fixed Transom Panels: Fabricate fixed panels with solid lumber transom bottom rail
and door top rail, both rabbeted as indicated. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for
concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.
D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after manufacturing has
been completed.
1. Flash top of outswinging doors (with manufacturer's standard metal flashing).
2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish to be field-finished: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for
paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Paint-
ing."
2.9 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing.
B. Finish wood doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory fi-
nished.

C. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, color, and
sheen.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI System OP-2 catalyzed lacquer unless otherwise indicated.
3. Color: Match approved sample for color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's
standard colors.
4. Sheen: Semigloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describ-
ing Products)."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required

at Project site.
E. Field-Finished Doors: Final finishing requirements to be as specified in Division 9 Section

"Painting.".
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Wall access doors and frames.

2. Fire-rated wall access doors and frames.
3. Ceiling access doors and frames.
4. Fire-rated ceiling access doors and frames.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for blocking out openings for access
doors and frames in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for anchoring and grouting access
door frames set in masonry construction.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for cylinder
locks and master keying.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details
relative to materials, individual components and profiles, finishes, and fire ratings (if
required) for access doors and frames.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of customized doors and frames.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 75 by 125 mm in size, in specified finish.
D. Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, including types, general locations,
sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items with concealed framing, suspension systems, piping,
ductwork, and other construction. Show the following:
1. Method of attaching door frames to surrounding construction.

2. Ceiling-mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - Page 1 of 5

A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the
following test method and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors.

2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Engineer's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which

may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access
to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Access Doors:
a. Acudor Products, Inc.

b. Bar-Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc.
c. Cendrex, Inc.
d. Cesco Products.
e. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
f. Jensen Industries.
g. J. L. Industries, Inc.
h. Karp Associates, Inc.
i. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
j. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
k. Milcor Limited Partnership.
l. Nystrom Building Products Co.
m. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
n. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled; with minimum thickness indicated
representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M.

C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or

ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness;
with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to
ASTM A 568/A 568M. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with
ASTM A 591/A 591M, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), with
Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting; with minimum
thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to
ASTM A 568/A 568M for uncoated base metal.
E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with
ZF180 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or Z180 mill-phosphatized zinc coating;
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing
specified thickness according to ASTM A 924/A 924M.
F. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
G. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.76-mm zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive
joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
H. Plaster Bead: Casing bead formed from 0.76-mm zinc-coated steel sheet with flange
formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Painting Sections and "High-
Performance Coatings".
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
2.4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
steel or metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: not less than that indicated on fire-zoning drawings.
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 139 deg C at the end of 30 minutes.
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal
with a minimum thickness of 0.9 mm.
5. Frame: Minimum 1.5-mm- thick sheet metal with 25-mm- wide, surface-mounted
trim.
6. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge unless otherwise indicated.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Hardware for access door opening: Latch or Lock to comply with detailed drawings.
9. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by key with interior release.
10. Lock: Key-operated cylinder lock with interior release.
B. Flush, Uninsulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated
from steel or metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall surfaces.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: not less than that indicated on fire-zoning drawings .
3. Door: Minimum 1.5-mm- thick sheet metal, flush construction.
4. Frame: Minimum 1.5-mm- thick sheet metal with 25-mm- wide, surface-mounted
trim.
5. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge unless otherwise indicated.
6. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
7. Hardware for access door opening: Latch or Lock to comply with detailed drawings.
8. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by flush key with interior release.
9. Lock: Key-operated cylinder lock with interior release.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of
supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 25 to 38 mm wide around perimeter of frame.

2. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in
plaster and drywall construction and to attach masonry anchors in masonry
construction. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2.7 METALLIC-COATED STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanizing of Steel Shapes and Plates: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to comply with
applicable standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil
and other contaminants. For galvanized surfaces, apply, after cleaning, a conversion coating
suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. For metallic-coated surfaces, clean welds,

mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified
below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in

steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning
and pretreating.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum

requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
"Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor
door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as
locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of overhead coiling doors:
1. Service doors.
2. Insulated service doors.
3. Counter doors.
4. Fire-rated service doors.
5. Fire-rated counter doors
1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for lock

cylinders and keying.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position.
The door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.
A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent
deformation of door components:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition unless
otherwise shown on structural drawings.
B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design overhead coiling door components and operator to

operate for not less than 20,000 cycles and for 10 cycles per day.
1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include details
of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and
finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance
information. Include the following:
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - Page 1 of 9

1. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded

anchor devices.
2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
3. Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements;
size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and
coatings.
4. Fire-Rated Doors: Information describing fire-release system, including testing and
resetting instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's data sheets.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components
provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for Work. Where finishes
involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of
variations expected.
1. Curtain Slats: 300-mm length.

2. Bottom Bar: 150-mm length.
3. Guides: 150-mm length.
4. Brackets: 150 mm square.
5. Hood: 150 mm square.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

F. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
representative.
G. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and

exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been
constructed to comply with design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements
for labeled construction.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative

of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Installer
shall have minimum three years documented experience in installing overhead coiling
doors. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and
Employers, and other information specified
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from the overhead coiling door manufacturer.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per
UL 10b, and that are labeled and listed for fire ratings indicated by UL, FM, ITS/Warnock
Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
doors comply with all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated
door assemblies, except for size.
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Atlas Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.

2. Overhead Door Corporation.
3. Bolton Brady Ltd.
4. Raynor Garage Doors.
5. Al Kuhaimi.
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to
withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material thickness recommended by door
manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural-quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets

complying with ASTM A 653M, with Z275 zinc coating.
a. Provide manufacturer's standard flat-profile slats.
2. Insulation: Fill slat with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or

polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84.
Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces.
3. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat and as
follows:

a. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: Not less than 0.7 mm.
B. Endlocks (For service doors): Malleable-iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured
to curtain slats with galvanized rivets, or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than
alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
C. Endlocks (For counter doors): Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate
curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
D. Windlocks: Malleable-iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-
strength nylon, as required to comply with wind load.
E. Bottom Bar (For service doors): Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 38 by 38 by 3
mm thick, either galvanized or stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain
slats.
F. Bottom Bar (For counter doors): Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular
shape, either stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.
1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of

flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene, between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion
bumper for interior door.
2. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge.
G. Curtain Jamb Guides (For service doors): Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or
channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to
operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 5-mm- thick,
galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36M, and ASTM A 123. Slot bolt holes
for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain
and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.
H. Curtain Jamb Guides (For counter doors): Fabricate curtain jamb guides of angles, or
channels and angles of material and finish to match curtain slats, with sufficient depth and
strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading.
Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and minimize
noise of travel and removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and
act as weatherseal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and
reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods
and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide
intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag.
1. Fabricate steel hoods, for steel doors, of not less than 0.7-mm thick, hot-dip
galvanized steel sheet with Z275 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653M.
2. Include automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke or flame.
3. Shape: Round.
4. Exterior Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-joint bead profile for applying
joint sealant.
B. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia (For counter doors): Provide welded assemblies of the
following sheet metal:

1. Fabricate of not less than 1.6-mm- thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with Z275
zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653M.
C. Integral Sills: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of same sheet metal, but not
less than 2.0 mm thick.
D. Fire-Rated Counter: Provide fire-door manufacturer's high-pressure decorative laminate

covered countertop, UL tested and labeled for 1-1/2-hour fire rating for approved use with
fire-door assembly.
E. Smoke Seals: Provide UL-listed and -tested smoke-seal perimeter gaskets.
F. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping

gaskets fitted to bottom and at top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door
head, use 3-mm- thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood.
1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
2. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 3-mm- thick seals
of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
G. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized

steel lifting handles on each side of door.
1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 2130 mm high.
H. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
I. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam
plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks.
1. Locking Bars: Single-jamb side, operable from inside and outside.

2. Locking Bars: Full-disc Cremone type, both jamb sides, operable from inside and
outside.
3. Lock cylinder is specified in another Division 8 Section.
J. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
K. Where door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power
supply when door is locked.
L. Provide automatic-closing device inoperative during normal door operations, with governor
unit complying with requirements of NFPA 80, with easily tested and reset release
mechanism, and designed to be activated by the following:
1. Governor: Oscillating type.

2. Building fire alarm and detection system and door-holder-release devices.
2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension steel helical torsion spring,

mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with
required barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for
rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or

seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up
curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 2.5 mm/m
of span under full load.
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion
springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment
accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to
barrel and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring
ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast-iron or

cold-rolled steel plate with bell-mouth guide groove for curtain.
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

2.6 STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES
A. Powder-Coat-Applied Finish: polyester powder coating for galvanized steel components is

to be approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 2603 / BS 6496 and 6497
consisting of powder particles of resinous material and additives to improve performance.
The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on the object to produce a hard, durable
coating.
1. Minimum dry film thickness is to be80 microns

2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of colors
3. Surface finish: satin
2.7 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. Provide manual operators, unless electric door operators are indicated. When not shown,
provide chain-hoist operator unit.
B. Push-up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door
operation does not exceed 111 N.
2.8 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and
provided by door manufacturer for door and operational life specified, with electric motor
and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake,

clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and
accessories required for proper operation.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically

engaging sprocket-chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation
while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and
operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically
prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and
without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,
with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.
F. Door-Operator Type (For doors that do not exceed 2400 mm in height): Provide wall-,
hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft, gear-head-type door operator unit consisting of
electric motor, enclosed worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, chain and sprocket
secondary drive, and quick disconnect-release for manual operation.
G. Door-Operator Type (For doors that exceed 2400 mm in height): Provide wall-, hood-, or
bracket-mounted, jackshaft, gear-head hoist-type door operator unit consisting of electric
motor, enclosed worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, chain and sprocket secondary
drive, and auxiliary chain-hoist and floor level disconnect.
H. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A

insulated, electric motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to
start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 0.2
m/s or more than 0.3 m/s, without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service
factor.
1. Type: Single phase, capacitor – start type.

2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of motors with building
electrical system.
4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1
enclosure.
5. For exterior doors provide totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan-cooled motors, fitted
with plugged drain, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where
indicated.
I. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-

button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1. Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-

purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
2. Provide exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof
type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.
J. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external
automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor
immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge,
located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with
sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control
circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.
a. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
1) Self-Monitoring Type: Provide self-monitoring, 4-wire configured

device.
K. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to
automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.
L. Provide electric operators with ADA-compliant audible alarm and visual indicator lights.
M. Radio Control: Provide radio control system consisting of the following:
1. 3-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door, 1 per operator.
2. Multifunction remote control.
3. Remote antenna mounting kit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and
head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or
distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

services and to train Employer's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire-release

system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
2. Train Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and
procedures for testing and resetting release devices.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Sections.
4. Schedule training with Employer with at least 7 days' advance notice.


SECTION 08412 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior glazed storefront framing and platform screen framing.

2. Associated manual swing doors and sliding automatic platform screen doors.
1. Section “WPS 1.02: Platform Screen Doors” of “Volume 2.3 – Particular Technical
Specifications, WPS 1 – Transit System," for technical functionalities and main
performances for platform screen doors sub system.
2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant requirements and procedures.
3. Division 08 Section “Automatic Entrance Doors,” for exterior automatic entrance doors.
4. Division 08 Section “Automatic Door Operators,” for operators to automatic doors
excluding platform screen doors.
5. Division 08 Section "Glazing," for glass glazing requirements and procedures.
6. Division 26 “Electrical,” for electrical roughing-in of automatic doors, power supplies.
1.2 BID SUBMITTALS
2. Product Data: List of proposed materials, manufacturers and suppliers. Include technical
data for each principal product, material and finish. Indicate location of each product.
whether storefront assemblies are factory-assembled or site-assembled.
5. Quality Control: List and details of key personnel to be assigned to the project and a list
of previous projects completed of similar in scope and type to the work indicated.
6. Proof of Contractor’s Professional Liability Insurance for Design indemnity certificate.
8. Samples of proposed warranties.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND DOORS 08412- Page 1 of 11

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside the weatherproofing
system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed storefronts and doors. Include plans, elevations,
sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-
framed storefronts and doors, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
3. Include details of equipment and wiring diagrams for electrically operated doors.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 300

mm lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
F. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication

and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door
hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated, to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, professional engineer, and testing agency.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic door. Include emergency-exit features of
automatic doors and break-out panels in screens serving as a required means of egress.

C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed storefronts and doors, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or by a qualified testing agency.
D. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and

installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control
reports.
E. Source quality-control reports.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed storefronts and doors including life cycle
maintenance procedures, to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer or system supplier capable of producing

aluminum-framed storefronts and doors systems similar to assemblies indicated for this Project,
and with documented performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists, and with not
less than fifteen years of documented experience in that field.
B. Fabricator/ Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs personnel trained and approved for
fabrication/ installation of assemblies indicated for this Project by the manufacturer, and with
not less than five years of documented experience in that field on a minimum of three projects
of similar nature.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Engineer for review.
E. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of
storefront systems.
F. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct meeting at Project site.
1.6 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Engineer for each type of storefront and
door, including platform screens and screen doors. Coordinate mockup with requirements
of Sections of “Related Requirements” article.
2. Perform testing on mockups by a qualified testing agency. Adjust mockups until
assemblies comply with performance requirements.
in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed storefronts and doors to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
B. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 3.2 mm in 3 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Level: 3.2 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to

12.7 mm wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1.6 mm.
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 12.7 to 25.4
mm wide, limit offset from true alignment to 3.2 mm.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 25.4 mm wide or
more, limit offset from true alignment to 6 mm.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 3.2 mm in 3.7 m; 12.7 mm over total length.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following tests and
inspections on representative areas of aluminum-framed storefronts. Coordinate testing with
requirements of Section of “Related Requirements” article.
B. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in

ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.
1. Test a minimum of six areas on each floor level.

2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator jointly agree to repair or replace components of
aluminum-framed storefronts and doors that do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, and other materials beyond normal exposure.
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty in which Manufacturer and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair finishes that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
5. Crazing.
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

aluminum-framed storefronts and doors to comply with structural performance requirements.
B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed storefronts and doors representing those indicated for this Project
without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
1. Aluminum-framed storefronts and doors shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements, and live
loads.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units and breakout panels.
f. Sealant failure.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: 161 km/h (100 m/h).

2. Other Design Loads:
a. Concentrated Live Loads: As indicated. Where not indicated, as directed by
Engineer, and applied to framing members at locations that will produce greatest
stress or deflection.
b. Uniform Live Loads: As indicated, Where not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
c. Load Combinations: Unless otherwise indicated, calculate according to applicable
code.
d. Maintenance Operations Loads: As indicated. Where not indicated, as directed by
Engineer, and to equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Glass Impact Loads: Design glass to withstand, without glass breakage, a 1.78 kN/m
impact load.
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/270 of clear span or an amount that
restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 6 mm, whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces
edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less
than 3.2 mm.
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6 mm clearance between framing members

and operable units.
E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, excluding
buildings contiguous structure, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
F. Seismic Performance: Sloped glazing assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to applicable code, unless otherwise indicated. Glass fallout shall
not occur during a seismic event.
G. Structural-Sealant Joints:

1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing and metal panels.

2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 138 kPa.
H. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-
sealant-glazed storefront system without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for
preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before
adhesive failure.
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no
sealant material behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate
from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal
strength.
I. Vibration and Noise: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement,
thermal movement or live load movements transmitted to or from other building elements,
loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system, not permitted.
J. Forced-Entry Resistance for Swing Doors: Comply with Performance Grade requirements
acceptable to Engineer, and according to ASTM F 842.
K. Opening Force for Power-Operated Doors: Comply with the following unless more stringent
requirements are required by applicable code or authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required to manually set door in motion if
power fails, and not more than 67 N required to open door to minimum required width.
2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required for a
breakaway door or panel to open.
L. Entrapment-Prevention Force: Comply with the following unless more stringent requirements
are required by applicable code or authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 133 N required to prevent stopped door
from closing.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, use the same manufacturer employed
to provide the glazed aluminum curtain walls as specified in Division 08 Section glazed
aluminum curtain walls.
MR 4.

2.4 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded aluminum curtain wall framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Nonthermal.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural sealant
on two sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front.
4. Finish: Clear anodic finish generally; high-performance organic finish to framing not
visible from platform area public side.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
6. Provide framing and headers for concealing automatic door equipment.
7. Platform Screen Framing: Comply with applicable requirements for automatic sliding
doors and break-out panels in platform screens with Section “WPS 1.02: Platform Screen
Doors” of “Volume 2.3 – Particular Technical Specifications, WPS 1 – Transit System,"
and modify framing construction as applicable, to acceptance of Engineer.
B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain

glazing.
1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.

b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
e. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.5 INFILL SIGNAGE PANELS
A. Opaque Glass Signage Panels: Opaque glass one side or both sides flush with adjoining glass,
metal-faced back panels flush adjoining framing.
1. Opaque Glass: Light Glass as manufactured by Floor Gres, www.floorgres.it, distributed

by Seedal Ceramic, www.seedal.com. Style, color and gloss as selected by Engineer.
2. Metal Back Panels: Aluminum, flat, minimum 2 mm thickness, finish to match storefront
framing system.
2.6 DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Doors, General: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors for manual-swing and sliding operation.
Comply with applicable requirements for automatic sliding doors and break-out panels in
platform screens with Section “WPS 1.02: Platform Screen Doors” of “Volume 2.3 – Particular
Technical Specifications, WPS 1 – Transit System," and modify door construction as
applicable, to acceptance of Engineer.
1. Door Construction: Minimum 50 mm overall thickness, with minimum 4.8 mm thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: Narrow stile; 54 mm nominal width.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets; non-removable glazing stops on outside of door.
2.7 DOOR HARDWARE AND AUTOMATIC DOOR EQUIPMENT
A. Door Hardware, General: Provide hardware as specified Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Automatic Door Equipment: Provide carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls,
and accessories required for a complete installation.
2.8 GLAZING
A. Glass Products: Complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing," and as follows.
1. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified for
float glass; tint color as selected by Engineer.
2. Back-Painted Glass: Clear float glass, minimum 6 mm thick, back painted with low cure
baked acrylic (LCBA), applied to unexposed surface, producing an opaque finish;
seamed edges.
a. Film Thickness: ASTM D 1212 and ASTM D 82312; 25 microns.

b. Average Opacity: Less than 0.5 percent.
c. Durability: Passes ASTM D 3359.
d. Colour: As selected by Engineer.

e. Basis of Design Product: Opaque Coated Glass by Goldray Industries Ltd,

www.goldrayindustries.com.
B. Glass Schedule:
1. Platform Lobbies, below Infill Signage Panels: Monolithic tempered-laminated uncoated

tinted float glass.
2. Platform Lobbies, above Infill Signage Panels: Back painted glass, heat treated to
requirements of applicable code.
3. Other Locations: Clear float glass, tempered, unless more stringent requirements are
required by applicable code.
C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
D. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and
tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in
storefront system indicated.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-

bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 25 mm that

accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with
adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness per coat.
D. Joint Sealants at Perimeter of Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: As specified in Division 07

2.10 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
D. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary

support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.
F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
G. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing door hardware and automatic door equipment.
H. Door Hardware Installation: Factory install door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut,
drill, and tap for factory-installed door hardware before applying finishes.
I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with


SECTION 08460 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Exterior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.
1. Division 8 Section "Automatic Door Operators" for automatic door operators

furnished separately from doors and frames.
2. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for
automatic entrance operators and access-control devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.
B. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door
operator to open the door.
C. IBC: International Building Code.
D. Safety Device: Device that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.
E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.
A. Delegated Design: Design automatic entrances, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to UBC 1997.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - Page 1 of 12

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
D. Operating Temperature Range: Provide automatic entrances that operate within minus 29 to
plus 50 deg C.
E. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 6.4 L/s x
sq. m of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum
static-air-pressure difference of 300 Pa.
F. Opening-Force Requirements:
1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required to manually set door in
motion if power fails, and not more than 67 N required to open door to minimum
required width.
2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required for a
breakaway door or panel to open.
3. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 22 N to fully open door.
G. Entrapment Force Requirements:
1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 133 N required to prevent stopped
door from closing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic
entrances. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work.
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Activation and safety devices.
4. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and
locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For automatic entrances indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and certified inspector.
G. Product Certificates: For each type of emergency-exit automatic entrance, from

manufacturer.

testing agency, for automatic entrances.
I. Field quality-control reports.
J. Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include
in maintenance manuals.
K. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who
employs a certified inspector.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.
D. Source Limitations for Automatic Entrances: Obtain automatic entrances from single
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.
G. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to automatic entrances including, but not
a. Structural load limitations.

b. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
c. Coordination with electrical, glazing, and other trades.
d. Required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings to receive automatic entrances

by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared for installing automatic entrances, and distribute to parties involved. Check Shop
Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing automatic entrances to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware
required for rest of Project.
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances

with connections to power supplies and access-control system.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware.
weathering and use.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of Substantial
Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include monthly

preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,

lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation at
rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1. Engage a certified inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or

repair and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to
Employer.
2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working
hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.

2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying

with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-
SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
E. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
F. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining

grout; complying with ASTM C 1107; of consistency suitable for application.
H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 0.76-mm thickness per coat.
I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
2.2 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites,

framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety
devices, and accessories required for a complete installation.

B. All-Glass and Sliding Automatic Entrance:

to, the following:
a. Biparting-Sliding Units:
1) Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group

company.
2) DORMA Automatics; Div. of DORMA Group North America.
3) Gildor, Inc.
4) Horton Automatics; Div. of Overhead Door Corporation.
5) KM Systems, Inc.
6) Nabco Entrances Inc.
7) Sierra Automatic Doors, Inc.
8) Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works.
9) Tormax Technologies, Inc.
2. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors, with two sliding leaves and sidelites on each
side.
a. Traffic Pattern: Two way.

b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only.
c. Mounting: Between jambs.
3. Operator Features:
a. Power opening and closing.

b. Drive System: Chain or belt.
c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
d. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds.
e. Obstruction recycle.
f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated.
g. Energy-conservation switch that reduces door-opening width.
4. Sliding Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's

standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or
delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller
track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered,
continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot
assembly.
a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers
for each active leaf.
5. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to detect
pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.
6. Safety Devices: Two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs to detect
pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.
7. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with Class I, clear anodic
finish.

2.3 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS
A. Framing and Transom Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum

3.2 mm thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 1.6-mm wall thickness.
B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 45-mm- thick, glazed doors with minimum
3.2-mm- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that
span full length of top and bottom rails.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and

manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets.
2. Stile Design: Medium stile, 90-mm nominal width.
3. Rail Design: 125-mm nominal height.
4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design and
finish.
C. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 3.2-mm- thick, extruded aluminum and extending full
width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or
removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure
panels to prevent unauthorized access.
1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing.

2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 79 kg per leaf over spans up to 4.3 m
without intermediate supports.
a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 4.3 m.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

2.4 DOOR OPERATORS AND ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door
size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free
operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors
and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind
loads.
2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by
fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled
mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with
solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power
off.
B. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, infrared-scanner units with metal or plastic housing;

adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10; with
relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds. Sensors shall remain active at all times.

C. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting.

Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.
D. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,
provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched,
or bolted.
E. Opening-Width Control: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding
doors to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a
selected partial opening width.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match
door finish unless otherwise indicated.
B. Manual Opening for Power-Operated Swinging Doors: Provide hardware that in a power
failure allows door to open with a manual force not to exceed 133 N according to
BHMA A156.10.
C. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Provide breakaway device that allows door
to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position.
Maximum force to open door shall be 222 N according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt
powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.
D. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior

thumb turn, with minimum 25-mm- long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system.
2. Deadbolts: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

3. Two-Point Locking for Sliding Doors: Mechanism in stile of active door leaf that
automatically extends second lockbolt into overhead carrier assembly.
E. Automatic Locking for Sliding Door where directed by Engineer: Electrically controlled
device mounted in header that automatically locks door against sliding when in closed
position. Provide fail secure operation if power fails.
1. Include concealed, vertical-rod exit devices, UL 305, with latching into threshold and
overhead carrier assembly and released by full-width panic bar; and that prevent
emergency breakaway doors from swinging and that permit emergency egress.
2. Include locking devices for sidelites, to prevent manual break out.
F. Dustproof Strikes for All-Glass Sliding Doors: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door
Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."
G. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with
nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and

thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.
1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed
surfaces by descaling or grinding.
3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are
required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match
framing.
a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,

assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.
1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded
or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a
complete system to support required loads.
2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish
surfaces.
3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
6. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and
moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior.
7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from
building structure.
8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to

support imposed loads and for installing hardware.
D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.
E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type
of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for
final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and
tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors and
breakaway sidelites.
G. Activation and Safety Devices:

1. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10
for type of door and direction of travel.
2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above
finished floor as follows:
a. Top Beam: 1219 mm.

b. Bottom Beam: 610 mm.

C. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic
entrances.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints
free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines
and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.

1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent

possible.
2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true
to location with anchorage for permanent support.
3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within
framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior.
C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified
in Division 16 Sections.
D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as

specified in Division 16 Sections.
E. Activation and Safety Devices: Install and adjust devices to provide detection field and
functions indicated.
F. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to

provide weathertight installation.
1. Set bottom-guide track system, framing members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
H. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to
terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on
bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
A. Inspection: Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrances and
prepare test and inspection reports.
1. Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance to determine
compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.
2. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Engineer and
Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.
B. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for
weathertight closure; comply with requirements in BHMA A156.10.
B. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation
equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware,
operating equipment, and other moving parts.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied

conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours

for this purpose.
A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and
sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original
finish.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and

maintaining glass.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a certified inspector to train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,

and maintain automatic entrances.

SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations.

2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating
finish among aluminum fenestration units.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing".
4. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for incorporating aluminum
windows into glazed curtain walls and for coordinating finish among aluminum
fenestration units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:
1. AW: Architectural.
B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:
1. Design pressure number in pascals used to determine the structural test pressure and
water test pressure.
C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the
design pressure.
D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size).
Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to
comply with requirements for performance class.
E. Types of Windows
1. Fixed windows.
F. Direction Of Opening: on Architectural Drawings the indications for direction of opening

are as follows:
1. Fixed windows are indicated by letter “F”
G. Manufacturer: the window or curtain wall system manufacturer.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - Page 1 of 11

H. Fabricator: the fabricator of window or curtain wall joinery components based on system
provided by manufacturer.
I. Installer: the Installer of window or curtain wall joinery components.
A. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of

the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that
pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:
2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to
less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 19 mm, whichever is less, at design pressure
based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform
Load Deflection Test or structural computations.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for
thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C material surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating
instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:
1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.

2. Joinery details.
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather-stripping details.
6. Thermal-break details.
7. Glazing details.
8. Window cleaning provisions.
analysis data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of aluminum windows and used to
determine the following:
a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated.
b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories.
D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
1. Main Framing Member: 300-mm- long, full-size sections of extrusions with factory-
applied finish.
2. Window Corner Fabrication: 300-by-300-mm- long, full-size window corner
including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied finish, weather
stripping, and glazing.
3. Operable Window: Full-size unit with factory-applied finish.
4. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finishes.
5. Weather Stripping: 300-mm- long sections.
E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer, Fabricator, Installer, professional engineer and testing
agency.
1. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
representative.
G. Field quality-control test reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by
Contractor and approved by the Engineer
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performedby a qualified

testing agency approved by the Engineer for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum
window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.
I. Maintenance Data: For operating hardware, weather stripping and finishes to include in
maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for

installation of units required for this Project.
1. A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum
three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses
of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
2. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility.
3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing items specified in this

section similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.

Manufacturer shall be capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed

performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in
lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations
C. Coating Applicator: apply coatings to metal work only by applicators licensed by the
coating manufacturer.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single
manufacturer.

for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects
are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and
Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more
methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American

Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and
Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials,
components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if
indicated.
1. Provide AAMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label.
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and

with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup for type(s) of window(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings.

2. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup
construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum
acceptable results.

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and
procedures related to aluminum windows including, but not limited to, the following:

delays.
2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be
coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.
3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with
other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing,
flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and
weathertight exterior building envelope.
5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed
by other trades.
A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer,

Fabricator and Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace
components of window systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in
a. Failure to meet performance requirements

b. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
e. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
f. Condensation, water penetration, or air infiltration through fixed glazing and
framing areas.
g. Failure of operating components, movable sash and hardware
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty signed by Contractor and
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
5. Crazing.
7. Color retention.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Graham Architectural Products Corp.
3. Heuck.
4. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company.
5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems.
6. Window Technologies, Inc.; Century Manufacturing, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer

for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 150-
MPa ultimate tensile strength, not less than 110-MPa minimum yield strength, and not less
than 1.6-mm thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials

warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window
members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 3.2 mm thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw
threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated

steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide
sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated

steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated
steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide
sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for

permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment
when aluminum window is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying

with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
F. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702.
G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's
standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by
sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.

2.3 WINDOW
A. Window Type: Fixed.
B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance

indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent
performance requirements are indicated.
1. Performance Class and Grade: AW (2150 Pa) 45 PSF.
C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal

performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45.
D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor

maximum indicated at 24-km/h exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures
when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1. U-Factor: 2.0 W/sq. m x K or less.
E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window

SHGC maximum of 0.40, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.
F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 30 STC
when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined
by ASTM E 413.
G. Air Infiltration: shall be to the type of window specified when tested in accordance with
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test.
1. Maximum Rate and inward test pressure shall be as indicated in

AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS
H. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods

at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test.
1. Test Pressure: 20 percent of positive design pressure, but not more than 720 Pa.
I. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 20 requirements when tested

according to ASTM F 588.
J. Life-Cycle Testing: Test according to AAMA 910 and comply with AAMA/ WDMA 101/
I.S.2/NAFS.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and
glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.
B. Glass: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing."
C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system as indicated in Division 8

Section "Glazing."

2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless

steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material
compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock
aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions.
Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide
extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel.
1. Hardware shall be as specified in AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Integral Ventilating System/Device: Where indicated, provide weather-stripped, adjustable,

horizontal fresh-air vent, with a free airflow slot, full width of window sash by
approximately 75 mm when open, complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. Equip
vent bar with an integral insect screen, removable for cleaning.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator
framing.
C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral,

concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window
members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years
and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and
condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable
design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.
3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware
bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator.
E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to
exterior.
F. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural
water penetration.
G. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete
with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection
tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of
withstanding design loads of window units.

H. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and
dimensions indicated but not less than 1.6-mm- thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope
corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to
match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window
units.
I. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and
possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section
"Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
J. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section
"Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator
frames.


B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate,
and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather
barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window
installation.
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other
construction debris.

2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets
at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within
76 mm of opening.
3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for
installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight
construction.
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and
moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.
E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3 FINISHES
A. Application of Finishes: prepare substrates and apply finishes in strict accordance with
Manufacturer’ printed instructions and by applicators licensed by the coating manufacturer.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance
shall be performed according to AAMA 502, Test Method A, by applying same test
pressures required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS in
Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Testing Extent: Three mockup windows as selected by Engineer and a qualified
independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested immediately
after installation.
3. Test Reports: Shall be prepared according to AAMA 502.
C. Remove and replace noncomplying aluminum window and retest as specified above.


3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, hardware and accessories for a tight fit at contact
points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below
exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact
window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.

SECTION 08712 - DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Non-fire-rated sliding doors.
c. Other doors to the extent indicated.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.

3. Electrified door hardware.
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part
of fire-rated labeled assemblies and for door silencers provided as part of hollow-
metal frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals and integral intumescent seals
provided as part of fire-rated labeled assemblies.
3. Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames" for access door hardware, including
cylinders.
4. Division 8 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors" for door hardware provided as part of
overhead door assemblies.
5. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door
hardware, including cylinders.
6. Division 8 Section "Automatic Entrance Doors" for entrance door hardware,
including cylinders.
7. Division 16 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage
wiring work.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following.
Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
1. Pivots, thresholds, weather stripping and cylinders for locks specified in other
Sections.
2. Permanent cores to be installed by Employer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - Page 1 of 35

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:
a. System schematic.
b. Point-to-point wiring diagram.
c. Riser diagram.
d. Elevation of each door.
2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control,
security and building control system.
3. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door
hardware.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish, color, and texture required for each type of
door hardware indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 51-by-102-mm plate Samples of each type of
finish required, except primed finish.
E. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full
size. Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit
Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets.
1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final
check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying
requirements.
F. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer.
1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors
complies with listed fire door assemblies.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks, latches and closers.
I. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
Include final hardware and keying schedule.
K. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer and

Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door
hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware
sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's

"Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and
number and date each page.

b. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each

door and frame.
2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware
item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening
including name and manufacturer.
4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both
on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7) Mounting locations for door hardware.
8) Door and frame sizes and materials.
9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including
location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control
systems.
a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component

functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person
wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized
person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.
10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and
frame.
c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible
date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede
fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door
hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door
hardware sets.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer and Architectural

Hardware Consultant, detailing Employer's final keying instructions for locks.
Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door
designations.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 80-2007: Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
B. NFPA 101-2006: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
and who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project with minimum three years documented experience and that is
approved, authorized, or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that
is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware, and

providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course
of the Work to consult with Contractor, Engineer, and Employer about door hardware
and keying.
2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.
3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware,
including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by

DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project.
1. Electrified Door Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A qualified Architectural

Hardware Consultant who is experienced in providing consulting services for
electrified door hardware installations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door

hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical
modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
fire ratings indicated, based on testing according toNFPA 252 .
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.
E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Labels: all hardware components of fire resisting doors assemblies including, but not limited
hinges, locks, bolts, door closers shall carry the identifying labels of an approved
independent testing and inspection agency or laboratory, confirming their fire resistance
rating. The rating of all door components shall be equal to the rating of the door assembly.
G. Door Closers: all fire resisting doors assemblies shall be fitted with door closers to close and
positively latch the door.
H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to
Employer, Construction Manager, Contractor, and Engineer, conference participants shall
also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Employer's security
consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after
reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security

required, and plans for future expansion.
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3. Requirements for key control system.

4. Address for delivery of keys.

in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and
procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.
delays.
4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
J. Hardware Schedule: The manufacturer's names and references included in the schedule are
only included to establish the minimum standards required and to establish guidelines as to
shape, function, material and finish of the hardware items required. Hardware items, which
are similar to those setout in the schedule and in accordance with minimum standards set out
in part 2, can be selected from any of the approved manufacturers listed in Part 2.
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered
to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware
sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Employer.
D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Employer by registered mail or overnight package
service.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction.
Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements
are specified in Division 3.
B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified
to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to
comply with indicated requirements.
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door

hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices,
access control system, security system and building control system.
D. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to
existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field
verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening
conditions and to provide for proper operation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace components of
door hardware systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as

follows:
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Concealed Floor Closers: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Employer's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning,
and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies
same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1. Door Hardware: 2%.

2. Electrical Parts: 2%.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this
Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets"
Article. Products are identified by descriptive titles corresponding to requirements specified
in Part 2.
C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:

to, manufacturers specified.
2.2 HINGES, GENERAL
A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 1524 mm.

2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 1549 to 2286 mm.
3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 2311 to 3048 mm.
4. For doors with heights more than 3048 mm, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every
750 mm of door height greater than 3048 mm.
B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves)
into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges.

2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.
3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.
D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.

2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin.
3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
E. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:
1. Hospital Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel.

2. Decorator Tips: Oval.
3. Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf.
4. Maximum Security Pin: Fix pin in hinge barrel after it is inserted.
5. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging
exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors with locks.
6. Corners: Square unless otherwise indicated.
F. Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following:
1. Power Transfer: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and

continuous through hinge knuckle.
2. Monitoring: Concealed electrical monitoring switch.

3. Power Transfer and Monitoring: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each

leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle, and with concealed electrical monitoring
switch.
G. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors
and wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of
hinges.
2.3 HINGES
A. Butts and Hinges: Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.

2. Bommer Industries, Inc.
3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.
4. Hager Companies.
5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
7. PBB, Inc.
8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
D. Antifriction-Bearing, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A156.1, heavy weight; Grade 1,

with 4 ball bearings; button tips; nonrising removable pins; and base metal as follows:
1. Base Metal: Stainless steel.
2.4 PIVOTS AND PIVOT HINGES
A. Pivots: Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
B. Self-Closing Pivots: Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
1. Bommer Industries, Inc.

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America.
3. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
4. Hager Companies.
5. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
7. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
D. Double-Acting Door Pivots: BHMA A156.4, Grade 2, consisting of one top and one bottom
assembly with bearings; nonferrous bottom jamb bracket; wrought brass or bronze.

E. Double-Acting, Door Pivots: BHMA A156.4, Grade 2, stainless-steel or polycarbonate top

and bottom, each a walking-type, cam-operated pivot; surface mounted.
F. Single-Acting, Center-Hung, Door Pivots: BHMA A156.4, Grade 2, wrought-brass or

bronze top and bottom units, each containing rack-and-pinion assemblies permitting door to
open 105 degrees; reversible.
G. Center Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application
indicated; complying with the following:
1. Top Pivots: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze
bearing; mortised into door and frame.
2. Bottom Pivots: Recessed in floor in cement case, and mortised into door; with thrust
ball bearing.
3. Base Metal: Steel.
H. Offset Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application indicated;
1. Offset: 19 mm.
2. Fire Rated: Listed for use with labeled fire doors where indicated.
3. Top Pivots: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze
bearing; mortised into door and frame.
4. Bottom Pivots: Recessed in floor in cement case, and mortised into door; with thrust
ball bearing.
I. Intermediate Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application
indicated; with oil-impregnated bronze bearing; complying with the following:
1. Offset: 19 mm.
2. Mounting: Full mortise.
3. Knuckle: Standard.
J. Double-Acting, Gate-Spring Pivot: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, mortise application,

adjustable tension, and base metal as follows:
1. Base Metal: Malleable iron.
K. Double-Acting, Gravity Pivot: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, malleable iron, surface applied,
adjustable tension.
2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,

comply with ANSI A117.1.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of
the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 22 N.
B. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A156.25.

C. Lock Trim:
1. Levers: Cast.
2. Knobs: Wrought.
3. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast.
4. Dummy Trim: Match knob and lever lock trim and escutcheons.
5. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated on Drawings or, if sets are provided by
another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated.
D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors, and as follows:
1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 19-mm latchbolt throw.

2. Deadbolts: Minimum 25-mm bolt throw.
E. Rabbeted Meeting Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted
meeting stiles.
F. Backset: 70 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
3. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended
by manufacturer.
4. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
5. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply
with the following:
1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.
B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13, Grade 1;
Series 1000. Listed under Category F in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co.

b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.
c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
d. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works.
e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.
f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
g. Folger Adam Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
h. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
i. Marks USA.
j. PDQ Manufacturing.
k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

l. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.

m. Security Door Controls.
n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.7 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS
A. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted; battery powered, housed in metal
case; with red-and-white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN--
ALARM WILL SOUND." Include the following features:
1. Low-battery alert.
2. Outside key control.
3. Audible alarm that sounds when unauthorized use of door occurs.
4. Silent alarm with remote signal capability for connection to remote indicating panel.
5. Strike: Mortise.
6. Single-Door Type: Activated by horizontal bar.
7. Pairs-of-Door Type: Activated by horizontal bar.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Detex Corporation.
3. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.8 DOOR BOLTS, GENERAL
A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors, and as follows:
1. Half-Round Surface Bolts: Minimum 22-mm throw.

2. Interlocking Surface Bolts: Minimum 24-mm throw.
3. Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: Minimum 25-mm throw; listed and labeled for fire-rated
doors.
4. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 19-mm throw.
B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
C. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 13-mm- diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless
steel with minimum 305-mm- long rod for doors up to 2134 mm in height. Provide
longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 2134 mm.
a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.

b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.
c. Door Controls International.
d. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
e. Hager Companies.
f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
h. Trimco.

D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; designed for mortising into door edge.
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.

b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.
d. Door Controls International.
e. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
f. Hager Companies.
g. Hiawatha, Inc.
h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
j. Trimco.
E. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1; designed for mortising
into door edge.
a. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.

b. Door Controls International.
c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
d. Hager Companies.
e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
f. Trimco.
2.9 DOOR BOLTS
A. Half-Round Surface Bolts: 152-mm polished-brass or burnished-steel, half-round rod and

knob; minimum 22-mm throw; with universal strike.
B. Interlocking Surface Bolts: 152-mm extruded-brass or aluminum, interlocking track and

rod; minimum 24-mm throw; with universal or mortise strike.
C. Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: 203-mm steel bolt with 2 steel guides; minimum 25-mm throw;
listed and labeled for fire-rated doors; with universal strike.
D. Automatic Flush Bolts: Fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-activated
bolts that automatically retract when active leaf is opened and that automatically engage
when active door depresses bolt trigger; listed and labeled for fire-rated doors. Provide
brass or stainless-steel cover plate, top and bottom strikes, guides, guide supports, wear
plates, and shims.
E. Self-Latching Flush Bolts: Fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-
activated bolts that automatically engage when active door depresses trigger; listed and
labeled for fire-rated doors. Bolts are manually retracted by a slide in the bolt face. Provide
brass or stainless-steel cover plate, top and bottom strikes, guides, guide supports, wear
plates, and shims.
F. Manual-Extension Flush Bolts: Fabricated from extruded brass or aluminum, with 305-mm
rod actuated by flat lever; listed and labeled for fire-rated doors. Provide matching strike.
G. Slide Flush Bolts: Cast brass, with rod actuated by slide. Provide matching strike.

H. Tubular Bolts: Polished-brass or polished-bronze, oval turn knob and escutcheon; minimum
14-mm steel bolt with 13-mm throw.
I. Dustproof Strikes:
1. Jamb Type: Polished wrought brass, with 19-mm- diameter, spring-tension plunger.
2. Floor Type: Polished wrought brass, with 19-mm- diameter, spring-tension plunger.
3. Locking Floor Type: Polished wrought brass, with 19-mm- diameter, spring-tension
plunger that can be locked in the up position by rotating plunger.
2.10 EXIT DEVICES, GENERAL
A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Listed under Category G in BHMA's "Certified
Product Directory."
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating
devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of
the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 22 N.
C. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
D. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
E. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices
complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for
which they have been tested.
F. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
1. Operation: Rigid unless otherwise indicated.
G. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder unless otherwise indicated; material and finish to match
locksets, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors, non-fire-rated wood doors and
fire-rated wood doors.
I. Available Manufacturers:
1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.

2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
5. Detex Corporation.
6. Door Controls International.

8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.

9. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
10. Monarch Exit Devices & Door Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
11. Precision Hardware, Inc.
12. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp.
14. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
15. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.11 EXIT DEVICES
A. Rim Exit Devices:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 1, rim.

2. Actuating Bar: Push pad.
3. Material: Stainless steel.
B. Mortise Exit Devices:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 10, narrow stile.

C. Surface Vertical-Rod Exit Devices:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 5, narrow stile.

4. Configuration: Top and bottom rods.
D. Concealed Vertical-Rod Exit Devices:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 7, for wood doors and Type 8, for metal doors.
E. Combination Exit Devices:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 12, mortise and concealed vertical rod.
F. Automatic Latching Bolts:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 23, concealed.

G. Extension Flush Bolts:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 25, automatic.

H. Electrified Exit Device Options: Types and functions indicated as follows:
1. Request-for-Exit Function: Signal initiated when push bar is actuated.

2. Delayed Egress: Depressing push bar for more than 3 seconds initiates irreversible
alarm and 15-second delay for egress. Fire alarm voids 15-second delay.
3. Electric Latch Retraction: Remote signal activates continuous-duty solenoid that
retracts latch.
4. Electric Locking/Unlocking: Remote signal controls locking of outside trim;
a. Fail-Safe: Locked when energized, unlocked when de-energized and during

power failure.
b. Fail-Secure: Unlocked when energized, locked when de-energized and during
power failure.
c. Hold-Back Mechanism: Continuous-duty solenoid.
5. Push-Bar Monitor: Signal initiated to remote alarm when push bar is actuated.
6. Push-Bar Alarm: Signal initiated to audible, battery-powered, internal alarm when
push bar is actuated.
I. Electronic Exit Bars: Nonlatching electronic releasing device, activated by an adjustable

capacitance sensor, with no moving parts; listed and labeled as panic exit hardware.
Fabricate bar from extruded aluminum, and provide door and frame transfer device and
4.9 m of cord to route wiring off the door frame.
J. Extruded-Aluminum Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, with malleable-iron top and

bottom retainers, and prepared for strikes as follows:
1. Strikes: Two standard recessed strikes unless otherwise indicated.
K. Tube-Steel Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, with malleable-iron top and bottom
retainers, and prepared for strikes as follows:
1. Strikes: Two standard recessed strikes unless otherwise indicated.
2.12 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30, Grade 1; M, mechanical and E, electrical.
1. Key Control Level: Category A unless otherwise indicated.

2. Destructive Test Level: Category A unless otherwise indicated.
3. Surreptitious Entry Resistance Level: Category A unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze,

stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:
1. Number of Pins: Seven.

2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and
raised trim ring.
C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with
the following:
1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with
other manufacturers' cylinders.

2. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with
core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.
a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Employer.

b. Furnish permanent cores to Employer for installation.
E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
2.13 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,

Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:
1. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master
key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key.
2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and
include the following notation:
a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

b. Master Keys: Five.
c. Grand Master Keys: Five.
d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.
2.14 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish;
containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-
gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150
percent of the number of locks.
1. Multiple-Drawer Cabinet: Cabinet with drawers equipped with key-holding panels

and key envelope storage, and progressive-type ball-bearing suspension slides.
Include single cylinder lock to lock all drawers.
B. Cross-Index System: Multiple-index system for recording key information. Include three
receipt forms for each key-holding hook. Set up by key control manufacturer.

a. Key Control Systems, Inc.

b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc.
c. MMF Industries.
d. Sunroc Corporation.
C. Key Control System Software: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; multiple-index system for
recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and
printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual.
a. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works.

b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
D. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of 10 keys, with tamper switches to connect to
intrusion detection system.
a. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. Knox Company.
c. Supra Products.
2.15 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Standard: BHMA A156.31, Grade 1.
B. General: Use fail-secure electric strikes with fire-rated devices.
1. Material: Cast stainless steel.

2. Mounting: Mortised.
3. Monitoring: Mechanical latchbolt and Mechanical strike.
1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.

2. Brink, R. R. Locking Systems, Inc.
3. Folger Adam Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
4. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
5. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
6. Precision Hardware, Inc.
7. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp.
8. Security Door Controls.
9. Trine Access Technology.
10. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
2.16 OPERATING TRIM, GENERAL
A. Standard: BHMA A156.6.
B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.

2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.
3. Forms + Surfaces.
4. Hager Companies.
5. Hiawatha, Inc.
7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
8. Trimco.
2.17 OPERATING TRIM
A. Flat Push Plates: 1.3 mm thick, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high; with square corners and
beveled edges, secured with exposed screws.
B. Cold-Forged Push Plates: 1.3 mm thick, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high; with square
corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws.
C. Push-Pull Plates: 3.2 mm thick, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high; with square corners,
beveled edges, and raised integral lip; secured with exposed screws.
D. Straight Door Pulls: 19-mm constant-diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 38 mm

from face of door; fastened at 203 mm o.c.
1. Mounting: Surface applied with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
E. Offset Door Pulls: 19-mm constant-diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 38 mm

from face of door and offset of 51 mm; fastened at 203 mm o.c.
F. Flush Door Pulls: Mortised 13 mm deep, fastened by screws, and as follows:
1. Shape: Circular unless otherwise indicated.
G. Pull-Plate Door Pulls: 1.3-mm- thick plate, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high, with square
corners and beveled edges; 19-mm constant-diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 38
mm from face of door; fastened at 203 mm o.c.
H. Straight Push-Pull Door Pulls: Push-pull plate minimum 125 mm wide by 300 mm high,
with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door.
I. Offset Push-Pull Door Pulls: Push-pull plate minimum 125 mm wide by 300 mm high,
with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door, and offset 50 mm.
J. Single Push Bar: Horizontal bar, with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door, and
as follows:
1. Shape and Size: 25-mm constant-diameter round bar.

2. Mounting: Surface applied with concealed fasteners.
K. Double Pull Bar: Two horizontal bars connected by matching vertical pull bar and spaced at
200 mm o.c.; with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door, and as follows:

1. Shape and Size: 25-mm constant-diameter round bars.

2. Mounting: Surface applied with concealed fasteners.
2.18 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless
automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
1. Material: Polished brass or bronze, with strike plate.
B. Flat Overlapping Astragals: Flat metal bar, surface mounted on face of door with screws;
minimum 3.2 mm thick by 50 mm wide by full height of door; and base metal as follows:
C. Rigid, Housed Astragals: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; fastened to face
of door with screws.
1. Gasket Material: Closed-cell sponge silicone.

2. Housing Material: Aluminum.
D. Overlapping-with-Gasket Astragals: T-shaped metal, surface mounted on edge of door with

screws; with integral gasket and base metal as follows:

2. Gasket Material: Silicone.
2.19 CLOSERS, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating
devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1.
1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 22.2 N applied perpendicular to door.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 22.2 N applied parallel to door at latch.
c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Surface Closers: closers shall be tested for 10 million cycles of operation with minimum
warranty of 10 years. They shall be suitable for door capacity as per the manufactures
recommendations.
C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer
device with fire alarm system.
D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are
indicated. Match door hardware finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates with insert of floor finish material for
floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to
accommodate thickness of floor finish.

F. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written

recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather,
and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field
conditions and requirements for opening force.
G. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified
Product Directory." Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side
of door, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North
America.
d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
H. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Listed under Category C in BHMA's

"Certified Product Directory."
a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North

America.
b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
d. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
I. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15. Listed under Category C in BHMA's
"Certified Product Directory."
1. Life-Safety Type: On release of hold open, door becomes self-closing. Automatic

release is activated by smoke detection system unless otherwise indicated.
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North
America.
c. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
d. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
f. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
J. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.

2.20 CLOSERS
A. Traditional Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main arm; enclosed in a
cast-aluminum alloy shell; complying with the following:
1. Mounting: Parallel arm.

2. Type: Regular arm.
3. Backcheck: Adjustable, effective between 60 and 85 degrees of door opening.
B. Modern-Type-without-Cover Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with

adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main
arm; enclosed in a cast-aluminum alloy shell; complying with the following:

4. Closing Power Adjustment: At least 50 percent more than minimum tested value.
C. Modern-Type-with-Cover Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with

adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main
arm; enclosed in cover indicated; complying with the following:

4. Cover Material: Aluminum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Concealed-in-Door-Type Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with

adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; mortised into top rail
of minimum 44-mm- thick doors and track mortised into head frame; with double lever arm
indicated; complying with the following:
1. Type: Mortised soffit plate.

2. Arm: Regular.
E. Overhead Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; mortised into head frame; with cast-metal
body and exposed cover plate; complying with the following:
1. Type: Concealed arm and track, butt or pivot hung, single acting unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Arm: Regular.
3. Track: Regular.
4. Cover Plate Material: Aluminum unless otherwise indicated.
5. Backcheck: Adjustable.
F. Floor Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch
speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with cement case and cast-iron closer body case;
for single-acting doors; complying with the following:
1. Type: Butt hinge hung or offset pivoted.

3. Function: Regular.
4. Backcheck: Adjustable.
6. Case Depth: Regular, 100 mm.
G. Closer Holder Release Devices: Closer connected with separate or integral releasing and
fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on interruption of signal
to release device. Comply with the following:
1. Type: Single-point hold open.

2. Mounting: Mortised into top jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3. Options: Adjustable hold-open manual release force unless otherwise indicated.
H. Coordinators: Consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger;

fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety
release; and with internal override.
2.21 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS, GENERAL
A. Size: 38 mm less than door width on push side and 13 mm less than door width on pull
side, by height specified in door hardware sets.
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws.
C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the
following material:
1. Material: 1.3-mm- thick stainless steel.

a. American Floor Products Co., Inc.

b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
d. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.
e. Hager Companies.
f. Hiawatha, Inc.
g. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of InPro Corporation.
h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
i. Pawling Corporation.
j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
k. Trimco.
2.22 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Armor Plates: 914 mm high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.
B. Kick Plates: 305 mm high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.
C. Mop Plates: 152 mm high by 25 mm less than door width.
D. Stretcher Plates: 203 mm high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.

E. Nonmortise Angle Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into angle
shape; with 32-mm length of leg on face of door; surface mounted on door.
1. Leg Offset: For 1.3-mm- thick metal plate.

3. Height: 1220 mm.
F. Mortise Angle Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into angle
shape; with 22-mm length of leg on face of door; mortised into edge of door.

2. Height: 1220 mm.
G. Nonmortise Cap Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into "U"
shape; with 32-mm length of leg on faces of door; surface mounted on door.
1. Leg Offset: For 1.3-mm- thick metal plate.

3. Height: 1220 mm.
H. Mortise Cap Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into "U" shape;
with 22-mm length of leg on faces of door; mortised into edge of door.

2. Height: 1220 mm.
2.23 STOPS AND HOLDERS, GENERAL
A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or
indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or
wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
B. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
C. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
D. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
E. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm
system for labeled fire door assemblies.
1. Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
F. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum
16 by 19 mm; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
G. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum
diameter 13 mm; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
H. Available Manufacturers:
1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.

2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.

3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.

5. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.
6. Door Controls International.
8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
10. Hager Companies.
11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
12. Hiawatha, Inc.
15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
18. Trimco.
2.24 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Chain Door Stops: Welded chain, each end attached to compression springs, both covered
with protective sleeve; surface-screw application.
B. Rigid Wall Stops: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; 89 mm long, with rubber
bumper; surface-screw application.
C. Wall Bumpers: Polished cast brass or aluminum with rubber bumper; 64-mm diameter,
minimum 19-mm projection from wall, with backplate for concealed fastener installation;
with convex bumper configuration.
D. Roller-Type Bumpers: Polished cast brass or bronze; minimum 111-mm projection from
wall; attached by surface screws.
E. Rigid Floor Stops: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum, with rubber bumper; surface-
screw application.
F. Dome-Type Floor Stops: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum, with rubber bumper;
and as follows:
1. Height: Minimum 25 mm high, for doors without threshold and 35 mm high, for
doors with threshold.
G. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15, Grade 1; electromagnet attached to wall

or floor as indicated, and strike plate attached to swinging door.
1. Configuration: Wall-mounted single unit.
H. Combination Floor Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; encased
spring bumper with metal plunger and stop; and as follows:
1. Operation: Automatic hold open and release by pushing door unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Application: Surface screw.

I. Manual Combination Floor Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum;
89 mm long, with holder, keeper, and rubber bumper; surface-screw application.
J. Combination Wall Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; encased
spring bumper with metal plunger and stop; surface-screw application; and as follows:
1. Operation: Automatic hold open and release by pushing door unless otherwise
indicated.
K. Manual Combination Wall Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; 89
mm long, with holder, keeper, and rubber bumper; surface-screw application.
2.25 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Overhead Concealed Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 1; hold open and release by push
and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber;
adjustable holding pressure; for single and double-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
B. Overhead Concealed Slide Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 1; release by push and pull of door
unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable holding
pressure; for single and double-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
C. Overhead Surface-Mounted Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 2; hold open and release
by push and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock
absorber; adjustable holding pressure; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
D. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Concealed Slide Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 2; release by

push and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber;
adjustable holding pressure; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
E. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Jointed-Arm Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 3; hold open and
release by push and pull of door; control capable of being set in inactive position; with stop
and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
F. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Jointed-Arm Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 3; release by push

and pull of door; control capable of being set in inactive position; with stop and shock
absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
G. Overhead Concealed, Friction Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 4; consisting of

frictional element held under adjustable pressure; with free-acting shoulder pivots and shock
absorber; for single and double-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
H. Overhead Concealed, Nonfriction Slide Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 4; consisting of

nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure; with shock absorber; for single and
double-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
I. Overhead Concealed, Nonfriction Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 4; consisting of

nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure; with automatic hold-open and shock
absorber; for single and double-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
J. Overhead Surface-Mounted Rod Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 8; hold open and release
by push and pull of door unless roller cam is set in inactive position; with stop and shock
absorber; adjustable spring tension; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.

K. Overhead Surface-Mounted Rod Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 8; release by push and pull
of door unless roller cam is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable
spring tension; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
L. Overhead Surface-Mounted Cantilever Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 9; hold open and
release by push and pull of door or thumb turn; with stop and shock absorber; for single-
acting doors opening 110 degrees.
M. Overhead Surface-Mounted Cantilever Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 9; release by push and
pull of door or thumb turn; with stop and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening
110 degrees.
2.26 DOOR GASKETING, GENERAL
A. Standard: BHMA A156.22. Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified Product

Directory."
B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide
noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are
closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is
closed.
C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.000774 cu. m/s per m of crack length for gasketing other
than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and
smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled

doors.
E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UBC Standard 7-2.
F. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
H. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
I. Available Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies.
2. M-D Building Products, Inc.
3. National Guard Products.

4. Pemko Manufacturing Co.

5. Reese Enterprises.
6. Sealeze; a Unit of Jason Incorporated.
7. Zero International.
2.27 DOOR GASKETING
A. Adhesive-Backed Perimeter Gasketing: Gasket material applied to frame rabbet with self-
adhesive.
1. Gasket Material: Sponge silicone.
B. Spring-Metal Perimeter Gasketing: Metal gasket material fastened to frame rabbet with
nails or screws.
1. Gasket Material: Minimum 0.20-mm- thick stainless steel.
C. Rigid, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Gasket material held in place by metal housing;
fastened to frame stop with screws.

2. Housing Material: Stainless steel.
D. Adjustable, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Screw-adjustable gasket material held in place

by metal housing; fastened to frame stop with screws.

2. Housing Material: Stainless steel.
E. Interlocking Perimeter Gasketing: Metal gasket material consisting of two pieces, one
fastened to door and one fastened to frame, that interlock when door is closed; mounted
with screws.
1. Gasket Material: Minimum 0.46-mm- thick zinc.
F. Overlapping Astragals for Meeting Stiles: Gasket material held in place by metal housing
and overlapping when doors are closed; mounted to face of meeting stile with screws.
1. Gasket Material: EPDM strip.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted to each door.
G. Meeting Astragals for Meeting Stiles: Gasket material held in place by metal housing;
mounted with screws.
1. Gasket Material: Silicone bulb.

3. Mounting: Mortised into edge of each door.
H. Adjustable Astragals for Meeting Stiles: Screw-adjustable gasket material held in place by
metal housing; mounted with screws.

3. Mounting: Mortised into edge of each door.

I. Door Sweeps: Gasket material held in place by flat metal housing or flange; surface
mounted to face of door with screws.

J. Door Shoes: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; mounted to bottom edge of
door with screws.
1. Gasket Material: Neoprene.

3. Extended Housing: Both sides of door.
4. Mounting: Mortised into bottom edge of door.
K. Automatic Door Bottoms: Gasket material held in place by metal housing that
automatically drops to form seal when door is closed; mounted to bottom edge of door with
screws.

3. Mounting: Mortised into bottom of door.
4. Type: Low-closing-force type for doors required to meet accessibility requirements.
2.28 THRESHOLDS, GENERAL
A. Standard: BHMA A156.21. Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified Product

Directory."
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility

requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1.
1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not
more than 13 mm high and 19 mm high for exterior sliding doors.
1. Hager Companies.
2. M-D Building Products, Inc.
3. National Guard Products.
4. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
5. Reese Enterprises.
7. Sealeze; a Unit of Jason Incorporated.
8. Zero International.
2.29 THRESHOLDS
A. Compressing-Top Thresholds: Metal member with compressible vinyl seal on top of

threshold that seals against bottom of door; and base metal of stainless steel.
B. Saddle Thresholds: Type and base metal as follows:
1. Type: Smooth top unless otherwise indicated.

2. Base Metal: Aluminum and Stainless steel.

C. Half-Saddle Thresholds: Fluted-top metal member; and base metal of aluminum.
D. Latching/Rabbeted Thresholds: Type and base metal as follows:
1. Type: Fluted top.

2. Base Metal: Aluminum.
E. Latching/Rabbeted Thresholds with Gasket: Fluted-top metal member with gasket; type and
base metal as follows:
1. Type: Offset.
F. Plate Thresholds: Solid metal plate; and base metal as follows:
1. Top Surface: Fluted with slip-resistant abrasive.

2. Base Metal: Aluminum and Stainless steel.
G. Ramped Thresholds: Modular, interlocking, sloped, fluted-top metal assemblies with closed
return ends; 1:12 slope; and base metal as follows:
1. Top Surface: Fluted with slip-resistant abrasive.

H. Saddle Thresholds for Floor Closers: Fluted top; type and base metal as follows:
1. Type: Type A, for center-hung doors; ends not mitered unless otherwise indicated.
2.30 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL
A. General: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports,
bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
1. Exterior Door Hardware: Galvanized steel or anodized aluminum.
B. Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: Grade 1; rated for minimum door weight of 681 kg.
C. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 91 kg.
D. Available Manufacturers:
1. Cox, Arthur & Sons, Inc.

2. Hager Companies.
3. Henderson, P. C. Inc.; Div. of Hepworth PLC.
4. Johnson, L. E. Products, Inc.
5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
2.31 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: Wrought steel, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Box Rail: With attached flashing.

2. Rail Supports:
a. Single Side-Wall Style: Intermediate type.

b. Double Side-Wall Style: Intermediate type.
c. Triple Side-Wall Style: Intermediate type.
d. Single Overhead Style: Intermediate type.
e. Single Overhead Parallel Style: Intermediate type.
f. Single Overhead Cross-Ear Style: Intermediate type.
g. Double Overhead Cross-Ear Style: Intermediate type.
h. Triple Overhead Cross-Ear Style: Intermediate type.
3. Hanger Configuration: Four-wheel hanger assembly with double drop strap unless
a. Wheel Assembly: Steel wheels with ball bearings.
4. Accessories:
a. Continuous bottom guide.

b. Guide rail.
c. Bow Handle: Minimum 150 mm in overall length.
d. Flush Pull: Minimum 100 by 140 by 19 mm, mortised into door.
e. Cane Bolt: Minimum 13-mm diameter by 305 mm long.
f. Stay Roller: Minimum 50-mm- diameter wheel.
g. Floor Center Stop: Cast iron.
h. End guide and stop.
i. Parallel door floor guides.
j. Door stop.
k. Sliding door latch.
l. Bumper Shoe: Minimum 1.5-mm thickness.
m. Cremone Bolt: With lever handle, minimum 13-mm- diameter oval or round
rod, and rod guides at 610 mm o.c.
n. Top Spring Bolt: Malleable iron; with angle or surface strike and 610-mm
chain.
o. Foot Bolt: Wrought steel, cast iron, or malleable iron; minimum 200 mm.
B. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rails and door hardware that allow vertical adjustment.
1. Rail Material: Galvanized wrought steel.

2. Rail Configuration: V-grooved double leg unless otherwise indicated.
3. Mounting: Top hung.
4. Wheel Assembly: Two wheel or four wheel, with ball bearings.
5. Wheel Material: Steel.
6. Accessories:
a. Bumper Stops: Wrought steel.

b. Pulls: Flush, mortised into door.
2.32 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL
A. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and
regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and
listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems.

B. Monitor Strikes: Cast strike with toggle.
C. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.

b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.
c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.
d. Hager Companies.
e. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
h. Trimco.
2.33 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE
A. Cardholders: Cast rectangular holder, surface mounted, size as indicated:
1. Card Size: 89 by 127 mm.

B. Chain Door Guards: Polished cast brass or bronze or extruded brass; consisting of plate
slotted to receive 150-mm- long welded chain secured to an anchor plate. Guard shall
allow door to be opened 75 mm with chain engaged in slotted plate. Equip with chain
holder.
C. Coat Hooks: Two curved hooks with rounded ends; 76-mm projection from wall; surface-
screw applied; fabricated from burnished cast aluminum.
D. Rod-Type Door Guards: Straight door-mounted rod that engages U-shaped, jamb-mounted
rod. U-shaped rod can swing 180 degrees away from door; guard allows door to be slightly
opened when engaged. Fabricated from polished cast aluminum.
E. Door Knockers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; solid brass, with engraved number and
nameplates.
F. Door Position Switches: Magnetically operated reed switch designed for concealed
mounting.
G. Garment Hooks: One long hat hook and one small coat hook; 95-mm projection from wall
with 178-mm overall height; surface-screw applied; fabricated from burnished cast
aluminum.
H. Letter Box Plates: Spring-loaded front plate with brass spring; inside covered gravity flap
or hood; fabricated from aluminum; of the following type:
1. Regular Size, Inswinging: Minimum 0.9-mm metal thickness, with minimum 178-
by-41-mm opening.
2. Regular Size, Outswinging: Minimum 0.9-mm metal thickness, with minimum 178-
by-38-mm opening.
3. Magazine Size, Outswinging: Minimum 1.3-mm metal thickness, with minimum
279-by-48-mm opening.

I. Door and Frame Transfer Devices: Steel housing for mortise in hinge stile of door, with
flexible tube for wiring bundle; accommodating doors that swing open to 120 degrees.
2.34 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade
name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and
as otherwise approved by Engineer.
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if
different from specified standard.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates

generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum
fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match
surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts
for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only
means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on
hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
a. Mortise hinges to doors.

b. Strike plates to frames.
c. Closers to doors and frames.
3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is
provided:
a. Surface hinges to doors.

b. Closers to doors and frames.
c. Surface-mounted exit devices.
4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2,
"Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
2.35 FINISHES
A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.



PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction,
and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
ANSI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to
be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of
surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not
install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

D. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above
accessible ceilings. Verify location with Engineer.
1. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately

serve doors with electrified door hardware.
E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent

Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state
in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door
to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted
to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly

engage lock bolt.
2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust
sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3
seconds to move to a point 75 mm from the latch, measured to the leading edge of
the door.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion,

Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including
adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of
doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer
to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 08716 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Power door operators.
1. Division 8 Section "Automatic Entrance Doors" for entrance doors packaged with
automatic door operators and controls.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for door
hardware that must be coordinated with automatic door operator.
3. Division 8 door Sections for doors that need reinforcement for automatic door
operators.
4. Division 15 Sections for compressed-air supply and connections to building's
compressed-air system.
5. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for
automatic door operators.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends electrical signal to automatic door
operator to open door.
B. Safety Device: Device that prevents door from opening or closing.
A. Opening and Closing Forces: Not more than 67 N applied 25 mm from the latch edge of the
door.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for automatic door operators and activation and safety
devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for automatic door operators.
Include locations and elevations of entrances showing activation and safety devices.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work for guide
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 08716 - Page 1 of 7

rails.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed component and door control
indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For exposed components and activation and safety devices with
factory-applied color finishes.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic door operators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

approved for installation of units required for this Project, and who employs an inspector
certified by AAADM.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company certificate issued by AAADM.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with inspector certified by

AAADM.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators through one source from a single
manufacturer.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
F. UL Standard: Comply with UL 325.

A. Field Measurements: Verify door openings by field measurements before fabrication of

exposed covers for automatic door operators and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed control mats that
control automatic door operators. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3.
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and
other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic door operators. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing automatic door operators to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic door

operators with connections to power supplies and security access control system.
1.9 WARRANTY

replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship
a. Faulty or sporadic operation of automatic door operator or activation and safety

devices.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering or use.
A. Maintenance: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance

by skilled employees of automatic door operator Installer. Include quarterly planned and
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door operation. Provide parts and
supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1. Engage inspector certified by AAADM to perform safety inspection after each

adjustment or repair and at end of maintenance period. Submit completed inspection
form to Employer.
hours.
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Activation and Safety Devices: One unit of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware.
3. Dor-O-Matic, Inc.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
5. Horton Automatics.
6. KM Systems, Inc.
7. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
8. Nabco Entrances Inc.
9. Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works.
2.2 MATERIALS
indicated, complying with standards indicated below:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209M.

2. Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-6.
B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2.3 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight,
and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation
under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
1. Where indicated for center-pivoted doors, provide emergency breakout feature for
reverse swing of doors.
B. Electromechanical Operating System: Unit powered by permanent-magnet dc motor; with

closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of
electric motor, and with manual operation including spring closing with power off.
2.4 POWER DOOR OPERATORS
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.10.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Not more than 180 N applied 25 mm from latch edge of door to prevent stopped door
from opening or closing.
2. If power fails, not more than 133 N applied 25 mm from latch edge of door to
manually open door.
C. Operation: Power opening and power closing.
D. Operating System: Electromechanical.

E. Microprocessor Control Unit: Solid-state controls.
F. Features:
1. Adjustable opening and closing speed.

2. Adjustable opening force.
3. Adjustable backcheck.
4. Adjustable hold-open time of not less than 0 to 30 seconds.
5. Adjustable time delay.
6. Adjustable acceleration.
7. Adjustable limit switch.
8. Obstruction recycle.
G. Mounting: Overhead concealed.
2.5 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Infrared-Scanner Presence Detector: Self-contained presence detector consisting of an

infrared-scanner sensing device to activate door operator. Sensing device shall be
adjustable to provide detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent to those required for
control mats. Provide metal or plastic housing with black finish for sensing device.
B. Photoelectric-Beam Control System: Manufacturer's standard horizontal photoelectric-

beam system, arranged as indicated.



fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

tolerances, door and frame supports, and other conditions affecting performance of
automatic door operators.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections
before automatic door operator installation.
C. Examine roughing-in for compressed-air piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before automatic door operator installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install complete automatic door operator system, including activation and safety
devices, control wiring, and remote power units.
B. Power Door Operator Installation Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.10 for installation.
C. Automatic Door Operators: Install door operator system, including control wiring, as
follows:
1. Refer to Division 16 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution system.

2. Refer to Division 15 Sections for connection to compressed-air distribution piping.
D. Activation and Safety Devices: Install devices and wiring, including connections to
automatic door operators, according to BHMA A156.10 and as follows:
1. Infrared-Scanner Presence Detectors: Install scanners on both interior and exterior

sides of each door indicated to receive automatic door operators.
2. Photoelectric Beams: Install beams on each door jamb indicated to receive automatic
door operators.
E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing and Inspecting: After installation has been completed, testing and inspecting of
each automatic door operator shall be performed to verify compliance with applicable
BHMA standards.
1. Inspection Report: Submit report in writing to Engineer and Contractor within 24

hours after inspection.
C. Remove and replace automatic door operators where test results indicate they do not comply
with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices to operate smoothly,
easily, and properly, and for safe operation and weathertight closure.
1. Adjust doors with low-energy door operators to close according to BHMA A156.19.
B. Lubricate operators, hardware, and other moving parts.
C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished automatic door operators, inspect

exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
D. Readjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices after repeated operation
of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts.
E. Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose,
without additional cost.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage manufacturer's inspector certified by AAADM to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators. Refer to Division 1
Sections.

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed curtain walls.
4. Storefront framing.
5. Glazed entrances.
6. Sloped glazing.
7. Skylights.

2. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for glass panels in railings.
3. Division 8 Section "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts."
4. Division 8 Section "Automatic Entrance Doors."
5. Division 8 Section "Mirrors."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined
in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for main-
taining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects in-
clude peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
E. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass,
and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
GLAZING 08800 - Page 1 of 15

F. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attri-
buted to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices
for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces
of glass.
G. Deterioration of Heat Treated Glass: Failure of the heat-treated glass that is attributed to the
manufacturing process due to the presence of nickel sulphide particles causing spontaneous
breakage of the glass units.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects
in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing
only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not
less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed
the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
C. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to

ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:
2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design
glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration
load.
3. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design
glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads:
a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on
glass type factors for short-duration load.
b. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the
design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long-duration load.
4. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15
degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than
0.001.
5. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-
glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side
length or 25 mm, whichever is less.
6. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass lites.

changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
E. Heat Treated Glass: Provide heat-treated glass that is free from nickel sulphide. Provide cer-
tificate from supplier that all heat-treated glass units have successfully passed heat-soak test
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and
compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to
glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 300
mm square.
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants and colored spacers, in 300-mm
lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the
adjoining framing system.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements

and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Qualification Data: For installers, manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-

coated, low-e coatings, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency.
G. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

testing agency, for coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations
within previous 36-month period.
I. Loading Requirements: Submit calculation sheets showing that the specified glass can with-
stand the actual loading requirements indicated:
1. Thickness
2. Kind of heat treatment
3. Safety.
J. Full Heat-Soak Test: Provide certificate from supplier that all heat-treated glass units have
successfully passed full heat-soak test to an approved international specifications such as
EN 14179 or DIN 18516 which ever is the more stringent
K. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
L. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E

Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by
coated-glass manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in
glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance not less than five
years; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National
Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency approved by

Engineer and accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency approved by

Engineer and qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain coated float glass, laminated glass and insulating glass
from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
F. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where
solar-control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified
fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in
fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer.
G. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in
referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's

"Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped
Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American
Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential
Use."
I. Processing Limitations for High Performance Glazing: cut and process high performance
glass, laminated glass and double glazed units in automated machines designed specifically
for the purpose.
1. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in
Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 0.84 sq. m in exposed surface area of one
side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 0.84
sq. m or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that
comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where
Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities
J. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark
glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to
Engineer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety
glazing standard with which glass complies.
K. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing

with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to Engineer. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other
openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a
temperature rise rating of 250 deg C, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
1. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to Engineer/ authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
2. Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to Engineer/ authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing
according to NFPA 257.
3. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
L. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
M. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Division 8 Sections "Aluminum-Framed

Entrances and Storefronts," "Aluminum Windows," "Glazed Aluminum Curtain
Walls," "Sloped Glazing Systems," "Overhead Glazing Systems" and "Mechanically
Attached Glazing Systems" to match glazing systems required for Project, including
glazing methods.

N. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage

to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to
sun, or other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and

sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and
when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 4.4 deg C.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Contractor’s Warranty on glass, products: Provide warranty in which glass Manufacturer,

Processor and Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to furnish and to in-
stall replacements for glass units that break or deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article,
within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion

2. Warranty Period for laminated glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Insulating Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
to, manufacturers specified.
a. AGC Flat Glass Europe

b. Glastrosch
c. Pilkington
d. PPG Industries
e. Saint Gobain
f. Visteon (Ford)
g. Viracon
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-
treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide
Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick
minimum.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for
overall unit and for each lite.
4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as W/sq. m x K.
5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless
otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated
glass).
C. Heat Soaking: All heat treated glass shall be heat soak tested. After the test, the probability
of failure in service should be less than one in 130 tons, or 5,000 m2 of 10 mm of heat
treated glass.

D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel
applied by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's
Tempering Division's "Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements
specified.
1. Glass: Clear float.

2. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's
full range.
2.4 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a
proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties
after fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with

interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by

designations in "Laminated-Glass Types" Article.
2.5 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated

by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where

needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass
lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Re-
quirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indi-
cated.
2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated or where
required by structural calculations.
3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for
insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured
perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary.
5. Spacer: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish.
a. Prevent window condensation.

b. Reduce outside noise.
6. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated
Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.

2.6 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to

Engineer, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for
door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
B. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies
of uncoated, clear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; Pyrobel.

b. Pilkington Group Limited (distributed by Technical Glass Products); PyroStop.
c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Contraflam N2.
2.7 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required
to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM,

silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II,
black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting

dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means
of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
2.8 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass
units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's
full range.
B. Glazing Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing
agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for
applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
2.9 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids

elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or
without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products
indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary
sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination
with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus
or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size
and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency
that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and
fire-protection rating indicated.

2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system
performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.12 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type : Clear float glass and fully tempered float glass.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.
2.13 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type (GL): Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 8.0 mm.

2. Interlayer Thickness: 1.52 mm.
4. Locations include (but are not limited to):
a. Overhead glazing
b. Glass handrails
B. Glass Type: Ceramic-coated laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 8.0 mm.

2. Interlayer Thickness: 1.52 mm.
3. Coating Location: First surface.
2.14 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type (GI): Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 25 mm.

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
7. Visible Light Transmittance: 37 percent minimum.
8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 1.64 W/m2.k maximum.
9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.31 maximum.
10. Shading Coeffefficient: 0.36.


a. Airlock Walls (station 1B4)

b. Exposed elevator hoist-way cladding.
B. Glass Type (GISF): Low-e-coated, Ceramic-coated, insulating vision glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 25 mm.

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
6. Coating Location: First surface.
7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 1.64 W/m2.k maximum.
9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.31 maximum.
10. Shading Coeffefficient: 0.36.
a. Platform walls and ceilings

b. Airlock Walls
2.15 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES
A. Glass Type: Fire-rated glazing with 250 deg C temperature rise limitation; laminated glass
with intumescent interlayers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with
the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as
needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials
that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 1270 mm.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets
and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 3-mm minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended
by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes
to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.
Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks
and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets
formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket
applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce
a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks
and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and
pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress
gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal
gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between
glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from
extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers

or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative
to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt,
scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged
from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

SECTION 08830 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:
1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and
spandrel lites.
3. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of
silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating
components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments
to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of the following products:
1. Mirrors: 300 mm square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges.

2. Mirror Clips: Full size.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, from manufacturer.
F. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was
tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing film and substrates on which
mirrors are installed.
G. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified

MIRRORS 08830 - Page 1 of 5

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project
who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single
source.
D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:
1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer
to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in
this Section or in referenced standards.
2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the
Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
E. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing film and
substrates on which mirrors are installed.
A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling
mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of
glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Mirrors Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer, Contractor and

Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without
limitations, all or any part of the mirrors specified in this section which fails or becomes
defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Defects: Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use

that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black
spots, and clouding of the silver film.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS
A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503.

to, the following:
a. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.

b. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company.
c. Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc.
d. D & W Incorporated
e. Donisi Mirror Company.
f. Gardner Glass, Inc.
g. Gilded Mirrors, Inc.
h. Guardian Industries.
i. Head West.
j. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc.
k. Lenoir Mirror Company.
l. Maran-Wurzell Glass & Mirror.
m. National Glass Industries.
n. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc.
o. Sunshine Mirror; Westshore Glass Corp.
p. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.
q. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
B. Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality.
1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.
A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus
or minus 5.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer
for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for

setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as
compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

to, the following:
a. Franklin International; Titebond Division.

b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.
c. Macco Adhesives; Liquid Nails Division.
d. OSI Sealants, Inc.
e. Palmer Products Corporation.

f. Pecora Corporation.
g. Royal Adhesives & Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division.
h. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.
2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE
A. Mirror Bottom Clips: As indicated.
B. Mirror Top Clips: As indicated.
C. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
D. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide
toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide
galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where
indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions,cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.
B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible
surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.
1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory
immediately after cutting to final sizes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror

mastic with existing finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of

substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating
where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids
distorting reflected images.
B. Provide a minimum air space of 3 mm between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air
circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror
hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or
inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of
mirrors.
1. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent
spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips where indicated.
2. Install mastic as follows:
a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by

manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.
b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of
mounting surface.
c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a
minimum air space of 3 mm between back of mirrors and mounting surface.
A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture
from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in
writing by mirror manufacturer.

SECTION 08911 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain walls installed as unitized

assemblies, except those glazed curtain wall assemblies in Park-and Ride.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestop systems field

installed with glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with
glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in
this Section.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Doors" for entrance and
storefront systems installed with glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems.
4. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows" for windows installed with glazed alumi-
num curtain-wall systems.
5. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls – Park-and-Ride" for vertical
glazed aluminum curtain walls for Park-and-Ride.
6. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for insulating-glass requirements.
7. Division 8 Section "Sloped Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies" for curved and
facetted sloped glazing systems for roof and wall-roof assemblies.
8. Division 8 Section "Overhead Glazing Assemblies" for overhead glazing installed
with glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems.
9. Division 8 Section "Mechanically Attached Structural Glass Curtain Walls".
10. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for units installed with glazed aluminum
curtain-wall systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Direction Of Opening: on Architectural Drawings the indications for direction of opening

are as follows:
1. Fixed windows are indicated by letter “F”

2. Sliding windows are indicated by an arrow indicating the direction of slide.
3. Casement or pivoting windows are indicated by a dotted triangle, the vertex of which
indicates the hinge or pivot side.
B. Manufacturer: the window or curtain wall system manufacturer.
C. Fabricator: the fabricator of window or curtain wall joinery components based on system
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911 - Page 1 of 13

S08035-SPC-AR-01 REV 1.1
D. Installer: the Installer of window or curtain wall joinery components.
E. Testing Laboratory: an independent testing laboratory/ agency approved by the Engineer to

carry out the testing required in this specification.
A. General: Provide conventionally glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the follow-
ing capabilities based on preconstruction testing:
1. That forms a complete integrated and functional system that is fit to the purpose and
produced by an international manufacturer having not less than fifteen years docu-
mented experience in that field.
2. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated with-
out failure. Failure includes the following:
a. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.

b. Members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structur-
al movement, to glazing units.
B. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members.
C. Glazing-to-glazing joints accommodate thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and

system, prevent glazing-to-glazing contact, and maintain required edge clearances.
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

preconstruction testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for
this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
1. Structural loads.
2. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting
structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist,
column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and
concentrated live loads.
3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.

b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Glass breakage.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f. Sealant failure.
g. Failure of operating units.
B. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum curtain walls, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements
and design criteria indicated.

1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest
edition unless otherwise shown on structural drawings.
3. Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems, including

anchorage, capable of withstanding test pressure indicated without material and deflection
failures and permanent deformation of structural members exceeding 0.2 percent of span
when tested according to ASTM E 330.
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to
4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m) or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever
is less.
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which
reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed
components to less than 3.2 mm.
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6-mm clearance between framing

members and operable units.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limit

deflection to two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.
F. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
a. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 24 deg C
2. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, glazing-edge seal failure, sealant

failure, excess stress on curtain-wall framing, anchors and fasteners, or reduction of
performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-
pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than
720 Pa.

H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal
to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 720 Pa.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not
include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior.
I. Energy Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall have certified and labeled energy
performance ratings in accordance with NFRC.
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
factor of not more than 2.55 W/sq. m x K as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of
0.7 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a
minimum static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-
certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 55 as determined according to
NFRC 500.
J. Sound Transmission: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls with fixed glazing and
framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics:
1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 32 when tested for laboratory sound

transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls that comply with
test-performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific
preconstruction testing by a qualified testing agency.
1. Engage a qualified testing agency approved by Engineer to perform preconstruction

testing on laboratory mockups.
2. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility using personnel, materials, and
mockups will be constructed.
4. Preconstruction Testing Program: Perform tests specified in "Performance
Requirements" Article on laboratory mockups in the following order:
a. Structural-performance preloading at 50 percent of the specified wind-load

design pressure when tested according to ASTM E 330.
b. Air infiltration when tested according to ASTM E 283.
c. Water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E 331.
d. Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested according to
AAMA 501.1.
e. Structural performance at design load when tested according to ASTM E 330.
f. Repeat air filtration when tested according to ASTM E 283.
g. Repeat water penetration under static pressure when tested according to
ASTM E 331.

h. Structural performance at maximum 150 percent of positive and negative

wind-load design pressures when tested according to ASTM E 330.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections,
full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed
aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:

b. Anchorage.
d. Glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
3. Include laboratory mockup Shop Drawings, prepared by a qualified preconstruction

testing agency, showing details of laboratory mockup.
a. Resubmit Shop Drawings with changes made to glazed aluminum curtain walls
to successfully complete preconstruction testing.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from

300-mm lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

2. Anchorage.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with
F. Preconstruction Mockup Submittals:
1. Preconstruction Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project.

2. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency
for each mockup test.
3. Photographs:
a. Take a minimum of 20 photographs at locations and intervals as required by

Engineer.
b. Submit digital color images on CD-R of mockup before, during, and after

4. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings of preconstruction mockups prepared by

preconstruction testing agency.
G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and preconstruction testing agency and testing
agency.
H. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

preconstruction testing agency, for glazed aluminum curtain walls, indicating compliance
with performance requirements.
L. Field quality-control reports.
M. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.
N. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

glazed aluminum curtain wall systems that meet or exceed energy performance
requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by certification, labeling, and
inclusion in lists. Manufacturer should have not less fifteen (15) years of documented
experience in that field.
B. Fabricator/ Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative/ agents who is

trained and approved for fabrication/ installation of units required for this Project based on
Manufacturer’s approved system. Fabricator/ Installer should have not less five (5) years of
documented experience in that field with a minimum of 3 projects of similar nature.
C. Preconstruction Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ISO/IEC 17025 and

accredited by ICC-ES for preconstruction testing indicated.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Engineer for review.
F. Unless the curtain wall manufacturer has the AAMA Gold Label Certification Program on
products similar the ones specified verifying the performance of his products; the contractor
shall perform all laboratory tests mentioned in this specification.
G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

H. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more
stringent requirements if indicated.
1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.
I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Engineer.

2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field
Quality Control" Article.
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum
curtain walls by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY

components of glazed curtain wall systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.

e. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

f. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair finishes that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
5. Crazing.
7. Color retention.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Arcadia, Inc. [http://www.arcadiaincorporated.com/home.cfm]

2. Gutmann [http://www.gutmann-aluminium.de/hgw/index_en.html]
3. Hueck. [http://www.eduard-hueck.de/Hueck.jsp?lang=en]
4. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. [www.kawneer.com]
5. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
6. Schueco [http://www.schueco.com]
7. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; [http://www.vistawall.com/]
2.2 MATERIALS
indicated.

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.


2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded- or formed-aluminum framing

members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

D. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 25.4 mm that


inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M
requirements.
E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
F. Framing Gaskets: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
G. Framing Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
2.5 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS
A. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane
exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length.
1. Overall Panel Thickness: As indicated.

2. Exterior Skin: Aluminum.
a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated.

b. Finish: Matching framing system.
c. Texture: Smooth.
d. Backing Sheet: 3.2-mm- thick, corrugated, high-density polyethylene unless
3. Interior Skin: Aluminum.
a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated.

b. Finish: Matching curtain-wall framing.
c. Texture: Smooth.
d. Backing Sheet: 3.2-mm- thick, corrugated, high-density polyethylene unless
4. Thermal Insulation Core: Manufacturer's standard extruded-polystyrene board.

5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For exposed interior surfaces of panels, when tested
according to ASTM E 84 as follows:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.6 OPERABLE UNITS
A. Venting Windows: Comply with Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows."
B. Doors: Comply with Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems (Safing Insulation): Specified in Division 7 Section "

Building Insulation."
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

2.8 FABRICATION

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior
for spandrel glazing or metal panels.
extent possible.

7. Components curved to indicated radii.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum
curtain wall to exterior.
2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier
at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and
vented to exterior.
D. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum curtain wall with an integral,

E. Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system unless
F. Factory-Assembled Frame Units:
1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

2. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
C. Clear Anodic Finish: complying with AAMA 611AA-M12C22A41, Class I 0.018 mm or

thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
B. Metal Protection:
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust
weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up

to 12.7 mm wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1.6 mm.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 25.4 mm wide
or more, limit offset from true alignment to 6 mm.

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain
walls shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed
assemblies with specified requirements.
1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for
laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.70 L/s
per sq. m, of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum
static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 9.1 m, by one story of glazed
b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Engineer. Perform at least three
tests, prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum

uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure
differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article,
but not less than 300 Pa, and shall not evidence water penetration.
3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
by Engineer shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
a. Test Area: A minimum area of 23 m by one story of glazed aluminum curtain

wall.
C. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.

SECTION 08912 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PARK-AND-RIDE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Glazed aluminum curtain walls, field assembled.
glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for insulating-glass requirements.
3. Division 10 Section "Exterior Screens" for screen assemblies attached to glazed alu-
minum curtain-wall systems.
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections,
full-size details, and attachments to other work.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed
aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:

b. Anchorage.
d. Glazing.
D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from

300-mm lengths of full-size finished components and showing details of the following:

2. Anchorage.
4. Glazing.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS – PARK-AND-RIDE 08912 - Page 1 of 10

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, professional engineer, and testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and

C. Welding certificates.
D. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed
E. Product Test Reports and Certifications.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

glazed aluminum curtain wall systems similar to assemblies indicated for this Project, and
with documented performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists, and with not
less than fifteen years of documented experience in that field.
B. Fabricator/ Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs personnel trained and approved
for fabrication/ installation of assemblies indicated for this Project by the manufacturer, and
with not less than five years of documented experience in that field on a minimum of three
projects of similar nature.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements

Engineer's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Engineer for review.
E. Certification and Product Testing: Provide one of the following.
1. AAMA Gold Label Certification Program on products similar to the ones specified.
2. Laboratory test reports indicating tests performed on assemblies similar to those
specified in this Section, indicating compliance with the performance requirements,
and performed by a qualified testing agency.
F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

G. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more
stringent requirements if indicated.
1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.
H. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct meeting at Project site.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Engineer.

2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality
Control" Article.
A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up

to 12.7 mm wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1.6 mm.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 25.4 mm wide
or more, limit offset from true alignment to 6 mm.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain
walls shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed

uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure
differential specified in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 300
Pa, and shall not evidence water penetration.

2. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
penetration.
a. Test Area: A minimum area of 23 m by one story of glazed aluminum curtain

wall.
C. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
1.7 WARRANTY

components of glazed curtain wall systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

weathering.
g. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
2. Warranty Period 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
5. Crazing.
7. Color retention.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum curtain walls, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to comply with structural

testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project
construction.
1. Structural loads.
2. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting
structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist,
column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and
concentrated live loads.
3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.

b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Members transferring thermal stresses and structural movements to glazing
units.
d. Glass breakage.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
g. Sealant failure.
1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to applicable code,
D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems, including

anchorage, capable of withstanding test pressure indicated without material and deflection
failures and permanent deformation of structural members exceeding 0.2 percent of span
when tested according to ASTM E 330.
E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows.
4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m, or an
is less.

F. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
a. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 24 deg C.
2. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, glazing-edge seal failure, sealant

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
720 Pa.
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
I. Seismic Performance: Curtain wall assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to applicable code, unless otherwise indicated. Glass fallout
shall not occur during a seismic event.
J. Energy Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall have certified and labeled energy
performance ratings in accordance with NFRC.
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
0.7 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a
certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 55 as determined according to
NFRC 500.
K. Structural-Sealant Joints:

3. Glass-to-glass joints designed to accommodate thermal and mechanical movements
of glazing and system, prevent glass-to-glass contact, and maintain required edge
clearances.

L. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by
structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system without failing adhesively or cohesively.
When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall
occur before adhesive failure.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not
separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds
sealant's internal strength.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Arcadia, Inc, http://www.arcadiaincorporated.com/home.cfm.

2. Gutmann AG, http://www.gutmann.de.
3. Hueck. http://www.eduard-hueck.de/Hueck.jsp?lang=en.
4. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company, www.kawneer.com.
5. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc, www.pittcoarchitectural.com.
6. Schuco, http://www.schueco.com.
7. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; http://www.vistawall.com.
A. Recycled Content: Provide metal materials having recycled content in compliance with
Credit MR 4.
2.4 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum curtain wall framing

1. Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural
sealant on two sides.
B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain

glazing.
1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

D. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
e. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable
SSPC standard.
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
E. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners

and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
F. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 25 mm that


inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M
requirements.
G. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

2.5 GLAZING
A. Glass: Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass units, tempered as required by applicable code,
and complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

C. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated
and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for
use in curtain wall system indicated.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12


B. Joint Sealants at Perimeter of Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: As specified in Division 07
2.7 FABRICATION

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
extent possible.
1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum
curtain wall to exterior.
2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier
at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and
vented to exterior.
D. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum curtain wall with an integral,

E. Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system unless
F. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary

support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
C. Clear Anodic Finish: complying with AAMA 611AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or

thicker.

SECTION 08961– SLOPED-GLAZED AND METAL ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Curved and facetted four-side structural-sealant-glazed sloped glazing for roof and wall-
roof assemblies, supported on building’s steel tube structure.
2. Glazed-in insulated metal roof panels.
1. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel”, for steel tube structure.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for vertical glazed aluminum
curtain walls except those assemblies in Park-and Ride.
4. Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
5. Division 08 Section “Overhead Glazing Assemblies.”
6. Division 13 Section "Photovoltaic Collectors," for architectural requirements for
photovoltaic collectors supported by sloped glazed and metal roof panel assemblies.
7. Division 16 Section "Photovoltaic System," for electrical wiring, conduit and equipment
for photovoltaic system.
1.2 BID SUBMITTALS

data for each principal product, material and finish. Indicate location of each product.
whether sloped glazed and metal roof panel assemblies are factory-assembled or site-
assembled.

and profiles, and finishes.
SLOPED GLAZED AND METAL ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08961 - Page 1 of 10

B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: For sloped glazing assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size
details, and attachments to other work.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of sloped
glazing assemblies, showing the following:
b. Anchorage.
d. Glazing.
e. Metal panels.
f. Flashing and drainage.
g. Erection tolerances.
3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
D. Fabrication Sample: Full size, of each glass and metal panel module showing details of the
following:
2. Anchorage.
4. Glazing.
6. Exposed finishes.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sloped glazing assemblies indicated, to comply with

A. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Submittals:
1. Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project.
2. Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup
test.
3. Record Drawings: As-built drawings of preconstruction laboratory mockups showing
changes made during preconstruction laboratory mockup testing.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer, and laboratory mockup testing agency, and field testing
agency.
C. Energy Performance Certificates: For sloped glazing assemblies, accessories, and components
from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each structural-
sealant-glazed sloped glazing assembly.
D. Product Test Reports: For sloped glazing assemblies, for tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Corrosion Product Test Reports and Samples: Based on evaluation of comprehensive

tests performed by a qualified preconstruction testing agency, indicating compliance with
performance requirements,
a. Submit samples, technical material and pre-test results of corrosion analysis of
components. Include written confirmation when separation of dissimilar metals is
not required, signed by an acceptable independent corrosion engineer.
E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For sloped glazed assemblies, accessories, and components.
Include statement of compliance with ASCE 7-05 for glass fallout under racking.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
F. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and
installation, and post-construction maintenance of structural-sealant-glazed units, according to
recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control reports.
G. Preconstruction test reports.
I. Maintenance Data: For sloped glazed assemblies including life cycle maintenance procedures,
to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer for application indicated.
B. Coating Applicator: Licensed by the coating manufacturer.
C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator’s installers and supervisors who are trained and approved
by manufacturer.
D. Laboratory Mockup Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for
testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as
complying with ISO/IEC 17025.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and
accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with
ISO/IEC 17025.
F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
Engineer's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Engineer for review.
G. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of sloped
glazing assemblies.

1.6 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of typical sloped glazing area as directed by Engineer.
2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality
Control" Article.
in writing.
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION LABORATORY MOCKUPS

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing on
preconstruction laboratory mockups.
B. Build preconstruction laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, products,
and methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
1. Size and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated, not less than
sizes and configurations recommended in ASTM E 2099.
2. Notify Engineer ten days in advance of the dates and times when preconstruction
laboratory mockups will be constructed and tested.
C. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Program: Test preconstruction laboratory
mockups according to requirements in "Performance Requirements" Article. Perform the
following tests in the following order:
1. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 50 percent of positive test load.
2. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
3. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1.
4. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the
following:
a. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
5. Thermal Cycling: According to AAMA 501.5. Repeat the following:
a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283.
6. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 and 150 percent of positive and negative test loads.
Repeat the following:
a. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION SEALANT TESTING

A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401
recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures,
sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.
B. Include for each type of exposed sealant, manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with
and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition.
1. Test a minimum of five production-run samples each of metal, glazing, and other
material.
2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed assemblies.

3. Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which
assemblies will be installed.
4. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each
material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including specially
formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number
of samples required for each material, retest materials.

B. Test Area: Perform tests on at least 9.1 m by 9.1 representative areas of sloped glazing
assemblies, as installation proceeds. Do not proceed to successive areas of installation until
tests for each area are successful.
C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following tests:
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by
Engineer shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
a. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Engineer. Perform at least three tests,
prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
2. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure
differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory
testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 300 Pa, and shall not
evidence water penetration.
a. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Engineer. Perform at least three tests,
prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
D. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in
ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.
1. Test a minimum of six areas on each assembly face.
2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
E. Sloped glazing assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
1.10 WARRANTY
sloped glazing assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration through glazing and framing areas.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

installation of this work and licensed in the place where the Project is located.
testing of sloped glazing assemblies representing those indicated for this Project, without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Assemblies shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited
to twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed
and concentrated live loads.
b. Glass breakage.
e. Water leakage.
f. Sealant failure.
1. Wind Loads: 161 km/h (100 m/h).
2. Other Design Loads:
a. Maintenance operations loads.
b. Concentrated Live Loads: As indicated. Where not indicated, as directed Engineer,
and applied to framing members at locations that will produce greatest stress or
deflection.
c. Uniform Live Loads: As indicated, Where not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
d. Load Combinations: Unless otherwise indicated, calculate according to applicable
code.
e. Maintenance Operations Loads: As indicated. Where not indicated, as directed by
Engineer, and to equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
f. Glass Impact Loads: Design glass to withstand, without glass breakage, a 1.78 kN
impact load.
1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/270 of clear span or an amount that
restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 6 mm, whichever is less.
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces
edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less
than 3.2 mm.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, excluding
buildings contiguous structure, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-
load design pressure, but not less than 720 Pa.
G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at
dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less
than 720 Pa.
H. Seismic Performance: Sloped glazing assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to applicable code, unless otherwise indicated. Glass fallout shall
not occur during a seismic event.
I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor
of not more than 2.55 W/sq. m x K as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have No condensation
on interior surfaces under design conditions as determined according to NFRC 500.
J. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when
tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for IBC
(International Building Code) Wind Zone applicable to Project location.
K. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-
surface temperature of 82 deg C.
b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: minus 18 deg C.
L. Structural-Sealant Joints:
M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by sloped
glazing assemblies without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction
adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate
from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal
strength.
N. Life Cycle Performance: Design sloped glazing assemblies to comply with life cycle
performance requirements indicated. Where not indicated, design for assemblies with a service
life of 60 years.
O. Drainage of Water: Design sloped glazing to freely drain and prevent accumulation of water at
lower extremities of glazing at mullion.
P. Joints: Accurately fitted and secure joints and corners; joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
Q. Fasteners and Attachments: Concealed from view.
R. Vibration, Harmonics or Wind Whistles: Not permitted.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
3. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
4. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of sloped glazing assembly system, including
framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.

MR 4.
2.4 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard, formed- or extruded-aluminum framing members
of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Framing-Member Type: Skin type, supported by structural-steel members indicated.
2. Framing Configuration: Provide the following:
a. Bent to radii indicated.
b. Standard flat members for facetted framing.
3. Glass and Metal Panel Retention: Field-installed or factory-installed at Contractor’s
option, structural sealant-glazed onto framing members, as indicated.
C. Materials:

indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.
2.5 GLAZING
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
1. Outdoor Lite: Clear, laminated or laminated-tempered glass, Low E coating on surface
#2; laminated glass as follows:
a. Curved Glass Panels: Translucent interlayer of color and pattern as selected by
Engineer.
b. Flat Glass Panels: Clear interlayer.
2. Interspace Content: Argon, 90 percent minimum.
3. Sealing System: Dual seal, non-metallic spacer, Warm-Edge technology; color selected
by Engineer.
4. Indoor Lite: Clear, laminated glass.
5. Profile: Curved or flat as indicated.
6. Maximum Glass Unit Thickness: 38 mm.
7. Minimum Glass Thickness: 6 mm.
B. Single Glass: Clear tempered laminated glass with translucent interlayer of color and pattern as
selected by Engineer.
C. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use
in sloped glazing assembly indicated.
D. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O;
chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other
system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant,
weatherseal-sealant, and sloped glazing assemblies manufacturers for this use.
1. Color: Match structural sealant.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
2.6 METAL PANELS

A. Materials:
indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.
b. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2. Core Insulation: Foamed-in polyurethane or, polyisocyanurate.

B. Construction:
1. Outdoor Sheet: Prefinished aluminum, minimum 6 mm thickness.
2. Panel Core: Core insulation completely filling void spaces; aluminum stiffeners
continuously welded, as required to comply with performance requirements.
3. Indoor Sheet: Prefinished aluminum, minimum 4 mm thickness.
4. Profile: Curved, and designed for glazing-in to sloped glazing framing glazing rebate, as
indicated. Mechanical fasteners at structSecureme
5. Maximum Panel Thickness: As indicated.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
3. Exposed Fasteners: Not permitted.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 25 mm that
C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
2.8 FABRICATION
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
1. Print-through or visible evidence of welds on metal panels not permitted.
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat
and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

SECTION 08962 - OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Four-sided, structural-sealant-glazed overhead glazing assemblies, except those

assemblies specified in Division 8 Section "Sloped Glazed and Metal Roof Panel
Assemblies".
2. Mechanically attached overhead glazing assemblies.
overhead glazing assemblies.
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Doors" for entrance and
storefront systems installed with overhead glazing assemblies.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for conventionally glazed
curtain walls.
5. Division 8 Section "Sloped Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies" for sloped
glazing assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer: the overhead glazing system manufacturer.
B. Fabricator: the fabricator of overhead glazing joinery components based on system provided
by manufacturer.
C. Installer: the Installer of overhead glazing joinery components.
D. Testing Laboratory: an independent testing laboratory/ agency approved by the Engineer to

A. General: Provide Four-sided, structural-sealant-glazed and mechanically attached structural

overhead glazing system that has the following capabilities based on preconstruction testing:
OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES 08962 - Page 1 of 15

S08035-SPC-AR-01 REV 1.1
b. Members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structur-

al movement, to glazing units.
B. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members.

A. General Performance: Overhead glazing assemblies shall withstand movements of

supporting structure (where applicable) without failure due to defective manufacture,
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Overhead Glazing Assemblies: Comply with performance requirements specified, as

determined by preconstruction testing assemblies representing those indicated for this
Project.
2. Failures also include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Glass breakage.
e. Failure of operating units.
f. Glazing-to-glazing contact.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing
only. Confirm glass thicknesses and heat treatment required by analyzing Project loads and
in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations and heat treatment
indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed
or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300.
C. Failure includes the following:
1. Deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. Glass breakage
3. Water leakage.
4. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
5. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
6. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
7. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
8. Sealant failure.
D. Delegated Design: Design overhead glazing assemblies, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements
and design criteria indicated.
E. Structural Performance: Overhead glazing assemblies shall withstand the wind loads, the
effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise shown on structural drawings:

1. Wind Loads:
a. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH)
2. Concentrated Live Loads: As indicated on Drawings, if not shown as directed by

Engineer, applied to framing members at locations that will produce greatest stress or
deflection.
3. Uniform Live Loads: As indicated on Drawings, if not shown as directed by
Engineer.
4. Load Combinations: Calculate according to requirements of applicable code
indicated on Drawings.
5. Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: As indicated on Drawings, if not as
directed by Engineer according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Structural Performance: Provide overhead glazing assemblies tested according to

ASTM E 330, as follows:
G. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to
4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans more than 4.1 m or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19.1 mm,
whichever is less.
H. Flexural Members: Design for lateral bracing of compression flanges by cross members
with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of braced flexural member. Glazing does not
provide lateral support.
I. Seismic Performance: Overhead glazing assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise shown on structural
drawings:.
1. Seismic Loads: Seismic Zone 2A.
J. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
720 Pa.
K. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed

L. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperature:

2. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 24 deg C.
3. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, sealant failure, or excess stress on
framing, anchors, and fasteners and no reduction of performance when tested
according to AAMA 501.5.
M. Energy Performance: Overhead glazing assemblies shall have certified and labeled energy-
performance ratings according to the NFRC.
N. Thermal Performance: the overhead glazing system shall be of thermal-break construction

that has been tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.1 and certified by the manufacturer to
provide:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an SHGC of
not more than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
0.7 L/s per sq. of fixed area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum
static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
certified CR rating of not less than 55 as determined according to NFRC 500.
O. Sound Transmission: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have the following
characteristics:
1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 26 when tested for laboratory sound

transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.
P. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-
sealant glazing without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction
Q. Structural-Sealant Joints:
1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing.

3. Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency approved by Engineer

to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups.
1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
mockups will be tested.
B. Preconstruction Testing: Overhead glazing assemblies shall comply with performance

requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific preconstruction
testing by a qualified testing agency.
1. Preconstruction Testing Program: Perform tests, specified in "Performance

Requirements" Article, on laboratory mockups in the following order:
a. Structural-performance preloading at 50 percent of the specified wind-load

design pressure when tested according to ASTM E 330
b. Air infiltration when tested according to ASTM E 283.
c. Water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E 331.
d. Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested according to
AAMA 501.1.
e. Structural performance at design load when tested according to ASTM E 330.
f. Repeat air filtration when tested according to ASTM E 283.
g. Repeat water penetration under static pressure when tested according to
ASTM E 331.
h. Structural performance at maximum 150 percent of positive and negative
wind-load design pressures when tested according to ASTM E 330.
C. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: Perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for

compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and
each condition.
1. Test a minimum of five production-run samples each of metal, glazing, and other
material.
2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed assemblies.
3. Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which
assemblies will be installed.
4. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each
material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not
limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures
on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
B. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,


C. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
representative.
D. Shop Drawings: For overhead glazing assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
moisture within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of
assembly, showing the following:
a. Joinery including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.
d. Glazing.

a. Resubmit Shop Drawings with changes made to details of overhead glazing

assemblies to successfully complete preconstruction testing.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
F. Fabrication Sample: Of each framing intersection of assemblies, made from 300-mm

lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.
4. Glazing.
G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For overhead glazing assemblies indicated to comply with

H. Preconstruction Mockup Submittals:
1. Preconstruction Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project.

2. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency,
for each mockup test.
3. Photographs:
a. Take a minimum of 20 photographs at locations and intervals as required by

Engineer.
b. Submit digital color images on CD-R of mockup before, during, and after
4. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings of preconstruction mockups prepared by

preconstruction testing agency.

I. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and preconstruction testing agency and testing
agency.
J. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead glazing assemblies, accessories, and

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for overhead glazing assemblies.
L. Preconstruction Test Reports: For overhead glazing assemblies and elastomeric glazing
sealants.
M. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and

installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-
control reports.
N. Source quality-control reports.
O. Field quality-control reports.
P. Maintenance Data: For structural-sealant glazing to include in maintenance manuals.

Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for postinstallation-phase, quality-control
program.
Q. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

B. Fabricator/ Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative/ agents who is

C. Coating Applicator: apply coatings to metal work only by applicators licensed by the
coating manufacturer.
D. Preconstruction Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ISO/IEC 17025 and

accredited by ICC-ES for testing indicated.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements


1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
G. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation.
H. NFRC Certification: Provide NFRC-certified and -labeled overhead glazing assemblies.
1. Build mockups of typical overhead glazing assembly area as directed by Engineer.

2. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
3. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be con-
structed.
4. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field
Quality Control" Article.
7. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of Work.
standard for judging the completed Work.
J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.9 WARRANTY

components of overhead glazing assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

weathering.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within

C. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty signed by Contractor and
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
5. Crazing.
7. Color retention.
D. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Architectural Skylight Co., Inc.

3. Gammans Architectural Products, Inc.
4. Hueck
5. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
6. O'Keeffe's Inc.
7. Regal Manufacturing Co.; Division of Arcorp, Inc.
8. Schueco.
9. Super Sky Products Inc.
10. United Skys, Inc.
11. United States Aluminum.
12. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
13. Waltek & Company Limited.
15. YKK AP America Inc.
B. Mechanically Attached System

to, the following
a. Pilkington United Kingdom Ltd; Planar

[http://www.pilkington.com/international+products/planar/]
b. Saint Gobain; Spider. [http://uk.saint-gobain-glass.com/b2c/default.asp]
c. Mero – Raumstruktur, GMBH

2.2 MATERIALS
indicated.

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
B. Stainless Steel
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316L.

2. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316L.
C. Support Fitting (Spider): proprietary bracket made of cast austenitic stainless steel to
ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M by lost wax method , to safely clamp the panel and
allow transmission of load to the supporting structure. Provide all compatible necessary
fixing accessories such as bushes, neoprene or pre-cured silicon gaskets and spring plates.
Routels, fasteners and accessories to be made from compatible stainless steel type 316.
Provide mockup sample(s) of the complete system for Engineer’s approval.
D. Support Fitting: Bracket and bolt made of austenitic stainless steel 316 S16, to safely clamp
the panel and allow transmission of load to the Aluminum mullion and steel structure.
Provide all compatible necessary fixing accessories such as bushes, neoprene or pre-cured
silicon gaskets and spring plates.
E. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard, zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer,

SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard, formed- or extruded-aluminum framing

1. Framing-Member Type: As shown on drawings.

2. Glass Retention: Factory-installed structural sealant on four sides or mechanically
attached overhead glazing as applicable to location.

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning assembly components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,


D. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors, with minimum adjustment of 25 mm, that

adjoining materials, and recommended by manufacturer.

inserts complying with requirements in ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6, galvanized steel.
F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

G. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less
than 1.524 mm thick.
H. Framing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard.
2.4 GLAZING
A. General: Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless
otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated
glass).
D. Heat Soaking: All heat treated glass shall be heat soak tested. After the test, the probability
of failure in service should be less than one in 130 tons, or 5,000 m2 of 10 mm of heat
treated glass.
E. Glazing Gaskets: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
F. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant glazing, as recommended by manufacturer for joint

type, and as follows:
1. High Modulus Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral chemically curing silicone
formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in
contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant, and approved
by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in overhead glazing assemblies indicated.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

b. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:

1) Dow Corning; 983

2) Tremco; proglaze II
c. Applications: Factory-glazed four-sided structural-sealant-glazed overhead

glazing.
2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and
O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant
and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by
structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and overhead glazing assembly manufacturers
for this use.
a. Color: Matching structural sealant.
H. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to

which sealants will not develop adhesion.
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 33

B. Cleaning Agent and Cloth: As recommended by structural-sealant manufacturer.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate mechanically attached structural glass overhead glazing system

according to Shop Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have
accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs
and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in
Project according to Shop Drawings.
B. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

extent possible.
6. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to
exterior.
D. Fabricate continuous, one-piece-type aluminum sill closures with weep holes.
E. Four-Sided, Structural-Sealant-Glazed Frame Units:
1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.

2. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
4. Factory install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
A. Four-Sided, Structural-Sealant Glazing: Perform quality-control procedures complying with

recommendations in ASTM C 1401 including, but not limited to, assembly material
qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic
deterioration, and impediments to movement of joints.
B. Metal Protection:
painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
3. Where aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by
method recommended by overhead glazing assembly manufacturer.
C. Install continuous sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed or
welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters.
D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the overhead glazing assembly to exterior.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
A. General: Install overhead glazing assemblies to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Level: 3 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 0.8 mm where surfaces abut in line,
edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned
surfaces by less than 76 mm; otherwise limit offset to 3 mm.
3. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 3 mm in 3.7 m;
13 mm over total length.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of overhead glazing

assemblies shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed
1. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in

ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive),"
Appendix X2.
a. Test a minimum of six areas on each assembly face.

b. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

2. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for
laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 2.25 L/s
per sq. m, of assembly surface area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 9.1 by 9.1 m of overhead glazing
assembly.
tests prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.

uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure
difference specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but
not less than 300 Pa, and shall not evidence water penetration.
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 9.1 by 9.1 m of overhead glazing
assembly.
tests prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
4. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
penetration.
a. Test Area: A minimum area of 9.1 by 9.1 m of overhead glazing assembly.
C. Overhead glazing assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.

SECTION 08970 - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED STRUCTURAL GLASS CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: suspended tempered glass wall and glass mullion
framing system mechanically attached with concealed perimeter glazing frame, metal
anchors, suspension devices, planar fittings, integral and perimeter sealants
1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation materials and firesafing field
installed in conjunction with mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system.
2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for through-penetration
fire-stop systems and firesafing field installed in conjunction with structural-sealant-
glazed curtain wall system.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing."
5. Division 8 Section " Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls"
6. Division 8 Section "Sloped Glazing Systems."
7. Division 8 Section "Overhead Glazing Asseblies"
8. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Direction Of Opening: on Architectural Drawings the indications for direction of opening

are as follows:
1. Fixed windows are indicated by letter "F"

2. Sliding windows are indicated by an arrow indicating the direction of slide.
3. Casement or pivoting windows are indicated by a dotted triangle, the vertex of which
indicates the hinge or pivot side.
B. Manufacturer: the window or curtain wall system manufacturer.
C. Fabricator: the fabricator of window or curtain wall joinery components based on system
D. Installer: the Installer of window or curtain wall joinery components.
E. Testing Laboratory: an independent testing laboratory/ agency approved by the Engineer to

MECHANICALLY ATTACHED STRUCTURAL GLASS CURTAIN WALLS 08970 - Page 1 of 12

A. General: Provide Structural suspended tempered glass curtain wall system that is
mechanically attached and comprises structural sealant on four sides, with intermediate
vertical mullions on interior and planar fittings and that has the following capabilities based
on preconstruction testing:
1. That forms a complete integrated and functional system that is fit to the purpose and
produced by an international manufacturer having not less than fifteen years
documented experience in that field.
2. that is provided from a single source as a complete system including all related
accessories.
3. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated
without failure. Failure includes the following:
a. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.

b. Members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movement, to glazing units.
B. Glazing shall be physically and thermally isolated from framing members.

A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused
by positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall, including building
corners.
1. As calculated in accordance with applicable code., as measured in accordance with

AAMA CW-11 and ASTM E330.
B. Wind Loads:
C. Structural-Test Performance: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall

system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding test pressure indicated without
material and deflection failures and permanent deformation of structural members
exceeding 0.2 percent of span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent
of span.

4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m) or an
is less.
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6-mm clearance between framing

members and operable units.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limit

deflection to two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.
E. Seismic Loads:
1. Seismic Zone 2A according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise shown on

structural drawings
F. Dead Loads: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system members
that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design
dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 3.20-mm clearance between
members and top of fixed panels, glazing, or other fixed part immediately below. Provide a
minimum 1.60-mm clearance between members and operable windows and doors.
G. Live Loads: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system, including
anchorage, that accommodates supporting structure's deflection from uniformly distributed
and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent
deformation.
H. Air Infiltration: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system with
permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not more than 0.7 L/s/ m2 of fixed
wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 300
Pa.
I. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide mechanically attached structural glass
curtain wall that does not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at
minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure as
defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not
less than 720 Pa.
J. Thermal Movement: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system,
including anchorage, that accommodates thermal movements of system and supporting
elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants,
damaging loads on fasteners, noise or vibration, and other detrimental effects. Base

engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 °C, ambient; 100 °C, material surfaces.

2. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, glazing edge-seal failure, sealant
a. Test Ambient Temperature Range: minus 18 to plus 100 deg C.
3. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, sealant failure, or excess stress on

framing, anchors, and fasteners and no reduction of performance when tested
according to AAMA 501.5.
K. Structural Support Movement: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system that accommodates structural movements including, but not limited to, sway, twist,
column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection.
L. Condensation Resistance: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall

system with condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55 when tested according
to AAMA 1503.1.
M. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system with an average U-value of not more than 3.75 W/sq. m x K when tested according
to AAMA 1503.1.
N. Sound Transmission: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system
with minimum STC 32 according to ASTM E 413 and an OITC 26 according to ASTM E
1332.
O. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall

system, including anchorage, that accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame
and other adjacent construction.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data for each product specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of mechanically attached structural

glass curtain wall system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
attachments to other units of Work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard
sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.

E. Cutaway Sample of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of system, made from 300-mm

lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
4. Glazing.
6. Mechanical fixings.
F. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer

detailing fabrication and assembly of structural-sealant-glazed curtainwall systems. Include
plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
3. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of
structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, showing the following:

b. Anchorage.
d. Glazing.

a. Resubmit Shop Drawings with changes made to details of structural-sealant-

glazed curtain walls, to successfully complete preconstruction testing.
G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For mechanically attached structural-glass curtain walls

indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
H. Welder certificates indicating that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article.
I. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

J. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
representative.
K. Preconstruction test reports from a qualified independent testing agency approved by the
Engineer indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance
requirements of mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system.

L. Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of
mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency

must demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted
criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to
satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer or system supplier capable of producing

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall systems
that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
D. Fabricator/ Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative/ agents who is

1. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or

supervise the preparation of data for mechanically attached structural glass curtain
wall systems, including drawings, testing program development, test-result
interpretation, and comprehensive engineering analysis that shows systems'
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for mechanically attached structural glass

curtain wall systems, including drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis
of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this
Project.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system from one source and by a single manufacturer.
F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements

for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are
assemblies as they relate to sight lines and relationships to one another and to adjoining
construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by
one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, or in-service
performance.
Engineer's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance

requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory

G. Preconstruction Testing: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform the preconstruction testing indicated.
2. Test mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system for compliance with
requirements specified for performance and test methods. Conduct tests using
specimen representative of proposed materials and construction including perimeter
components according to AAMA 501 recommendations.
H. Mockups: Prior to installing mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system,
construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections
made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of Work.
standard for judging the completed Work.
a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.

of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to
mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
2. Review structural loading limitations.
delays.
4. Review required inspecting, testing, and certifying procedures.
5. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with
unfavorable conditions.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and show
recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.9 WARRANTY

components of mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall systems that do not
comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

weathering.
e. Condensation, air infiltration, or water penetration through fixed glazing and
framing areas.
g. Failure in mechanical fixings .
h. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
i. Glazing breakage.
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
5. Crazing.
7. Color retention.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers for Curtain Walls: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
1. Pilkington United Kingdom Ltd.

2. Saint Gobain.
3. Mero – Raumstruktur, GMBH.

B. Manufacturers for Silicone sealants: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following
1. Dow Corning Corporation;. [www.dowcorning.com]

2. Tremco;. [www.tremcosealants.com]
2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.
4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316.

2. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316.
D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316.
F. Wire Rope: 7-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 316.
G. Support Fitting (Spider): proprietary bracket made of cast austenitic stainless steel to
ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M by lost wax method, to safely clamp the panel and
allow transmission of load to the supporting structure. Provide all compatible necessary
fixing accessories such as bushes, neoprene or pre-cured silicon gaskets and spring plates.
Routels, fasteners and accessories to be made from compatible stainless steel type 316.
Provide mockup sample(s) of the complete system for Engineer’s approval.
H. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
I. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent,
nonmigrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and system
J. Firesafing materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
K. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness per coat.
2.3 SEALANTS
A. General: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants with insulating-glass units.

B. Outer Seal: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants compatible with the double glazed unit
peripheral seal.
C. Inner Seal: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants compatible with the double glazed unit
peripheral seal.
D. Secondary Sealant: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants Compatible with other system
components with which it comes in contact and that accommodates a 50 percent increase or
decrease in joint width at the time of application when measured according to
ASTM C 719.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system according to
Shop Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted
joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according
to Shop Drawings.
B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations,
before finishing.
C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing

channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within
the system to the exterior.
E. Metal Protection: Protect against bi-metallic corrosion (galvanic action) by painting contact
surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this
purpose.
F. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8

Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mechanically fasten glazing in place with support fittings manufactured specifically

for the purpose.
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum

C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.

2.6 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of mechanically attached structural
glass curtain wall system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected or accommodations acceptable to Engineer have been made.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and
installing mechanically attached glazed curtain wall system. Do not install damaged
components. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain
water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system.
B. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing

channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within
the system to the exterior.
C. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
D. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building structure
as indicated on Shop Drawings.
1. Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
E. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8

Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mechanically fasten glazing in place with support fittings manufactured specifically

for the purpose
F. Install secondary sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to provide

weatherproof joints. Install joint fillers behind sealant as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
G. Install firesafing in locations indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section

"Building Insulation," unless otherwise indicated.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system to comply with

the following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 3 mm in 3 m; 1/4 inch in 40 feet 6 mm in 12 m.

2. Level: 3 mm in 6 m; 1/4 inch in 40 feet 6 mm in 12 m.

3. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1.5 mm;
where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 50.8
mm, limit offset to 12.7 mm.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to 3 mm
in 3.7 m; 12.7 mm over total length.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform testing

indicated.
B. Air Infiltration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance with
system performance requirements according to ASTM E 783.
C. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance
with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential
pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7,
"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 299 Pa.
D. Water Spray Test: After completing the installation of 23-m- by-2-story minimum area of
mechanically-attached curtain wall system, test system for water penetration according to
AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area directed by Engineer.
E. Repair or remove Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing;
replace to conform to specified requirements.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer, that ensure mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system is
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-
bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling
joists; and roof trusses.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate

non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - Page 1 of 7

S08035-SPC-AR-01 REV A
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip galvanized unless
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use steel studs and runners.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.84 mm.

b. Depth: 152 mm.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 51-mm- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit
into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 305 mm of the top of
studs to provide lateral bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 51-mm- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.

following:
1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.

2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track.
3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.
D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract
with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.

a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip.
b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.84 mm.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 1.34-mm minimum base-metal thickness, with

minimum 13-mm- wide flanges.
1. Depth: 38 mm.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 38 by 38 mm, 1.72-mm- thick, galvanized steel.
G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.84 mm.

2. Depth: 38 mm.
H. Resilient Furring Channels: 13-mm- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 1.34-mm uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 13-mm-

wide flanges.
1. Depth: 19 mm.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.8 mm.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm-
diameter wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm- diameter wire.
J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 32 mm, wall attachment
flange of 22 mm, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.45 mm, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm- diameter
wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm- diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for

attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5
times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor and Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.12 mm in
diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 25 by 5 mm by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of

1.34 mm and minimum 13-mm- wide flanges.
1. Depth: 64 mm.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 1.34-mm uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 13-mm-

wide flanges, 19 mm deep.
2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

b. Depth: 92 mm.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 22 mm deep.
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 13-mm- deep members designed to reduce sound

transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 610 mm o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness
of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 610 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: 610 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 13-
mm clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in
finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor
to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

indicated.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 610 mm o.c.
F. Z-Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," vertically and

hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 600 mm o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 610 mm o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of
furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second
member no more than 305 mm from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 3 mm from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: (1219 mm) o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1219 mm o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 406 mm o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers
in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to
each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.

SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior portland cement plasterwork on metal lath, unit masonry and monolithic
concrete.

2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders
included in portland cement plaster assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated; 305 by
305 mm, and prepared on rigid backing.
E. Mix Designs: For each type of plaster. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for plaster mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for
water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. pull out test at 28 days: > 0.5N/mm2
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - Page 1 of 8

B. Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster

assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and
classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 10.0 sq. m in surface area to
1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.

2. Include all plastering accessories.
3. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Portland Cement Plaster Warranty: Provide warranty in which Manufacturer and Contractor
are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations, all or
any part of the Portland Cement Plaster which fails or becomes defective in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to
cracking, failure of bonding to concrete structure.
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other
causes.
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 4.4 deg C for at least 48
hours before plaster application, and continuously during and after application.
1. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute
heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
hydrating plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for

environmental conditions for applying finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip galvanized
zinc coating.

to, the following:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.

b. CEMCO.
c. Clark Western Building Systems.
d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
e. MarinoWARE.
f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.
2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat and Self-furring, 1.8 kg/sq. m.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Metal Accessories:

to, the following:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.

b. CEMCO.
c. Clark Western Building Systems.
d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
e. MarinoWARE.
f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.
2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet,

ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180 zinc coating.
3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
b. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 19.1 mm minimum, with expanded flanges; use at
locations indicated on Drawings.
5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style;

with expanded flanges.
6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type,
folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated
flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.

7. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of

unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 13 mm long, free of
contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as
required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application;
in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three
exposed threads.
E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 1.21-mm
diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,
slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.
H. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".
2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray.
B. Lime: Do not use lime
C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: In color matching Engineer's sample.
D. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring

agents, and proprietary ingredients.

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle Company; Marblesil Stucco Mix.

b. California Stucco Products Corp.; Conventional Portland Cement Stucco.

c. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco

Finish.
d. Florida Stucco; Florida Stucco.
e. LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Exterior Stucco Color Coat.
f. Omega Products International, Inc.; ColorTek Exterior Stucco.
g. QUIKCRETE; QUIKCRETE Finish Coat Stucco, No. 1201.
h. Shamrock Stucco LLC; Exterior Stucco.
i. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco.
j. USG Corporation; Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco.
2.5 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in
mixes, but do not exceed 0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m of cementitious materials.
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork as follows:
1. Portland Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 2-1/2
to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3 to 5
parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of
aggregate used in scratch coat.
c. Admixtures and workability aids, as per manufacturer’s printed instructions.
C. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as
follows:
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 2-
1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
2. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland
cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
D. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat
plasterwork as follows:
1. Base Coat: 1 part portland cement, 5 parts aggregate, aerating plasticiser as per manu-
facturer’s recommendation.
E. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:
1. 1 part portland cement, 4 parts aggregate, aerating plasticiser as per manufacturer’s

recommendation.

F. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with

1. Initial adhesion at 28 days: > 0.5 N/mm2

3. Compressive strength: not less than 5 ±1 N/ mm2
4. Min. cment sand mix: 1:3-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful
effects caused by plastering.
B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability
required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design

designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
C. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.

2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
3. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.

3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:
1. Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.
C. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Engineer for visual
effect as follows:
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum

sizes:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 13.4 sq. m.

b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 9.3 sq. m.
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 5.5 m o.c.

3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of
not greater than 2-1/2:1.
4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas
(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension
change.
3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 6.4 mm in 3 m from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3-m straightedge placed on surface.
2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories
that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not
terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster
sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.
C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork, on masonry , on concrete; 20-mm thickness.
1. Portland cement mixes.

2. Masonry cement mixes.
3. Portland and masonry cement mixes.
4. Plastic cement mixes.
5. Portland and plastic cement mixes.
D. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork; 20 mm thick on concrete.



E. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 10 mm thick on concrete
masonry and 6 mm thick on concrete.

F. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 6 mm thick on concrete.

G. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Engineer's sample.
H. Concealed Interior Plasterwork:
1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar

furnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat.
2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar
locations, finish coat may be omitted.
3. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and
similar finishes, omit finish coat.
3.7 PLASTER REPAIRS
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from
door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls,
and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed
in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.
2. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board.
3. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Wall: Vertical building element used to enclosed or separate spaces. Walls include fixed
partitions.
B. System Description:
1. Design Requirements: Contractor: Responsible for designing metal stud and

supplemental metal framing used to comply with performance requirements,
including anchorage to structural system and necessary modifications to meet
specified requirements and maintain visual design concepts.
2. Performance Requirements: Design and install systems to:
a. Interior Suspended Ceilings, Soffits, and Bullheads: Maintain deflection of not

more than L/360 of distance between supports.
b. Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies, Typical Locations: Withstand
lateral loading (air pressure) indicated on Drawings.
c. Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Atriums, Lobbies, Service
Corridors, Exits, and Elevator Lobbies: Withstand lateral loading (air pressure)
of 10 PSF with deflection limit not more than L/360 of partition height.
d. Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Locations with Ceramic Tile
or Other Hard Surface Finishes: Withstand typical lateral loading (air pressure)
with deflection limit not more than L/360 of partition height.
e. Accommodate building structure deflections in connections to structure.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - Page 1 of 14

f. Requirements at Deflection Clips and Bridge Clips: Maintain positive

attachment of units while allowing minimum 1/2 inch vertical free movement
due to deflection of structure.
g. Anticipated Live Load Interior Beam Deflections: L/240 of span.
h. Where depth of partition is indicated, provide metal framing components of
thickness required to achieve performance requirements specified. Limit depth
of framing members to comply with partition depth limitations.
3. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where assemblies with fire ratings are indicated, provide
materials and installations which are identical to assemblies tested in accordance with
ASTM E119 by testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Construct assemblies identical to those indicated by reference in UL Fire

Resistance Directory, listing or other agencies acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
b. Smoke Partitions: Construct of materials consistent with the type of
construction. Capable of resisting the passage of smoke. Extend from floor to
underside of floor or roof deck above.
4. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Ratings, Insulation: ASTM E136
a. Rock Wool Mineral Fiber, Unfaced:
1) Flame Spread: Not to exceed 15.

2) Smoke Developed: 0
b. Glass Fiber, Foil/Scrim/Kraft Faced:
1) Flame Spread: Not to exceed 25.

2) Smoke Developed: Not to exceed 25.
c. Acoustical Requirements: Where sound-rated assemblies are indicated, provide

materials and installation for sound-rated assembly tested and classified by
manufacturer to achieve Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating scheduled or
indicated, ASTM E90.
5. Interface With Adjacent Systems: Integrate design and connections with adjacent
construction.
a. Accommodate allowable tolerances and deflections for structural members in

installation
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 300-mm- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated
and on same backing indicated for Work.

A. Single Source Responsibility: Except where specified otherwise, obtain gypsum board
products, trim, joint treatment, and accessories from single manufacturer or from
manufacturers recommended by prime manufacturer of gypsum board products.
B. Certifications:
1. Certification that each assembly complies with performance requirements.

2. Certification that each fire rated assembly, including products and components,
complies with tested assembly requirements.
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials

and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119
by an independent testing agency.
D. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
E. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 9 sq. m
in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on

exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels
flat to prevent sagging.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace components of
gypsum board assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or

b. Failure in fixings.
c. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

to, the following:
a. American Gypsum Co.

b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
B. Regular Type:

2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Type X:


D. Type C:
1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.

E. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard
regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.

F. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.

G. Foil-Backed Type:
1. Core: 15.9 mm, Type X unless otherwise indicated.

H. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation,

through-penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard, regular-type and
Type X gypsum board.

I. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1. Core: 15.9 mm, Type X.

2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with
manufacturer's standard edges.

to, the following:

b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-

P Gypsum.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or

ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

to, the following:

b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 12.7 mm, regular type.
B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board:
1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile

Guard" by G-P Gypsum.
2. Complying with ASTM C1177/C 1177M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus

Interior Guard" by G-P Gypsum.
3. Core: 12.7 mm, regular type.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9.

a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.

b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-

faced galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

to, the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.

b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties
of ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and

setting-type, sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,
slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish

with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according
to ASTM E 84.

a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Regency Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene.

b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray.
c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT.
2. Texture: Fine unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray
application.

a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture
(Aggregated).
2. Texture: Light spatter unless otherwise indicated.
D. Acoustical Finish: Water-based, chemical-setting or drying-type, job-mixed texture finish

for spray application.

a. International Cellulose Corp.; SonaSpray "fc."

b. USG Corporation; USG Acoustical Plaster Finish.
2. Application Thickness: 12.7 mm.

3. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Indices when tested according to ASTM E 84 as
follows:
a. Flame Spread: Less than 25.

b. Smoke Developed: Less than 450.
4. NRC: 0.55 according to ASTM C 423.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends
with not more than 1.5 mm of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place
tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of
partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 0.7 sq. m in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 6.4- to 9.5-mm- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 6.4- to 12.7-mm- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide
control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at

openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and
closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions
above acoustical ceilings.
K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
4. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
5. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
6. Foil-Backed Type: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
8. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no

end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers
on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right
angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 400 mm
minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-
layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer
over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a

substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply
with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten
gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
E. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent

possible, across curved surface plus 300-mm- long straight sections at ends of curves
and tangent to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 400 mm o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with
screws spaced 300 mm o.c.
3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 6.4-mm open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated.
Install with 6.4-mm gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 6.4-mm
gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, where indicated.
D. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a
flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant
panels.
E. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to
produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Engineer for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
2. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings and directed by Engineer.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions for use as exposed soffit board.
F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other
surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and
smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to
produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other
evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive
texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If,
despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove
droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Paver tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Special-purpose tile.
4. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations.
5. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for
tile substrates.
2. Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing under
thickset mortar beds.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus
joint width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
D. Water-Absorption Properties:
1. Impervious Tile (Fully Vitrified ) a tiles with water absorption generally less than
0.5%
2. Vitreous Tile (Vitrified Tiles ): a tile with water absorption more than 0.5%, but less
than 3.0%
3. Semi-Vitreous Tile: a tile with water absorption more than 3% but less than 7%
4. Non-Vitreous Tile: a tile with water absorption more than 7.0%.
E. Porcelain Tiles: are impervious (Fully vitrified) tiles with full body light colored, and have
abrasive hardness rating of 100 (ASTM C 501)
CERAMIC TILE 09310 - Page 1 of 13

F. Natural Clay Tiles: are either impervious or vitreous and have an abrasive hardness rating
of 50 (ASTM C 501).
G. Glazed Wall Tiles: nonvitreous Porcelain body of average water absorption more than
7.0%, but not exceeding 18%.
H. Paver Tiles: dust-pressed or extruded tiles, surface area greater than 40 sq. cm.
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with
the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.

2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
B. Load-Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide

installations rated for the following load-bearing performance level based on testing
assemblies according to ASTM C 627 that are representative of those indicated for this
Project:
1. Extra Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 14.

2. Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 12.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Tile patterns and locations.

2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints
in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or
sections of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each
type and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color
selection.
D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and
construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include
Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least
300 mm square, mounted on solid backing , and with grouted joints using product
complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or
colors selected by Engineer.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.

3. Stone thresholds in 150-mm lengths.

4. Metal edge strips in 150-mm lengths.
F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply
with requirements.
H. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product.
I. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
project names and addresses, names of Engineers and Employers, and other any information
required by Engineer.
J. Tile Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of special-purpose tile
with specified requirements.
K. Setting Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of tile-
setting and -grouting products with specified requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile

installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety
of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for
each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform
quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and
each aggregate from one source or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in
this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Joint sealants.
3. Waterproofing.
E. Mockups: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish
required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work.
1. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit of Work.
a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.

of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile
packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other
causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Employer. Furnish extra materials described below that match
products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the ceramic
tile installation schedules at the end of this Section.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications
for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Retain below with appropriate definitions in referenced part 1 article.
3. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified
in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for
tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and
other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the
following requirements:
1. Provide Engineer's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and
patterns for products of type indicated.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during
Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one
package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match
approved Samples.
E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile

assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.
F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a
continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile
surfaces.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Unglazed Paver Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Composition: Porcelain
2. Facial Dimensions: As shown on drawings.
3. Thickness: 9 mm minimum.
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges.
5. For latex-portland cement mortared and grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary
protective coating.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Composition: Porcelain
2. Module Size: As shown on drawings.
3. Thickness: 6 mm minimum.
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges.

C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved.

b. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight.
c. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap.
d. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
e. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile
wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above.
f. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape
with a radius of at least 19 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
g. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
h. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap
angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
i. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness
of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to
provide a reduction in thickness from 12.7 to 6.35 mm across nominal 100-mm
dimension.
2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS
A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes
and profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished
floor surfaces.
1. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 12.7 mm above adjoining
finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than
1:2.
B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements
for exterior use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.
1. Match Engineer's sample for color and finish.
2.5 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied
Waterproofing".
2.6 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.1A and as specified below:
1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 50.8 by 50.8 mm by 1.57-
mm diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82, except for minimum wire
size.

2. Expanded Metal Lath: Provide diamond-mesh lath complying with Division 9

Section "Portland Cement Plaster":
3. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or
all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer
for use with job-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying

with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:
1. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar

mix and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.

b. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar
complying with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-
2.1.2.
D. Semi Dry Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and
liquid-latex additive consisting of 1 part ordinary Portland cement and 3-4 parts sand (by
volume). Use Latex Additive as per manufacturer's printed recommendations.
1. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
E. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.

to, the following:
a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
c. Bostik, Inc.
d. C-Cure.
e. Custom Building Products.
f. Jamo Inc.
g. Laticrete International, Inc.
h. MAPEI Corporation.
i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to

temperatures of up to (60 deg C) and (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by
manufacturer for intended use.

F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.

to, the following:
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.

b. Bostik, Inc.
c. C-Cure.
d. Custom Building Products.
e. DAP Inc.
f. Jamo Inc.
g. Laticrete International, Inc.
h. MAPEI Corporation.
i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
j. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white
or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
B. Dry-Set Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4,
composed as follows:
1. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared, dry-

grout mix and latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for
materials described in Section H-2.3, for joints 3.2 mm and narrower.
b. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with
ANSI A 118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 3.2 mm and
wider.
c. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base

polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-

based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for
installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 3.2 mm wide at top edge with integral
provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to

protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with
tile, mortar, and grout products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without
damaging grout or tile.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil
with a melting point of 49 to 60 deg C per ASTM D 87.
D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile
and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile
and grout manufacturers.
2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films,
and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced
ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint
locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Engineer.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap,
wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or
concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire
brush.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement
mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of
tile installation standards for installations indicated.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material

manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Provide substrates for wall tile installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for installations indicated.
1. Use cement plaster, with expanded mesh reinforcement where necessary, and
patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to
fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken
from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles
at Project site before installing.
E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of
tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of
temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile
surfaces:
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot.
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types
of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation
schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply
with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly
at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile

cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints
within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement,
and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to

produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation
Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of
tile installation standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Paver Tile: Not less than 3 mm.
C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by
complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced
ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:
1. Tile floors in wet areas.

2. Tile floors composed of tiles 203 by 203 mm or larger.
3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
D. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting
bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.

E. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring
meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the
Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation
methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.
B. Install metal lath and scratch coat to walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
C. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Wall Tile: Not less than 1.6 mm.
D. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by
complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced
ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:
1. Tile wall installations in wet areas.

2. Tile wall installations composed of tiles 203 by 203 mm or larger.
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they
are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and
grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after
installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from
effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating
manufacturer that is acceptable to grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to
prevent it from clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Engineer, that
ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral

protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with
kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining,
damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.

3.8 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floors on Concrete:
1. Tile Type: Unglazed or Glazed paver tile.

2. TCA F111: un-bonded cement semi dry mortar bed.
a. Setting Bed: ANSI A 108.1A (semidry mix).

b. Grout:
1) Un-sanded latex-portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6, joints < 3mm.
3. TCA F112: Cement mortar bed bonded to concrete.
a. Setting Bed: ANSI A 108.1b, dry-set or latex mortar bed bonded to cured
setting bed.
b. Grout: epoxy grout, ANSI A118.3.
4. TCA F121: Cement mortar bed bonded to waterproof membrane over concrete
subfloor.
a. Waterproof membrane: liquid applied ANSI A 118.10

b. Setting Bed: ANSI A 108.1A (semidry mix)
c. Grout:
1) Un-sanded latex-portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6, joints < 3mm.
3.9 CERAMIC TILE WALL INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Walls, Masonry or Concrete:
1. Tile Type: Unglazed or Glazed wall tile.

2. TCA W201: Cement mortar bed over masonry or concrete.
a. Waterproof membrane: liquid applied ANSI A 118.10.

b. Cured mortar scratch coat self furring metal lath.
c. Setting Bed: ANSI A108.1B, latex/ dry set mortar on cured mortar bed.
d. Grout: Un-sanded latex-portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6, joints < 3mm.
3. TCA W211: Cement mortar bed bonded to clean, sound, dimensionally stable
masonry or concrete.
a. Cured mortar scratch coat.

b. Setting Bed: ANSI A108.1B, latex/ dry set mortar on cured mortar bed.
c. Grout: Un-sanded latex-portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6, joints < 3mm.
4. TCA W222: one-coat cement mortar bed over solid backing and solid anchorage for
metal lath.
a. Cured mortar scratch coat metal lath ANSI A108.1A.

b. Setting Bed: ANSI A108.1B, latex/ dry set mortar on cured mortar bed.
c. Grout: Un-sanded latex-portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6, joints < 3mm.

SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

2. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Snap-in Metal Pan Ceilings."
3. Division 9 Section "Linear Metal Ceilings."
4. Division 9 Section "Suspended Decorative Grids."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Articulation Class.
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1:50.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - Page 1 of 10

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 300-mm- long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.
H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor
and fastener type.
I. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an

NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a
"Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods
specified.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting
agency.
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following

surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials
as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

E. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
1. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's

"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--
Seismic Zones 0-2."
2. Seismic Loads applicable to this project: Zone 2A as per UBC 1997.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where
they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0

percent of quantity installed.
3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration

indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns,
acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face
of test specimen is 400 mm away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing

pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by Engineer from each manufacturer's full
range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light
reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. BPB USA.
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.
5. Heradesign; [http://www.heradesign.at/heradesign_english/heradesign.php]
6. Tectum Inc.
7. USG Interiors, Inc.
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type,
form, and pattern as follows:
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
2. Pattern: C (perforated, small holes) unless otherwise indicated.
C. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
D. LR: Not less than 0.80.
E. NRC: Not less than 0.60.
F. CAC: Not less than 35.

G. AC: Not less than 190.
H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square unless otherwise indicated.
I. Thickness: 19 mm.
J. Modular Size: 600 by 600 mm.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply
with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system
indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating

Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes
are indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or
loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled expansion and Postinstalled bonded anchors.

b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less
than 3.5-mm- diameter wire.
E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive
paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1-mm- thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation;
with bolted connections and 8-mm- diameter bolts.
G. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to

accommodate seismic forces.

H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate

seismic forces.
I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical panels in-place.
J. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips

spaced 610 mm o.c. on all cross tees.
K. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system

designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.
L. Clean-Room Gasket System: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard system,

including manufacturer's standard gasket and related adhesives, tapes, seals, and retention
clips, designed to seal out foreign material from and maintain positive pressure in clean
room.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

following:

2. BPB USA.
4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.
B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than Z90 coating designation, with
prefinished 15-mm- wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

following:

2. BPB USA.
4. Fry Reglet Corporation.
5. Gordon, Inc.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details
and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed
runners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.

b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing
airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction
as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,

nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing
interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with
acoustical panel ceilings.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and
comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with seismic design requirements
indicated as applicable to this project, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated

design.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated
ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and
that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure
and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger
involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail
due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors that extend through forms
into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger
wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
10. Space hangers not more than 1200 mm o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 200 mm
from ends of each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten
bracing wires into concrete with postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 400 mm o.c. and not
more than 75 mm from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
3.2 mm in 3.6 m. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges
of suspension system runners and moldings.
3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as
recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-
resistance-rated assembly.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections and prepare reports:
1. Suspended ceiling system.

2. Hangers, anchors and fasteners.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical panel
ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of
extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel
ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of
acoustical panel ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.
1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each
floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.

a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 postinstalled
anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 890 N of
tension; it will also select one of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach
bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 1957 N of tension.
b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with
requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until
20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.
D. Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not
pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning
and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot
be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

SECTION 09514 - ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Acoustical metal pans and associated suspension system for interior and
exterior ceilings.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete structure to receive ceiling

suspension system hanger anchors.
2. Project Acoustic Report.
B. LEED Submittals:
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and adhesives required to to have a low
VOC content.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Metal Pans: Set of full-size Samples of each type, finish, color, and pattern of hole
perforation designs. Show pan edge profile, details of hinged access panels and hold-
down clips.
2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 300 mm long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
3. Sound Absorbing Materials: Sample of each type matching size of Sample metal pan.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For design of seismic restraints and attachment devices.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to 1: 50 scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Extent of sound absorbing materials.
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILING 09514- Page 1 of 6

4. Items penetrating or attached to finished ceiling including lighting fixtures, Air outlets
and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings.
6. Panel identifications.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical metal pan ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, demonstrating compliance with performance requirements.
D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical metal pan ceiling suspension system and anchor and
fastener type.
E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Quality Standards: Install ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M, manufacturer's
written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area, not less than 10 sq. m, for each type of ceiling.
in writing.
D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform tests and inspections to
verify seismic design compliance, and as follows.
1. Tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical metal panel ceiling hangers,
anchors, and fasteners in successive stages in accordance with CISCA's "Guidelines for
Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies - Seismic Zones 3 & 4".
B. Acoustical metal panel ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if
they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer experienced in design and

installation of this work and licensed in the place where the Project is located, to design seismic
restraints and attachment devices.
B. Accessibility to Ceiling Spaces: Determine quantity and location of hinged access panels
according locations and types of equipment and servicing requirements indicated in services
documents of the Contract documents.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical metal ceiling pan and supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Recycled Content: Provide metal ceiling materials having recycled content in compliance with
Credit MR 4.
C. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
2.3 ALUMINUM PANS FOR INTERIOR ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Panz Metal Lay-in
Ceiling Panels USG Interiors, Inc. or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
B. Panel Types:
1. Perforated Panels: Manufacturer’s standard units; perforated aluminum facing (pan); with
manufacturer’s sound-absorbent pads.
a. Perforations: Custom hole sizes and patterns as supplied by consulting artist’s

design.
2. Solid Panels: Same specification as perforated panels except without perforations.
C. Pan Fabrication: Manufacturer's standard units of sizes indicated, formed from metal indicated
to set in exposed suspension grid and finished to comply with requirements indicated.
D. Pan Edge Detail: Manufacturer's standard Fine line (FL) edge detail.
E. Pan Face Finish: Paint finish, flat white.
F. Panel Identification: Identify each perforated panel on concealed side, with the following
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings.
1. A symbol indicating correct orientation of panel in suspension system to maintain face

design appearance.

2. Numbers indicating correct location of panel.
G. Sound-Absorbing Media: Provide fabric layers, fibrous insulation and associated materials to
achieve sound ratings specified in Project Acoustic Report, as tested by qualified testing agency
on products and assemblies indicated, and as follows:
1. Material to be non-dusting or plastic sheet-wrapped.

2. Color: Black.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: nonflammable; flame-spread index of 25 or less; smoke-
developed index of 50 or less; according to ASTM E 84.
4. Adhere backing to, and completely fill, pan.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems
of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements.
B. Suspension Systems: Provide systems complete with carriers, runners, splice sections,
connector clips, alignment clips, leveling clips, hangers, molding, trim, retention clips, load-
resisting struts, and other suspension components required to support ceiling units and other
ceiling-supported construction.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified
a. Type: Post installed expansion anchors.

b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times the hanger design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, Direct Hung, is less than yield stress of wire, but provide
not less than 3.5 mm diameter wire.
E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1 mm thick,
galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation; with
bolted connections and 8 mm diameter bolts.

G. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to

accommodate seismic forces.
H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic

forces.
I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
metal pans in place.
J. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced to secure acoustical metal
pans in place at each pan, except at access panels.
K. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Provide exposed members as indicated or as required
to comply with seismic requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, to conceal edges of and
penetrations through ceiling, to conceal edges of pans and runners, for fixture trim and adapters,
for fasciae at changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching
acoustical metal pan ceiling units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Perimeter Molding: Manufacturer’s standard Shadow line with reveal edge, designed for
use with panels and tee system.
2. For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter required to fit
penetration exactly.
2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR INTERIOR ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN METAL PAN
CEILING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DXI Identitee Tee
System by USG Interiors, Inc. or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
B. Direct-Hung Tee System: Designed to support metal pans that lay into main runners, consisting
of main runners supported by hangers attached directly to building structure, and complying
with the following requirements:
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate.

2. Hangers: Angles or channels, as standard with ceiling system manufacturer, formed from
same metal as main runners.
3. Main Runners: Rolled aluminum sheet; alloy and temper recommended by aluminum
producer and finisher for type of use indicated and manufacturer's standard finish,
complying with ASTM B 209M.
C. Access Panels: For access at locations indicated, provide hinged metal pan ceiling units as
specified for adjoining ceiling panels; accessible by key or tool.
1. Access Key or Tool: Provide manufacturer's standard key or tool for opening access
panels; four for each station.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant.

b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective
in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.

2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,
synthetic-rubber sealant.
3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content complying with the requirements of
Credit IEQ 4.1.
2.7 FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

2. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
B. Metal Finishes: Finish carriers and panels with manufacturer’s color-coated standard baked
paint complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

SECTION 09580 - SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rigid, open-frame, suspended grids of aluminum.
1. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base

and glass-fiber-base acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
2. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Snap-in Metal Pan Ceilings."
3. Division 9 Section "Linear Metal Ceilings."
1.3 SUBMITTALS

representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color and other
decorative finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Cell Grids: Set of full-size module Samples of each type, finish, and color.
2. Beam Grids: Set of 300-mm- long Samples of each type, finish, and color; a 300-
mm- long spliced section; and a 150-mm- long per leg corner section.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For suspended decorative grid and anchor type.
G. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, finish, and type of suspended decorative grid from
one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance, physical
properties, and performance.
SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS 09580 - Page 1 of 6

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide suspended decorative grids with the following

surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
D. Seismic Standard: Provide suspended decorative grids designed and installed to withstand
the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
1. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's

"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--
Seismic Zones 0-2."
2. Seismic Loads applicable to this project: Zone 2A as per UBC 1997.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

A. Deliver suspended decorative grid components to Project site in original, unopened

packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected
against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, and other causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install suspended decorative grids until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of suspended decorative grids with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Suspended Decorative Grids: Quantity of each suspended decorative grid component

and exposed molding and trim equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
for product selection:

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2.2 SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS
A. Sheet Metal Characteristics: Provide sheet metal selected for surface flatness, smoothness,
and freedom from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit. Do not use
materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, variations in
flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet,
stains, discolorations, or other imperfections.
1. Aluminum Sheet: Roll-formed aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209M;

alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated.
B. Grid Fabrication: Components formed from metal indicated. Manufacturer's standard units
of size, shape, and profile indicated, finished to comply with requirements
indicated. Provide cells factory assembled into modular panel.
C. Cover Profiles and Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard cover profiles and trim for
exposed members, and as indicated or required, for edges of grids, at changes in ceiling
height, and for other conditions, of same metal and finish as suspended decorative grids.
D. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide ceiling manufacturer's standard metal

suspension systems of types and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635 requirements. Provide systems complete with runners or beams, splice
sections, connector clips, alignment clips, leveling clips, hangers, molding, trim, web
covers, load-resisting struts, fixture filler pans, clips and adapters, and other suspension
components required to support ceiling units and other ceiling-supported construction.
E. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below,

with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling
construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as

applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.

b. Type: Postinstalled adhesive anchors.
c. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC service condition
(mild).
F. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
3.5-mm- diameter wire.
G. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive
paint.
H. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1-mm- thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation;
with bolted connections and 8-mm- diameter bolts.
I. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate

seismic forces.
J. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings, Covers, Trim, and Fixture Filler Panels: Provide exposed
members as indicated or required to conceal edges of and penetrations through ceiling, to
conceal edges of beams, to cover runner webs, for fixture trim and adapters, for fasciae at
changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching suspended
decorative grids, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter required to

fit penetration exactly.
2.3 ALUMINUM GRID UNITS FOR SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRID
A. Sheet Metal Thickness: Not less than 0.8 mm.
B. Beam Grid Module: 600 mm square.
C. Beam Width by Height: 50 by 50 mm.
D. Cell Panel Module: Manufacturer's standard.
E. Cell Module: 50 mm square.
F. Cell Profile, Width by Height: Manufacturer's standard.
G. Finish: Clear anodized.




PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to
which suspended decorative grids attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of suspended decorative grids.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of suspended decorative grids to balance
border widths at opposite edges of each space. Comply with layout shown on reflected
ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install suspended decorative grids to comply with seismic requirements indicated
as applicable to this project, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established
by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for structure to
which hangers are attached and for type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support grids directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Space hangers not more than 1200 mm o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten
bracing wires into concrete with postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of each suspended decorative
grid and where necessary to conceal edges of grids.
1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 400 mm o.c. and not
more than 75 mm from ends, level with ceiling system to a tolerance of 3 mm in 3.6
m. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspended decorative grids in coordination with suspension system and exposed
moldings and trim.
1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis
in both directions, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
3. Where grid edges are visible, install cover profiles, unless other trim is indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of suspended decorative grids, including trim and edge moldings
after removing strippable, temporary protective covering if any. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for stripping of temporary protective covering, cleaning,
and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace grid components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including
dented and deformed grids.

SECTION 09634 - STONE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Stone slabs for interior flooring.
.1 Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for cast-in-place concrete floors to re-
ceive stone flooring.
A. Product Data:
.1 For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced
ASTM standards.
.2 For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
.3 Setting and jointing materials. Indicate setting methods.
B. LEED Submittals:
.1 Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
.2 Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and adhesives required to have low
VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
joint widths and edge treatments.
D. Samples of each stone type and grout samples. Include range showing variation of colors.
.1 For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 300 mm square.
Include five or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in
appearance characteristics and edge treatments expected in completed Work.
.2 For each color of grout required.

A. Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer.
B. Material Test Reports:
.1 Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a
qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties,
according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing within previous
two years.
.2 Compatibility Test Report: From manufacturers’ test laboratories, indicating that
stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and sub-
strate preparation needed for adhesion.

A. Standards: Comply with recommendations of Marble Institute of America's document
Dimensional Stone-Design Manual IV, or to National Building Granite Quarries
Association's document Specifications for Architectural Granite, as applicable.
STONE FLOORING 09634 - Page 1 of 4

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified company specializing in performing the specified

work, able to custom fabricate stone of the kind and form indicated, and employing
installers having minimum 5 years successful experience installing the stone by the methods
indicated.
D. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a
single quarry whether specified in this Section or in other Sections, with resources, inclusive
of reserves for breakage, to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
.1 For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety
from same source for each.
.2 Make quarried blocks available for examination by Engineer for appearance
characteristics.
.3 Make stone slabs available for Engineer to examine for appearance characteristics.
a. Engineer will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate
aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs.
b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval.
c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed
by Engineer.
E. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious material, grout,
stone accessories, and other material from single source.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and execution.
.1 Build 5 sq. m area illustrating each color, type and pattern of stone flooring.
G. Installation Tolerances:
.1 Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Maximum 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 9
mm maximum from level or slope indicated.
.2 Variation in Joint Width: Maximum 1.5 mm or one-fourth of nominal joint width,
whichever is lesser.
.3 Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units: Maximum 1 mm difference between
planes of adjacent units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. System Description: Stone slabs applied directly over concrete using mortar bed bond coat,
and mortar bed.
B. Joint Appearance:
.1 Joint Widths: 3 mm, uniform in width, slightly concave.
.2 Joints grouted except control joints.
.1 Regional Materials: Provide setting materials that comply with requirements of
Credit MR 5.

.2 Maximum VOC Content: Provide sealants and adhesives with VOC content in com-
pliance with requirements of Credit IEQ 4.1.
2.3 STONE
A. General: Natural, quarried, free of efflorescence. Provide stone types of classification
suitable for application indicated for service life of building, and as evidenced by test
reports.
B. Granite Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615.
C. Marble Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503.
D. Stone Flooring:
.1 Material Types: As indicated.
.2 Abrasion Resistance: Minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10, as determined per
ASTM C 241.
.3 Sizes: As indicated.
.4 Stone Edges: As selected by Engineer.
.5 Thickness: 30 mm minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
.6 Colors and Finishes: To match Engineer’s reference Samples.
.7 Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028, minimum value of 0.6 for level surfac-
es. Use higher values when required by applicable codes.

A. Bonded Mortar Bed Materials:
.1 Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with
ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207,
Type S.
tested according to ASTM C 114, to limit staining, when recommended by
stone source.
.2 Slurry Bond Coat and Slush Coat: Materials and mixes as recommended by portland
cement-lime mix manufacturer.
2.5 GROUT
A. Polymer Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7.
A. Control Joint Materials: Engineer will select from one or both of the following:
.1 Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants,” and that do not stain
stone.
.2 Preformed Strip: Stainless steel, selected by Engineer from Dilex series by Schluter-
Systems Ltd, or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
B. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical
properties of stone surfaces, hydrophobic water-based impregnating no-sheen type suitable
for natural stone.

.1 Sealer shall protect the stone and jointing materials from the following, as
demonstrated by tests performed by qualified testing agencies, using materials
specified for the Work:
a. Staining during setting and grouting process and allow evaporation of water
from setting materials.
b. Ingress of water, water-borne salts and oil-based substances.

A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and
starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
.1 Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they
do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as
judged by Engineer.
B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape and patterns indicated, and Shop
Drawings.
D. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural

SECTION 09652 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings, without backings.

2. Rubber sheet floor covering, without backing.
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base,
reducer strips, and other accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings.
2. Division 9 Section "Static-Control Resilient Floor Coverings" for sheet vinyl floor
coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge (ESD).
1.3 SUBMITTALS

representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 150-by-230-mm
sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 230
mm long, of each color required.
F. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern
combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 150-by-230-mm
Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer.
H. Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652 - Page 1 of 7

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are
competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering
installation.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified
by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-

exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution and to set quality
standard for fabrication and installation.
1. Locations of Mockups: As directed by Engineer.

2. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 9 sq. m of surface for each product indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
1. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing

to repair or replace sheet vinyl floor coverings that fail in materials, finishes or
B. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C. Store rolls upright.
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 21
deg C or more than 29 deg C, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time
periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 13 deg C or more than 35 deg C.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Furnish not less than 3 linear m for every 150 linear m or fraction thereof, in roll form
and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING

following:
1. Altro Floors.
3. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.
4. Congoleum Corporation.
5. Forbo Industries, Inc.
6. Lonseal, Inc.
7. Mannington Mills, Inc.
8. Marley Floors, Ltd.
9. Polyflor/Bonar Floors Inc.
10. Tarkett Inc.
11. TOLI International.
B. Description: Non-slip static dissipative vinyl tile. Tile must meet specifications required by
equipment manufacturer. Install according to tile manufacturer’s directions.
C. Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 2.0 mm thick.
D. Color and Pattern: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
E. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
F. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
G. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
I. Locations include (but are not limited to):
1. Electronic and Telecommunication Room

2. Additional rooms as needed based on equipment requirements
2.2 RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING

following:
1. Estrie Products International, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.

2. Flexco.
3. Johnsonite.
4. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
5. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
6. PRF USA Inc.
7. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The).
B. Unbacked Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1859.
1. Type: Type I (homogeneous rubber sheet).

2. Thickness: As standard with manufacturer.
C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per
ASTM D 2240.
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
F. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors.
H. Locations include (but are not limited to):
1. Station Operator Room

2. Station Staff Room
3. Safety Room
4. Service stairs
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor

covering and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor
covering.
D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 25-mm radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.

2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.
3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by
floor covering manufacturer.
E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required
to protect exposed edges of floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize
running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion

of floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m in 24 hours.
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.

E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at
least 152 mm away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor
coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut
covers and to cover perimeters.
G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to
produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.
I. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 152 mm or dimension indicated up vertical
surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at
top against cap strip.
1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by

manufacturer.
B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and
blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial
Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved.
Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.

SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Wall base.
2. Molding accessories.
1. Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings" for resilient sheet floor coverings.
2. Division 9 Section "Static-Control Resilient Floor Coverings" for resilient floor
coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-
size Samples but not less than 300 mm long, of each resilient product color, texture, and
pattern required.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient stair accessories with a critical radiant

flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 648 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
B. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution and to set quality
standard for fabrication and installation.
1. Locations of Mockups: As directed by Engineer.

2. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 9 sq. m of surface for each product indicated.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - Page 1 of 5

1.5 WARRANTY
B. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C.
deg C or more than 35 deg C, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time
periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Furnish not less than 3 linear m for every 150 linear m or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles.

2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1. AFCO-USA, American Floor Products Company, Inc.

3. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.
4. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
5. Endura.
6. Estrie, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.
7. Johnsonite.
8. Marley Floors , Ltd.
9. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
10. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.
11. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
12. Pirelli Rubber Flooring.
13. Roppe Corporation.
14. Stoler Industries.
15. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.
16. Altro Floors.
B. Type (Material Requirement): TV (vinyl).
C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered).
D. Style: Butt-to (cove with extended square-edge toe that fits flush to floor covering).
E. Minimum Thickness: 3.2 mm.
F. Height: 100 mm.
G. Lengths: Cut lengths 1219 mm long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
H. Outside Corners: Premolded.
I. Inside Corners: Premolded.
J. Surface: Smooth.
2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description: Cap for cove carpet, Cap for cove resilient sheet floor covering, Carpet bar for
tackless installations, Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Nosing for carpet, Nosing for
resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet
and Transition strips.
1. Altro Floors.
2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
3. Johnsonite.

4. Marley Floors, Ltd.

5. Roppe Corporation.
6. Stoler Industries.
B. Material: Vinyl.
C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and

substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion

of resilient products.
B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before

3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product

installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

SECTION 09661 - STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes resilient floor coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge
(ESD) as follows:
1. Static-dissipative solid vinyl floor tile and vinyl sheet floor covering.
2. Conductive solid vinyl floor tile and vinyl sheet floor covering.
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base,
reducer strips, and other accessories installed with static-control resilient floor
coverings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering and exposed accessory
indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of floor covering indicated and of size indicated
below:
1. Sheet: 150-by-225-mm sections of floor covering.

2. Accessories: In length equal to length of floor covering samples.
F. Seam Samples: For seamless installation technique indicated and for each flooring product,
color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 150-by-230-mm
Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer.
STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS 09661 - Page 1 of 8


testing agency, for floor coverings.
I. Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
with minimum three years documented experience and that is trained, approved, authorized,
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-

exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
C. Static-Control Properties: Provide floor coverings with static-control properties indicated as

determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independent testing
and inspecting agency.

1. Conduct conference with attendance and participation of manufacturer's

representative.
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer but not
less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C.
1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces.

2. Sheet Floor Covering: Store rolls upright.
deg C or more than 29 deg C, in spaces to receive floor coverings for at least 48 hours
before and during installation and for at least 48 hours after installation unless
manufacturer's written recommendations specify a longer time period.
1. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by

B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Floor Tile: Furnish not less than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each
color, pattern, and size of floor tile installed.
2. Sheet Floor Covering: Furnish not less than 3 linear m for each 152 linear m or
fraction thereof, in roll form for each color, pattern, and type of sheet floor covering
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products listed in other Part 2
articles.
2.2 STATIC-DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Static-Dissipative Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A
(smooth surface); tiles 305 by 305 mm; in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less
than 2.0 mm thick.
1. AB ElectroStatic, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.; Electrotile STD.

2. Forbo Industries, Inc.; Colorex SD Static Dissipative Vinyl Tile.
3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.; Static Dissipative Solid Vinyl Tile.
4. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division; Statmate.
B. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913 (unbacked) or

ASTM F 1303, Type II, Grade I, Class B (nonfoamed plastic backing); in manufacturer's
standard roll size; in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 2.0 mm thick.
1. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO; Somplan 300AS Anti-Static ESD.

2. Polyflor/Bonar Floors Inc.; Polyflor Antistatic.
C. Static-Control Properties:
1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage.
a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when
test specimens are tested surface to ground.
b. Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when
installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.
2. Static Generation: Less than 300 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.

3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested per FED-STD-
101/4046.1.
D. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 CONDUCTIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Conductive Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A (smooth
surface); tiles 300 by 300 mm; in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 2.0
mm thick.
1. AB ElectroStatic, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.; Electrotile CVT.

2. Forbo Industries, Inc.; Colorex EC Conductive Vinyl Tile.
3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.; Conductive Solid Vinyl Tile.
4. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division; Conductile.
B. Conductive Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913 (unbacked) or ASTM F 1303,
Type II, Grade I, Class B (nonfoamed plastic backing); in manufacturer's standard roll size;
in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 2.0 mm thick.
1. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO; Somplan 600 EL Conductive ESD.

2. Polyflor/Bonar Floors Inc.; Polyflor Static Conductive.
C. Static-Control Properties:
1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 500-V applied voltage.
a. Average greater than 25,000 ohms and less than 1 megohm when test
specimens and installed floor coverings are tested surface to surface (point to
point).
b. Average no less than 25,000 ohms with no single measurement less than
10,000 ohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.
2. Static Generation: Less than 100 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.
3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.03 seconds when tested per FED-STD-
101/4046.1.
D. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement or

blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Static-Control Adhesive: Adhesive product of floor covering manufacturer that produces

conductive continuity of floor covering system.
C. Grounding Strips: Provided and approved by floor covering manufacturer and that produce
conductive continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.

D. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat

welding seams.
E. Integral-Flash-Cove Base Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 25-mm radius support strip provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.
2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.
3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by
floor covering manufacturer.
F. Maintenance Tiles: Special tiles inscribed "Conductive floor. Do not wax."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions
affecting performance.
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion or static-control
characteristics of floor coverings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations and with oversight

by manufacturer's representative to ensure adhesion of floor coverings and conductive
continuity of floor covering systems.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare concrete slabs according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor
covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical
methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m in 24 hours.
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only

after substrates pass testing.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
D. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
F. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
A. Arrange for manufacturer's representative to oversee installation of static-control resilient

floor coverings.
B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend strips beyond perimeter of static-
control resilient floor covering surfaces to ground points.
C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor
coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut
covers and to cover perimeters.
G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Seamless Installation:
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare,
weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering
surfaces.
I. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 152 mm up vertical surfaces. Support floor
coverings at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.

1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.
3.4 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed tiles.
C. In each space where conductive solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance tile
identifying conductive floor tile in location approved by Engineer.
3.5 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION
A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of sheet floor covering direction.

2. Minimize number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at
least 152 mm away from parallel joints in substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
A. Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to test electrical
resistance of static-control resilient floor covering systems for compliance with
requirements.
1. Arrange for testing after installation adhesives have fully cured and floor covering
systems have stabilized to ambient conditions.
2. Arrange for testing of floor coverings before and after performing polish procedures.
B. Remove and replace static-control floor coverings where test results indicate that they do
not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by

manufacturer.
B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. If recommended in writing by static-control resilient floor tile manufacturer, apply

protective static-control floor polish formulated to maintain or enhance tile's electrical
properties to tile surfaces that are free from soil, adhesive, and surface blemishes.
a. Verify that both polish and its application method are approved by tile
manufacturer and that polish will not leave an insulating film that reduces tile's
effectiveness for static control.
2. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial
Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved.
Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.

SECTION 09671 - RESINOUS FLOORING
1.2 SUMMARY
1. General-use epoxy-resin flooring.

2. High-performance resinous flooring.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates to receive

resinous flooring.
2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Floor Toppings" for concrete toppings applied over
base concrete slabs to receive resinous flooring.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation of
sealant materials at joints in resinous flooring systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical data,
installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component
required.

representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each resinous flooring system indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each resinous flooring system required, 150 mm square,
applied by Installer for this Project to a rigid backing, in color, texture, and finish indicated.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing
the full range of variations expected.
F. Product Schedule: Use designations indicated in the Resinous Flooring Schedule and room
designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
G. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with

specified requirements.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09671 - Page 1 of 7

H. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results of the resinous flooring's reaction to chemicals and other reagents
and substantiating compliance with requirements.
I. Material Certificates: In lieu of material test reports, when permitted by Engineer, signed by
manufacturers certifying that materials furnished comply with requirements.
J. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized in

installing resinous flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer.
1. Engage an installer who employs only persons trained and approved by resinous
flooring manufacturer for installing resinous flooring systems specified.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,
hardening agents, and sealing or finish coats, through one source from a single
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint
sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
C. Field Samples: On floor area selected by Engineer, provide full-thickness resinous flooring
system samples that are at least 1200 mm square to demonstrate texture, color, thickness,
chemical resistance, cleanability, and other features of each resinous flooring system
required. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place field samples.
1. If field samples are unacceptable, make adjustments to comply with requirements and
apply additional samples until field samples are approved.
2. After field samples are approved, these surfaces will be used to evaluate resinous
flooring.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of field samples before applying resinous flooring.
4. Final approval of colors will be from field samples, not samples submitted for
verification.
1.5 WARRANTY
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to

repair or replace resinous flooring that fail in materials, finishes or workmanship within
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Failure in adhesion to substrate.

2. Failure to provide required performance.
3. Deterioration of finish beyond normal weathering.
4. Chipping.

C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with
other components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration

from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written

instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other
conditions affecting resinous flooring installation.
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate
permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours
after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. BASF Building Systems [www.chemrex.com].

2. Fosroc International Ltd [http://www.fosroc.com/GlobalHome.aspx]
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Resinous Flooring: Resinous floor surfacing system consisting of primer; body coat(s)
including resin, hardener, aggregates, and colorants, if any; and sealing or finish coat(s).
Comply with requirements indicated in the Resinous Flooring Schedule.
1. Waterproofing Membrane: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring

manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
2. Reinforcing Membrane: Manufacturer's flexible resin recommended for crack
isolation to help prevent substrate cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring.
a. Provide fiberglass scrim embedded in reinforcing membrane.
B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring

manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Sealant: as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for resinous
flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,
curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminates
incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written instructions

are more stringent.
2. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the
dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.
3. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring
D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting
through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written

instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous

flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to
comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.
a. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply waterproofing membrane, where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended

thickness.
1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates.
D. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.
E. Apply reinforcing membrane to entire substrate surface.

F. Apply self-leveling slurry body coat(s) in thickness indicated.
1. Broadcast aggregates and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide
surface texture indicated.
G. Apply troweled or screeded body coat(s) in thickness indicated. Hand or power trowel and
grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and roughness.
H. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations indicated. Round
internal and external corners. Install cove base according to manufacturer's written
instructions and details including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and
topcoating of cove base.
I. Apply sealing or finish coat(s), including grout coat, if any, of type recommended by
resinous flooring manufacturer to produce finish indicated. Apply in number of coats and at
spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.
A. Core Sampling: At the direction of Employer and at locations designated by Employer, take
1 core sample per 93 sq. m of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For each
sample that fails to comply with requirements, take 2 additional samples. Repair damage
caused by coring and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to Employer.
B. Material Sampling: Employer may at any time and any number of times during flooring
application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.
1. Engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used.

Material samples will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of
Contractor.
2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable
referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in
manufacturer's Product Data.
3. If test results show installed materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay
for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with
unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.
A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended
in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
B. Clean resinous flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Use cleaning
materials and procedures recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
3.5 RESINOUS FLOORING SCHEDULE
A. Commercial and Industrial Resinous floor system:

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. BASF; Sonoplex® Epoxy Surfacer.
2. Description: Two-component, VOC-compliant, high-build epoxy-resin coating for

heavy-traffic areas with a formula providing both cnemical and abrasion resistance.
3. Color and Pattern: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors
and patterns produced for resinous flooring complying with requirements indicated.
4. System Thickness: Not less than 1.6 mm for self-levelling slurry application method.
Thickness to be as recommended by manufacturer for type of application needed and
location.
a. System thickness varies from 1.6 to 6.4 mm when applied as slurry with
broadcast aggregates and 4.8 mm or thicker when troweled or screeded.
5. Wearing Surface: Antislip.

6. Base: 100-mm- high integral cove base.
7. Components: Provide manufacturer's standard components including the following:
a. Primer. High-Build primer, 100 % solids epoxy primer for filling irregular or
highly profiled floors.
8. Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to standard test methods
indicated:
a. Flash point: > 93, per ASTM D 93.

b. Pull-off strength, 7 days: 300, per ASTM D 4541.
c. Pot life, min: 30.
d. Abrasive resistance, mg lost, 7 days per ASTM D 4060.
1) CS-17 wheel: 65.

2) H-22 wheel: 220.
e. Coefficient of friction, 12 cycles (at standards conditions), per ASTM D 4060

(0.5 min. to qualify as slip resistant):
1) Dry: 0.79.
2) Wet (distilled water): > 0.95.
f. Tensile strength, 7 days: 51 MPa, per ASTM D 638.

g. Elongation, 7 days: 4 %, per ASTM D 638.
h. Compressive Strength, 7 days: 72 MPa per ASTM D 695.
i. Flexural strength, 7 days: 82 MPa, per ASTM D 790.
j. Hardness: 80 - 85, Shore D per ASTM D 2240.
9. Chemical Resistance: Test specimens of cured resinous flooring system are

unaffected when tested according to ASTM D 543, Procedure A, for immersion in the
following reagents for not less than 7 days:
a. Acetic acid.
b. Citric acid
c. Lactic acid
d. Hydrochloric acid

e. Nitric acid
f. Phosphoric acid
g. Sulfuric acid
h. Acetone
i. Methyl ethyl ketone
j. Methanol
k. Ethanol
l. Toluene
m. Xylene
n. Gasoline
o. Sodium hypochloride
p. Any additional required for system indicated above.
B. High-performance or Special-application Resinous Floor system:

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. BASF; Ucrete® HF.
2. Description: Three-component, solvent free, low-odor VOC-compliant, polyurethane-

concrete flooring system for areas with severe conditions including high-impact
pressure, thermal shock and chemical exposure.
3. Color and Pattern: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors
and patterns produced for resinous flooring complying with requirements indicated.
4. System Thickness: 6.4 mm, minimum.
5. Wearing Surface: Antislip.
6. Base: 100-mm- high integral cove base.
7. Components: Provide manufacturer's standard components complying with
requirements and manufacturer’s product designation above, unless otherwise
indicated.
8. Physical Properties: As indicated by system designation and components indicated
above.
9. Chemical Resistance: As indicated by system designation and components indicated
above.

SECTION 09750 - STONE WALL FACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Interior stone facing panels set on mortar pads and secured with anchors.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete surfaces to receive stone wall
facing.
2. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry,” for masonry walls to receive stone wall facing.
A. Product Data:
1. For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced
ASTM standards, and chemical analysis.
2. For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
3. Setting and jointing materials.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone paneling system, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units.
1. Show locations and details of joints both within stone paneling system and between stone
paneling system and other finish materials.
2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction.
3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern.
D. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least five samples in each set for each type of
stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics
expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone
provided will be judged.
2. For each color of joint material required. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of
pigments used.
STONE WALL FACING 09750 - Page 1 of 7

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stone wall facing assembly indicated, to comply with
A. Qualification Data: For installer and professional engineer.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency, as follows:
1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, provide test data
indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance,
according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous
three years.
2. Compatibility Test Report: From manufacturers’ test laboratories, indicating that
stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified company specializing in performing the specified work,

able to custom fabricate stone of the kind and form indicated, and employing installers having
minimum 5 years successful experience installing the stone by the methods indicated.
1. Fabricator shall employ a professional engineer to assume engineering responsibility.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional

engineer.
D. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from one
quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section, with resources to provide
materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
E. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
F. Initial Stone Selection:
1. To be selected from uncut stone at quarry by Engineer in presence of stone supplier, to

verify desired appearances. Supplier to verify sufficient quantities, inclusive of reserves
for breakage.
2. Subsequent pieces to be selected from cut blocks following Engineer’s verification at
quarry.
G. Mockups: Build 2 m by 2 m mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

1. Build mockup of each type of wall facing of not less than one structural bay.
a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of

installation.
b. Include an opening with stone returns.
c. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements in Section specifying joint
sealants.
H. Source Quality-Control Testing Service: Engage an Owner-approved qualified independent

testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below.
1. Flexural Strength Tests: ASTM C 880, performed on specimens of same thickness,

orientation of cut, and finish as installed stone. One set of test specimens is required to
be tested for every 1000 sq. m, but not fewer than 2 sets for each stone variety.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

B. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.
C. Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity and equipment loads as indicated.
1. Stone anchors shall withstand not less than two times the weight of the stone cladding in
both compression and tension.
D. Seismic Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 and authorities having
jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Shrinkage and Creep: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of building frame equal to 3
mm in 3 m.
F. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated
without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average
ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following minimum safety factors:
1. Safety Factor for Quartz-Based Stone: 6.

2. Safety Factor for Oolitic Limestone: 8.
3. Safety Factor for Dolomitic Limestone: 6.
4. Safety Factor for Marble: 5.
5. Safety Factor for Concentrated Stresses: 10.
G. Design stone anchors to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working
stresses established by the following:

1. For Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Fasteners in Concrete: One-fourth of tested capacity

when installed in concrete with compressive strength indicated.
2. For Post-Installed Fasteners in Masonry: One-sixth of tested capacity when installed in
masonry units indicated.
H. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection
tolerances of building's structural system specified in other Sections.
I. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as
staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.
J. Joint Appearance:
1. Joint Widths: 3 mm, uniform in width, slightly concave.

2. Joints pointed with pointing mortar or grouted as specified, except control joints.
K. Installation Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 6 mm in
3 m, 10 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm in 12 m or more. For external corners, corners and jambs
within 6 m of an entrance, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3
mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm in 12 m or more.
2. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of
walls and partitions, do not exceed 6 mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions
indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 6 mm.
5. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus
3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 1500 mm
of each other, do not vary more than 3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever
is less from one to the other.
6. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1.5-mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
1. Provide setting and pointing mortar materials that comply with requirements of
Credit MR 5.
2. Maximum VOC Content: Provide sealants and adhesives with VOC content in
compliance with requirements of Credit IEQ 4.1.

2.3 STONE
A. Stone Types: As selected by Engineer from the specified types. Stone to comply with the
following.
1. Quartz-Based Stone: ASTM C 616, Classification III Quartzite.

2. Marble: Comply with ASTM C 503, Classification I Calcite or II Dolomite, as
applicable.
3. Limestone: ASTM C 568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone.
a. Classification: III High-Density.
B. Colors, Color Ranges and Finishes: To match Engineer's samples. Natural variations in
appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance
characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups.
C. Thickness: To comply with performance requirements and not less than thicknesses indicated.
A. Provide packaged setting mortar or individual materials for setting mortar mixed at Project site,
complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, and the following:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
source.

3. Aggregate: ASTM C 144.
4. Water: Potable.
2.5 GROUT
A. Provide grout for joints less than 5 mm in width, and as follows:
1. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, packaged, sanded or unsanded as selected

by Engineer.
2.6 POINTING MORTAR
A. General: Provide packaged pointing mortar or individual materials for pointing mortar mixed at
Project site, complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N or Type S as
applicable to stone type, and the following:
1. Provide pointing mortar for joints wider than 5 mm.

2. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

source.

4. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Pigments shall have a record
of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortar.
5. Packaged Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Blend of portland cement and hydrated lime, of
color selected by Engineer.
6. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, except with 100 percent passing 1.18 mm sieve.
a. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

b. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other
sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
7. Water: Potable.
2.7 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304,
temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses.
Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.
B. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
ASTM F 738M for bolts and ASTM F 836M for nuts, Alloy Group 1 A1.
A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to
prevent point loading of stone on anchors, and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into
required depths of pointing materials.
B. Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants,” and that do not stain stone.
C. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, hydrophobic water-based impregnating no-sheen type suitable for natural stone.
Sealer shall protect the stone from staining during setting and grouting process and allow
evaporation of water from setting materials, as demonstrated by tests performed by qualified
testing agencies.
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, and on Shop Drawings.
1. For quartz-based stone, comply with recommendations of acceptable industry standards.

2. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

3. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimensional Stone--Design

Manual IV."
B. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural

SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following exterior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Wood.
4. Exterior portland cement (stucco).
1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in
this Section.
4. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of
paint systems on interior substrates.
5. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for special-use coatings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured
at an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
B. MPI Gloss and Sheen Standards
1. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with
the following MPI values:
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - Page 1 of 9

Units Units
Gloss Level Description @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to 85
G7 High-Gloss finish > 85
2. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on
Finish Schedule.
C. Testing Laboratory: an independent testing laboratory/ agency approved by the Engineer to

1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 200 mm square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified
in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
E. Comparable Product Requests: Coordinate with requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Product Requirements". Submit three copies of each request for consideration.
Identify product to be replaced. Include a detailed comparison of physical properties,
qualities and performance characteristics between specified and proposed comparable paint
product, including as a minimum:
1. Chemical composition and properties.

2. Opacity.
3. Cleanability.
4. Scrub resistance, wet and dry
5. Adhesion.
6. Exposure resistance.

A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Products specified refer to products manufactured in the country of origin. Manufacturers

producing in other countries under license shall submit evidence that the products
manufactured under license are identical in all respects to the original products
manufactured in the country of origin.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing paints similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance not less
than 15 years, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required quantity.
D. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting

system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with
minimum five years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
the product manufacturer to apply his product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's
warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and
E. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 9 sq. m.

b. Other Items: Engineer will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark

samples of additional colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to
Employer.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 10 and 35 deg C.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 3.8 L of each material
and color applied.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty for paint finishes: Warranty in accordance with MPI Painting Manual
requirements shall warrant that all painting work has been performed in accordance with
MPI Painting Manual requirements. Contractor and Manufacturer are jointly and severally
responsible and shall agree to repair or replace paint coatings that fail within the specified
warranty period. Contractor and Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of
material and labor. Failures include, but are not limited to:
1. Peeling or blistering of paint film.

2. Cracking of pain film.
3. Crazing of pain film
4. Efflorescence.
5. Change in colour.
6. Staining.
7. Patchiness of sheen or colour.
C. Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. [www.benjaminmoore.com] [www.benjaminmoore.ca]

2. Jotun AS [www.jotun.com/]
3. Hempel Marine Coating. [www.hempel.com/]
4. Kelly-Moore Paints. [www.kellymoore.com]
5. Pratt and Lambert [www.prattandlambert.com/]
6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. [www.ppg.com]
7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). [www.sherwin-williams.com]

8. Sigma Coatings. [www.sigmacanada.com]
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
C. Environmental/Performance Rating (EPR): MPI's Environmental Notation System (ENS)

indicates the Environmental/Performance Rating (EPR) of some approved products. EPRs
take into account not only VOCs, but also life-cycle considerations such as paint durability
and performance (duty cycle).
2.3 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.
B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in

paint system indicated.
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6.
2.6 FILLERS
A. Fillers: Fillers in powder form for mixing with water and consisting of acrylic resins and
appropriate fillers. It is to be used on exterior concrete or plastered wall surfaces as
recommended for particular purpose by the paint manufacturer. Adherence to wall surfaces
is not to be less than 2 MPa.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

following:

1. Planirex; Jardin-Toupret
2.7 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as

required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in
F. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
G. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at
any time and as often as Employer deems necessary during the period when paints are being
applied:
1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product
requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove

noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected
materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,
the two paints are incompatible.
4. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and
soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection
Agency inspector:
a. brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or
shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and
foreign materials in paint coatings.
b. evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices,
pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.
c. damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other
contributory cause.
d. damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate
protection from the weather.
e. damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray
paint, etc.).
5. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident
under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including
daylight) for interior surfaces:
a. visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
b. visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal
viewing angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
c. visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when
viewed at normal viewing angles.
d. when the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen,
texture, and hiding across full surface area.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 3.1K.

a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 4.2L.
a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer.

C. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including doors .
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer.

D. Stucco Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.


SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Galvanized metal.
4. Wood.
5. Gypsum board.
6. Plaster.
Section.
2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in
this Section.
4. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of
paint systems on exterior substrates.
5. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for special-use coatings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. MPI Gloss and Sheen Standards
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - Page 1 of 11

Gloss Description Units Units

Level @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
Finish Schedule.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application

instructions for each material proposed for use. Submit evidence that paints proposed
for use satisfy requirements for performance of paints as specified hereafter
2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and
application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalogue number and
general classification.
B. Comparable Product Requests: Coordinate with requirements specified in Division 1


2. Opacity.
3. Cleanability.
5. Adhesion.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat indicated.


E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified
in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
A. MPI Standards:
Products List."
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Products specified refer to products manufactured in the country of origin. Manufacturers

producing in other countries under license shall submit evidence that the products
manufactured under license are identical in all respects to the original products
manufactured in the country of origin.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing paints similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance not less
than 15 years, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required quantity.
D. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting

system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with
minimum five years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
the product manufacturer to apply his product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's
warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and
E. Source Limitations: Obtain fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
F. Performance Of Paints: Paints shall be fit for purpose and manufactured specifically for the
applications indicated and uses intended, taking into account the type, nature, location, and
aesthetic and utility requirements of the project
1. Opacity: paint shall cover or hide the substrate to the Engineer's satisfaction.
2. Cleanability: paint shall not absorb dirt and shall be capable of being washed or
scrubbed periodically, to the Engineer's satisfaction, without adverse effect on its
attributes or appearance.
3. Scrub resistance wet and dry: paint shall resist abrasion caused by scrubbing in
accordance with ASTM D 2486.
4. Adhesion: paint shall adhere firmly to the substrate without peeling.
5. Exposure resistance: paint shall resist yellowing and weathering caused by UV rays
and ozone.
G. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to

of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 9 sq. m.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.

Employer.

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 10 and 35 deg C.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 3
deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
and color applied.
1.9 WARRANTY
B. Special Warranty for paint finishes: Warranty in accordance with MPI Painting Manual
requirements shall warrant that all painting work has been performed in accordance with
MPI Painting Manual requirements. Contractor and Manufacturer are jointly and severally
responsible and shall repair or replace paint coatings that fail within the specified warranty
period. Contractor and Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of material

and labor. Failures include, but are not limited to:

4. Efflorescence.
6. Staining.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. [www.benjaminmoore.com] [www.benjaminmoore.ca]

2. Hempel Paints [www.hempel.com/]
3. Jotun AS [www.jotun.com/]
4. Kelly-Moore Paints. [www.kellymoore.com]
5. Pratt and Lambert [www.prattandlambert.com/]
6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. [www.ppg.com]
7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). [www.sherwin-williams.com]
8. Sigma Coatings [www.sigmacanada.com]
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
C. Environmental/Performance Rating (EPR): MPI's Environmental Notation System (ENS)

indicates the Environmental/Performance Rating (EPR) of some approved products. EPRs
take into account not only VOCs, but also life-cycle considerations such as paint durability
and performance (duty cycle).
2.3 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in

paint systems indicated.
2.5 METAL PRIMERS
A. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.

2.6 FILLERS
A. Fillers: Fillers in paste form consisting of acrylic resins and appropriate fillers. It is to be
used on interior concrete or plastered wall surfaces as recommended for particular purpose
by the paint manufacturer. Adherence to wall surfaces is not to be less than 50 N/cm2.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

following:
1. Top1, Top2; Jardin-Toupret
2.7 LATEX PAINTS
A. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).

B. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3).

2.8 ALKYD PAINTS
A. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3).

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,

required to produce paint systems indicated.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in

F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
G. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
H. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry
and sanded smooth.
I. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air
inlets and outlets.
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.

2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at
any time and as often as Employer deems necessary during the period when paints are being
applied:
1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected
materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,
the two paints are incompatible.
4. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and
soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection
Agency inspector:
a. brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or
shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and
foreign materials in paint coatings.
b. evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices,
pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.
c. damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other
contributory cause.
d. damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate
protection from the weather.
e. damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray
paint, etc.).
5. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident
under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including
daylight) for interior surfaces:
a. visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
b. visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal
viewing angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
c. visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when
viewed at normal viewing angles.
d. when the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen,
texture, and hiding across full surface area.

from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.

defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell).
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell).
C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.3M.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (eggshell).
D. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors.
1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.3B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (eggshell).
E. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.


F. Plaster Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.


SECTION 09960 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating

systems on the following substrates:
1. Exterior Substrates:
a. Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces.

b. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
c. Steel.
d. Galvanized metal.
2. Interior Substrates:
a. Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces.

b. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
c. Steel.
d. Galvanized metal.

Section.
3. Division 9 painting Sections for special-use coatings and general field painting.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - Page 1 of 10

B. MPI Gloss and Sheen Standards:
Gloss Description Units Units

Level @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
Finish Schedule.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of
finish coat indicated.

D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and
locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
E. Comparable Product Requests: Coordinate with requirements specified in Division 1


2. Opacity.
3. Cleanability.
5. Adhesion.

A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards: [http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi/]
Products List."
Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.
B. Coverage Rate: for liquid applied coatings, calculate the quantity of material needed for the
C. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
of each type of coating and substrate.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 9 sq. m.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.

Employer.

1.7 WARRANTY
B. Warranty in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements shall warrant that all
painting work has been performed in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements.
Contractor and Manufacturer are jointly and severally responsible and shall repair or
replace paint coatings that fail within the specified warranty period. Contractor and
Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of material and labor. Failures
include, but are not limited to:


4. Efflorescence.
6. Staining.
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air
temperatures are between 10 and 35 deg C.
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A. General
1. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or
cure free of blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc. Refer to 3.7, Field Quality Control /
Standard of Acceptance requirements.
2. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed
ratings designated by local
B. Equipment:
1. Painting and Decorating Equipment: to best trade standards for type of product and
application.
2. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of
paint or coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
C. Mixing and Tinting:
1. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and
pre-tinted. Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure
break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss

uniformity.
2. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with
3. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-
based paints.
4. If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in
writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Consultant.
D. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one
2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
E. Colors: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Epoxy Block Filler: MPI #116.
1. A solvent based, two component, epoxy, high solids coating for unfilled, interior and
exterior block surfaces that are to be coated with a chemically resistant finish.
Resistant to water, alkalis, chemicals and solvents. Application is predominantly by
roller or brush.
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2.
2.3 METAL PRIMERS
A. Epoxy Zinc Primer: MPI #20.
1. A solvent based, two or three component, epoxy type anticorrosive primer for cleaned
new or repaired ferrous metal surfaces exposed to moderate industrial or marine
environments. Must be top-coated to attain maximum protective qualities. Minimum
recommended surface preparation is SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast, but in some
repainting work, hand or power tool cleaning may be the maximum attainable.
Application is primarily airless and conventional spray, but brushes or rollers may be
used for small detail or touch-up work.
B. Cold-Curing Epoxy Primer: MPI #101.
1. Solvent based, two component, epoxy - polyamide type, anticorrosive primer for
exterior and interior, ferrous and galvanized metal surfaces. Specified for use over
new, cleaned metals and as a spot primer or full coat over previous epoxy coatings
that have been properly prepared with hand, power tool or abrasive blasting cleaning
methods. Application methods will include using brushes, rollers, and airless and
conventional spray.

C. Vinyl Wash Primer: MPI #80.
1. A two component, vinyl butyral/phosphoric acid wash primer used over cleaned
metal surfaces and zinc rich primers, as a tie coat for subsequent priming with
anticorrosive primers or finish coatings. Application is generally only by spray but
small areas may be brushed. Film thickness should not be less or greater than 7.5 - 10
microns as this can affect adhesion.
2.4 EPOXY COATINGS
A. Epoxy, Cold-Cured, Gloss: MPI #77.
1. A solvent based, gloss, two-component epoxy/polyamide coating specified for wall

and floor surfaces in moderate to heavy traffic commercial and moderate industrial
environments. It shall be resistant to incidental splash and spillage of dilute (5%)
sulfuric acid, (15%) hydrochloric acid, (20%) sodium hydroxide, gasoline and heavy
duty cleaners and detergents. Use as a self-priming material on smooth, low porosity
concrete, masonry and wood surfaces. This epoxy shall be suitable for application at
temperatures ranging from 15 to 40 degrees C and a maximum relative humidity of
80%. Application is generally by spray, but in areas where spray is impractical, a
brush or roller may be used.
B. High-Build Epoxy Marine Coating, Low Gloss: MPI #108.
1. A two component epoxy, high solids, low gloss coating for use on interior or exterior
concrete, masonry and primed metal surfaces. Metal surfaces may be primed with
conventional epoxy primers, epoxy zinc rich primers or inorganic zinc rich primers.
For increased durability, this product may be top coated with epoxy or polyurethane
enamels.
C. Epoxy Deck Coating: MPI #82.
1. A solvent based two-component epoxy, non-slip coating for interior and exterior
metal decks. Resistant to abrasion, solvents, fuel and oils. Application by trowel,
roller and spray, and may be touched up by brush.
2.5 POLYURETHANE COATINGS
A. Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss: MPI #72.
1. A solvent based, two-component polyurethane, pigmented coating with a gloss finish

for interior or exterior brick, block, concrete, plaster, wood and metal surfaces, where
abrasion, weathering, chemical and solvent resistance is required. Primarily applied
by spray, but can be applied by brush or roller in small areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
work.
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic

moisture meter as follows:
a. Concrete: 12 percent.
b. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.
3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces are dry.
4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers
skilled in the trades involved.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease,

required to produce coating systems indicated.
Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that
1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 27 580 to 68 950 kPa.
2. Abrasive blast clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-Off
Blast Cleaning."
E. CMU Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale.
1. Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment
or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged
items to match exposed surfaces.
of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but
provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and
color breaks.
A. Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as
Employer deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:
1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show
materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat
surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove
rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying
materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
from Project site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Engineer, and leave in an
undamaged condition.

defaced coated surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:
1. Polyurethane, Pigmented, Over Epoxy Coating System:
a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss, MPI #77.

b. First Topcoat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss, MPI #77.
c. Second Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss, MPI #72.
B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces:
1. Epoxy Slip-Resistant Deck Coating System:
a. Topcoat: Epoxy deck coating, MPI #82.
C. CMU Substrates:
1. Polyurethane, Pigmented, Over High-Build Epoxy Coating System:
a. Block Filler: Epoxy block filler, MPI #116.

b. Intermediate Coat: High-build epoxy marine coating, low gloss, MPI #108.
c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss, MPI #72.
D. Steel Substrates:
1. Polyurethane, Pigmented, Over Epoxy Coating System:
a. Prime Coat: Cold-curing epoxy primer, MPI #101.

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss, MPI #77.
c. First Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss, MPI #72.
d. Second Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss, MPI #72.
2. Polyurethane, Pigmented, Over High-Build Epoxy Coating System:
a. Prime Coat: Epoxy zinc primer, MPI#20.

b. Intermediate Coat: High-build epoxy marine coating, low gloss, MPI #108.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Polyurethane, Pigmented Coating System:
a. Prime Coat: Vinyl wash primer, MPI #80.

b. Intermediate Coat: Cold-curing epoxy primer, MPI #101.

3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:
1. Epoxy Coating System:

c. Topcoat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss, MPI #77.
B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces.

C. CMU Substrates:
a. Prime Coat: Epoxy block filler, MPI #116.

D. Steel Substrates:
1. Polyurethane, Pigmented Coating System:

b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss, MPI #72.
c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss, MPI #72.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:


SECTION 09981 – CONCRETE ROOF DECK COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes solar reflective pedestrian traffic-bearing coatings for exterior concrete roof
decks.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for cast-in-place concrete floors to receive

stone flooring.
2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including details for treating substrate joints and
cracks, terminations and penetrations.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For coatings required to have Solar Reflectance
Index requirement.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of traffic coating.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Arrange for coating manufacturer's technical personnel to

inspect coating during installation and on completion, and as follows.
CONCRETE ROOF DECK COATING 09981 - Page 1 of 3

1. Verify thickness of coatings during traffic-coating application for each 50 sq. m of

installed coating or part thereof.
B. Prepare inspection reports. List conditions detrimental to performance of coating work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coating that fails in
a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.

b. Abrasion or tearing failures.
c. Surface crazing or spalling.
d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck
substrate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base-, intermediate-, and topcoat; and accessory
materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2.2 CONCRETE DECK COATING
A. Deck Coating: Manufacturer's standard, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold

liquid-applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane system with integral wearing surface for
pedestrian traffic; according to ASTM C 957.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof deck coatings

from same manufacturer used for traffic coatings on the Project. When Project has no
requirements for traffic coatings, provide coatings from manufacturers as specified.
2. Available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC - Building Systems.

b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
c. Neogard; Division of Jones-Blair.
d. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.
e. Tremco Incorporated; an RPM company.
B. Primer: Type recommended for substrate and conditions by coating manufacturer.

C. Preparatory, Base Coats and Intermediate Coats: Aromatic urethane.
D. Topcoat: Aromatic urethane with UV inhibitors. Color as selected by Engineer from

manufacturer's full range and to comply with energy performance requirements.
E. Energy Performance: Provide traffic coating with an initial Solar Reflectance Index of not less
than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on the testing of identical products
by a qualified testing agency.
A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Sheet Flashing: Non-staining sheet material recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.
D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.

RIYADH METRO PROJECT2
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fixed, formed-metal louvers.
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between
louver frames and adjoining construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors and
frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in wood doors.
4. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply
to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to
channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade
rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be
considered to act on vertical projection of louvers.
1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind speed 130 km/hr, Exposure C as per UBC 1997.
B. Seismic Loads:
1. Seismic Zone 2A according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise shown on

structural drawings.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - Page 1 of 6

detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due

to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
D. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, Air-Leakage, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings: Provide

louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing
manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according
to AMCA 500-L.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
1. For installed louvers and vents indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type
of louver.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single
manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Louvers:

a. Airolite Company (The).

b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Greenheck.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 2B finish.
B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors,

made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling
limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs
and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.
1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing

pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances,
and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Channel, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
F. Where indicated, provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for
recessed louvers.
G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed
from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections
between frame members necessary.

2.4 FIXED, FORMED-METAL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:
1. Louver Depth: 100 mm.

2. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Stainless-steel sheet, of thickness
required to comply with structural performance requirements, but not less than 1.3
mm for frames and 1.0 mm for blades, with grain running parallel to length of blades
and frame members.
3. Mullion Type: Exposed.
4. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than 0.79 m2 for 1.2-m- wide by 1.2-m- high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 4.6 m/s.
c. Air Performance: Not more than 37-Pa static pressure drop at 4.6-m/s free-area
velocity.
5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.5 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver and where indicated.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

2. Screening Type: Bird screening, unless insect screening is indicated.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of
150 mm from each corner and at 300 mm o.c.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached.
2. Finish same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames for permanently securing screen mesh.
D. Louver Screening for Stainless-Steel Louvers:
1. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 12.7-mm- square mesh, 1.19-mm wire.

2. Insect Screening: Stainless steel, 1.4-by-1.4-mm mesh, 0.23-mm wire.
B. Finish louvers after assembly.
2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Repair sheet finish by grinding and polishing irregularities, weld spatter, scratches, and
forming marks to match surrounding finish.

B. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so
no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field
to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by

applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until
final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

SECTION 10245– EXTERIOR SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Custom, fixed perforated exterior metal screen assemblies, including
structural metal supports.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete surfaces to receive screens.

2. Division 04 Section "Exterior Stone Cladding," for stone surfaces to receive railings.
3. Division 08 Section “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls – Park-and-Ride,” for curtain wall
surfaces to receive screens.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of exterior screen panels; details of
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, and provisions
to shed moisture accumulating on and with components. Distinguish among shop-assembled
and field-assembled work.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below:
1. Perforated Screen Panels: 600 mm by actual panel width. Include trim and show method
of attachment to supporting members.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For exterior screen assembly, including engineering calculations

analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, professional engineer, and organic-coating applicator.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of metal products certifying that products furnished
D. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
EXTERIOR SCREENS 10245- PAGE 1 OF 5

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing assemblies similar to that indicated

for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, that employs installers and
supervisors who are trained to install the type of assemblies indicated, and that has sufficient
production capacity to produce required materials.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
D. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying

control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure
compliance with requirements.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of typical screen; approximately one bay wide by one story high by full
thickness, attachments, and accessories.
in writing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

exterior screens, including attachment to building construction.
B. General Performance: Exterior screen panel assemblies shall comply with performance
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
C. Structural Performance: Provide exterior screen panel assemblies capable of withstanding the
effects of the loads indicated on the Drawings, and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 330.

3. Deflection Limits: Exterior screen assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal
deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.
4. Screens Acting as Guards: Provide screens acting as guards capable of withstanding the
loads specified in the “Structural Performance” of Division 05 Section “Aluminum Tube
Railings.
D. Seismic Performance: Screen assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to applicable code.
changes.
F. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align exterior screen panel units within installed tolerance of
6 mm in 6 m, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 3
mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
G. Design components to drain off water.
2.2 MATERIALS – GENERAL
A. Minimum Recycled Content: having recycled content in compliance with Credit MR 4.
B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
2.3 ALUMINUM MATERIALS
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. Increase
alloy and temper values to suit structural performance requirements.
B. Flat Bars and Angles: ASTM B209, 5053-H32 or 6063-T5 or equivalent alloy and temper
C. Extruded Square Tubing: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6. Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet
free from alloy and mill stamps.
1. Perforated Panels: Factory-formed from single sheets; type, hole size and shape, and
pattern as selected by Engineer, and to comply with structural performance requirements.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal
sheet, of same metal as perforated metal and not less than 1.1 mm thick; welded.
Welds not visible in final construction.

welded.

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel screws or bolts, Type 316, and consistent with design of
system.
B. Fasteners for Connecting Perforated Panels to Support Framing: Provide fasteners of type,
grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for securing adjoining railing sections
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
1. Provide concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

2. Where concealed fasteners are not possible use exposed tamper-resistant flat-head
machine screws with finish matching appearance, including color, of adjacent metal.
C. Anchors for Attaching Screens to Other Construction:
1. Provide post-installed anchors to attach screen support framing to vertical substrates, and
as follows:
a. Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load

equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
b. Material: Stainless steel, Alloy Group A1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and
nuts, ASTM F 836M.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate screen assemblies to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B. Shop weld assemblies to greatest extent possible; minimize field assembly. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Conceal fasten or weld perforated panels to
adjoining supports.
2. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and
welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.

1. Panel Bow: Not more than 0.2 percent of panel width
F. Cap flush, exposed ends of members.
G. Support Framing: Aluminum tube sections, brackets and anchoring devices.
1. Brackets and Flanges: Formed metal of same type of material and finish as support
framing.
H. Exterior Screen Panels:
1. Reveals between Adjacent Panels: Profiles as indicated, 20 mm wide unless otherwise

indicated
2. Provide concealed panel stiffeners as required to comply with deflection limits. Weld
and grind panel corners smooth.
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with


ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.


SECTION 10431 - SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Internally illuminated Panel signs.

2. Signage accessories.

2. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated panel
signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,
and braille layout.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For internally illuminated signs.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color
selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify
color selected:
1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required.

2. Approved samples will be returned for installation into Project.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in

maintenance manuals.
SIGNS 10431 - Page 1 of 6

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, or the applicable electrical regulation, by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.5 WARRANTY
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to

repair or replace signs that fail in materials, finishes or workmanship within specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.
C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on

which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of remote transformers with building construction. Ensure that

transformers are accessible after completion of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
for product selection:

to, the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PANEL SIGNS
A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials,
thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed
conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm measured diagonally.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc.

2. American Graphics Inc.
3. Andco Industries Corp.
4. APCO Graphics, Inc.
5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
6. Best Manufacturing Co.
7. Grimco, Inc.
8. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
9. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc.
10. Mills Manufacturing, Inc.
11. Mohawk Sign Systems.
12. Seton Identification Products.
13. Signature Signs, Inc.
14. Supersine Company (The).
C. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and
with not less than the strength and durability properties of 5005-H15.
D. Frames: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply with the following requirements for
materials and corner conditions:
1. Material: Aluminum, extruded or cast.

2. Corner Condition: Square.
E. Illuminated-Sign Units: Provide internal illumination using concealed, internally wired,

manufacturer's standard LED lighting system including transformers, insulators, and other
components to illuminate message panels uniformly with minimum halation and without
light leaks. Make provisions for servicing and for concealed connection to electric service.
Coordinate electrical characteristics with those of power supply provided.
1. LED Lights: Provide number of tubes indicated or required by sign-panel size.

2. Ballasts: Energy-saving, high power factor, Class P, electromagnetic type, designed

for use with high-output lamps, and with automatic reset thermal protection. Ballasts
comply with ANSI C82.1, bear Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification labels,
and are rated for minus 29 deg C starting temperature.
F. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded
aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint
brackets in color matching background color of panel sign unless otherwise shown on
Engineer’s approved sample.
G. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated
on artwork supplied on electronic media by Engineer for size, style, spacing, content,
mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.
2.3 PANEL SIGN TYPES
A. Indoor LED Sign: Provide internally illuminated-sign units with the following
characteristics unless otherwise approved by Enigneer and indicated on manufacturer’s
1. Location: Platform Doors.

2. Color: RGB.
3. Pitch: 10 mm.
4. LED: 3 in 1 SMD LED.
5. Resolution: 48(H)*352(W).
6. Display Area: 480 mm (H) x 3520 mm (W).
7. Character Height: 70 mm for English or 160 mm for Arabic.
8. Characters:
a. English: Max. 58 characters per line x 6 lines per one screen.

b. Arabic: Max. 22 characters per line x 3 lines per one screen.
9. Display Contents: Text, Graphic, Animation.

10. Viewing Angle: 140 degree (H) / 140 degree (V).
11. Communication: RS232/RS485/Ethernet (to be specified at time of order).
12. Cabinet Material and Finish: Aluminum, Powder-coated.
13. Control System: Gigatron.
14. Application Software: Sigma3000.
15. Display Brightness: >1500 Nits.
16. Cabinet Dimensions: Approx. 560 mm (H) x 3600 mm (W) x 120 mm (D) single-
sided.
17. Weight: Approx. 80 kgs.
18. Power Consumption Maximum: about 700W.
19. Power Consumption Average: about 400W.
20. Drive Mode: Scanning.
21. Ambient Temperature: -20 °C  50 °C.
22. Ambient Humidity: 10%  95% RH.
23. Rate of control deviation: Whole screen ≤ 2/10000 (Dispersed).
24. Nominal work life: 50000 Hours.
25. System platform: WINDOWS XP or Higher.
26. Power Input: 220V AC.
27. Service: Rear.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners and silicone adhesive fabricated from
materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface. Where otherwise
designed, comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts
for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed
steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as
required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable,


acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
A. Powder-Coat-Applied Finish: polyester powder coating for galvanized steel and aluminum
alloy components is to be approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 2603
consisting of powder particles of resinous material and additives to improve performance.
The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on the object to produce a hard, durable
coating.
1. Minimum dry film thickness is to be 80 microns

2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of colors
3. Surface finish: Satin
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power provided under other
sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.
C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required
to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious
matter.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types
described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion and other defects in appearance.
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated
below. Where otherwise shown drawings, comply with manufacturer’s written instructions
and complying with Illuminated Led signs designed for Platform doors.
C. Bracket-Mounted Units: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware as

appropriate for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach
brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring
devices to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Employer.

SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Heavy-duty metal lockers.

2. Locker benches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type
of metal locker and bench.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Show locker trim and accessories.

2. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.
D. Samples for Verification: For metal lockers and locker benches, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers, locker benches, and accessories from single
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - Page 1 of 8

C. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers and benches are indicated to comply with
accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their
installation.
B. Deliver master and control keys to Employer by registered mail or overnight package
service.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements

before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be
supported and installed as indicated.
1.8 WARRANTY

replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish,
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

3. Warranty Period for All-Welded Metal Lockers: Lifetime from date of Substantial
Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of
amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Locks.

b. Identification plates.
c. Hooks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
ZF180 zinc-iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled.
E. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking
nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
F. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of

exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.2 HEAVY-DUTY METAL LOCKERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

1. Art Metal Products.

2. DeBourgh Mfg. Co.; Sentry Corridor/Personnel Lockers.
3. List Industries Inc.; Marquis Protector.
4. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
5. Penco Products, Inc.
B. Locker Arrangement: Single tier.
C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel
sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1. Tops, Bottoms, and Sides: 1.52-mm nominal thickness.

2. Backs: 1.35-mm nominal thickness.
3. Shelves: 1.52-mm nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at
sides and back.
E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 1.52-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped
and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical
main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.

F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 1.90-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into
channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at
horizontal edges.
1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners

for doors more than 381 mm wide; welded to inner face of doors.
2. Door Style: Unperforated panel
G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-
installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is
closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees; self-closing.
1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 51 mm
high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 1067 mm high.
H. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so
locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry and vandal resistant.
1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in
combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelocking.
a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 1219 mm and higher with three latch hooks and
doors less than 1219 mm high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 3.04-mm
nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to full-height door strikes; with resilient
silencer on each latch hook.
b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism
and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and
incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while
door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching
mechanism.
I. Built-in Combination Locks: Key-controlled, three-number dialing combination locks;

capable of at least five combination changes made automatically with a control key.
1. Bolt Operation: Manually locking deadbolt or automatically locking spring bolt.
J. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong wall
hooks.
2. Coat Rods: For each compartment of single-tier metal lockers.
K. Accessories:
1. Legs: 152 mm high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or fabricated

from 1.90-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to bottom of locker.
a. Closed Front and End Bases: Fabricated from 0.91-mm nominal-thickness

steel sheet.
2. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from, manufacturer's standard thickness, but not
less than 1.52-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet.
a. Height: 102 mm.

3. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 1.21-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet,

with a pitch of approximately 20 degrees.
a. Closures: Vertical-end type.
4. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 1.21-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet.

5. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 1.21-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet.
6. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 1.21-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet.
L. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
1. Color(s): As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 LOCKER BENCHES
A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 445 mm.
B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
1. Size: Minimum 241 mm wide by 32 mm thick except provide minimum 508-mm-

wide tops where accessible benches are indicated.
2. Laminated clear maple with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of
clear lacquer on top and sides.
C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for
attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as
follows:
1. Tubular Steel: 38-mm- diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard
pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat
finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.
D. Freestanding Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for
attaching bench top, complete with fasteners, and as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: 3-mm-thick by 76-mm-wide channel or 6-mm-thick by 76-mm-

wide bar stock, shaped into trapezoidal form; with nonskid pads at bottom. Add
finish.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of
dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and
burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete
installation.

B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and
back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame
members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C. All-Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams,
and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker
groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds
flush.
D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:
1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 381 mm above the floor.

2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than
1219 mm above the floor.
E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
F. Coat Rods: Fabricated from 25-mm- diameter steel, chrome finished.
G. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped plastic plates,

with numbers and letters at least 9 mm high.
H. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths
as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match
lockers.
I. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible

fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.
1. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.
J. Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated in width to fit one locker frame in lieu of flat locker
tops; with integral back; finished to match lockers. Provide wedge-shaped divider panels
between lockers.
K. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 64-mm face width and in lengths as long as
practical; finished to match lockers.
L. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide
slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
M. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 25-mm- wide edge dimension, and designed for
concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to
match lockers.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
N. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for
perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match
lockers.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
O. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match
lockers.

2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated
surfaces.
B. Provide one of the following finishes to comply with drawings and as approved by
Engineer:
1. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing,

apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
2. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically
apply manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply
with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum
dry film thickness.
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance

of the Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not
more than 910 mm o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup
reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.
3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.

B. All-Welded Metal Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no
exposed fasteners on face frames.
C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures
accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.
3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on
Drawings.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two
aluminum rivets.
b. Attach plates to upper shelf of each open-front metal locker, centered, with a
least two aluminum rivets.
4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.

5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on
Drawings.
6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.
7. Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed metal lockers.
8. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends
of nonrecessed metal lockers.
D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly
spaced not more than 1830 mm apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of
bench tops, and anchor bases to floor.
E. Freestanding Locker Benches: Place benches in locations indicated on Drawings.
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use
C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by
locker manufacturer.

SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Portable fire extinguishers.

2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Fire extinguishers and fire hoses.
3. Fire-protection accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.

2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet
type, trim style, and panel style.
3. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections
of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the
Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Size: 150-by-150-mm square Samples.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a
single manufacturer.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - Page 1 of 7

S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV A
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated
and provided by Employer under separate Contract are accommodated.
B. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of hoses, hose valves, and
hose racks indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Fire Extinguishers:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated.
c. Badger; Div. of Figgie Fire Protection Systems.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
f. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
g. J.L. Industries, Inc.
h. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co.
i. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
j. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
k. Moon/American, Inc.
l. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets:
a. Filtrine Manufacturing Company.

b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
c. General Accessory Manufacturing Co.
d. J.L. Industries, Inc.
e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
f. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
g. Moon/American, Inc.
h. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
i. Sffeco.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666/A 666M, Type 302 or Type 304 alloy.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other
locations indicated.
B. The letter indicates the class of fire on which an extinguisher has been found to be
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type FE-1: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 4.5-kg (10-lb) nominal
capacity, in enameled-steel container.
C. Carbon-Dioxide Type FE-2: UL-rated 10-B:C, 4.5-kg (10-lb) nominal capacity, in

manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.
D. Automatic Fire Extinguisher- Dry chemical Type AFE-1: UL-rated 10-A B:C, 6-kg
nominal capacity, in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container, ceiling mounted.
2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS; TYPE FHC-1
A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and
grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for
fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed.
a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 1.2-mm

thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 16-mm thick, fire-barrier
material.
b. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
2. Cabinet Metal: Stainless-steel sheet.

3. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following:
1. Fire hose, rack, valve, and fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1. Semi recessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit
style of trim indicated.
2. Recessed: Cabinet box recessed in walls.
D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded,
and ground smooth.

1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge
(backbend).
a. Flat Trim: 6- to 8-mm backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Stainless-steel sheet.
F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Stainless-steel sheet.
G. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows:
1. Fully glazed panel with frame.
H. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials

indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Provide minimum 13-mm thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and
rails, and hollow-metal design.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
I. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type

for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever
handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch.
Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of

sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-
enamel finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.

2. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets.
B. Break-Glass Strike: Provide manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain
and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.
C. Lettered Door Handle: Provide one-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE"
embossed into face.
D. Door Locks: Provide cylinder lock, with all cabinets keyed alike.
E. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Engineer.
1. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"

in red letter decals applied to wall surface.

2. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"

applied to door.
a. Orientation: Horizontal.
F. All the identification & lettering shall be made in Arabic and approved by the local fire
authority.
2.6 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: For other than stainless steel, color and textures to be as selected by
Engineer from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below
immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and

chromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric
corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system
indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied
topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's

standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking
to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
D. Polyester Powder Coating: Approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 603 or BS
6496 and BS 6497, consisting of powder particles of resinous material and additives to

improve performance. The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on to produce a hard,

durable coating.
1. Minimum dry film thickness: 80 microns.

3. Surface finish: satin.
E. Stainless Steel finish is preferred. Steel finish may be accepted pending sample approval
and finishing quality.
A. General: Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. Grind and
polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured polished finish indicated, free
of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. Polished and Buffed Finish: Oil-ground, 180-grit finish followed by buffing.
C. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.
D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations
of piping connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and
semirecessed cabinets are to be installed.
C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb.
3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-RATED HOSE OR VALVE CABINETS
A. Install cabinet with not more than 1.5-mm tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD.
Center pipe within knockout.
B. Seal through-penetrations with firestopping sealant specified in Division 7 Section

"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 10710 - EXTERIOR SHADING ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior shading assemblies comprising glass panels attached to exposed metal

support framing secured to building.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete substrates of building

façade to anchors for shading assemblies.
A. Product Data. For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples:
1. Samples of each different type of glass including metal edge profiles.

2. Samples of support framing with attached fittings, brackets, finished welded
connections, anchoring devices, and including finishes.
C. LEED Submittals:
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

a. Include details of support framing, connections, fastenings, anchorages,
provisions for movement, provisions for removal and reinstallation of glass
panels, field and shop assembled components, fabrication and erection
tolerances, and other pertinent data.
b. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of
each weld. Indicate grinding, finish, and profile of welds.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For exterior shading assemblies, indicating compliance with
performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, professional engineer and organic-coating

applicator.
EXTERIOR SHADING ASSEMBLIES 10710 - Page 1 of 6

C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that

products furnished comply with the specified requirements.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing assemblies similar to that

indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, that employs
installers and supervisors who are trained to install the type of assemblies indicated, and that
has sufficient production capacity to produce required materials.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
C. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying

control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure
compliance with requirements.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
E. Mockup: Construct sections of shading assemblies at shop as directed by Engineer. Include

support framing, glass profiles, anchoring and fastening details, to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

shading assemblies, including attachment to building construction.
B. General Performance: Exterior shading assemblies shall comply with performance

requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
C. Structural Performance: Provide shading assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of

the following loads without failure of materials or permanent deformation, based on testing
representative assemblies of those indicated for Project that pass accepted industry test
standards.
Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Deflection Limits: Shading assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no
greater than 1/240 of the span.

D. Seismic Performance: Shading assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to applicable code.
changes.
.1 Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
F. Vibration and Noise: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal
movement, thermal movement or live load movements transmitted to or from other building
elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system, not
permitted.
G. Dimensional Tolerances: Assembly including anchorage, to accommodate dimensional

tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
H. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align shading units within installed tolerance of 6 mm in
6 m, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 3 mm
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
I. Design components to drain off water.
J. Design shading system with easily-accessible removable sections to permit their

replacement and maintenance.
K. Structural-Sealant Joints:
1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing.
3. Glass-to-metal joints designed to accommodate thermal and mechanical movements

of assembly, prevent glass-to-metal contact, and maintain required clearances.
L. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by shading
assembly without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction
1.5 MATERIALS – GENERAL
A. Minimum Recycled Content: having recycled content in compliance with Credit MR 4.
B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,

2.2 SHADING ASSEMBLIES
C. General:
1. Support Framing Assemblies: Aluminum, custom formed tube sections, welded

construction; with cast articulated fittings to provide adjustment of assemblies to
attain installation tolerances. Configurations, profiles and locations as indicated.
a. Provide welded anchor plates at building structure of minimal area with
approved anchor bolt head design.
b. Finish: Shop painted.
Glass Panel Mounting:
c. Glass panels supported by and set on support framing fittings using structural
silicone sealant glass-to-metal method of attachment
d. Panels supported by articulated brackets and patch fittings seamlessly attached
to support framing. Fittings designed for specified attachment method.
2.3 ALUMINUM MATERIALS
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form
required. Increase alloy and temper values to suit structural performance requirements.
B. Angles: ASTM B209, 5053-H32 or 6063-T5 or equivalent alloy and temper.
C. Extruded Square Tubing: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
D. Plate: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6. Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet free from
alloy and mill stamps.
E. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.
2.4 GLASS
A. Glass Panels: Monolithic tempered-laminated glass with colored PVB interlayer, as

specified in Division 08 Section Glazing. Interlayer color as selected by Engineer.
1. Edges: Polished and ground.
welded.


B. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for
use in shading assemblies indicated.
A. Fasteners for Connecting Support Framing Components: Provide fasteners of type, grade,
and class required to produce connections suitable for securing adjoining framing sections
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
1. Provide concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

2. Where concealed fasteners are not possible use exposed tamper-resistant flat-head
machine screws with finish matching appearance, including color, of adjacent metal.
B. Anchors for Attaching Support Framing to Other Construction:
1. Provide post-installed anchors to attach support framing to substrates, and as follows:
a. Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a

load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4
times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
b. Material: Stainless steel, Alloy Group A1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M,
and nuts, ASTM F 836M.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate shading assemblies to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B. Shop weld assemblies to greatest extent possible; minimize field assembly. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
2. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing
and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
exposed surfaces.
F. Cap flush, exposed ends of members.

G. Support Framing: Aluminum tube sections, brackets and anchoring devices.
1. Brackets and Flanges: Formed metal of same type of material and finish as support
framing.
A. Shop Paint:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

SECTION 10750 - TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes telephone booths, wall-mounted telephone enclosures, wall-mounted

telephone housings, pedestal-mounted telephone enclosures and telephone kiosks.
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
wall-mounted telephone specialties.
2. Division 16 Sections for telephones, electrical and telephone connections for
telephone enclosures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of telephone specialty required. Include construction details,
dimensions of components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of telephone specialty required showing fully dimensioned
plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show anchors, grounds, and reinforcement for items
attached to permanent construction. Include information not fully detailed in Product Data.
1. Include Setting Drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and
other anchorages.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)" and ICC A117.1.
B. Source Limitations for Telephone Specialties: Provide each type of telephone specialty as a
complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting accessories,
fittings, and fastenings.
TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES 10750 - Page 1 of 7

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

telephone specialties and are based on specific types and models. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
A. Do not deliver interior telephone-enclosure units until construction is ready for their
installation.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating telephone
specialties without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Acoustics Development Corporation.

2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Benner-Nawman, Inc.
4. KING Products Incorporated.
5. Phillips & BrooksGladwin, Inc.
6. RedyRef--Pressed & Welded, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or Type 304.
B. Cold-Rolled, Carbon-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M.
C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B, Z275 coating designation.
D. Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

E. Acoustical Panels: Metal panels with not less than 10 000 perforations/sq. m and with
nonflaking or encased glass-fiber sound-absorption blankets or boards. Where double-wall
panels are indicated, provide perforated metal sheet at interior of enclosures and
unperforated metal sheet at exterior.
F. Exposed Wood: Manufacturer's standard laminated walnut veneer on particleboard 13 mm

thick.
G. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type I
(transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear).
H. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast) or Category A-2 (continuous cast),
Finish 1 (smooth or polished), clear.
2.3 TELEPHONE BOOTHS
A. General: Provide in-line groupings of multiple, fully enclosed telephone booths of sizes and
configurations indicated.
1. Provide full-length, stainless-steel acoustical panels where telephone booths abut

building walls.
2. Provide minimum 910-mm- clear entrance openings for telephone booths designated
as accessible to people with disabilities.
B. Telephone Booth Construction: 0.8-mm stainless-steel, double-wall interlocking

construction with side and rear wall panel inserts as indicated and stainless-steel moldings.
1. Glazing: Glaze wall panels and doors with 6.0-mm-thick tempered glass. Glass shall
be replaceable from inside telephone booth without major disassembly.
2. Walls: as detailed, if not shown walls to comply with Shop drawings for dimensions
and locations of glazed panels.
a. Where two telephone booths abut, provide joining closure moldings with single
wall between adjacent telephone booths.
3. Backboard: Full-length, stainless-steel assembly with threaded inserts located to

receive surface-mounted telephone. Include enclosed, separate cable channels for
telephone and electrical wiring.
a. Service Entry: Through telephone booth bases.
4. Doors: Equal leaf bifold, inward-folding, full-length glazed doors; 0.8-mm stainless-
steel, double-wall interlocking construction.
a. Provide integral hinges, stainless-steel overhead tracks, and roller-bearing door

guides. Provide naval brass hinge pins, brackets, and roller guides and nylon
rollers.
b. Provide automatic adjustable closers and spring stops.
5. Base and Floor: Integral stainless-steel base, open on three sides, with vinyl floor on
3.0-mm steel sheet for interior telephone booths.
6. Base and Floor: Integral stainless-steel base, open on 3 sides, and 3.18-mm nominal
thickness, stainless-steel floor plate for exterior telephone booths.

7. Roof and Ceiling Assembly: Combination roof and ceiling assembly consisting of
one-piece flat weatherproof roof and hinged, translucent-plastic ceiling panel.
a. Provide a circular, 40-W fluorescent lamp above ceilings activated by

photocell light control.
b. Provide ceiling exhaust fan activated by door switch.
8. Shelf: Stainless-steel, corner writing shelf.

9. Directory Storage: Shelf-mounted, swing-out directory holder with directory binder
unless otherwise selected and approved by Engineer.
10. Seat: Stainless-steel seat cantilevered from telephone booth structure.
C. Fascia: Stainless-steel fascia panel for full group of telephone booths, covering telephone
booth lintels.
D. Signs: One illuminated sign face for each exposed direction of each telephone booth or
group of telephone booths.
1. Mount signs in fascia.
E. Trim: Stainless-steel telephone booth separator trim pieces, end trim, and ceiling trim to
integrate telephone booth groups into surrounding wall surfaces.
2.4 WALL-MOUNTED, SHELF-TYPE TELEPHONE ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide enclosures of sizes and configurations indicated.
1. Provide groupings of enclosures with common divider walls between adjacent units.
B. Enclosure Body: Circular, double wall, stainless steel, 356 mm deep and 711 mm in
diameter, forming shelf, sides, and top; with flat, stainless-steel acoustical-panel back.
1. Side Walls: One of the following to comply with design and detailed shop drawings:
a. Frameless, 12.0-mm-thick acrylic sheet.

b. Wood.
2. Telephone Mounting: Stainless-steel mounting plate with threaded inserts located to

receive surface-mounted telephone. Mounting plate is concealed when telephone is
installed.
3. Shelf: Full-width, stainless-steel writing shelf.
4. Directory Storage: Full-width directory shelf unless otherwise selected and approved
by Engineer.
5. Header Panel: Integral stainless-steel header panel incorporating telephone sign with
concealed fluorescent lighting and acrylic diffusers.
2.5 WALL-MOUNTED, PANEL-TYPE TELEPHONE HOUSINGS
A. General: Provide fully recessed telephone housings of sizes and configurations indicated.
B. Construction: Flush-welded stainless steel with heavy-gage steel mounting frame.

1. Telephone Mounting: Provide for flush mounting Bell Type 2, panel-style, coin-
operated telephone, unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
2.6 PEDESTAL-MOUNTED TELEPHONE ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide pedestal-mounted telephone enclosures of sizes and configurations

indicated.
B. Pedestals: Heavy-gage steel pedestals for floor mounting with concealed mounting bolts.
Include stainless-steel covers for exposed pedestal components.
1. Service Entry: Through pedestal base.
C. Enclosure Body: Semicircular, stainless-steel enclosure with stainless-steel acoustical-panel

liner shaped to enclosure body; 13-mm- thick acoustic insulation; and internal
reinforcement. Edge trim and surfaces that are susceptible to wear are replaceable.
1. Illumination: Integral, overhead, flush, fluorescent lighting unit within enclosure.
2. Side Walls: Clear, 12.0-mm-thick acrylic sheet.

operated telephone.
2.7 TELEPHONE KIOSKS
A. General: Provide freestanding, floor-mounted telephone kiosks of sizes and configurations

indicated.
B. Mounting Frames: Provide heavy-gage steel mounting frames for floor mounting with
concealed mounting bolts. Include stainless-steel covering for anchor bolts.
1. Service Entry: Through telephone kiosk base.
C. Telephone Kiosk Body: Circular, stainless-steel enclosure with stainless-steel acoustical-

panel liners shaped to enclosure body.
1. Illumination: Integral, flush, fluorescent lighting units to illuminate telephones and

writing shelves.
operated telephone.
4. Directory Storage: Undershelf directory shelf with directory binder and chain unless
otherwise selected and approved by Engineer.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for installing units where set
in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery of inserts and anchoring devices with
other work to avoid delaying installation.

B. Fasteners: Provide suitable screws, bolts, and other fastening devices of same material as
items being fastened, except provide stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications
exposed to weather. Use tamperproof fasteners where exposed to view.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to be square, rigid, and free of dents or distortion, with edges flat.
1. Weld metal members together to form rigid, one-piece structures. Grind, fill, and
dress welds to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which welds are not visible
after final finishing is completed.
2. Ease exposed metal edges unless hemmed and ground smooth.
B. Assemble units in shop to greatest extent practical, to minimize field assembly.

Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
2.10 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM AMP 503 for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
B. Stainless-Steel Finishes: Finish designations comply with the system established by the
American Iron and Steel Institute for designating finishes for stainless-steel sheet, as defined
in NAAMM AMP 503.
1. Bright, Directional Satin: No. 4 finish.
C. Steel Finishes:
1. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing,

apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install telephone specialties at locations shown and according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Provide clips, grounds, backing materials, brackets, anchors, trim, and
accessories for a complete installation.
A. Adjust telephone-enclosure doors to operate easily without binding.

B. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Use only materials and
procedures recommended by manufacturer. Replace units that cannot be restored to their
factory-finished appearance.

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Public-use shower room accessories.
3. Warm-air dryers.
1. Division 8 Section "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other
work and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish
requirements.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of
each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide
products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - Page 1 of 6

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,
operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.8-mm minimum nominal thickness, unless
B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.9-
mm minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with Z180 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-
and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm
thick.
I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:
1. Description: Single-roll dispenser, Double-roll dispenser or Double-roll dispenser

with shelf.
2. Mounting: Recessed or Surface mounted.
3. Operation: Spindleless with tension-spring controlled delivery and self-locking
device extending through core that prevents core removal until roll is empty unless
4. Capacity: Designed for 114- or 127-mm- diameter tissue rolls.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
C. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser:

2. Minimum Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold towels unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lockset: Tumbler type.
5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.
D. Waste Receptacle:
1. Mounting: Surface mounted, Wall mounted for corner installation or Freestanding.

3. Liner: Reusable vinyl liner.
4. Lockset: Tumbler type for waste-receptacle.
E. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:
1. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with

removable waste receptacle.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted or Recessed.
a. Designed for nominal 150-mm wall depth.
3. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels.

4. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 45.4 L.
6. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner.
7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle.
F. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.

2. Mounting: Deck mounted on vanity, Deck mounted on lavatory, Horizontally

oriented, recessed, Horizontally oriented, surface mounted or Vertically oriented,
surface mounted.
3. Lockset: Tumbler type.
4. Refill Indicator: Window type.
G. Grab Bar:
1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 1.3 mm thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip
area.
3. Outside Diameter: 38 mm.

4. Configuration and Length: Straight, 914 mm long.
H. Fold-Down Purse Shelf:
1. Description: Hinged unit with spring-loaded shelf that automatically returns to

vertical position.
2. Nominal Size: 381 mm long by 140 mm wide.
I. Mirror Unit:
1. Frame: Stainless-steel channel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Integral Shelf: 127 mm deep.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method
indicated below.
a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove.
4. Size: As indicated on Drawings, if not shown as directed by Engineer.
2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES

following:


B. Shower Curtain Rod:
1. Description: 32-mm OD; fabricated from nominal 1.3-mm- thick stainless steel.
2. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners.
3. Finish: No. 4 (satin).
C. Shower Curtain:
1. Size: Minimum 305 mm wider than opening by 1828 mm high.

2. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.15-mm- thick, opaque, matte unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
4. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 152 mm o.c. through top hem.
5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks
with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook
per curtain grommet.
D. Folding Shower Seat:
1. Configuration: Stainless-steel seat designed to fold into recessed-mounted, stainless-

steel wall box unless otherwise indicated.
2. Seat: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin); 1.3-mm minimum nominal thickness; with
single-piece, pan-type construction and edge seams welded and ground smooth.
3. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Dimensions: As shown on drawings.
E. Soap Dish:
1. Description: With washcloth bar unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS

following:

2. American Dryer, Inc.
6. Excel Dryer Corporation.
8. World Dryer Corporation.
B. Warm-Air Dryer:
1. Mounting: Surface mounted unless otherwise indicated.

2. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.
a. Operation Time: 30 to 40 seconds.

3. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

4. Electrical Requirements: 208-240 V, 9-10 A, 1900-2300 W.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 1112 N, when tested according
to method in ASTM F 446.
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective

items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

SECTION 12481 - ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Recessed floor grilles and frames.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for cast-in-place concrete floors to receive

stone flooring.

and profiles, and finishes for entrance floor grilles and foot grilles.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Items penetrating floor grilles and frames.

2. Divisions between grille sections.
3. Perimeter floor moldings.
C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Floor Grille: Assembled section of floor grille.

2. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide floor grilles manufactured
by Bolar, www.bolar.com, or comparable products from other acceptable manufacturer.
1. Type 1: Model BSA-1-3 HL.

2. Type 2: Model CO34.
2.2 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES, GENERAL
A. Design floor grilles to withstand the minimum following loads without deformation:
ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 12481 - Page 1 of 3

1. Uniform Floor Load: 14.36 kN/sq. m.

2. Wheel Load: 160 kg, 1000 passes without damage, solid 50 mm wide polyurethane
wheel.
B. Maximum Deflection: 1/180th of span.
C. Grille Direction: Bars perpendicular to direction of user travel, to greatest extent possible.
D. Installed Grille: Grille wearing surface flush with adjacent floor finish; bars and frames square,
rigid with tight joints at corners; assembly free of deformities and rattle.
1. Maximum Gap Formed at Recessed Frame from Grille Size: 6 mm.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1, and applicable
code.
F. Sustainable Design:
1. Provide stainless steel materials with recycled content complying with Credit MR 4.
G. Grille Locations: Type 1, general application; Type 2, for tactile warning locations, and where
indicated.
2.3 FLOOR GRILLES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's stainless steel floor-grille assemblies of models indicated,

modified to comply with Heavy Load product line, consisting of treads joined together by cross
members, and with support legs and other components needed to produce a complete
installation. Include locking device for each panel and lifting hooks.
B. Floor Grilles:
1. Tread Rails, Floor Grille Type 1: 4.7 mm wide by 50 mm deep ‘T’ profile, 3 mm thickness.
2. Tread Rails, Floor Grille Type 2: 9.5 mm wide by 25 mm deep ‘T’ profile, 3 mm thickness.
3. Maximum Span: 610 mm.
4. Maximum Individual Panel Size: 1200 by 1200 mm.
5. Finish: No. 4 finish.
6. Frames: Manufacturer's standard frames, including perimeter frames, of size and style
for grille type, for permanent recessed installation in floor, complete with installation
anchorages and accessories; same material and finish as grilles. Provide concealed
frameless supports except at perimeter frame.
C. Frames: Manufacturer's standard frames, including perimeter frames, of size and style for grille
type, for permanent recessed installation in floor, complete with installation anchorages and
accessories; same material and finish as grilles. Provide concealed frameless supports except at
perimeter frame.
D. Support System: Manufacturer's special deep-pit stainless steel frame and support system with
intermediate support beams, sized and spaced as recommended by manufacturer for indicated
spans and equipped with vinyl support cushions.

E. Substrate Leveling Compound: Approved latex cement repair type.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
B. Stainless-Steel Angles: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 479/A 479M, corrosion resistant, Type 304.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate floor grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles
are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
B. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum
available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally
spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.

SECTION 13651 - PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Architectural requirements for photovoltaic (solar electric modules)

collectors.
1. Division 08 Section “Sloped-Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies”, for assemblies
supporting photovoltaic collectors.
2. Division 16 Section "Photovoltaic System," for electrical design requirements, wiring,
conduit and equipment for photovoltaic system.
1.2 BID SUBMITTALS

data for each principal product, material and finish.
3. Method Statement: For fabrication, handling, installation and protection.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include proposed level of scratch resistance to panels
and test method used.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Roof layout and orientation of modules, and required penetrations on supporting

substrates. Include locations of shadowing structures.
2. Roof surfaces and slopes.
3. Location of associated equipment and wiring.
4. Penetration plan.
5. Mounting details including support locations and spacings.
6. Electrical connection details, including locations of associated equipment and wiring in
adjoining construction.
PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS 13651 - Page 1 of 5

C. Samples: One full size sample of each type and size of panel including associated supports and
visible electrical materials forming part of module.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For photovoltaic collector assemblies indicated, to comply with

1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified
requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For photovoltaic panel assemblies including life cycle maintenance
procedures, to include in maintenance manuals.
E. Sample Warranties: For each type of warranty.
A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following.

1. Manufacture and Installation: ASTM E 892.
2. Certified to IEC 61215 - Design qualification and type.
3. Certified to IEC 61730-1 and IEC 61730-2.
1. Certified to IEC 904 and 1036 - Performance test.
2. UL 790, Class C.
3. Listed to ANSI/UL 1703.
B. Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Mockup: Construct mockup to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
1. Coordinate with and include mock-up requirements of related sections.
2. Construct to sizes and at locations as directed by Engineer.
in writing.
A. Manufacturer Field Services: Arrange for manufacturer's technical representative to provide

daily visits to site during installation to:
1. Advise product use recommendations.
2. Review delivery and storage.

3. Review preparation and installation procedures.

4. Inspect installed work at 25, 60 and 100 percent complete.
5. Prepare and submit reports.
1.7 WARRANTY
photovoltaic collector assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
c. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty document including:

1. Freedom from Defects in Materials and Workmanship: 5 years.
2. 93 Percent of Minimum Power Output: 12 years.
4. Warranty Commencement: From date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

testing of photovoltaic collector assemblies representing those indicated for this Project,
construction.
1. Assemblies shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, deflection from
uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
a. Glass breakage.
c. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
d. Water leakage.
e. Sealant failure.
C. Structural Loads, Seismic Performance, Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance, and Thermal

Movements: As specified in “Performance Requirements” article in Division 08 Section
“Sloped-Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies.”
D. Modules:
1. Modules shall not have negative power tolerance.
2. Cell Efficiency: Minimum 18 percent.

3. Relative Humidity Capability: 100 percent condensing.

4. Soiling Losses: 10 percent.
5. Design modules capable of being replaced without disrupting operation of remainder of
system.
6. Scratch Resistance: Value to suit application indicated, and withstand periodic
maintenance.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS

following, or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
1. Kyocera Solar, Inc.
2. Schott Solar, Inc.
3. REC Solar.
4. Sunpower Corp.
5. BP Solar International, Inc.
2.3 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTOR MODULES
A. Material Composition and Description: Monocrystalline photovoltaic modules incorporating

anti-reflective coated (ARC) glass with a stainless steel Type 316 fully-welded perimeter frame,
bypass diodes and connectors, Cells interconnected and sandwiched between glass.
1. Glass: Laminated or laminated-tempered glass as required to comply with performance
requirements.
2. Method of Attaching Cells to Glass: EVA polymer.
3. Cell Description:
a. Color: Black.
b. Shape: Square.
c. Equip cells with dual interconnect ribbons soldered using a continuous flow
process fully spanning both top and bottom of each cell to ensure cell
interconnectivity, including when glass is shattered.
4. Provide weather tight seal between glass and perimeter frame.
B. Compatibility: Components and materials to be compatible with specified accessories and

adjacent materials.
C. Dimensions and Profiles: As indicated.
D. Total Active Area: Greatest extent possible.
E. Factory test each module prior to shipping.
F. Module Electrical Requirements: As specified in Division 16 Section "Photovoltaic System."

1. Bypass Diode Protection: Provide built-in bypass diode protection in weatherproof
junction box to preserve array output power, including during periods of local shading.
Provide minimum of 1 bypass diode for every 18 cells.
2. Method of Module Array Connection: In parallel.
3. Connections between Modules and PV Array Circuit Combiner Box: Flexible conduit
with liquid–tight fittings, UL-listed wire rated for 90 degree C wet conditions.
4. Electrical Connection: As recommended by the manufacturer.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Collector Mounting Supports: Stainless steel castings with stainless steel anchors designed for
anchoring to sloped glazed and metal roof panel assemblies specified in Division 08 Section
“Sloped Glazed And Metal Roof Panel Assemblies.”

SECTION 13652 - PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS – PARK AND RIDE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Architectural requirements for photovoltaic (solar electric modules) collectors
for roof of Parking Structure of Park and Ride.
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”, for roof substrates to receive photovoltaic

collector assemblies.
2. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications.”
3. Division 08 Section “Sloped-Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies”, for structural
performance requirements for photovoltaic collectors.
4. Division 16 Section "Photovoltaic System," for electrical design requirements, wiring,
conduit and equipment for photovoltaic system.
1.2 BID SUBMITTALS

data for each principal product, material and finish.
2. Method Statement: For fabrication, handling, installation and protection.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include proposed level of scratch resistance to panels
and test method used.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Roof layout and orientation of modules, and required penetrations on supporting

substrates. Include locations of shadowing structures.
2. Roof surfaces and slopes.
3. Location of associated equipment and wiring.
4. Penetration plan.
5. Mounting details including support locations and spacings.
PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS – PARK AND RIDE 13652 - Page 1 of 5

6. Electrical connection details, including locations of associated equipment and wiring in

adjoining construction.
C. Samples: One full size sample of each type and size of panel including associated supports and
visible electrical materials forming part of module.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For photovoltaic collector assemblies indicated, to comply with

1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, and professional engineer.
B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For photovoltaic panel assemblies including life cycle maintenance
procedures, to include in maintenance manuals.
E. Sample Warranties: For each type of warranty.
A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following.
1. Manufacture and Installation: ASTM E 892.

2. Certified to IEC 61215 - Design qualification and type.
3. Certified to IEC 61730-1 and IEC 61730-2.
4. Certified to IEC 904 and 1036 - Performance test.
5. UL 790, Class C.
6. Listed to ANSI/UL 1703.
B. Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Mockup: Construct mockup to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
1. Coordinate with and include mock-up requirements of related sections.

2. Construct to sizes and at locations as directed by Engineer.
in writing.

A. Manufacturer Field Services: Arrange for manufacturer's technical representative to provide

daily visits to site during installation to:
1. Advise product use recommendations.

2. Review delivery and storage.
3. Review preparation and installation procedures.
4. Inspect installed work at 25, 60 and 100 percent complete.
5. Prepare and submit reports.
1.7 WARRANTY
photovoltaic collector assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.

c. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty document including:
1. Freedom from Defects in Materials and Workmanship: 5 years.

4. Warranty Commencement: From date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

collector support assemblies, fastenings and anchors.
testing of photovoltaic collector assemblies representing those indicated for this Project,
construction.
1. Assemblies shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, deflection from

uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
a. Glass breakage.


c. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
d. Water leakage.
e. Sealant failure.
C. Structural Loads, Seismic Performance, Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance, and Thermal

Movements: As specified in “Performance Requirements” article in Division 08 Section
“Sloped-Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies.”
D. Modules:
1. Modules shall not have negative power tolerance.

2. Cell Efficiency: Minimum 18 percent.
3. Relative Humidity Capability: 100 percent condensing.
4. Soiling Losses: 10 percent.
5. Design modules capable of being replaced without disrupting operation of remainder of
system.
6. Scratch Resistance: Value to suit application indicated, and withstand periodic
maintenance.
E. Installed Collectors: Configured and positioned to achieve optimum output.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS

following, or comparable products by another acceptable manufacturer.
1. Kyocera Solar, Inc.

2. Schott Solar, Inc.
3. REC Solar.
4. Sunpower Corp.
5. BP Solar International, Inc.
2.3 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTOR MODULES
A. Material Composition and Description: Monocrystalline photovoltaic modules incorporating

anti-reflective coated (ARC) glass with a stainless steel Type 316 fully-welded perimeter frame,
bypass diodes and connectors, Cells interconnected and sandwiched between glass.
1. Glass: Laminated or laminated-tempered glass as required to comply with performance

requirements.
2. Method of Attaching Cells to Glass: EVA polymer.
3. Cell Description:
a. Color: Black.
b. Shape: Square.
c. Equip cells with dual interconnect ribbons soldered using a continuous flow
process fully spanning both top and bottom of each cell to ensure cell
interconnectivity, including when glass is shattered.

4. Provide weathertight seal between glass and perimeter frame.
B. Compatibility: Components and materials to be compatible with specified accessories and

adjacent materials.
C. Dimensions and Profiles: As indicated.
D. Total Active Area: Greatest extent possible.
E. Factory test each module prior to shipping.
F. Module Electrical Requirements: As specified in Division 16 Section "Photovoltaic System."
1. Bypass Diode Protection: Provide built-in bypass diode protection in weatherproof

junction box to preserve array output power, including during periods of local shading.
Provide minimum of 1 bypass diode for every 18 cells.
2. Method of Module Array Connection: In parallel.
3. Connections between Modules and PV Array Circuit Combiner Box: Flexible conduit
with liquid–tight fittings, UL-listed wire rated for 90 degree C wet conditions.
4. Electrical Connection: As recommended by the manufacturer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Collector Mounting Supports: Aluminum extrusions and plate designed and sized to comply
with performance requirements, and as specified in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications.”
B. Provide stainless steel fasteners, bolts and nuts, and post-installer anchors, exterior grade, as
specified in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications.”

SECTION 13845 - LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes manual, low-voltage lighting controls, as described below.
B. This Section includes manual and programmable, low-voltage lighting controls.
1. Modular contactors mounted in the lighting panelboards to control the public area
lighting. Mechanically latch contactor for normal circuits.
2. Control cables connected the lighting panelboards to BMS system.
C. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as software protocol, relays,
transducers, etc., as detailed in Division 15 Sections and BMS schedules, and shown on
Drawings.
D. Related Sections include the following:

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light
switches.
3. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for time switches, photoelectric
relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
4. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming system
equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for
lighting controls.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific
application on Project. Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and
clearance and access requirements.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail specific systems tailored to this Project and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Operational Documentation: For software and firmware.
LIGHTING CONTROLS 13845 - Page 1 of 6

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For lighting control equipment and system components to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include software-operating manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

programmable lighting system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing programmable lighting

controls similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain low-voltage lighting control system components from a single
manufacturer.
1. Provide total responsibility for compatibility of system components, including those

provided in this Section and in Division 16 Sections "Lighting Control Devices" and
"Dimming Controls."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of equipment and system components to form an integrated system of

compatible components. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance
of specified functions.
B. Coordinate lighting controls specified in this Section with work specified in other Sections,
including the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation."

2. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices."
3. Division 16 Section "Panelboards."
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra materials to Employer.
1. Modular Single-Pole Relays: 1 for every 10 installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following or approved equal:
1. Crestron Electronics, Inc.

2. Cutler-Hammer Products; Eaton Corporation.
3. GE Lighting Controls.
4. Honeywell, Inc.; Home and Building Controls.
5. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group Div.
6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
7. Square D Co.; Power Management Organization.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Expansion Capability of System: Adequate to increase the number of control functions in

the future by 25 percent more than those indicated. This applies to equipment ratings,
housing volumes, spare relays, terminals, and control cable conductor quantities.
B. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all line voltage solid-state equipment.
2.3 FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Manual switch operation energizes and de-energizes one or more groups of lighting fixtures
or other loads by closing and opening one or more relays in the supply circuits to the fixture
groups. Switches are hard-wired to the relays they operate.
B. A control signal from a manual switch, an internal timing and control unit, or an external
sensor or other control signal source is routed to the system control module. This module
processes signal according to its programming and routes an "open" or "close" command to
one or more relays in the power-supply circuits to groups of lighting fixtures or other loads.
2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Mechanically Held, Modular one/three Pole Contactor: momentary-pulsed type.
1. Voltage rating 250 VAC for 1, 400 VAC for 3P.

2. Pilot Contacts: Single pole.
3. Rated Capacity (Mounted in Lighting panelboard Panel): 20 A for tungsten
filaments; and 20 A for ballasts.
4. Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity.
5. Mounting: Knockout in modular relay panel, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Electrically Held, Modular one/three Pole Contactor: As follows:
1. Rated Capacity (Mounted in Lighting Panelboard): 20 A for all types of fluorescent

and HID ballasts; and 16 A for tungsten filaments.
2. Operating Coil: operating at contactor rated voltage.
3. Mounting: Modular contactor placed in lighting panelboard by quick-release spring
pins, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Pilot Device: Provides positive relay position indication.
C. Switches Modular momentary push-button match those specified in Division 16 section

“Wiring Devices” to materials, finish and color engraved or permanently silk-screened
legend, written on the lighting area controlled by each switch.
2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING
A. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Wire: Shielded, twisted-pair cable as specified in

Division 16 Section "Communication and Data-Processing equipment."
B. Low-Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conductor, color-coded, 0.6 mm2 copper, minimum
as specified in Section 16120..
1. Sheath: PVC, except in plenum-type spaces use sheath listed for plenums.
2. Ordinary Switch Circuits: Three conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Switch Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator Feature: Five conductors, unless
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mount control equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements

in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between control devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and
Cables" for low-voltage connections and Division 16 Section "Communication and Data-
Processing Equipment" for digital circuits.
B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways
and Boxes."
C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D. Ground equipment.

E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Label each system control module with a unique designation. Make designations on
elevated components readable from floor.
A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days'
advance notice.
B. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.

2. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls to demonstrate their functions and
capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating
functions.
C. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
D. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to explain programming and operation of

system and to train Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for
maintaining, programming, operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing system.
1. Provide a minimum of eight hours' training in operation and maintenance.

3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to

three Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes, and
adjust sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

SECTION 13851 - FIRE ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment,
controls, and devices.

2. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for fire alarm system power wiring.
4. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for fire alarm system wiring method and
enclosure requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FCC: Fire command center.
B. MFAC: Main fire alarm control panel.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
A. General: Non-coded, addressable-analog system with manual and automatic alarm

initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal
transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
B. The system shall provide automatic detection of fire in all areas including but not limited to
platform, offices, retail, utility, critical rooms and areas above false ceiling and under raised
floor via automatic fire detection devices as well as manual means.
C. Special detection systems shall be provided in critical spaces utilizing appropriate

technologies to provide the most early and reliable fire detection.
D. The type of Fire Alarm sensors shall be selected based on the protected space:
1. Public spaces and store rooms shall be provided with spot type smoke sensors.
2. Telecom, technical, electrical spaces shall be provided with spot type smoke sensors.
3. Mechanical rooms shall be provided with spot type multi-criteria sensors.
FIRE ALARM 13851 - Page 1 of 20

4. High ceiling spaces shall be provided with beam detector or air sampling smoke detector
where appropriate.
5. Areas to be protected by active fire suppression systems (e.g. FM200 System) shall be fully
interfaced to the fire alarm system using five monitor modules for 1st stage alarm, 2nd stage
alarm, trouble, gas release and abort stage.
E. The Fire Alarm System shall be interfaced with other systems including but not limited to
the following:
1. Security controlled doors, gates and pedestrian controls.

2. Metro SCADA/ Signaling system.
3. Building management system.
4. Fire extinguishing system.
5. Smoke extraction/ ventilation system.
6. Elevator/ Escalator controllers.
7. Electromagnetic door locks / holders.
F. Fire alarm cables shall be fire rated type
G. The Public Address system shall be used to broadcast the Fire Alarm messages which shall
take precedence and override normal direct and pre-recorded announcements for the Public
Address System as described in Volume 2.3 WPS 1.11 – Public Address.
H. Emergency Communication System shall be used in case of fire as described in Volume 2.3
WPS 1.10 – Telephone and Intercom System.
I. Fire Command Center shall be provided for underground stations as per NFPA 130.
J. Fiber Optic Cables shall be provided to connect the stations local Fire Alarm Control Panels and the
Operating Control Center.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Detectors characteristic curves of coverage area against ceiling height and air
movement speed.
2. Personal computer including dual processor type and speed, auxiliaries, software-
package, printer and the like.
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans and elevation views of components. Show
access and workspace requirements. Include at least the following:
1. Detailed floor layouts showing all outlets with label reference and exact routing of
cabling and wireways.
2. Detailed system schematic diagram. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all
terminals and interconnections identified.
3. Detailed equipment layout in rooms and closets including elevations and typical
installation details.
4. Battery: Sizing calculations.
5. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming and labeling.
6. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
7. Cause and Effect Matrix: Show in a matrix format, the effect of every initiating
device on the MFACP/ FACP, notification devices and all system peripherals.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating
installation of smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each
duct smoke provision of detector installation:
1. Size and location of ducts, including lining.

2. Size and location of piping.
3. Size and arrangement of structural elements.
4. Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air-sampling elements.
D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include but not limited to the
following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
F. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the MFACP FACP.
G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that

H. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with

requirements.
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
J. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
K. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures," make an identical
submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract
Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required
to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from
authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Engineer for review.
L. Sound Levels: Measure and submit audible sound levels. Verify that 15 decibels (dB)
above ambient noise levels or 5 dB above the maximum sound level that occurs at the
location for 60 seconds or more, but not greater than 120 dB, are achieved.
M. Test Results and Certificate of Completion: Comply with specified Standard.

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

fire alarm system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for
this Project.
1. Experience: Minimum 5 years.

2. Demonstrate that installer has satisfactorily completed at least two system
installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local
ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following:
1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".

2. NFPA 72, "National Fire Alarm Code".
3. NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures".
4. NFPA 130, “Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems, 2010”
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount
installed, but not less than one unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but not less
than one unit.
3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 2 percent
of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than one unit of each type.
5. Printer Ribbons: Six spares.
6. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper-proofed components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Honeywell (USA).
2. Notifier (USA).
3. Simplex (USA).
4. Gamewell-FCI (USA).
5. Siemens (GERMANY).
6. GE Security–EST General Electric
2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Control of System: By the MFACP / FACP.
B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuit, short circuit, and ground
fault of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits.
C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from
one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An
alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-
level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even
when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received.
D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other
zones.
E. System Reset: All zones are manually re-settable from the MFACP/ FACP after initiating
devices are restored to normal.
F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator
transmitter and telephone lines.
G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire-to-
wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating
device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) System Wiring: Class A, Style D or E.

2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) System Wiring: Class A, Style 7.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class A, Style Z.
H. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the MFACP and FACP. The
MFAC indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the secondary power supply.
I. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual

station, automatic alarm operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector, or operation of a
sprinkler flow device initiates the following:
1. Activation of presignal at MFACP/ FACP.
a. Local alarm in the control unit for the period of a programmable time T1.
b. During this delay time (T1), an internal (staff) alarm (stage 1) only is to be
given. If the alarm is not acknowledged before timer T1 runs out, this is to
result in notification-appliance operation (stage 2) as detailed in subparagraph
2.2I.2 below.

c. If the alarm is acknowledged while T1 is still running, T1 is to be reset and a

programmable timer T2 is to be started. T2 is to delay the notification-
appliance operation (stage2) further, and so provide time for human
investigation of the alarm cause.
d. If no reset action takes place before T2 runs out, notification-appliance
operation (stage 2) is to be given.
2. Notification-appliance operation.
a. Alarm signal in floor of incidence floors above and below; alert signal in
remaining parts of building.
b. Alarm throughout the building.
c. Activation of visual strobes.
3. Identification at the MFACP/ FACP of the zone originating the alarm.

4. Identification at the MFACP/ FACP of the device originating the alarm.
5. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
6. Unlocking of electric door locks in designated egress paths.
7. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
8. Recall of elevators and escalators .
9. Shut off public address and music equipment.
10. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when alarm was
initiated.
11. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.
12. Recording of the event in the system memory.
13. Recording of the event by the system printer.
J. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the MFACP/
FACP.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and

activate an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is
retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals, from other devices or zones, shall reactivate notification
appliances, until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
K. Water-flow alarm switch operation initiates the following:
1. Notification-appliance operation.
2. Flashing of the device location indicating light for the device that has operated.
L. Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating a
shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
M. Water-flow alarm for connection to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room
shuts down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the MFACP/ FACP closes the
shunt trip circuit and operates building notification appliances.
N. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following:
1. Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the MFACP/

FACP.
2. Activation of a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the MFACP/
FACP and the detector.
4. General alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancellation of the MFACP/ FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not
verified.
O. Sprinkler valve-tamper switch operation initiates the following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve-tamper" signal indication at the MFACP/

FACP.
2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated.
4. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station.
P. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition, initiates the

following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "fire-pump power failure" signal indication at the
MFACP/ FACP.
3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station.
Q. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system initiates the

following:
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "sprinkler trouble" signal indication at the

MFACP/ FACP.
2. Flashing of the device location indicating light for the device that has operated.
4. Transmission of trouble signal to remote central station.
R. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the MFACP/ FACP

causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their
current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same
controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of
specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes are
recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer.
S. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following:
1. A "trouble" signal indication at the MFACP/ FACP for the device or zone involved.
3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station.
T. Printout of Events: On receipt of the signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble),
and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed
indications. Also print system-reset event, including the same information for device,
location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printout of a list of existing alarm,
supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

U. MFACP/ FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm,

supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or
supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and
component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's
historical memory.
2.3 MANUAL STATIONS
A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter
operating instructions of contrasting color.
Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-glass type;
with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to MFACP/FACP
1. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double-pole, double-throw; switch rated for
the voltage and current at which it operates.
2. Indoors Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an
integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation.
3. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at
the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the MFACP/ FACP.
2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General: Include the following features:
1. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in
a module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist-
locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.
4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated.
5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation.
6. Mounting: Surface or semi-recessed ceiling mounted type, located as shown on
Drawings, with head removable from fixed twist-lock base. Removal of detector
head is to interrupt supervisory circuit and cause trouble signal at control panel.
Normal flat surface coverage is to be over 100 m2 at mounting height of 6 m.
7. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the MFACP/ FACP.
8. Circuitry for two-way communication with the MFACP/ FACP: Each time the
detector is polled, it is to communicate its type (heat, optical etc.) and an
analogue/digitally-encoded value corresponding to its sensitivity and status with
microcomputer processing in the control unit.
9. Remote Controllability: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analog-addressable
type, individually monitored at the MFACP/ FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and
alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the MFACP/ FACP.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm smoke obscuration.

3. Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed-temperature type with 57 deg C setting.
2.5 OTHER DETECTORS
A. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg C or

rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 8.3 deg C per minute, unless otherwise indicated.
Normal flat surface coverage is to be over 50 m2.
detector is polled, it is to communicate its type and an analogue/digitally-encoded
value corresponding to its sensitivity and status with microcomputer processing in the
control unit. Detector is to be automatically addressed by its location in the signaling
loop.
B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 88 deg C.
Normal flat surface coverage is to be over 50 m2.
detector is polled, it is to communicate its type and an analogue/digitally-encoded
value corresponding to its sensitivity and status with microcomputer processing in the
control unit. Detector is to be automatically addressed by its location in the signaling
loop.
C. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System:

1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F (68 deg C) NRTL listed for
"regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires
twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with
PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that
reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location
of elevated temperature.
2. Control Unit Panel: Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm
features as specified for MFACP/ FACP.
3. Signals to MFACP/FACP: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to
MFACP/FACP unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone
shall be individually reported to MFACP/FACP central fire-alarm control unit as
separately identified zones.
alarm, or trouble) to MFACP/ FACP.
2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly.
B. Horns: 24-V dc with voltage variations between 18 V and 32 V and provision for housing
the operating mechanism behind a grille.
1. .
2. Horn Type: For indoor applications, electronic type, with volume control
incorporated inside the unit, mounted on flush box as shown on the Drawings, and
giving 95 dB(A) sound level at 3 m in all directions, with a sound frequency in the
range 500 Hz to 1000 Hz. The horn is to operate in both continuous and alternating
tones.
3. Horn with strobe light: same specifications as the horn type but with strobe light of
150 cd.
2.7 REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION-INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION

PLATES
A. Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible,
and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light is connected to flash
when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a
single gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating
light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the
smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also
designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.
2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete
with matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 111-N holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 24-V dc or 220- V ac.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.9 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL/ FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required for
testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the
enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with
matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter
space for field wiring and interconnecting panels.
1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate

with lettering not less than 25 mm high. Identify individual components and modules
within cabinets with permanent labels.
2. Mounting: Flush or surface.
B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the MFACP/ FACP. Alarm-
initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field
wiring for module replacement is unacceptable.
C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire
alarm systems.
D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.
E. Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones transmitting
signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and indicate the type of
device originating the signal. Manual switches and push-to-test buttons do not require a key
to operate. Controls include the following:
1. Alarm acknowledge switch.

2. Alarm silence switch.
3. System reset switch.
4. LED test switch.
F. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the
alarm or trouble condition still exists.
1. .
G. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the MFAC and addressable system components, including annunciation,
supervision, and control.
1. Display: A minimum of 80 characters; alarm, supervisory, and component status

messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands.
H. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover
in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system
under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
I. The Fire Alarm System shall be interfaced with other systems including but not limited to
the following:
1. Security controlled doors, gates and pedestrian controls.
2. Metro SCADA/ Signaling system.
3. Building management system.
4. Fire extinguishing system.
5. Smoke extraction/ ventilation system.
6. Elevator/ Escalator controllers.
7. Electromagnetic door locks / holders.
2.10 PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC) FOR NETWORK REPORTING TERMINAL (NRT)

A. The Network Reporting Terminal is to utilize user-friendly software running on an industry

standard operating system (such as Microsoft Windows or NT). Each NRT is to be capable
of graphically annunciating and controlling all network activity.
B. Personal Computer: Provide a state of the art personal computer with 20 inch color LCD,
keyboard, mouse, CD drive, printer and all necessary interface / network cards and
auxiliaries. The central control unit is to be equipped with dual microprocessor in "hot -
standby" mode in such a way that failure of either one, the other one will automatically take
over all functions of the central control unit. The failure of any CPU is to be associated with
an audible alert signal and distinctive visual signal "PROCESSOR FAILURE" presented at
the system main console terminal. Central processor architecture is to have the following
serial input-output interfaces:
1. Front interfaces for either point-to-point or loop communication network.

2. Eight Asynchronous end interfaces for control and supervision of system consoles
logging printer and color graphic display station.
3. At least one additional end interface to drive a digital output device.
4. At least one additional end interface to drive a function keyboard device for dedicated
partial system operation.
C. Software Configuration: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the provision of all
system software packages, which make up the complete operational system. At least the
following standard software modules are to be incorporated:
1. Operating program.
2. System database (process image).
3. Network monitoring and control.
4. Display priority control.
5. Command priority control.
6. Output message generator.
7. Peripheral drivers.
8. Text/graphic editors.
9. Help facility.
10. Service assistance.
11. Diagnosis.
12. Auxiliary programs.
D. Password Protection: Access to system operating functions is to be protected by a

password. For each operator intervention, the identification number of the initiating
password number is to be recorded in the system history file for subsequent reports.
E. Alarms: The system console is to automatically display and log alarm and change-of-status
messages received from FACP’s. The system console is to provide optimal conditions for
successful intervention by means of rapid and simple processing and displaying all
necessary data in plain text and graphics. The alarm message information is to contain the
following information:
1. Time and date.

2. Type and origin.
3. Description of affected alarm location.
4. Counter-action to be taken.

F. Programming: The NRT is to use dialog box technology to address, interrogate, control,
and/or modify intelligent points on each fire alarm node. This is to include, and not be
limited to:
1. Activating outputs.
2. Enabling or disabling points.
3. Adding or removing intelligent points.
4. Viewing intelligent detector sensitivity levels and modifying point information
(custom messages, detector type, verification, day/night selection etc.).
G. Operating Mode: The extended system operating procedure is to be based on a user

adaptive, screen-oriented dialogue in the manner of menus and masks. No knowledge of
technical codes shall be necessary for system operation. All messages and instructions
needed for system operation are to be indicated in plain text and/or graphics. A keyboard is
to be used for data entry communication.
H. History File: The NRT is to be capable of storing network events in a history file. Events
are to be stored on hard disk and be capable of back-up storage on a DVD/ CD. The history
buffer is to have three modes of display. The first mode is to allow the operator to view
events in a chronological order. A filter is to be available for displaying chronological
events by year, month, date, time, alarms only, troubles only, both alarms and troubles,
security breaches, supervisory alarms, and points disabled. The second is to allow the
operator to view events in a number of easy-to-read graph styles, such as, bar graph, point
graph, line graph, or spline graph. Graphing is to include the ability to select alarms,
troubles or alarms and troubles, then the ability to display on a by year, month, or day basis.
The third mode is to allow the operator to display stored (hard or DVD/ CD) events in a
variety of useful formats. Selections are to be available for displaying events by year,
month, date, time, alarms only, troubles only, and both alarms and troubles, security
breaches, supervisory alarms, and points disabled. The ability to print NRT history files is
also to be available.
I. Graphical Information: The NRT is to include the ability to display system information in a
graphical (floor plan and elevations) form. A pull-down menu is to be included allowing
selection of graphical views of the facility, or subset thereof. Each view, created in a CAD
environment, is to include icons created for intelligent devices. These devices are to change
in color when an event occurs. The device is to annunciate in RED when in alarm, BLUE
for security activation, and YELLOW for trouble or to confirm acknowledgement. Each
device in the graphic display is to support a text memo file where pertinent information
about the location of the device may be stored. By selecting a device in the graphic
presentation, the operator of the NRT is to have the ability to log onto the corresponding
node and interrogate the associated intelligent point. Graphics are to be stored in a resident
RAM memory and backed-up by a DVD/ CD memory with the possibility to compose,
modify or edit the graphic schematics, text, symbols and zone allocations on-site without
jeopardizing the fire alarm system operation. Provide license and tools to software to revise
/ add equipment, floors or areas. Selection and activation of a certain graphic display is to
be either automatic (event driven) or by manual request via the terminal. Graphics
presentation shall have a minimum of four hierarchical levels:
1. Area overview.
2. Building overview.
3. Floor overview.
4. Room overview.

J. Annunciation: The NRT is to include an easy-to-read system interface window, which

displays alarms and troubles in an 80-character text message format. Alarms are to display
in RED, troubles in YELLOW and security alarms in BLUE. The system interface window
is to also include reset, silence and acknowledge keys for local panels and for the complete
network.
K. Help: The NRT is to include help screens, available to aid the user without leaving the
selected application screen.
L. Passwords: The NRT is to have a flexible way of assigning operator passwords. There is to
be an unlimited number of possible operators, each with specific levels of control. Each
operator is to have his/her own password. Operator password and control selection is to be
available to a high level "administrator" who is to have complete control over levels of
control. If no action has taken place on the NRT after 10 minutes, the current operator is to
be logged out and require a new log-in.
M. Printer Port: The NRT shall include an industry-standard EIA-232 port for a printer.
2.11 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. General: Components include valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid battery; charger; and
an automatic transfer switch.
B. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide capacity

for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If
batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours.
Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
C. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals
or status indications when normal power fails.
2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system
address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate
elevator recall or to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.
2.13 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the
MFAC panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset
number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the
signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two
lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a
local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote
alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit
automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone
lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.

B. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
C. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central

station.
2.14 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Description: Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
B. The system is to have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main MFAC
enclosure. Alarms are to be printed in easy-to-read RED, other messages, such as a trouble,
are to be printed in BLACK. This printer is to receive power from the system power supply
and shall operate via battery back up if AC mains are lost.
C. The printer is to provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system and shall
time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date. The printer is to be
standard carriage with 80-characters per line and is to use standard pin-feed paper. The
printer is to be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop or table.
The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an interface complying with
Electrical Industries Association (EIA) standard EIA-232D.
2.15 WIRE
A. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-

coded insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: 1.5 mm2 (No. 16 AWG), minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: 2.5 mm2 (No. 12 AWG), minimum.
B. Power-Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended by

manufacturer.
PART 3 - Wires and Cables: Comply with BS 5839 Part 1, section 17.3, and certified to have passed
IEC 331 and 332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests. Cables are to be MICC or silicone rubber
insulated, with overall PVC sheath bonding to coated aluminum foil (FP 200 by Pirelli Cables) or
other equal and approved.EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Connect the MFACP/ FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.
B. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes.
C. Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve
station required to be supervised.
D. Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 100 mm from a side wall to the near
edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On
smooth ceilings, install not more than 9 m apart in any direction.

E. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 100 mm, but not more than 300 mm, below the
ceiling.
F. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 1520 mm.
G. The selection and placement of smoke detectors shall take into account both the
performance characteristics of the detector and the areas into which the detectors are to be
installed to prevent nuisance alarms or improper operation after installation. Smoke
detectors shall not be installed in areas where air velocity is greater than 1.5m/sec, and shall
not be located in a direct airflow. If siting of detectors in such areas is unavoidable, use
detectors specifically designed for use in such conditions.
H. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and
humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
2. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.
I. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install
bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a
single unit.
K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
L. MFAC: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with
no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure
associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to
the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade
lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm
system junction boxes and covers red.

E. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of
one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones.
F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 25-mm conduit between the MFAC and the
transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as
needed to suit monitoring function.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16

Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the MFAC.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions
to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops,
common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with
installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the
greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and
other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record,
and report ground resistance.
E. Ground radio alarm transmitter system and equipment as recommended by the

manufacturer.

field-assembled components and connections and to supervise pre-testing, testing, and
adjustment of the system. Report results in writing.
B. Pre-testing: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete
pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the compliance of the system with requirements
of Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pre-testing. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance
and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test
results.

C. Report of Pre-testing: After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the

installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to
preliminary tests.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is
ready for final acceptance testing.
E. Minimum System Tests: Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record
(as-built) drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of
initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to
class of wiring used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at
the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items
at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and
using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all
devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe
indicating lights, displays and signal tones. Observe all voice audio for routing,
clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power
system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
F. Re-testing: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets specified
requirements and complies with applicable standards.
G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed
test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests.
H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and
marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials
3.7 DEMONSTRATION


personnel on procedures and schedules for operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and
servicing system.
1. Provide a minimum of eight hours' training in operation and maintenance.

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities
to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to Project site for this
purpose.

SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire-suppression piping and equipment for the following building systems:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class III, fire-suppression standpipes and branches for sprinklers.
2. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves, specialties, and automatic
sprinklers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
B. Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire hose coupling thread for attaching fire
hose.
C. Hose Station: Hose connection, fire hose rack, and fire hose.
D. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications

prepared according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 for obtaining approval from Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Verify the design of standpipes and sprinklers for compliance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and
obtain approval from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify the design of standpipes and obtain approval from Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction. Include minimum residual pressures at hydraulically remote outlets according to the
following:
1. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) Hose Connections: 690 kPa (100 psig).
C. Verify design of sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain approval from Engineer
and authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure.
2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 6.3 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.)
area.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - Page 1 of 16

S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.15 gpm over
1500- sq. ft.) area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.20 gpm over
1500- sq. ft.) area.
5. Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s (0.15 gpm) over entire area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s (0.20 gpm) over entire area.
6. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
D. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-kPa (175-psig)
minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for standpipe piping.
2. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Piping seismic restraints.
5. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
6. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
7. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps
and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.
8. Hose connections. Include size, type, and finish.
9. Hose stations. Include size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and length of fire
hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and finish of nozzles; and finish of rack.
10. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other pertinent data.
B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have
been approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations.
C. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Commissioning"
Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of standpipe and sprinkler specialty to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed, installed and obtained
approvals for fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this Project.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a
qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of fire-

suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
E. Standpipe and Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing
agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
G. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the
following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 13R, "Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four
Stories in Height."
3. NFPA 14, "Standpipe and Hose Systems."
4. NFPA 231, "General Storage."
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for
a minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers
and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers (or approved

equals) offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Specialty Valves and Devices:
a. Badger Fire Protection, Inc.

b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. Grinnell Corp.
d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
e. Star Sprinkler Corp.
f. Viking Corp.
2. Water-Flow Indicators and Supervisory Switches:
a. Gamewell Co.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Pittway Corp.; System Sensor Div.
d. Potter Electric Signal Co.

S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1.1
f. Viking Corp.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
3. Sprinkler Test Fittings:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.

b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
c. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
d. Grinnell Corp.
e. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
f. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
g. Victaulic Co. of America.
4. Fire Department Connections:

d. Grinnell Corp.
e. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
f. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
5. Sprinklers:

c. Grinnell Corp.
f. Viking Corp.
6. Hose Connections and Hose Stations:

d. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
7. Indicator and Service Valves:
a. Central Sprink, Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.
c. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
d. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
e. Nibco, Inc.
f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
8. Keyed Couplings and Press-Seal Fittings for Steel Piping:

b. Grinnell Corp.
c. National Fittings, Inc.
d. Star Pipe Products, Inc.; Star Fittings Div.
e. Victaulic Co. of America.
9. Mechanically Formed Tee Outlets:
a. T-Drill Industries, Inc.

a. T-Drill Industries, Inc.
b. Peterson Products
c. Grinell
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 PIPES
A. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795; Schedule 40 in DN150
(NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30 in DN200 (NPS 8) and larger.
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS
A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
B. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
D. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47),
malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends
factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
A. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing for
dry-pipe service for couplings for dry piping.
2.6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not
required to be UL listed and FM approved.
2.7 FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200-kPa (175-psig) nonshock working-
pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be furnished with grooved ends instead of
type of ends specified.
B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge;
OS&Y; and rising stem.
C. Indicating Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-type, bronze body
with threaded ends; and integral indicating device.

S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1.1
G. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with
bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
H. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber
seal, bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure; designed for horizontal or
vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals,
and single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm
switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
1. Option: Grooved-end connections for use with keyed couplings.

2. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, and separate from main drain piping.
B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 2760-kPa (400-psig) minimum rating, brass. Include

DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2), female NPS inlet and outlet; adjustable setting feature;
and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as indicated.
1. Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
C. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check device with
threaded ends.
2.9 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with
operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.10 SPRINKLERS
A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 199, for applications except residential.

2. UL 1626, for residential applications.
3. UL 1767, for early suppression, fast-response applications.
B. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
1. Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.
a. Orifice: 12.7 mm (1/2 inch), with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Orifice: 13.5 mm (17/32 inch), with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
C. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.

2. Open sprinklers.
3. Upright sprinklers.
4. Side Wall sprinklers.
5. Extended coverage sprinklers.
6. Sprinklers for window protection.

D. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated, bronze, and painted.
E. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
G. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.11 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS
A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or other materials
compatible with piping.
B. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gasket, bolts, and
threaded or locking-lug outlet.
C. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gaskets, bolts,

and threaded or locking-lug outlets.
D. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.
E. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded inlet
and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
F. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet and capped drain
outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
G. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded inlet
and drain outlet and sight glass.
2.12 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Description: UL 668, 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, brass, hose valve for
connecting fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose
outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2) as
indicated, and hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
1. Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.

2. Finish: Rough brass.
2.13 HOSE STATIONS
A. Provide recessed and surface-mounted cabinets where indicated. (Class III with fire department
valve) Cabinets shall be prime grade, stainless-steel 316. On each jamb, provide at least two
anchors or reinforcements spaced approximately 610 mm apart for building in or attaching the
cabinets to adjacent construction. Doors shall be flush hollow metal type with full glazed opening.
Provide door with continuous concealed hinge, latch and pull. Hinge door for 180 degree opening.
Glass shall conform to ASTM C 1036 and shall be tempered, Quality q 8 (glazing quality),
diamond or square wire mesh, 6.35 mm thick. Fabricate cabinet with sufficient interior space to
store one fire extinguisher.

B. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass chrome plated, rack nipple; hose
rack; and the following features:
1. Valves: UL 668, 2070 kPa minimum pressure rating, 90- degree angle pattern hose valve
with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
3. Flow-Restricting Devices: DN40 brass, adjustable for DN40 fire hose inlet.
4. Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets, and nozzle.
Include the following fire hose materials:
a. Jacket: Synthetic thread.

b. Lining: Plastic compound.
c. Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of compounds.
5. Nozzles: UL 401.
6. Drain Valves: UL 1726.
7. Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding units.
8. Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
9. Fire extinguisher as shown on detail drawings.
C. DN65 and DN40 Hose Stations: DN65 hose valve with male threaded outlet, cap, and chain and
DN40 hose valve; hose rack with water-retention device and pins for folded, DN40 lined hose;
and DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.

1. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
2. Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length or as otherwise indicated.
3. Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
4. Fire extinguisher FE-1, dry chemical 4.5 kg.
D. Spare Parts: Provide 1 percent of the nozzles as spare parts.
E. Schedule of Hose Stations and Fire Hose Cabinets
1. FHC-1, Recessed/surface mounted as per architectural plan, 30 m Hose, Class III (65mm
valve, linen hose).
2. FHC-2, Recessed/Surface mounted as per architectural plan, 30 m Hose, Class III

(40mm/25mm rubber hose reel).
3. FHC-3, recessed/Surface mounted as per architectural plan, 30m rubber hose and 30m
linen reel for (65mm valve, and 40mm/25mm rubber hose reel).
2.14 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plate;
brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include
inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads,
outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Type: Flush mounting.

2. Type: Exposed, projecting mounting.
3. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular.
4. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

B. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, inlets with
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and bottom
outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass, lugged
swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 450-mm high brass sleeve; and
round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated.
2.15 ALARM DEVICES
A. General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator

with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 250-mm diameter, cast-
aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include DN20 (NPS 3/4) inlet and DN25
(NPS 1) drain connections.
C. Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow detector; with 1725-

kPa (250-psig) pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two
single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac
and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false
signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
D. Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature.

Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising
pressure and signals water flow.
E. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally closed
contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully
open position.
2.16 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 1725 kPa (0 to
250 psig).
2.17 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type as indicated. Control panel

includes NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for
operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-
wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire alarm bell; lamp
test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 220-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc
rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable
strut.

3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple,
and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable strut.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 EARTHWORK
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping
connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing
for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be
installed.
A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher than
system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Standpipes: Use the following:
1. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
2. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
3. DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-
end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
D. Wet-Pipe Sprinklers: Use the following:
1. Sprinkler-Piping Option: Mechanical-T bolted-branch-outlet fittings, DN50 (NPS 2) and

smaller, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.
2. DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
3. DN50 (NPS 2): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings;
steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.

4. DN65 to DN90 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
5. DN100 (NPS 4): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end
fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FM approved for applications where

required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.
2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-approved valves are not
required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

b. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and steel,
keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry
piping.
C. Press-Seal-Fitting Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure and follow fitting manufacturer's
written instructions. Include use of specific equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.
D. Locking-Lug-Fitting, Twist-Locked Joints: Follow fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from Engineer
and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before deviating
from approved working plans.
C. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained joints.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having DN65 (NPS 2-1/2)
and larger connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and
located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install drain valves on standpipes.
K. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
L. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
M. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install according to
NFPA 13 for sprinkler piping and to NFPA 14 for standpipes.
N. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
O. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct rigid
piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
P. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open, located to control sources of

water supply except from fire department connections. Provide permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Valves for Wall Fire Hydrants: Install gate valve with nonrising stem in supply pipe.
D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check
valves in potable-water supply sources.
E. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retard chamber drain-line connection.
F. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip
valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
1. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves to permit
servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling;

pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 95-
to 410-kPa (14- to 60-psig) adjustable range; and 1200-kPa (175-psig) maximum inlet
pressure.
2. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
G. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in main supply to deluge
system.
3.9 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers, SP-2.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers with
cover to match architectural selection, SP-1.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers, type SP-4
4. Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright and pendent, open sprinklers, type SP-3
5. Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers
where indicated.
6. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes:
a. Pendant Sprinklers; type SP-1: Chrome-plated.

b. Upright Sprinklers; type SP-2: Chrome-plated in finished spaces exposed to view;
rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed
to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
3.10 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.
B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles.
C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type
sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
3.11 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 to DN40 (NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection
Specialties" for cabinets.
3.12 HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction.
B. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 by DN40 (NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
angle required for connection of fire hose. Cabinets are specified in Division 10 Section "Fire-
Protection Specialties."
D. Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket attached to substrate.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and standpipes and sprinklers to fire system. Include backflow
preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain or
outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
F. Connect excess-pressure pumps to the following piping and wiring:
1. Sprinkler system, hydraulically.

2. Pressure gages and controls, hydraulically.
3. Electrical power system.
4. Alarm device accessories for pump.
5. Fire alarm system.
G. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
H. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
1. Pressure gages and controls.

3. Fire alarm system devices, including low-pressure alarm.
3.14 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13
and NFPA 14 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
B. Flush, test, and inspect standpipes according to NFPA 14, "Tests and Inspection" Chapter.
C. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate
compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
D. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.16 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.18 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate
correctly.
B. Verify that excess-pressure pumps and accessories are installed and operate correctly.
C. Verify that air compressors and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.
D. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
E. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are replaced with
new, correct type.
F. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have
guards as required for each application.
G. Verify that potable-water supplies have correct types of backflow preventers.
H. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
I. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler piping air-pressure maintenance devices and air
compressors.
J. Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have threads compatible with local
fire department equipment.
K. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.
L. Fill standpipes with water.
M. Verify that hose connections are correct type and size.
N. Verify that hose stations are correct type and size.
O. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
P. Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
Q. Start and run air compressors.
R. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
S. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
T. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

3.19 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-suppression piping and equipment. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 13916 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire-suppression sprinklers, piping, and equipment for the following
building systems:
1. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves, specialties, and automatic

sprinklers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications

prepared according to NFPA 13 for obtaining approval from Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Verify the design of sprinklers for conformance with NFPA 13, and obtain approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify the design of sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure.
2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 6.3 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.)
area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.15 gpm over
1500-sq. ft.) area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.20 gpm over
1500-sq. ft.) area.
d. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 18.9 mL/s over 232-sq. m (0.30 gpm over
2500-sq. ft.) area.
e. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 25.2 mL/s over 232-sq. m (0.40 gpm over
2500-sq. ft.) area.
5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13916 - Page 1 of 14

C. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-kPa (175-psig)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
7. Excess-pressure pumps. Include electrical data.
8. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other pertinent data.
B. Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: As specified in "Preparation" Article.
C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic
calculations, if applicable.
D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of sprinkler specialty to include in maintenance manuals
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by
a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of fire-suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
E. Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency

acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
G. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with
the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 13R, "Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four
Stories in Height."
3. NFPA 231, "General Storage."
4. NFPA 231C, "Rack Storage of Materials."
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space
for a minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

c. Grinnell Corp.
f. Viking Corp.
a. Gamewell Co.
b. Grinnell Corp.
f. Viking Corp.
3. Sprinkler, Test Fittings:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.



d. Grinnell Corp.
e. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
f. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.

d. Grinnell Corp.
5. Sprinklers:

c. Grinnell Corp.
f. Viking Corp.
6. Indicator and Service Valves:

b. Grinnell Corp.
c. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
e. Nibco, Inc.
f. Victaulic Co. of America.
7. Keyed Couplings and Press-Seal Fittings for Steel Piping:

b. Grinnell Corp.
c. National Fittings, Inc.
d. Star Pipe Products, Inc.; Star Fittings Div.
e. Victaulic Co. of America.
materials.
2.3 PIPES
A. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-
steel pipe where indicated; Schedule 40 in DN150 (NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30
in DN200 (NPS 8) and larger.

2.4 PIPE FITTINGS
C. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.
D. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
E. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47),
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipe-flange gasket
materials and welding filler metals.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not
required to be UL listed and FM approved.
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200-kPa (175-psig) non-shock working-
C. Indicating Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-type, bronze
body with threaded ends; and integral indicating device.
D. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge,
OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends; and
integral indicating device.
E. Indicating Device: Electrical [115] V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.
F. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150; bronze
body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
G. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap,
with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.

H. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber
A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure, designed for horizontal
or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring
seals, and single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric
sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.

2. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, and separate from main drain piping.
3. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
B. Dry-Pipe Valves: UL 260; differential type; 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure; with cast-
iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze seat with O-ring seals, and single-hinge pin and latch
design. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level,
alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line
attachment.

2. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices: Automatic device to maintain correct air pressure in
piping. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler
piping, bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure,
strainer, pressure ratings with 95- to 410-kPa (14- to 60-psig) adjustable range, and 1200-
kPa (175-psig) maximum inlet pressure.
3. Air Compressor: Fractional horsepower, [120-V] ac, [60 Hz], single phase.
C. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 2760-kPa (400-psig) minimum rating, brass.

Include DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2), female NPS inlet and outlet; adjustable
setting feature; and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as indicated.
D. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check device with
threaded ends.
2.9 SPRINKLERS
A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 199, for applications except residential.

2. UL 1626, for residential applications.
3. UL 1767, for early suppression, fast-response applications.
B. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) orifice for "Ordinary"
temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
C. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.

2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3. Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature.

4. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.

5. Institution sprinklers, made with small, breakaway projection.
6. Pendent sprinklers.
7. Pendent, dry-type sprinklers.
8. Quick-response sprinklers.
9. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
10. Sidewall sprinklers, including escutcheon.
11. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers, including escutcheon.
12. Upright sprinklers.
D. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated, bronze, and painted.
E. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 25-mm vertical adjustment.
3. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
G. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.10 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS
A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or other materials
compatible with piping.
B. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with locking-lug ends.
C. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gasket, bolts, and
threaded or locking-lug outlet.
D. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gaskets,

bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlets.
E. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.
F. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded
inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
G. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet and capped
drain outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
H. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded inlet
and drain outlet and sight glass.
inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and

threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR."

4. Finish: Polished brass.
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass,
lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 450-mm high brass
sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR."
1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished brass.
2.12 ALARM DEVICES
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator

with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 250-mm diameter, cast-
aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include DN20 (NPS 3/4) inlet
and DN25 (NPS 1) drain connections.
C. Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow detector;

with 1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical installation.
Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts,
7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to
prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
D. Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw, with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other
than fully open position.
2.13 PRESSURE GAGES
250 psig).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.
3.2 EARTHWORK
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
E. Sprinkler Feed Mains and Risers: Use the following:
1. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or
4. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Standard-weight steel pipe with plain ends, steel
welding fittings, and welded joints.
5. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with
grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
F. Sprinkler Branch Piping: Use the following:
G. Wet-Pipe, Sprinkler Branch Piping: Use the following:
1. DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or
2. DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) and smaller: Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
ends, cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
4. DN50 (NPS 2): Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
5. DN65 to DN75 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;

6. DN65 to DN75 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3): Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with
8. DN100 (NPS 4): Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,

required by NFPA 13.

construction.
B. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use ductile-iron pipe with radius-cut-grooved ends;

ductile-iron, grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with
couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
piping.
D. Locking-Lug-Fitting, Twist-Locked Joints: Follow fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for
backflow preventers.
3.7 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building interior water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15
Section "Water Distribution Piping" for interior piping.
connection to water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
backflow preventers.
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before
deviating from approved working plans.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and
located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to sprinkler risers
when sprinkler branch piping is connected to sprinkler risers.
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials and installation.
M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
N. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct
rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
O. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft metal seated globe
valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.9 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install specialty sprinkler fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13, manufacturer's
written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
E. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retard chamber drain-line connection.
3.11 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms without Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
3. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright and pendent sprinklers, as indicated.
4. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
5. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
6. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Flush sprinklers.
7. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
8. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers, as
indicated.
9. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
10. Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response
sprinklers where indicated.
11. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes:
a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished spaces

exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax
coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
3.12 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.
B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles.

C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type
sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and sprinklers to fire pumps. Include backflow preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.
F. Connect excess-pressure pumps to the following piping and wiring:
1. Sprinkler system, hydraulically.

2. Pressure gages and controls, hydraulically.
4. Alarm device accessories for pump.
5. Fire alarm system.
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.18 COMMISSIONING
correctly.
B. Verify that excess-pressure pumps and accessories are installed and operate correctly.
C. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
D. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are replaced
with new, correct type.
E. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have
guards as required for each application.
F. Verify that potable-water supplies have correct types of backflow preventers.
G. Verify that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire department
equipment.
H. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.
I. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
J. Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
K. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
L. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
M. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
3.19 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-suppression sprinklers. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 13921 - ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electric-drive, horizontal fire pumps for building fire-suppression systems
and the following:
1. Split-case fire pumps.

2. Pressure-maintenance pumps.
3. Full-service, fire-pump controllers.
4. Automatic transfer switches.
5. Pressure-maintenance-pump controllers.
6. Fire-pump specialties and accessories.
7. Pressure-maintenance-pump specialties and accessories.
8. Alarm panels.
9. Flow-measuring systems.
1. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for feed-main, fire-suppression piping at fire

pumps.
2. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for connection to alarm panel.
3. Division 16 Sections for power and connections to fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump controllers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fire Pump: Horizontal-type fire pump used to supply water at rated capacity and total head
required for fire-suppression service.
B. Fire-Pump Unit: Assembly with fire pump, driver, controller, and related accessories.
C. Pressure-Maintenance Pump: Electric-drive pump used to maintain water pressure in fire-

suppression piping system.
D. Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Unit: Assembly with pressure-maintenance pump, driver, controller,

and related accessories.
E. Split-Case Fire Pump: Axially split-case, centrifugal fire pump with its housing split parallel to
shaft.
A. Fire-Pump Systems: Fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units that comply with

performance requirements specified and are compatible with building fire-suppression systems.
ELECTRIC-DRIVE, HORIZONTAL FIRE PUMPS 13921 - Page 1 of 12

B. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Piping Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum
working-pressure rating, and maximum to suit system operating pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; certified pump performance curves with each selection
point indicated; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories
for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump unit and flow-measuring system.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, methods of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection
for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump unit.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
2. Shop Drawings may be incorporated into other Division 13 fire-suppression piping system
Shop Drawings.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of fire pumps and fire-pump controllers certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump unit to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, drivers,

controllers, and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units through one source
with responsibility and accountability to respond to and resolve problems regarding compatibility,
installation, performance, and acceptance of units.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of
fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units and are based on specific models indicated.
Other manufacturers' pump units with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer
to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
D. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials, hose threads, and
installation.
G. Comply with NFPA 20, "Centrifugal Fire Pumps," for fire pumps, drivers, controllers, accessories,
and installation.

A. Preparation for Shipping: After assembling and testing fire pumps and pressure-maintenance
pumps, protect flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces, pipe openings, and nozzles.
B. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following or approved equal:
1. Single-Stage, Horizontally/Vertically Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps:
a. Peerless Pump Co.

b. Reddy-Buffaloes Pump, Inc.
c. Patterson Pump Co.
2. Multistage, Horizontally Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps:
a. Armstrong Darling, Inc.

b. Fairbanks Morse Pump Corp.
c. General Signal Pump Group; Aurora Pump Unit.
d. Patterson Pump Co.
e. Peerless Pump Co.
f. Reddy-Buffaloes Pump, Inc.
3. Regenerative-Turbine, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps:
a. Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.

b. Fairbanks Morse Pump Corp.
c. General Signal Pump Group; Aurora Pump Unit.
d. MTH Tool Co.
e. Paco Pumps, Inc.
4. Fire-Pump Controllers:
a. Firetrol, Inc.
b. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
c. Joslyn Clark Controls, Inc.
d. Master Control Systems, Inc.
e. Metron, Inc.
5. Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:
a. Firetrol, Inc.

e. Metron, Inc.
6. Alarm Panels:
a. Firetrol, Inc.
e. Metron, Inc.
7. Flow-Measuring Systems:
a. Dieterich Standard Corp.

b. Gerand Engineering Co.
c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
d. Preso Industries, Ltd.
e. Reddy-Buffaloes Pump, Inc.
f. Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div.
g. Victaulic Company of America.
2.2 SPLIT-CASE FIRE PUMPS
A. Multistage, Horizontally Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448, factory-assembled and -

tested, electric-drive, two-stage, single-suction, horizontal type. Include pump and driver mounted
on same base and connected with coupling.
1. Characteristics: Capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at not
less than 65 percent of total rated head. Shutoff head is limited to 140 percent of total rated
head.
2. Casing: Axially split cast iron with suction and discharge flanges machined to
ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanges.
3. Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically and dynamically
balanced, and keyed to shaft.
4. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
6. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
7. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn and
bronze packing gland.
8. Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
Include metal coupling guard.
9. Driver: Electric motor.
10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit
before shipping.
11. Nameplate: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
B. Vertically Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448, factory-assembled and -tested, electric-
drive, Include pump and driver mounted on same base and connected with coupling.
1. Characteristics: Capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at not
less than 65 percent of total rated head. Shutoff head is limited to 140 percent of total rated
head.
2. Casing: Axially split cast iron with suction and discharge flanges machined to
ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanges.
3. Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically and dynamically
balanced, and keyed to shaft.
4. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.

6. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.

7. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn and
bronze packing gland.
8. Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
Include metal coupling guard.
9. Driver: Electric motor.
before shipping.
11. Nameplate: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
2.3 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, electric-drive pumps with cast-iron or stainless-steel

casing and bronze or stainless-steel impellers and mechanical seals. Include flanged suction and
discharge flanges machined to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions, unless Class 250 flanges are
indicated and except that connections may be threaded in sizes where flanges are not available.
1. Regenerative-Turbine, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps: Close-coupled type complying with

HI 1.1-1.5 requirements for regenerative-turbine centrifugal pumps. Include base.
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

unit before shipping.
b. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
2.4 PUMP DRIVERS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, open-dripproof, squirrel-cage, induction motor. Include construction

complying with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70, and include wiring compatible with controller used.
before shipping.
2. Nameplate: Complete with motor horsepower, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
2.5 PUMP CONTROLLERS, GENERAL
A. Description: Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation; factory assembled and wired;
factory tested for capacities and electrical characteristics; and with the following features:
1. Enclosure: UL 50, Type 2, dripproof, indoor, unless special-purpose enclosure is indicated.

2. Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as required for
drivers and controller types used, and specific items listed for each controller type.
3. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and listings, and other
pertinent data.
4. Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to NFPA 20 with
nonferrous-metal sensing piping, NPS 1/2 (DN15), with globe valves for testing controller
mechanism from system to pump controller as indicated. Include bronze check valve with
3/32-inch (2.4-mm) orifice in clapper or ground-face union with noncorrosive diaphragm
having 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) orifice.
2.6 FULL-SERVICE, FIRE-PUMP CONTROLLERS

A. Description: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for electric-drive, fire-pump service and service
entrance.
1. Type Starting: Autotransformer, closed transition.
B. Rate controllers for scheduled horsepower. Include short-circuit withstand rating at least equal to
short-circuit current available at controller location. Take into account cable size and distance
from substation or supply transformers.
C. Automatic Transfer Switches: UL 218 and UL 1008 and requirements for and attached to fire-
pump controllers. Include enclosure complying with UL 50, Type 2, with automatic transfer
switch with rating at least equal to fire-pump driver-motor horsepower. Include ampere rating not
less than 115 percent of motor full-load current and suitable for switching motor-locked rotor
current.
D. Controllers: As follows:
1. Isolating means and circuit breaker.

2. "Power on" pilot lamp.
3. Fire alarm system connections for indicating motor running condition, loss-of-line power,
and line-power phase reversal.
4. Automatic and manual operation, and minimum run-time relay to prevent short cycling.
5. Water-pressure-actuated switch with independent high and low calibrated adjustments
responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression system.
6. Automatic and manual shutdown.
7. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven with spring backup.
8. Mounting: Wall type for field electrical connections.
9. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and -
tested unit before shipping.
2.7 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE-PUMP CONTROLLERS
A. Description: UL 508; factory-assembled, -wired, and -tested across-the-line type for combined
automatic and nonautomatic operation.
1. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2, wall-mounting type for field electrical wiring.
B. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
1. Fusible disconnect switch.

2. Pressure switch.
3. Hand-off-auto selector switch.
4. Pilot light.
5. Running period timer.
6. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -
tested unit before shipping.
2.8 FIRE-PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity rating. Include
the following:
1. Automatic air-release valve.

2. Circulation relief valve.
3. Suction and discharge pressure gages.

4. Eccentric-tapered reducer at suction inlet.

5. Concentric-tapered reducer at discharge outlet.
6. Test-Header Manifold: Ferrous for hose valves. Manufacturer's standard finish. Include
bronze or cast-iron, exposed-type valve header with nozzle outlets; and round, brass
escutcheon plate with lettering equivalent to "PUMP TEST CONNECTION."
7. Ball Drip Valve: UL 1726.
8. Main Relief Valve: UL 1478, spring loaded.
9. Discharge Cone: Closed.
10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint, unless brass or other finish is
specified.
2.9 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE-PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for pump capacity
rating. Include the following:
1. Circulation relief valve.

2. Suction and discharge pressure gages.
2.10 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. Description: FM-approved, fire-pump, flow-measuring systems that indicate flow to not less than
175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing, flow meter,
and fittings.
1. Pressure Rating: to match pump head and system requirements.

2. Sensor: Venturi, annular probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flow Meter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) in
diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
4. Permanently Mounted: Flow meter suitable for wall mounting with copper tubing to
connect to flow sensor.
5. Portable: Flow meter, with two 12-foot (4-m) hoses, in carrying case with handle.
6. Include complete operating instructions.
A. Factory Tests: Hydrostatically test and test run fire pumps before shipping. Test at 150 percent of
shutoff head plus suction head, but not less than 250 psig (1725 kPa). Produce certified test curves
showing head capacity and brake horsepower of each pump.
2.12 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
B. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
D. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting fire-pump performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of fire-suppression piping systems. Verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and
controllers. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with fire-pump, pressure-maintenance-pump, and controller manufacturers' written

installation and alignment instructions, and with NFPA 20.
B. Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of
motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Set base-mounting-type pumps on concrete bases. Disconnect coupling halves before setting. Do
not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal wedges having
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch (19- to 38-mm)
gap between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling
faces and pump suction and discharge flanges to verify that they are level and plumb.
D. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than diameter of fire-pump nozzles.
E. Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge at pressure-gage tappings.
F. Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.
G. Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves, meters and gages, and equipment
supports.
H. Install flow meters and sensors where indicated. Install flow-measuring-system components and
make connections according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram Submittals to
electrical Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturers' submittal and

installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Proceed with equipment startup only
after wiring installation is satisfactory.
3.4 ALIGNMENT

A. Align fire-pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on foundation, grout has
set, and foundation bolts have been tightened.
B. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill baseplate
completely with grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten foundation bolts
after grout has hardened. Check alignment and make required corrections.
C. Make piping connections, check alignment, and make required corrections.
1. Adjust alignment of pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment by one
method in HI 1.1-1.5, Section 1.4, "Installation, Operation and Maintenance."
2. Alignment Tolerances: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Align vertically mounted, split-case pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been made
plumb on foundation, grout has set, and foundation bolts have been tightened. Follow pump
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 13 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect water supply to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps.
3. Connect fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump discharge piping to building fire-
suppression piping.
4. Connect relief-valve discharge to point of disposal.
B. Connect flow-measuring-system meters and sensors according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
C. Connect fire-pump controllers to building fire alarm system. Refer to Division 16 Section "Fire
Alarm Systems."
D. Connect controllers to pumps.
E. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
F. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump units, piping, and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
2. Check suction line connections for tightness so no air gets into pumps.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,
and retest.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
5. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other
acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Fire hoses are for field-acceptance
tests only and are not property of Owner.
6. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following preventive-maintenance operations
and checks:
a. Lubricate oil-lubrication-type bearings.

b. Remove grease-lubrication-type bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and
clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
c. Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation. Rotation shall
match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
d. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or if it drags even
slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
a. Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
b. Open sealing liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
c. Start motor.
d. Open discharge valve slowly.
e. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow
to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland immediately but let packing
run in before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes.
f. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
B. Perform field tests for each fire-pump unit and system piping when installation is complete.
Comply with operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or that does not perform as
indicated, than retest to demonstrate compliance. Verify that each fire-pump unit performs as
indicated. Report test results in writing.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain units as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

SECTION 13967 - CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:
1. Piping and piping specialties.

2. Extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Extinguishing agent.
4. Detection and alarm devices.
5. Control and alarm panels.
6. Accessories.
7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FM-200: Trade name for HFC 227ea fire-extinguishing clean agent.
A. Description: Engineered system for discharge and total flooding of hazard areas with "FM-
200," made by Great Lakes Chemical Corp.
A. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from Engineer and authorities
having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as appropriate for area being
protected and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration suitable
for normally occupied areas.
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge FM-200 within 10 seconds and maintain 7.1 percent
concentration by volume at 21 deg C (70 deg F) for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.
1. FM-200 concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0 percent immediately after
discharge or less than 5.8 percent throughout holding time will not be accepted
without written authorization from Employer and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 4278-kPa (620-psig) calculated working pressure and
2484-kPa (360-psig) initial charging pressure.
CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 13967 - Page 1 of 10

C. Verified Detection: Include devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating
single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection
device.
D. System Operating Sequence: As follows:
1. Actuating First Detector: Give visual indication on annunciator panel, energize

audible alarm, shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems serving protected
area, release and close doors in protected area, and send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Give visual indication on annunciator panel, energize
audible alarm, shut down power to protected equipment, actuate time delay for
extinguishing-agent discharge for 30 seconds, and release extinguishing agent.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights.
E. Operating manual-release stations will discharge extinguishing agent when activated.
F. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated,
and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of switch will discharge
agent.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

1. Extinguishing-agent containers.
2. Extinguishing agent.
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual-release stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include design
calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to scale:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate

dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of extinguishing agent
required for each hazard area.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items, and the
following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors, and

accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.

5. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a. Controls and alarms.

b. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if mounted in
space, detectors, and accessories.
c. Equipment and furnishings.
6. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors, and

accessories.
b. Method of supporting piping.
C. Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001, that have been
approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.
D. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Commissioning" Articles
in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of clean-agent extinguishing systems that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain extinguishing agent and equipment through one source.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of clean-
agent extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system selected. Other
manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate piping to comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping."
F. FM Compliance: Provide components that are FM approved and are listed in FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide."
G. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label clean-agent extinguishing systems to comply with
NFPA 2001, "Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems."
H. UL Compliance: Provide equipment components complying with UL 1058, "Halogenated

Agent Extinguishing System Units," and are UL listed for clean-agent extinguishing system
units in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and type installed.
3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest hazard
area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Clean-Agent Extinguishing Systems:
a. Cerberus Pyrotronics.
b. Chemetron Fire Systems.
c. Fike Corp.; Fire Protection Systems Div.
d. Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
e. Modular Protection Corp.
A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and Appendix A, for charging pressure of system.
2.3 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A or ASTM A 106, Grade A; Schedule 80.
2.4 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Malleable-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
B. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless Class 600 is indicated.
C. Forged-Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket pattern.

D. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: FM approved and UL listed, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47)
malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic joining
materials.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for halon or clean-
agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron
housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.6 VALVES
A. General: Brass; suitable for intended operation.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid, capable of immediate and total agent
discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent entrapment of

liquid, or install valve and separate pressure-relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing agent when
container is removed from manifold.
2.7 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS
A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating that
matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gage.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, enamel or epoxy paint.

2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for multiple
storage containers, as indicated.
3. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and connections
for main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage containers.
4. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets consisting of
steel straps and channels; suitable for container support, maintenance, and tank
refilling or replacement.
2.8 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT
A. Clean Agent: FM-200; HFC 227ea, heptafluoropropane.
2.9 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type, discharge

pattern, and capacity required for application.

2.10 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, including equipment and features required for

testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.
B. Power Requirements: 240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system
components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce power
at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
1. Mounting: Flush on surface.
D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.
1. Provide the following verified-detection applications:
a. Detection circuit.
b. Manual pull-station circuit.
c. Alarm circuit.
d. Release circuit.
2. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate

system for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic battery
charger, with varying charging rate between trickle and high depending on battery
voltage, that is capable of maintaining batteries fully charged. Include manual
voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter, electrical contacts for connection to
control panel, and suitable enclosure.
2.11 DETECTION DEVICES
A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:
1. Ionization Detectors: UL 268, dual-chamber type, having sampling and referencing

chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
2. Photoelectric Detectors: UL 268, consisting of LED light source and silicon

photodiode receiving element.
2.12 MANUAL-RELEASE STATIONS
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, with "PULL STATION" caption, 220-V ac or low

voltage compatible with controls, and red finish. Include contacts for connection to control
panel. Unit can manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains
engaged until unlocked.
1. Mounting: Semirecessed.
2.13 SWITCHES
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, where available, 220-V ac or low voltage

compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.

1. Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.

2. Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit signal from
main supply to reserve supply.
3. Abort Switches: Dead-man type, requiring constant pressure, for delay of system
discharge.
4. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device.
2.14 ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, low voltage, and surface mounting, unless

B. Bells: Minimum 150-mm diameter.
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
2.15 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING
A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 16 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area
leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work
performance.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR 2484-kPa (360-psig) CHARGING PRESSURE
A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.
B. Fittings Working Pressure: 4278 kPa (620 psig) minimum.
C. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
D. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Black steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
3.3 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb and
according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed couplings
and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.
D. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and related Appendix A paragraphs; and ASME B31.1.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure-relief

devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13 and Division 15
Section "Hangers and Supports."
3. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and accessories,

complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section "Detection, Actuation, and
Control Systems," as required for supervised system application.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system. Electrical
power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
D. Ground electrical components.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and panels

according to NFPA 2001.
A. Professional Engineer: Inspect installed clean-agent extinguishing systems, prepare

installation report, and certify that installation complies with the Contract Documents and
calculations, and comments of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of
Installations." Include the following inspections and tests to demonstrate compliance with
requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.

2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and check mountings

for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure
Inspection," and Appendix B, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure."
5. Perform functional predischarge test.
6. Perform system functional operational test.
7. Check remote monitoring operations.
8. Check control-panel primary power source.
9. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
C. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system when installation is

complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure construction has been
completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of
NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of Installations." Include the following to demonstrate
compliance with requirements:
1. Perform functional predischarge test.

2. Perform system functional operational test.
3. Check remote monitoring operations.
4. Check control-panel primary power source.
5. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
D. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace

equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified and indicated, then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
ATS, Section 7, "Inspection and Test Procedures," and Section 8, "System Function
Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
F. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.
G. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with
new units, and retest.
and equipment.

3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report

results in writing.
B. Verify that extinguishing system is installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with the Contract Documents.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and do the following:
1. Verify that tests of piping system are complete.

2. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
3. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
E. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are

prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and pressurize to

indicated charging pressure.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.

SECTION 13975 - STANDPIPES AND HOSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and equipment for the following building systems:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class I standpipes.
2. Automatic wet-type, Class II standpipes.
3. Automatic wet-type, Class III standpipes.
4. Manual wet-type, Class I standpipes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire hose coupling thread for attaching
fire hose.
B. Hose Station: Hose connection, fire hose rack, and fire hose.
C. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications

prepared according to NFPA 14 for obtaining approval from Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Verify the design of standpipes for compliance with NFPA, and obtain approval from Engineer
and authorities having jurisdiction. Include minimum residual pressures at hydraulically remote
outlets according to the following:

B. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-kPa (175-psig)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for standpipe piping.
STANDPIPES AND HOSES 13975 - Page 1 of 15


7. Hose connections. Include size, type, and finish.
8. Hose stations. Include size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and length of fire
hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and finish of nozzles; and finish of
rack.
B. Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: As specified in "Preparation" Article.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of standpipe specialty to include in maintenance manuals
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by
a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of fire-suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
E. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Section IX.
F. Standpipe Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency

acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
H. NFPA Standard: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with
NFPA 14, "Standpipe and Hose Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


c. Grinnell Corp.
f. Viking Corp.
a. Gamewell Co.
b. Grinnell Corp.
f. Viking Corp.

d. Grinnell Corp.
4. Hose Connections and Hose Stations:

d. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
5. Roof Hose Cabinets:
a. Fire-End and Croker Corp.

b. Metal Cabinet Co.
c. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
d. Van Loon Industries, Inc.
6. Fire-Protection-Service Valves:

c. Grinnell Corp.
d. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
e. Nibco, Inc.
f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

7. Keyed Couplings for Piping:

b. Ductilic, Inc.
c. Grinnell Corp.
d. National Fittings, Inc.
e. Star Pipe Products, Inc.; Star Fittings Div.
f. Victaulic Co. of America.
materials.
2.3 PIPES
A. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795; Schedule 40 in
DN150 (NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30 in DN200 (NPS 8) and larger.
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS
C. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.
D. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
E. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47),
A. Refer to Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipe-flange gasket materials and
welding filler metals.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
A. Refer to Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not required to be UL
listed and FM approved.

A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200-kPa (175-psig) nonshock working-
C. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge,
OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends.
D. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150; bronze
body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
E. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap,
with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
F. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber
A. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 2760-kPa (400-psig) minimum rating, brass. Include

DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2), female NPS inlet and outlet; adjustable setting
feature; and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as indicated.
B. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check device with
threaded ends.
2.9 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with
operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.10 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Description: UL 668, 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, brass, hose valve for
connection of fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose
outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2) as
indicated, and hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type is indicated.

2. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type.
3. Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.

2.11 HOSE STATIONS
A. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass, rack nipple; hose rack; and the
following features:
1. Valves: UL 668, 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, 90-degree angle pattern
hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type is

indicated.
b. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type.
c. Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
3. Flow-Restricting Devices: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) brass, adjustable for DN40 (NPS 1-1/2)
fire hose inlet.
4. Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets, and nozzle.
Include the following fire hose materials:
a. Jacket: Natural, synthetic, or combination of threads.

b. Jacket: Combination of natural and synthetic threads.
c. Jacket: Natural thread.
d. Jacket: Synthetic thread.
e. Lining: Rubber, plastic, or combination of compounds.
f. Lining: Combination of rubber and plastic compounds.
g. Lining: Rubber compound.
h. Lining: Plastic compound.
i. Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of compounds.
j. Cover: Optional.
5. Nozzles: UL 401.
6. Drain Valves: UL 1726.
7. Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding units.
8. Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
B. DN65 and DN40 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 1-1/2) Hose Stations: DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose valve with
male threaded outlet, cap, and chain and DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose valve; hose rack with water-
retention device and pins for folded, DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) lined hose; and DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) lined
hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
1. Hose-Rack Finish: Red enamel.

2. Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
3. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Rough brass.
4. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
5. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
6. Fire Hose: Lined, 15-m (50-foot) length.
9. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
10. Nozzle: Brass, plain type.
11. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable fog; for use on electrical fires.
2.12 ROOF HOSE CABINETS

A. Description: FM-approved, low-profile-type, hose station for roof mounting. Include the
following:
1. Housing: Sheet-steel construction with steel reinforcement and modified to hold not less
than length of fire hose indicated.
2. Shutoff Valve: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) gate valve with extended stem.
3. Hose Connection: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) valve.
4. Fittings: Brass.
5. Hose: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2), lined and suitable for exterior service. Include two 23-m (75-
foot) lengths coupled together.
6. Nozzle: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
7. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable-fog type.
8. Drain Valve: DN15 (NPS 1/2) gate valve with extended stem.
9. Finish: Red enamel paint.
10. Roof Curb: Matching housing dimensions.
11. Mounting Materials: Structural steel and wood blocking as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
2.13 MONITORS
A. Description: UL-listed, stationary, single-waterway type for 47.3-L/s (750-gpm) water stream.
Include the following features:
1. Waterway: DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) minimum, brass tube.

2. Operation: Lever handle.
3. Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device.
4. Vertical Rotation: 80-degree elevation and 60-degree depression with locking device.
5. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
2.14 WALL FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Description: Cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plates; brass, lugged caps with
gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include outlets with threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, inlet with pipe
threads, extension pipe nipple, and valve control.

3. Escutcheon Plates: Round.
4. Escutcheon Plates: Square or rectangular.
8. Hydrant, Escutcheon-Plate Marking: "HYDRANT."
9. Hydrant, Valve Control: Wall-mounting assembly with extension rod for manual control
of valve inside building.
10. Hydrant, Valve Escutcheon Plate Marking: "HYDRANT VALVE CONTROL."

inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and
threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
escutcheon plate with marking "STANDPIPE."

3. Escutcheon Plate: Round.
4. Escutcheon Plate: Square.
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass,
lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 460-mm- (18-inch-)
high brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking "STANDPIPE."
1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated.

2. Finish Including Sleeve: Rough chrome-plated.
3. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished brass.
2.16 ALARM DEVICES
B. Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow detector; with

1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include
two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A,
125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to
prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
C. Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature.

D. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
E. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other
than fully open position.
2.17 PRESSURE GAGES
250 psig).
2.18 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type as indicated. Control panel

includes NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for
operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries;
field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire alarm bell;
lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are [120-V] [220-V] ac, [50 Hz] [60
Hz], with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable
strut.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple,
and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable strut.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 291. Use results for system design
calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping
connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing
for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be
installed.
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise
indicated.

C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
E. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Use ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe and fittings and
restrained joints.
F. Standpipes: Use the following:

2. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
4. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with
5. DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
6. DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;


A. Refer to Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.
B. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use ductile-iron pipe with radius-cut-grooved ends;

ductile-iron, grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with
couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
piping.
3.7 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect standpipe piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Refer to Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping.
connection to water-service piping. Refer to Section "Water Distribution" for backflow
preventers.
3.8 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION
A. Connect standpipe piping to building interior water distribution piping. Refer to Section "Water
Distribution Piping" for interior piping.
connection to water distribution piping. Refer to Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow
preventers.
A. Refer to Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before
deviating from approved working plans.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
G. Install drain valves on standpipes.
H. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
I. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
J. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install according to
NFPA 14.
K. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
L. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct
rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
A. Refer to Section "Valves" for installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection specialty
valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
E. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball
drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
1. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves to permit
servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling;
pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with
95- to 410-kPa (14- to 60-psig) adjustable range; and 1200-kPa (175-psig) maximum
inlet pressure.
2. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
3. Install compressed-air supply piping from building compressed-air piping system.
F. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in main supply to deluge
system.
3.11 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
C. Install DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 to DN40 (NPS 2-1/2
by NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for
cabinets.
3.12 HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction.
B. Install DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose-station valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 by DN40 (NPS 2-1/2
by NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached to standpipe or substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
angle required for connection of fire hose. Cabinets are specified in Section "Fire-Protection
Specialties."
F. Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket attached to substrate.
3.13 ROOF HOSE CABINET INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.14 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and standpipes to fire pumps. Include backflow preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
F. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe valve.
G. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
1. Pressure gages and controls.

3. Fire alarm system devices, including low-pressure alarm.

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 14 and in Section "Mechanical Identification."
A. Flush, test, and inspect standpipes according to NFPA 14, "Tests and Inspection" Chapter.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.17 COMMISSIONING
correctly.
B. Verify that air compressors and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.
C. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
D. Verify that potable-water supplies have correct types of backflow preventers.
E. Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have threads compatible with local
fire department equipment.
F. Drain dry-type standpipe piping.
G. Pressurize and check dry-pipe valve air-pressure maintenance devices and air compressors.
H. Fill wet-pipe standpipe piping with water.
I. Verify that hose connections are correct type and size.
J. Verify that hose stations are correct type and size.
K. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
L. Start and run air compressors.
M. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
N. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
O. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
3.18 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain standpipes and hoses. Refer to Division 1.


SECTION 14210 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Electric traction passenger elevators.

2. Electric traction service elevators.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring
devices in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices
in masonry.
3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for attachment plates, angle brackets, and other
preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets.
4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for attachment plates, angle brackets, divider
beams, and other steel framing for supporting guide-rail brackets.
5. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for hot-rolled steel subsills and entrance frames
that are a part of steel frame.
6. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for hot-rolled steel subsills and entrance
frames.
7. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pit ladders.
8. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metalwork" for combination hall push-button
stations.
9. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting.
10. Division 9 Sections for finish flooring in elevator cars.
11. Division 15 Sections for ventilating hoistways and machine rooms.
13. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect
switches, standby power source, and transfer switch.
14. Division 16 Sections for security card access equipment used to restrict elevator use.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Provide all labour, materials equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install
all work of this section as shown on the drawing as specified herein and/or as required by
job conditions. Elevator installation is to comprise all elevators as described in attachment
A.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 - Page 1 of 25

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and may be
used interchangeably:
1. "Elevator" and "Lift".
B. Electric Traction Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted by wire ropes using
electrically driven traction sheaves and are defined to include driving machines; cars;
hoistway doors; guide rails; guide-rail brackets; roping; buffers; counterweights; signals;
control systems; electrical wiring within elevator system; and devices for operations, safety,
security, required performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator
installation.
C. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below

specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes;
unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and
similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each elevator. Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety
features, finishes, and similar information.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations,

remedies, limitations, and exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each elevator. Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details
indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building
structure, and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from specified
requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of
support, and locations of equipment and signals. Include maximum and average power
demands.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes for car, hoistway doors, and signal equipment; 75 mm
square samples of sheet materials; and 100 mm lengths of running trim members.
E. Maintenance Manuals: For each different electric traction elevator, including operation and
maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory
listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair
information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for
Employer's information at project closeout as specified in Division 1.
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
G. Inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by governing

authorities for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an experienced Installer

approved by the elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: unless otherwise approved, applicable standards are as follows

(with all amendments in force at time of tender):
1. EN81-1: 1998 Part 1 Lifts.

2. ISO 4190/1 – Passenger Lift installation – Part 1.
3. ISO 4190/2 – Goods Lift Installation – Part 2.
4. BS7255: 1989 code of practice for save working on lifts,
5. BS7671: Requirements for Electrical Installation – Part 1.
6. The requirements in connection with electromagnetic compatibility as stated in EN
2015 (Emission) and EN (12016) immunity.
7. Part M of UK building Regulations for handicap requirements, with certain exceptions
stated in this specifications due to impracticality.
8. NFPA 101: 2000 life safety code.
9. The local code of practice for electrical and hydraulic lifts in buildings.
10. Intercontinental Hotel Standars
Or other equal and approved.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty signed by elevator manufacturer

agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within the specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer. Include
monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed
and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.

hours.
2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.
B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from

installer to owner, in the form of a standard five-year period maintenance agreement,
starting on date initial maintenance. Service is concluded. State services, obligations,
conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Kone (Finland).
2. Fujitec Inc. (Japan).
3. Mitsubishi (Japan).
4. Otis Elevator Co. (USA or France).
5. Schindler Elevator Corp. (Switzerland).
6. Thyssen (Germany).
B. Complete documentation for the factory manufacturing the equipment is to be submitted

including but not limited to, local and international experience, quality certificates, quality
assurance plan and organization.
C. Elevator shall be installed by the manufacturer or a local representative approved by the

manufacturer.
2.2 MACHINE AND DRIVE
A. Geared Machine-Drive: Worm-geared traction type, with sheave and brake.
B. Geared Machine-Worm and Shaft: Accurately machined from one piece of high tensile
solid forged steel, and provided with approved thrust bearings designed to take thrust of
worm in both directions. Worm rim is to be best quality phosphor bronze or other approved
material, hobbed accurately after fitting to gear spider. Provide approved means for fixing
rim to spider and to prevent possible loosening of unit in operation.
C. Geared Machine-Reduction Gear Assembly: Self lubricating, enclosed in cast iron, oil and
dust tight casing, with adequate lubricating oil capacity.
D. Geared Machine-Brake: Spring applied, magnetically released, self-cooling and capable of

holding car securely under machine speed and load conditions. Brake is to be designed for
automatic and instantaneous application immediately after power is interrupted on motor.
Brake springs are to work in compression.
E. Geared Machine-Manual Brake Release: Provide means for manual release of brake, to
allow manual winding of unit in emergencies. Necessary levers and handles are to be
handed to the Employer, with instructions for use. Brake emergency release is to be self
resetting.
F. Gearless Machine-Drive: To have traction sheave and brake.
G. Gearless Machine-Motor: Enclosed, ventilated type.
H. Gearless Machine-Bearings: Sleeve or anti-friction type, properly lubricated, of ample

capacity to sustain heavy loads supported by machine, and rigidly mounted in proper
alignment. Sleeve bearings are to have automatic lubrication.

I. Gearless Machine-Brake: Dual independent brake unit are to be provided on the machine,
and is to be noiseless. Spring applied, magnetically released, self cooling and capable of
holding car securely under maximum speed and load conditions. Brake is to be designed
for automatic and instantaneous application immediately after power is interrupted on
motor. Brake springs are to work in compression.
J. Gearless Machine-Manual Brake Release: Provide means for manual release of brakes, to
allow manual winding of unit in emergencies. Emergency levers and handles are to be
handed to the Employer, with instructions for use. Brake emergency release is to be self-
resetting.
K. Variable Speed A.C. Motor: Induction type, 3-phase, reversible, with electronically
controlled speed, using controlled semi-conductor power rectifiers (thyristors) in main
circuit and solid-state electronically computed acceleration and deceleration equipment in
control circuits. Speed measurement and feed back control are to be through a
tachogenerator mounted on the machine, measuring actual revolutions of drive and
comparing with programmed reference level. Deceleration is to be electronically controlled
by eddy-current braking, feeding motor winding with thyristor controlled d.c. current.
Acceleration and deceleration are not to exceed 1 m/s/s.
L. Motor shall have high starting torque and low starting current and to be rated for continuous
operation in the maximum ambient temperature specified, and 180 starts per hour for
machine roomless lifts. Insulation class of winding is to be Class F or higher with
temperature rise not exceeding Class B. Starting/acceleration RMS current to be limited by
appropriate means to maximum 2.5 times the normal current.
M. Permanent Magnet Motor: Can be used in lieu of induction motor. Permanent magnet
motor shall be synchronous motor, direct current double independent electro-mechanical
brake and integral drive sheave.
N. Motor for gearless machines are to be permanent magnet synchronous type unless otherwise
indicated or specified.
O. Machine Motor Assembly: Motor, traction sheaves, brake, gearbox and bearings are to be
one unit assembly mounted on common bed plate. Assembly is to be adequately isolated
from main building structure by cork or other approved material, to prevent transmission of
noise and vibration.
P. Lifting Tackle: Provide and fix steel joists and hand-operated winch of adequate strength in
each machine room for lifting and moving each assembly.
Q. Traction and Deflection Sheaves: Traction sheave is to be fine grained cast iron of suitable
hardness, accurately grooved for number and size of hoisting ropes, and is to give constant
traction and long rope life. Bearings for sheaves are to be ball or roller of approved type.
Diameter of sheave is to be not less than forty times overall diameter of ropes. Deflection
and secondary sheaves are to be of same material and grooved similarly to traction sheave,
and are to be protected by keepers to prevent rope from leaving the sheave with clearance
between keepers and sheave not exceeding half rope diameter and provided by steel wire
mesh extending over the hole rope run above the machine bed plate for personnel
protection.
R. Variable speed AC electric motors are to be suitable for operator with variable voltage,
variable frequency (VVVF) gearless drives and controllers as specified.

S. Chains: Duplicate heavy duty high tensile multiple leaf chains, with safety factor of at least
10.
T. Cylinder: Place in a suitable casing of iron or steel. Cylinder casing is to be 100 mm larger
in diameter than cylinder. Whole assembly is to be mounted on lowest slab or pit surface
and is not to penetrate into ground.
U. Packing: Provide special type packing to eliminate leakage under widely variable load
conditions.
V. Automatic Leveling: Maximum tolerance ± 5 mm for variable speed elevators. Accuracy is

to be maintained regardless of change of load or rope stretch.
W. Motor drive unit controlling the motor speed: shall be capable of keeping the elevator.
Service under the conditions specified in “Electrical Equipment” Article. Drive unit power
factor to exceed 0.9.
X. Motor Rating: it’s the Contractor responsibility, and in accordance with the standards
requirements, to provide and install, for each elevator, the motor drive properly sized and
suitable to lift the required rated passengers’ capacity in addition to the specified car
dimensions, structure, finishes, etc. The Engineer is to be informed about any discrepancy
at the tender stage.
2.3 CAR
A. Construction: Structural steel frame members suitably braced and fastened together, and
clad internally and externally with sheet metal at least 1.5 mm thick, which is not to drum
during normal operation. Materials are to be fire resisting.
B. Noise Level Inside the Car is not to exceed the following values:
1. 50 dBA at full speed in both directions with fan off,
2. 55 dBA at full speed in both directions with fan on at high speed.
C. Noise Level Outside Car is not to exceed 55 dBA when measured at one meter in front of
car entrance during a full door open and close cycle and a reversal cycle, in addition to a lift
traveling at full speed inside the shaft.
D. Car Horizontal Acceleration: Lateral quaking, peak to peak, is not to exceed 15 m in the
frequency range of 1 to 10 Hz.
E. Reinforce roof to sustain 150-kg load on any 0.2 m2, and 50 kg at any point. Provide trap
door at least 500 x 600 mm, opening outward and capable of being opened from both sides.
Opening of trap is to activate electrical interlock preventing operation of elevator.
F. Platform: Fill frame with timber sub-floor and provide specified top floor finish. Protect
underside of platform with sheet steel covering, at least 1.5 mm thick. Sill is to be anti-slip,
with provision for car doors.
G. Load Weighing Device: Build into floor.
H. Isolating Cushion: Rubber pads supported on auxiliary steel frame fastened to car frame are
to form isolating cushion between car and car frame.
I. Guide Devices: Adjustable and renewable, and fastened to top and bottom of car frame.

J. Balustrade and kick-plates are to be fitted to car roof in all lifts as per EN081-1: 1998
requirements.
K. Ventilation and Lighting: each car is to have necessary lighting and adequately rated, silent
running, properly padded and rigidly fixed exhaust fan of approved type and manufacture.
Fan and lights are to switch on automatically when car is called or when landing doors are
opened, remain switched on whilst car is in operation, and switch off by time relay 30 – 60
seconds after car has stopped. Lighting level is to be minimum 200 lux. Fan is to be
provided to bring air into car through the ventilation slots near the wall base and to exhaust
through the ceiling. Fan is to be 2-speed. A screen grill over the fan is to be provided for
mechanical protection of fan. Lighting type and arrangement is subject to
Engineer/Architect approval. Battery is to be provided to operate fan and two of the lighting
fixtures for at least one hour.
L. Natural ventilation is to be provided for each car irrespective of provision of forced

ventilation.
M. Inspection lamp sockets is to be provided below the car. Socket is to be standard VDE type.
N. Indicators and control stations are to be provided in each car as specified in sub-section
14210-2- hereof.
O. Car Inspection Station is to be provided on top of the car to include the following:
1. A two-position (auto/inspection) switch.

2. A run button, to be pressed in conjunction with up down direction buttons. This to
prevent accidental running under inspection.
3. A stop switch.
4. A duplex electrical socket standard VDE type.
5. A work light to be either plugged into the electrical socket or directly wired into the
top of car station. If directly wired an “off/on” switch is required on the top of car
station.
When the station is switched to inspection, the lift speed is not to exceed 0.63 m/s and all
operating devices in the cab are to be inoperative.
P. Car Finish: car finishes are to be as follows:
1. Walls: etched stainless steel (subject to Engineer/Architect approval)

2. Doors: hairline stainless steel (subject to Engineer/Architect approval)
3. Ceiling: stainless steel (subject to Engineer/Architect approval)
4. Handrail: stainless steel at side walls (subject to Engineer/Architect approval)
5. Floor: heavy duty granite (subject to Engineer/Architect approval).
Q. Service telephone or internet set : Provide small cabinet with lockable cover for
telephone/intercom set.
R. Padded Covers are to be provided for each service lift to protect car finishes from damage at
times lift is used to carry freight. Hooks or other means are to be provided inside the cars for
hanging padded covers.

2.4 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A. Counterweight: Structural steel frame fitted with cast iron sub-weights secured with tie rods
or steel sub-weights with locks at the top. Weight is to equal total car weight plus 40 to
50% of contract specified capacity. Counterweight is to be screened to a height of 2 m
from bottom of pit and fitted with renewable guide shoes at top and bottom. Blocking is to
be provided between counter weight and buffer strike plate for at least 250 mm per 60 rope
length.
B. Guide Shoes are to be rolling type for speeds exceeding 1.6 m/sec and sliding type for
speeds 1.6 m/sec and below. Guide shoes are to be adjustable, renewable, and fastened to
top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
C. Guide Rails: highest quality steel T-sections with tongue and grove joints for the car and
counterweight. Hollow sections are not acceptable. Guide rails sections are to be connected
with machine fish plates. For all counterweights and for cars with use suitable rail sizes to
EN81-1:1998 and profiles as per ISO standards. When rail length exceeds 30 m means are
to be provided to absorb rail expansion and structural settlement. Guide rail fixings are to
be heavy steel brackets using metal C-inserts in concrete walls. Guide rail and fixings are to
withstand sudden application of safety gear under maximum load.
D. Inserts: coordinate with builder's works to furnish required concrete inserts and similar
anchorage devices for the installation of guide rails, machinery, and other components of lift
work where installation of devices is indicated as work. Provide necessary shop drawings
for the required works.
E. Suspension Ropes: special acid quality steel or high grade traction steel, single factory
production patch with safety factor as specified by EN 81-1: 1998, or above 14 whichever is
greater. Ropes are to be securely attached to car and counterweight and are to have
independent means of adjustment. There are to be minimum three ropes, each of minimum
8 mm diameter for lifts with traction sheaves. Provide test certificates of compliance with
appropriate Code and/or Standard prior to shipment. For travels above 60 m, provide steel
cord governor ropes to limit movement of the governor tension wheel due to changing
humidity values.
F. Roping Arrangement: roping arrangements used are subject to verification by the

manufacturer and approval of the Engineer.
G. Compensation Ropes: provide compensation for the weight of the hoistway ropes and
unbalanced portion of the traveling cables whenever the travel exceeds 30 m so that the
system balance is not to vary more than 50 kg over the entire range of travel.
H. Compensation Ropes: compensation is to consist of chains with a fire retardant round

resilient rubber cover.
I. Compensation Ropes: compensation ropes are to be attached to the underside of the car and
to the counterweight passing under a weighed compensation sheave in the pit. Provide
lockdown as described in EN81-1:1998 to the compensation sheave assembly, whenever
rope compensation is applied. Provisions are to be made for equalizing tension in the
compensating ropes. The guide sheave is to be provided with bearings of anti-friction
bearing metal, ball or roller type. The guide sheave is to operate in guides, and the guide
structure is to be securely fastened in place. Provide metal guards to prevent ropes jumping
off sheave and to prevent foreign objects from falling between ropes and sheave grooves
and to protect workmen. Provide upper and lower travel limit switched on the
compensation guide sheave. When actuated, power to the drive and brake shall be removed.

J. Buffers: are to be approved design, oil type for speeds exceeding 1.0 m/sec and spring type
or polyurethane buffers for speeds 1.0 m/sec and below. Buffers are to be installed under
each car and counterweight. Use reduced stroke buffers with associated terminal slowdown
devices where runbys are restrictive. Buffers are to be tested by a qualified testing
laboratory and approved as complying with the governing code.
K. Spring Type or Polyurethane Buffers are to be in full compliance with the requirements of the EN 81-
1:1998 Code
L. Oil Buffers: provide oil buffers with necessary blocking and horizontal steel braces. Oil
buffers are to bring the care and counterweight to rest from governor tripping speed at an
average rate of retardation not exceeding gravity. Oil buffers are to be of the spring return
type and shall have means of the checking oil supply level. Oil buffers are to have a
marking plate indicating the manufacturer's name, the buffers identification number and the
stroke.
M. Governor Actuated Mechanical Safety Gear: mechanical safety gear is to be mounted on

and securely fastened to car frame and actuated by a governor mounted in machine room.
Governor is to be directly driven by steel cable or chain. Safety gear and governor are to be
in compliance with EN 81:1:1998.
N. Safety Gear: is to hold car securely under maximum load and governor tripping speed
conditions. Jaws of here are to engage guide rails through self-aligning shoes with surfaces
carefully machined parallel to guide rail face. Pressure of jaws on the two guides is to be
equal. Safety gear is to bring car to stop from governor tripping speed. Make provisions to
release the car safety. In no event the safety is to be released by downward motion of the
car. Raising the car to reset the safety gear is to be allowed. An electrical safety plank
switch is to be provided to interrupt the powder to the hoist machine when the safety gear is
set.
O. Safety Gear Type Test is to be type tested in accordance with EN 81-1 by an approved
independent test body. Certified type test report is to be submitted for approval. Install a
car safety marking plate of corrosion resistant metal and, in addition to the data required by
the governing code, indicate the manufacturer's name and manufacturer's catalogue
designation number for the safety gear.
P. Governor is to be accurately adjusted and sealed to trip safety gear according to EN81-1
requirements. Operation of governor on over speed is also a switch disconnecting power
from motor and brake control circuits, which are to be open before safety gear is applied.
Restoration of powder is not to be possible until safety gear has been manually re-set.
Governor is to be sealed and tagged in accordance with EN 81-1.
Q. Governor Ropes: the over speed governor is to be driven by a wire rope designed for that
purpose with minimum diameter of 6 mm and to be easily detachable from the safety gear.
The ratio between the pitch diameter of the pulleys for the over speed governor ropes and
the nominal rope diameter shall be at least 30. The over speed governor rope is to be
tensioned by a tensioning guided pulley. Design the governor rope-tripping device so that no
appreciable damage to or deformation of the governor rope is to result from the stopping
action of the device in operating the car safety.
R. Counter Weight Safety Gear: provide a governor actuated mechanical safety gear under the
counterweight for all lifts having occupied space below their hoistways.
S. Safety Gear Type is to be progressive (gradual) type.

T. Machine Room-Less Lifts: all machine-room-less lifts are to be powered by gearless

machines with permanent magnet synchronous motors mounted in the overhead inside the
lift shaft. Neither machines nor controllers are allowed to be placed in the pit. Provide
variable voltage variable frequency drives built into the control panel and located inside the
shaft next to the machine. A machine access panel is to built in either the landing door frame
or the adjacent wall at the last served floor to facilitate maintenance, and emergency
applications
2.5 DOORS
A. Opening Sizes: Landing and car door openings are to be same size.
B. Automatic Sliding Car And Landing Doors: Power operated type, to open silently, and to
have the following features:
1. Hangers and tracks of two-point suspension ball or roller bearing type; doors guided at
bottom by gibs in grooved sill; grooves and tracks cleaned automatically by operation
of doors.
2. Safety device, extending full height of each door and projecting beyond front edge, to
automatically open car and landing doors if it touches an obstruction.
3. Light-beam and photo-electric cell device to open doors when light-beam is
interrupted and to automatically optimize time of opening and re-closing.
4. Doors are to open automatically and simultaneously when car stops at required floor,
are to remain open for a reasonable, adjustable period, and automatically and
simultaneously close, as set in elevator control sequence.
5. 'Door Open' push button on car control panel is to reverse door closing operation, but
is not to open an interlocked door.
6. Door contact to prevent operation of the car unless the car door is in the closed
position. The door contacts are not be readily accessible from the inside of the car.
7. Nudging facility so that if the doors are held. Open for a predetermined time (15 to 20
seconds) by interrupting the lighting beams or by holding the door, or by pressing the
door open button, a buzzer is to sound and the doors is to start to close at reduced rate
of speed. Doors are to continue to close unless the door force limits is not exceeded,
which is to cause doors to reopen or stop. Process is to continue until obstruction is
removed from entrance.
8. All landing doors to be 2 hours fire related as per British Standards, except glass door
of panoramic lifts.
C. Electric door operator, driven by electric motor minimum IP 21, is to open and close car and
landing doors simultaneously where a car door is provided. Door operation is to be
automatically controlled by elevator control system, with facility to manually reverse door
closing operation from car control panel. Doors are to be mechanically secured and
electrically interlocked when closed. Electric door operator is to have the following
features:
1. Multi-speed electric motor driving unit, mounted on car frame (independently from
car body), with necessary gears, levers and door arms to achieve smooth operation of
doors in both directions and an opening speed higher than closing speed.
2. Digital closed-loop system to monitor and control the door speed.
3. Torque limiting clutch to prevent harm to persons caught by closing door, but to
overcome small obstructions in bottom guide track.
4. Manual opening of doors is to be possible in the event of power failure, if car is at
landing, landing door is to open with car door; mechanism is to reset automatically.

5. For installations, in which doors commence opening while car is leveling to landing,
mechanical and electrical devices are to ensure no dangerous situation can occur
during this period.
D. Emergency Doors: for express runs exceeding 11m, provide emergency landing door every
11m. Emergency landing doors are to be automatic, sliding, central opening, of same type,
size and finish of the landing doors of the same lift group, 2 hours fire rated and to be
provided by the lift supplier.
E. Door Frames and Sills: Door support units fitted at landing entrance are to be self-
contained, comprising sill, two angle uprights and head. Non-slip sill is to be fitted at each
landing and car entrance. Architraves are to be fixed at each landing.
2.6 VARIABLE VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY (VVVF) DRIVE CONTROLLER
A. Motor Drive: unless otherwise indicated or specified, use 3-phase, solid state, and variable-
voltage variable-frequency (VVVF) power drive with regulated closed loop speed
monitoring control system. Drive is to utilize IGBT power semi-conductors having means
for heat dissipation and overheat protection (include thermal overload). Drive units are to be
provided with isolation transformers and smoothing reactors to eliminate mechanical
vibration from ripple voltage transients. Matched motor (high efficiency vector design)
including encoder for speed feedback is to be provided. Air blower is to be used for thermal
dissipation over the entire range of operation and stall.
B. Continuous Operation: drive is to be designed for continuous operation at rated speed and
rated load, and for 10 minutes at rated speed and 110 percent of rated load, without
overheating. Ensure that, in such operating conditions, normal power sources are not
adversely affected and emergency generator circuits (and loads connected to the emergency
power bus) are not adversely affected during Standby Power operation. Protect each power
feed line against surge currents. Prevent runaway in the event of closed loop feedback
circuit failure.
C. Electronic Negative Feedback System: is to be used to limit current through IGBT’s and
motor, incorporating:
Pattern-generator giving a velocity input signal modified by car position, with

constant peak acceleration and constant change of acceleration.
Encoder to provide a velocity feedback signal.
Digital transducer to provide a position feedback signal.
Current transformer to provide a current feedback signal.
D. Power Line Noise is to be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch as defined in
IEEE 519-1981 Edition, "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static
Power Converters". The total voltage distortion is not to exceed 3 percent. Necessary filters
are to be provided to limit the feedback current harmonics to 10%.
E. Overall Drive System Response: arrange system response so that the elapsed time between
fault detection and removal of electric power does not exceed 0.1 second. Overall drive
efficiency is to be greater than 95 percent. Power factor is to be 0.95 minimum.

F. Power Supply: equipments are to be designed to operate at ± 10 percent supply voltage and
± 3 percent supply frequency, without damage to any equipment and to operate at ± 5
percent supply voltage and ± 3 percent supply frequency without affecting operational
performance quality. Protective devices are to be provided for both over-voltage and under-
voltage conditions. Protect against loss of phase, phase reversal or overload. Incoming
power supply is to be provided with contactor inside the control panel.
G. Controller: the controller is to be microprocessor-based and provided with the following

operating features and performance functions:
digital control, with adjustments that do not vary, drift or age with line voltage
changes.
linearity between required torque and torque output.
over-torque detection, to shut down the drive and protect the motor.
precise closed-loop speed, regulated to less than ± 1% by frequency

compensation.
S-curve ‘soft’ start/stop, with a fast speed response system.
diagnostic record of the history of the lift operating conditions, from the
instant of the last fault occurrence back 30 days minimum, and to include the
following as a minimum:
Emergency Faults
Fire service activation
Inspection mode
Independent Service
Time out of service
Car out of service
Safety Edge failure
Emergency Power
application-specific memory to support logic function programming, to tailor

the drive.
quiet motor operation, based on high switching frequencies and low harmonic
content.
full function operator interface with alphanumeric display. Include: a menu

structure with scrolling to reveal system options and display parameters; and
interactive interface to permit display and ready changing of parameter values;
constant pressure jog for pre-set speed control; motor rotation direction
selector; run/stop commands.
protective features including phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral short-circuit

protection; ground fault protection; electronic motor overload protection; over-

torque and under-torque detection; over current, over-voltage ad over-

temperature detection; input/output phase loss.
noise filter between hoistway wiring and controller to eliminate interference.
H. Protection: system is to be protected against the following:
an error level exceeds the signal by more than 5 percent.
actual acceleration exceeds a pre-set pattern more than 15 percent.
excessive transistor switching time or overheating of solid-state components.
car positions as derived from a digital transducer and an integrated velocity

feedback signals differ by more than 12 mm.
no voltage or sustained under voltage.
over current in any component.
phase reversal of power supply.
I. Wiring: install copper wiring runs are to be neatly installed. Wire is to be terminated at
studs or terminal strips, with connections to ensure substantial electrical and mechanical
integrity. All major components are to be exactly identified as indicated on wiring diagrams
by engravings or tags mounted immediately adjacent to the component.
J. Enclosure is to be a sheet metal cabinet totally enclosed, IP 21 with removable hinged doors
(key-locked) and with filtered ventilation sufficient to maintain interior temperature at a
reasonable level.
K. Auxiliary Emergency Supply: control system is to operate from rectified a.c. supply, at a
suitably selected and approved d.c. voltage. Negative terminal is to be connected to earth.
Battery is to be sealed nickel cadmium type, capable of operating intercom, car fan, car
lights and alarm circuits for 4 hours, in the event of power failure.
2.8 CONTROLLER
A. Enclosure: Vertical, totally enclosed cubicle type, constructed from sheet steel, with hinged
doors at front and ventilation louvers or other approved method to ensure that inside
temperature does not exceed safe limit for equipment.
B. Components are to include all contactors, relays, logic circuits, selectors, timing devices,
control transformers and apparatus associated with control of elevator in machine room.
Circuit breaker and isolator may be wall mounted outside controller cubicle, next to main
supply feeder, but opening of cubicle door is to trip circuit breaker, cutting off power
supply.
C. Contactors: Power contactors are to be electro-magnetically operated and are to have

carbon to copper contacts. Control circuits are to have silver contacts. Contactors are to
close with wiping, self-cleaning action. Reversing contactors are to be mechanically

interlocked to prevent contacts for one direction closing whilst contacts for other direction
are closed.
D. Insulation for coils and other insulated components is to be Class B or better, suitable for
ambient temperatures at location.
E. Protection: Controller is to provide protection, by cutting-off power supply, applying brake

and bringing car to rest, in the event of any of the following failures:
1. No voltage or sustained under voltage.

2. Over-current in any component.
3. Phase reversal of power supply.
4. Overload.
5. Operation of any safety device.
6. Overheating of electronic components.
7. Any other protection required by applicable standards.
F. Auxiliary Emergency Supply: Control system is to operate from rectified a.c. supply, at a
suitably selected and approved d.c. voltage. Negative terminal is to be connected to earth.
Battery is to be sealed lead-acid type, capable of operating all controls, car fan, lights and
alarm circuits for 6 hours, in the event of power failure.
G. Interface with BMS: each equipment shall be provided with additional free contact points
required for direct interfacing with the BMS provide and 5% spare contacts capacity for
additional future requirements. It’s the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure proper
interfacing through the provision of dedicated interfaces, after coordination with the BMS
Contractor.
H. Controller is to provide protective features including phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral

short circuit protection; ground fault protection; electronic motor overload protection; over
torque and under torque detection; over current, over voltage and over temperature
detection, input/output phase loss. All protections shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of section 14 of EN81-1 and local codes.
2.7 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment generally is to be in accordance with the requirements of relevant Division 16

Sections.
B. Power Supply Variations: Equipment is to operate satisfactorily if voltage varies ±10%

and/or frequency varies ±3% from nominal.
C. Wires and cables inside machine room are to be silicon rubber or PVC insulated, 600/1000
V grade, flame retardant. MICC and silicon rubber insulated cables are to be used for high
ambient temperatures. Conductors are to be copper.
D. Conduits and Wireways: Wiring and unarmored cables are to be enclosed in heavy gauge
galvanized steel conduits or wireways as per EN81-1: 1998.
E. Earthing: Metal frames of elevator installations are to be earthed according to Division 16

Section "Grounding and Bonding" and En81-1; 1998.
2.8 CONTROL ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide all necessary car, landing and other control accessories as required by
specified control system.
B. Car locked service cabinet is to be flush mounted, located below the car call buttons and
contain the switches required to operate and maintain the lift, including, but not limited to
the following:
1. Key operated priority service switch for isolation purposes.

2. Duplex socket standard VDE type.
3. Emergency light test button or switch.
C. Car control panel is to be located in an approved convenient position and is to contain at

least the following:
1. Up and down illuminated arrows.

2. Alarm push button.
3. Pushes for each floor served.
4. Lights, indicating registered unanswered floor calls emergency stop push button.
5. Key operated car cut-out service switch for isolation purposes.
6. Independent key operated switch.
7. Door open and door close pushes.
8. Overweight light and buzzer.
9. Audible signal to indicate that car is stopping at the required floor
10. Intercom station (interconnected to control room).
11. Maintenance and test switches with locked cover.
D. Car control station is to project below bottom of car platform. Trailing control cable is to
terminate at terminal block on control station. Access to terminals is to be from inside car.
E. Car control station is to project above car roof and is to contain necessary control pushes for
maintenance, lamp with switch and convenience power socket.
F. Directional Indicator Inside Car: Arrow in green display, fitted in car control panel to
indicate to passengers entering, the direction of travel.
G. Chime for passengers’ elevators / Gong for service elevators is to be provided to indicate
arrival.
H. Directional indicators at landings are to be installed at each elevator entrance to indicate

arrival and direction of travel of car arriving at landing.
I. Position indicators are to be dynamic LED, display, and indicating floor, fitted in car control
panel and above landing entrance at main floor. Position indicators are to have finished face
plates of material specified in schedules for back of the house elevators and as per ID
specification in ID’s area..
J. Hall Push Buttons At Landings: Comprise up and down pushes and associated illuminated
arrows to indicate registered call. Terminal landings are to have one push and one arrow.
Illuminated arrow is to switch off when call is answered. Push buttons are to be most up-to-
date, mechanical, soft touch, plated metal framed and squarely fitting in face panel Refer to
refer to ID specifications for finishes of non-public lifts.
K. Hall Push Button Operation: prevent simultaneous up and down call registration by delaying
acceptance of second call registration for 4 seconds (adjustable).

L. Elevator bank control panel is to be provided for each elevator bank, and conveniently
located in main elevator lobby or control/supervisory room. Arrangement and design of
panel are to be approved. Control and operating devices are to be properly identified by
engraved signs. Panel is to include the following:
1. Illuminated position and travel direction indicators for each elevator of the bank.
2. Service switches, and internal regulating or adjusting devices etc. in accordance with
system requirements.
3. Control switches, alarm sounder and signal lights as needed.
M. Fireman switch, installed in a locked cabinet with break glass feature, is to be provided for
each elevator bank. Cabinets are to be located at main landing floor, in an approved easily
accessible position. Identification and inscription are to be engraved on the face plate.
Refer to "Control Systems" Article for description of operation.
N. Hall Fireman Key Switch: two positions (ON-OFF) key operated fireman switch is to be
provided for each fire fighter lift, located at main landing floor in an approved easily
accessible position. The key is to be removable in both “ON” and “OFF” positions.
Identification and inscription are to be engraved on the face plate. Contractor is to
coordinate between lift packages for providing common fire man-key switches for all
package
O. Emergency key to open all landing doors is to be handed to the Employer.
2.9 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Interlock: No car is to be able to move unless car and corresponding landing doors are fully
closed and interlocked. It is not to be possible to open landing door, except that at which car
is stopped, and any other door without the use of special tamperproof key.
B. Emergency Stop: Operation of emergency stop device in any car is to bring this car to an
immediate stop and it is to remain stopped until device is reset. This is not to cancel
registered calls.
C. Independent Operation: All passenger lifts are to be provided with independent operation
features and when independent key switch is turned “on”, lift is to be removed from
automatic operation and is to respond only to car calls. Door is not to close until for another
landing is pressed. Switch is to be located on car operating panel.
D. Operation from Emergency Generator Supply: in the event of normal power supply failure
all lifts are to stop. Upon receiving signal that emergency a.c. power supply is on, control
system is to return lifts one at a time, in sequence, directly to main floor. When lift arrives
at main floor, doors are to open and remain open, and lift is to remain stopped. One lift of
each group in addition to all fire fighter lifts is then to be operational, and is to respond to
car and landing calls. After restoration of normal power supply all lifts are to resume
normal service automatically. Transfer to and from emergency supply is to be carried out
through dry contacts in the respective Automatic Transfer Switches.
E. Operation from Emergency Power Batteries: If the normal power supply fails to start, lifts
are to automatically switch to battery operation. Each lift is to move in the “light” direction
at maintenance speed and is to stop at the nearest available floor, open its door for passenger
to exit then close and wait for the operation from the Emergency Supply, when normal
power is restored before the lift has reached the next available floor the lifts operating on
emergency battery power is to stop at the next available floor and be automatically removed

from service. Emergency battery power is then to be disconnected and normal power is to
sealed lead acid type.
F. Excess Load: Load-weighing device installed in car is to prevent car from starting in either
direction if maximum loading is exceeded (adjustable from 100% of cull capacity and set at
100%). Buzzer is to sound and an 'overweight' light is to be illuminated until car is below
maximum load. Excess load is to cause car to by-pass landing calls if car is loaded above
normal but within an acceptable load limit.
G. Overload bypass: excess load is to cause car to bypass landing calls if car is loaded above
normal but within an acceptable load limit. Load capacity is to be set at 70% (adjustable
from 60 – 80% of full load capacity) car load factor of 70% is to be used for all traffic
analysis.
H. Fireman Switch: Operation of switch is to
Cancel all cars and landing calls, prevent operation of door photocells if provided and bring
all cars to stop at main landing, with automatic doors open. Resetting of switch manually is
not to be possible. Operation of special switch is to separate elevator control, cancel all
landing calls and prevent operation of photocells of doors. Car is to resume operation
manually from car push buttons.
Automatically illuminate all Lighting fixture installed inside the machine room and
firefighter elevator shaft.
I. Anti-Nuisance Feature: in the event of car loading or operation is not commensurate with
the number of car call registered, all calls are to be cancelled.
J. Fire Emergency Service: meet local civil defense regulations for lifts fire emergency
operating conditions – fire emergency operation mode of lifts is to be activated via the
following:
1. Actuation of fireman key switch at the main control room.

2. Automatic through the fire alarm system.
The main landing floor for the fire fighter lifts under fire conditions, at which the hall
fireman key switches are to be installed, is the floor where the main fire control room
is located. It could be different from the main landing floor for same lifts under
normal conditions.
K. Fire Emergency Operation through Hall Fireman Key Switch is to be as follows:
When a hall fireman key-operated switch is put in the "on" position, all relevant hotel
lifts which are on automatic service are to return non-stop to the main landing floor
and the doors are to open and remain open.
Car(s) travelling away from the main landing floor are to stop at the next available
floor without opening their doors and return directly to the main landing floor.
For cars equipped with automatic power-operated doors, standing at a floor other than
the main landing floor with doors open, the doors are to close immediately and the
car is to proceed to the main landing floor.
Door reopening devices for power-operated doors which are sensitive to smoke, heat
or flame are to be rendered inoperative.

All car and landing floor call buttons are to be rendered inoperative and all call
registered lights and direction lanterns are to be switched off and remain inoperative.
when the switch is in the "off" position the lift shall revert to normal operation.
L. Fire Emergency Operation through Fire Alarm System:
The activation of fire alarm detection device in any lift lobby, other than at the main
landing floor, is to cause all cars that serve that lobby to return non-stop to the main
landing floor and their doors are to open and remain open.
The activation of fire alarm detection device in any lift machine room is to cause all
lifts having any equipment located in that machine room, and any associated lifts of a
group automatic operation, to return non-stop to the main landing floor and their
doors are to open and remain open.
The activation of fire alarm detection device in any lift hoistway is to cause all lifts
having any equipment located in the hoistway and any associated lifts in a group
automatic operation, to return non-stop to the main landing floor and their doors are
to open and remain open.
If the fire alarm detection device at the main landing floor is activated, the cars are to
return non-stop to an alternate level, approved by the concerned authority, and their
doors are to open and remain open.
The operation of the lift requires the manual resetting of the fire alarm system.
M. Fire Fighter Lifts: only fire fighter lifts can resume operation under fire emergency
conditions from car push buttons by activation of the car fire emergency key switch. The car
fire emergency switch is to be effective only when the hall fireman key switch at the main
landing floor is in the "on" position or the fire alarm detection device (if provided) is
activated and the car is at the main landing floor. The car key is to be removable only in the
"off" position. When the car key switch is in the "on" position, it is to bring the lift into the
emergency mode. Emergency operation from inside the car is to be cancelled when the hall
fireman key switch is switched to the "off" position with the car at the main landing floor
N. Fire Fighter Lift Operation Under Fire Emergency Conditions is to be as follows after
activation of the car fire emergency key switch:
the lift is to be operable only by a person in the car.
the lift is not to respond to landing floor calls.
the opening of power operated doors is to be controlled only by continuous pressure

of the "open" button and if the button is released prior to the doors reaching the fully
open position, the doors are to automatically reclose. Open doors are to be closed by
either the registration of a car call button or by pressure on door "close" button.

2.10 LIFT OPERATION MODES
A. Simplex Selective-Collective Control With or Without Attendant, With Automatic Doors

(One Lift): 'up' and 'down' directional call pushes are to be provided at each landing served,
together with 'call registered' illuminated signal for each push. Only one push is to be
provided at terminal landings. In the car, a push is to be provided for each floor served,
marked with appropriate floor designation. The operation is to be controlled by a
microprocessor based supervisory control system. Provide simplex selective collective
operation from a single riser of hall push button stations. Prevent simultaneous up and down
calls by delaying acceptance of the other call for 4 seconds when simultaneously pressed.
The registration of one or more car calls is to dispatch the car to the designated floors in the
order in which the floors are reached by the car, irrespective of the sequence in which the
calls were registered. The car is also to respond to registered hall calls in the same direction
of travel. Car and hall calls are to be cancelled when answered.
When travelling in the up direction, the car is to stop at floors for which car calls or up hall
calls have been registered. It is not to stop at floors where a down hall call only has been
registered, unless the stop for that floor is in response to a registered car call or unless the
down hall call is at the highest floor for which any call has been registered. Likewise, a
down travelling car is not to stop at a floor where only an up hall call has been registered
unless the stop for that floor is in response to a registered car call, or unless the up call is at
the lowest floor for which any call has been registered.
When the car has responded to the highest or lowest call, and calls are registered for the
opposite direction, the car is to reverse direction automatically and respond to those
registered calls.
If the car has no car calls registered and arrives at a floor where both up and down hall calls
have been registered, the car is to respond to the hall call corresponding to the direction of
car travel.
If, after making its stop, a car call is not registered and no other hall calls exist ahead of the
car corresponding to its original direction of travel, the doors are to close and immediately
reopen in response to the hall call for the opposite direction.
The car is to maintain its original direction at each stop until the doors are fully closed to
permit a passenger to register a car call before the car reverses its direction of travel.
2.11 LOOSE EQUIPMENT, SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Generally: Supply loose equipment, spare parts and accessories as required for normal
operation and routine maintenance of the systems and as detailed by the Contractor in his
offer for spare parts and accessories. Supply is to include, but is not limited to, the
following:
1. Loose Equipment: Operating handles, emergency brake release keys and the like.
2. Spare Parts: One complete set of main contacts and control coil for each type of
power contactor, solid-state PC cards, contacts and control coils for each type of
control relay, two each of transistors, diodes, rectifiers, resistors etc. used in control
circuits, one complete set of indicating lamps, fuses, capacitors, circuit-breakers,
contact points etc., air filters, brushes, bearings and the like, as necessary for two
years operation.
3. Tools and Accessories: Tools and equipment required for routine checking,
maintenance, testing and control of installations, with appropriate portable measuring
and test instruments.

B. Identification: Parts are to be packed in sealed plastic bags with identifying labels and
factory part list numbers.
2.12 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Handicapped Requirements: passenger lift design is to include the following handicapped

requirements:
locate the alarm button and car call buttons on the car operating panel where possible
as required by part M.
provide car control buttons and hall push buttons with tactile marking, the tactile
marking shall be in compliance with part M.
the centerline of the hall push button stations is to be 1100 mm above the floor where
possible.
the hall lanterns are to sound once for the "up" direction and twice for the “down"
direction.
2.13 REMOTE MONITORING AND COMMAND SYSTEM
A. System: computerized lift remote monitoring and command system complete including
software and necessary data and communication network is to be provided for all elevators
moving walk and escalators of the project. All material and installation requirements of the
communication network within the project are to be coordinated with lift supplier and are to
be as per his requirements. Panel is to be located at the control room.
B. Software Package: the software is to cover all required monitoring and command functions,
maintenance program requirements in coordination with the maintenance contract and
necessary communications and interfaces with lift control system and other concerned
systems.
C. System: lift remote monitoring and command system is to include a state-of-art, multicolour
high resolution, minimum 17-inch display, personal computer with adequate mass storage
capacity and a dedicated high quality printer. Monitoring and command facility is to be
provided in each machine room, either through local fixed or portable computer unit.
Equipment specifications are to be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
D. Monitoring Display: the system is to be capable of displaying the information in graphic or

tubular displays as follows:
Graphic status display of an elevation representation for all cars in a group are to be shown
in the same time for each group including the following as a minimum:
Floor status
Group operational mode
Car status
Hall calls

Date and time, building and group identification.
Tabular status display is to include as a minimum the same information as above except for
registered hall and car calls.
E. Lift Alarm and Event Data Display: lift remote monitoring and command system is to
monitor various discrete signals from the lift system and retain a log of alarms, fault and
events. An audible alarm with adjustable volume and silencer is to automatically sound at
each lift failure and or alarm condition.
F. Security Display and Command Operation: system is to display one group at a time and is to
allow through keyboard commands modification of the security status of the car in the
group, including floors the car is allowed to serve, floors that the car is secured from serving
and floors that are cut out from having hall calls registered from them.
G. Interactive Lift Operations Display and Control: the ability to use the keyboard to initiate
and display interactive lift, including but not limited to, the following is to be provided:
Display faults and events
Alarm messages
Any other special operations allowed by the manufacturer.
H. Traffic Analysis Display: system is to be capable for viewing various reports generated from
the data including the following as a minimum:
Total number of hall calls (up/down)
Average hall call times (up/down)
Maximum hall call time
Number of car calls per car
Number of hall and car calls per landing (up/down)
Average hall call time per landing
Histogram of registration times
Record of all events alarms
Statics showing percentages of time in different operation modes
Playback of the graphic status display
I. Historical Data: system is to be capable of providing full historical data for minimum 30
days, and tendering for modes of operations, failures, alarms, maintenance requirements as a
minimum.
J. Documentation: provide complete documentation, illustrating functions of software

systems; including the following:
General system overview,

High-level functional description,
I-O tables and charts, showing output bus and input signals,
Applicable technical manuals for adjusting, including drive control adjustment,

terminal characteristics for diagnostic work, and user procedures.
2.14 LIFT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. Intercom: provide an intercommunication system for all lifts. System is to provide two-way
communication between the lift car stations and the master stations.
B. Station Types: the system is to have the following stations:
slave station in each lift car.
master station in each lift machine room.
master station in the main control room of each tower and podium.
master station in the main fire control room of the complex.
C. Car Station is to have a loudspeaker and a microphone to provide hands-free

communication. The station is to be installed behind the car operating panel.
D. Master Station is to be provided with selector push buttons, annunciator lights for each
connected station, speaker microphone, volume control and function buttons. The intercom
system is to include test button to verify audio circuit path.
E. Car Intercom Call: an intercom call is to be placed from the lift car station by pressing the
emergency alarm push button. This action is to cause the lamp in the corresponding button
of all the designated master stations to flash and an intermittent tone to be heard.
F. For firefighter elevators two-way communication systems shall be provided between

elevator lobbies and a central control point and between elevator cars and a central control
point. Communications wiring shall be protected to ensure at least 1 hour of operation in the
event of fire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work.
Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify
critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which
elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work required during
installation.
B. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and
sequence to avoid construction delays. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to
ensure dimensional coordination of the Work. Ccordinate equipment installations with the
building construction to prevent alteration to structure and cutting of holes and chases after
equipment installation has started. Ensure provision of pit screen separators between
adjacent elevators and for screening off counterweight to a height of 2.5 m from bottom of
pit for safety of maintenance personnel and provide steel access ladders for pits having no
external doors. Carry out necessary coordination with electrical works to provide necessary
power supply, interfaces, dry contacts and connection with automatic transfer switch and
fire alarm system.
C. Assembly: equipment is, as far as possible, to be factory assembled, wired and tested. Site
work is to be limited to installation and assembly of parts dismantled at factory for
transportation, or otherwise to work not possible at factory.
D. Workmanship: Carry out work in a neat, workmanlike and efficient manner in accordance
with specified requirements. Installation is to be performed by skilled personnel,
specialized in elevator installation, who are in the permanent employment of the
manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized dealer.
E. Accessibility: Install equipment so that it is readily accessible for operation, maintenance

and repair.
F. Builder's Work: Carry out all builders’ work necessarily required in connection with
installation of elevators, including but not limited to, forming or cutting chases, rebates, etc.,
grouting, supports, steelwork, scaffolding, etc. Provide convenience power, lighting and
other services required, from assigned terminal points, to carry out construction work.
G. Elevator Shafts: Ensure that entrance shaft wall is in same vertical plane as face of landing
doors and that whole face is perfectly smooth. Gap between shaft wall and car door sill is
not to exceed 10 mm for whole length of shaft.
H. Fixing Elevator Guide Rails: Keep rails in proper alignment using steel splice plates of
adequate strength. Verticality of rail is to be within 0.2% tolerance. Space fixing brackets
to minimize rail vibration during operation, and at not more than 2 m centres.
I. Painting: Protect unfinished metalwork by painting, unless technically undesirable.

Painting is to include thorough cleaning of metal, application of rust inhibiting prime coat
and two finishing coats of approved enamel.
J. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts

designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby, eliminate
sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system.
K. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.
L. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide

rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment

of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe,
workable dimension at each landing.
M. Leveling Tolerance: 10-mm up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
N. Set sills flush with finished: Floor surface at landing coordinate with other trades to
facilitate and ensure proper grouting of sills.
A. TESTS: after installation is complete and before handover, carry out all tests required by
the Governing Regulations and Standards and including but not limited to the following:
Load the car to various percentages of rated capacity, and test load related features
including: dispatch, bypass, anti-nuisance, levelling, door operation, etc.
Test performance parameters in both travel directions and for various loads (0%, 40%
& 100% of rated capacity): speed, operating time, levelling, door operation, dwell
times, door protection, acceleration and jerk rate.
Check the safety gear operation and tests.
Inspect machinery spaces, electrical and mechanical devices on the car and in the
hoistway, for conformance with specified requirements and to industry standards.
Run the car to simulate responses to all lift and machine room inspection and service
utilities.
Check control system features, including all special or emergency services and
utilities. Obtain (or simulate) signals initiating special and emergency services and
utilities, and run the lift to demonstrate its response characteristics.
Test harmonic distortion.
Measure noise levels.
Measure insulation resistances and temperature rises at various components.
If equipment does not meet specified requirements, make necessary corrections and
provide again (similarly) for another test sequence.
Carry out any other tests the Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of
installation with the Specification. Tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer and, if
required, by the authority concerned.
B. Performance Test: approximately nine months after Substantial Completion of the entire lift
plant supply test weights and a senior team to carry out performance testing including but
not limited to the following:
Assist the Engineer with tests and inspections of car, drive and control system, as
well as other operating features.
Use a microprocessor-based recording monitor (with sufficient channels and response

capability) to display landing calls, lift position, motion status, door open-and-close,

special or emergency services and utility features. Record operation for typical day
and night traffic over 24-hours, as directed by Lift Consultant.
Install a high-resolution colour video-recording device to provide a graphic display of

lift car movement against registered hall-calls, hall-call assignments, and car-calls.
Record the operation for typical day and night traffic conditions, over a 24-hours
period, as directed by the Engineer.
Submit detailed raw test data (both hard and soft copy) to the Engineer, as well as
hard copy reports with data summaries, for such time-intervals and recording
conditions as stipulated by the Engineer.
Submit real time videotape (or approved equivalent) for review by the Engineer.
If equipment does not meet specified requirements, make necessary corrections and
provide again (similarly) for another test sequence
C. Equipment Failure: make good any damage to equipment caused by tests or damage to
building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
D. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of elevator installation and before

permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as
required and recommended by the "Code" and governing regulations and agencies.
E. Advise Employer, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and
times tests are to be performed on elevators.
F. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
including free-fall tests, load and speed tests, and other tests required by the Governing
Regulations and Standards. Carry out any other tests the Engineer may require to check
safety and compliance of installation with specified requirements. Tests are to be witnessed
by the Engineer and, if required, by the authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused by tests or
damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
H. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests.

SECTION 14310 - ESCALATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes escalators.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and

anchoring devices in concrete.
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for attachment plates, angle brackets, and other
preparation of structural steel for supporting escalators.
3. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall and ceiling access panels and access
doors in escalator enclosures.
5. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to escalators, including fused disconnect
switches.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Escalators: Power-driven, inclined, continuous stairways used for raising or lowering

passengers, including support trusses, balustrades, floor plates, components, machines,
safety and control devices, internal electrical wiring of units, graphics, and other
components necessary for complete escalator installations and as required to safely operate
escalators at rated speed and capacity.
B. Escalator Width: The width of the step treads.
A. Rated Speed: 0.5 m/s.
B. Braking Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install escalators to stop the escalator in the
up-running mode at a rate no greater than that allowed by the "Code" for the down-running
mode.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each escalator. Include capacities, sizes, performances, safety features,
finishes, and similar information.
ESCALATORS 14310 - Page 1 of 10


B. Shop Drawings: For each escalator. Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale
details indicating coordination with building structure and relationships with other
construction. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static
loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and power requirements. Indicate
access and ventilation for escalator machine space and wellways.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes, 75-mm square samples of sheet materials, and 100-mm
lengths of running trim members.
E. Maintenance Manuals: For each different escalator, including operation and maintenance
instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing,
emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair
information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for
Employer's information at project closeout as specified in Division 1.
G. Certificates and Permits: Provide Employer with inspection and acceptance certificates and
operating permits as required by governing authorities for normal, unrestricted use of
escalators.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the escalator manufacturer or an experienced Installer

approved by the escalator manufacturer who has completed escalator installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with the

applicable provisions of the following Standards, referred to as the "Code", in order of
priority:
1. BS EN 115, "Safety Rules for the Construction of Escalators and Passenger

Conveyors".
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore, or replace defective escalator work during the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.


maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the escalator Installer. Include
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper escalator operation at rated speed.
Use only parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.

hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER

1. Kone (Finland)
2. Fujitec, Inc (Japan)
3. Mitsubishi (Japan)
4. Otis Elevator Co. (USA or France)
5. Shindler Elevator Corp (Switzerland)
2.2 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Escalators Components: are to be designed to give a life of 150,000 hours based upon the
load profile specified by the BS EN-115. The escalators are to be of proven technology and
designed to have low energy consumption, low operational cost and are to be environment
friendly.
B. Supporting Truss: Welded steel lattice-girder construction, designed to support inherent

weights of escalators, transport load of 5000 N/m2 and dynamic loads (load surface =
useable width of escalator x distance between support points). Sag or downward bending of
supporting structure, when under load, is not to exceed 1/1000 of free distance between
supports. Insulation pads are to be provided at both ends of main truss to prevent noise and
vibration transmission to building structure. The truss is to be designed in such a way to
accommodate the load without the need of intermediate supports unless otherwise specified
or shown on drawings.
C. Machine Soffit: Smooth steel plate, 4 mm thick, welded and made oil-tight to side members
of main truss, installed beneath step band over whole area of escalator, and having oil drain
pit in bottom reversing station.
D. Floor Coverings: Stationary parts of escalator are to be heavy duty aluminium profiles.
Groove beds of floor surfaces are to be black anodized, and upper surfaces are to be
smoothed to the base metal frames, and set flush with finished floor. Floor coverings in area

of machine installations are to be squarely seated and tighty fitted to prevent noise
development.
E. Steps: Die-cast, corrosion proof, aluminium alloy with front edges grooved vertically so
that edges of tread surfaces enmesh in grooves. Tread and front-edge surfaces of steps are
not to end in a groove under balustrade skirting. Front edge between tread and front face is
to be rounded or bevelled. Four support rollers to each step are to be at least 76 mm outside
diameter and are to run on ball bearings completely encapsulated against dust and water (RS
sealing), with lifetime lubrication, without lube nipples. Step chain rollers are to be fitted
outside or inside chain link plates, depending upon manufacturer's design, and are to be at
least 80 mm diameter. Running treads (tires) of rollers are to be non-ageing, hardwearing,
noise-dampening and oil and acid-resistant synthetic rubber (e.g. NBR nitrile rubber).
Treads are to be at least 15 mm thick and 25 mm wide. Rapid removal of steps is to be
possible at both upper and lower ends of escalator without removing balustrade panels or
skirting plates. Assembled steps and any attachments to steps are not allowed.
F. Comb Plates And Combs: Comb segments are to be die-cast aluminium alloy, maximum
200 mm wide, easily exchanged, and with safety contacts on comb teeth. Combs are to be
bevelled so that there is no danger of persons tripping when leaving escalator. Bevel angle
is not to exceed 20 degrees to horizontal. Tread surface of comb plates is to be finished as
floor coverings.
G. Handrails: Endless, high-quality vulcanized rubber composition with fabric insert, sliding
layer of nylon webbing and steel cord. Required frictional contact to handrail drive wheel is
to be ensured by drive mechanism. Handrail guides are to be stainless steel with minimum
breaking strength of 25 kN.
H. Lighting: provide four comb lights at each end. Lighting details are subject to Engineer /
Architects approval.
I. Lubrication: Main drive chain, step band chains and handrail drive chain are to be
connected to automatic lubricating system with electrical lube oil pump and dosing unit. Oil
supply is to be sufficient for at least one month's operation. Float switch is to be provided to
monitor oil level in reservoir and to give alarm to control cabinet in the event of low
lubricant level. All bearing points of rotating components are to be fitted with roller/ball
bearings, hermetically sealed against dirt and water. Where bearings require lubrication by
grease guns, functional discharge openings are to be provided for used grease..
J. Bolted Connections: Secure bolts by self- locking nuts or locking rings. Only high-tensile
bolts are to be used.
K. Corrosion Protection: Main supporting truss is to be shot-blasted and finished with two
coats zinc dust paint, and one coat iron mica (each coat 40 microns). All traces of rust are to
be thoroughly removed from steel components before painting.
L. Balustrades: Inner balustrades, skirtings, outer balustrades, central balustrades and floor
coverings are to be as shown on Drawings, and to the following specification:
1. Inner balustrades are to be designed to be slim line type and made of toughened
safety glass thickness 10mm . Handrail guides are to be practically invisible and sit
centrally on the glass panel. The balustrade is to be all glass with vertically arranged
panels, without supports. Height of the balustrade is to be minimum 1000mm over the
entire length of the escalator. Glass panel joints are to be in line with the inner and
outer decking joints. The trims between glass panels and inner and outer deckings are
to be made of aluminium profiles black colour.

2. Inner and outer deckings are to be made of at least 2mm thick stainless steel (finish
according to Engineer/Architect’s choice). Deckings are to be done in the curved
version, mitered version is not allowed.
3. Skirting are made of minimum 3 mm thick stainless steel plate.
4. Visible sides and underside of each escalator are to be cladded with bended stainless
steel panels of 1.5 mm thickness. Joints of this cladding-panels are to be in line with
joints of glass panels. Finish is to be according to the Engineer/Architect’s choice.
2.3 DRIVE UNIT
A. Generally: complete drive unit including the handrail driving system is to be according to
the manufacturer’s standard located within the upper truss envelop. All drive components
are to be easy accessible. All drive components are to be designed for a continuous running
of 22 hours per day / 7 days a week under an appropriate load profile (see below). Provide
an automatic lubrication system for drive chains, and include drive chain monitoring
contacts. Each escalator is to be equipped with an auxiliary brake. Design the escalator gear
in such a way that an oil change is not necessary for at least 30,000 hours. An oil level
switch is to be provided to monitor the gear box oil level. The overall mechanical efficiency
of the complete drive including motor is not to be less than 90%. Details of complete drive
system are to be submitted with the tender. The load profile is to be 6h at full load, 6h at
50% load, 6h at 25% load, 4h at standby speed (no load).
B. Input stage of drive is to be a worm-gear for noise suppression. Worm shaft is to be case
hardened and ground, and gear rim of worm wheel is to be hard-wearing special bronze.
C. Manual emergency drive is to be provided at upper station, accessible without removal of

steps or any part of drive systems.
D. Drive components, including motor, and variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) for
nominal speed, standby speed and service speed are to be suitable for continuous operation.
E. Bearings used in machine transmissions are to be top quality roller/ball bearings with
minimal noise development. Plain friction or sleeve bearings are not to be used.
F. Handrail drive is to be automatically tensioned and is to ensure synchronization with step

band speed. Asynchronous running of handrails is not to exceed 2% of step band speed.
G. Electric Motor: Totally enclosed, fan cooled protection IP 65, fitted with low noise life-time
lubricated roller/ball bearings, especially designed for escalators according to the
manufacturer standard. Motor is to be provided in class F insulation with temperature rise
not exceeding class B limits.
H. Brakes Generally: drive machine is to be equipped with an electro – mechanical service

brake operating on the high speed shaft of the motor. Brake is to be held off electrically and
spring applied to ensure “fail – safe” operation. Action of the break is to be smooth.
Electrical monitoring for wear of brake lining and brake lifting is to be included in the
design of both the service break and auxiliary break. The brake lining is to be asbestos-free.
Details are to be submitted with tender.
I. Service Brake: Constant torque, self-adjusting, and servo-operated, to exert necessary

braking torque for direction of travel (upward force approximately 1/3 of downward force),
with braking force created by pressure spring. Upon tripping of any safety device, brake is

to engage immediately and bring escalator to a smooth stop. An equivalent electronic

system is allowed..
J. Safety brake is to be provided, in addition to service brake, on main drive shaft assembly,
and is to engage after an adjustable time-lag setting. Safety brake is to be actuated by brake
release solenoid, manually resettable only, and is to engage in the event of power failure, by
stop push button, or operation of any safety device.
K. Step Guides: Guides for step chains and step rollers are to be hot-dip galvanized steel
sections with smooth and even surfaces. Joints are to be formed diagonally in direction of
travel. Guides are to be designed so that front edges of emerging steps, and rear edges of
disappearing steps, follow a horizontal path at least equal to depth of three steps. Guides are
to ensure that gap between step and balustrade skirting does not exceed 4 mm at either side
or 7 mm at both sides cumulatively.
L. Step Chains: High precision rolled, flat link, hardened chains, provided in pairs of equal
length. Pins, sleeves and rollers are to be case-hardened and ground. Spur racks or gear
chains are not to be used. Step chains and chain pins are to be 14.6 mm minimum diameter.
Material for chain pins is to be 23 Cr Mo B33. Chain pitch is not to exceed 135 mm.
M. Chain Tensioner: Constant and even pressure is to be maintained by adjustable compression

springs. Chain tensioning wheels are to be seated in precision slides (ball and prism
guides). Even tensioning of step band chains is to be ensured.
2.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Generally: Electrical installation comprises connection of all wiring systems from control
cabinet to various control devices.
B. Control Cabinet: Each escalator is to have individual instrument and control gear cabinet
with transparent front cover, protection IP 55, shed mounted and located within upper
escalator station (drive station), and comprising main circuit breaker, motor control gear,
protective devices, relays, cut-off and tripping displays, etc.
C. Control equipment is to include, in addition to the above, a fault finding digital panel with
warning lights, located behind lockable cover in upper balustrade newel. Each safety
contact is to be connected to one warning light. Cancelling is only to be possible using a
separate switch in the balustrade. Key operated switch (up/down) for starting escalator is to
be provided in handrail newel.
D. Control Voltage: 220V,60 Hz single phase a.c.
E. Running time meter is to be provided.
F. Main Circuit Breaker: Thermal magnetic type, with inverse time-overcurrent, instantaneous
and adjustable earth fault protection. Circuit breaker is to be lockable, and with shunt trip
coil for safety trips.
G. Terminal Identification: All terminals are to be marked. All cables are to have coding
colours and numbered ferrules.
H. Wiring is to be arranged neatly and clearly in conduits and terminated on shrouded terminal
blocks.

I. Electrical cables in main truss are to be moisture and heat resistant and flame retardant with
PVC/E insulation and sheathing, and are to have 1000 V rating.
J. Maintenance power circuit at 220V, 60 Hz is to be provided for power and lighting sockets.
Dual sockets for power and lighting are to be provided at drive and tensioning stations.
K. Control circuit breaker is to be provided at tensioning station.
L. Maintenance sockets for plugging in maintenance push button control device for testing
operation of escalator are to be provided at upper and lower stations, with maintenance
control extension device and sufficient cable length.
2.5 SAFETY DEVICES
A. Operation: Safety devices are to automatically interrupt power supply to drive motor and
brake, thereby inducing braking of escalator.
B. Devices to be provided are as follows:
1. Emergency stop-buttons, at upper and lower newels.

2. Step run-in monitors in area of comb plates and at point of entry of steps into combs,
which are to induce safety braking of step chain when a foreign body enters between
comb and step.
3. Step band lock.
4. Step sag monitors which are to stop escalator when a step sinks by more than 6 mm
due to incorrectly formed or damaged steps or rollers; step is to stop before reaching
comb run-in point.
5. Motor overload earth-fault and phase-unbalance protection and excessive temperature
protection by thermistors in motor coils.
6. Handrail safety device to stop escalator immediately should foreign bodies become
wedged between handrail and inlet points in balustrade newels.
7. Skirting thickness of 3 mm with skirt brushers.
8. Skirting contacts on both sides of skirtings, with micro switches to stop escalator in
the event of wedging of objects between steps and skirting.
9. Step chain monitors to stop escalator in the event of any chain breaking or becoming
excessively elongated.
10. Excessive speed and unintended reversal relay.
11. Service brake-monitoring contact against failure or phase change.
12. Handrail Speed Device: Sounds an alarm if handrail speed varies from step speed by
more than 15% and stops escalators if this condition lasts more than 2 seconds.
13. Skirt Obstruction Device: Stops escalator if an object gets caught between skirt
panels and steps as the step approaches the combplate.
14. Handrail Entry Device: Stops escalator if an object gets caught between the handrail
and the handrail guard or, alternatively, if an object approaches the area between the
handrail and the guard.
15. Fire Alarm contact to stop the escalator in case of fire, based on external signal
received from Fire Alarm System.

2.6 LOOSE EQUIPMENT, SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Generally: Supply loose equipment, spare parts and accessories as required for normal
operation and routine maintenance of the escalator(s) and as detailed by the Contractor in
his offer, for two years continuous operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine escalator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of escalator work.
Examine supporting structure, machine spaces, and pits; verify critical dimensions; and
examine conditions under which escalator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by the Installer, listing dimensional
discrepancies and conditions detrimental to the performance of escalator work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work during installation.
B. Set escalators true to line and level, properly supported, and anchored to building structure.
Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the
Work.
C. Adjust installed components for smooth, efficient operation, complying with required
tolerances and free of hazardous conditions. Lubricate operating parts, including bearings,
tracks, chains, guides, and hardware. Test operating devices, equipment, signals, controls,
and safety devices. Install oil drip pan and check to ensure that no oil drips outside of pan.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that
cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit,
or provide new units as required.
E. Assembly: Equipment is, as far as possible, to be factory assembled, wired and tested. Site
work is to be limited to installation and assembly of parts dismantled at factory for
transportation, or otherwise to work not possible at factory.
F. Workmanship: Carry out work in a neat, workmanlike and efficient manner in accordance
with the specified requirements. Installation is to be performed by skilled personnel,
specialized in escalator installation, who are in the permanent employment of the
manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized dealer.
G. Accessibility: Install equipment so that it is readily accessible for operation, maintenance

and repair.
H. Builder's Work: Carry out all builders’ work necessarily required in connection with
installation of escalators, including but not limited to forming or cutting chases, rebates, etc.,

grouting, supports, steelwork, scaffolding, etc. Provide convenience power, lighting and
other services required from assigned terminal points, to carry out construction work.
I. Coordination: Coordinate equipment installations with the building construction to prevent

alteration to structure and cutting of holes and chases after equipment installation has
started.
J. Fire Protection: Coordinate installations with mechanical works, for provision of fire/smoke
detection and fire fighting systems.
K. Painting: Protect unfinished metalwork by painting, unless technically undesirable.

Painting is to include thorough cleaning of metal, application of rust inhibiting prime coat
and two finishing coats of approved enamel.
3.3 TESTS ON SITE
A. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
required by the Governing Regulations and Standards. Carry out any other tests the
Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of installation with specified
requirements. Tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer and, if required, by the authorities
having jurisdiction. IF equipment does not meet specified requirements, make appropriate
corrections and provide again (similarly) for another test sequence.
B. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused by tests, or
damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
C. Organization of Tests: Provide all labour, materials and instruments required for tests.
D. Before test run, ensure that step bands, skirtings and comb segments are in order, no foreign
bodies are in or on escalator, all steps are fitted, main circuit breaker is in closed position,
control switch is in on position, safety devices and protective switches are in operation,
series of safety contacts are closed and manual control device is connected to inspection run
power socket.
E. Test run is to include checking starting from installed service panel, reversing direction of
running from manual control device and checking that actual running direction corresponds
with direction setting, allowing running in each direction for several cycles. Any
adjustments are to be made with inspection control device connected.
F. Testing Operation Of Safeties: In accordance with manufacturer's service and maintenance

instructions, check all alarms and indicators and lubricating oil system against
manufacturer's data.
G. After testing, check, and if necessary, re-adjust spring tensions on return shaft, handrail
pretension, drive rollers, step inlet and outlet, sag, skirtings, gaps etc., brake stopping
distance, and gear oil level.
H. Measurements: Measure motor current in both directions of escalator, and insulation

resistance to truss or earth of motor circuit, control circuits, brake circuit, lighting circuits,
pump circuit and any other circuits. Insulation resistance is not to be less than 20 M-ohms
using a minimum 1000 V d.c. megger.

3.4 FACTORY WITNESS TEST
A. Factory inspection visits are to cover complete checking and testing of selected units
according to requirements of the specified regulations and standards as well as special
requirements finishes, software and controls. Inspection visits are also to cover spot
checking of manufacture work progress to ensure conformance of the equipment being
fabricated with requirements of the contract. Inspection and test procedures and programs
are to be submitted for approval prior to factory visit.
B. Factory visits are to include for business class air tickets, five star hotel full
accommodations, transportation and all inspections/test expenses.
C. Allow for six man-visit for the Consultant and Client representative to cover all types of
escalators.
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each escalator installation, and before
permitting the use of escalators (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as
required and recommended by the "Code" and by governing regulations or agencies.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel on procedures and schedules for maintaining, operating, adjusting,
troubleshooting, and servicing escalators. Refer to Division 1 “Section Closeout
Procedures”.
1. Make a final check of each escalator operation, with Employer's maintenance

personnel present, just prior to Substantial Completion. Determine that control
systems, operation components and devices are functioning properly.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. At completion of escalator work, provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices,

signs, or such other methods or procedures to protect escalator work from damage or
deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period.

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement
other Division 15 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
9. Non shrink grout for equipment installations.
10. Field-fabricated metal equipment supports.
11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
12. Mechanical demolition.
13. Cutting and patching.
14. Touchup painting and finishing.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - Page 1 of 18

S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

2. UPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A. In addition to the requirements shown or specified, comply with the latest current applicable
standards, specifications or codes published by the following organizations:
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BS British Standards
DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normalisierung
FM Factory Mutual
IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
ISO International Standardization Organization
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc.
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's
UBC Uniform Building Code.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.
AIA Standard for health care facilities
HTM 0201 code for medical gases
BS558 British standard for smoke management.
1.5 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. Climatic Conditions: The outdoor design conditions to be adopted for the project are as
follows:

1. Climatic Conditions:
a. Latitude: 24.7 deg. North

b. Longitude: -46.7 deg. East.
c. Altitude: 611.7 m.
2. Outside Temperatures:
1) Summer
a) Dry Bulb : 46 deg. C

b) Wet Bulb : 17.8 deg. C
2) Winter
a) Dry Bulb : 5 deg. C
B. Indoor Design Conditions: Indoor comfort conditions are based on recommendations of

ASHRAE Standard 55.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and
identification materials and devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical

equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building
components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and
coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the
following:
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem
movement.
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties,
including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling access panels
and other ceiling-mounted items.
11. Mechanical equipment rooms.
12. Interstitial space.

13. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.

14. Pipe sleeves.
E. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
F. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: Provide a listing of recommended

replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment.
Include in the listing belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style,
and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets.
G. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
H. Where US material or reference standards are specified or indicated, compliance with the
equivalent British Standard (BS) is acceptable.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing
angles of identification devices.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,

capacities, and ratings may be furnished at no additional cost to the Contract, provided such
proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical
services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, equipment spaces, and the like are
increased accordingly. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified,
equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements.
C. Equipment Vibration Tolerance:
1. The allowable vibration tolerance is specified in Division 15, Mechanical Vibration

Controls And Seismic Restraints. Equipment specifications require factory balancing
of equipment to this tolerance.
2. After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place,
perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified
vibration tolerance.
D. Products Criteria:
1. tandard Commercial Products: Materials and equipment shall be standard products of

a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of
a similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been
in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5-
year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily
completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial
market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products
having less than a 5-year field service record shall not be acceptable. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization that
maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the
site. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment that includes their addresses and qualifications. These service
organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to

render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during
the warranty period of the contract.
3. Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or
class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
4. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components
made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
5. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall
be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast
integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of
equipment.
6. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
E. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are

required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material
being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Resident
Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the
recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for
rejection of the material.
F. Provide copies of approved equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Subcontractor.
G. Electrical Requirements: Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their
respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall
conform to and have electrical connections provided under division 16. Furnish internal
wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and contactors shall have
a maximum of 220-volt control circuits, and shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls furnished. Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70 and
requirements specified herein.
H. High Efficiency Motors:
1. High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors: Unless otherwise specified, single-phase

fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types
corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
2. High Efficiency Polyphase Motors: Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors
shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as
listed in NEMA MG 10. Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction
motors with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in
accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.
3. Three-Phase Motor Protection: Provide controllers for motors rated one 1.34
kilowatts (one horsepower) and larger with electronic phase-voltage monitors
designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide
protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
1.8 WELDING
A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:
1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine the
suitability of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet the
required tests, and also determine that the welding operators have the ability to make
sound welds under standard conditions.

2. Comply with ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1.

3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the piping
systems.
B. Qualification of Welders: Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general
requirements for fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1,
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1, and / or, as
approved by the Qualifications."
C. Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Resident
Engineer, to determine the ability of the welder to meet the qualifications required. Test
welders for piping for all positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and
with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be allowed to weld only in the position in which he
has qualified and shall be required to identify his welds with his specific code marking
signifying his name and number assigned.
D. Examination Results: Provide the Resident Engineer with a list of names and corresponding
code markings. Retest welders who fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications.
Disqualify welders, who fail the second test, for work on the project.
E. Beveling: Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame
cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of
scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.
F. Alignment: Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes
above 50 mm to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of
weld spatter reaching the interior of the pipe.
G. Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before,
during, or after installation.
H. Defective Welds: Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by
adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders
responsible for defective welds must be re-qualified.
I. Electrodes: Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and
dampness during the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their
coating.
1.9 PREVENTION OF CORROSION
A. Metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion. Equipment enclosures shall be given
rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish by the manufacturer. Aluminum shall not be
used in contact with earth, and where connected to dissimilar metal, shall be protected by
approved fittings, barrier material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts,
braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers,
and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or nonferrous materials shall be hot-
dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M for exterior locations and
cadmium-plated in conformance with ASTM B 766 for interior locations.

A. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling,
transport, warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged items,
at no additional cost, as instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment, if it
is proven that the damage was caused by packing, storage, or handling deficiencies.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
D. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
E. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
F. The following markings shall be factory applied using indelible ink on the external part of
each volume:
Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4
XXX XXX XXX XXX
Project Code Project Owner Contractor

identification identification identification
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in building.
E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if

devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical
ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or British Standard for factory-threaded pipe and pipe
fittings.
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2 mm maximum thickness, unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-
face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated; Bolts, Nuts and washers,
stainless steel for potable/domestic water piping, galvanized for other piping systems.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent
lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent
maximum lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead
content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.

2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-
steel bolts and nuts.
K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.

2. Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to
prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-
neck end types and matching piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 1725 kPa minimum working
pressure at 82 deg. C.
E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 1035 or 2070 kPa

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face

or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene
bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035 or 2070 kPa
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 107 deg. C.
H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at
107 deg. C.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible
pipe connections. Include 860 kPa minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher
working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:

1. DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.

2. DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for DN65 and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze
wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to
hose.
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel,

inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or
flanges, welded to hose.
E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple

plies of NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 860 kPa minimum
working-pressure rating at 104 deg. C. Units may be straight or elbow type, unless
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6 mm minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge, set screw and polished chrome-
plated finish.
5. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.
6. Stamped Steel: One piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated
finish.
8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated
finish.
9. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

C. Screws: Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications
2.7 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,

nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise.
Individual Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements.
Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-
plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.

2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.

3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 6 mm annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN150.

b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes DN150 and larger, penetrating gypsum-
board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of
soil pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished floor level. Refer to
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless
P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between pipe and
sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install Steel Pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.

2. Install Steel Sheet Pipe for sleeves 150 mm in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install Steel Pipe for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping Specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Soldering Manual," Chapter
"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Brazing Handbook," Chapter
"Pipe and Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of

internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry
seal threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended

Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified
processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material,
size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically
positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of
flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
b. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
c. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
d. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and

a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
V. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise

indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown
only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal
direction of flow.
1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.

2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required
for hot, uninsulated piping.
3. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine
rooms, and accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and
exterior nonconcealed locations:
a. Near each valve and control device.

b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter
nonaccessible enclosures.

d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to
7.5 m in congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately
spaced markers.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each

major item of mechanical equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 6 mm high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is
less than 600 mm, 13 mm high lettering for distances up to 1800 mm, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between
multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct
markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction
of flow.
1. Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling

system, locate signs near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum
intervals of 15 m.
D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished

construction.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and
application of paint.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat
over enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2
finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat
over enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish
coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2
finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish
coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than
100 mm larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment
manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21 MPa, 28-day
compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
C. Floor Mounted Support: Provide base plate and concrete plinths beneath each floor mounted
metallic supports.
3.7 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove Work specified in Division 15 Sections.
B. If pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove

damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 50 mm

beyond face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Contractor shall install his work in such a manner and at such time as will require a
minimum of cutting and patching of the building structure. Holes in exposed locations, in or
through existing floors, shall be drilled and smoothed by sanding. Use of a jackhammer will
be permitted only where specifically approved. Holes through masonry walls to
accommodate sleeves shall be made with an iron pipe masonry core saw.
B. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
C. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.9 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the
contract drawings and approved recommendations of the manufacturers. Installation shall
be accomplished by workers skilled in this type of work. Installation shall be made so that
there is no degradation of the designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
B. No installation shall be permitted which blocks or otherwise impedes access to any existing
machine or system.
C. All hinged doors shall swing open a minimum of 120 degrees. The area in front of all
access doors shall be clear a minimum of one meter.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, emergency switches and alarms shall be installed in

conspicuous locations. All indicators, to include gauges, meters, and alarms shall be
mounted in order to be easily visible by people in the area.

3.11 CLEANING
A. Exposed surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered with dirt, plaster, or
other material during handling and construction shall be thoroughly cleaned before such
surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed within the building structure.
B. Before final acceptance, mechanical equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures,
shall be clean and free from dirt, grease, and finger marks.

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and sup-
ports to building structure.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for hangers and supports.
3. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.
4. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation vapor barrier materials and ther-
mal hanger shield inserts.
5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vi-
bration isolation and seismic restraint devices.
6. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
D. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and supports for
piping and equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - Page 1 of 9

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and ther-
mal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic and design calculations justifying forces, siz-
es, embedments and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engi-
neer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally regis-

tered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is ex-
perienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering ser-
vices are defined as those performed for installations of hangers, supports and seismic
restraints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers (or ap-

proved equals) offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
d. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
2. Channel Support Systems:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.
c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
d. Unistrut Corp.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.

S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1.1
b. Pipe Shields, Inc.

c. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
4. Power-Driven, Mechanical-Anchor Expansion Shield, Fastener Systems:

a. Hilti, Inc.
b. Powers
c. Concrete Fastening Systems
d. B-Line
e. Grinnell
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Re-
fer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger
and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength insula-

tion, encased in sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of
pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with
pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both inte-
rior and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1.1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as speci-
fied in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 49 to 232 deg C (120 to
450 deg F) pipes, DN100 to DN400 (NPS 4 to NPS 16), requiring up to 100 mm of
insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, DN20 to DN600 (NPS 3/4to NPS 24), requiring clamp flexibility and up to
100 mm of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, DN15 to
DN600 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 24), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, DN15 to DN100 (NPS 1/2 to
NPS 4), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, DN20 to DN200 (NPS 3/4to NPS 8).
7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated sta-
tionary pipes, DN15 to DN200 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 8).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, DN15 to DN200 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 8).
9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsu-
lated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN50 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 2).
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11):
For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, DN10 to DN200 (NPS 3/8 to
NPS 8).
11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, DN10 to DN80 (NPS 3/8 to NPS 3).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to
NPS 30).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or con-
traction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900
(NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900
(NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange
and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750 (NPS 1
to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and con-
traction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65 to
DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050 (NPS 2
to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might oc-
cur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN600
(NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contrac-
tion might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might
be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to
DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 150 mm for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F) piping instal-
lations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F)
piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tan-
gent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-
quired.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to pre-
vent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of
high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-
treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and
encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping move-
ment.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not ex-
ceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variabili-
ty factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit va-
riability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment.
Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability.
These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for indi-
vidual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being sup-
ported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space at-
tachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expan-
sion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and com-
pletely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm long and 1.22 mm (0.048
inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06
inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm long and 1.91 mm (0.075 inch)
thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm long and 2.67 mm (0.105
inch) thick.
5. Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equip-
ment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, ap-
pearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the
following:

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and con-
tours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas im-
mediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop paint-
ing. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and ab-
raded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Paint-
ing."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galva-
nizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration isolation roof
curbs, and seismic restraints and snubbers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator
specified. Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of

vibration isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor
slides and rails, and base weights.
3. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints and
snubbers.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration and seismic

restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration and seismic

restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified

equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article
above. Include the following:
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 15071 - Page 1 of 8


test of assembled components or on calculations.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
A. Project seismic zone is as applicable for Riyadh with a service factor of 0.15.
1.6 SEISMIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this
section shall be applied to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below.
B. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall include the

following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in other Sections of the
Specification:
1. Storage tanks for oil and water.

2. Water, oil and gas piping.
3. Expansion air separator tanks.
4. Valves and fittings for piping.
5. Air and refrigerant compressors.
6. Refrigerant piping.
7. Air handling units.
8. Pumps with motors.
9. Ducts.
10. Exhaust and return fans.
C. Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the
drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be seismically protected in
accordance with this Specification:
1. All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below Under "Items Not
Covered By This Section".
2. Chilled water distribution systems outside of buildings.
3. Fuel piping outside of buildings.
4. All water supply systems.
5. Storm and sanitary sewer systems.
6. Water storage tanks.
D. Contractor Designed Bracing: The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with
SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Design shall be performed by a certified engineer.
Resistance to lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads.

E. Items Not Covered By This Section: Fire Protection Systems. Seismic protection of piping
for fire protection systems shall be installed as specified in Division 13.
F. Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints: Seismic restraints are not required for the following
items:
1. Piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 32 mm inside diameter.

2. All other piping less than 64 mm inside diameter.
3. Rectangular air handling ducts less than 0.56 m² in cross sectional area.
4. Round air handling ducts less than 711 mm in diameter.
5. Piping suspended by individual hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of
pipe to the bottom of the supporting structural member where the hanger is attached.
All hangers shall meet the length requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded
by one hanger in the run, the entire run shall be braced.
6. Ducts suspended by hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of the duct to the
bottom of the supporting structural member. All hangers shall meet the length
requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the
entire run shall be braced.
7. Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be seismically protected in accordance
with the provisions of this Specification.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Sections.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corp.
4. Greene Rubber Co.
5. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
6. King, H.A., Ltd.
7. Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Rubatex Corp.
9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
10. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the
equipment supported.
1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple

layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to
provide uniform loading over the pad area.
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 25 mm
thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less than 2 mm
per 25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa (50 psig).
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or

neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory-drilled and
tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolted
connection to structure. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick,
rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit floor
loading to 690 kPa (100 psig).
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable, steel open-
spring-type isolators.
1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension
due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolting to
structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate
underside. Provide adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-dip
galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene

isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for hanger
rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression.

1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.
2.3 SEISMIC CONTROLS
A. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.
B. Manufactured Seismic Snubbers: All-directional, double-acting snubbers.
1. Construction: Interlocking steel members restrained by a 19-mm thick, replaceable,

shock-absorbing neoprene insert. Maintain 3-mm clearance in all directions between
rigid and resilient surfaces.
C. Fabricated Seismic Snubbers: Welded structural-steel shapes designed and fabricated to

restrain equipment or vibration isolation bases from excessive movement during a seismic
event. Design to resist gravity forces.
1. Construction: Welded steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36).

2. Resilient Components: 19-mm thick, replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene insert.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the
isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission,
component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.

1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and
bars conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36). Include support brackets to anchor
base to isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not
less than 25-mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour
concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor
bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb designed
to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 56-m/s (125-mph) wind
impinging laterally against the side of the equipment. Design restraints to meet seismic
requirements.
B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding, unhoused,

laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1. Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building structure

and include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material and 50 mm of rigid
insulation on the inside of the assembly.
2. Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to permit
leveling of equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly with a rubber
isolation pad. Locate spring isolators so they are accessible for adjustment at any
time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the
roof.
3. Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials, attached
to the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of the lower support
assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products according to

B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete, and trowel to a
smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or concrete inertia

bases.
B. Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-mounted piece of
equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the vibration isolators and bolt to
supporting structure.
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of
adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps
to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle
piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles
to rods.
E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to

resist seismic forces.
I. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control

devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering
size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified
for application, selection is the Contractor's option, but provide one selection for each
product category..
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or

stamped. Nameplates for external and wet applications to be stainless steel
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - Page 1 of 7

2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of

ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm for access door signs
and similar operational instructions.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise
indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,

color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl type with permanent adhesive, complying with
ASME A13.1.
E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at
each location.
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by the Engineer.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
G. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on,
color-coded, complying with ASME A13.1.
H. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply

with the following color code:
1. Green: Cold air.

2. Yellow/Green or Green: Supply air.
3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
4. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
5. Nomenclature: Include the following:
a. Direction of airflow.
b. Duct service such as supply, return and exhaust.
c. Duct origin.
d. Duct destination.
e. Design liters per second.
I. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl

tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.
1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for
larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6 mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13
mm sequenced numbers. Include 4 mm hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.8 mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum for indoor and internal
applications, and stainless steel for external and wet applications.
2. Size: 40 mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.
L. Access Panel Markers: 2 mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated

terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3 mm center hole for
attachment.
M. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.

2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5 mm, single-
thickness glass.
N. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-

resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white
melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
O. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following

color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
3. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
4. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
5. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving
conditions, and speed.
6. Size: 65 mm by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 mm by

150 mm for equipment.
P. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized

card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 85 mm by 145 mm.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO
NOT OPERATE.
Q. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters,
and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical
systems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems
of same name are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following
method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and
exterior nonconcealed locations according to the following:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
F. Route Markers for underground services:
1. Route markers for underground services shall have standardized abbreviations as

follows, noting that systems that are not listed below such as Di mineralized water,
distilled water, raw water, etc will be defined at a later stage:
Cold potable water COLD POT. WATER
Rain water leader RAIN WATER
Sanitary sewer SAN. SEWER
Sanitary waste SAN. WASTE

Sanitary drain SAN. DRAIN
Sanitary vent SAN. VENT
Storm drain STORM DRAIN
Automatic temperature control AUTO. TEMP. CONTROL
Chilled water-supply (primary) CHW SUPPLY PRI
Chilled water-return (primary) CHW RETURN PRI
Chilled water-supply (secondary) CHW SUPPLY SEC
Chilled water-return (secondary) CHW RETURN SEC
Storm sewer STORM SEWER
Air handling unit No. [_____] AHU NO. [_____]
Control and instrument air CONTROL AND INSTR.
Refrigerant-suction REFRIG-SUCTION
Refrigerant-discharge REFRIG-DISCH
Refrigerant-liquid REFRIG-LIQUID
Fuel oil supply FUEL OIL SUPPLY
Fuel oil return FUEL OIL RET
Fuel oil vent FUEL OIL VENT
Makeup water MAKEUP WATER
Condensate drain COND. DRAIN
2. Similar services with different temperatures or pressures shall be identified. Where

pressures may exceed 860 kilopascal, the maximum system pressure shall be included
in the label.
3. Piping shall be labeled and arrowed in accordance with the following:
a. Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls

b. Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees
c. In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point required to
clarify service or indicated hazard.
d. In long straight runs, labels shall be located at distances within eyesight of each
other but in no case shall the distance between labels exceed 20 meter. All
labels shall be visible and legible from the primary service and operating area.
4. All presently used services shall be classified under the aforesaid categories as
deemed relevant. If new services are identified and cannot be logically classified

under any of the aforesaid categories, then such services shall be provided with a
new, separate abbreviated standard, as approved by the Engineer.
5. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the abbreviations shall be imprinted
clearly in English letters of 12 mm height and 3 mm depth, as per lettering sample
shown, on a 100 mm diameter, 10 mm thick circular cast-aluminum stud which has
an insert length of at least 100 mm, to allow it to be set into concrete. The insert
section shall have a thickness sufficient to prevent break-off of the stud and shall be
provided with “back-cut” indentations to ensure that the route marker is firmly held in
place by the surrounding concrete.
6. The route markers shall be set into the ground surface at finished grade level (FGL) in
areas where concrete/tile paving or asphalt is provided. At locations where the FGL
finish is bare earth, the route markers shall be embedded onto the top of a concrete
pillar which is buried into the earth as detailed below.
7. The concrete pillars shall be of class P1, filled into 150 mm diameter GRP pipe 600
mm long. The pillars shall be buried into the ground to a depth of 400 mm with the
remaining 200 mm projecting above FGL.
8. The route markers shall be placed along the center line of the underground service
route and shall be located at every 75 m along straight runs of the underground
service and at every bend on the route. Spacing on curved sections shall be suitably
reduced in consultation with the Engineer. Where the underground service is laid in
pre-formed raceways that are provided with covers, that cannot accept embedding of
the route marker studs, these shall be located at FGL adjacent to the relevant raceway,
as approved by the Engineer.
9. Samples of all the various route markers shall be submitted for approval to the
Engineer.
3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets,
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: 40 mm, round.

2. Hot Water: 40 mm, round.
3. Fire Protection: 40 mm, round.
4. Sprinkler: 40 mm, round.
E. Tag Color: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: Blue.

2. Hot Water: Yellow.
3. Fire Protection: Red.
4. Sprinkler: Red.

F. Letter Color: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: Black.

2. Hot Water: Black.
3. Fire Protection: White.
4. Sprinkler: White.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such
as gas outlets.
2. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
3. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
4. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
5. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
6. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
7. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
8. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, Variable Air Volume (VAV)
boxes, fan coil units, controls and components.
9. Tanks and pressure vessels.
10. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign
outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or
similar concealment.
1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied
spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct
markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at
maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked
by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insu-
lating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials

and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application
for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
1. Insulation materials: Each type used. State surface burning characteristics.

2. Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will be
furnished for exposed ductwork.
3. Insulation accessory materials: Each type used.
4. Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular
insulation.
5. Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for coordination.
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, de-
scribing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample materi-
al.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, at-
tachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
DUCT INSULATION 15081 - Page 1 of 11

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft training program
certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Specified k factors are at 24 °C mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional
thermal insulation material is approved by the Engineer to be used, select thickness to pro-
vide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, NFPA 90A, NFPA 225 or
ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insu-
lation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate mark-
ings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or
listing, or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory will be re-
quired to show that surface burning characteristics for materials to be used do not exceed
specified ratings:
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 150 or less.
D. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 3-m section of rectangular straight duct.

b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
c. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers.
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropri-

ate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

ing:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Johns-Manville.
d. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
f. Schuller International, Inc.
g. St. Gobain.
2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.
3. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

b. Pabco.
c. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufac-
tured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufac-
tured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber mate-

rials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
D. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft
paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are
scheduled at the end of this Section.
1. Finish: Smooth finish.

2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
D. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with

ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting
and forming to indicated sizes.

2. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
1. Tape Width: 100 mm.
B. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and wash-
er manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.

1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible

with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thickness re-
quired for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use ac-
cessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insula-
tion continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insu-

lation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insula-
tion.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper

sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support
at top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor-retarder mastic.

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square

foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and
sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal center-
line of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm
o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with in-
sulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation fac-
ing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent in-
sulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 50 mm on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 450 mm o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation sur-
face with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indi-
cated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anc-
hor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates for 100

percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal center-
line of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm
o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with in-
sulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation fac-
ing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent in-
sulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to
outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct el-
bows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation sur-
face with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indi-
cated to receive vapor retarder.
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows:
1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and
plenum surface.
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands
without deforming the insulation material.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm.
Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer
layer with stainless-steel bands.
3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of
mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry,
apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape.
Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth
or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recom-
mended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as speci-
fied in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual in-
spection of the completed Work.
3.9 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply-, return- and treated fresh-air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply-, return- and treated fresh-air ductwork.
3. Outdoor exposed supply-,return- and treated fresh air- ductwork.
4. Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
5. Indoor concealed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
6. Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork.
7. Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing agency labels and stamps.
8. Nameplates and data plates.
9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts in concealed spaces and exposed to view in air-conditioned area.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 50 mm applied to 25 mm final compressed thickness.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed, stainless steel jacket where
exposed to view.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Return-air ducts in concealed spaces and exposed to view in air-conditioned area.

2. Thickness: 50 mm applied to 25 mm final compressed thickness
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed, stainless steel jacket where
exposed to view.
C. Service: Supply-air ducts exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas,
mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber board.

2. Thickness: 50 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: aluminum jacket.
D. Service: Return-air ducts exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas,
mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: aluminum jacket.
E. Service: Treated fresh air ducts.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; stainless steel jacket where
exposed to view, aluminum jacket in mechanical rooms.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
F. Service: Rectangular, range-hood exhaust ducts.
1. Material: Calcium Silicate.


exposed to view; aluminum jacket in mechanical rooms.
G. Service: Rectangular, dishwasher exhaust ducts.

exposed to view.
3.11 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.8 mm.

b. Corrugation Dimension: 64 by 16 mm.
B. Service: Return-air ducts.



SECTION 15082 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
ducts and plenums.
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Field application for each equipment type.

2. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample
material.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, interpreting,
and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15082 - Page 1 of 9

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, NFPA 225, or ANSI A.2.5, by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket
materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
a. One chilled-water centrifugal pump.

b. One small tank, vessel or heat exchanger.
c. One balancing or pressure regulating valve.
constructed.
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and
maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers (or

approved equals) offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to the following:

S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1.1
b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Johns-Manville.
d. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
f. Schuller International, Inc.
g. St. Gobain.
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
b. Kingspan Tarec Industrial
c. Cell U Foam

b. Rubatex Corp.
4. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:
a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.

b. Armstrong
c. Kingspan Tarec Industrial
b. Pabco.
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
C. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.
1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

E. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.

S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1.1
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft
paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are
scheduled at the end of this Section.
1. Finish: Smooth finish.

Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
1. Tape Width: 100 mm.
B. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS


PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of equipment.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each equipment system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the
wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:


2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Overlap

insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape
having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or
mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
O. Insulate the following indoor equipment:
1. Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.
P. Insulate the following outdoor equipment:
1. Aboveground water storage tanks.

2. Aboveground fuel storage tanks.
Q. Omit insulation from the following:
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 INDOOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates for 100

percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment,
including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint.
Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesive-attached anchor pins and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels
as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. On tank and vessel, 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm
o.c. in both directions.
c. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads of tanks
and vessels.
5. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

6. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing
7. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
8. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 75 mm.
9. Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other
elements that require frequent removal for service.
10. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
11. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply
insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and
vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with
manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and
the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
D. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as

specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing

insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent of
chilled-water pumps, whichever is greater.
3. Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small tanks,
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
according to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
3.8 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
3.9 INTERIOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Equipment: Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.
1. Operating Temperature: 13 to 60 deg C (55 to 140 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket
3. Insulation Thickness: as recommended in ASHRAE 90.1



6. Finish: Non.

SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in

underground piping outside the building.
2. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
4. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application
for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
5. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type
of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product
and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3. Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
PIPE INSULATION 15083 - Page 1 of 14

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN50) straight pipe.

b. One 90-degree elbow.
c. One tee fitting.
d. One NPS 2 (DN50) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One reducer.
constructed.

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of
piping that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers (or

approved equals) offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.
3. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:

a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.
b. Armstrong
c. Kingspan Tarec Industrial

b. Pabco.
5. Sealants, coatings and adhesives:

S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1.1
a. Foster Product Corporation.
b. Master Bond
c. Reltek
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with
the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied,
all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber
insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging
cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor

applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet
materials.

C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous

calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533,
Type I.
D. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock
ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1.1
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
E. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same
material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).
1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm).
B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed,

stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces,
with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation
shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings. Vapor barriers shall be continuous and
uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 °C (60 °F) and below. Lap
and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and
other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor
sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches).
C. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
D. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.
E. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
F. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
I. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
J. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
K. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
L. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
M. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 12 inches (300 mm) from point of attachment to pipe and taper

insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation
to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields
over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger,
support, and shield.
N. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
O. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
P. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along
both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). Apply
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to
receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4
inches (100 mm) o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor

retarder.
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
Q. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50
mm) below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate

insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
S. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
T. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section

"Firestopping."

U. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where
floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to
20 feet (4.5 to 6 m) to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples
at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlapping seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered
sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to
adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation
for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the

3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe
surface.
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation
and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access
to stainer basket.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless-steel
wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel
bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.

3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed

insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of
glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of
lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth
finish.
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same
material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.
1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange

insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without
disturbing insulation.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and
joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket
manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-
mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as

specified in the application Schedule of this section.
the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.9 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing

insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
according to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
3.11 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,
and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.12 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber; except for pipe drops to fixtures within walls, use
flexible elastomeric, 13 mm thick.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, DN50 (2-inch NPS) and Smaller: 25 mm.

b. Pipe, Larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS): 25 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket where
exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
6. Finish: None.
B. Service: Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater piping directly under roof slab.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: 13 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.

a. Pipe, all sizes: 19 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.

6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Diesel-engine coolant.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium silicate.

6. Finish: None.

E. Service: Diesel-engine exhaust.
1. Operating Temperature: 454 deg C (850 deg F) and lower.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium silicate.
a. Pipe, all sizes: two layers, each layer 50 mm thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Stainless steel.

6. Finish: None.
3.13 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.
B. Service: Domestic water.


6. Finish: Aluminum Cladding.
C. Service: Refrigerant suction.


6. Finish: Aluminum Cladding.
D. Service: Diesel-engine coolant.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium Silicate.

6. Finish: None.
E. Service: Diesel-engine exhaust.

1. Operating Temperature: 454 deg C (850 deg F) and lower.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium Silicate.
a. Pipe, all sizes: two layers, each layer 50 mm thick..

6. Finish: None.

SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.
B. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing,
disassembling, and repairing.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and
ASME B31.1 for power piping.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
D. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
VALVES 15110 - Page 1 of 7

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Valves:
a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation.

b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
e. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
g. NIBCO Inc.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
j. Victaulic Company of America.
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under ground and
or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 7.5 mm (300 micron) fusion bonded
epoxy coating.
1. Valves installed above ground and indoors: apply coating for internal and external
parts.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of

this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller, except for
plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves.

3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed 2400 mm
(96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and larger.
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.
J. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 450 deg C (840 deg F) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 216 deg C
(421 deg F) for ball valves.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-
bronze body and screwed-in bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy non-rising
stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end
connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem,
outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly,
flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi)
CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass
ball, standard port for DN15 (1/2-inch) valves and smaller and conventional port for DN20
(3/4-inch) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon, PTFE seats and
seals; threaded or soldered end connections: Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
2.5 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves: Lubricated, MSS SP-78, 1200-kPa (175-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end
connections:
1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger, 2400
mm (96 inches) or higher above floor.

2.6 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-
psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and
screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-
impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable
bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing
with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, 1035- kPa (150-psi) maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel
stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug, or grooved style:
1. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.

2. Operator for Sizes DN50 (2 Inches) to DN150 (6 Inches): Standard lever handle.
3. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) to DN600 (24 Inches): Gear operator with
position indicator.
2.8 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa
(200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition
seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-
psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted non-
slam, brass disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
C. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126, AWWA C508
having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air cushioned side mounted
cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis connected to ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved
connection.
D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal or
vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, silent type, bronze disc EPFM rubber disc with
stainless-steel holder threaded connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material
composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished floor
elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush
to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once
the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall
to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe and ball
valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve
applications and arrangements.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension.
2. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze
or teflon disc.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
5. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.

6. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.
C. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and memory
stop.
2. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-
iron body.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
5. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast-
iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron
body lift check.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

SECTION 15121 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems.
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.
B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and
design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion
fitting and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of expansion fittings and
loops that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS 15121 - Page 1 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Expansion Joints and Compensators:
a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. Mercer Rubber Co.
d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.
e. Flexicraft Industries.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. Metraflex Co.
h. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion Joint Div.
2. Flexible Ball Joints:
a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
3. Guides:
a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. B-Line Systems, Inc.
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. Metraflex Co.
2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with end
fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections,
1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Joints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shroud.
3. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless-
steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.
B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with internal

guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.

3. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated
for 1200 kPa at 116 deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.
1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external control

rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Types: Single and double sphere.
D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs

joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings,
corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.
1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.
a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths
with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450 kPa at 232 deg C
(500 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and double-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at 70 deg F)
and 2170 kPa at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
2. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.
a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and
3550 kPa at 315 deg C (515 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
d. Joints for DN65 to DN150 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6): Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C (275 psig at 70
deg F) and 1380 kPa at 315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure
ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg C (165 psig at 70 deg F) and
830 kPa at 315 deg C (120 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
2.3 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for
repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250 psig at 400
deg F) minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system,
drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and flanged-end connections, unless
1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2. Double-Slip Type: With base.
B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing,

designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250
psig at 400 deg F) minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials Specifications," and with ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-containing parts and bolting.

1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.
2.4 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of
piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland
cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.
C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, and include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if

expansion fittings are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed
on or in concrete.

3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water meters installed
outside the building.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water meters outside the building.
2. Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for gas meters outside the building.
3. Division 13 Sections for fire-pump flow-measuring systems.
4. Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping" for gas meters.
5. Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping" for steam and condensate
meters.
6. Mechanical equipment Sections that specify meters and gages as part of factory-
fabricated equipment.
C. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
and location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies

under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flowmeters.
3. Thermal-energy flowmeters.
4. Water meters.
METERS AND GAGES 15122 - Page 1 of 12

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, or approved equal, the following:
1. Thermometers:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.

b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales
Operation.
c. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit.
d. Ernst Gage Co.
e. Marsh Bellofram.
f. Palmer Instruments, Inc.
g. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc.
h. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
i. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
2. Pressure Gages:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.

Operation.
d. Ernst Gage Co.
e. Marsh Bellofram.
f. Noshok, Inc.
g. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
h. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
3. Test Plugs:
a. Flow Design, Inc.

b. MG Piping Products Co.
c. National Meter.
d. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
e. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
f. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
4. Flow Elements:
a. ABB, Inc.; ABB Instrumentation.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
d. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
e. Dieterich Standard Co.
f. Flow Design, Inc.
g. Gerand Engineering Co.
h. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
i. Leeds & Northrup.
j. Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div.

k. Taco, Inc.
5. Flowmeters:
a. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).

b. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
c. Baird Controls, Inc.
d. Data Industrial Corp.
e. George Fischer Signet, Inc.
f. Hersey Measurement Co.
g. Onicon, Inc.
h. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Measurement Div.
6. Flow Indicators:
a. Dover Corp.; OPW Engineered Systems.

b. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
c. Emerson Electric Co.; Brooks Instrument Div.
d. Ernst Gage Co.
7. Water Meters:
a. ABB Water Meters, Inc.

b. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Milwaukee, WI).
c. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Div.
d. Hersey Measurement Co.
e. ISTEC Corp.
f. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div.
8. Energy Meters.
a. ERMO AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.

Operation.
d. Ernst Gage Co.
e. Marsh Bellofram.
f. Palmer Instruments, Inc.
g. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc.
h. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
2.2 METERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to 240 deg F,
with 2-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0 to
100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
3. Hot Water: 0 to 100 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to 212 deg F, with 2-
degree scale divisions).
4. Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0 to 100
deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).

5. Steam and Condensate: 10 to 205 deg C, with 3-degree scale divisions (50 to 400
deg F, with 5-degree scale divisions).
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E 1.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
230 mm (9 inches) long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.
2.4 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.
2.5 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
D. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit installation.

F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.
2.6 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.3; direct-mounting, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Stainless steel with 125-mm- (5-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.
2.7 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.3, bimetal type.
B. Dial: 25-mm (1-inch) diameter.
C. Case: Stainless steel.
D. Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3-mm- (1/8-inch-) diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal
length of 125 mm (5 inches).
2.8 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.9 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
thermometer.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.

6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.10 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.

thickness of exterior insulation.
2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than
thickness of insulation lining.
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection;

dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15
psig of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
2.12 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-
metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.13 TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe from dial-
type thermometer or pressure gage.

E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200 deg F),
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to plus 275 deg F),
ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and
carrying case.
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's
operating conditions.
2.14 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings,
and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of

equipment or system where used.
2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in
liters.
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-inch-)
diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
1. Scale: Liters per second (Gallons per minute).

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
C. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
D. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting made for

installation in piping.
1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached
tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller
elements and flanged or welded for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger elements.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg C (250 deg F).
E. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for insertion into
piping.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with brass

fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.
2.15 TURBINE FLOWMETERS
A. Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in liters per second (gallons per minute).

1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body and plastic turbine or impeller, with

integral direct-reading scale.
2. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa (150 psig) minimum.
3. Temperature Rating: 82 deg C (180 deg F) minimum.
liters.
5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2-1/2 percent.
2.16 VORTEX-SHEDDING FLOWMETERS
A. In-Line Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation between pipe flanges; measures
flow directly in liters per second (gallons per minute).
1. Construction: Stainless-steel body, with integral transmitter and direct-reading scale.

liters.
5. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power operation.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 7/10 percent for liquids and 1-1/4 percent for gases.
B. Insertion Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation in large piping; measures flow
directly in liters per second.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe, with integral transmitter and direct-reading scale.

liters.
5. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent for liquids and 1-1/2 percent for gases.
2.17 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in piping
systems.
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic pelton-
wheel indicator.
2.18 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
A. Instruments include turbine-wheel or flow-sensor element and meter, two temperature

sensors, transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery pack, integral stop valves,
strainer, and magnetic trap.
1. Construction: Bronze body.

3. Temperature Range: 0 to 121 deg C (32 to 250 deg F).

4. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatt hours or

joules (British thermal units).
5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
6. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.
2.19 WATER METERS
A. Description: AWWA C700, displacement type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters or
cubic meters as required by utility.
B. Description: AWWA C701, turbine type. Registers flow in liters (gallons) or cubic meters
(cubic feet) as required by utility.
C. Description: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters (gallons)
or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.
D. Description: AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line, proportional, detector

type; 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; with meter on bypass. Registers flow in liters
(gallons) or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.
1. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; size not less than one-half
nominal size of main-line meter.
E. Description: AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line-turbine, detector type;

1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure; with strainer and with meter on bypass. Registers
flow in liters (gallons) or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.
1. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; not less than DN50
(NPS 2).
F. Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; direct-reading type complying with

AWWA C706; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring,
and remote register assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
applications where used.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central
systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.

5. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.

6. Each duct thermometer support flange.
7. As shown on plans
C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are
indicated.
1. Install with socket extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.
E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are
indicated.
1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most
readable position.
B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Building water-service entrance.
3. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.
4. As shown on plans
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump, including
fire and booster pumps.
D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure gages.
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each
hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of pipe

upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible locations.

E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible
locations.
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed
by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for remote
sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to support meter.
3.7 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 and utility's
requirements.
1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water meter inlet.
Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass around meter, unless prohibited
by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and
outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on
brick or concrete piers.
3. Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and outlet
and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on
brick or concrete piers.
3.8 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility's
instructions and requirements.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.
C. Install electrical connections for power and devices.

D. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup
paint.

SECTION 15170 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
1. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor

requirements for motor-driven equipment.
2. Division 16 Sections for application of motors with Variable Frequency Drives
(VFD).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements;
size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and
coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
requirements.
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide motors specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
MOTORS 15170 - Page 1 of 3

C. Motors Smaller than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
D. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
F. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start,
accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
H. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, medium induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have
separate winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements for
thermally protected motors.
D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum
service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents.
Windings are insulated with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is chemical-resistant
paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to NEMA MG 1:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.

2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting
torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 hp.
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens

power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets
when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial
forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 15182 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steam and condensate piping and specialties for systems up to 1030
kPa (150 psig), inside the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. HP Systems: High-pressure systems operating at 695 kPa (100 psig) or more.
B. MP Systems: Medium-pressure systems operating at more than 104 kPa (15 psig), but at
less than 695 kPa (100 psig).
C. LP Systems: Low-pressure systems operating at less than 104 kPa (15 psig).
A. Steam and condensate piping for this Project is a two-pipe, mechanical flow, upfeed system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve and steam trap indicated, including rated
capacities and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail flash tank assemblies and fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops and their
attachment to the building structure. Include dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 15182 - Page 1 of 12

E. Maintenance Data: For steam traps, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in maintenance
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate
ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of steam and condensate piping and suspension system
components with other construction, including light fixtures, hydronic piping, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Safety Valves:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Kunkle Inds. Inc.; Kunkle Valve Division.
c. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.
2. Pressure-Reducing Valves:

b. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.

c. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

d. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
3. Steam Traps:

b. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
c. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
4. Air Vents and Vacuum Breakers:

b. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
c. Johnson Corp. (The).
5. Steam Meters:
a. EMCO Flowmeters.
b. ISTEC Corp.
c. Preso Meters Corp.
6. Condensate Meters:
a. Hersey Measurement Company.

b. ISTEC Corp.
A. General: Refer to Part 3 piping application articles for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): ASTM A 53, Type S
(seamless), Grade A, Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): ASTM A 53, Type E
(electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain
ends.
D. Steel Pipe, DN 500 (NPS 20): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S
(seamless), Grade B, Schedule 20, black steel, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedules 40 and 80, black
steel; seamless for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for
DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.

F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3; Classes 150 and 300.
G. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
H. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250;
raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
I. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
J. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and
gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
K. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure and 121 deg C
(250 deg F) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-
end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch)
misalignment.
L. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis
of pipe being welded.
M. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.4 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
2.5 SAFETY VALVES
A. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
B. Bronze Safety Valves: Class 250, with threaded inlet and outlet; forged copper-alloy disc;
fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; factory set
and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads
complying with ASME B1.20.1.
C. Cast-Iron Safety Valves: Class 250; forged copper-alloy disc with bronze nozzle; fully
enclosed, cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff;
raised-face flanged inlet and threaded outlet connections; factory set and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads
complying with ASME B1.20.1.

D. Stop-Check Valves: Class 250, malleable-iron body and bonnet, cylindrical disc, removable
liner and machined seat, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, polytetrafluoroethylene-
impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections, and
cast-iron handwheel.
2.6 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Size, Capacity, and Pressure Rating: Factory set for inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
B. Valve Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range and
positive shutoff. Valves shall have cast-iron body with threaded connections for valves
DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and flanged connections for valves DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and
larger; and hardened stainless-steel trim, replaceable head and seat, main head stem guide
fitted with flushing and pressure-arresting device, cover over pilot diaphragm, and non-
asbestos gaskets.
2.7 STEAM TRAPS
A. Thermostatic Traps: Class 125, bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece and
screw-in cap; balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel bellow element; and renewable,
hardened stainless-steel head and seat.
B. Thermodynamic Traps: Stainless-steel body and screw-in cap; maximum operating pressure
of 4140 kPa (600 psig); stainless-steel disc and seat; threaded ends.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A 126, cast-iron body and bolted cap; renewable,
stainless-steel float mechanism with renewable, hardened stainless-steel head and seat;
maximum operating pressure of 860 kPa (125 psig); balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or
monel thermostatic bellow element.
1. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 25 deg C (45 deg F) of superheat and
resisting water hammer without sustaining damage.
D. Inverted Bucket Traps: Cast-iron body and cap, pressure rated for 1725 kPa (250 psig);
stainless-steel head and seat; stainless-steel valve retainer, lever, and guide pin assembly;
and brass or stainless-steel bucket.
1. Contractor Options:
a. Strainer: Integral stainless-steel inlet strainer within the trap body.

b. Air Vent: Stainless-steel thermostatic vent.
2.8 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS
A. Float Vents: Cast-iron or brass body, seamless brass float, balanced-pressure thermostatic
bellows, and replaceable stainless-steel seat, float, and head.

2.9 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Vacuum Breakers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) steam working pressure, 185 deg C (365 deg F)
maximum operating temperature, brass or stainless-steel body, and stainless-steel retainer,
spring, and ball; with plain or threaded outlet.
2.10 STRAINERS
A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1725-kPa (250-psig) working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B
cast-iron body; stainless-steel screen, No. 20 mesh for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and
manufacturer's recommended perforations for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; tapped
blowoff plug. Threaded connections for strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and flanged
connections for strainers DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
B. Basket Strainers: 1725-kPa (250-psig) working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B cast-
iron body; stainless-steel screen; bolted cover; threaded connections for strainers DN 50
(NPS 2) and smaller and flanged connections for strainers DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
2.11 FLASH TANKS
A. Shop or factory fabricated of welded steel according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, for 1035-kPa (150-psig) rating; and bearing ASME label. Fabricate with
tappings for vents, low-pressure steam and condensate outlets, high-pressure condensate
inlet, air vent, safety valve, and legs.
2.12 METERS
A. Steam Meters: Pipeline sensor of modified venturi design, of [stainless-steel] construction,

for insertion in pipeline between flanges, plus or minus 1 percent accuracy over full-scale
deflection, producing pressure differential proportional to square of flow rate.
B. Steam Meters: Pipeline sensor with stainless-steel wetted parts and flange connections and
with a piezoelectric sensor removable and serviceable without shutting down the process.
1. Turndown Ratio: At least 10:1 with plus or minus 1 percent accuracy over full flow
range.
2. Microprocessor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.
C. Steam Meters: Pipeline sensor of spring-loaded, variable-area flowmeter type; density

compensated; plus or minus 2 percent accuracy over full-scale deflection. Meters shall have
a flow computer to display totalizer flow, flow rate, temperature, pressure, time, and date;
alarms for high and low flow rate and temperature; and independent timers to store four
peak flow rates and total flow. Computer shall have four, 20-mA output, ETA 232C, serial
communication ports.
D. Condensate Meters: Brass body with threaded connections for meters DN 50 (NPS 2) and
smaller and flanged connections for meters DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; positive
displacement turbine; magnetic coupling counter; suitable for temperatures up to 121 deg C
(250 deg F) and for 1725 kPa (250 psig) working pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Steam Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints
using Class 125 cast-iron fittings.
B. Steam Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 40 steel
pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
C. Steam Piping, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): Schedule 30 steel pipe,
with welded joints using Schedule 30 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-
steel flanges.
D. Steam Piping, DN 500 (NPS 20): Schedule 20 steel pipe, with welded joints using
Schedule 20 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
E. Condensate Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded
joints using Class 125 malleable-iron fittings.
F. Condensate Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 80
steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and
Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
3.2 MP AND HP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Steam Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints
using Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
B. Steam Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 40 steel
pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
C. Steam Piping, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): Schedule 30 steel pipe,
with welded joints using Schedule 30 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-
steel flanges.
D. Steam Piping DN 500 (NPS 20): Schedule 20 steel pipe, with welded joints using
Schedule 20 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
E. Condensate Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded
joints using Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
F. Condensate Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 80
steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and
Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve
types:

1. Shutoff Duty: Gate and ball valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe and ball valves.
B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at inlet connection to
each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.4 LP STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS
A. Thermostatic Traps: Convectors and finned-tube radiation.
B. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, laundry equipment, kitchen
equipment, heat exchangers, and heating coils.
3.5 MP AND HP STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS
A. Thermostatic Traps: Convectors and finned-tube radiation.
B. Inverted Bucket Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, and laundry equipment.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Kitchen equipment, heat exchangers, and heating coils.
D. Thermodynamic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, and heat tracer lines.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short DN 20
(NPS 3/4) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as
required for system drainage.
D. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of
steam flow.
E. Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of
condensate flow.
F. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to steam mains using 45-degree
fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Use of 90-degree
tee fittings is permissible if 45-degree fittings are impractical. If length of branch takeoff is
less than 3 m, pitch branch line down toward mains at a 0.4 percent grade.
H. Install unions in piping DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller adjacent to each valve, at final
connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install flanges in piping DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger at final connections of each piece of
equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid
valve, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 (NPS 3/4) nipple and ball valve with
cap in blowdown connection of strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger. Match size of strainer
blowoff valve and cap in blowdown connection for strainers smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).
K. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
L. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of
risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe bends, and
expansion joints.
1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not
exceeding 90 m where pipe is pitched down in direction of steam flow and a
maximum of 45 m where pipe is pitched up in direction of steam flow.
2. Size drip legs at vertical risers same size as pipe and extend beyond rise. Size drip
legs at other locations same diameter as main. In steam mains DN 150 (NPS 6) and
larger, dirt leg size can be reduced, but to no less than DN 100 (NPS 4).
3. Install gate valve at drip legs, dirt pockets, and strainer blowdowns to allow removal
of dirt and scale.
4. Install steam traps close to drip legs.
M. Pitch condensate piping down toward flash tank. If more than one condensate pipe
discharges into flash tank, install a swing check valve in each line. Install thermostatic air
vent at top of tank. Install inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at low-pressure
condensate outlet, sized for three times the condensate load. Install safety valve at tank top.
Install pressure gage, gate valve, and swing check valve on low-pressure (flash) steam
outlet.
3.7 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION
A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment, but
not more than 1200 mm from connected equipment.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, install gate valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap;
install union, check valve, sight glass, and gate valve downstream from trap.
3.8 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure-reducing valves in readily accessible location for maintenance and

inspection.
B. Install bypass piping around each pressure-reducing valve, with globe valve equal in size to
area of pressure-reducing valve seat ring, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install gate valves around each pressure-reducing valve.
D. Install unions around each pressure-reducing valve having threaded-end connections.
E. Install pressure gages on low-pressure side of each pressure-reducing valve and ahead of
shutoff valve. Install pressure gages downstream from globe valve on pressure-reducing
valve bypass.
1. On two-stage pressure-reducing stations, install drip trap and pressure gage upstream
from second stage pressure-reducing valve.

F. Install strainers upstream for each pressure-reducing valve.
G. Install safety valves downstream from each pressure-reducing valve station.
3.9 STEAM METER INSTALLATION
A. Install lengths of straight pipe upstream and downstream from meters according to steam
meter manufacturer's instructions.
3.10 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1. Pipe safety valve discharge without valves
to atmosphere outside building. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and
pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain.
3.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 6 m or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

2. DN 25 (NPS 1): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 3.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50 (NPS 2): Maximum span, 4 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
12. DN 350 (NPS 14): Maximum span, 9.8 m; minimum rod size, 25 mm
D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
3.12 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint
construction requirements for threaded, welded, and flanged joints.
3.13 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install vacuum breaker downstream from control valve and bypass and close to coil inlet
connection.
E. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
F. Install a drip leg at coil outlet.
A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,
to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during
test.
B. Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage
due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped
air. Use drip legs installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified
minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,
"Building Services Piping."
4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,
or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
5. Prepare written report of testing.
3.15 ADJUSTING

A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after steam and condensate system
balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
3. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Flush steam and condensate piping with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer
screens.

SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including
pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings, including pipe
and tube sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs,
wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial
relationship between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and
installation of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and
tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected
equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
any other information required by Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation
and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."

2. ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and
labeled.
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - Page 1 of 10

A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
to Employer.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct 1 test.
2. Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg (22 lb) of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Refrigerants:
a. Allied Signal Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.

b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.
d. ICI Americas Inc.; Fluorochemicals Bus.
2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
a. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.

b. Eaton Corporation; Industrial Control Div.
c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.
d. Henry Valve Company.
e. Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division.
f. Sporlan Valve Company.
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), annealed temper.
D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type A (ASTM B 88, Type K), annealed temper.

A. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
2.5 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275
deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or bronze body and
bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel,
stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275 deg F)
working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper
gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder-end
connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure,
149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, PTFE
seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe design. Valve shall be straight-
through pattern, with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating pressure,
149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-
brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall
be straight-through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with copper stubs,
brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder-end connections.
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ARI 760; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature rating, 2760-
kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2-way straight-
through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1
solenoid enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally closed
holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or cast
bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc
standard coil, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; direct acting, brass with pilot operator,
stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed
and ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ARI 750; thermostatic-adjustable, modulating

type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end connections;
with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and external
equalizer line.

K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor
unloading; solder-end connections.
2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure; forged-brass or

steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen, and screwed cleanout
plug, with solder-end connections.
B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure; steel shell

with stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C (200 deg F)

operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing
window with color-coded moisture indicator, and solder-end connections.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel shell, flange

ring, and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and wrought-copper fittings
for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets, as follows:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and desiccant
with integral gaskets.
E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure, 107 deg C (225
deg F) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-
end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg F) maximum
operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper
tubing; forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-inch) nominal copper-tube size
and ductile iron for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3-inch) nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel
bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on
flanges and bolts.
G. Flexible Connectors: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or

stainless-steel core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, solder-end connections, and
synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180 mm long.
H. Mufflers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, brazed-steel construction with fusible

plug, sized for refrigeration capacity.

2.7 RECEIVERS
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760-kPa (400-
psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8D; 2760 kPa (400 psig) with
tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.
2.8 REFRIGERANT
A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
B. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.
C. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-copper
tubing.
D. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-copper
tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration
Systems.”
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic

C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,
sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
F. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
G. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have
been eliminated.
H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent
downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in
vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
N. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS).
O. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion

valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
P. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
Q. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
R. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
S. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats,
and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near bulb of expansion valve.
T. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
U. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
V. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standards for
Refrigeration Systems” Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors.
W. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15,
“Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” procedures.
X. Charge system as follows:
1. Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 1.7 deg C (35
deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge to 14 kPa (2 psig).
A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Provide according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP-69.
B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in length.
C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.
D. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 6 m or longer supported by a trapeze.
E. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B 88M
(ASTM B 88).
1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.

8. 79 mm: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
9. 105 mm: Maximum span, 3.6 m; minimum rod size, 12 mm.
G. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
formation of scale.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor inlet and
outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of
strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple
condenser systems.
D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff

valve and expansion valve.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standards
for Refrigeration Systems”.
3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and
on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.

C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers
are used.
D. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic

expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.
F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before
each solenoid valve.
G. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic

compressors, and before each solenoid valve.
H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-
down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil
bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line
when system shuts down.
I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with long piping
runs, sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not
absorb vibration.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for electrical

connections.
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at 186-kPa
(27-psig) vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or electronic leak
detector. Test to no leakage.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

3.11 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
3.12 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 1.67 deg C (35
deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between
vacuum pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa (2 psig).
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide
full-operating charge.

SECTION 15191 - FUEL OIL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fuel oil piping, specialties, and accessories within the building.

2. Fuel oil transfer pump.
3. Underground liquid fuel oil tank.
1. Division 2 Section "Fuel-Oil Distribution" for fuel oil storage tanks, fuel oil piping,
specialties, and accessories outside the building.
2. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible
connectors.
3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descriptions,
and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this
Section.
4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.
5. Division 15 Section "Steam And Condensate Piping" for valves.
6. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers.
A. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise indicated, minimum pressure

requirement for fuel oil piping is 1035 kPa (150 psig).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Specialty valves.
2. Fuel oil transfer pumps.
B. Shop Drawings: Fuel oil piping and equipment. Include plans and attachments to other
Work.
FUEL OIL PIPING 15191 - Page 1 of 16

C. Fuel Oil Pumping Equipment:
1. Drawings with dimensions and arrangement of pumps, motors, couplings, bases, drip
pans, duplex strainer, relief valves, back-pressure control valve, and supports and all
accessories.
2. Design and construction of pumps, motors, couplings, bases, drip pans, duplex
strainer, relief valves, back pressure control valves, all valves and accessories.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Motor efficiency and power factor at full load.
5. Pressure and temperature limitations of pumps, duplex strainer, relief valves, back
pressure control valve and all valves.
6. ASTM number and pressure rating of pipe and fittings.
7. Performance data on pumps including discharge head, flow, suction lift and motor
power required at viscosity range shown. Refer to drawings for requirements.
8. Performance data on relief valves and back-pressure control valves.
9. Maintenance Data to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
D. Underground Tanks:
1. Drawings of tanks, anchoring devices, tank manholes, tank manhole enclosures,

access doors for the tank manhole enclosures and all accessories. Include overall
dimensions and dimensional locations and sizes of all anchoring devices, pipe
connections, access openings.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions describing recommended foundation, bedding
and backfill material, support and anchoring devices, and method of installation.
3. Weight of entire tank assemblies, empty and flooded.
4. Certification of compliance with specified standards.
5. Data certifying that tanks are designed for surcharge loads of backfill, traffic and
other construction as shown.
6. Design and construction of tanks, secondary containment, pipe connections,
manholes, anchoring devices, heating coils, access doors for tank manhole
enclosures.
7. Application and performance data on tank coating (steel tanks) from manufacturer of
coating.
8. Design of cathodic protection system (steel tanks).
E. Foot valves, check valves, overfill prevention valves:
1. Catalog cuts showing design and construction.

2. Pressure and temperature ratings.
3. Pressure loss and flow rate data.
4. Materials of construction.
5. Accessories.
F. Leak Detection System:
1. Drawings, description and performance data on sensors, control units.

2. Description of operation.
3. Layout of system.
4. Installation and operating instructions.
5. Data on interconnecting wiring systems to be furnished.
G. Tank Level Indicator System:

1. Drawings showing indicators, tank units, with dimensions.

2. Design and construction of all elements of system.
3. Installation instructions.
H. Tank and Piping Accessories: Design, construction, and dimensions of vent caps, fill boxes,
fill caps, spill containers and other accessories.
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of oil
transfer pumps and are based on the specific model selected. Other manufacturers' products
complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements".

C. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel oil piping materials,
installation, inspection, and testing.
D. Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code," and NFPA 31,
"Installation of Oil Burning Equipment," for fuel oil piping materials, components,
installations, inspection, and testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Oil Shutoff Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

b. Jomar International, Ltd.
c. Kitz Corp. of America.
d. McCanna, Inc.
e. Nibco, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a. Anderson, Greenwood & Co.; Kunkle Valve Div.

b. Fulflo Specialties Co.
c. IMI Cash Valve, Inc.
d. Webster Heating.
3. Oil Safety Valves:

a. Suntec Industries, Inc.

b. Webster Heating.
4. Fuel Oil Transfer Pumps:
a. Tuthill Corp.; Tuthill Pump Div.

b. Viking Pump, Inc.
c. Webster Heating.
5. Duplex, Fuel Oil Transfer Pump Sets:
a. Alyan Pump Co.

b. APT, Inc.
c. Hydronic Modules Corp.
d. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corp.
e. Smith-Koch, Inc.
f. Webster Heating.
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting
materials.
B. Piping: Steel; seamless, ASTM A53, Grade B; Schedule 40.
C. Joints: Socket or butt-welded for piping 50 mm (2 inches) and under. Piping 65 mm (2-l/2
inches) and over shall be butt-welded.
D. Fittings:
1. Butt-welded joints: Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASME Bl6.9, same schedule as
adjoining pipe.
2. Socket-welded joints: Forged steel, ASME Bl6.ll, 13,790 kPa (2000 psi) class.
E. Unions: On piping 50 mm (2 inches) and under, forged steel, 13,790 kPa (2000 psi) class or
20,680 kPa (3000 psi) class.
F. Companion flanges: Flanges and bolting shall conform to ASME B16.5.
G. Welding flanges: Weld neck, ASME B16.5, forged steel ASTM A105, 1025 kPa (150 psi).
H. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for joining materials not in this Section.
A. Oil Shutoff Valves: UL 842; metal-body ball valve with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
B. Pressure-Reducing Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include bronze body with 1035-
kPa (150-psig) minimum pressure rating.
C. Oil Safety Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include metal body; broken-line, oil
shutoff feature; and 275-kPa (40-psig) minimum pressure rating.

D. Check Valves - Fuel Pump Suction.
1. Pipe Sizes 50 mm (two inches) and under: Rated for 1375 kPa (200 psi) water-oil-
gas, swing-type, threaded ends, ASTM B-62 bronze body. Provide union adjacent to
valve.
2. Pipe Sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and above: Rated for 1375 kPa (200 psi) water-oil-
gas, swing-type, 850 kPa (125 pounds) ASME flanged ends, ASTM A126 class B
cast iron body.
E. Foot Valves - Fuel Pump Suction: Double poppet, lapped-in metal-to-metal seats, double-
guided stems, 20 mesh inlet screen, same size as fuel suction piping. Foot valve shall be
removable to above grade through the tank manhole enclosure or through extractor fitting.
F. Extractor Fittings: Arranged to permit removal of foot valves, overfill prevention valves,
and other devices which are located below grade. Access point shall be through a cast iron
fill box-type manhole located at grade. Provide extractor wrench.
G. Overfill Prevention Valve: Aluminum valve designed for underground or aboveground

tanks, as applicable. Removable through the extractor fitting on underground tanks. Locate
valve near the top of the tank in the fill pipe. On underground tanks with gravity fill, provide
two stage automatic float-operated valve. First stage operation at 95 percent tank capacity
shall reduce flow to 19 L per minute (5 gallons per minute) or less. Second stage operation
shall stop flow completely when tank is no more than 98 percent full. On aboveground
tanks, or tanks pressure-filled, provide single stage valve which stops flow completely at 95
percent of tank capacity. Valve shall include method for draining oil trapped above the
valve into the tank.
2.4 FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Pump and Motors:
1. Type: Constant displacement, rotary, screw or gear-type, horizontal shaft, flexible-

coupled, motor-driven, base-mounted, arranged as shown. Internal gear-type pumps
not permitted where suction lift exceeds 33 kPa (10 inches Hg).
2. Service: Pumps, motors and accessories shall be designed for continuous fuel oil
service as shown on the drawings.
3. Performance: Refer to schedules on the drawings. Vendor shall submit complete data
to certify that pumps offered will perform in accordance with requirements for
suction lift, discharge pressure, sound level limitations and flow rate at viscosity
range shown.
4. Pump Construction:
a. Pump Casing: steel designed for 1025 kPa (150 psi) minimum. Casing shall
have removable bolted sections to allow access to internal parts.
b. Power Rotors: Shall be ductile iron, alloy steel, or hardened or nitrided steel.
When service at viscosity of 2500 SSU or higher is required, ductile iron will
not be permitted.
c. Idler Rotors: Shall be ductile iron, pearlitic iron, or hardened gray iron, or
hardened or nitrided steel.
d. Shaft Seals: Provide mechanical seals.
e. Internal Relief Valves: Shall not be provided.

5. Electric Motor Drives: High efficiency, open drip proof. Select motor sizes so that
motors are not overloaded under all operating conditions. Motors shall be designed
for 40 °C ambient temperature.
6. Mounting - Pumps and Motors: Mount on steel base plates. Align pumps and motors
at the factory.
7. Shaft Couplings: Shall be all metal, flexible design which permits parallel, angular,
and axial misalignment. Coupling shall be sufficiently flexible to reduce transmission
of shock loads significantly. Coupling size selection shall be based on manufacturer's
recommendation for service. Provide coupling guard bolted to base plate.
B. Duplex Strainers: Provide duplex, basket-type cast iron strainers designed to allow one
basket to be removed for cleaning while the other is in service. Strainer shall include
diverter valve with handle which will select the strainer to be in use. Operation of the
diverter valve shall not stop the flow of fluid. Basket covers shall be clamp-type. Ratio of
free straining area to area of strainer pipe size shall be at least 4 to 1. Strainer baskets shall
stainless steel. Provide 60 mesh basket liners for No. 2 fuel oil. Strainers on suction side of
pumps shall be 345 kPa (50 psi), 93 °C (200 °F) minimum design; discharge side 1375 kPa
(200 psi), 93 °C (200 °F) minimum.
C. Pressure Relief Valves (Overpressure Protection): Provide at discharge of each oil pump.
Size valves to relieve the maximum pumping capability of each oil pump furnished, 965 kPa
(140 psi) set pressure of the relief valves plus 25 percent accumulation. Pressure settings
shall be adjustable. Valves shall have solid ungrooved plug and shall close bubble-tight.
D. Back Pressure Control Valve (Pump Pressure Control): Valve shall operate to maintain an
essentially constant pump discharge pressure. Pressure rise shall not exceed five percent of
set pressure. Flow range shall exceed the flow of the largest oil pump in the set. Set pressure
shall be adjustable plus or minus 20 percent of set pressure. Valve shall have stainless steel
disc and seat, bronze body. Valve disc and seat shall be renewable. Valve shall be designed
for fuel oil service as shown on the drawings.
E. Arrangement (Pump Set): Pumps, motors, valves, piping and accessories shall be furnished
as a factory-built unit. All items of equipment shall be mounted on a steel drip pan base with
an area sufficient to extend beyond the limits of all equipment, constructed of 3 mm
(1/8-inch) steel with 50 mm (2 inch) high vertical sides. Provide threaded 13 mm (1/2-inch)
plugged opening for draining. Arrange valves and piping on rigid steel supports welded to
the base. All items of equipment shall be readily accessible for operation and maintenance.
Pump set shall be suitable for the space available for rigging and placement.
F. Spare Parts: Complete mechanical seal for one oil pump. Complete set of casing gaskets for
one oil pump. Back pressure control valve, complete.
2.5 UNDERGROUND STEEL TANKS
A. Type: Factory fabricated all welded, horizontal cylindrical configuration, atmospheric

pressure, for underground installation as shown.
B. Construction:
1. Conform to UL 58, Type II, 360 degree secondary containment. Provide label of
conformance.
2. Conform to NFPA 30 or 31 as applicable.
3. The bottom 60 degrees of all lap or offset circumferential interior seams shall be seal
welded 30 degrees each way from bottom centerline to retard corrosion.

4. Design for surcharge loads due to backfill and paving as shown. In addition, in paved
areas, design for 14 500 kg (32,000 pound) axle loading.
5. Leaks and abrasions are not permitted. Maximum out-of-roundness is one percent of
the diameter.
C. Factory Cleaning: Clean interior and exterior. Remove all mill scale, dirt, rust, oil, welding
debris, loose coatings and coatings and material incompatible with fuel stored or protective
coating to be furnished. Sandblast exterior.
D. Factory Exterior Coating: UL 1746 and STI-P3 dielectric coating. Provide signed
certification that there are no holidays.
E. Cathodic Protection: Conform to UL 1746 and STI-P3, consisting of galvanic anodes, wire
conductors welded to the tank and connected to test station and anodes, insulating devices to
electrically isolate the tank from piping, test stations properly connected to permit required
tests.
F. Cathodic Protection System Test Stations:
1. Type: Above-ground, weatherproof. Enclosed terminals for test leads and leads
attached to protected system. Connection points for test instruments.
2. Housing: High-impact resistant plastic. Provide means to anchor housing below
grade. Locking cover for terminal board. Yellow color. Identification "CP TEST
STATION" molded in cover or otherwise permanently marked.
3. Terminal Board: High-impact resistant plastic board, cadmium or zinc-plated
hardware, accessible from front and rear, sufficient terminals for all required
connections. //
G. Steel Tank Manhole Enclosures:
1. Rectangular or cylindrical enclosures, sized as shown, designed to contain fuel spills

from leaking piping. Locate all tank manholes and tank piping connections within the
enclosure.
2. Same material and thickness as tank. Reinforce to prevent deflection. Continuous
weld to tank. Clean and coat interior and exterior as specified for exterior of tank.
3. In traffic areas, enclosure must be designed to withstand traffic loads (wheel loading,
14, 500 kg, (32,000 lb)) and must have flexible isolation system to prevent wheel
loads being transmitted to tank.
4. Provide cathodic protection system and test station as specified for the tanks.
5. Access to Manhole Enclosure: Cast iron manhole frames and covers, rated for traffic,
minimum opening as shown.
H. Pipe Connections to Tanks:
1. Conform to UL 58.
2. Pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller, threaded. Pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inches)
and larger, flanged, 1025 kPa (150 pound) ASME rating.
3. Welded joints required on steel piping located inside tanks.
4. Coordinate tank connection sizes and types with requirements of level gage unit, leak
detector sensor.
5. Dielectric insulation on all connections to steel piping.
6. All tank piping connections shall be within the tank manhole enclosure.
I. Tank Manholes: Provide two per tank. Bolted cover type, gasketed. Zinc plated bolts, nuts,
washers.

J. Internal Ladder: Provide one at each manhole.
K. Wear (Striker) Plates: Provide 300 mm (12 inch) square 6 mm (0.25 inch) thick steel plates
welded to bottom of tank directly under the sounding opening, the fuel return discharge, and
the fill discharge.
L. Lifting Lugs: Provide for rigging tanks.
M. Hold Down Straps: Provide quantity and design of EPDM-type rubber encased steel straps
as recommended by tank manufacturer to anchor tank to concrete ballast slab. Straps shall
have tension load capability equal to hold-down capability of ballast slab, with a minimum
safety factor of two. Provide complete anchorage devices, including turnbuckles, for
adjusting tension.
N. Vent pipe on underground tank: carry to nearest outside wall of building and as shown on
the drawings, carry up at least 4 m above grade with open end at least 1.5 m away from any
building opening. Pipe is to be sloped back to tank with no traps and is to be adequately
supported. End of pipe is to have a weatherproof and flame arrestor vent cap.
2.6 SOIL SEPARATOR MAT
A. Provide at horizontal interface between soil and gravel backfill above tank. Mat must cover
entire horizontal area of gravel backfill.
B. Materials of Construction-Options:
1. Porous, non-woven polypropylene and nylon fabric, heat bonded, 135 g per sq. meter
(4 ounces per square yard), resistant to all alkalies and weak acids.
2. Porous fiberglass mat consisting of borosilicate glass fiber, average diameter 8 to 12
microns, 50 mm to 100 mm (2 to 4 inch) strands, bonded with phenol formaldehyde
resin.
3. Thickness of mat 6 mm to 13 mm (1/4 to 1/2 inch); minimum density 48 kg/m3 (3
lb./cu. ft.).
2.7 TANK AND PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Vent Caps: Galvanized cast iron or aluminum with brass or bronze screens, arranged to
permit full venting and to prevent entry of foreign material into the vent line. Same pipe size
as vent pipe.
B. Fill Boxes: Spill-container type enclosing a fill cap assembly with camlock hose connector
with closure coordinated with fittings used by fuel supplier. Watertight assembly,
cylindrical body, quick-opening corrosion-resistant watertight sealable cover, polyethylene
spill containment compartment with minimum 15 gallon capacity. Integral drain valve with
discharge to fill pipe. Fill cap shall be lockable, tight-fill design with provision for padlock
on the top of the cap. Fill cap shall screw onto threaded adapter which can be removed
without removing fill box. Entire assembly shall seal tight with no leakage during filling and
when cap is in place. Spill-container type not required at locations designated only for
sounding tanks. Provide special tools necessary for opening fill boxes and fill caps. For
underground tanks, protect spill container from traffic by ramped, drain-slotted cast iron
body ring and cover. Design shall prevent transmission of traffic loads to the underground
tank.

C. Fill caps located above grade without fill boxes shall be lockable, tight-fill design, operated
by special wrench which shall be furnished. Entire assembly shall seal tight with no leakage
during fill and when cap is in place.
D. Support horizontal portion of pipes located inside tank every 2100 mm (7 feet) maximum.
E. Furnish gauging chart, liters versus mm and gallons versus inches depth.
F. Furnish sounding rod for each tank size. Mark rods in increments representing five percent
of tank capacity. Provide length of rod suitable for tank burial depth. Rods shall be
graduated in liters.
G. Fill Point Identification:
1. Fill Boxes at Grade Level: Aluminum, brass or bronze plate, anchored to concrete fill
box pad with stamped or engraved letters 18 mm (3/4 inch) high.
2. Fill Caps above Grade: Aluminum, brass or bronze plate, clamped to fill pipe, with
stamped or engraved letters 18 mm (3/4 inch) high.
3. Legend: "BURNER FUEL OIL FILL"
2.8 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT FOR UNDERGROUND FUEL PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Enclose the fuel supply, return and fill pipes in a secondary containment conduit, complete
with end seals, with 25 mm (1.0 inches) minimum continuous annular space, 37 mm (1.5
inches) between carrier pipes, which shall contain all leakage and which has provisions for
leak detection system as specified.
B. Steel Conduit with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Coating: Carbon steel pipe, ASTM
A53, Grade B, Schedule 40 for diameters through 125 mm (5 inches), 3.4 mm (0.134 inch)
thick for diameters greater than 125 mm (5 inches) up thru 650 mm (26 inches). All welded
construction. Blast clean exterior per SSPC SP-7. Apply fiberglass reinforced polyester
(FRP) external cladding at least 2.5 mm (0.10 inches) thick with ultra-violet inhibitor.
Cladding on field joints shall be equivalent to factory-applied cladding applied on remainder
of system. Test entire system for holidays using a 35,000 volt holiday detector. This system
not permitted when carrier pipe or tracing system contains steam or condensate.
C. Pipe Supports: Provide supports within conduit for fuel carrier pipes spaced 2100 mm (7
feet) apart except 3000 mm (10 feet) apart for carrier pipe size 50 mm (2 inches) through
100 mm (4 inches). Support design shall permit differential movement of pipes, allow
drainage of leakage to sumps, and maintain alignment of carrier pipes.
D. Conduit End Seals: Same material and coating as conduit, leak tight.
E. Leak Detector Sensor Locations: On each piping system, provide sumps at the low points
with water-tight openings above grade for access to leak detector sensors. Design sumps to
intercept all potential leakage. Maximum spacing between sumps, 3000 mm (100 feet).

2.9 TANK FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR AND ALARM SYSTEM
A. Type: Microprocessor-based system for remote monitoring of fuel level in all fuel storage
tanks in the project. Float-type tank level sensors. High and low level alarms. Volumetric
tank-tightness testing. Complete with all transducing, transmitting, and receiving devices.
On board printer to provide complete report of all system functions upon command. System
may be combined with leak detection system.
B. Level Indicator:
1. Digital continuous readout, minimum 18 mm (0.7 inches) high, showing tank level in
liters, smallest reading one liter.
2. Tank and fuel characteristics contained in preprogrammed non-volatile field-
replaceable databases. Protected power supply.
3. Locate all indicators, selector switches and alarms on face of wall-mounted panel.
Construct panel of fiberglass, stainless steel, or aluminum. Provide engraved plastic
labels identifying product measured, measuring units, and the tank identification
number.
C. High and Low Level Alarm System:
1. Automatic continuous on-line monitoring of all tanks.

2. Visual and audible indicators combined with level indicator panel. Identify the tank
which is in alarm condition.
3. Manual alarm test and silencing controls.
4. Interface with BMS to indicate tank level and alarm conditions.
5. Remote visual and audible high level alarms adjacent to tank fillbox locations (tank
identification not required). Locate in weatherproof exterior wall-mounted panels.
Provide identification sign: "WHEN ALARM SOUNDS - FUEL TANK FILLED TO
CAPACITY - DO NOT OVERFILL". Alarm shall include flashing red light with 180
degree visibility and horn or 100 mm (4 inch) diameter bell. Alarm shall
automatically shut off after 90 seconds of operation.
6. Low level alarm actuation adjustable 0-25 percent of tank capacity. High level alarm
actuation adjustable 75-100 percent of tank capacity.
D. Float-Type-Mounted Level Sensors: Float units shall be designed for installation and
removal through a 100 mm (four inch) diameter vertical pipe mounted in the top of the tank
E. System Performance: Resolution 2 mm (0.07 inch) of fluid height, accuracy plus or minus 6
mm (0.25 inch) of fluid height. Automatic compensation for fluid temperature changes.
F. Underground Wiring and Piping: Enclose in water-tight PVC conduit sized and arranged as
recommended by system manufacturer.
G. Code Conformance: NFPA-70.
2.10 BURIED UTILITY WARNING TAPE
A. Tape shall be 0.1 mm (0.004 inch) thick, 150 mm (6 inches) wide, yellow polyethelene with
a ferrous metallic core, acid and alkali-resistant and shall have a minimum strength of
12,000 kPa (1750 psi) lengthwise and 10,300 kPa (1500 psi) crosswise with an elongation
factor of 350 percent. Provide bold black letters on the tape identifying the type of system.

Tape color and lettering shall be unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in
the backfill material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for fuel oil transfer
pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend fuel oil piping and connect to fuel oil distribution for service entrance into building.
A. General: Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or
higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Piping, DN 25 (NPS 1) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
C. Piping, DN 32 to DN 50 (NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and
welded joints.
A. Refer to section “ STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPE” for specification of different valve
types
B. Fuel Oil: Discharge side of pumps. Conform to NFPA Code Nos. 30 and 3l.
1. Gate valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type l04.

2. Gate Valves, 65 mm (2-l/2 inches) and above: Type l0l.
3. Globe valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type 204.
4. Plug valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type 301. (Tank isolating valve on return
line.)
5. Plug valves, 65 mm (2-l/2 inches) and above: Type 302. (Tank isolating valve on
return line.)
6. Check valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type 404.
7. Check valves, 65 mm (2-l/2 inches) and above: Type 402.
C. Fuel Oil: Suction side of pumps and tank fill lines where tank is below fill point. Conform
to NFPA Code Nos. 30 and 3l.
1. Gate valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type l05.

2. Gate valves, 65 mm (2-l/2 inches) and above: Type l03.
3. Plug valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type 301.
4. Plug valves, 65 mm (2-l/2 inches) and above: Type 302.

6. Check valves, 65 mm (2-l/2 inches) and above: Type 403.
D. Fuel Oil: Tank fill lines where tank is above fill point.
1. Gate valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type 105.

2. Gate valves, 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and above: Type 103.
3. Check valves, all sizes: Type 409.
E. Fuel Gas: Main fuel and ignitor (pilot) systems.
1. Plug valves, 50 mm (2 inches) and under: Type 301.

2. Plug valves, 65 mm (2-l/2 inches) and above: Type 302.
4. Vent cocks, 15 mm (1/2 inch) and under: Type 701.
F. Drain Valves: Use hose-end drain valves that comply with MSS SP-110, bronze ball valve
with outlet connection according to ASME B1.20.7 for garden-hose thread with cap. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for selection.
installation requirements.
B. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level
side down.
C. Install strainer on inlet side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, fuel oil pumps, and
oil burner connections.
D. Install sediment traps at points where sediment or condensate may collect. Locate where
readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would
be subject to freezing.
1. Construct sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use
minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 75 mm long, and same
size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for
removal of plug or cap.
E. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping of each fuel oil pump set.
joint construction.
A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from possible damage.
B. Install valves at branch connections to supply mains and at equipment.
C. Install drain valves at piping low points.

D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general installation requirements.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 15 (NPS 1/2) and Smaller: Maximum span, 1.5 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
2. DN 20 to DN 32 (NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/4): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size,
10 mm.
C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 4.5 m.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect piping to equipment with oil shutoff valve and union. Install union between valve
and equipment.
C. Ground equipment.

D. Electrical Connections: Wiring is specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.10 INSTALLATION AND TESTING, UNDERGROUND STEEL TANKS
A. Conform to NFPA 30 or 31 as applicable.
B. Install tanks on 150 mm (6 inch) thick beds of clean, washed, inert sand which is placed on
concrete foundation. Secure tank to concrete ballast foundation with specified straps. Slope
tank. Completed tank installation shall successfully resist buoyant forces of flooding to top
of tank when tank is empty.
C. After tanks are set in place, prior to backfilling, test tanks by applying internal air pressure
of 35 kPa to 48 kPa (5 - 7 psi). Repair leaks in steel tanks by chipping to bare metal and
rewelding. Repair leaks in plastic tank jackets (if furnished) as recommended by tank
manufacturer. Retest tanks until all leaks are repaired.
D. Prior to backfilling, repair all damage to tank coating with the same coating material. Coat
all metal parts which will be below grade, including tie-down fittings and straps, bolts,
rings, pipes, with the tank coating material. Perform 10,000 volt holiday test on all areas of
coating which have been repaired.
E. Excavation, trenching and backfilling around the tanks is specified under Section,
EARTHWORK. Backfill material shall be same as bedding material and shall conform to

printed instructions of tank manufacturer. In addition, there shall be no stones, ashes, or

corrosive materials in contact with the tanks. Minimum depth of cover shall conform to
NFPA 30 or 31 as applicable. After completion of backfilling, measure tanks internally for
out-of-roundness (deflection).
F. Do not place fluid in the tank until the backfilling and the piping connections to the tanks
are complete, and the tanks have been inspected internally by the Contracting Officer’s
Technical Representative (COTR) or Resident Engineer. Keep the tank excavation
dewatered.
3.11 INSTALLATION AND TESTING, UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Fuel carrier piping enclosed in secondary containment piping: Arrange system to

accommodate leak detection system. Slope piping down toward tanks and leak detectors at
25 mm in 10 m (one inch in 40 feet).
B. Secondary Containment Piping:
1. Provide bedding and backfill material as specified for tanks of the same material of
construction.
2. Top of system 450 mm (18 inches) minimum below grade.
3. Design and locate leak detector sumps to intercept all potential leakage. Maximum
spacing along each system, 3000 mm (100 feet).
4. Seal all building and manhole wall penetrations with watertight flexible Linkseal
system, or equal.
5. After placing system, prior to backfill, repair all damage, including coatings, as
recommended in printed instructions of system manufacturer. Perform 10,000 volt
holiday test on coated steel systems.
6. On steel systems which do not have FRP cladding, install cathodic protection system.
C. Leak Test: Test carrier pipes with air pressure at 690 kPa (100 psi), and test the containment
piping with air pressure at 55 kPa (8 psi). Systems shall hold the pressure for 30 minutes.
Repair all leaks and retest.
D. Coatings for Steel Piping not in Secondary Containment System: Provide coating and
cathodic protection as specified in Article, SECONDARY CONTAINMENT FOR
UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS.
E. Buried Utility Warning Tape: Install tape 300 mm (12 inches) below grade above the piping
system.
3.12 INSTALLATION, FILL BOXES AND ACCESS MANHOLES AT GRADE
A. Provide for tank fill, tank sounding, leak detector sensors, and extractor fittings. Set at grade
in concrete pads. Refer to fill box detail. Provide identification plate set into the concrete
pad which identifies the purpose of the device and type of fuel in the tank.

3.13 INSTALLATION AND TESTING, LEAK DETECTOR SYSTEMS FOR TANKS AND
PIPING
A. Wiring shall conform to NFPA-70.
B. Locate control monitor panels 1500 mm (5 feet) above the floor on inside wall of boiler
room or generator room depending on type of fuel tank served, unless shown otherwise.
C. Test operation of each probe, and monitoring system with fuel and water. If type of probe
utilized is damaged by exposure to fuel, provide temporary probe for testing monitoring
system.
3.14 INSTALLATION, TANK FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR AND ALARM SYSTEM
A. Wiring shall conform to NFPA-70.
B. Locate level indicator and alarm panel 1500 mm (5 feet) above the floor on inside wall of
boiler room unless shown otherwise.
C. Locate remote high level alarm on exterior wall in view of tank fill point, 2400 mm (8 feet)
above grade.
3.15 TANK MANHOLE ENCLOSURES
A. All pipe penetrations shall be leak tight permitting no groundwater into enclosure.
3.16 INSTALLATION, CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST STATIONS
A. Provide separate station for each tank and each piping system, anchor firmly, locate so that
terminal board is 600 mm (2 feet) minimum above grade. Connect wiring from all anodes
and protected structures to the test stations.
3.17 TESTING, CATHODIC PROTECTION
A. Testing performed by corrosion specialist; witnessed by Engineer.
B. Test Instruments:
1. Volt-Ammeter.
2. Saturated copper-copper sulfate reference electrode.
3. Other instruments as required.
C. Test Results Required for Acceptance:
1. Potential of minus 0.85 volt between protected structure and reference electrode.
2. Minimum shift of minus 300 millivolts upon application of protective current.
Voltage measured between protected structure and reference electrode.
3. Minimum shift of minus 100 millivolts upon interruption of protective current.
Voltage measured between protected structure and reference electrode.

D. Test Report: Provide, to Engineer, complete report showing all test measurements,
calculations, list of instruments used.
A. Inspect and test fuel oil piping according to NFPA 30, "Testing" Paragraph and NFPA 31,
"Tests of Piping" Paragraph; and according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer.
3.19 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fuel oil pump sets. Refer to Division 1 Section
"[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."
1. Schedule at least four hours of training.

SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment
inside building.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution Systems" for exterior water service piping.
2. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution Systems" for exterior water service piping and
water meters.
3. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, pressure gages,
and fittings.
4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings.
5. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building.
B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water service piping and
water distribution piping.
C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and
equipment throughout the building.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.

2. NP: Nylon.
3. PB: Polybutylene.
4. PE: Polyethylene.
5. PP: Polypropylene.
6. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
7. SS: Stainless Steel
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Combined Fire-Protection and Domestic, Service Entrance Piping: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
2. Service Entrance Piping: 1100 kPa (160 psig).
3. Water Distribution Piping: 860 kPa (125 psig).
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - Page 1 of 11

4. Service Entrance Piping: 690 kPa (100 psig).

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Piping.
2. Valves.
3. Pressure Gages.
4. Pressure Reducing Valves.
5. All items listed in Part 2 - Products.
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-
water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1 through
9 for potable-water piping and components.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
materials to Employer.
1. Keyed Couplings, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 12 of each type and size installed.
Include one extra gasket with each coupling.
2. Keyed Couplings, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 6 of each type and size installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Types A and B (ASTM B 88, Types K and L), water tube,
annealed temper.
C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Types B and C (ASTM B 88, Types L and M), water tube,
drawn temper.
D. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40.

E. Galvanized, Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule
40, seamless, steel pipe.
F. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, Schedules 40 and 80.
G. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80.
H. uPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
B. Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B16.22
wrought copper.
C. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75M (ASTM B 75) copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze
castings.
D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if
required to match piping.
E. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket

joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends.
Include threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1 on threaded ends.
F. Cast-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern with threads
according to ASME B1.20.1. Furnish Class 250 fittings if required to match piping.
G. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47) malleable-iron casting, ASTM A 106
steel pipe, or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron casting with dimensions matching steel pipe.
H. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, and female threaded ends with threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Furnish Class 300 unions if required to match piping.
I. Cast-Iron, Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. Furnish Class 250 flanges if required to
match piping.
J. Ferrous Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and slip-pipe
section. Include 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum pressure rating, packing rings, packing, limit rods,
chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe section, flanged ends, and AWWA C550 epoxy interior coating.
K. Schedule 80, CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F 437.
L. Schedule 80, CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 439.
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used
joining materials.

C. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free.
D. Brazing Filler Metal: AWS A5.8, BCuP, copper phosphorus or BAg, silver classification.
E. Copper, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include
ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.
F. Steel, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing
sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.
G. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
2.4 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.
D. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper, solder-joint
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
4. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Soft copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper,
solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
5. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
6. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
7. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
fittings.
8. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket

10. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): PVC, Class 150 pipe and PVC, Class 150, bell-and-
spigot fittings.
E. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:
1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper, solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
2. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); copper, solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
3. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC,
Schedule 80 threaded fittings.
4. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
5. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC,
6. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
7. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); copper, solder-joint fittings;
and soldered joints.
8. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with grooved ends; copper,
grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
9. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with grooved ends; copper,
10. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC, Schedule 80
threaded fittings.
11. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket
13. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM D 2846, CPVC pipe and fitting system and solvent-cemented
joints.
14. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper,
solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
15. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); copper,
solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
16. DN65 and DN80 (2-1/2- and 3-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with
grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
17. DN65 and DN80 (2-1/2- and 3-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with
grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
18. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and
CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings.
19. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe;
CPVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
20. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe;
CPVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
21. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with grooved
ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
22. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with grooved
ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
fittings.
24. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends;
galvanized steel, grooved-end fittings; and galvanized steel, keyed couplings.
25. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC,
Schedule 80 threaded fittings.
26. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
27. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints.

28. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with grooved ends; copper,
29. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with grooved ends; copper,
30. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded fittings.
31. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends; galvanized steel, grooved-
end fittings; and galvanized steel, keyed couplings.
33. DN250 and DN300 (10- and 12-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
fittings.
34. DN250 and DN300 (10- and 12-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends;
galvanized steel, grooved-end fittings; and galvanized steel, keyed couplings.
F. Underground, Water Distribution Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); wrought-copper,
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); wrought-copper,
3. DN65 to DN100 (2-1/2- to 4-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); wrought-
copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
4. DN65 to DN100 (2-1/2- to 4-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); wrought-
copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
G. Non-Potable-Water Piping: Use the following:
1. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); solder-joint
2. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); solder-joint
3. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe or ball valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Plastic gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves may be used with plastic piping.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
installation.
3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and locations indicated for
service entrances into building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water service
piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside
building at each service entrance pipe.
C. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Plumbing Specialties" for water-pressure regulators.
D. Ductile-Iron, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried piping between
shutoff valve and connection to water service piping with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or
floor at entrance. Include thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain.
B. Install piping level without pitch.
construction.
B. Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube, drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet,
dimple tube forming seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Solvent-Cemented, Thermoplastic Pipe and Fitting Joints: Handle cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements according to ASTM F 402.
3.8 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Rough-in water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's requirements.
Water meters will be furnished by utility.
B. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements.
Water meters will be furnished by utility.
C. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. Refer
to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water meters.
D. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters.

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS)
and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to
plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping
DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS)
and larger.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of each pump
and circulator, and where indicated. Use ball valve for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller and
butterfly valve for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Plumbing Specialties" for balancing valves.
E. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of
each pump and circulator, and where indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 30 m
and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer
than 30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN20 (3/4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 10-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
2. DN25 (1-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
3. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.

4. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2 and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2400 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
6. DN80 (3-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm minimum rod
7. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm minimum rod
8. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 2100 mm with 10-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
4. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.4 m with 13-mm minimum rod
5. DN80 and DN90 (3- and 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 13-
6. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 16-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
7. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 19-mm minimum rod
8. DN200 through DN300 (8- through 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m
with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to and
connect to the following:
1. Booster Systems: Connect cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN65 (2-
1/2-inch NPS) and larger.

A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
B. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe tests specified
below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.
C. Test water distribution piping as follows:
D. Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it
has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it
has been tested and approved.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable-water distribution piping as follows:
B. Clean and disinfect potable service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
C. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
D. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described
below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 mg/L
(50 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 mg/L (200 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming
from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows contamination.
E. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
F. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.14 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is
full of water.
B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping
during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.
C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate
water heaters before filling with water.
D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 550 kPa (80 psig) maximum, unless
E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.

SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage piping inside building
and to locations indicated.
1. Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary sewerage and
storm drainage.
2. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for foundation drains.
3. Division 2 Section "Septic Tank Systems" for sewage disposal systems.
4. Division 2 Section "Interceptors" for sewerage and drainage system interceptors.
5. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drainage and vent piping system
specialties.
6. Division 15 Section "Chemical-Waste Piping" for chemical waste and vent piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage from
building.
B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building.
C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building sewer
piping and inside drainage piping.
D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from
fixtures and equipment throughout the building.
E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage piping, under pressure.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 - Page 1 to 13

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene polymer, rubber.

3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).

2. Storm Drainage Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
3. Sewage, Force-Main Piping Systems: 690 kPa (100 psig).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping
components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-
drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-
sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
D. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform Plumbing Code "UPC"
and American Society of Plumbing Engineers "ASPE" data books.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Rubber Gaskets for Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger:
8 of each class and size installed.
2. Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 8 of each
type and size installed.
3. Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 6 of each
type and size installed.
4. Keyed Couplings, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 4 of each type and size installed.
5. Keyed Couplings, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 2 of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy classes. Include
ASTM C 564 rubber gasket, with dimensions required for pipe class, for each hub.
C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
D. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40.
E. Galvanized, Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, ERW, steel pipe.
F. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 with mechanical- or push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end,
unless plain, grooved, or flanged ends are indicated.
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
B. Threaded-Fitting, End Connections: ASME B1.20.1.
C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy classes, hub
and spigot. Include ASTM C 564 rubber gasket, with dimensions required for pipe class, for each
hub.
D. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301.
E. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, and female threaded ends with threads according to
ASME B1.20.1.
F. Cast-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.
G. Cast-Iron, Threaded Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12, galvanized, recessed, drainage pattern.
H. Cast-Iron, Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

I. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47) malleable-iron casting, ASTM A 106
steel pipe, or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron casting with dimensions matching steel pipe.
J. Ferrous Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and slip-pipe
section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe section, and
flanged ends.
K. Ferrous, Double Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and
2 slip-pipe sections. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe
sections, and flanged ends.
L. Ductile-Iron, Mechanical- or Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Include AWWA C111 ductile- or gray-
iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts with mechanical-joint fittings. Include AWWA C111
rubber gaskets with push-on-joint fittings.
M. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47) malleable-iron castings or

ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching ductile-iron pipe.
N. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and
mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball-
joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and
expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
O. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for
up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends conforming to AWWA C110 or
AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
P. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and
restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections conforming to AWWA C110 or
AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111
ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used
joining materials.
C. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free.
D. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-
resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center pipe stop.
Include the following:

1. Heavy-Duty, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing

or shield; and stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket.
a. Clamp Width: 75 mm (3 inches) wide with 4 clamps, for piping DN40 to DN100
(1-1/2- to 4-inch NPS).
b. Clamp Width: 100 mm (4 inches) wide with 6 clamps, for piping DN125 to DN250
(5- to 10-inch NPS).
E. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
F. Steel, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing
sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
G. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
H. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant
metal band on each end.
1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band
assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined. Include the
following:
a. Sleeves for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C 564 rubber.

b. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal.
c. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
d. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.
2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made
to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include
the following:
a. Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C 564 rubber.

b. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal.
c. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
2.4 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105 polyethylene
film, 0.20-mm minimum thickness, tube or sheet.
2.5 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves. Use valves specified for
"Domestic Water Systems" applications.

B. Backwater Valve: Flap type, hinged or pivoted, with revolving disc. Cast iron body with cleanout
of sufficient size to permit removal of interior parts. Hinge, pivot, disc and seat shall be nonferrous
metal. Normal position of disc shall be slightly open. Extend the cleanout to the finished floor and
fit with threaded countersunk plug. Provide clamping device wherever the cleanout extends
through the membrane waterproofing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings;
and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
2. DN32 and DN40 (1-1/4- and 1-1/2-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron,
threaded drainage fittings.
3. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-
pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
drainage fittings.
5. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
6. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
drainage fittings.
7. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-
iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:

8. DN300 (12-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.

D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings;
and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:

2. DN50 to DN150 (2- to 6-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression
joints.
3. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra
Heavy class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and
compression joints.
4. DN300 (12-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy class; hub-and-
spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression joints.
6. DN400 (16- Inch NPS): Ductile iron pipe with lock joint connection.
E. Aboveground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:
1. DN50 to DN150 (2- to 6-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-
pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
drainage fittings.
3. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-
iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:

F. Underground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:
1. DN80 to DN150 (3- to 6-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression
joints.
2. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra
Heavy class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and
compression joints.
G. Aboveground, Sewage Force Mains: Use the following:
1. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings;
and steel, keyed couplings.

2. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron,
grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings.
H. Underground, Sewage-Force-Main, Service Entrance Piping: Use the following:
1. DN100 and DN150 (4- and 6-Inch NPS): Ductile-iron pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical- or
push-on-joint fittings; rubber gaskets; and mechanical or push-on joints.
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe or ball valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Install backwater valve on all drainage line from electrical substation or as shown on plans.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
installation.
3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary and storm
sewer piping.
B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.
C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building storm drains and building storm sewers.
D. Extend building sanitary drain, force-main piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.
E. Extend building storm drain, force-main piping and connect to storm sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.

F. Ductile-Iron, Force-Main, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sewer piping outside
building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at
vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if
change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-
bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of
flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes
of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN80 (3-inch
NPS) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN100 (4-inch NPS)
and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
E. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
F. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Install engineered, controlled-flow, storm drainage systems in locations indicated. Comply with
standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slab on grade if slab is
without membrane waterproofing.
construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each pump discharge and where indicated. Use gate or
ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping
DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Check Valves: Install non-slam type, swing check valve on each pump discharge, downstream
from shutoff valve.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 30 m
and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer
than 30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
3. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 16-
5. DN200 through DN300 (8- through 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing,
1500 mm with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
6. DN375 (15-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 25-mm minimum
7. Spacing for horizontal pipe in 3-m lengths may be increased to 3 m. Spacing for fittings is
limited to 1500 mm.
F. Install hangers for steel and ductile-iron piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2100 mm; 10-mm minimum rod
4. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.4 m with 13-mm minimum rod
6. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 16-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated. Refer to Division 15

Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
3. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for
each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS)
and larger.
C. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:
1. Sump Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sump-pump discharge.

2. Sewage Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sewage-pump discharge.
A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe tests specified
below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.
B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such
procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 3.m of head. Water level must not drop from 15
minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 250 Pa (1-inch wg). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until

C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such procedures, as
follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water-based
latex paint.

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following:
1. Water distribution systems.

2. Soil, waste, and vent systems.
3. Storm drainage systems.
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, basic installation requirements; escutcheons, dielectric
fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals that are not in this Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
3. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, fittings, and
water meters.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying requirements.
5. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for water-supply piping and connections.
6. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping and
connections.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following

2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
4. Force-Main Piping: 690 kPa (100 psig).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected
equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes,
dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring
connections for the following plumbing specialty products:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
3. Water regulators.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Water filters.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - Page 1 of 21

6. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.

7. Strainers.
8. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
9. Hose stations.
10. Hydrants, and sanitary post hydrants.
11. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
12. Drain valves.
13. Backwater valves.
14. Water hammer arresters.
15. Hose bibbs.
16. Air-admittance valves.
17. Vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies.
18. Cleanouts.
19. Floor drains, including terrace drains; open receptors and trench drains.
20. Roof drains, including flower bed drains and balcony drains.
21. Grease interceptors, grease recovery units, oil interceptors, oil storage tanks, and solids
interceptors.
22. Sleeve penetration systems.
23. Irrigation system Fertilizer Injector
B. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
C. Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics
of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and models selected. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified
standards.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
E. Comply with NFPA 70, for electrical components.
F. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-
water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and "NSF-
dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
1. Water Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity not less than 200 percent of amount of each type
and size installed.
2. Operating Key Handles: Furnish one extra key for each key-operated hose bibb and
hydrant installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers (or approved

equals) offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Backflow Preventers:
a. B & K Industries, Inc.

b. CMB Industries; Febco Div.
c. FLOMATIC Corp.
d. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co. Marketing Group for Hersey Products Div.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings:

b. Brasstech, Inc.
c. Bristol Corp.; J & B Products Div.
d. Moen, Inc.; Dearborn Brass Co. Div.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3. Water Regulators:
a. FLOMATIC Corp.
b. Honeywell Braukmann.
c. Spence Engineering Co., Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
4. Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
d. Taco, Inc.
e. Tour & Andersson, Inc.; Valve Div.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
5. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:
a. Crane Co.; Valve Div.

b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Hammond Valve Corp.
e. Nibco, Inc.
6. Water Filters:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; Plymouth Products Div.

b. Campbell Manufacturing, Inc.
c. Eagle Spring Filtration, Inc.
d. Eden Equipment Co.
e. Filtrine Manufacturing Co.
f. Harmsco Industrial Filters.
g. Memtec America Corp.; Filterite Div.

S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1.1
h. Met-Pro Corp.; Keystone Filter Div.

i. Osmonics, Inc.; Hytrex Div.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
k. Whatman, Inc.
7. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves:
a. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc.

b. Leonard Valve Co.
c. Mark Controls Corp.; Powers Process Controls.
d. Symmons Industries, Inc.
e. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
8. Outlet Boxes:
a. Acorn Engineering Co.

b. IPS Corp.
c. LSP-Specialty Products Co.
d. Oatey Co.
e. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
f. Symmons Industries, Inc.
9. Washer-Supply Outlets:

b. IMI Cash Valve.
c. Symmons Industries, Inc.
10. Hose Stations:
a. Cooney Brothers, Inc.; Hose Station Div.

b. Leonard Valve Co.
c. LYNNWOOD Industries, Inc.
d. Penberthy, Inc.
e. Strahman Valves, Inc.
f. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
11. Hydrants:
a. Josam Co.
b. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Woodford Manufacturing Co.
f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
12. Water Hammer Arresters:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
e. Sparco, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1.1
h. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
13. Trap Seal Primer Valves:

a. Josam Co.
b. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
14. Trap Seal Primer Systems:
a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
b. MIFAB Manufacturing
15. Backwater Valves:
a. Enpoco, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
c. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Ancon Drain Div.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
16. Air-Admittance Valves:

b. Bristol Corp.; J & B Products Div.
c. Durgo: AB Durgo; c/o Enerjee, Ltd.
d. IMI Cash Valve.
e. IPS Corp.
f. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
17. Roof Flashing Assemblies:
a. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.
b. BITUMAT Manufacturing
18. Cast Iron Floor And Roof Drains And Floor Cleanout
a. J.R.Smith
b. Josam
c. Zurn
19. Plastic Floor And Roof Drains And Floor Cleanout
a. Nicool
b. Dallmer
c. K.T.Terrain
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and
maximum pressure loss indicated.
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1.1
2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with
flanged ends.
a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow

preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.

4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome-plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
5. Strainer on inlet.
B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pressure

application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet;
test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located
between 2 positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 83 kPa (12 psig) maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
C. Antisiphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous pressure

application. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc, test
cocks, and atmospheric vent.
D. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1024, suitable for continuous pressure

application. Include union inlet and 2 independent check valves.
E. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1032, suitable for continuous pressure

application for carbonated beverage dispensers. Include stainless-steel body; primary and
secondary checks; ball check; intermediate atmospheric-vent port for relieving carbon dioxide;
and threaded ends, DN10 (3/8-inch NPS).
F. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM approved or UL

listed, and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate
valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressure-differential relief
valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves; and
bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer.
G. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 0.19-L/s (3-gpm) flow
and applications with up to 30-kPa (10-foot head) back pressure. Include 2 check valves;
intermediate atmospheric vent; and nonremovable, ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread on outlet.
H. Back-Siphonage Backflow Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1056, suitable for continuous pressure and
backflow applications. Include shutoff valves, check valve, test cocks, and vacuum vent.
2.3 WATER REGULATORS
A. General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 1035 kPa (150 psig)
minimum, of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory-
installed or separate field-installed Y-pattern strainer.
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-iron body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome-plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.

2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with 2 readout ports and memory setting indicator.
Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated
nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and
threaded ends.
3. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and
flanged or grooved ends.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated
for 2760-kPa (400-psig) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard
port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, solder-joint ends,
and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.
C. Hot Water Balancing:
1. Hot Water Recirculating, 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: Combination type, calibrated,

bronze with bronze disc, equipped with readout valves with integral check valve, indexing
position pointer and calibrated name plate, internal EPT 0-ring seals and factory molded
insulating enclosures.
2. Hot Water Recirculating larger than 50 mm (2 inches): Combination balancing and shut-
off, non-lubricated eccentric plug type with cast iron or semi-steel body, electroless nickle
plated cast iron plug, with resilient facing suitable for continuous water service up to 80 °C
(180 °F), bronze bearings, 1200 kPa (175 pound) WOG rating and an adjustable open
position memory stop and lever.
2.5 DRINKING WATER FILTER PACKAGE
A. General: Combination water filter, stainless stell tank and ultraviolet sterilizer assemblies suitable
for potable water of size and at flow rate and pressure loss indicated. Package to Include pre-filter
to remove microscopic particles from the water, activated carbon filter to remove taste and odors
and chemicals, stainless steel tank to store water and ultra-violet sterilizer housing, fittings, filter
cartridges, and cartridge end caps. Unit to have flow regulator on discharge line to maintain flow.
B. Floor-mounting type Stainless-steel housing rated at 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum operating

pressure.
1. Base Section: Floor-mounting section with inlet and outlet connections and removable top
section for one or more 10-micron-particulate removable-rating cartridges.
2. Connections, DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Threaded.
3. Connections, DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Flanged.
C. Pre–Filter: Polished 304 stainless steel housing with no plastic parts, suitable for working
pressure indicated on the plans, remove water sediment down to 10 microns, includes drain cook
on bottom. Cover to be to be secured to housing with neoprene gasket.
D. Activated Carbon Filter: To remove chlorine, taste, odors and organic chemicals. Cell shall
contain at least 15 Kg of activated carbon for each 1 liter per second water flow.
E. Ultra-Violet Sterilizer: Stainless steel chambers with removable head, UV lamps, high powered
ballast, fuse, power safety switch all inside white enamel stainless steel cover.
F. Water Tank: as specified in division 15, section “POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS”.

2.6 THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES
A. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body.
Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable temperature setting,
and capacity at pressure loss as indicated.
1. Bimetal Thermostat, Operation and Pressure Rating: 860 kPa (125 psig) minimum.
2. Liquid-Filled Motor, Operation and Pressure Rating: 690 kPa (100 psig) minimum.
B. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:
1. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions.

2. Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
3. Piping Component Finish: Satin spray.
4. Piping Component Finish: Rough brass.
5. Cabinet: Stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door.
6. Cabinet Mounting: Recessed.
7. Thermometer: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Manifolded, Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve Assemblies: Factory-fabricated unit consisting of

parallel arrangement of thermostatic water mixing valves.
1. Arrangement: One large-flow, thermostatic water mixing valve with flow-control valve,
pressure regulator, inlet and outlet pressure gages, and one small-flow, thermostatic water
mixing valve with flow-control valve. Include outlet thermometer, factory- or field-
installed inlet and outlet valves, and other indicated options.
2. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions.
3. Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
4. Piping Component Finish: Satin spray.
5. Piping Component Finish: Rough brass.
6. Cabinet: Stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door.
7. Cabinet Mounting: Recessed.
2.7 STRAINERS
A. Provide on high pressure side of pressure reducing valves, on suction side of pumps, on inlet side
of indicating and control instruments and equipment subject to sediment damage and where shown
on drawings. Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping.
B. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include
ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 1.2-mm round perforations, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Pressure Rating: 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
3. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-
approved epoxy coating and flanged ends.
4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.
a. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
5. T-Pattern Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends; access end cap
with drain plug and access coupling with rubber gasket.
6. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle.
a. Simplex Type: Single unit, with one basket.

b. Duplex Type: Double unit, with bronze or stainless-steel diverter valve and 2
baskets.

c. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
C. Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with bolted flange
or clamp cover and drain with plug.
1. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 3.2- or 4.8-mm diameter holes and lift-out handle.
2. Female threaded ends for DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller, and flanged ends for DN65 (2-
1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
2.8 HOSE STATIONS
A. General: Assembly with fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1M and hose-connection outlet
with threads complying with ASME B1.20.7.
B. Mixing-Valve Hose Station: Hot- and cold-water mixing valve with shutoff and check valves on
inlets, hose with nozzle, and the following:
C. Mixing-Valve Hose Station: Steam and cold-water mixing valve with shutoff and check valves on
inlets, hose with nozzle, and the following:
1. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection, and hose
rack. Include manufacturer's standard thermometer in front.
2. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. Body Material: Bronze with stainless-steel wetted parts.
5. Body Finish: Rough brass.
6. Body Finish: Rough brass or chrome plate.
7. Installation: Wall mounting. Include reinforcement.
8. Installation: Floor mounting on stainless-steel pedestal.
9. Supply Fittings: Two DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves
and DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are
included with fitting.
10. Supply Fittings: Two DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves
and DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are
included with fitting.
11. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 15 m (50 feet)
long.
12. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 7.5 m (25 feet)
long.
13. Nozzle: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Single-Valve Hose Station: Hot-water valve with shutoff valve on inlet, hose with nozzle, and the
following:
E. Single-Valve Hose Station: Cold-water valve with shutoff valve on inlet, hose with nozzle, and
the following:
1. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection, and hose
rack. Include manufacturer's standard thermometer in front.
2. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. Body Material: Bronze with stainless-steel wetted parts.
5. Body Finish: Rough brass.
6. Body Finish: Rough brass or chrome plate.
7. Installation: Wall mounting. Include reinforcement.
8. Installation: Floor mounting on stainless-steel pedestal.

9. Supply Fitting: DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and DN15
(1/2-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with
fitting.
10. Supply Fitting: DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and DN20
(3/4-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with
fitting.
11. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 15 m (50 feet)
long.
12. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 7.5 m (25 feet)
long.
13. Nozzle: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Reinforcement: 50-by-100-mm- or 50-by-150-mm, fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking between

studs.
2.9 HYDRANTS
A. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, key operation. Provide one operating key.
1. Inlet: DN20 or DN25 (3/4- or 1-inch NPS) threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads, and integral or field-installed, nonremovable,
drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on
outlet.
3. Type: Projecting.
4. Type: Recessed.
5. Finish: Rough bronze.
6. Finish: Polished bronze.
7. Finish: Nickel bronze.
B. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antibackflow
type, key operation, with DN20 or DN25 (3/4- or 1-inch NPS) threaded or solder-joint inlet, and
ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Include operating key for each hydrant.
1. Type: Projecting.
2. Type: Recessed.
C. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, projecting, automatic draining, antibackflow type, key
operation. Include operating key for each hydrant.
1. Inlet: DN20 or DN25 (3/4- or 1-inch NPS) threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.
D. Post Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, bronze casing, cast-iron or cast-aluminum casing
guard, key operation. Include operating key for each hydrant.
1. Inlet: DN20 or DN25 (3/4- or 1-inch NPS) threaded.

2. Outlet: Integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum
breaker with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and tapped drain port in valve
housing.
3. Length: As required for installing inlet valve below frost line.

2.10 SANITARY POST HYDRANTS
A. Description: Nonfreeze, post hydrant with nondraining chamber for storing water trapped
downstream from inlet valve.
1. Inlet: DN25 (1-inch NPS) threaded.

2. Outlet: Integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum
breaker with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Include brass or bronze casing
and other parts in contact with water, and handle or key operation. Include operating key
for each hydrant.
3. Length: As required for installing storage chamber below frost line. Use of draining-type
post hydrant for this application is prohibited.
2.11 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 2760-kPa (400-
psig) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-
plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap.
B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 1380-kPa (200-psig) minimum
CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with DN6 (1/8-inch NPS)
side drain outlet and cap.
2.12 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with removable bronze swing-
check valve and threaded or bolted cover.
1. Closed-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang closed unless
subject to backflow condition.
2. Open-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang open unless
subject to backflow condition.
3. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor, instead of cover.
B. Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with removable ball float, threaded
inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet.
2.13 WATER HAMMER ARRESTER:
A. Closed copper tube chamber with permanently sealed 410 kPa (60 psig) air charge above a triple
o-ring piston. Three high heat Buna-N 0-rings pressure packed and lubricated with FDA approved
Dow Corning No. 11 silicone compound. All units shall be designed in accordance with ASSE
1010 for sealed wall installations without an access panel. Size and install in accordance with
Plumbing and Drainage Institute requirements. Unit shall be as manufactured by Precision
Plumbing Products Inc., Watts or Sioux Chief. Provide water hammer arrestors at all solenoid
valves, at all groups of two or more flush valves, at all quick opening or closing valves, and at all
medical washing equipment.
2.14 FERTILIZER INJECTOR

A. CAPACITY: The fertilizer injector (ratio feeder) shall be 38mm self-contained, water operated single
head, positive displacement diaphragm proportioning pump capable of delivering additives at a constant
ratio to a variable water flow without regard to water pressure of 1-9kg/cm2 (15-125psi).
B. COMPONENTS: The ratio feeder shall consist of a positive displacement, rotating disc type water
motor, and a positive displacement diaphragm type pump. No additional valves or controls shall be
required to accomplish proportioning. Pump valves shall be ball type seating of "O"-ring type seat.
Output volume shall be adjustable while system is in operation from zero to maximum capacity. Pump
heads shall be designed to provide an air gap between the pumping diaphragm and the water supply.
C. CONSTRUCTION: The ratio feeder shall be of heavy brass wall construction with all parts in contact
with water of brass, stainless steel or plastic materials. Parts in contact with additives shall be of
chemical resistant plastic and elastomer construction. The diaphragm of the ratio feeder shall be of
vitron material. Each ratio feeder shall be equipped with totalizing register as supplied by the
Manufacturer.
D. INSTALLATION: The ratio feeder shall be installed as detailed on the Drawings, as recommended by
the Manufacturer and as herein specified. Ratio feeder by-pass piping shall be of line size unless
otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified herein.
E. CONTAINER: The fertilizer or solution container shall be constructed of virgin polyethylene plastic
material. The container shall have a capacity of 208 liters and shall be of open top design with
removable polyethylene cover.
F. SUPPORTS: The fertilizer injector assembly shall be installed with necessary supports as detailed on the
Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. The piping, as detailed, shall not be considered as adequate
support.
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH 201, bellows or piston
type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units,
ASME A112.26.1M sizes A through F and PDI-WH 201 sizes A through F.
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, DN15 or DN20 (1/2- or 3/4-inch
NPS) threaded or solder-joint inlet. Provide ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and
integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker.

2. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
3. Operation: Wheel handle.
4. Operation: Operating-key (handle) type. Include operating key.
C. Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation sealing diaphragm, designed

to admit air into drainage and vent piping and to prevent transmission of sewer gas into building.
1. Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste, and
vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-inch
NPS).
2. Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping, instead of vent
connection, for single fixture, in DN32 to DN50 (1-1/4- to 2-inch NPS).
D. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6-mm thick, lead
flashing collar and skirt extending at least 200 mm from pipe with galvanized steel boot
reinforcement, and counterflashing fitting.
1. Vent Cap: Open top, without cap.

2. Vent Cap: Low-silhouette model with vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Vent Cap: Extended model with field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

E. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section of length to provide depth indicated;
and where indicated, increaser fitting of size indicated, joined with ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets.
Size P-trap as indicated.
F. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, cleanout
where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated.
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): 100-mm- (4-inch-) minimum water seal.

2. DN65 (2-1/2 Inch NPS) and Larger: 125-mm- (5-inch-) minimum water seal.
G. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap
seal primer valve connection.
H. Air-Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2, cast iron or cast bronze, with fixed air gap, inlet for drain pipe
or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet.
I. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating
roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
J. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented
hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
K. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop-fabricated or field-fabricated, frost-proof

assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 25-mm
enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with
counterflashing, as indicated.
L. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve, packing
gland, and packing, of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
M. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48, gray-iron casting, with DN100 (4-inch NPS) outlet; shop-applied
bituminous coating; and inlet size indicated.
N. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
O. Downspout Nozzles: Cast-bronze body with threaded inlet for pipe size indicated, and cast-bronze
wall flange with mounting holes.

2.16 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly for plastic soil, waste and vent
stacks, consisting of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, cast-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack fitting with
neoprene O-ring at base and cast-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch. Include
PVC protective cap for plug.
a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for plastic

chemical waste and vent stacks.

2.17 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 20 kg/sq. m or 1.6-mm thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 15 kg/sq. m or 1.2-mm thickness.
3. Burning: 30 kg/sq. m or 2.4-mm thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152M (ASTM B 152), of the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness.
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653M (ASTM A 653), with 0.20 percent copper content and
1.016-mm minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include Z275 hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 1-mm minimum
thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.18 CLEANOUTS
A. Same size as the pipe, up to 100 mm (4 inches); not less than 100 mm (4 inches) for larger pipe.
Cleanouts for chemical waste drain pipe shall be of same material as the pipe except where
cleanouts are exposed to outdoor. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible. Provide a minimum
clearance of 600 mm (24 inches) for the rodding.
B. Cleanout Access Covers: 178 x 178 square frame with anchor lugs and cover plate secured with
screws, as manufactured by Zurn No.Z-1460 or Josam No. 58642 or approved equal. Frame and
cover to be polished nickel bronze with smooth finish.
C. Cleanouts On Exposed uPvc Pipes to be polypropylene or uPVC access door for fixing from
outside of pipe similar to Key Terrain ref. 135 or approved equal.
D. Cleanout On Concealled uPvc to be uPVC access cap, solvent weld to any socketed fitting fitted
with screw cap and washer similar to Key Terrain ref. 136 or approved equal.
E. Floor Cleanouts shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches). When a

waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, provide clamping collars on the cleanouts.
Cleanouts shall consist of "Y" fittings and 3 mm (1/8 inch) bends with brass or bronze screw
plugs. Cleanouts in the resilient tile floors, quarry tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided
with square top covers recessed for tile insertion. In the carpeted areas, provide carpet cleanout
markers. Provide two-way cleanouts where indicated on drawings.
F. Provide cleanouts at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located
approximately 600 mm (24 inches) above the floor. If there are no fixtures installed on the lowest

floor, the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. Extend the cleanouts to the wall
access cover. Cleanout shall consist of sanitary tees. Furnish nickel-bronze square frame and
stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 150 by 150 mm (6 by 6 inches) at each wall
cleanout.
G. In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting or
caulked/no hub cast iron ferrule. Plain end (no-hub) piping in interstitial space or above ceiling
may use plain end (no-hub) blind plug and clamp.
2.19 FLOOR DRAINS
A. ANSI A112.21.1. Provide a no hub outlets for connection to cast iron pipe, screwed or no hub
outlets for connection to steel pipe, and side outlet when shown. Provide membrane clamp and
extensions if required, where installed in connection with waterproof membrane. Puncturing
membrane other than for drain opening will not be permitted. Double drainage pattern floor drains
shall have integral seepage pan for embedding into floor construction, and weep holes to provide
adequate drainage from pan to drain pipe. For drains not installed in connection with a waterproof
membrane, provide a 2.2 kg (16-ounce) soft copper membrane, 600 mm (24 inches) square.
B. Floor Drains Type FD-1: top plate 150 x 150 mm, bottom outlet similar to model no. SI as
manufactured by NICOOL (France) or approved equal.
C. Floor Drains Type FD-2: 150 mm round strainer with 178 mm round nickel bronze detachable
funnel, as manufactured by Zurn No. Z-415, Z-414 or Josam No. 30000-E2 or approved equal.
D. Floor Drains Type FD-3multiple side inlet and one side outlet, top plate 150 x 150 mm, similar to
model no. SEM as manufactured by NICOOL (France) or approved equal.
E. Floor Drains Type FD-8, Installed In Transformer Room And Loading Dock: Cast iron body, side
type drain set at wall and floor junction, vertical and horizontal nickel bronze grate, bottom outlet
with vandal proof screws. Approximately 150 mm depth, 150 mm length and 150 mm width.
F. Flower Bed Drains TYPE FBD-1: coated cast iron body, flashing flange and damp device, bottom
outlet suitable for connection to PVC pipes, fitted with copper mesh screen covered dome secured
in place by bolts, as manufactured by Josam No. 61080 or approved equal.
G. Floor Drains In Kitchen Area, Type FD-10: Sanitary Floor Sink: Type 304 stainless steel, 300
mm (12 inches) square, 200 mm (8 inches deep), polished interior, double drainage flange with
weep holes, internal dome strainer, heavy duty non-tilting loose set grate. Provide clamping
device.
2.20 ROOF DRAINS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Roof Drains: Cast iron with clamping device for making watertight connection. Free openings
through strainer shall be twice area of drain outlet. For roof drains not installed in connection with
a waterproof membrane, provide a soft copper membrane 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter greater
than outside diameter of drain collar. Provide an integral gravel stop for drains installed on roofs
having built-up roofing covered with gravel or slag. Provide integral no-hub, soil pipe gasket or
threaded outlet connection.
B. Roof Drains Type RD-1: Coated cast iron, large sump, elevated dome shaped strainer with
integral flange not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter, bottom outlet suitable for uPVC
pipes and of same size as rainwater pipe. For insulated roofs, provide a roof drain with sump
receiver and deck clamp and an adjustable flashing clamping collar with integral gravel guard and
extension sleeve, which can be raised or lowered to meet required insulation heights. Bottom
section shall serve as roof drain during construction before insulation is installed, as manufactured
by J.R.SMITH Model 1015 or approved equal.

C. Roof Drain Type RD-2: Similar to RD-1 but side type for installation at junction of roof and
parapet, side or 45° outlet suitable for uPVC pipes and of same size as rainwater pipe, as
manufactured by J.R.SMITH Model 1520 or approved equal.
D. Gutters Drain Type GD-1: Coated cast iron, Horizontal angle type drain with flat bottom, 50 mm
(2 inches) high dome strainer with bottom outlet suitable for uPVC pipes and of same size as
rainwater pipe.
E. Protective Roof Membrane Insulation Assembly: Perforated stainless steel extension filter,
non-puncturing clamp ring, large sump with extra wide roof flange and deck clamp.
1. Non-pedestrian Roofs: Large polypropylene or aluminum locking dome.

2. Pedestrian Roof: Bronze promenade top 350 mm (14 inches) square, set in square secured
frame support collar.
F. Expansion Joints: Heavy cast iron with cast brass or copper expansion sleeve having smooth
bearing surface working freely against a packing ring held in place and under pressure of a bolted
gland ring, forming a water and air tight flexible joint. Asbestos packing is prohibited.
G. Interior Downspouts: Provide an expansion joint, specified above, at top of run on straight,
vertical runs of downspout piping 12 m (40 feet) long or more.
H. Downspout Nozzle: The nozzle fitting shall be of brass, unfinished, with internal pipe thread for
connection to downspout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to

B. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated at any point in the plumbing
system where the potable water supply comes in contact with a potential source of contamination,
at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment
and water systems as indicated. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Locate backflow
preventers in same room as connected equipment. Install air-gap fitting on units with
atmospheric-vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install
bypass around backflow preventer. Device shall be certified by the American Society of Sanitary
Engineers. Listed below is a partial list of connection to the potable water system which shall be
protected against backflow or back siphonage.
a. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013.

1) Deionizers.
2) Sterilizers.
3) Stills.
4) Dialysis, Deionized or Reverse Osmosis Water Systems.
5) Water make-up to heating systems, cooling tower, chilled water system, and
generators.
6) Water service entrance from loop system.
b. Pressure Type: ASSE 1020

1) Water make-up to heating systems, cooling tower, chilled water system, and
generators.
2) Dental equipment.
3) Print washer.

c. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001

1) Hose bibs and sinks w/threaded outlets.
2) Disposers.
3) Showers (telephone type).
4) Hydrotherapy units.
5) Autopsy - on each hot and cold water outlet at each table or sink.
6) All kitchen equipment, if not protected by air gap.
7) Ventilating hoods w/washdown system.
8) Film processor.
9) Detergent system.
10) Dental equipment.
11) Fume hoods.
12) Glassware washers.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install
pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve, and
where indicated.
E. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
F. Install wall hydrants with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
G. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum
of one percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
H. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior installation, provide
cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size
to remove valve cover for servicing.
I. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as indicated.
J. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not
indicated, according to the following:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN100 (4-inch NPS). Use DN100 (4-inch NPS) for
larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN100 (4-inch NPS) and smaller and 30 m
for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
K. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor
cleanouts for piping below floors.
L. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
M. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
N. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 25-mm clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.

P. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated.
Q. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with
grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
1. Radius, 750 mm or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 6-mm total
depression.
2. Radius, 750 to 1500 mm: Equivalent to one percent slope.
3. Radius, 1500 mm or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 25-mm
total depression.
R. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
S. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
T. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
U. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Size outlets as indicated.
V. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
W. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
X. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to Engineer's
requirements, and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle supports,
with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Pit Installation: Set unit in pit as indicated.
5. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on
outlet.
6. Coordinate oil-interceptor storage tank and gravity drain with Division 2 Section
"Interceptors."
Y. Install grease recovery units on floor. Include trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting according
to Engineer's requirements, and with clear space for servicing.
1. Install control panel for grease recovery unit as indicated.
Z. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
AA. Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
BB. Secure supplies to supports or substrate.
CC. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe
valve if specific valve is not indicated.
DD. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.

EE. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
FF. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains.
GG. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe
fittings.
HH. Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing specialties.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other
2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other
Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems.
3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment
specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems.
B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections.
C. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections.
D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold-water-supply piping of sizes
indicated.
E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap,
of sizes indicated.
F. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories as indicated.
1. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and flow-control fitting and vent to
unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
2. Grease Recovery Units: Connect inlet, outlet, and vent piping; controls; electric power;
and factory-furnished accessories.
3. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-
control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil
storage tank.
4. Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.
G. Ground electric-powered plumbing specialties.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
H. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required.
B. Burn joints of lead sheets where required.
C. Solder joints of copper sheets where required.
D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 2500 mm, and
skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm
around specialty.
E. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
F. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
G. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
I. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install
drain connection if indicated.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of grease recovery units, including
piping and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and components.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services.
B. Before startup, perform the following checks:
1. System tests are complete.

2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired.
3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.
C. Before operating systems, perform the following steps:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open general-duty valves to fully open position.
3. Remove and clean strainers.
4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear.

D. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed

by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete
sequence of operations.
E. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain interceptors and/or grease recovery units. Refer to Division 1
Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related
components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached,
entered, and used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and
tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and
general-duty valves are included where indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected
fixture, trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports.
Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units.
C. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a
single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for
this category.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in
this Section that are listed and labeled.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - Page 1 of 14

C. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.
B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location.
A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that
plumbing fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
percent of each type and size installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
3. Faucet, Laminar-Flow Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
4. Faucet, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
5. Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
6. Shower, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
7. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
percent of each type installed.
8. Provide hinged-top, wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
9. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
10. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
11. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified.
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.

3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

4. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
5. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
2.2 LAVATORY/SINK FAUCET STANDARDS
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and
similar-type-fixture faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s- (2.5-
gpm-) maximum flow rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise
indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
1. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.

2. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901.
3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
8. Sink Spray Hoses: ASTM D 3573.
2.3 SHOWER FAUCET STANDARDS
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for bathtub and shower
faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s- (2.5-gpm-) maximum flow
rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate
faucet inlets with supplies and outlet with diverter valve; tub spout; and shower head, arm,
and flange.
1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing- and Thermostatic-Control, Antiscald Faucets:

ASSE 1016.
2. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or ASME B1.20.7.
5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
7. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
8. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than
faucets. Include polished, chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated.
Coordinate fittings with other components and connectors.
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028.
3. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME A112.18.1M.
4. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034.
5. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
6. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.

7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components
for plumbing fixtures, equipment, and appliances.
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.
3. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
6. Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO A117.1.
7. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
2.6 FITTINGS
A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this
Section for materials for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings.
B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following:
1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection.
2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, wheel-handle
type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
3. Supply Risers: DN10 (3/8-inch NPS) flexible copper tube with knob end. Use
chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
4. Traps: Tubular brass with 1.1 mm (0.045-inch) wall thickness, with no-leak slip-joint
inlet, cleanout, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-
plated tube for exposed applications.
5. Continuous Waste: Tubular plastic with no-leak slip-joint inlet and size to match
equipment.
6. Indirect Waste: Tubular plastic and size to match equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste,
and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and
locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting
fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when roughing-in data are not indicated.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures specified in this Section or other Sections, according
to the following:
1. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall
construction.
2. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and
electric water coolers.
3. Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals, lavatories, and other fixtures
where indicated.
4. Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall
and recessed, box-mounted, electric water coolers.
5. Fabricate reinforcement from 50-by-100-mm or 50-by-150-mm fire-retardant-treated-
wood blocking between studs or 6-by-150-mm steel plates attached to studs, in wall
construction, to secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend beyond ends
of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs.
B. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following:
1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and
waste to wall.
2. Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste
to wall.
3. Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, offset drain, trap,
and waste to wall.
4. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture.
3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to
B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in
drawings, and referenced standards.
C. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
D. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets with fittings and gasket seals.
E. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer's tiling frame or
setting gage.
F. Install toilet seats on water closets.
G. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.
H. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped
people to reach.
I. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side
of compartment.

J. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate

when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is
indicated.
K. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture
to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.
L. Fasten recessed, wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
M. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
N. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.
O. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
P. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
Q. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where
specific stop valve is not specified.
1. Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment, except when

permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. When permitted, install valve chained
and locked in OPEN position.
R. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
S. Install faucet, laminar-flow fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when
required.
T. Install supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
U. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when
required.
V. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
W. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on
indirect wastes, except where otherwise indicated.
X. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if
location is not indicated.
Y. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink.
Z. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
AA. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants." Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and
plumbing equipment specified in other Division 15 Sections.
B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules
at the end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing
fixture.
C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect

equipment with supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section.
Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing
piping.

torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
E. Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric
power is specified in Division 16 Sections.
A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation.
Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, shower valves,
and flushometer valves having controls, to produce proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings, including flush tanks, with manufacturers'
recommended cleaning methods and materials. Include the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from flush tanks and drains.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by
Engineer.
3.8 WATER CLOSET SCHEDULE
A. Water Closet EWC-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
1. Vitreous-China Water Closet.

2. Fixture Color: White
3. Bowl Type and Operation: Elongated, siphon jet.
4. Mounting and Outlet: Floor mounted, bottom outlet.
5. Fixture Bolt Caps: White, Color matching bowl, china.
6. Flushometer Valve Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper pipe or tubing
inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with spud, screwdriver check stop, and vacuum
breaker.
7. Flushometer Valve Operation: Diaphragm.
8. Flushometer Valve Finish: Polished, chrome-plated, exposed metal parts.
9. Flushometer Valve, Water Consumption: Factory set or field adjusted, 6 L (1.6 gal.)
maximum per flushing cycle.
10. Supply Inlet: DN25(1/2-inch NPS).
11. Supply Stop: Loose key.
12. Supply Riser: rigid riser with collar end.
13. Toilet Seat: Solid-plastic, water-closet seat with bumpers and hardware, compatible
with water closet and as follows:
a. Color: White.
b. Class: Commercial, Heavy Duty.
c. Size: Elongated.
d. Pattern: Open front without cover.
e. Hinge Type: Check (CK).
14. Fixture Support: Vertically adjustable, cast-iron, water-closet carrier with

combination support and waste fitting assemblies and tiling frame or setting gage.
Include additional faceplate and coupling for water closet at wide pipe space.
Compact-type carrier for back-to-back water-closet installation is prohibited.
15. Water closet to be complete with ablution faucet.
16. Dimensions: 480 mm Length, 365 mm, 410 mm height.
17. Bibcock With Perineal Hose BPH: bibcock to be 15mm, chrome plated, wall
mounted with threads outlet, complete with the following accessories, or approved
equal:
a. 15mm angle valve, blue index,

b. Chrome plated metal flexible tube, 1250mm long with 15mm nut, nozzle and
loop,.

c. Chrome plated wall hook.
B. Water Closet AWC-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
1. Vitreous-China Water Closet.

3. Fixture Bolt Caps: White, Color matching bowl, china.
6. Flushometer Valve, Water Consumption: Factory set or field adjusted, 6 L (1.6 gal.)
maximum per flushing cycle.
7. Supply Inlet: DN25(1/2-inch NPS).
8. Supply Stop: Loose key.
9. Supply Riser: rigid riser with collar end.
10. Fixture Support: Vertically adjustable, cast-iron, water-closet carrier with

combination support and waste fitting assemblies and tiling frame or setting gage.
Include additional faceplate and coupling for water closet at wide pipe space.
Compact-type carrier for back-to-back water-closet installation is prohibited.
11. Water closet to be complete with ablution faucet.
13. Bibcock With Perineal Hose BPH: bibcock to be 15mm, chrome plated, wall
mounted with threads outlet, complete with the following accessories, or approved
equal:
a. 15mm angle valve, blue index,

b. Chrome plated metal flexible tube, 1250mm long with 15mm nut, nozzle and
loop,.
c. Chrome plated wall hook.
3.9 URINAL SCHEDULES
A. Urinal UR-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated on the final Design
Drawings, drawing plumbing schedule, and in the specification Section and subject to
compliance with requirements, the following products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Vitreous-China symphonic without cover with concealed waste unit Urinal.

3. Type and Operation: Washdown.
4. Mounting and Outlet: Wall hanging, back outlet.
5. Fixture Bolt Caps: White, china.
6. Design Water Consumption; 3L per flushing cycle.
7. Flushometer Valve Construction: Cast-brass body, with wall flange and tailpiece with
spud, screwdriver check stop, and vacuum breaker.
10. Flushometer Valve, Water Consumption: Factory set or field adjusted, 3 L maximum
per flushing cycle.
11. Flushometer valve components include the following:
a. Electric, hard-wired, sensor-actuation, automatic flushing system.

12. Fixture Support: Type I, vertically adjustable, urinal, chair carrier with coupling;
heavy-duty, rectangular-steel, upright members; bearing plate; and feet.
3.10 LAVATORY SCHEDULE
A. Lavatory LAV-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
1. Vitreous-China Lavatory.
2. Fixture Color: White.
3. Fixture Dimensions: as shown on drawings.
4. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: One hole, centered.
5. Mounting: Wall hanging.
6. Faucet Mounting Position: Centered on fixture deck.
7. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a. Accessible-Fixture Operation: Manual.

b. Handle(s): Dual lever.
c. Spout: Integral with body.
d. Spout Outlet: Manufacturer's standard aerator.
e. Spout-Outlet, Flow-Control Fitting: 0.032 L/s(1/2 gpm).
8. Supply Inlets: DN15(1/2-inch NPS), brass pipe or copper tubing.

9. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight, compression, loose-
key type same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
10. Supply Risers: DN10 (3/8-inch NPS) rigid with DN8 (1/4-inch NPS) straight, knob-
end tailpiece.
11. Supply, Flow-Control Restrictors: (3/8-inch NPS) DN15 (1/2-inch NPS), 0.032 L/s
(1/2 gpm).
12. Drain: Grid strainer with DN32 (1-1/4-inch NPS) offset waste.
13. Tubular Trap: DN32, (1-1/4-inch NPS), DN40 by DN32(1-1/2-by-1-1/4-inch NPS),
1.1 mm (0.045-inch) wall thickness, tubular brass, 0.8 mm (0.032-inch) wall
thickness, tubular brass, plastic tubular fittings, with slip-joint inlet, cleanout, and
wall flange.
14. DN40 by DN32 (1-1/2-by-1-1/4-inch NPS), cast-brass trap, with slip-joint inlet, and
wall flange.
15. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: (1-1/4-inch NPS) DN40 by DN32 (1-1/2-by-1-1/4-inch
NPS), cast-brass trap, with slip-joint inlet, waste to wall, and wall flange.
16. Supply Insulation Kit: Molded, soft-plastic covering for supplies from wall to fixture
with removable covering for stops and handles. Include manufacturer's standard
fasteners, straps, and adhesives.
17. Drain Insulation Kit: Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain piping from fixture to
wall. Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives
18. Fixture Support: concealed arm; vertically adjustable, lavatory, chair carrier with
rectangular-steel upright members; and feet.
3.11 SHOWER SCHEDULE
A. Shower SH-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
1. Fixture Enclosure Color: White.

2. Fixture Enclosure: Built in-place, Enameled steel, with slip-resistant bathing surface.
3. Fixture Enclosure Dimensions: 900mm x 750mm.
4. Fixture Enclosure Drain: Integral corrosion-resistant metal with removable strainer
and DN50 (2-inch NPS) bottom outlet.
5. Fixture Enclosure Grab Bar: Field installed.
6. Faucet Construction: Cast-brass, dual, manual-control, pressure-equalizing-control
with high-temperature-limit control, single-handle mixing valve with check stops, and
escutcheon.
a. Handle(s): Dual.
b. Shower Head, Arm, and Flange: with manual flow control in head.
c. Shower Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: 0.13 L/s (2 gpm).
8. Supplies: Copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve if check stops not included
with faucet.
9. Trap: DN50 (2-inch NPS) drainage piping.
3.12 SINK SCHEDULE
A. Sink S-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
1. Stainless-Steel Sink.
2. Fixture Dimensions: as shown on the drawings.
3. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: (0.078 inch) 1.6 mm (0.063 inch).
4. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: One hole, centered.
5. Fixture Mounting: Counter.
6. Faucet Mounting: Centered on fixture deck.

b. Handle: Dual lever.
c. Spout: Swing gooseneck.
e. Spout-Outlet, Flow-Control Fitting: 0.13 L/s (2 gpm).
8. Supply Inlets: DN15 (1/2-inch NPS), brass pipe or copper tubing.

9. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight, compression, loose-
key type, same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
10. Supply Shutoff Valves: DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball.
11. Supply Risers: DN10 (3/8-inch NPS) rigid with DN8 (1/4-inch NPS) straight, knob-
end tailpiece.
12. Supply, Flow-Control Restrictors: DN15, 0.032 L/s.
13. Drain: 38 mm removable, stainless-steel strainer bucket with 89 mm removable,
stainless-steel crumb cup with.
14. Tubular Trap: DN40, 1.1 mm wall thickness, tubular brass, with slip-joint inlet, and
wall flange.
15. Indirect Waste: DN40, 1.1 mm thick,
16. Supply Insulation Kit: Molded, soft-plastic covering for supplies from wall to fixture
with removable covering for stops and handles.
17. Drain Insulation Kit: Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain piping from fixture to
wall. Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives.

B. Sink KS-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
1. Fixture Dimensions: One bowl as shown on ID / Architectural drawings.

2. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: 2.0 mm stainless steel 18/10 natural finish.
3. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: 1 hole.
4. Fixture Mounting: Counter, self-rimming.
5. Faucet Mounting: Counter, centered on fixture.

b. Handle{s}: Extended, single-lever toggle.
7. Supply Inlets: DN15, brass pipe or copper tubing.

8. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight, compression, wheel-
handle type, same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
9. Supply Shutoff Valves: DN15 gate, globe, or ball.
10. Supply Risers: DN15 copper tubing.
11. Drains: 38-mm grid strainer with DN40 tubular stainless-steel tailpiece.
12. Tubular Trap: DN40, plastic tubular fittings, with slip-joint inlet, cleanout, and wall
flange.
13. Reinforcement.
C. Sink KS-2: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
1. Fixture Dimensions: Two bowls as shown on ID / Architectural drawings.

2. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: 2.0 mm stainless steel 18/10 natural finish.
3. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: 1 hole.
4. Fixture Mounting: Counter, self-rimming.
5. Faucet Mounting: Counter, centered on fixture.

b. Handle{s}: Extended, single-lever toggle.
7. Supply Inlets: DN15, brass pipe or copper tubing.

8. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight, compression, wheel-
handle type, same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
9. Supply Shutoff Valves: DN15 gate, globe, or ball.
10. Supply Risers: DN15 copper tubing.
11. Drains: 38-mm grid strainer with DN40 tubular stainless-steel tailpiece.
12. Tubular Trap: DN40, plastic tubular fittings, with slip-joint inlet, cleanout, and wall
flange.
13. Reinforcement.

3.13 UTILITY SINK SCHEDULE
A. Utility Sink US-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
1. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: 2.0 mm. (0.078 inch)

2. Fixture Dimensions: as shown on drawings.
3. Mounting: Trap standard and wall bracket.
4. Rim Guard: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Faucet: Widespread, cast brass with supplies on 203 mm (8-inch) centers.
6. Faucet Mounting: Wall, centered on fixture.
a. Finish: Rough chrome.

b. Handles: Dual lever.
c. Supply Stops: Integral, in shanks.
d. Spout: With integral vacuum breaker, pail hook, and hose-thread outlet.
e. Wall Brace: Assembly with wall bracket and support to faucet spout.
f. Hose: 762 mm (30-inch-) minimum, flexible hose with stainless-steel hose wall
bracket.
8. Trap Standard: DN50 (2-inch NPS) with grid strainer, enameled interior, cleanout,
floor support, and pipe waste to wall.
9. Drain: DN50 (2-inch NPS) with grid strainer.
10. P-Trap: DN50 (2-inch NPS) drainage piping.
11. Supplies: DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve.
3.14 WATER TAP SCHEDULE
A. Water Tap WT: 15mm, chrome plated brass, back inlet connection.
3.15 MOP-SERVICE BASIN SCHEDULE
A. Mop-Service Basin MS-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated,
provide products complying with the following:
1. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: 2.0 mm (0.078 inch).

2. Fixture Dimensions: As shown on Architectural drawings.
3. Mounting: Floor.
4. Rim Guard: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Faucet: Widespread, cast brass with supplies on 203-mm (8-inch) centers.
6. Faucet Mounting: Wall, centered on fixture.
a. Finish: Rough chrome.

b. Handles: Dual lever or 4 arm.
c. Supply Stops: Integral, in shanks.
d. Spout: With integral vacuum breaker, pail hook, and hose-thread outlet.
e. Wall Brace: Assembly with wall bracket and support to faucet spout.
f. Hose: 762-mm- (30-inch-) minimum, flexible hose with stainless-steel hose
wall bracket.
8. Drain: DN80 (3-inch NPS) with grid strainer.

9. P-Trap: DN80 (3-inch NPS) drainage piping.

10. Supplies: DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) copper tubing with ball valve.
11. Reinforcement: Provide for wall-mounting faucet, wall brace, and hose-hook
bracket.

SECTION 15441 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pumps for the Hot water circulating systems.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Supply Wells" for well pumps.

2. Division 15 Section "Packaged Booster Pumps" for booster systems.
3. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for hydronic system pumps.
4. Division 16 Sections for power-supply wiring, field-installed disconnects, electrical
devices, and motor controllers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each
type and size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
C. Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models selected.
Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS 15441 - Page 1 of 5

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. In-Line Circulators and Pumps:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.; Weinman Div.
d. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
f. Marshall Engineered Products Co.
g. Taco, Inc.
2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal pump units;

complying with UL 778; suitable for potable-water service; with all-bronze or stainless-steel
construction and components in contact with water made of corrosion-resistant materials.
B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors" with built-in thermal-
overload protection appropriate for motor size and duty.
C. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with
flanged ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
D. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges,
pipe openings, and nozzles.
2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A. Description: Use for hot water and therapeutic pool systems, horizontal in-line circulator,
pump for hot water system shall be designed for 65 degrees C (150 degrees F) or 85 degrees
C (180 degrees F) water service as shown on plans, rated for 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum
working pressure. Pumps shall be centrifugal, single stage, constructed to prevent contact

of water with metal other than nonferrous, except casing. Driver shall be electric motor,
close coupled or connected by flexible coupling
B. Mounting shall be either of the following:
1. In-line mounted.
2. Floor mounted set on common bed plate with drip lip.
C. Casings: Radially split, all-bronze casing.
D. Impeller: ASTM B 36/B 36M, rolled brass; or ASTM B 584, cast bronze; overhung, single
suction, and keyed to shaft.
E. Motors: Maximum 40 degrees C ambient temperature rise, dripproof, for operation with
current of voltage, phase and cycle shown in schedule on Electrical drawings, conforming to
NEMA 250-Type 4. Capacity to be such to operate pump without overloading. In-line
pump motors shall not exceed 1450 rpm and be provided with spring mountings to assure
quiet operation. Pump shall operate continuously with "on-off" switch for shut down.
F. Seal: Mechanical.
G. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft, with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
H. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze-journal or thrust type.
I. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connections

before pump installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for periodic
maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B. Support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
C. Suspend in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and
vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate brackets or
supports as required. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for materials.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific

1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal
to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 15 Section "Water
Distribution Piping."
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and non-slam, silent type
check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size
as connected piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves
and Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-
gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and
discharge piping around pumps. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for
pressure gages and gage connectors.
B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.
B. Clean strainers on suction piping.
C. Controls: Set for automatic starting and stopping operation.
D. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings.

2. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
E. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
2. Open circulating line valve if pump should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motor.
4. Open discharge valve slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
6. Close circulating line valve once there is sufficient flow through pump to prevent
overheating.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain distribution pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

SECTION 15444 - PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged booster pumps to maintain pressure in the building potable-
water distribution systems.
1. Division 13 Sections for fire-suppression pumps.

2. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements.
3. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Pumps" for potable-water circulators and
pumps.
4. Division 15 Section "Potable-Water Storage Tanks" for separate hydropneumatic
tanks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models,
furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of packaged booster pump
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for packaged booster pumps. Include setting
drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and
other anchorages.
C. Operating And Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 including wiring diagrams, technical data
sheets and information for ordering replaceable parts.
1. Include complete connection which indicate all components of the system.

2. Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each item of equipment.
3. Diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation and
maintenance.
D. Certificate of shop test for domestic water booster system. Provide certified performance
curves.
PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 15444 - Page 1 of 6

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of packaged booster pumps through one source from
a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of packaged booster pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and
models selected. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may
be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, or approved equal, the following:
1. Packaged Booster Pumps:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Aurora Pump.
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
d. PACO Pumps, Inc.
e. Peerless Pump Co.
f. SynchroFlo, Inc.
2.2 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled, pre-wired and pre-tested, packaged booster multi-pump

system units; complying with UL 778; suitable for potable-water service including two or
three pumps as shown on the drawings, pressure regulating valves with integral check
valves, vibration pads, emergency switches, duplex flow switches, pressure switches, power
and control panels, suction and discharge manifolds, and gate valves and accessories. All
components shall be furnished by a single manufacturer and the system shall be the standard
cataloged product of the manufacturer. All components shall be factory installed on a
common structural steel skid and shall be completely tested in the factory before shipment

B. Piping: ASME B31.9 for piping materials and installation.
1. DN200 (NPS 8) and Smaller: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), drawn,
copper, ASTM A 53, ductile iron pipe with threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded
joints.
2. DN250 (NPS 10) and Larger: ASTM A 53, ductile iron pipe with threaded, cast-iron
fittings and threaded joints.
3. Header End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.
4. Header End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
C. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components, may have grooved ends for
grooved joints.
D. Shutoff Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if required to
suit system pressure; bronze, rising-stem gate valve or MSS SP-110, 4135-kPa (600-psig)
minimum CWP, bronze ball valve with ends matching piping.
E. Shutoff Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, or higher if
required to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, OS&Y, cast-iron gate valve with flanged ends
or MSS SP-67, Type I for tight shutoff, 1206-kPa (175-psig) CWP, single-flanged, cast-iron
butterfly valve.
F. Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if required to
suit system pressure; bronze, non-slam, swing check valve.
G. Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, or higher if required
to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, cast-iron, non-slam, swing check valve.
H. Pressure Regulating Valves: System pressure shall be maintained by pilot-operated,

diaphragm type pressure regulating valves, rated at 2050 kPa (300 psi) minimum, one for
each pump. Valves shall be piloted to control system pressure and to cause the valve to act
as a non-slam check valve. Pilot shall be rated at 1200 kPa (175 psi) minimum.
I. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar
metals, to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 1725-kPa (250-
psig) minimum working pressure at 82 deg C (180 deg F).
2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly; for
1035- or 2070-kPa (150- or 300-psig) minimum working pressure as required to suit
system pressures.
J. Sensors: Pressure switches.
K. Control Panel: Automatic, with load control and protection functions. Comply with
NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of unit.
2. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12.
3. Motor Controller: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage
release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect, and short-circuit protective
device.
a. Control Voltage: 220-V ac, using integral control power transformer.

4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.

5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus
pilot device for automatic control.
6. Duplex, Automatic Alternating Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main pump and to
two-pump operation.
7. Triplex, Sequence (Lead-Lag-Lag) Starter: Switches lead pump to one lag main
pump and to three-pump operation.
8. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
L. Instrumentation: All instrumentation shall be factory installed and shall include the
following 115 mm (4-1/2 inch) dial gages with shut-off cock.
1. Pump pressure gage for each pump.

2. System pressure gage.
3. Suction pressure gage.
M. Operating and Emergency Controls:
1. High system pressure switch with audible alarm system.

2. Low system pressure switch with audible alarm system.
3. System flow sensors - duplex.
4. Temperature Protection System: Each pump shall be fitted with temperature probe
fittings, and solenoid purge valve system. This system shall prevent overheating of
the pumps when system is operated manually and when system is operated on
emergency.
N. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
O. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.
2.3 VARIABLE-SPEED-DRIVE, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping, valves, sensors, controls, and
adjustable-speed-drive units for variable-speed operation.
1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 1200 kPa (175 psig), and as required to suit system
pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with three equal-size pumps.
B. Pumps: Pumps shall be vertical turbine multistage short-coupled industrial turbine pumps.
1. Impellers: SAE 40 cast bronze, mixed flow enclosed type.

2. Balancing of Impellers: Each impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced
prior to assembly in pump casing.
3. Pump shaft: Stainless steel type 416.
4. Lubrication: Water lubricated type pump.
5. Pump Bowls: Cast Iron, flanged and bolted.
6. Pump Bearings: SAE 660 bronze, radial type.
7. Pump Head: Fabricated steel with continuous bypass for low seal pressure. Cast iron
heads are not acceptable. Pump head shall be lined same as pump barrel.

8. Seal: Mechanical general purpose type, with sleeve mounting. Seal shall be rated at
1200 kPa (175 psi) maximum.
9. Adjustable Spacer Coupling: Removable type required so that pump seal can be
replaced without disturbing motor.
10. Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors. Solid shaft
motors balanced to .22 mm (0.0085-inch) vibration amplitude shall be operated at any
point on the pump head curve without overloading the motor. Conform to NEMA
250-Type 2.
11. Pump Barrel: Schedule 40 steel pipe with two-coat "baked" internal lining to meet
the potable water requirements of U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Unlined
pump barrels are not acceptable. Provide drain tapping.
C. Variable-Speed-Drive Controllers: Adjustable-speed-drive unit for each pump.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connections

before packaged booster pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for packaged booster
pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install packaged booster pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with
access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
B. Support packaged booster pumps using the following vibration-control devices, unless
otherwise indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
1. Install units with total of 7.5 hp or less, with rubber-isolator mount or spring-isolator
vibration isolators.
2. Install units with total of more than 7.5 hp, with concrete-filled, inertia-base vibration
isolation bases and spring-isolator vibration isolators.
C. Support connected piping so weight of water distribution piping is not supported by

packaged booster pumps.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Water Distribution

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:

1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal
to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge headers.
2. Install flexible pipe connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge
headers. Install flexible pipe connectors same size as piping. Refer to Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible pipe connectors.
3. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to unit suction and discharge headers.
Install valves same size as unit suction and discharge headers. Refer to Division 15
Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
C. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.
B. Controls: Set for automatic starting, stopping, sequential, and alarm operations.
C. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids
is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
D. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
operation.
2. Open valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motors.
4. Open discharge valves slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
6. Close valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent overheating.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pump units. Refer to Division 1
Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

SECTION 15445 - SEWAGE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewage pumps for the building sanitary drainage systems.
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for sewage pump motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance curves, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type and size of pump indicated.
templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in maintenance
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional


SEWAGE PUMPS 15445 - Page 1 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Sewage Pumps:
a. ABS Pumps, Inc.

c. Aurora Pump.
d. Chicago Pump Co.
e. Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.; Weinman Div.
f. Goulds Pumps, Inc.
g. ITT Flygt Corp.
h. KSB, Inc.
i. Little Giant Pump Co.
j. PACO Pumps, Inc.
k. Weil Pump Co.
2.2 SEWAGE PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sewage

pump units complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for
permanent installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available
only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through
full range of pump performance curves.
shipping.
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 QUICK-DISCONNECT-SYSTEM, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Description: Submersible, vertical, separately coupled, suspended sewage pump complying

direct-connected sewage pump complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sewage pumps.
Include quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller,
and discharge companion flange arranged to connect to quick-disconnect-system
discharge-elbow fitting.

3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft,
and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, open or
semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and
dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction,
keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
6. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball
bearings.
7. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
8. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection;
lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required,
with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
9. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof
cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
10. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
11. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to
"Sewage Pump Basins" Article for other requirements.
12. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
a. Guide Rails: Two galvanized-steel or other corrosion-resistant vertical pipes

or structural members, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting
guide rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other
attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to
movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel cable attached to pump and basin cover at
manhole.
13. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless wall mounting is
indicated; with three micropressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures;
mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation
of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
indicated; with three mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures;
handle load.
15. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with floats,
float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of
pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle
load.
16. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth
greater than 1500 mm.
17. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
220-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery
operation is indicated.

18. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with

micropressure-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 220-V ac, with
transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
19. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercury-
float-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 220-V ac, with transformer and
contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and
check valves. Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include
features and devices indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sewage pumps.
Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sewage Pumps: Suspend pumps from basin covers. Make
direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.
E. Submersible Sewage Pumps: Set pumps on basin floor. Make direct connections to
sanitary drainage piping.
1. Anchor quick-disconnect systems to bottom of basins and basin sidewalls or covers.

Install pumps so pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive seals
when pumps are dropped into place.

F. Sewage Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace
interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or
collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install
cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
G. Packaged Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary drainage and vent piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15
Section "Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and
specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and
connect to sanitary drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam, swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sewage pump
discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping DN65
(NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required
for system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or
drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
1. Start motors.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sewage pump units. Refer to Division 1 Section

SECTION 15446 - SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sump pumps for the building waste drainage systems.
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for sump pump motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance curves, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type and size of pump indicated.
templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in maintenance
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional


SUMP PUMPS 15446 - Page 1 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Sump Pumps:
a. ABS Pumps, Inc.

c. Aurora Pump.
d. Chicago Pump Co.
e. Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.; Weinman Div.
f. Goulds Pumps, Inc.
g. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
h. Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Co.
i. ITT Flygt Corp.
j. KSB, Inc.
k. Little Giant Pump Co.
l. PACO Pumps, Inc.
m. Weil Pump Co.
2. Packaged, Drainage Pump Units:
a. Alyan Pump Co.

b. Federal Pump Corp.
c. Liberty Pumps.
d. Little Giant Pump Co.
e. Milton Roy Co.; Hartell Div.
f. Myers: F. E. Myers Co.
g. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc.
h. Zoeller Pump Co.
2.2 SUMP PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sump

pump units complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for
permanent installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available
only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through
full range of pump performance curves.
shipping.

flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 QUICK-DISCONNECT-SYSTEM, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for

submersible sewage pumps. Include quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller,
and discharge companion flange arranged to connect to quick-disconnect-system
discharge-elbow fitting.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft,
and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball
bearings.
5. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
6. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection;
lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required,
with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
7. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof
cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
8. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
9. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to
"Sewage Pump Basins" Article for other requirements.
10. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
a. Guide Rails: Two galvanized-steel or other corrosion-resistant vertical pipes

or structural members, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting
guide rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other
attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to
movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel cable attached to pump and basin cover at
manhole.
indicated; with three micropressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures;
handle load.
12. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth
greater than 1500 mm.
13. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery
operation is indicated.

14. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with

micropressure-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with
transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
2.4 SUMP PUMP PITS
A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast-in Place Concrete."
B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to fit cover.
1. Pattern: Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface.

2. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover for
recessed mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of floor slab.
C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access, pumps,
pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot-traffic
areas.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and
check valves. Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include
features and devices indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sump pumps.
B. Concrete for pits and sumps is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sump Pumps: Suspend pumps from basin covers. Make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.
E. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump floor. Make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.
F. Sump Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to storm drainage piping. Brace interior of
basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse
during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install so top
surface of cover is flush with finished floor.
G. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to storm drainage piping. Refer to
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete work. Set basin cover and fasten
to top edge of concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with finished floor.
H. Packaged Drainage Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to storm drainage
piping.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Storm drainage piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section

"Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and
specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and
connect to storm drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sump pump
discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping DN65
(NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
3. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each automatic,
packaged pump discharge.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in

specified in UL 486A and UL 486B
3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required
for system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or
drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
1. Start motors.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sump pump units. Refer to Division 1 Section

SECTION 15450 - POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes potable-water storage tanks and related specialties and accessories for
indoor installations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic resin.

2. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
3. LDPE: Low-density polyethylene plastic.
4. GRP: Glass-reinforced plastic resin.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Handle and store water storage tank systems, components, and parts to prevent distortions
and other damage that could affect their structural, mechanical, or electrical integrity.
Replace damaged items that cannot be restored to original condition.
B. Store items subject to deterioration by exposure to elements, in a well-drained location,

protected from weather, and accessible for inspection and handling.
C. Deliver paint in unopened containers with unbroken seals and labels showing designated
name, specification number, color, directions for use, manufacturer, and date of
manufacture, legible and intact at time of use.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thicknesses, insulation, finishes and
coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping connections.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that indicated steel,

potable-water storage tanks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450 - Page 1 of 13

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: For shop inspection and data reports as required by ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Confirm successful pressure and leak testing.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Confirm successful pressure and leak testing.
requirements specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
F. Water Samples and Reports: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
A. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and stamp steel, pressure water storage tanks
to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels."
B. ASME Compliance for Plastic Tanks: Fabricate and stamp plastic, pressure water storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, "Fiber-
Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels."
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," and
NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects." Include appropriate NSF
marking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Steel, Water Storage Tanks:
a. Adamson Global Technology Corp.

b. Aldrich Co.
c. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
d. Peabody TecTank, Inc.
e. PVI Industries, Inc.
f. Raypak, Inc.
g. RECO Industries, Inc.
h. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.
i. State Industries.

j. Wessels Co.
2. Steel, Precharged, Water Storage Tanks:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Myers: F. E. Myers Co.
d. Smith: A. O. Smith; Aqua-Air Div.
e. Taco, Inc.
f. Wessels Co.
3. Plastic, Water Storage Tanks:
a. Belding Tank Technologies, Inc.

b. Chem-Tainer Industries, Inc.
c. Palmer Manufacturing & Tank, Inc.
d. Park International Corp.
e. Premier Plastics, Ltd.
f. Raven Industries, Inc.; Plastics Div.
g. Snyder-Crown.
h. Water Group, Inc.
A. Pressure Rating of Pressure-Type Water Tanks: At least 860 kPa (125 psig), unless
B. Pressure Rating of Specialties and Accessories for Pressure Systems: At least 860 kPa (125
psig), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pressure Rating of Piping for Pressure Systems: At least 860 kPa (125 psig), unless
D. Pressure Rating of Other Tanks and Piping Components: At least equal to system operating
pressure.
2.3 STEEL, PRESSURE WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Description: Steel, horizontal, pressure-rated water tank.
B. Description: Steel, vertical, pressure-rated water tank.
C. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 860-kPa
(125-psig) minimum working pressure, and as required to suit actual system working
pressure.
D. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
E. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread.

2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.

F. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in diameter. Include same pressure rating
as tank.
G. Specialties and Accessories: Include relief valve; pressure gage and thermometer; air-
volume-operated control; air-charging connection; and gage glass, brass fittings,
compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
H. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles.
I. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank before testing
and labeling.
J. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
testing and labeling.
K. Tank Exterior Surface Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless finish is indicated.
L. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
1. Lining Material: Copper.

2. Lining Material: Cement.
3. Coating: Epoxy resin.
4. Coating: Galvanized.
5. Coating: Nickel.
6. Coating: Glass.
M. Exterior Coating: Galvanized.
N. Exterior Coating: Primer paint.
O. Exterior Coating: Manufacturer's standard enamel paint.
2.4 STEEL, NONPRESSURE WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Description: Steel, horizontal, nonpressure-rated water tank.
B. Description: Steel, vertical, nonpressure-rated water tank.
C. Construction: Steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints.
D. Cover for Open Tank: Steel, with lining same as or similar to tank lining and with shape
that encloses top of tank.
E. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
F. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

G. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in diameter.
H. Specialties and Accessories: Include vacuum relief valve; free air vent with insect screen;
thermometer; and gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage-glass guard.

I. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles.
J. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank before testing
and labeling.
K. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
L. Tank Exterior Surface Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless finish is indicated.
M. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials

5. Coating: Nickel.
6. Coating: Glass.
N. Exterior Coating: Galvanized.
O. Exterior Coating: Primer paint.
P. Exterior Coating: Manufacturer's standard enamel paint.
2.5 STEEL, PRECHARGED WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Description: Steel, vertical, pressured-rated water tank with air precharge.
B. Operation: Factory-installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm.
C. Operation: Factory-installed, butyl-rubber bladder.
D. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with welded joints, for 860-kPa (125-psig)
minimum working pressure, and as required to suit actual system working pressure; factory
precharged to system operating pressure at tank.
E. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
F. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

G. Specialties and Accessories: Include air-charging connections, pressure relief valves, and
pressure gages.
H. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
I. Tank Exterior Surface Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless finish is indicated.
J. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials


5. Coating: Nickel.
6. Coating: Glass.
K. Exterior Coating: Galvanized.
L. Exterior Coating: Primer paint.
M. Exterior Coating: Manufacturer's standard enamel paint.
2.6 INSULATED, STEEL, WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Description: Steel, vertical, pressure-rated water tank.
B. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 860-kPa
(125-psig) minimum working pressure, and as required to suit actual system working
pressure.
C. Construction: Steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 860-kPa (125-psig)
working pressure.

as tank.
G. Insulation: Factory-installed, fiberglass, polyurethane foam, or manufacturer's standard;

surrounding entire tank except connections and other openings; suitable for tank operating
temperature; and complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 SI, “Energy Efficient Design of
New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”
H. Jacket: Steel, with manufacturer's standard baked-on enamel finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Specialties and Accessories: Include relief valve; pressure gage and thermometer; air-
volume-operated control; air-charging connection; and gage glass, brass fittings,
compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
K. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials


5. Coating: Nickel.
6. Coating: Glass.
2.7 STEEL, GRAVITY AND SURGE WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Construction: Nonpressure rated, factory fabricated from ASTM A 794 steel sheets, with
nontoxic welded joints.
B. Construction: Nonpressure rated, field fabricated from ASTM A 794 steel sheets, with
nontoxic welded joints.
C. Reinforcement: ASTM A 36/A 36M, structural-steel shapes, welded to tank as required to

maintain tank shape.

F. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in diameter.
G. Specialties and Accessories: Include vacuum relief valve; free air vent with insect screen;
thermometer; and gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
I. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank before testing
and labeling.
K. Tank Exterior Surface Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless finish is indicated.
L. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials

5. Coating: Nickel.
6. Coating: Glass.
M. Exterior Coating: Galvanized.
N. Exterior Coating: Primer paint.
O. Exterior Coating: Manufacturer's standard enamel paint.
2.8 PLASTIC, PRESSURE WATER STORAGE TANKS

A. Description: Plastic, vertical, pressure-rated water tank.
B. Construction: ASME code, FRP, for 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum working pressure, and
as required to suit actual system working pressure.
C. Construction: Manufacturer's standard, non-ASME code, for 860-kPa (125-psig) working

pressure.
D. Tank Material: Composite plastic complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-
water tanks and according to the following:
1. Outer Shell Material: FRP.

2. Lining Material: LDPE.
3. Lining Material: HDPE.
E. Tappings: Factory fabricated of compatible materials, attached to tank before testing and
labeling.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: With female thread.

2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
as tank.
G. Vertical Tank Support: Factory-fabricated steel stand, supporting bottom of tank where
indicated.
2.9 PLASTIC, NONPRESSURE WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Description: Plastic, nonpressure-rated, horizontal water tank.
B. Description: Plastic, nonpressure-rated, vertical water tank.
C. Tank Material: Composite plastic complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-
water tanks and according to the following:
1. Outer Shell Material: FRP.

2. Lining Material: LDPE.
3. Lining Material: HDPE.
D. Tappings: Factory fabricated of compatible materials, attached to tank before testing and
labeling.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: With female thread.

2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
E. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in diameter.
F. Cover for Open Tank: Plastic, same as or similar to tank material and with shape that
encloses top of tank.
G. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles with steel insert for continuous
bottom support.

I. Vertical Tank Support: Factory-fabricated steel stand, supporting bottom of tank where
indicated.
2.10 HOT PRESS GRP SECTIONAL PANEL WATER TANKS
A. Type: Hot pressed GRP (glass reinforced plastic) sectional panel, complete with tank
supports, piping and accessories as specified below. All internal metal parts to be
constructed from 304 grade stainless-steel.
B. Construction: Tank to consist to an assembly of rectangular shaped, pressed GRP convex

panels bolted together in an arrangement of external flanges with a special rubber sealant to
ensure watertight joints. Tank to be provided from factory with reinforcing struts and roof
supports and reinforcing plats and washers.
C. Panels: Minimum 10 mm thick GRP tested to BS EN 13280. Panels to resist pressures of 6

times the working pressure.
D. Panel Color: Gray, completely opaque to prevent the growth of algae and micro organisms.
E. Panel Material Characteristics: GRP, 1.8 specific gravity. 30 percent min. glass content. 10
kPa tensile strength, 16.17 kPa flexural strength, 0.515 kPa impact strength, 29.5 kPa
compressive strength, 9.41 kPa shear strength, 2.16 x 10-5/deg. C thermal expansion. 0.02
kecal/m.hr deg. C thermal conductivity.
F. Components Materials:
1. Joints Sealant: 50 mm synthetic rubber.

2. Joints Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel.
3. Reinforcement Roof Support: Stainless-steel.
4. Reinforcement Internal Tie Rod: Stainless-steel.
5. External Reinforcing: Structural steel galvanized.
6. Corner Angle: Hot press GRP.
7. Diagonal Struts: Stainless-steel.
G. Insulation: when specified, all tanks panel to be factory insulated with 25 mm thick
polyurethane of typical U value of 6 W/m2K.
H. Panels and Tank Accessories: To be shipped adequately packed in wooden crates for site
assembly complete with adequate quantities of bolts, nuts, washers, rubber sealant, etc.
I. Tank Top: to be provided with 610 mm round manhole with bolted cover and one 100 mm
diameter uPVC mosquito-proof cowled ventilator.
J. Tank: To be provided with all necessary piping connections of sizes as shown on the
Drawings Pipe connecting panels are to be specially designed at factory for that purpose and
shipped complete with pipe connections.
K. Ladders: 2 stainless-steel ladders are to be provided for each tank both inside and outside
the tank.
L. Tank: To be provided complete with level indicator, ball valve, level switches, flanges, and
bell mouth connection, etc.

M. Tank: To be provided with steel footing channel beams as recommended by tank

manufacturer for size and man shape. Tank to be supported on reinforced concrete plinth
supports running in one direction beneath the tank and extending beyond the edge of the
tank on either side.
N. Tests: After erection, tank to be filled with water to the level of overflow and left to stand
for 72 hours. During this period, no drop in water level will be allowed. If signs of
dampness or traces of leakage are noticed, the Contractor shall repair and re-test the tank to
the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
O. Tank installation shall be certified by the manufacturer’s representative.
P. Guarantee: Tanks are to be fully guaranteed against manufacturing defects and utility of
substandard material for a period of 10 years.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Overflow: The overflow for the tank shall consist of an overflow weir and outside drop
pipe, adequately supported. The overflow pipe shall be steel, ASTM A 53 or equal, and
shall terminate 300 to 600 mm above grade and shall be fitted with a flapper valve or screen
to prevent ingress of birds and insects.
B. Vent: Vent shall be tank manufacturer's standard type, factory supplied, mushroom vent
with aluminum bird screen. The free area of the vent shall be sized 50 percent in excess of
the pump-in rate.
C. Float Valves: The float valves shall be full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close
tight against maximum pressure when half submerged, with renewable, synthetic rubber,
valve disc and balancing piston bucket. Float valves to be all bronze construction including
levers and arms, with copper float and suitable for 1034 kPa cold water working pressure.
D. Altitude Valve: The supply to the tank shall be controlled by a altitude valve, automatic in
operation and accurately set to prevent overflow. The valve shall be cushioned when
opening and closing to prevent water hammer or shock. Valves shall be provided with a
travel indicator.
E. Drain Valve: AWWA C500, iron-body, bronze-mounted, non-rising stem with indicator, for
minimum working pressure of 1034 kPa, clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter,
hand wheel operated, and open by turning counterclockwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for water tanks. Refer
to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
3.2 WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION
A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so
devices needing servicing are accessible.
1. Install horizontal tanks on concrete piers and factory-fabricated saddles.

2. Install horizontal tanks on fabricated steel supports and saddles.
B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.
C. Install tank seismic restraints.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.
B. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping. Thermometers
and pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves.
Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.
1. General-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

2. Valves DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Gate or ball.
3. Valves DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Gate or butterfly.
4. Drain Valves: DN20 (NPS 3/4) gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple in
outlet with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH thread for garden-hose service, threaded
cap, and chain.
5. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric
fittings.
D. Connect air piping to hydropneumatic tanks with unions or flanges and gate or ball valves.
Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings.
E. Install the following devices on tanks:
1. Pressure relief valves.

2. Temperature-and-pressure relief valves.
3. Vacuum relief valves. Include on tanks with copper interior lining unless tank has no
valve.
4. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks.
5. Connections to accessories.

A. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test ASME code, water storage tanks to ensure structural
integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize to 1-1/2 times
tank pressure rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 30 minutes with no drop
in pressure, and check for leaks. Replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and repeat until
test is satisfactory.
B. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test non-ASME code, pressure water storage tanks to
ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks at pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above
system operating pressure, but not less than 1035 kPa (150 psig). Fill tanks with water, vent
air, pressurize tanks, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for two hours with no drop in
pressure, and check for leaks. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and
repeat until test is satisfactory.
C. Nonpressure Testing: Fill nonpressure water storage tanks to water operating level to
ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours with no
drop in water level.
D. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until results are satisfactory.
E. Prepare written reports for specified tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water storage tanks.
B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:
1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.

2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:
a. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L (50 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L (200 ppm)
of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.
3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is
not present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows evidence of contamination.
C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Perform the following final checks before filling:
1. Verify that tests of tanks are complete.

2. Verify that tests of piping systems are complete.
3. Check piping connections for leaks.
4. Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.
5. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.

6. Manually operate relief valves.

7. Adjust pressure settings.
8. Manually operate vacuum relief valves.
9. Adjust vacuum settings.
10. Check for proper seismic restraints.
B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to
operating level.

SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:
1. Commercial, electric water heaters.

2. Accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping,
installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products

D. Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on specific units selected. Other manufacturers' products complying
with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - Page 1 of 6

D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
E. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:
1. ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters.
2. ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design of New Low-Rise Residential Buildings,"
for household water heaters.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
1. Failures include heating elements and storage tanks.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Heating Elements: 5 years.

b. Storage Tanks: 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Electric Water Heaters:
a. American Water Heater Co.

b. Bradford White Corp.
c. Lochinvar Corp.
d. Patterson-Kelley Co.
e. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div.
f. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div.
g. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.
h. Vaughn Manufacturing Corp.
2. Jacket: Aluminum or steel, with enameled finish, or plastic.
2.2 COMMERCIAL, POINT-OF-USE, STORAGE, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply with UL 174, internally glass lined with heating element suitable for
operating on voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical Drawings.
B. Storage Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 1035-kPa (150-psig) working-pressure

rating.

1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping

connections, relief valve, drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach tappings
to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and
outlets.
3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.
C. Heating Elements: Two, unless otherwise indicated; electric, screw-in, immersion type.
1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
D. Anode Rod: Factory installed, magnesium.
E. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
F. Safety Control: Automatic, high temperature limit and low water cut off
G. Special Requirement: NSF 5 construction.
2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input
and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief
valve with sensing element that extends into tank.
1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of
combination relief valve.
2. Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless
water heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.
Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping.
1. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.
D. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 172.5-kPa- (25-psig-)
maximum outlet pressure.
E. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
F. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 450-mm high,
enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or
separate drain pan with raised edge and DN25 (NPS 1) drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1,
pipe thread.
G. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 450 mm above the floor.

H. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel

bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
I. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than
base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than DN20 (NPS 3/4).
J. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that
is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.
K. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE 90.1

or ASHRAE 90.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for water heaters.
3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
B. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Anchor water heaters to substrate.
D. Install seismic restraints for water heaters. Anchor to substrate.
E. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief
valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water
piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
F. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief
valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest
floor drain.
G. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
H. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining.
I. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor
drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do
not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.

J. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
1. Exception: Omit thermometers for the following:
a. Household, water heater inlet and outlet piping.

b. Commercial, point-of-use, water heater inlet piping.
c. Water heater with thermometer outlet piping.
K. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages" for pressure gages.
L. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters.
Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater.
Include shutoff valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling
valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty
valves and Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
M. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet piping and
water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
N. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
O. Fill water heaters with water.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-
circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
F. Ground equipment.


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:
and equipment.
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
7. Energize electric circuits.
9. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 60 deg C (140 deg F)
unless piping system application requires higher temperature.
10. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15671 - CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Air-cooled condensing units.

2. Water-cooled condensing units.
1. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water piping

connections to water-cooled units.
2. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping" for piping connections to water-cooled units.
3. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping" for valves and accessories for piping
connections to units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
dimensions; required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished specialties;
accessories; and installation and startup instructions for each model indicated.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
C. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
compliance with performance requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals
1. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; troubleshooting
maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance procedures and
schedule.
CONDENSING UNITS 15671 - Page 1 of 7

A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that
is listed and labeled.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. Fabricate and label water-cooled condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 303, "Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing and Compressor

Units."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer and

countersigned by Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials and
workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written
instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

condensing units that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.

2. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc. Div.
3. McQuay International.
4. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
5. York International Corp.

2.2 GENERAL FOR AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
A. Air-cooled condenser shall be a packaged, self-contained assembly that includes fans,

motors, drives, refrigerant condensing coils, controls, intercomponent piping and wiring,
totally enclosed weatherproof casing, and frame mounting; the unit shall be ready for
terminal field connections with fully automatic operation.
B. Condensing coils shall be designed and sized specifically for air-cooled condenser service.
Coil frame shall be not less than 12-gage (2.8 millimeter) galvanized steel. Coils shall be
factory tested pneumatically under water at not less than 400 pounds per square inch (2758
kilopascal). A purging vent shall be provided at the highest point of the entering
refrigerant header of each coil circuit. Condenser coil and receiver shall have an excess
capacity of not less than 20 percent for storage of pumped-down refrigerant. Condensing
coil and remainder of refrigerant circuit shall be cleaned and factory charged with dry
nitrogen or refrigerant.
C. Drive shall be weather-protected. Drive and fan discharge and inlet shall be guarded. Fan
guards shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and shall be suitable for salt-air
atmosphere; electrogalvanizing is not acceptable.
D. Condensing pressure control shall be accomplished by combination of fan cycling and

modulation of dampers located in the discharge airstream.
E. Condenser-mounted control panel and intercomponent piping and wiring shall be provided.
Control panels exposed to the weather shall have NEMA 250, Type 3 enclosures and
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures if protected by casing. Electrical work shall conform to
NFPA 70 requirements.
2.3 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 3.5 TO 17.6 kW (1 TO 5 TONS)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of compressors,

condenser coils, fans, motors, refrigerant reservoirs, and operating controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed and isolated for vibration.
1. Motor: Include thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay,
and contactor.
2. Two-Speed Compressor: Include manual reset, high-pressure switch and automatic
reset, and low-pressure switch.
C. Condenser: Copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, with liquid subcooler.
D. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated fan
motor with thermal-overload protection.
E. Accessories include the following:
1. Low-voltage thermostat and subbase to control condensing unit and evaporator fan.
2. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing.
3. Low ambient kit to permit operation down to 7 deg C (45 deg F).
4. Crankcase heater.
5. Automatic reset timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle.
6. Polyethylene mounting base to provide a permanent foundation.

F. Casing: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and
controls. Steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings,
and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2.4 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 21 TO 422 kW (6 TO 120 TONS)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors,
condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetic or semihermetic compressor designed for service with crankcase

sight glass, crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on suction and discharge
ports.
1. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass and cylinder unloading.
C. Condenser: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, with separate and independent

refrigeration circuit for each compressor. Include liquid accumulator and subcooling circuit
and backseating liquid-line service access valve. Factory test coils at 3105 kPa (450 psig),
then dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of nitrogen.
D. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven. Include
the following:
1. Permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors.

2. Separate motor for each fan.
3. Motors with thermal-overload cutouts.
4. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies.
5. Low Ambient Control: Factory-installed damper assembly, fan-speed control, or fan-
cycling control.
E. Operating and safety controls include the following:
1. Manual reset, high-pressure cutout switches.

2. Automatic reset, low-pressure cutout switches.
3. Low oil pressure cutout switch.
4. Compressor-winding thermostat cutout switch.
5. 3-leg, compressor-overload protection.
6. Control transformer.
7. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
8. Automatic, nonrecycling pump down and a timing device to prevent excessive
compressor cycling.
F. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components
and controls and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls,
condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include the following:
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished
with manufacturer's standard paint coating.
2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units.
3. Gasketed control panel door.
4. Unfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external electrical
power connection.

2.5 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.
B. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 340/360.
1. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
C. Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install condensing units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Install ground-mounted units on minimum 100-mm thick, reinforced concrete base, 100 mm
larger than condensing unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor unit to

supports with removable fasteners.
E. Install units on seismically restrained spring isolators with a minimum deflection of 25-mm.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing so it

does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.
B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to unit.
Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
C. Connect refrigerant and condenser water piping to water-cooled condensing units. Maintain
clear tube removal space.


A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.
Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
D. Report test results in writing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING

results in writing.
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and do the following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
D. Lubricate bearings on fans.
E. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
H. Measure and record airflow over coils.

I. Check operation of condenser capacity control device.
J. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
K. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Refer to Division 1 Section

SECTION 15736 - SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (15 TONS AND

SMALLER)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls, intended for indoor installations, with [integral air-cooled condensers].
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for

isolation pads, spring isolators, and seismic restraints.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices not
packaged with units.
3. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for control sequences affecting
operation of units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
E. Maintenance Data: For self-contained air-conditioning units to include in maintenance

SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (15 TONS AND SMALLER) 15736 - Page 1 of 6

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable
of working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C (122 deg. F).
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of self-contained air-conditioning units that fail in materials or
B. Warranty Period: [Five] years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Bard Manufacturing Co.
2. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
3. Dunham-Bush.
4. Engineered Air.
7. USA Coil & Air Inc.
2.2 PACKAGED UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained, factory-assembled and -wired unit; consisting of cabinet,

compressor, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, air filters, and controls; and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil.
1. Condenser: Integral air-cooled condenser.
B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted in control panel.
2.3 CABINET
A. Frame and Panels: Structural-steel frame with galvanized steel panels with factory applied,
baked-enamel finish in color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range, and
with access doors or panels.
B. Insulation: Minimum 13-mm thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior and control panel.
C. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
D. Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with directional louvers.
E. Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating on unit interior and exterior.
2.4 EVAPORATOR FAN
A. Material: Galvanized steel.
B. Configuration: Double-width, double-inlet, forward-curved centrifugal fan; statically and

dynamically balanced.
C. Drive: Belt, with fan mounted on permanently lubricated bearings.
D. Fan Sheaves: Steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed.
E. Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when set
at midposition.
F. Rating: As recommended by the manufacturer or a minimum of one and one-half times

nameplate rating of motor.
G. Motors: Multispeed, PSC type.
2.5 COMPRESSOR
A. Description: Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, and resiliently mounted with
positive lubrication and internal motor protection.
B. Compressor Type: Scroll.

2.6 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Direct-Expansion Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins.
1. Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating applied with multiple dips and

baked.
B. Refrigeration Circuit: A separate circuit for each compressor, with externally equalized
thermal-expansion valve, filter-dryer, and charging valves.
2.7 INTEGRAL AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of condenser coil, fans and motors,
and cabinet.
1. Condenser Coil: Aluminum-fin copper tube with integral subcooler; leak tested to
2930 kPa (425 psig).
2. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive propeller type with permanently lubricated motor with
built-in thermal-overload protection.
3. Low Ambient Control: Cycles fans to permit operation down to minus 18 deg C (0
deg F).
2.8 AIR FILTERS
A. Permanent Filters: 25-mm thick, washable type, panel filters.
B. Disposable Filters: 25-mmthick, glass-fiber, pleated panel filters.
2.9 CONTROLS
A. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts,
internal-winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling
reset relay.
B. Time-Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.
C. Adjustable Thermostat: Remote to control the following:
1. Supply fan.
2. Compressor.
3. Condenser.
D. System Selector Switch: [Heat-off-cool] [Off-auto-cool].
E. Fan Control Switch: Auto-on.
2.10 VENTILATION OPTIONS
A. Motorized Outside-Air Damper: Motorized, two-position blade damper allowing induction

of up to 25 percent outside air; with spring-return, low-voltage damper motor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Anchor units to structure.
C. Isolation: Mount cabinet and remote air-cooled condenser on spring isolators for mounting
under base of unit.
1. Minimum Static Deflection: 25 mm.
D. Install seismic restraints.
3.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to
be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve
and specialty arrangements.

A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

results in writing.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the

following:
1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.

2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain self-contained air-conditioning units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

SECTION 15737 - SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (LARGER THAN 15

TONS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls, intended for indoor installations, with externally mounted air-cooled condensers.

2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices not
packaged with units.
3. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for control sequences affecting
operation of units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
E. Maintenance Data: For self-contained air-conditioning units to include in maintenance

SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (LARGER THAN 15 TONS) 15737 - Page 1 of 7

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100.
1.5 COORDINATION
Concrete."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of self-contained air-conditioning units that fail in materials or
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:

2. Engineered Air.
2.2 PACKAGED UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory-assembled and -wired unit; consisting of cabinet,

compressor, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, air filters, and controls; and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil.

1. Condenser: Remote air-cooled condenser.
B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted in control panel.
2.3 CABINET
A. Frame and Panels: Structural-steel frame with galvanized steel panels with factory applied,
baked-enamel finish in color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range, and
with access doors or panels.
B. Insulation: Minimum 25-mm thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior and control panel.
C. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
D. Isolation: Spring isolators for mounting under base of unit, with minimum static deflection
of 25 mm.
E. Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with duct openings for air discharge and lined with a
minimum of 50-mm thick duct liner.
F. Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating on unit interior and exterior.
2.4 EVAPORATOR FAN
A. Material: Galvanized steel.
B. Configuration: Double-width, double-inlet, airfoil centrifugal fan; statically and

dynamically balanced.
C. Drive: Belt; with cast-iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and
keyed.
D. Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when set
at midposition.
E. Rating: As recommended by the manufacturer or a minimum of one and one-half times

nameplate rating of motor.
F. Bearings: Grease lubricated with grease lines extended to exterior of unit.
G. Variable Air Volume: Inlet guide vanes with electric modulating actuator; linkage; and
adjustable, static-pressure controller responding to a static-pressure sensor.
H. Variable Air Volume: Variable-frequency motor drive and controller.
I. Motors: Totally enclosed fan-cooled type.
J. Isolation: Mount fan and motor on common subbase and mount assembly on spring
isolators with minimum static deflection of 25 mm.

2.5 COMPRESSOR
A. Description: Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, and resiliently mounted with
positive lubrication and internal motor protection.
B. Compressor Type: Scroll.
2.6 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Direct-Expansion Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins.
1. Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating applied with multiple dips and

baked.
B. Refrigerant Circuits: A separate circuit for each compressor, with externally equalized
thermal-expansion valve with adjustable superheat, filter-dryer, sight glass, high-pressure
relief valve, and charging valves.
2.7 REMOTE AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
and operating controls; suitable for roof mounting.
3110 kPa (450 psig).
2. Condenser Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with three-phase, permanently
lubricated, ball-bearing motors with built-in thermal-overload protection.
3. Terminate suction and liquid refrigerant piping with service valves within unit.
4. Low Ambient Control: Cycles fans to permit operation down to 7 deg C (45 deg F).
5. Low Ambient Control: Cycles fans and modulates condenser fan damper assembly to
permit operation down to minus 18 deg C (0 deg F).
6. Coil Guard: Painted galvanized steel with louvered grilles.
2.8 INTEGRAL AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
and cabinet.
3110 kPa(425 psig).
2. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive propeller type with permanently lubricated motor with
built-in thermal-overload protection.
3. Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating applied in multiple dips and baked.
Corrosion treatment for condenser coils shall be factory applied.
2.9 AIR FILTERS
A. Disposable Filters: 50-mm thick, glass-fiber, pleated panel filters.
B. Air-Pressure Switch: Indicates dirty filters.

2.10 CONTROLS
A. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts,
internal-winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling
reset relay.
B. Time-Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.
C. Adjustable Thermostat: Remote to control the following:
1. Supply fan.
2. Compressor.
3. Condenser.
D. System Selector Switch: Off-heat-auto-cool.
E. Fan Control Switch: Auto-on.
F. Time Clock: Cycle unit on and off.
G. Microprocessor Control Panel: Controls unit functions, including refrigeration and safety
controls, and the following:
1. Supply fan.
2. Supply-fan motor speed.
3. Economizer control.
4. Compressors.
5. Air-cooled condenser.
6. Cooling tower pump.
7. Modulating, hot-water coil valve.
8. Modulating, steam coil valve.
9. Multistep, electric heater.
10. Panel-mounted control switch to operate unit in remote or local control mode, or to
stop or reset.
11. Panel-mounted indication of the following:
a. Operating status.
b. System diagnostics and safety alarms.
c. Supply-air temperature set point.
d. Zone heating-temperature set point.
e. Supply-air pressure set point.
f. Economizer minimum position set point.
g. Supply-air-pressure, high-limit set point.
12. Time-of-day control to cycle unit on and off.

13. Night-heat, morning warm-up cycle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Anchor units to structure.
C. Install seismic restraints.
D. Install static-pressure probe.
E. Install water-cooled units with thermometer and pressure gage at the water supply and
return connection.
F. Install vibration spring isolators under base of unit, with minimum static deflection of 25
mm. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
3.2 CONNECTIONS



no leaks exist.
equipment.

3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service, and report

results in writing.

following:

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain self-contained air-conditioning units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of
separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for
exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints" for

2. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for control devices not packaged
with units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fan coil Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for
cooling (heat rejection for heating operation in heat pump units) and a fan to circulate air to
conditioned space.
B. Condensing Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a
refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant (evaporator for heating
operation in heat pump units).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in
terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor
requirements, and electrical characteristics.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of
D. Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in maintenance

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 - Page 1 of 5

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
1.6 COORDINATION
Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:

following:

2. Lennox Industries Inc.
3. Mitsubishi Electric Sales Canada, Inc.
4. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.
5. Mitsubishi Heavy Industries America, Inc.; Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration
Division, Inc.
6. Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group.
2.2 CONCEALED FAN – COIL UNIT COMPONENTS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
D. Fan Motor: Multispeed, PSC type.
E. Disposable Filters: 1 inch (25 mm) thick, in fiberboard frames.

F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED, FAN COIL UNIT COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
D. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
2.4 WALL- OR CEILING-MOUNTED, FAN COIL UNIT COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans
with drain connection.
C. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory

ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors;
manual-reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for
overcurrent protection.
D. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
E. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
2.5 AIR-COOLED, CONDENSING UNIT COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start
capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating or Scroll.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator

fan, with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install fan coil unit components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install roof-mounted condensing unit components on equipment supports specified in

Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable,
cadmium-plated fasteners.
D. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing

to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS


no leaks exist.

equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

following:

3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance
notice.

SECTION 15763 - FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed
units.
5. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
F. Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.
FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 - Page 1 of 5

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:

1. Carrier Corp.
2. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
2.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including filter, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in
blow-through configuration with hydronic cooling coil and hydronic heating coil. Units to
be exposed or concealed as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.
B. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch (25-mm) duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 and
attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a maximum flame-
spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be insulated with
polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall be formed to slope from all
directions to drain connection. Drain pan shall have extension to cover the area underneath
valve connections.

2.4 COILS
A. Cooling Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working
pressure of 300 psig (2068 kPa) and a maximum entering water temperature of 275 deg F
(135 deg C).
2.5 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized
steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor.
2.6 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Shaded-pole or Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor

with integral thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.
B. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Open dripproof with hinged mount and adjustable motor
pulley.
C. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit.
Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Filters: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, throwaway filters in fiberboard frames.
B. Extended drain pan under valves and accessories.
2.8 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Two-Pipe, Valve Cycle Wall-mounted temperature sensor, with manual three speed,
electronic fan-speed switch, valves suitable to be connected to the central control system
specified in Division 15 "HVAC Controls and Instruments and BMS".
A. Test and rate units according to ARI 440.
B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
fan-coil unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
Controls and Seismic Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
match lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units.
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance
notice.

SECTION 15782 - ROOFTOP UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rooftop heating and cooling units.
1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for type and style of roof curbs
and equipment supports.
manufactured isolation bases.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including
rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation
and startup instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure.
Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
C. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

Indicate and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies of
checklists.
D. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
ROOFTOP UNITS 15782 - Page 1 of 11

A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
E. Comply with AGA Z223.1 for gas-fired furnace section.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation
instructions for unloading and moving to final location.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof
construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and

countersigned by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or
workmanship, within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written
instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period, Heat Exchangers: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:

2. Engineered Air.
3. Lennox Industries Inc.
5. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
2.2 ROOFTOP UNITS SMALLER THAN 21 kW (6 TONS)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and
consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans,
refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection

coating and exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for
inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 13-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts
for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
C. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven with permanently lubricated
motor bearings.
D. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
E. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor.
F. Compressors: Hermetic with integral vibration isolators and crankcase heaters.
G. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and
burners with the following controls:
1. Redundant gas valves.

2. Intermittent pilot ignition.
3. Electronic-spark ignition system.
4. High-limit cutout.
5. Forced-draft proving switch.
H. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
magnehelic gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover.
I. Low Ambient Control: Head-pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures as low as

minus 1 deg C (30 deg F).

J. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.
2.3 ROOFTOP UNITS, 26 TO 70 kW (7-1/2 TO 20 TONS)
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection

coating and exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for
C. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves or direct-
drive fans; and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.
D. Exhaust/Relief Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal or propeller type, directly driven with

permanently lubricated motor bearings.
E. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
F. Filters: Class 1 bag filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot efficiency in galvanised steel
frame, with 50-mm thick, permanent, washable, aluminum type prefilters.
G. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor.
H. Compressors: Serviceable, fully hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators and
crankcase heaters, thermal expansion valve and sight glasses.
1. Hot-Gas Bypass: Factory-installed valve.

2. Timed-Off Control: Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after 5 minutes.
I. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and
burners with the following controls:
1. Redundant, dual gas valves (2-stage heating).

J. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-
control device.
K. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller and

electronic-control system.
L. Low Ambient Control: Head-pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures as low as

minus 1 deg C (30 deg F).

M. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.
N. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to
de-energize unit.
O. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and

communicates with central control processor.
1. Control Outputs: 2-stage cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and
economizer damper operation.
2. Control Sensors: Return-air-temperature sensor, fan airflow-proving switch, dirty-
filter switch, discharge-air-temperature sensor, room-temperature sensor, and night-
setback-override switch.
3. Control Features: Day/occupied modes for high or low enthalpy and
night/unoccupied mode.
2.4 ROOFTOP UNITS LARGER THAN 70 kW (20 TONS)
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof, double-wall construction with corrosion-

protection coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for
C. Evaporator Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.
D. Return-Air Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.
E. Exhaust/Relief: Barometric damper.
F. Exhaust/Relief Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and
permanently lubricated motor bearings.
G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
H. Filters: 300-mm deep, Class 1 bag filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot efficiency in
galvanized steel frame; with 50-mm thick, permanent, washable, aluminum type prefilters.
I. Filters: 300-mm deep, Class 1 cartridge filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot efficiency in
galvanized steel frame; with 50-mm- (2-inch-) thick, fiberglass, throwaway prefilters.
J. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 3110 kPa
(450 psig) and leak tested to 2070 kPa (300 psig) with air under water. Insulate coil section.
K. Compressors: Semihermetic or hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators, and

crankcase heaters that de-energize during compressor operation, with thermal expansion

valves, filter-dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, and liquid- and suction-line
service valves.
1. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced coil refrigerant circuiting with circuit for each
compressor.
2. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloaders with steps as scheduled.
3. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor.
4. Low-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.
5. High-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.
6. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.
7. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for 5 minutes after
shutdown.
8. Adjustable, Low Ambient Head-Pressure Control: Designed to operate at
temperatures as low as minus 18 deg C (0 deg F), by cycling condenser fans and
controlling speed of last fan of each circuit.
9. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.
L. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for heat exchangers and burners
designed for minimum 2-stage operation, with single gas connection with the following
controls:
1. Redundant gas valves.

6. Flame rollout switch.
M. Economizer Dampers: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers with damper operator and
control package.
1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 54 L/s per kW (400
cfm per ton) with 250-Pa (1-inch wg) pressure differential.
2. Damper Operator: 24 V, with gear train sealed in oil with spring return.
N. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-
control device.
O. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller; supply-air

static-pressure controller with damper operator operating variable-inlet-fan vanes.
P. Temperature Control: Factory-installed, demand-oriented, solid-state control system with

minimum of 2 cooling steps and 2 heating steps, including solid-state room thermostat with
dead band, and subbase with system and fan switches. Include the following:
1. Discharge-air-temperature reset with space-temperature override.

2. 7-day programmable clock, with power-failure carryover, for remote mounting.
3. Warm-up cycle.
Q. Remote-Control Panel: Contains controls and indicator lights as follows:
1. Heat-cool-auto system switch.

2. On-off fan switch.

3. Minimum outside-air damper potentiometer position LCD.

4. Supply-fan operating indicator light.
5. Mechanical cooling malfunction indicator light.
6. Clogged filters indicator light.
R. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to
de-energize unit.
S. Electrical Convenience Outlet: 115-V, ac fused outlet, separately fused, located in unit
cabinet or in roof curb perimeter.
T. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and

communicates to central control processor.
1. Control Outputs: Heating, cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and
economizer damper operation.
2. Return-air-, discharge-air-, outdoor-air-, space-, control set-point temperature LCD.
3. Outdoor enthalpy LCD.
4. Filter pressure drop LCD.
5. Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, operating mode.
6. Inlet-vane and economizer-damper position LCD.
7. Duct static-pressure LCD.
8. Alarm LCD.
9. Control Features: Day/occupied and night/unoccupied modes, temperature reset.
2.5 ROOF CURBS
A. Manufacturer's standard, insulated with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, factory-

installed wood nailer, according to NRCA standards.
1. Curb Height: Minimum 400 mm.

2. Isolation Curb: Rigid upper and lower steel structure with vibration isolation springs
and vertical and horizontal restraints; with elastomeric waterproof membrane. 50-
mm static deflection.
2.6 MOTORS
C. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-

Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment."
B. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to ARI 360, "Commercial and

Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment."
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Standard for Sound Rating of
Outdoor Unitary Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and
performance of rooftop units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level. Install and secure rooftop units on
curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.
D. Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall penetrations and
flashing with wall construction.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.
B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate

return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of
unit.
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.


3.4 COMMISSIONING

results in writing:
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
1. Level unit on housekeeping base, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans.
5. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
6. Check that labels are clearly visible.
7. Clean furnace flue and condenser and inspect for construction debris.
8. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
9. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
10. Verify that filters are installed.
11. Adjust vibration isolators.
12. Connect and purge gas line.
13. Check that burner and controls are suitable to operate at temperatures as low as minus
40 deg C (minus 40 deg F).
14. Check acoustic insulation.
15. Check operation of barometric dampers.
D. Lubricate bearings on fan.
E. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Perform starting of refrigeration in summer only.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
H. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.
I. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.
J. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and adjust burner
for peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame.
1. Measure gas pressure on manifold.

2. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
3. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
4. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen
concentration.
5. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate
and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
6. Check for backdraft under full operation.

K. Calibrate thermostats.
L. Adjust and check high-temperature limits.
M. Check internal isolators.
N. Check outside-air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return- and relief-air
dampers.
O. Check controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal
and emergency shutdown.
P. Start refrigeration and measure and record the following:
1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.
4. Air-cooled-condenser, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Q. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on
fan curve.
1. Supply-air volume.
2. Return-air volume.
3. Relief-air volume.
4. Outside-air intake volume.
R. Simulate maximum cooling demand and check the following:
1. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

2. Short circuiting air through condenser or from condenser to outside-air intake.
S. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Check
the following:
1. High-limit heat exchanger.

2. Warm-up for morning cycle.
3. Freezestat operation.
4. Free-cooling mode, outside-air changeover.
5. Alarms.
T. After starting and performance testing, replace filters with new, clean filters, change
vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and condenser coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt
tension, and check operation of power vents.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop units. Refer to Division 1 Section
1. Schedule at least eight (8) hours of training.

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch
wg (minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa).
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct
penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors for
access to concealed ducts.
3. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
5. Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for
mechanical equipment.
6. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
7. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for constant-volume and variable-air-volume
control boxes, and reheat boxes.
8. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
9. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for automatic volume-control
dampers and operators.
10. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final
adjusting of manual-volume dampers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in

ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft.
x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu
or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - Page 1 of 10

Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed
layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction.
6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation,
seismic restraints, and duct attachment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to
dampers and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
requirements.
F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for
hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum
supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles
with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period
for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper
maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces
of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900
mm).
2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS
A. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the following
locations:
1. Each duct mounted coil and humidifier.

2. Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control damper.
3. Each duct mounted smoke detector.
4. For cleaning operating room supply air duct and kitchen hood exhaust duct, locate
access doors at 6 m (20 feet) intervals and at each change in duct direction.
B. Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12
inch) minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double-wall,
insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts.
1. For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA Standards (Figure 2-12).

2. For round and flat oval duct: Access sections shall be not less than 1.0 mm (20 gage)
housing welded or riveted to a duct section.
2.3 DUCT LINER (WHER INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS)
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner
Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of
glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean
temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-
developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.
5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when
applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.
a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- (23-kg-) tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) into airstream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and
mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.
2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral
compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape
to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or

for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or

galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod
diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
2.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR DUCTWORK
A. Ductwork shall be supported and braced to resist all directional (transverse, longitudinal and
vertical) forces.
B. Brace all duct branches, minimum of one brace per branch.
C. Provide required bracing material.
D. Provide the following :
1. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet requirements of the
latest Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA), Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the
prescribed Seismic Hazard Level (SHL).
2. Where SMACNA requirements are not met completely, submit proposed alternate
details and calculations to completely address seismic bracing requirements. Such
designs shall use more severe of the Uniform Building Code requirements for
determining seismic forces, and be performed, stamped and signed by a specialist
engineer. Revise if necessary any details shown on the contract drawings for vertical
support and lateral bracing, and submit for the approval of the Resident Engineer to
meet the design criteria listed above.
2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal
thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and

rigidity class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, and discolorations.
B. Fabricate range hood exhaust ducts with 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, carbon-steel sheet
for concealed ducts and 0.0500-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel for exposed ducts.
Weld and flange seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.

C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 0.0500-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.
Weld and flange seams and joints.
D. Static-Pressure Classifications: Construct ducts to meet the static pressure requirements of

the ducts.
E. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm)
and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of
unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
2.8 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated
thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7
m/s).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches (75 mm) from
transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings
at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified
for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from
duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane
assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout
means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or
welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
2.9 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of
round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel and dishwasher exhaust ducts of
stainless steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."
C. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-
welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."
2.10 ROUND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified
for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend

radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.
2.11 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS
A. Manufactured type with a minimum 50 mm (two inch) length for insulated duct, and a
minimum 25 mm (one inch) length for duct not insulated. Test hole shall have a flat gasket
for rectangular ducts and a concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a screw cap to
prevent air leakage.
B. Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted temperature sensor or
transmitter, and at entering and leaving side of each heating coil, cooling coil, and heat
recovery unit.
2.12 LEAD COVERED DUCT
A. Sheet Lead: 3.1 mm (1/8 inch) thick, securely installed, free of waves, lumps or wrinkles
and with as few joints as possible.
B. Joints shall be made to obtain X-ray absorption equivalent to adjacent sheet lead, and
finished smooth and neat.

2.13 ELECTROSTATIC SHIELDING
A. At the point of penetration of shielded rooms ducts shall be made electrically discontinuous
by means of a flexible, nonconductive connection outside shielded room.
B. Metallic duct portion inside shielded room shall be electrically bonded to shielding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SPECIAL DUCTWORK APPLICATIONS
A. Battery Charging Room Exhausts: Constructed of 1.3 mm (18 gauge) stainless steel.
B. Duct for Negative Pressure Up to 750 Pa (3 Inches Water): Provide for exhaust duct
between HEPA filters and exhaust fan inlet including systems for Autopsy Suite exhaust.
1. Round Duct: Galvanized steel, spiral lock seam construction with standard slip joints.
2. Rectangular Duct: Galvanized steel, minimum 1.0 mm (20 gage), Pittsburgh lock
seam, companion angle joints 32 mm by 3.2 mm(1-1/4 by 1/8 inch )minimum at not
more than 2.4 m (8 feet) spacing. DUCTMATE SYSTEM or equal manufactured
joints are acceptable in lieu of companion angles.
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and
duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap
opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
M. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and
smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping
materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.3 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install dishwasher exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible."
3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as
described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Transverse joints.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.5 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches
(1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct

Accessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage

testing and as required for compliance with test requirements. Perform leakage testing on
ducts constructed to 4-inch wg (750-Pa) or higher.
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test
entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above
maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface
area of test section.
D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
3.9 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

SECTION 15816 - HVAC CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes HVAC casings for field-erected, air-handling systems and for housing
mechanical equipment.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for external insulation for HVAC casings.
2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for lighting within HVAC casings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in

ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft.
x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu
or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For factory-fabricated casings, sealing materials, and acoustic liner materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Reinforcement and spacing.
3. Seam and joint construction.
4. Access doors, including frames, hinges, and latches.
5. Filter, coil, humidifier, and other apparatus installation.
6. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation,
seismic restraints, and casing attachment.
7. Interior lighting.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casings certifying that the acoustic

performance of factory-fabricated casings complies with requirements.
1. Show sound-absorption coefficients in each octave band lower than those scheduled,
when tested according to ASTM C 423.
2. Show airborne sound transmission losses lower than those scheduled, when tested
according to ASTM E 90.
HVAC CASINGS 15816 - Page 1 of 6

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual fabrication and installation details of HVAC
casings and accessories.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for
hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum
supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of
glass fibers.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean
temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-
developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A and ASTM C 916.

5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when
applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.
a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 23-kg tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 3 mm into airstream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and
mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl

sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
2. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.4 SINGLE WALL CONSTRUCTION CASINGS
A. Shop fabricate casings to greatest extent possible with a minimum of joints and to minimize
field fabrication and assembly.
B. Fabricate casings with standing seam construction and angle reinforcement. Fabricate
close-off sheets from casing sides, top, and bottom to damper, coil, and filter frames.
Fabricate close-off sheets at joints between stacked coils. Bolt close-off sheets to frame
flanges and housings. Support coils on stands fabricated from galvanized steel angles or
channels.
C. Reinforce casings with galvanized or painted steel angles.
D. Seal joints with liquid-type, high-pressure duct sealant to eliminate air leakage.
E. Fabricate drain pans for cooling coils, humidifiers, and eliminator blade sections in casings
with external connection and vented deep-seal trap for drainage piping with a 20-mm pipe
connection. Fabricate and reinforce drain pans of same material and thickness as housing,
50 mm deep with rolled edges. Solder seams.
F. Fabricate casings with reinforced openings for access doors at least 500 mm wide by 1200
mm high and located for access to each item of equipment housed. Refer to Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories" for access doors.
G. Fabricate casings to receive flexible or outlet connectors for fans. Refer to Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors.
H. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate HVAC casings to the

following:
1. Before Fans: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).

2. After Fans: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg).
2.5 DOUBLE WALL CONSTRUCTION CASINGS
A. Description: Double-wall, insulated, pressurized equipment casings.
B. Panel Construction: Standing-seam, galvanized, sheet steel exterior shell; and solid or
perforated, galvanized, sheet steel interior shell; with a 50- or 100-mm space, as indicated.
1. Fabricate with a minimum number of joints.

2. Weld exterior and interior shells to perimeter, to interior longitudinal galvanized steel
channels, and to box-end internal closures. Paint welds.
3. Exterior Shell Thickness: 1.0 mm minimum.
4. Interior Shell Thickness: 0.85 mm minimum.
5. Interior Shell Thickness: 0.85 mm minimum, with 2.4-mm perforations at 5-mm
staggered spacing for 23 percent open area.
6. Fabricate perimeter and interior longitudinal channel members with galvanized steel
shapes.
7. Fill each panel assembly with insulating material that is noncombustible, inert,
mildew resistant, and vermin proof, and that complies with NFPA 90A.
8. Fabricate panels with tongue-and-groove construction, with continuous self-locking
joints effective inside and outside each panel joint interface.
C. Trim Items: Fabricate from a minimum of 1.3-mm galvanized, sheet steel, furnished in
standard lengths for field cutting.
D. Access Doors: Fabricate personnel access doors at least 600 mm by 1500 mm in size, and
other access doors in size indicated.
1. Fabricate doors of same thickness as panels, with a minimum 1.0-mm solid interior
and exterior galvanized, sheet steel shell.
2. Install a minimum of two ball-bearing hinges and two wedge-lever-type latches,
operable from inside and outside. Install doors to open against air pressure
differential. Install neoprene gasket around entire perimeter of door frame.
3. Fabricate windows in doors consisting of double-glazed wire-reinforced safety glass
with an air space between and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals.
E. Structural Performance: Design entire plenum installation to be self-supporting and capable

of withstanding internal static pressures as scheduled, without exceeding deflection of any
panel joint of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casing
structure.
1. Design outdoor casings with weatherproof coating and for wind loading of 720 N/sq.
m and snow loading of 1440 N/sq. m.
2. Acoustic Performance: Certified testing data from independent acoustic agency
listing sound-absorption and transmission-loss characteristics of panel assembly.
3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean
temperature.
F. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate HVAC casings to the

following:
1. Before Fans: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).

2. After Fans: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg).

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS HVAC CASING MATERIALS
A. General: Miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes required to comply with
HVAC casing system requirements, including proper connection of ducts and equipment.
2.7 SHOP-APPLIED LINER
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated
thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of casings or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners with longitudinal joints, except at corners of casings, unless casing size
and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in casings.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding
300 mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse joints; and at intervals not
exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from casing wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined casing preceding unlined casing.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in casings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment bases and roof curbs for compliance with requirements for conditions
affecting installation and performance of HVAC casings. Do not proceed with installation

3.2 CASING INSTALLATION
A. Install casings according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible." Follow recommended spacing of sheet metal screws, duct sealer placement, and
trim positioning requirements.
B. Field-cut openings for pipe and conduit penetrations; insulate and seal according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Support casings on floor or foundation system. Secure and seal to base.
D. Support components rigidly with ties, braces, brackets, seismic restraints, and anchors of
types that will maintain housing shape and prevent buckling.
E. Align casings accurately at connections, with 3-mm misalignment tolerance and with
interior surfaces smooth.
F. Maintain duct seal class integrity throughout casing. Apply sealer to joints, connections and
mountings.
A. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test
entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above
maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
B. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for leakage classification of

ducts connected to casing.
C. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
D. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean dust and debris from each casing section as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of
foreign substances that might deteriorate metal or interfere with painting or insulating of
casings.

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
7. Flexible ducts.
9. Duct accessory hardware.
1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors and
panels.
2. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for constant-volume and variable-air-volume
control boxes, and reheat boxes.
4. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
5. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for electric and pneumatic damper
actuators.
6. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
6. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field
connection. Detail the following:
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - Page 1 of 7

1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.

2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access
doors and panels.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power
levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900
mm).
2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and
mounting flange.
C. Blades: 0.025-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed aluminum.
D. Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
H. Blades shall include field adjustable, zinc plated steel counter balance weights to allow that
0.01 inches wg (2.5 Pa).
2.3 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades
for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position
without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent
with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals
for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as

indicated, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch
(1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where
indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing
in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing
assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper
assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of

a multiple-damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-
mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center
hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct
mounting.
2.4 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-
inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-
inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) or 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) thick as indicated,
and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In

place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized steel
blade connectors.
H. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
I. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 (74 deg C) rated.
2.5 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled for
one-and-one-half-hour rating to UL 555.
B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated as indicated.
C. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel;

length to suit wall or floor application.
E. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.
1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed

gear trains.
2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and
breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit
normal operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
4. Two-Position Motor: 220 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
5. Two-Position Motor: 300 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
6. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
7. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
8. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 460 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.

2.6 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance

characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have
fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick,

solid sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, perforated sheet metal
for inner casing.
D. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thicknesses for diameters listed below:
1. Up to 24 Inches (600 mm): 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).

2. 26 through 40 Inches (660 through 1000 mm): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that
indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and designed for
minimum aerodynamic losses.
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.
F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not
less than 5 percent compression.
G. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:
1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both

directions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels,
for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise
in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure
or 6-inch wg (1500-Pa) static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.7 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, curved blades set
3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.;
and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness,
and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel
where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
E. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying

with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm)
in the filling.
C. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone
environment.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).

2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp, and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm)
in the filling.
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket
enclosing 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral
fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
D. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (1500 Pa) positive, 1/2-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.

2.11 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch (6-mm), zinc-
plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and
square-head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written

instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
E. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,
adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
F. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing".

SECTION 15836 - AXIAL FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Propeller Fans
2. Gravity Turbine Ventilator
3. Welding Fume Extraction Equipment
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings from the manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating
dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
AXIAL FANS 15836 - Page 1 of 8

E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1.
1. Include lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in

the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.2 PROPELLER FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan blades, hub,
housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-
enamel finish coat after assembly..
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron
hub.
D. Cast Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum

hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Extruded Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened

to cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
F. Direct-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, statically and

dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed
and motor horsepower (HP).
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
a. Ball-bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours
G. Accessories: The following accessories are indicated:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades with

nylon bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized Steel, conforming to OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
6. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted

inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2.3 GRAVITY TURBINE VENTILATOR
A. Gravity type aluminum ventilator with wind driven vertical vanes, suitable for industrial
application and for installation on any roof type, complete with all accessories.
B. The units shall provide a continuous performance to the capacities shown on drawings. The
units shall be designed so that any static or dynamic loading shall be minimal and not
require any additional support structures to the roof system
C. The units shall be of robust construction and be supplied complete with a mounting and
flashing system allowing for a simple installation to a variety of roof types. The turbine head
shall be of the cylindrical vertical vane type mounted on a rotating shaft complete with
bearings and a turbine head support system. Aerodynamically proven vanes shall be fitted in
such a configuration that optimizes the airflow through the turbine head. The top turbine
head support arms shall be of the full-length fiber reinforced plastic type. The turbine head
shall be securely mounted on a circular throat, the size of the throat being as shown on the
drawings. The configuration of the turbine head construction shall minimize the inertia of
the unit to enhance low wind speed performance. The throat shall be adjustable to suit the
pitch of the roof system. A weather proof flashing shall be incorporated with the throat. The
entire unit shall be manufactured from high quality marine grade aluminum except for the
shaft, which will be of type 316 stainless steel. The bearings shall be of the double row
heavy-duty ball type and shall be factory-sealed for life. The units shall be powder coated
to an approved color.
D. The units shall be manufactured to appropriate tolerances that will ensure a stable
performance at all wind speeds. Unless otherwise approved, aluminum sheets shall be laser
cut to ensure clean edges. The whole unit shall be constructed so that its operation is noise
free and will prevent the ingress of water and dust.
E. Unit shall be complete with an auxiliary small motor to be utilized in case wind velocity is
not enough to ensure the required ventilation.
F. The units shall be tested in accordance with the relevant standards and the tests shall be in
accordance with internationally recognized third party inspection standards. Tests shall
include but not be limited to capacities at varying wind speeds, pressure drops and rain
leakage resistance. All test results shall be recorded on an approved test record sheet that
shall bear the mark of the approved testing authority.
G. The supplier of the units shall provide the information required in the relevant standards and
this information should be attested by an appropriate independent agency. Each unit shall
carry markings in accordance with the standard (Make and Model shall be stamp impressed
on the body of the unit).
H. The supplier shall unconditionally warrant the units for a period of not less than 15 years.
The supplier or his approved commercial agent shall certify this warranty. A copy of the
warranty certificate shall be included at the time of any offer to supply.
I. The units shall be designed so as to be intrinsically maintenance free. There should be no

other maintenance requirement than an annual inspection and superficial cleaning from time
to time.
J. Unit shall be as manufactured by HURICANE Turbine Ventilators from EDMONDS PTY

Limited or approved equal.
2.4 WELDING FUME EXTRACTION EQUIPMENT
A. Ventilator Unit shall be of the lightweight extractor fan with electric motor to move
approximately 1550 m3/hr of air. Fan to be of low noise and suitable for the use with
exhaust arms. Supplied with welding smoke filter, flexible extraction arm, and necessary
accessories for installation to the wall brackets.
B. Impeller: spark proved aluminum impeller connected directly to motor shaft.
C. Housing: powder coated spark proved aluminum housing.
D. Filter: welding smoke high efficiency two-step filter, wall mounted in cabinet with brackets,
suitable for connection to the flexible extraction arm.
E. Arm: flame-proof double skin flexible fiber glass hose, PVC coated with internal steel
spiral, designed for extracting welding smoke.
F. Hood: 1.5m × 1.5 m welded or riveted hood of material to suit application, with safety mesh
on hose, and hood collar suitable for flexible arm connection with proper extension above
top of hood.
G. Controls: Provide control system for automatic/manual operation of fan and filter set.
2.5 MOTORS
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B or

equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 34.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during

operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Paint finish of fans exposed to outdoor shall be suitable for the hot and humid climate of the
project.
D. Internal sides of fans used for 100 percent outdoor air shall be specially painted.

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high temperature application
as indicated on Drawings.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The
overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation springs and
seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "
Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical

Identification."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connector.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including

grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and
electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup,
and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections
for ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-
handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
final position after balancing is achieved.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan units.
Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Centrifugal Fans for indoor installations
C. Kitchen Fume Roof Extract Fan
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute (CFM) and
design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed
to operating and maintenance personnel.
E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation. Noise level for all ceiling
mounted equipment shall not exceed NC35.
F. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 - Page 1 of 12


B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
F. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1.
1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.
listed and labeled.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location following
C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" Section.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.

2. Aerovent, Inc.
3. Carnes Co.
4. Cook (Loren) Co.
5. Greenheck Fan Corp.
6. ILG Industries, Inc.
7. Joy Technologies Inc.
8. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
9. Snyder General Commercial Products.
10. Trane Co. (The).
11. Twin City Fan & Blower Co.
2.2 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.

4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets
shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with
minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt
spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 23 weathermeter.
C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be provided for
the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-quantity balancing
operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the following:
1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan speed has
been determined.
2.3 FAN UNITS
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated
capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
2.4 HOUSINGS
A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to
internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate fans downstream from
humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and reinforced-
steel panels with welded seams and the following:
a. Outlet guide vanes.

b. Motor disconnect switch.
c. Spun inlet cone with flange.
d. Outlet flange.
e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
2.5 WHEELS

A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back plate,
backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel
hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
2.6 SHAFTS
A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating
of lubricating oil.
C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the
fan's speed range.
2.7 BEARINGS
A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2.8 BELT DRIVES
A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
B. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of
sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard
belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40
horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or
variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave,
high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.

D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm thick, 20-
mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer
with guard in place.
F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and gaskets.
B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections.
C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.
D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2 permanently
lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control
shaft for double-width fans.
E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently lubricated
bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single control lever with
control shaft for double-width fans.
1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.
F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2 plates formed
around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of
air stream to single control lever.
1. Configuration: Parallel blade.

2. Configuration: Opposed blade.
G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft bearings.
H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan
scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from
shaft.
J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
2.10 MOTORS


operation.
occupants.
3. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as otherwise
specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with fixed-sheave standard
belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable, pivoted motor bases wherever
equipment configuration permits proper installation.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat aluminum
parts.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat before
assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.
Seal.
2.13 DESERT COOLER AIR HANDLING UNIT AND ACCESSORIES
A. Unit central station, draw-through, horizontal, complete with electric motor, V-belt drive
fan, evaporator mattresses, circulating pump, water sump, wiring cables, control devices and
all necessary accessories. Units to be designed for dusty stormy weather conditions. The
unit to be factory supplied with supporting frame and adjustable feets.
B. Housing factory fabricated, unit casing and frame to be made of corrosion resistant
galvanized sheet steel with two coats of enamel paint. Special hat sections formed into
cabinet bottom to assure maximum blower/motor support.
C. Fan Section: O have formed channel base for integral mounting of fans, motor and casing
panels. Fan scroll and bearings to be rigidly mounted on an adequate frame rigidly fixed to
base. Fan section to be provided with compartment lighting and access door with glass
inspection window.

D. Fan Section: have one or more industrial grade fans, with air foil blades for
backward/inclined blades, rear discharge type, mounted and keyed on common heat-treated,
ground and polished solid steel shaft. Shaft to be supported on self-aligning pillow block
regreasible ball bearings. Fan wheels and scrolls to be bonderized steel painted with blaked
enamel or unpainted mill galvanized steel.
E. Fan Sound Power Level: mean sound power level at 1.5m from fan casing inlet not ducted
in free field conditions is not exceed 85 dBa.
F. Drive: to comprise fan pulley, adjustable or non-adjustable motor sheave depending on the
size of fans, V-belt guard and provision for belt tensioning adjustment as well as adjustment
mechanism.
G. Access Panel: full height removable panel to provide access to fan housing and discharge
side of wet section. Wet section to have removable top for access and pad replacement.
H. Motor: heavy duty, industrial grade, open face, drip proof sized to meet system
requirements, rated 50 deg. C. ambient condition, Class F insulation, with service factor 1.1
and with life-time sealed ball bearings.
I. Evaporator mattresses: manufacturer standard with 300 mm thick and 95% saturation
efficiency at 500 feet per minute face velocity. Media to be supported by a full width
stainless channel with punched holes on a staggered pattern to assure minimum of 50%
support of the media. Provide stainless plate extended from the bottom of the media into the
water to prevent air bypass under the media.
J. Water distribution: to be complete with pump recirculating system with metering valve and
bleed off line on pressure side of pump. Water to be delivered to PVC schedule 40 header
pipe. Water to be discharge upwards against a stainless steel water deflector that re-directs
the water back evenly onto the full width of the cooling media. Water pump to be provided
complete with thermal overload and locked rotor protection. The water sump to be stainless
steel and complete with water supplying kit, spreader, float valve and overflow.
K. Electrical controls: to consist of a fused disconnect with manual off/on switch. The
controls shall consist of Magnetic starter with thermal overload strips and pump contactor.
Remote controls (thermostat or manual switching) are available.
L. Dampers leakage rate: is not exceed the following for a pressure differential between the up-
stream part and down-stream part of damper of 1000Pa when damper is closed:
Number of Modules
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LEAK 130 260 390 520 650 780 910 1040

(M3/HR)
M. Flexible Connection: units to be provided with flexible connection section where installed
above expansion joints as shown on the drawing. Flexible connection to be heavy duty, fire
retardant and resistant to the requirement of NFPA A 90A.
N. Vibration Isolators: to be provided on all units and to be spring type, free standing and
laterally stable without any housing and complete with 5mm neo-prene acoustical friction
pads between the base plate, and the support. All mountings to be no minimum additional
travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.

2.14 CARBON MONOXIDE EXHAUST RAIL SYSTEM
A. Carbon Monoxide Exhaust System Rail: Shall consist of exhaust rail, fan, automatic damper
with micro switch, three numbers sliding hoses, balancers, connecting nozzles, supporting
elements and all other accessories required for the proper installation and operation of the
system.
B. Exhaust Rail: 160mm diameter delivered in parts which are multiples of 2.5m assembled to
the length shown on the drawings.
C. Exhaust Rail: Comprises the following:
1. Top rail of aluminum

2. Side profiles of aluminum
3. Pair of rubber seals
4. End cover of plastic
5. Assembly cocking devices of aluminum
6. End stop of rubber
7. 160mm diameter end connection to facilitate adaption to extract fan.
D. Supporting Elements: Suspension attachments mounted in pairs from brackets with a

maximum length of 6m between each attachment.
E. Extraction Unit: Comprises the following:

1. Exhaust trolley of aluminum, rolls on ball bearing suspension wheels inside the rail,
hose support balancer which hoist the hose to normal position slowly without any risk
of damaging the vehicle. Cord length to be 8m.
2. Transport trolley, runs on the outside of the rail.
3. Joint 150 mm diameter.
4. 10 m rubber hose, 160 deg. C temperature resistance with the lower hose crush proof.
5. Safety coupling to provide automatic disconnection at a pulling force of 60-70kP.
6. Swivel to eliminate twisting of the hose resulting from the motion of the car.
7. Strong light weight wire shorter than the hose to act as a limitation protection to avoid
unnecessary stress on the hose.
8. Nozzle covered with rubber equipped with 0.5 meter flexible steel hose to reduce the
temperature stain on the exhaust hose. Nozzle shall be retained on to the exhaust pipe
by a special clamp.
F. Fume Extract Fan: Zinc-coated steel housing painted and baked, impeller directly
connected to motor shaft and made of silumen to prevent build-up of static electricity.
G. Fume Extract Fan: Mounted on a light, galvanized steel frame.
H. Fume Extract Fan: Equipped with guard net on the inlet and outlet sides.
I. Exhaust Rail: Obtain from:
• Plastic Blower Co. (U.S.A)

• Nederman (U.K.)
• Nordisk (Denmark)
Or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads or

housed spring isolators as indicated . Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
concrete housekeeping base.
C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical

Identification."
3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported
unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36),
size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing.
Anchor or key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
connections with flexible connectors.


UL 486B.

electrical connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt
adjustments, and lubrication, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING

for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" Section for procedures for air-handling-system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fan
units. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15853 - POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Utility set fans.

2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Axial roof ventilators.
4. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.
5. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
6. In-line ventilators.
7. In-line centrifugal fans.
1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for roof curbs and equipment
supports.
vibration hangers and supports.
3. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices.
4. Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect
switches.
5. Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted
exhaust fans.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
POWER VENTILATORS 15853 - Page 1 of 12

4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
E. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed
to operating and maintenance personnel.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

C. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans
drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show the following:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
F. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance manual
1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.
listed and labeled.

D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with
applicable NEMA standards.
E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Carnes Co.
2. Cook (Loren) Co.
3. Greenheck Fan Corp.
4. ILG Industries, Inc.
5. Jenn Industries Inc.
6. Trane Co. (The).
7. Twin City Fan & Blower Co.
2.2 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General

1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets
shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with
minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt
spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 23 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified, with
provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed by
the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and shall
have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours.
Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered.
Housings shall be cast iron unless otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check
type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be
provided. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on
the side opposite the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal
maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where
necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel spiral
wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not
acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified materials and
ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by
motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of
sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard
belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40
horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or variable-
sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.

6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave,
high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with cross

section to suit sheave grooves.
2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the factory.
Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each
belt set shall be bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.
2.3 UTILITY SET FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or welded to
scroll sheets.
1. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.
C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel
inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel.

2. Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as scheduled.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
AFBMA 9, L-50 of 200,000 hours.
F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum

blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable
linkage.

4. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.

5. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
6. Drain Connections: DN20 (3/4-inch) threaded coupling drain connection installed at
lowest point of housing.
7. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of housing,

wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and
accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air

upward, with rain and snow drains.
C. Housing: Removable, extruded-aluminum, rectangular top; square, one-piece, aluminum

base with venturi inlet cone.
D. Housing: Removable, galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece, hinged,

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following
features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
G. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to

less than 50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

b. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
c. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
d. Overall Height: 200 mm.
e. Overall Height: 300 mm.

f. Overall Height: 450 mm.
2.5 SMOKE UPBLAST PROPELLER ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of housing,

wheel, butterfly-type discharge damper, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch,
drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced galvanized steel, containing
galvanized steel butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive assembly, and fan
wheel.
C. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced aluminum, containing
aluminum butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive assembly, and fan wheel.
1. Damper Rods: Steel with bronze bearings.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set
pitch angle.
E. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub;

factory set pitch angle.
F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing; weatherproof housing of

same material as fan housing with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball
bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Motor Mount: On outside of fan cabinet, adjustable base for belt tensioning.
G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

2. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
3. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
4. Overall Height: 200 mm.
2.6 IN-LINE VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling, wall, duct, or for concealed
in-line applications.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and
fan wheel shall be removable for service.

D. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle
for motor plug-in.
E. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than
50 percent.
F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, or duct collars, and transition
fittings.
2.7 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide
vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting brackets,
and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes; inlet and
outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to disconnect
located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside
of fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan

outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for units not
connected to ductwork.
2.8 MOTORS

operation.
occupants.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
Seal.
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high smoke temperature of
260 deg. C (500 deg. F) for a minimum of four hours continuous operation.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The
overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
D. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen operation.
Fans shall be UL and cUL listed for grease removal, tested under high temperature exhaust
of 190 deg. C (375 deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance with relevant NFPA
standard. Fan coating shall be as directed by the Engineer. Units shall include the
following:
1. Bolted access door.

2. Drain connection.
3. Aluminum grease trap.
4. Weatherhood.
5. Upblast discharge.
6. Windband discharge cap with gravity damper.
7. Outlet guard where fan discharge is accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Control Controls and Seismic
Restraints."
1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using
neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.

2. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using housed
spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.
3. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.
4. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs, and seismic restraints.
5. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded rods or metal straps, and
neoprene washers.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical

Identification."
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported
unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36),
size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing.
Anchor or key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
connections with flexible connectors.

UL 486B.

electrical connections, and to report results in writing.

3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING

for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilator
units. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout
Procedures]."

SECTION 15854 - CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes, central-station air-handling units including integral components

specified herein.
B. Definitions:
1. Air Handling Unit (AHU): A factory fabricated assembly consisting of fan, coils,
filters, and other necessary equipment to perform one or more of the following
functions of circulating, cleaning, heating, cooling, humidifying, dehumidifying, and
mixing of air. Design capacities of units shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for inertia bases, isolation bases, and
vibration isolation hangers and supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for field-applied equipment insulation.
3. Division 15 Section "Humidifiers" for steam grid and evaporative humidifiers not an
integral part of central-station air-handling units specified in this Section.
4. Division 15 Section "Air Filters" for filters and housings not an integral part of
central-station air-handling units specified in this Section.
5. Division 16 Section "Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers" for field-installed
disconnect switches.
6. Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for field-mounted alternating-current
starters.
7. Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for motor-control centers used for
centralizing or grouping controls in building projects.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. The contractor shall furnish a complete submission for all air handling units covered in the
project. The submission shall include all information listed below. Partial and incomplete
submissions shall be rejected without reviews
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Submittals for AHUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, humidifiers, sound
attenuators, mixing box with outside/return air dampers, filter housings, and all other
related accessories. The contractor shall provide custom drawings showing total air
handling unit assembly including dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates,
CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 15854 - Page 1 of 14

flexible connections, door swings, control penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights,

duplex outlets, switches, wiring, utility connection points, unit support system,
vibration isolators, drain pan, and rigging points. Submittal drawings of section or
component only, will not be acceptable. Contractor shall also submit performance
data including performance test results, charts, curves or certified computer selection
data; data sheets; fabrication and insulation details; and the number of pieces that
each unit will have to be broken into to meet shipping and job site rigging
requirements.
2. Submit Certified fan-sound power ratings, sound power levels in each octave band for
fan and at entrance and discharge of AHUs at both present and future scheduled
conditions. Include sound attenuator capacities and itemized internal component
attenuation. Internal lining of supply air ductwork with sound absorbing material is
not permitted.
3. Provide Certified fan-performance curves showing liters per second (cubic feet per
minute), static pressure, total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for AHU
including total, inlet and discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal losses
and unspecified internal losses, efficiency, and horsepower for both present and
future design point of operation and at maximum of present and future design liters
per second (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent of design static pressure.
4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
6. Material gages and finishes.
7. Filters with performance characteristics.
D. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

E. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between
F. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Submit with
Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
G. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified
requirements. Submit written test procedures two weeks prior to factory testing. Submit
written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
H. Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1 Sections and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Requirements."
A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed,

fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems."
B. ARI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be factory
tested according to the applicable portions of ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling

Units," and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute (ARI).
C. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are
listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
D. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
E. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of central-station air-handling units with

piping and ductwork and with other installations.
F. Non-ARI certified AHUs: If ARI certification is not available for the complete air handling
unit, compliance with the following minimum requirements shall be established for approval
and acceptance.
1. The individual components of the AHU shall be certified by the applicable standards,
that is, ASHRAE, AMCA, ARI, and UL, and shall bear the certification label.
2. All air handling units shall be factory tested prior to shipment, in accordance with
paragraph Test Procedure.
G. Performance Criteria:
1. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at
design liters per second (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated
above.
deviation, a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
Such a deviation shall not qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or
reward.
3. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the
peak of static efficiency.
4. Heating, Cooling, and Air Handling Capacity and Performance Standards: ARI 430,
ARI 410, ASHRAE 51, and AMCA 210.
5. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.
H. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any section of
air handler when unit is operating at design conditions, contractor shall replace or repair unit
to correct the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component accessibility and future
repairability and inherent access for maintenance.
A. Deliver air-handling unit as a factory-assembled module with protective crating and

covering.
B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
base.
B. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
B. Filters: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit.
C. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit fan.
D. Gaskets: Furnish 1 for each sectional joint of each central-station air-handling unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


2. Trane Company (The); Commercial Systems Group.
3. York International Corporation.
2.2 GENERAL
A. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly,
coils, damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, and mixing dampers.
B. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors."
C. The contractor and the AHU manufacturer shall be responsible for insuring that the unit will
not exceed the allocated space shown on the drawings, including required clearances for
service and future overhaul or removal of unit components. All structural, piping, wiring,
and ductwork alterations of units, which are dimensionally different than those specified,
shall be the responsibility of the contractor at no additional cost.
D. AHUs shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance with the
arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be assembled into the largest sections
possible subject to shipping and rigging restrictions. The correct fit of all components and
casing sections shall be verified in the factory for all units prior to shipment. Factory tested
units shall be fully assembled, tested and then split to accommodate shipment and job site
rigging. On units not shipped fully assembled, the manufacturer shall tag each section and
include air flow direction to facilitate assembly at the job site. Lifting lugs or shipping skids
shall be provided for each section to allow for field rigging and final placement of unit.

E. The AHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing, caulking, and all screws,
nuts, and bolts required for assembly. The manufacturer shall provide a local representative
at the job site to supervise the assembly and to assure the units are assembled to meet
manufacturer's recommendations and requirements noted on the drawings. Provide
documentation that this representative has provided this service on similar jobs to the
Contracting Officer. If a local representative cannot be provided, the manufacturer shall
provide a factory representative.
F. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal air tight and retain their
structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly of bolted
panels and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a more
permanent gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.
G. Structural Rigidity: Provide structural reinforcement when required by span or loading so

that the deflection of the assembled structure shall not exceed 1/200 of the span based on a
differential static pressure of 1991 Pa (8 inches water) or 1-1/2 times design static pressure
2.3 CABINET
A. Materials: Formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels, fabricated to allow removal for
access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
1. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.0635 inch (1.61 mm).

2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.0394 inch (1.0 mm).
3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, 0.1382 inch (3.5 mm).
B. Base:
1. Provide a heavy duty steel base for supporting all AHU major components. Bases
shall be constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams, channels, or minimum 152 mm (6
inch) high 3.5 mm (10 gauge) steel base rails. Welded or bolted cross members shall
be provided as required for lateral stability. Contractor shall provide supplemental
steel supports as required to obtain proper operation heights for cooling coil condense
drain trap and steam coil condensate return trap as shown on drawings.
2. AHUs shall be completely self supporting for installation on concrete housekeeping
pad, steel support pedestals, or suspended as shown on drawings.
3. The AHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be cleaned, primed with
a rust inhibiting primer, and finished with a rust inhibiting exterior enamel.
C. Insulation: Coated, glass-fiber insulation, complying with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," for insulation.
1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to
the internal surface of section panels downstream from and including the cooling coil
section.
3. The walls, roof and floor of the AHU shall be insulated. Insulation shall be same
thickness as specified for AHU casing Insulation shall be held securely in position
between the inner and outer skin of casing.
4. Glass fiber insulation shall not be exposed to the air-stream.

D. Floor:
1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support a
minimum of 488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed load
without permanent deformation or crushing of internal insulation. Provide adequate
structural base members beneath floor in service access sections to support typical
service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit floor or internal insulation. Unit
floors in casing sections, which may contain water or condensate, shall be watertight
with drain pan.
2. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing floors
shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/(h. square feet. degree F).
3. Where indicated, furnish and install floor drains, flush with the floor, with nonferrous
grate cover and stub through floor for external connection.
E. Access Panels and Doors: Provide in each access section and where shown on drawings.
Doors shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) thick with same double wall construction as
the unit casing. Doors shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) wide and shall be the full
casing height up to a maximum of 1850 mm (6 feet). Doors shall be gasketed, hinged, and
latched to provide an airtight seal. Each door shall include a minimum 150 mm x 150 mm (6
inch x 6 inch) double thickness reinforced glass or Plexiglas window in a gasketed frame.
1. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and located to
allow periodic maintenance and inspections.
2. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct compression with
no sliding action between the door and gasket. Secure with high quality mastic to
eliminate possibility of gasket slipping or coming loose.
3. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for positive cam
action, operable from either inside or outside. Doors that do not open against unit
operating pressure shall be provided with safety "Vent lock"-style latches, which
allow the door to open approximately 75 mm (3 inches) and then require
approximately 0.785 radian (45 degrees) further movement of the handle for
complete opening. Latch shall be capable of restraining explosive opening of door
with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12 inches water) of differential static
pressure or 1-1/2 times operating differential pressure whichever is greater.
F. Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized steel sheet. Fabricate pans in sizes and shapes
to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return
bends) and humidifiers when units are operating at maximum catalogued face velocity
across cooling coil.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal
moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough to
collect condensate from top coil.
G. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for penetrations through
casing for power and temperature control wiring and pneumatic tubing. Coordinate number
and location with electrical and temperature control subcontractors. Coordinate lights,
switches, and duplex outlets and disconnect switch location and mounting. All penetrations
and equipment mounting may be provided in the factory or in the field under AHU’s
manufacturer supervision. All field penetrations shall be performed neatly by drilling or saw
cutting. No cutting by torches will be allowed. Neatly seal all openings airtight.

2.4 FAN SECTION
A. Fan-Section (Supply And Return) Construction: Belt-driven centrifugal fans, consisting of

housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure, equipped
with formed-steel channel base for integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels.
Mount fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, and motor on structural-steel frame, with frame
mounted on base with vibration isolation.
B. Housings: Fabricate from formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allow entry
to internal parts and components.
C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor power. Fan wheel shall be double-width,
double-inlet type with backward-curved airfoil blades.
1. Airfoil Wheel: Steel; with smooth, curved inlet flange; back plate; die-formed,
hollow, airfoil blades; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
2. Shafts: Hot-rolled steel; turned, ground, and polished, and having keyway to secure
to fan wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball or
roller bearings with the following:
a. Rated Bearing Life: ABMA 9 or ABMA 11, L-50 of 200,000 hours.
4. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
a. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.
5. Pulleys: Cast iron or steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.
6. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch, selected so pitch adjustment is at middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
7. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt drives.
8. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements, 0.1046 inch (2.7 mm)
thick, 3/4-inch (20-mm) diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or
equivalent, prime coated.
a. Provide belt guards for motors mounted on outside of cabinet.
9. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
10. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators, minimum 1-inch
(25-mm) static deflection, with side snubbers.
D. Fan-Section Source Quality Control: The following factory tests are required.
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-
certified sound ratings seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation
speed, and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

E. Fan Power Level: Mean sound pressure level at 1.5 m from fan casing inlet not ducted in
free field conditions is not to exceed 81 dBA, spectrum of sound pressure at 1.5 m from fan
casing is not to exceed the following:
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Octave Pass Band (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
8000
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Sound Pressure (dBA) 51 59 70 76 75 74

72 68
2.1 MOTORS
A. General: Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements.
B. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.
C. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range.
D. Temperature Rating: 80 deg C maximum temperature rise at 46 deg C ambient for

continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation).
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
F. Motor Construction: NEMA MG-1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
G. Bearings: The following features are required:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.

2. Grease lubricated.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or
axial thrust in motor.
H. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:

operation.
occupants.
I. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
J. Noise Rating: Quiet.
K. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled

according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall have a
higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test
Method B.
L. Fan Motor and Drive For Variable Frequency Drive Types: Motors shall be energy efficient
type and suitable for use in variable frequency drive applications on AHUs where this type
of drive is indicated. Where variable frequency drives (VFD) are required they shall be
compatible with fan and motor.

M. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,

construction, and special features.
N. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
2.2 COILS
A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized steel casings for heating and
cooling coils. Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for
maintenance and to assure full airflow through coils.
1. Multizone Units: Provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow across
coils.
B. Coil Construction: Rigidly supported across full face, pitched to allow drainage.
1. Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes.

2. Tubes: Seamless copper.
3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel.
4. Headers for Steam and Water Coils: Steel, cast iron, or copper with connections for
drain valve and air vent, and threaded piping connections.
C. Water Coils: Drainable with threaded plugs, serpentine with return bends in smaller sizes
and with return headers in larger sizes.
D. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils: ASHRAE 15, with the following features:
1. Suction Headers and Distributor Tubes: Seamless copper.

2. Refrigerant Distributor: Design for low pressure drop, for down feed with solder
connections, and with maximum of 12 circuits for each distributor.
E. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed surface coils
for rating according to ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."
F. This section also applies to heat recovery coils as indicated on drawings.
2.3 DAMPERS
A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and
Shutters," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity
through damper and 4-inch wg (1000-Pa) pressure differential.
1. Damper operators shall be electrically operated.
B. Mixing Boxes: Outdoor air and return air dampers in opposed blade arrangement with
damper linkage for automatic operation. Connect operating rods with common linkage and
interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously Dampers shall be of low leak
design with metal compressible bronze jamb seals and extruded vinyl edge seals on all
blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings or bronze bushings. Maximum
damper length shall be 1500 mm (60 inches). Leakage rate shall not exceed 2.5 cubic
meters/min/square meter (8 cfm per square foot) at 250 Pa (1 inch water) and 3.7 cubic
meters/min/square meter (12 cfm per square foot) at 995 Pa (4 inches water) Electronic
operators shall be furnished and mounted in an accessible and easily serviceable location by

the air handling unit manufacturer at the factory. Damper operators shall be of same
manufacturer as controls.
C. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades

mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet.
Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate
simultaneously. Cabinet support members shall hold 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, pleated, flat
permanent or throwaway filters. Provide hinged access panels or doors to allow removal of
filters from both sides of unit.
2.4 FILTER SECTION
A. Air Filters: Refer to Division 15 Section "Air Filters."
B. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Filter Section: Provide filter media holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation,
with access doors on both sides of unit.
D. Permanent Filters: Cleanable, 2 inches (50 mm) thick, with aluminum- or stainless-steel
media and stainless-steel frames, clean airflow resistance of 0.10 inch wg (25 Pa) at face
velocity of 500 fpm (2.54 m/s), and ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80
percent.
E. Extended – surface disposable panel filters: refer to Division 15 Section "Air Filters."
2.5 SOUND ATTENUATORS:
A. AHU sound attenuators shall be factory installed as an integral part of AHU.
2.6 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING
A. Vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style with glass globe and cast aluminum
guard shall be installed in each access section. A switch shall control the lights in each
compartment with pilot light mounted outside the respective compartment access door.
Wiring between switches and lights shall be factory installed. All wiring shall run in neatly
installed electrical conduits and terminate in a junction box for field connection to the
building system. Provide single point 220 volt - one phase connection at junction box.
B. Install compatible 100 watt bulb in each light fixture.
C. Provide a convenience duplex outlet next to the light switch.
D. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted disconnect switch.
Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of central-station air-handling units.
B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, condensate drainage piping, and electrical to

verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's

1. Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete housekeeping bases using housed-spring

isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.
2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and vibration isolation.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service
and maintenance.
A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4
inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.
B. Form concrete bases with framing lumber with form-release compounds. Chamfer top edge
and corners of base.
C. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
D. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement conforming to
ASTM C 150, 4000-psig (27.6-MPa) compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
E. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-
preventive metal primer.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connection piping to air-handling units with flexible connectors.

3. Connect condensate drain pans. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.

Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in
direction.
4. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15
Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff
or balancing valve and union or flange at each connection.
B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connections.
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections.
1. Connect fan motors to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors
and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Division 15 Section
"Control Systems Equipment."
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean
fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

perform the following:
1. Inspect field assembly of components and installation of central-station air-handling

units including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following before startup:

for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify that proper thermal
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system,
align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.

6. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.

7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
8. Install clean filters.
9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
C. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units include the following:
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.
a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air-handling system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.8 TESTING
A. General:
1. ARI certified AHUs: The Engineer will determine the AHUs that shall be factory
assembled and tested prior to shipment. The tested units shall be shipped prior to any
untested units.
2. Non-ARI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in accordance with
specified Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit capacities,
ensure correct fit of all components and minimize field assembly labor.
B. Factory Test:
1. General: The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those methods
specified in Specification Section “TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING”,
however test methods including instruments used must be submitted and approved by
The Engineer prior to initiating testing. The AHUs shall be tested for air volume,
static pressure for AHU and each component, fan RPM and power consumption for
the maximum of present or future design conditions and noise criteria. Submit fan
curves showing test results.
2. Test Procedure (Airflow):
a. Provide straight runs of full size ducts at inlet and discharge of AHU with
lengths equal to 2-1/2 times fan diameter and with volume dampers to adjust
static pressure located at ends. Locate a four-point static pressure sensor 2/3 the
distance down the discharge duct and connected to an inclined manometer to
be used to measure external static pressure.
b. Six static pressure tap sensors shall be located on both entering and leaving
sides of cooling coil and a Meriam micro manometer used to read cooling coil
pressure drop. Unit cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute) may be
determined by dry coil air friction curve.

c. Adjust dampers to compensate for variations in pressure drops due to clean vs.
dirty filters, dry vs. wet cooling coils, and as required to simulate fan design
conditions.
d. Drain connections shall be plugged. Piped connection openings shall be sealed.
e. Correct cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute), static pressure and
watts (horsepower) to standard air conditions of 1.2 kg/cubic meter (0.075 lbs.
per cubic foot) density, 21 oC (70 oF) temperature, and 101 kPa (29.92 in. Hg)
barometric pressure at sea level. Measure supply air wet bulb and dry bulb
temperatures. Obtain barometric pressure readings from local airport.
f. Determine fan motor watts (horsepower) consumption by use of wattmeter,
voltmeter, ammeter and obtaining motor efficiency from manufacturer. Refer
to standard testing and balancing procedure. Determine fan RPM by use of
tachometer.
g. Obtain values for the items in the following formula. (Fan Total Static Pressure
= External Static Pressure + Specified Internal Losses + Unspecified Internal
Losses). Refer to AHU schedule on the drawings for additional information.
C. Approval:
1. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and owner representative. Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with a minimum two-week notice prior to proposed schedule
test.
2. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and
re-testing of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage the services of a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
1. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout."
2. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall
vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-
control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers,
registers, and grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the
ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions
and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show
locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in
ceilings and walls.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 15855 - Page 1 of 6

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard

sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used
for the Work.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,

registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of air-conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are as shown on the drawings.
2.2 WIRE MESH GRILLE
A. Use grilles where shown in unfinished areas, fabricate grille with 2 x 2 mesh 13 mm (1/2
inch) aluminum hardware cloth in a spot welded galvanized steel frame with approximately
40 mm (1-1/2 inch) margin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items
conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that
have damaged finishes.
3.5 DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
A. Linear slot diffusers.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, diffusers that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America.

b. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle & Bailey Div.
c. Titus.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
5. Number and spacing of slots: As shown on drawings.
6. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC30.
7. Face Style: Linear.
8. Mounting: Flush or flanged
9. Dampers: Hit and miss.
10. Accessories: Include the following:
a. Insulated plenum on supply and return diffusers of dimensions as shown on

drawings.
b. Equalizing grid.
c. Operating keys.
d. Black finish blank-offs on dummy diffusers.
e. Alignment pins and end caps.
f. Mitered corners.
B. Linear bar diffuser.


c. Titus.

5. Width: As shown on drawings.
6. Spacing: As shown on drawings.
8. Face Style: Linear bar.
9. Mounting: Flush or flanged.
10. Patterns: Fixed 30º deflection.
a. Mitered corners.
b. Single blade damper.
c. Insulated plenum for supply and return diffuser of dimensions as shown on
drawings.
d. Black finish blank-offs on dummy diffusers.
C. Slot plenum diffuser.

a. Titus.
5. Size: As shown on drawings.
7. Face Style: Linear.
8. Mounting: Flush or flanged.
9. Patterns: Down blow supply/return – horizontal and vertical discharge pattern,
suitable for heating and cooling air distribution.
10. Dampers: Opposed blade.
a. Mitered corners.
b. Insulated plenum for supply and return diffuser of dimensions as shown on
drawings.
c. Black finish blank-offs on dummy diffusers.
D. Supply and return diffuser.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or
approved equal:

c. Titus.
5. Duct Connection: Round or square.
6. Duct Connection Size: As shown on drawings.

7. Face Size: To suit acoustic tile size and to the approval of Engineer.
9. Face Style: Round, square or rectangular as shown on drawings.
10. Perforated face type: Manual adjustment for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way horizontal air
distribution pattern without change of air volume or pressure. Provide equalizing or
control grid and opposed blade over overlapping blade damper.
11. Mounting: Surface mount.
12. Patterns: Adjustable and one way, or 2 way, or 3 way, or 4 way as shown on
drawings.
13. Dampers: Opposed blade.
a. Equalizer deflectors.
b. Extractor.
c. Operating keys.
3.6 REGISTER
A. Supply, return and exhaust register.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, registers that may be

approved equal:

c. Titus.
5. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal for return and exhaust registers.
6. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical for supply registers.
7. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
10. Accessories: Include plaster frame.
3.7 GRILLE
A. Supply and return grille.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, grilles that may be

approved equal:

c. Titus.

5. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal.

6. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical.
7. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
9. Accessories: Include plaster frame.

SECTION 15861 - AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove
particulate matter from air for HVAC applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights; required
clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated
airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories
for each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component
assemblies and attachments.
1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of

components.
2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and
anchorages.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance manuals
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air
filters and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with
equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of testing
and rating air-filter units.
D. Comply with ARI 850.
AIR FILTERS 15861 - Page 1 of 4

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Provide one complete set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters,
provide only prefilters.
2. Provide one container of red oil for inclined manometer filter gage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Air Filters, Electrostatic Air Cleaners, and Filter-Holding Systems:
a. AAF International.
b. Airguard Industries, Inc.
c. Barnebey & Sutcliffe Corp.
d. Columbus Industries, Inc.
e. Continental Air Filter Div.; NiCon Filter Corp.
f. Farr Co.
g. Flanders Filters, Inc.
h. International Air Filter, Inc.
i. Koch Filter Corp.
j. Research Products Corp.
2. Filter Gages:
a. Airguard Industries, Inc.

b. Dwyer Instruments Inc.
2.2 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type, disposable air filters with

holding frames.
B. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.
C. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged,
and with pull and retaining handles.
D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable
for bolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.3 EXTENDED-SURFACE, NONSUPPORTED-MEDIA FILTERS (BAG FILTERS)
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting filters with holding

frames.
B. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by
flexible internal supports under rated-airflow conditions. The filter media shall have an
average efficiency of 80 – 85% on ASHRAE 52.1 – 92 and shall have an average arrestance
of not less than 98% on that standard.
C. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel.
D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable
for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
2.4 FRONT- AND REAR-ACCESS FILTER FRAMES
A. Framing System: Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream (front) or
downstream (rear) filter servicing, cut to size and prepunched for assembly into modules.
Vertically support filters prevent deflection of horizontal members without interfering with
either filter installation or operation.
B. Prefilters: Incorporate a separate track, removable from front or back.
C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters to ensure seal
between gasketed filter elements to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
2.5 SIDE-SERVICE HOUSINGS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, side-service housings, constructed of galvanized steel,

with flanges to connect to duct system.
B. Prefilters: Integral tracks to accommodate 2-inch (50-mm) disposable or washable filters.
C. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive-locking devices. Arrange so

filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door.
D. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of
filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
2.6 FILTER GAGES
A. Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures
on white background, and front recalibration adjustment.
1. Diameter: 4-1/2 inches (115 mm).

2. Diameter: 2 inches (50 mm).
3. Range: 0- to 3.0-inch wg (0 to 750 Pa).
B. Manometer-Type Filter Gage: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum scale,

logarithmic-curve tube gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to read from 0- to 3.0-
inch wg (0 to 750 Pa), and accurate within 3 percent of full scale range.

C. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter
holding frames to substrate.
C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
D. Install filter gage for each filter bank.
E. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure
pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum
in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages.
F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.
G. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
H. Ground equipment: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use

field-assembled components, filter and filter-frame installation, and electrical wiring.
Report results in writing.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and
air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.

SECTION 15900 – BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The BMS sub-contractor shall provide the Building Management System (BMS), shall
implement all features called for in this specification and shall implement the necessary
sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.
B. The Building Management System sub-contractor shall be responsible for the integration of
the BMS with the other low voltage building systems as detailed hereafter in Scope of
Works, drawings and the remainder of specifications.
C. The BMS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical contractor and shall be
a BMS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.17 "BMS installer qualifications".
1.3 RELATED WORKS
A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements"

2. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps”
3. Division 15 Section "Centrifugal Chillers"
4. Division 15 Section "Terminal Units"
5. Division 15 Section "Valves”
6. Division 15 Section "Packaged Booster Pumps”
7. Division 13 Section "Electric Drive Fire Pumps"
8. Division 15 Section "Sewage Pumps" and "Sump Pumps"
9. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Pumps"
10. Division 15 Section "Fans "
11. Division 15 Section "Central Station Air Handling Units"
12. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing"
13. Division 15 Section "Security Systems"
14. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices for Lighting Control"
15. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm System"
16. Division 16 Section "Medium Voltage Switchgear"
17. Division 16 Section "Transformers"
18. Division 16 Section "Uninterruptible Power Supply"
19. Division 16 Section "Main Distribution Boards"
20. Division 16 Section " Motor Control Centers" (includes Variable Speed Drives)
21. Division 16 Section "Diesel Generators"
22. Division 16 Section "Central Battery System".
23. Division 16 Section “SCADA and Communications Equipment”
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15900 - Page 1 of 105

24. Division 13 Section “Clock Control”
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
A/C - Air Conditioning

AGP - Advanced Graphics Processor
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers
BTL - BACNet Testing Laboratory
BIBB - BACNet Interoperability Building Block
BMS - Building Management System
BSI - British Standards Institution
CCP - Communications Control Panel
CCR - Central Command Room
CD-RW - Compact Disk with Read and Write capability
CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
CPU - Central Processing Unit
CCR - Central Control Room
CUC - Central Utilities Complex
DAT - Digital Audio Tape
DCP - Distributed Control Panel
DDC - Direct Digital Control
DDR - Double Data Rate
ELV - Extra Low Voltage
EP - Electric-to-Pneumatic
FAS - Fire Alarm System
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FMS - Facility Management System
HHWT - Hand Held Wireless Terminal
HMI - Human Machine Interface
HVAC - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
IBSS - Integrated Building Security Systems
ICT - Information and Communication Technology
IDE - Integrated Drive Electronics (hard disk)
IEE - Institute of Electrical Engineers
ISO - International Standards Organisation
ID - IDentification
I/O - Input/Output
ISA - Instrument Society of America (now International Society
for Measurement and Control)
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode
LIT - Level Indicating Transmitters
LON - Local Operating Network
LSF - Low Smoke and Fire
MATV - Master Antenna Television
MCC - Motor Control Centre
N2 - Johnson Controls terminology for a proprietary
communications network
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NPT - National Pipe Taper (pipe thread specification)
ODBC - Open Data Base Connectivity

OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer

OIW - Operator Interface Workstation
OLE - Object Linking and Embedding
OPC - OLE for Process Control
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
PABX - Private Automatic Branch eXchange
PC - Personal Computer
PCI - Peripheral Component Interconnect
PE - Pneumatic-to-Electric
PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PDA - Personal Digital Assistant
PIM - Process Interface Module
PIT - Pressure Indicating Transmitter
POT - Portable Operator Terminal
PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon)
PT - Pressure Transmitter
RAID - Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks
RAM - Random Access Memory
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference
RH - Relative Humidity
RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
SAMA - Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SCBA- Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCPT - Standard Configuration Property Type
SCSI - Small Computer System Interface
SMS - Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging)
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
SNVT- Standard Network Variable Type
SOAP - Simple Object Access Protocol
SQL - Structured Query Language
SSPC - Standing Standard Project Committee
SVGA - Super Video Graphics Adapter
TDS - Technical Data Sheets
TIT - Temperature Indicating Transmitter
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UC - Unitary Controller
UCPT - User-defined Configuration Property Type
UNVT - User-defined Network Variable Type
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAV - Variable Air Volume
VDU - Video Display Unit
VFC - Volt Free Contacts
VPN - Virtual Private Network
VSD - Variable Speed Drive
WAN - Wide Area Network
XIF - eXternal Interface File
XML - eXtensible Mark-up Language
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem.
B. Analogue: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity, etc.).

C. BACNet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol communication
standard developed by ASHRAE (ASHRAE SSPC/135) and which is now an ISO and
ANSI standard. BACNet can operate over multi media including Ethernet, ArcNet and
MSTP. The BACNet components shall be fully compliant with British standards DD ENV
1805-1:1998 (Data communication for HVAC Application Management Net. Building
automation and control networking), DD ENV 13321-1:1999 (Data communication for
HVAC application automation net. BACNet, Profibus, World FIP), ASHRAE BACNet
standard SSPC/135 and all other applicable codes.
D. BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated properties such as a
temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current value, maximum and
minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.
E. BACnet Conformance: A description of the capabilities of a device for communicating

information to other BACnet devices. It is usually a set of requirements to be met in order
for a device to conform to BACnet standards. There are 6 levels of conformance for
standard BACnet objects and services. The higher the conformance class the more features
that are covered. The BACnet devices furnished under this sub-contract shall, at minimum,
be conformance class 4.
F. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): A BIBB defines a small portion of

BACnet functionality needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs come in pairs, A and B,
which reflect the client/server nature. The A BIBB represents the client, i.e. the device
requesting information or commanding an action. The B BIBB represents the server, i.e. the
device furnishing the information or executing the command. For 2 devices to be
interoperable the A BIBB and the BBIBB must be the same.
G. BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol communication
standard which complies with Annex J to the ASHRAE SSPC/135 standard.
H. Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON” condition and an
"OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
I. BMS: This shall mean the complete Building Management System including the
components at the Field, Automation and Management Levels.
J. Component: Any individual element of the BMS furnished under this sub-contract including
hardware, software and materials.
K. Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install complete HVAC
control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks, sensors, PE and EP switches,
and like devices. This also includes all wiring from node to node, and nodes to all sensors
and points defined in the I/O summary shown on drawings or specified herein, and required
to execute the sequence of operation. Does not include line voltage power wiring.
L. Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate system and
component malfunctions.
M. Direct Digital Control (DDC) involves the connection of microprocessor-based controllers

to field level sensors and actuators. The signals received from field level instrumentation
are converted from analogue to digital format so that the data can be used in software logic.
Control signals are determined by software logic and they are converted from digital to
analogue format so that the final control elements can be adjusted.

N. Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized and

independent of a central computer.
O. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor, complete with
every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.
P. Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate input data
from one communications protocol to output data in a second communications protocol.
Q. Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the operator to

manage, command, monitor, and program the system.
R. Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer between two devices
based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standards based gateway.
S. Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of different types
to share information with each other without losing any of their independent functional
capabilities and without the need for complex programming.
T. LonMark Interoperability Association: Standards committee consisting of numerous

independent product developers and systems integrators dedicated to determining and
maintaining the interoperability guidelines for the LONWORKS® industry.
U. LonMarked: Device has been certified for compliance with LonMark standards by the
LonMark association.
V. LonTalk: Open/standard communication protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation.
W. LonWorks: The overall communications technology for control systems developed by

Echelon Corporation. The technology employs routers, gateways, bridges, and multimedia
transceivers to permit topology and media-independent control solutions. Refer to standard
ANSI/EIA - 709.1
X. Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the BMS controllers
and workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not require a gateway for
protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected on a peer-to-peer network
using one of the approved LAN technologies such as Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP, LonTalk
or BACnet/IP.
Y. Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a communication
bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all control units. Additionally,
a network provides central monitoring and control of the entire system from any distributed
control unit location.
Z. Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer programs and
which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting, compilation,
storage assignment, data management, and related services.
AA. Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW consists of a high-level processing
personal computer and peripheral I/O devices that enable access to the PC and to the entire
Management Level Network.
BB. Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that operate on the
same communications level of a network, without intervention from any intermediary
devices such as a host or server.

CC. Peripheral I/O: Input/Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the
computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals include
VDU, printers, hard drives, disk drives, and modems, etc.
DD. Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate network
management, node commissioning, diagnostics, and general operator interface with the
BMS.
EE. Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in application.
An application creation software tool is required for an application to be created and
downloaded to the device.
FF. Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of “furnish”.
GG. Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-net or
domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on node address
and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links between power line,
twisted pair, fibre, coax, and RF media are sometimes referred to as Routers.
HH. Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT): LonWorks controllers use SNVTs to define data
objects. Each SNVT is identified by a code number that the receiving controller can use to
determine how to interpret the information presented.
II. Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a technical
committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard.
JJ. Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are
intangible rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs
executed by the computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the computer
systems and encompasses any programs such as operating systems, applications programs,
operating sequences and databases. The term "software" shall be interpreted to include
firmware if, in the context in which it is used, the term "software" does not exclude the use
of read-only memory and the use of firmware meets all of the applicable criteria detailed in
these specifications.
KK. Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to client
workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has the ability to
process information but data storage, applications and administrative functions reside on the
terminal server. The applications run on the server and screen updates are sent from the
server to the client. The thin client workstation displays the screen updates and sends
operator entered requests/commands via the keyboard and mouse back to the server for
execution.
LL. Unitary Controller: A controller generally designed for a specific application and for a
single piece of equipment. They are generally of two types: application specific and
“freely” programmable. The “freely” programmable unitary controllers shall be provided
for this project.
MM. Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and other
technologies to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.
NN. XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.

OO. XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-up
Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange information over
HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web Service.
PP. The above definitions shall apply to the words:
1) When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when they are
capitalized.
2) In the singular and in the plural.
3) In all grammatical tenses.
1.6 BMS SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. The following is a description of the BMS architecture. This description is not intended to
indicate the number of components and neither is it intended to be the only acceptable BMS
configuration. The description of the system architecture is provided to illustrate the
relationship between the various components. Different BMS Specialists may have a
slightly different topology that generally will be acceptable provided that it meets the intent
of these specifications. For the purpose of describing the BMS system architecture it is
divided into 3 levels:
1) BMS Management level

2) BMS Automation Level
3) Field Level
B. The Management Level
1) The Building Management Level shall provide a means of interoperable

communication between the Extra Low Voltage (ELV) Building Systems using
BACnet/IP. This LAN is hereafter referred to as the Building Management Level
Network. This Network shall provide a means by which the ELV building systems
can exchange data in the form of BACnet objects.
2) The Management Level Network shall be BACnet/IP over Ethernet and shall be such
that an operator with the required access level shall be able to undertake monitoring
and control functions for any of the integrated ELV building systems from any
workstation that communicates with the terminal servers residing at the Site
Management Level.
3) It shall be the responsibility of each ELV building system sub-contractor, to ensure
that all the system data is available at the Management Level Network in the form of
BACnet objects. Each ELV building system sub-contractor shall provide
comprehensive and complete documentation regarding the BACnet object ID,
component IP addresses, databases and other pertinent information. The intent is that
any third party system provider shall be able to read this data from the network and
shall be able to write data in BACnet format to the third party system.
4) The BMS Specialist shall provide comprehensive and complete documentation
regarding the BACnet object ID, component IP addresses, databases and other
pertinent information.
5) All Servers, Operator Interface Workstations (OIW), Operating Systems and related
applications shall reside on the management level.
6) The transceiver hubs for the wireless hand held terminals shall be part of the
Management Level

7) The Communications Controls Panels (CCP) shall be part of the Management Level
Network.
8) As an exception, certain of the CCP shall be at the Automation Level rather than the
Management Level. If a third party system provides monitoring and control for
equipment that is also monitored and controlled by a BMS DDC controller (such as
chillers for example), then the gateway between the third party system and the BMS
shall be at the Automation Level.
a. The third party ELV Building System Specialist shall provide the interface /
gateway, and shall connect the gateway to the data port at the third party
Building System and shall provide complete documentation to the BMS
Specialist.
b. The gateway shall be a BACnet to third party protocol gateway.
c. The BMS Specialist shall connect the gateway to the BMS Automation Level
Network and shall map the BACnet object to the associated DDC controllers.
d. The BMS Specialist shall provide the third party Specialist with the BACnet
objects for information that is to be transferred from the BMS Automation
Level Network to the third party system controller together with other relevant
information.
e. The third party Specialist shall map the points into the third party system
controller.
f. The BMS Specialist shall map the BACnet object IDs of the third party system
points into the servers. These points shall be treated in exactly the same
manner as any points monitored/controlled by the BMS control panels directly.
1) All Management Level components shall be on UPS.
C. The Automation Level
1) The automation level shall, primarily, include the DDC controllers that interface with
the field sensors and final control elements. It is anticipated that there will be 2 types
of DDC controllers within the BMS architecture:
a. Distributed Control panels (DCP).

b. Unitary Controllers (UC).
1) All Automation Level components shall be on UPS except the unitary

controllers.
2) The BMS Automation Level Networks shall be BACnet throughout or
LonWorks throughout. No other protocols shall be used at the BMS
Automation Level.
D. The Field Level
1) The Field Level shall include the instrumentation interfaced to the Automation Level
DDC controllers such as the temperature, humidity, level, pressure sensors and
switches etc.
2) It shall also include the final control elements such as the valve and damper actuators
and the control relays.
3) All field level cables shall be in containment and shall be screened and LSF rated.
4) The control and monitoring signals between the Automation Level controllers and the
Field Level components shall be via industry standard analogue ranges, except where

detailed below, such as 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA, switched 0 and 5V, switched 0
and 10V, etc.
1.7 SCOPE OF WORKS (SPECIFIER TO EDIT AS APPLICABLE)
A. Provide a complete BMS turnkey installation as detailed in the sections of this specification.
The BMS shall comprise at minimum, the following components:
1. Terminal Servers (X) No.

2. Data Servers (X) No.
3. Network Data Servers (X) No.
4. Web Server (X) No.
5. Operator Interface Workstations (X) No.
6. Remote Operator Workstations (X) No.
7. Portable Operator Terminals (POT) (X) No.
8. Hand Held Terminals (HHT) (X) No.
9. Rear Projection Monitor (X) No.
10. Local Area Networks (LAN)
11. Communication Control Panels (CCP)
12. Distributed Control Panels (DCP)
13. Unitary Controllers (UC)
14. Enclosure Panels (EP)
15. Field Instrumentation including intelligent sensors
16. Automatic Valves
17. Actuators for automatic valves and dampers.
18. Routers, Hubs, Switches, gateways, software as well as all other accessories or
equipment necessary to implement the required interfaces with third party systems.
19. Software as detailed herein
20. Low Voltage Cables (Less than 220V)
21. All power supplies, interlocking and control relays, and other components as well as
material and services required for a complete and fully operational turnkey BMS
installation in line with the specifications.
B. Map the BACnet objects into the servers, and present data for the third party ELV Building
Systems that are integrated at the BMS Automation Level.
C. The BMS shall meet the following general criteria:
1) Computer based.
2) Fully networked.
3) Real time.
4) Distributed processing.
5) No single point of failure.
D. All components of the BMS at the BMS Management level and at the BMS Automation
Level, except for the unitary controllers, shall operate on UPS. The UPS shall be provided
by the BMS Specialist.
E. The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the BMS
manufacturer that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any components
that become available before the on-site commencement of installation then these shall be
offered by the BMS Specialist to the Employer at no additional cost to the Employer. The
Employer shall have the option to accept or decline the offer. The components offered shall

have been in successful operation in at least 2 similar applications for a minimum of 12

months.
F. The BMS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the legal operation of
the BMS.
G. Provide adequate earthing on all equipment to prevent the build-up of electromagnetic

voltage potentials. Provide screening of panels, enclosures, devices, or components that
emit interferences. All monitoring and control and communication cables shall be screened
with one end earthed.
H. Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-contract:
1. Warranty and service during the defects liability period.

2. Submittals, samples and record documentation.
3. Comprehensive commissioning and testing.
4. Detailed theoretical and practical training services for the Supervisors and Operators.
5. Coordination with other site Specialists.
6. Reporting to the Employer and Engineer for the coordinated and timely execution of
the Work
7. Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation and method statement
for third party systems. The BMS Specialist shall provide separate interoperability
documentation at the end of execution of the project, which shall detail integrating
BACnet objects, controllers or gateways from any manufacture, connecting all the
hardware of the proposed system to another BACnet system server or link all the data
in the proposed BMS to another system with all their attributes. This document shall
also include the BACnet Object ID of all the objects captured or generated by the
system, database documentation, querying methods and full documentation to read
and write BACnet data with another system.
1.8 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The BMS Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the work of all other
trades on the project.
B. Any task related to the BMS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified in this
document as being the responsibility of another trade shell be the responsibility of the BMS
Contractor.
1.9 BMS EXPANSION
A. The BMS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent additional hardware

(field) points without adding controllers or I/O Point Interface Modules (PIM). The number
and type of the installed spare points shall be uniformly distributed between the installed
controllers.
B. Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of new sub
networks and associated routers, gateways, etc.
C. Each BMS as installed shall be expandable, at minimum, to incorporate the following in

addition to the above:

1) A minimum of 200 percent additional hardware (field) points with the addition of
CCP, DCP and UC.
2) A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to those required
to meet these specifications.
3) A minimum of X No. additional Operator Interface Workstations.
4) A minimum of X No. additional interfaces to low voltage building systems of a
similar nature to those integrated under this contract.
D. Subsequent to the potential expansion detailed above:
1) The BMS performance shall not be degraded in any manner and shall meet all
performance criteria detailed in these specifications.
2) Equipment installed under this sub-contract shall not become redundant as a result of
implementing these BMS expansion requirements.
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepare an itemized listing of all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal
data for the Project including all required submissions identified throughout the Contract
Documents. The itemized listing shall include a shop drawing sheet number or equipment
documentation submittal number, reference to the specific Specification section and
description of the shop drawing or equipment documentation submittal item. Submit the
itemized listing within two (2) weeks after commencing work.
B. Prepare all shop drawings, diagrams, equipment and device schedules, equipment technical
data sheets and software information necessary to ensure compliance with the
Specifications. Submit all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal data for
the work within 1 months of receiving the notice to proceed except the cable and
containment shop drawings detailed below which shall be submitted within 15 days of the
notice to proceed.
C. The following information shall be included on the cover page for each shop drawing and
equipment documentation submittal:
1) Project name.
2) Date.
3) Submittal number and re-submittal (revision) number as appropriate.
4) Name and address of Engineer.
5) Name and address of Employer.
6) Name and address of BMS contractor.
7) Name and address of supplier or vendor if appropriate.
8) Name of manufacturer.
9) Reference to the applicable Specification Section by name and number.
10) Stamped and signed coordination certification stamp.
D. Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, minimum A1 plot size. Drawings shall include
diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures, equipment details and software
descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the shop drawings
shall include:
1) BMS topology schematic.

2) Installation drawings and schedules.
3) DCP, UC and other panel layouts, including floor plan location and interconnection
drawings.

4) Field instrumentation locations on floor plan drawings.

5) Schematic of systems indicating instrumentation locations.
6) Installation details.
7) Schedule of cabling including details of proposed cable types.
8) Composite drawings of all motor starter terminal strips and damper terminal strips
indicating all existing and new wiring by all contractors on the motor terminal strip.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment submittals shall include design, performance and installation details for all
aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the equipment documentation submittals
shall include:
1) Equipment technical data sheets with mounting and installation details.

2) Central monitoring and control equipment details.
3) Operator terminal specifications and data sheets.
4) Software specifications and descriptions including operating sequences.
5) Field sensor and instrumentation specification sheets.
6) Dampers, damper actuators and Damper Interface Unit (DIU) drawings.
7) Valves and valve actuator specification sheets and valve schedules.
8) Details of PID and other appropriate control algorithms.
9) Proposed VDU schematics.
B. The BMS contractor shall not implement Operating sequences until the Engineer has given
approval. The BMS contractor shall make any changes to the operating sequences as
requested at the shop drawing stage and as requested by the Engineer following their
implementation up to the issue of the Certificate of Substantial Completion at no additional
cost to the Employer.
C. All literature pertaining to a particular item, piece of equipment or installation shall be

submitted at one time and shall be specifically prepared for this project. General sales
information brochures shall not be acceptable. Each equipment documentation submittal
shall be properly marked with service or function, any options available that are not to be
provided shall be crossed out or options that will be provided shall be highlighted.
D. Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from the specifications
will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the specification requirements shall
be rejected. Before equipment, devices and materials are installed, they shall have
submittals that are stamped by the Engineer “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”.
Submittals stamped “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shall not relieve the contractor
from the requirements to comply with the complete requirements of the Specifications.
Corrections or modifications to the work because of errors and/or omissions shall be at the
contractor’s expense.
E. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor prior to
submission to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a rubber stamp that
states: "I hereby certify that the equipment shown on this shop drawing, product data and or
sample, complies in all respects with the requirements of the Specifications for this Project.
I further certify that all data shown hereon as to performance, dimensions, construction,
materials and other pertinent items is true and correct."
(Name of the BMS Contractor)
Signed:

Position:
Date:
1.12 WARRANTY AND SERVICES DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
A. The warranty period for all components of the BMS and their installation shall be 2 years
following the date of completion of the project.
B. Any material furnished by the BMS contractor which is defective or fails during normal
operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired) immediately by the BMS
Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the period prior to the issue of the
certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.
C. Repair work shall only be undertaken at times approved by the Employer.
D. Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period. The
cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period shall be provided
separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.
E. Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer placing a system
trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component, non-functioning
controller, etc.).
F. Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be within 24 hours for
items not requiring immediate attention.
G. Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the BMS system or component failure shall
begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
Employer.
H. Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard product offerings
from the BMS Specialist and/or BMS equipment vendors during the Defects Liability
Period shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together with the cost and, if the
Employer wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any time during the Defects Liability
Period, software patches that correct software errors become available the Employer shall be
notified immediately and they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
1.13 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE DURING THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

(OPTIONAL PRICE)
A. Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the initial warranty
period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base tender pricing. The
maintenance services shall cover routine preventative maintenance and shall not include
emergency maintenance or the cost of materials that are to be covered by the warranty.
B. Schedule maintenance and repair works with the employer’s representative to prevent
interference with normal building activities.
C. During routine maintenance components of the BMS shall be selectively inspected and
serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum, preventative service
inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period. Perform, at
minimum, the following during each preventative service inspection:

1. Verify the proper operation of the workstations including:
a. Cooling fans
b. Power supplies
c. PC diagnostics
2. Clean housings, keyboard, etc. Change or clean filters.

3. Verify proper operation of each digital controller and network. Clean enclosures.
4. Verify the satisfactory operation of at least 25 percent of each type of field device
including valves and dampers. All field devices shall be checked at least once during
the initial Defects Liability Period and shall be calibrated and adjusted as necessary.
5. Provide a comprehensive written report to the Employer indicating the results of each
inspection and all repairs and adjustments made.
6. Perform complete backup of all software.
D. The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall include 20 hours
per year of programming changes to the BMS as requested by the Employer.
E. Update as-built documentation, submitted at the time of taking-over of the Works as

necessary to reflect any changes that may have been introduced during the Defects Liability
Period.
F. Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period in the tender submittal.
G. The BMS Specialist shall maintain an inventory of common components in the local office
for the replacement of failed components as detailed under “Spare Parts”.
H. Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the following
components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of
replacement components will be provided within the specified time periods.
BMS Component Delivery Time
Workstation Computer Equipment:
1. a. Server computer components. Five (5) days
b. Operator Workstations and components. Five (5) days
c. Primary and secondary BMS One (1) day

communication LAN components including
any hubs, network interface cards, bridges,
routers, protocol converters, termination
plugs, etc.
2. DCP including any required input/output point Two (2) days
interface modules.
3. Unitary controllers including any input/output Two (2) days
point interface modules.
4. Temperature sensors. One (1) days

5. Any other items of instrumentation. Two (2) days
I. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare DCP, CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the
Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over DCP, CCP and UC of each type
to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed DCP,
CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract.
J. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the Employer,
which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of each type
installed on Site under this contract.
1.14 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AFTER THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (OPTIONAL

PRICE)
A. Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the maintenance during
that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance service contract shall be an
all-inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves the right to obtain parts from
alternative sources.
B. The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as those detailed in
Part 1.10 "making good defects during the defects liability period" and part 1.11 "routine
maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".
C. The BMS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer to provide the
maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The Employer shall have the
option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The BMS Specialist shall submit the
cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the following ways:
1. A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor and parts,
OR
2. A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out
between labor and parts for the first year and:
a. A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor portion of the cost
would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years
b. And a percent value or a table of percent values that the parts portion of the
cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years, Or
3. A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out
between labor and parts for the first year with the annual increase for labor and parts
over the succeeding nine (9) years based on the annual percent increase in a cost of
living index from one year to the next, the cost of living index to be used is to be
specified by the BMS Specialist in the tender submittal.
D. If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that correct
software errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall
be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
E. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare DCP, CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the

Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over DCP, CCP and UC of each type
to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed DCP,
CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract.
F. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the Employer,
which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of each type
installed on Site under this contract.
1.15 CODES, PERMITS AND APPROVAL
A. Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and certificates shall be
made available to the Employer.
B. The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other authorities having
jurisdiction shall be met.
C. Work shall be performed in compliance with Employer's insurance underwriters'

requirements.
D. All electrical equipment, devices and components and their installation shall comply with
the latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671:1992 Requirements for electrical
installations) and all associated addenda
E. All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to BS 60529 such that live components
cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to BS
60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to BS 60529 unless specifically
noted otherwise within these documents.
F. The BMS Specialist shall only offer equipment that meets UL 916 requirements and all
electrical components shall be UL listed and shall carry the UL label.
G. The BMS shall be listed and manufactured to ISO 9001 and ISO 9002.
H. All work shall conform to the requirements detailed in the electrical specifications. Where
there is any conflict between the requirements of the different project trade sub-contract
documents, statutes, codes, regulations, local ordinances and any requirement of an agency
having jurisdiction over the project, the most stringent requirement shall apply unless
determined otherwise by the Employer. Advise the Engineer of any discrepancy or conflicts
between the various requirements for the project.
I. Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance requirements of the
specifications when exposed to the following interferences:
1) Project lighting, telephone and elevator equipment.

2) VHF and UHF signals as generated by external or internal portable or fixed
transmitters.
3) AM signals as generated from transmitters.
4) Electrical noise on the building power system, both spurious and harmonics.
5) The installations shall not radiate signals that cause interference to the correct
operation of the Employer’s on-site equipment.

6) The BMS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and components shall
comply with the requirements of BS EN 50081-1 (General Emission Standard) and
BS EN 50082-1 and 2 (General Immunity Standard), the requirements of the Federal
Communication Commission rules and regulations Part 15, sub part J and all other
applicable codes and statutes with respect to the radiation and conduction of radio
frequency interference.
1.16 SCHEDULE
A. Complete all requirements of the BMS sub-contract in accordance with the project program
and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.
B. Attend project meetings as requested by the Engineer.
C. Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work, durations of individual
tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and detail any interface that
must be coordinated with any other Specialists.
D. Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable to the
Engineer. An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.
E. Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing or work
overtime as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere with other
on-site Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule. Confirm, prior to
tender submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services proposed are available
and will be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project Schedule.
F. Provide written Request For Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer when specific
information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request For Information
notices shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the information.

1.17 BMS INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. The BMS specialist shall:
1) Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of trained personnel
capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency maintenance on
the BMS, all components and software/firmware and all other elements of the BMS.
2) Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of equivalent
systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years in the project area.
3) Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the total BMS that shall
be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours, 7 days a week.
4) Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to, supplies of essential
expendable parts.
5) Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance personnel as per the
Employer’s requirements.
1.18 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety Commission and with
all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.
1.19 UNIT PRICES
A. The BMS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete BMS. In addition, the BMS
specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment installed under the contract in
sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the contract to be priced by the
employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL – GENERAL
A. When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the term "equal and
approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer will be allowed, but
the substituted product must conform to all specified requirements. The Engineer’s
determination on the acceptability of substitutes shall be final. Approved substituted
equipment shall conform to available space requirements. Substituted equipment that does
not conform to the available space requirements shall be replaced or required modifications
shall be made at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All components of one
type shall be products of one manufacturer (temperature sensors, dampers, etc.).
C. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available that does
not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as determined by the Engineer, a
written application shall be made by the BMS Specialist to the Engineer providing all
relevant details concerning a proposed product or material that contains hazardous material
prior to installation.

D. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to Substantial
Completion, the BMS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and materials installed,
and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB).
2.2 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION
A. The BMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all components
proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:
1) Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall not be affected
when the building electrical distribution system experiences disturbances of the type
and magnitude normally encountered in buildings of this nature.
2) An independent testing laboratory has verified that the VAV terminal unit unitary
controller meets the performance requirements detailed in these specifications. If so
required by the Employer, the testing laboratory shall test a project VAV terminal
unit complete with the BMS unitary controller and the BMS Specialist shall
demonstrate that the VAV terminal unit UC can meet all of the requirements for
monitoring and control accuracy and can undertake all of the sequences of operation
associated with the VAV as detailed in these specifications. The independent testing
laboratory test report is to be submitted with the shop drawings.
3) Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage showed that all
components operated satisfactorily when the voltage dropped to 75% or less of the
nominal mains voltage and normal operation resumed when the voltage returned to
less than 85% of the nominal mains voltage. Following these brownout conditions
the components were free of any stress and/or damage, operated as normal and no
data at the PC, CCP, DCP and/or UC was lost or corrupted.
B. The BMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all components are
free of date related problems and that the BMS complies with all aspects of British
Standards Institution standard BSI DISC PD2000-1.
2.3 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior applications that shall be
capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at minimum, the following ambient
conditions:
1) 5 Deg. C. (41 Deg. F.) to 55 Deg. C. (131 Deg. F.) temperature.

2) 10-95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).
3) Electrical power service of single phase 220 Vac, 50 Hz nominal with tolerances in
compliance with the applicable statutes, codes and regulations.
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of the contract
Documents
B. Accept products on site and verify damage.
C. Protect products from construction operations, dust, and debris by storing in conditioned
space.

2.5 SPARE PARTS
A. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a
complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as
EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the sub-contract
B. Submit a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient

operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing shall not
relieve the Specialist of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.
2.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide special hardware and software tools required for maintenance.
B. Provide two of each plug in circuit board.
C. Provide 5000 sheets of continuous form paper.
2.7 LABELLING
A. Provide labelling for all DDC controllers, gateways, routers, hubs, field level components,
etc, panels and enclosures. Labelling shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or enclosure with rivets or
permanent adhesive.
2) Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background colour.
3) Consistent throughout the project.
4) Indicated on the record documentation.
B. Provide labelling of all cabling and containment. Labelling shall meet, at minimum, the
1) Identified with permanent tag or self-adhesive label within the panel.

2) Cross referenced on the associated record documentation and laminated record
drawing within the panel enclosure.
3) The BMS Specialist shall provide labelling for all cable furnished and installed by the
ICT Specialist for the use of the BMS Specialist.
2.8 WARNING NOTICE
A. Provide warning notices at all equipment controlled by the BMS and at all associated motor
starters and MCC panels where notices of a similar manner have not been provided by other
trades. Warning labels shall be installed, at minimum, at the following locations:
1) AHU access doors.

2) AHU motor starter and VSD controllers.
3) Pump motors.
4) Pump motor starter and VSD controllers.
5) Fan enclosure or access panel.
6) Fan motor starter and VSD controllers.

7) Chiller control panel.

8) Chiller disconnect/power panel.
9) Cooling tower access ladders.
10) Cooling tower MCC.
11) All other equipment and installations that are monitored and/or controlled by the
BMS.
B. The warning notices shall be 75 mm by 125 mm (3in. by 5in.) minimum, with yellow
background and with black lettering. The notices shall state the following:
THIS EQUIPMENT IS UNDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY START OR

STOP AT ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING.
C. The warning notices shall be securely attached to the equipment at a location approved by
the Engineer and shall be highly visible. Submit a sample with shop drawings.
2.9 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the BMS except where it is specifically
identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be furnished by another
trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be lockable with the same
key.
2) Ventilated to prevent excessive heat build-up, where required.
3) Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain relief.
4) Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for diagnostics,
maintenance, removal or replacement.
5) Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for which it is to be
installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to BS 60529 and exterior
enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to BS 60529 unless specifically noted
otherwise within these sub-contract documents.
6) Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of BMS
controllers.
B. Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the drawings and at Engineer
approved locations.
C. The BMS Specialist shall not furnish MCC panels, motor starters, variable speed controllers
and local disconnect switches. The trade furnishing the motor starters and variable speed
drives shall provide an interface terminal strip in a dedicated enclosure which may be a
separate external enclosure or may be a compartment within the motor starter enclosure.
Refer to the sub-contract documents for the trade furnishing the motor starter and the
variable speed controllers for the details of the enclosures. The DDC controllers shall not be
located in the MCC panels
2.10 CONDUIT, TRUNKING AND FITTINGS
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide containment and cables as necessary for a fully
functioning system as detailed in these specifications.

B. Flexible metallic rustproof conduit shall be provided for the final one (1) metre before
connection from a non-vibrating location to equipment subject to vibration or movement.
Flexible metallic conduit shall be provided for between the last 300mm and the last
1000mm of connection to field instrumentation, relays and final control elements as
necessary to facilitate the removal of devices without the disconnection or the bending of
the non-flexible conduit. Watertight conduit to be provided where appropriate.
C. Conduit and trunking shall be securely mounted in accordance with IEE Regulations and
shall be concealed in all areas to which the public have access.
D. Conduit and trunking shall run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines and shall be
installed in a workmanlike manner. Avoid obstructions and crossovers where possible.
E. Conduit/trunking shall be installed such that any condensation in the conduit cannot run into
BMS equipment. Where necessary conduit shall enter enclosures from the bottom or shall
be sloped up to the enclosure.
F. Junction and pull boxes shall be securely fastened to the conduit, shall be accessible, and
shall be provided where required by code and where necessary to facilitate the pulling of
cables.
G. Coordinate installation of conduit/trunking with building structure and other trades.

Conduit/trunking installation above accessible ceilings shall be such that there will be no
interference with the installation of lighting fixtures, fire protection devices, air distribution
devices or any other devices.
H. The BMS Specialist shall colour code all conduit/trunking at least every 3,000 mm (10 feet)
along the conduit with a blue and green band at least 50mm wide and colour code every
junction box in a bright yellow
I. Containment shall be provided for all BMS cable except where specifically noted otherwise.
J. BMS monitoring and control cable shall not share conduit with cable carrying voltages in
excess of 48 volts and shall be partitioned from higher voltage cable in trunking.
K. LAN cable shall not share conduit with any other cable or shall be in a dedicated partitioned
compartment in trunking.
L. When cable for digital outputs is installed in conduit it shall be in dedicated conduit and
when installed in trunking shall be partitioned from other cable.
M. All trunking, conduit and accessories shall comply with all applicable codes and standards.
2.11 CABLE - COPPER
A. Provide all cables for the BMS Automation and Field Levels and cable to interconnect the
BMS Management level devices and the BMS Management level Network as detailed in
these specifications. Cable shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Minimum 98% conductivity copper.

2) Stranded conductors.

3) Proper impedance for the application as recommended by the BMS component

manufacturer.
4) Monitoring and control cable shall be screened #18 AWG (0.82sq.mm) or larger
dependent on the application.
5) LAN cable shall be screened #24 AWG (0.82sq.mm.) CAT 5e, CAT 6, CAT 7 or
twisted pair as identified elsewhere in these documents.
6) All monitoring and control cable shall be screened with the screen earthed at the
CCP, DCP, UC or control panel end only so as to avoid earth loops.
7) Continuous runs without splices.
8) Identification of each end at the termination point. Identification should be indicated
on and correspond to the record drawings.
9) All cabling installed without conduit shall be suitably rated for the application and the
cable jacket shall be clearly marked. Use unique colour schemes for easy
identification and prevention of inadvertent splicing of cabling. If there is no conflict
with existing colour schemes, the colour for exposed cable shall be purple.
B. Power wiring shall be sized in accordance with the applicable codes and shall be a minimum
of 1.5 sq.mm stranded copper. The BMS Specialist shall provide all power cable and
containment and shall terminate the power cable at a power outlet close to the component to
be powered and shall provide the power outlet. The MEP Specialist shall terminate the
power cable at the MCC/distribution board as applicable.
C. Cable for all applications shall be rated for LSF and low halogen.
D. Terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Twist type wire nuts shall not
be acceptable. Insulated tinned copper lugs shall be provided.
E. Cable within panels or enclosures shall be installed in wiring guides.
F. LSF cable not required to be in conduit (refer to requirements for conduit above) shall be
routed parallel and perpendicular with the building column lines. Provide cable rings and
supports to support the cabling. Supports shall be positioned in accordance with BS 7671.
G. All wiring terminations within field panels shall be terminated at terminal stripes and shall
be identification tagged on both sides of the terminal strip.
H. Cable run in vertical trunking shall have means of cable support, at minimum, every 3m.
I. Cables shall comply with all applicable codes including, but not limited to, the IEE wiring
regulations latest edition and the electrical sub-contract documents. Where there is a
conflict between any codes, standards, ordinances, regulations or the requirements of the
jurisdiction having authority, the most stringent requirements shall apply.
2.12 CABLE - FIBRE OPTIC
A. Fibre optic cable may be used for data communication.
B. Fibre optic cable (data transmission) shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) 50 micron core (multi-mode/single mode fibre as necessary to match the fibre

provided by the ICT Specialist).
2) 850 nm or 1300 nm LED compatible operation, as required.
3) Minimum 125 micron cladding.
4) Maximum attenuation of 4.5 db/km (850 nm).

5) Outdoors and below grade fibres shall be run in gel filled tube to protect against
moisture and micro bending. Tube and fibre shall have a kevlar braid surrounding,
with suitable outside protective jacketing.
6) Cable shall contain 100% more fibres than required for a single point-to-point
communications connection.
7) Outdoor fibre shall be equipped with a central non-conducting member for long pull
applications.
C. Fibre optic cable shall comply with BS EN 60794-1-2:1999 (Optical fibre cables. Generic
specification - Basic optical cable test procedures) and all other applicable codes.
2.13 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A. The BMS contractor shall provide uninterruptible power to all OIW, PC and servers. The
UPS furnished by the BMS contractor shall only serve components furnished by the BMS
contractor.
B. The BMS contractor shall provide uninterruptible power to all BMS components, such as
CCP. DCP, routers, switches, gateways, field instrumentation, final control elements etc., as
necessary to ensure continuous monitoring and control by the BMS and the associated
satellite OIW of all equipment that operates on emergency power.
C. The BMS contractor may provide a single UPS at any one location to serve the UPS
requirements of all components at that location or may provide individual UPS units for
each system. Each BMS shall have its own UPS systems that shall be installed such that a
UPS serving one of these entities does not provide power to a component in another entity.
D. The UPS shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Sized to handle the continuous full load use of all components served by the UPS plus
an additional 25% for a period of five minutes. Minimum shall be 300VA.
2) Audible alarm when mains power is not available.
3) RF noise filtering.
4) Over voltage protection.
5) Four outlet receptacles minimum.
6) Visual alert status light.
7) Sealed maintenance free batteries.
8) Floor mounted unit with plug in cord power cord.
E. UPS installation shall conform with BS EN 50091-1-1 and 2, BS EN 50091-2 and 3 and all
other applicable codes and regulations.
2.14 TERMINAL SERVERS
(TERMINAL SERVERS ARE USUSALLY REQUIRED FOR LARGE SCALE

PROJECTS, AND ARE NOT NECESSARY FOR INDIVIDUAL BUILDINGS. FOR
SMALL BUILDINGS NETWORK DATA SERVER SPECIFIED HEREAFTER CAN BE
USED. SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS REQUIRED)
A. The terminal servers shall be configured in a clustering fail over configuration using the
latest version of Microsoft Windows 2003, Enterprise Edition, operating software. Provide
terminal servers that are certified by a Microsoft OEM and provided as a complete package.
Each terminal server shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

1) Quad Processor capable motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots, 1 AGP slot and
16-gigabyte memory capacity.
2) Dual Xeon MP Processors minimum speed of 1.5 GHz. with ball bearing type CPU
fan/heat sinks.
3) 4 gigabytes of installed dual channel DDR memory.
4) Two 60 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 1 controller. These
drives shall be used for the operating system software and the application software.
5) Three 120 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 5 controller. Use
these disks for database storage.
6) Tower or rack mounting case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 500 watt or
greater capacity UL rated redundant hot swap power supplies, 3 Internal cooling fans
and external keyboard lock.
7) 2 Serial (16550 UART) and 1 Parallel ports.
8) One 1.44 floppy disk drive.
9) 24X IDE Internal CD-RW/DVD ROM.
10) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100/1000Mhz Ethernet adapter with bus mastering
capabilities.
11) SVGA 64 Megabyte AGP video adapter.
12) All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
13) Complete assembly, testing and 72-hour burn in, with complete diagnostic report
detailing burn in procedures and results.
14) SCSI II DAT Tape Backup Unit or Magneto Optical Disk and compatible software
with sufficient capacity to perform full daily-unattended backup of the database to
one tape or disk. Provide 10 tapes or disks with unit.
15) Provide software for automatic operation of redundant components should primary
components fail.
B. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at one of the terminal servers to be
determined by the Employer:
1) Keyboard and mouse

2) Flat panel LCD video display unit.
C. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognized
manufacture of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology is purchased.
2.15 BMS DATA SERVERS
(DATA SERVERS ARE USUSALLY REQUIRED FOR LARGE SCALE PROJECTS,

AND ARE NOT NECESSARY FOR INDIVIDUAL BUILDINGS. SPECIFIER TO
AMEND AS REQUIRED)
A. Provide two fault tolerant data servers. These servers shall be located in Central Facility
Management Control Room
B. The BMS data servers shall be configured in a clustering fail over configuration using the
latest version of Microsoft Windows 2003, Enterprise Edition, operating software. Provide
BMS data servers that are certified by a Microsoft OEM and provided as a complete
package. Each BMS data server shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Quad Processor capable motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots, 1 AGP slot and
16-gigabyte memory capacity.

2) Dual Xeon MP Processors minimum speed of 1.5 GHz. with ball bearing type CPU
fan/heat sinks.
3) 4 gigabytes of installed dual channel DDR memory.
4) Two 60 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 1 controller. These
drives shall be used for the operating system software and the application software.
5) Three 120 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 5 controller. Use
these disks for database storage.
6) Tower or rack mounting case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 500 watt or
greater capacity UL rated redundant hot swap power supplies, 3 Internal cooling fans
and external keyboard lock.
9) 24X IDE Internal CD-RW/DVD ROM.
10) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100/1000Mhz Ethernet adapter with bus mastering
capabilities.
11) SVGA 64 Megabyte AGP video adapter.
13) Complete assembly, testing and 72-hour burn in, with complete diagnostic report
14) SCSI II DAT Tape Backup Unit or Magneto Optical Disk and compatible software
with sufficient capacity to perform full daily-unattended backup of the database to
one tape or disk. Provide 10 tapes or disks with unit.
components fail.
C. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at one of the terminal servers to be
determined by the Employer:
1) Keyboard and mouse

D. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
2.16 NETWORK DATA SERVER (NDS)
A. Provide two fault tolerant Network Data Server (NDS). The NDS provided shall support
multiple levels of system redundancy. Provide two NDS configured as hot stand-by, fault
tolerant servers with redundant database architecture. The NDS shall meet, at minimum, the
1) Dual Processor Pentium III PCI/ISA Motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots.
Flash BIOS support. Series 7 CPU mounting sockets. 512 kB level 2 cache memory.
2) Dual Processors minimum speed of 1.13 GHz. with ball bearing type CPU fan/heat
sinks.
3) 256 Megabytes of installed 133 Megahertz ECC SDRAM, spare slots capable of 6GB
total RAM.
4) Three 18 Gigabyte hard disks with 8ms. or faster access time for a hardware based
“Fault Tolerant Redundant Array of Independent Disks” (RAID) to a minimum of
RAID 5.

5) Rack mounted case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 500 watt or greater
capacity UL rated redundant hot swap power supplies, 3 Internal cooling fans and
external keyboard lock.
8) 40X Speed SCSI CD-ROM drives.
9) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100 Ethernet adapter with bus mastering capabilities.
10) Microsoft Intellimouse and keyboard utilizing the motherboard PS2 style connectors.
11) SVGA 8 Megabyte SDRAM PCI video adapter.
13) Complete assembly, testing and 72 hour burn in, with complete diagnostic report
14) Windows 2003 Server for minimum 15-user license on CD-ROM or approved equal.
15) SCSI II DAT Tape Backup Unit or Magneto Optical Disk and Windows NT Server
4.0 (or equal) compatible software with sufficient capacity to perform full daily
unattended backup of RAID to one tape or disk. Provide 10 tapes or disks with unit.
Alternatively provide a CD-Writer.
components fail.
B. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
2.17 WEB SERVER
A. Provide a web server. The Web Server shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Single Processor Pentium III PCI/ISA Motherboard with a minimum of 6 PCI slots.
Flash BIOS support.
2) Single Processor minimum speed of 800 MHZ with ball bearing type CPU fan/heat
sinks.
3) 128 Megabytes of installed 100 Mega Hertz RAM, spare slots capable of 256
Megabytes total RAM.
4) 20 Gigabyte EIDE hard disk.
5) Tower case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 300 watt or greater capacity
UL rated power supplies, internal cooling fan and external keyboard lock.
8) 40X Speed CD-ROM drive.
9) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100 Ethernet adapter.
10) Microsoft Intellimouse and keyboard utilizing the motherboard PS2 style connectors.
11) SVGA 16 Megabyte DRAM PCI video adapter.
12) One internal analogue 56 Kbps modem, US Robotics or approved equal. Provide
software necessary to allow remote access and dial up
13) Internal Tape Backup drive, average transfer rate of 7.5 MB per second (12.5
Gigabyte uncompressed / 25 Gigabyte compressed), 5 tapes. Alternatively provide a
CD-Writer. Include software with the ability to schedule unattended backups.
15) Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
16) Real time software or hardware clock.

B. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
2.18 OPERATOR INTERFACE WORKSTATIONS (OIW)
A. The OIW shall comprise a PC and associated peripheral operator I/O devices. The OIW
shall be located as follows:
1) xxxx
2) xxxx
B. The OIW PC, shall have a Microsoft Windows XP Pro operating system or the latest version
of this software at the time of implementation and shall have, at minimum, the following
facilities:
1) Single Processor Pentium III motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots. Flash
BIOS support. 256 megabyte RAM memory capability.
2) Minimum Processor speed of 2.4 GHz with CPU fan/heat sinks.
3) 40 Gigabyte hard disk.
4) 256 megabytes SDRAM memory.
5) 100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
6) SVGA 16-megabyte DRAM video adapter.
7) One internal analogue 56 Kbps modem, dedicated for operator call in.
8) 2 Serial and 2 Parallel ports.
10) 40X Speed CD-ROM drive.
11) Real time software or hardware clock.
12) Tower Case with minimum of 4 external 5¼” and 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 300 watt
or greater capacity rated power supplies, internal cooling fan and external keyboard
lock.
15) Sound card for the annunciation of audible WAV file tones or pre-recorded messages
at the integral VDU stereo speakers.
C. Provide an alarm to uniquely identify a PC communication failure. One way that this might
be accomplished is by using a watchdog timer at a DDC controller.
D. Following a power failure, all PC shall return to a fully operational status without operator
intervention within two (2) minutes of the return of mains power. Software changes,
including modifications to database(s), shall not be lost in a power failure.
E. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
based on the latest proven technology is purchased. All PC shall be suitable for rugged and
continuous operation.
F. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at each OIW:
1) Keyboard and mouse.


3) Alarm printer
G. The BMS OIW at each location shall have 1No. Report Printer. Where there are multiple
OIW at one location the printer shall be networked such that they are available to each OIW.
2.19 PERIPHERAL OPERATOR I/O DEVICES
A. Printers: General
1) The operator shall be able to direct the hardcopy output to any printer. The BMS
Specialist shall set up the system such that all BMS generated messages such as
alarms, returns to normal, etc. are directed to the appropriate alarm printers and all
BMS automatically generated and operator requested reports are output to the
appropriate report printer.
2) The printers at one location shall be accessible from any OIW such that an operator at
one location can generate a hardcopy message at any other location.
B. Printers: Alarm Printers
1) The alarm printer shall meet the following specifications:
a. Minimum print speed of 300 characters/second. Slower speed printers shall

not be acceptable when printing in normal quality.
b. Selectable character sizes
c. Sprocket paper feed.
d. Top-of-page, skip and tab control.
e. The printers shall accept continuous fan-fold paper with a width equivalent to
A3 size (297 mm by 420 mm).
f. Constructed for heavy duty-cycle environment.
g. 24 x 24 dot matrix printer
C. Printers: Report Printers
1) The report printer shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
a. Minimum print speed of twelve pages per minute black and three pages per
minute colour. Slower speed printers shall not be acceptable when printing in
normal quality.
b. Scalable fonts.
c. Single or double bin paper trays, capable of printing A3 size (297mm x
420mm) and A4 size (210mm x 297mm).
d. Page feed and page discharge controls.
e. Colour and black and white printing capability without changing ink or toner
cartridges.
f. 1200 dpi black and white and 600 x 300 dpi colour.
g. Laser jet technology.
D. Keyboard:
1) Provide a keyboard for operator access at each OIW, terminal server and data server
location. This shall be in addition to any other operator input device such as a mouse.
2) The keyboard shall be in a standard typewriter (QWERTY) configuration with a full
alphanumeric standard ASCII character set and with additional dedicated keys for

other functions associated with the BMS such as print screen. Keyboard shall be
wireless. Provide batteries sufficient for 24 months operation.
E. Mouse:
1) Provide a mouse at each OIW, terminal server and data server location and configure
the system such that cursor control can be undertaken from both the keyboard and
mouse as selected by the operator.
2) Mouse shall be wireless. Provide batteries sufficient for 24 months operation.
F. Video Display Unit (VDU):
1) Provide a high-resolution LCD TFT display VDU at each OIW, terminal server and
data server location. The monitor shall be a flat panel type.
2) The VDU shall be used for the display of operator entered and requested data and the
output of BMS generated alarm and other information.
3) The VDU shall have a minimum screen diagonal measurement of 533mm (21
inches).
4) The VDU shall have a minimum resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels with 80 Hz
minimum refresh rate.
5) The unit shall be capable of displaying both schematic and alphanumeric data at the
same time.
6) A minimum of 16.7 million discrete colors shall be available for display selection.
7) Integral stereo speakers.
G. Rear Projection Monitor:
1) Minimum luminous flux of 500 lumens.

2) 1780mm diagonal measurement.
3) Lamp rated for 8000 hours of operation.
4) Lamp to be replaceable without special training.
5) Remote Control.
6) Colour temperature adjustment from 3200K to 9500K.
7) Compatible with PAL, HDTV, extended television standards, improved television
standards, VGA, SVGA, XGA and SXGA.
8) Component, Composite, S-Video and 5 BNC inputs.
2.20 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)
A. The POTs devices shall not be used by the BMS Specialist for commissioning the BMS or
for any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer immediately prior to the
acceptance testing.
B. Provide a jack at each DDC controller and at each mechanical and electrical room for the
plug connection of the POT. Provide two spare cables for plug connection for each POT.
The operator shall be able to communicate with the BMS via the POT using the same
operator interface as that at any OIW PC.
C. The POT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Pentium motherboard, 256 megabyte RAM memory capability.

2) Minimum Processor speed of 2.0 GHz.
3) 20 Gigabyte hard disk.
4) 256 megabytes SDRAM memory.

5) 100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.

6) 350mm minimum active matrix display.
7) Internal analogue 56 Kbps modem.
8) One 1.44 floppy disk drive (interchangeable).
9) 40X Speed CD-ROM drive (interchangeable).
10) Microsoft IntelliMouse.
12) Integral QWERTY keyboard with full ASCII character set.
13) Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 3.5kg.
14) Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the POT that ensures adequate
protection.
15) POT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also be powered by a 220
Vac, nominal 50 Hz source. Provide batteries adequate for a minimum of 4 hours of
operation.
D. When connected to the BMS Automation Level at the DDC controllers or at a network data
port, the POT shall be able to undertake all of the control and monitoring functions that can
be performed at the OIW. One of the POT shall be used to configure the system
components.
E. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognized
manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
2.21 HAND HELD WIRELESS TERMINAL (HHWT)
A. HHWT shall not be used by the BMS Specialist for commissioning the BMS or for any
other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer immediately prior to acceptance
testing.
B. The operator shall be able to communicate with the BMS via the HHWT from any place in
the site. The hand held wireless terminal shall have a web browser. The operator shall,
subject to password access control, be able to undertake the same functions from the hand
held terminal as from a OIW. Detail any limitations of this device in the tender submittal.
C. The required transceiver hubs shall be part of the BMS Management level Network and
shall be provided by the CNE Specialist. The BMS Specialist shall advise the CNE
Specialist of any distance limitations on the hand held wireless terminal. The operator shall,
subject to password access control, be able to undertake all functions from the hand held
terminal as from an OIW.
D. The HHWT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 0.2kg.

2) Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the HHWT that ensures adequate
protection.
3) HHWT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also be powered by a
220 Vac, nominal 50 Hz source. Provide batteries adequate for a minimum of 4
hours of operation.
4) The HHWT shall have an LCD screen with a minimum display of 12 lines of up to a
minimum of 20 characters minimum per line.
5) Minimum communications speed shall be 10Mbps.
6) This device shall be a PDA.

E. The HHWT shall be able to communicate in wired mode either to the network or directly to
the UC, DCP, CCP or router.
F. The HHWT shall have the same login and access protections as the POT.
PART 3 - SOFTWARES
3.1 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide a site-wide software license that shall permit the
Employer to add a PC to the BMS Management level Network without the requirement to
obtain an additional software license.
B. The BMS shall have an “off-the-shelf” software package (Middleware) that shall be able to
import and export data in, at minimum, the following protocols over an Ethernet TCP/IP
backbone:
1) BACnet.
2) LonTalk.
3) Modbus.
4) SNMP.
5) XML/SOAP.
6) OPC.
7) EIB.
8) Shall be able to communicate with any DDE compliant application.
C. Data shall be output from the BMS in the appropriate protocol to the appropriate ELV
Building System. Note that it shall be possible to output the same data in different protocols
to different ELV Building Systems.
D. Information shall be output from the BMS when:
1) Requested by the operator. This includes requests made by the operator for the
immediate output of specific information and requests for information that are
optional and have been pre-programmed by the operator for display.
2) Scheduled by the operator. An example of this might be the output of a report at an
operator-defined time of day.
3) An alarm condition has been detected by the BMS. All alarm conditions detected by
the BMS shall be annunciated as detailed elsewhere in this section.
E. The operator interfaces for the Operator Interface Workstation and the Portable Operator
Terminal shall be the same.
F. The graphical user operator interface shall be "user friendly". The interface shall be such
that there is no need for the operator to reference documentation other than "help" menus on
the system in order for the operator to perform his normal duties after the training has been
received, as detailed in these specifications.
G. The operator interface shall be English language with metric units. The system shall be
capable of converting all engineering unit displays into the equivalent English values and
displaying such values with the appropriate unit identifiers. The switchover from metric to
English and vice versa shall be done with a single operator command. The engineering unit
switchover shall be for all measured and displayed variables and calculated points. Unit

conversion and display shall be carried through all possible display view including graphical
displays, text base displays, and software application packages.
H. The performance criteria detailed in these specifications for the operator interface shall
apply when all BMS are in their completed form and all software and hardware functions
are operational.
I. The terminal server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows 2003, Enterprise Edition,
operating software or the latest version of this software at the time of implementation. The
terminal Server applications software shall have a history of application in multi-vendor
environments.
J. The software shall be acceptable to all potential BMS Specialists. The terminal server
software package shall have a successful history of use with BACnet/IP and shall
incorporate all drivers required to meet these specifications.
K. The programs shall be designed to provide industrial quality real time data presentation.
The software shall enable the BMS Specialists to develop customized graphical views of the
mechanical and electrical systems and shall contain an advanced graphics library that
contains all potentially required images.
3.2 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS CONTROL
A. Access to the BMS at the OIW, HHWT and POT and any other I/O device shall be
protected by a password based access system. An operator shall not be able to access
information or perform any tasks at the BMS until a valid password has been entered.
Access shall terminate when an operator signs off or after a predetermined time-out period,
initially set at 10 minutes after the last operator access, whichever occurs first. The
password shall not be echoed at any terminal when it is entered. Any operator functions,
whether or not detailed within these specifications, shall be subject to the operator's
password being of a sufficiently high level to enable the operator to perform the function.
B. Each password shall have up to 6 No. alphanumeric characters, at minimum, with at least
500 million different combinations and it shall be possible to have a minimum of 10,000
active passwords at any time.
C. It shall be possible to define the following for each password:
1) I/O terminals that can be used for access. This shall be defined for any terminal that
has access to the BMS (including the web browsing facility).
2) Functions that can be performed.
3) Points that can be accessed.
D. If the system has fixed defined function levels then there shall be at least five (5) levels.
Only the highest level shall be able to undertake changes to the passwords.
E. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to make additions, deletions
and changes to the passwords on-line using an interactive procedure including the changing
of the time-out period. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to
obtain a report detailing the passwords assigned to each operator and all relevant details of
the access privileges associated with each password.
3.3 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS GENERAL

A. An operator with the suitable level of access shall be able to access the network to perform
the following BMS functions:
1) Observe values of BMS monitored points, BMS outputs and BMS calculated values.
2) Observe and change control modes for motors, i.e. BMS manual control mode and
BMS software control mode.
3) Observe, add, delete and change a database including a database that defines a
monitored, controlled or calculated point, a database that defines schedules or a
database that is created to meet any of the many functions detailed in these
documents.
4) Issue commands to change the status of a digital output or the value of an analogue
output.
5) Observe and acknowledge BMS determined alarm conditions.
6) Initiate the outputs of add, delete and change reports.
7) Observe, add, delete and change operating sequences.
8) Observe, add, delete and change VDU system diagram displays.
9) Observe, add, delete and change control algorithms including PID control constants.
10) Other functions as expressly detailed in the BMS specifications or as required, even if
not expressed, in order to meet the intent of these specifications.
B. Operator access shall be by penetration through a hierarchy of menus and/or system displays
on the VDU using cursor control and by means of a series of alphanumeric inputs at a
keyboard. The menu selections shall be self-evident and shall easily guide the operator
through the execution of any of the functions. The alphanumeric input shall comprise short
English language statements and/or readily understood abbreviations. Whichever approach
is used, the process shall be via the most direct path and shall involve as few operations as
possible. It shall not be necessary for the operator to know the location, i.e. the DDC
controller, at which a point is monitored/controlled in order to access any information
concerning that point.
C. Following the completion of all steps by the operator performing an operator access
function, the function shall commence within two (2) seconds and shall be completed within
ten (10) seconds apart from those functions that are subject to the limitations of the output
rate of the printers.
D. An operator shall be able to edit his keyboard entries prior to attempted execution using
standard keys such as "delete" and "backspace". However, if an operator makes an incorrect
entry then the BMS will display a message that clearly details the nature of the error and
identifies the appropriate "help" menu that will assist the operator to successfully complete
the entry.
E. All operator entries shall be echoed, except passwords, at the VDU at the OIW, terminal
server and data server and on the screen on the POT and HHWT depending on where the
operator entry is made.
3.4 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: PROGRAMMING AND UPDATES
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any
other BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the data
in any of the previously mentioned standards to another system.
B. The system documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the BMS’s incorporation
into another BACnet system in the future.

3.5 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
A. Each monitored, controlled and calculated point in the system shall be accessed via the
menu and the alphanumeric approaches as detailed in these specifications.
B. Access using the system schematic displays, as detailed in the previous sections, with the
addition that once the system display level is reached it shall be possible to progress to the
individual monitored, controlled or calculated point. Once a menu or system display
selection is made it shall take no more than five (5) seconds before the next menu or display
level appears on the VDU.
C. Access using the alphanumeric approach shall enable an operator to access any point via a
unique point name that may be a short English language descriptor or a readily
understandable mnemonic of the type used to identify points in the points schedules and
system diagrams.
D. Either approach shall enable the operator to observe or change any parameter associated
with a point and to add and delete points.
3.6 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR COMMANDS
A. The operator shall be able to place any output in the BMS manual control mode and when in
that mode the operator shall be able to place any output to any required value subject to any
hardwired interlocks and any software interlocks that are specified to apply in the BMS
manual control mode.
B. The operator shall be able to place any setpoint that is determined by software into the
manual mode and to manually assign a value to the setpoint.
C. The operator shall be able to initiate the restart of equipment following a fire alarm and
following a power failure. Refer to the paragraphs titled "Equipment restart following a fire
alarm" and "Equipment restart following a power failure".

3.7 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: DATABASES AND OPERATING SEQUENCES
A. The operator shall be able to make on-line modifications, additions and deletions to all
databases at the PC, CCP, DCP, and UC using interactive procedures. Prior to the
acceptance of the changes by the BMS there shall be a restatement of the contemplated
database modification, addition or deletion together with a question of the type "Do you
wish to proceed?" which will require an affirmative answer before the change takes place.
B. The operator shall be able to modify a sequence, add a sequence and delete a sequence on-
line as detailed in the Section titled “BMS Software”.
C. The databases shall be open standards based on BACnet. The BMS Specialist shall provide
complete comprehensive documentation on writing to the databases, retrieving data from the
databases and sharing the data at the databases.
3.8 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ALARMS
A. Alarms shall be generated by the BMS upon the occurrence of one of the following events:
1) Failure of a PC, DDC controller, or any other BMS hardware components.

2) Failure of communications between nodes on any LAN or the BMS Management
level Network.
3) A monitored status indicates a discrepancy between the actual and the required value.
4) A monitored value does not meet criteria established by the operator.
5) The deviation of a variable from setpoint exceeds operator-established criteria.
6) The output to a final control element is outside operator-established criteria.
7) A digital input is in the state defined by the operator as indicating an alarm condition.
8) Software failures and errors shall be diagnosed and annunciated by the BMS.
B. The failure of a BMS hardware component, including communications failures, shall

generate an alarm that shall be differentiated from process alarms. If the failure of a PC
cannot be annunciated at a printer or VDU at the OIW because of the BMS topology then
provide an alternative means such as a "watchdog timer" at a DDC controller. The alarm
message generated by the BMS shall clearly identify the component that has failed and the
location of a communications failure shall also be clearly indicated.
C. In the event that the BMS detects a disparity between the actual and the required status of a
digital input, the BMS shall generate an alarm and shall set the control relay to the off state.
This shall occur when the digital output is in both the BMS manual control mode and the
BMS software control mode and shall automatically place the output in the BMS manual
control mode.
D. The operator shall be able to define alarm conditions for each analog input, at minimum, as
follows:
1) The high limit above which the variable is in alarm.

2) The low limit below which the variable is in alarm.
3) An end or range alarm. This shall occur when the analogue signal goes to zero or to
its maximum value.
E. The operator shall be able to assign deviation limits to setpoint values. An alarm shall be
generated when a controlled variable deviates from setpoint by more than an operator-
defined amount.

F. The operator shall be able to assign alarm limits to analogue outputs. The BMS shall
generate an alarm when an analogue output reaches or exceeds an operator assigned high
limit and reaches or goes below an operator assigned low limit.
G. The operator shall be able to designate one state of a digital input as an alarm state.
H. The operator shall be able to assign a time delay following detection by the BMS of an
alarm condition such that if there is a return to normal during the assigned time delays the
alarm shall not be annunciated. If at the end of the time delay period the alarm condition
still exists then the BMS shall annunciate an alarm within two (2) seconds (end-to-end
time). The time delay shall be individually assignable to each alarm condition. All
monitored points shall meet these alarm annunciation criteria regardless of type of panel
used to monitor the point.
I. The operator shall be able to assign a deadband to all analogue high and low alarm limits so
as to minimize the too frequent and unnecessary annunciation of alarms. An analogue alarm
limit shall not have returned to normal until it is has returned beyond the alarm limit by a
sufficient amount to have also cleared the deadband. The same shall also apply to analogue
output high and low alarms.
J. A report shall be available to the operator detailing points in alarm and a further report shall
be available to the operator detailing the alarm limits established for the monitored,
controlled and calculated points.
K. Designated alarms shall be output on the alarm printer.
L. The occurrence of designated alarms shall initiate a visual alarm at the OIW. A switch,
button or keyboard key shall be dedicated to the acknowledgment of alarms at the OIW.
The visual alarm shall cease after acknowledgment of an alarm unless another alarm is
awaiting acknowledgment. All alarms shall be acknowledged individually and the
acknowledgment shall be recorded on the alarm printer. The alarm message shall uniquely
identify the cause of the alarm together with the time of detection by the BMS. The
operator shall be able to associate an "event message" with any alarm occurrence. The
operator shall be able to designate at which workstation(s) the alarm shall be annunciated.
M. Alarms shall be allocated priorities by the operator on-line using an interactive procedure.
If there are concurrent alarms then they shall be annunciated in order of their priority. An
icon shall appear on the VDU when there are alarms other than those displayed. The cursor
and icon shall enable the operator to bring up an alarm report on the VDU at any time.
There shall be at minimum, three levels of alarm priority. Alarms shall be prioritized in the
following categories, with the following actions taking place:

Category Action Taken
Critical. Printout on alarm printer and display on VDU.

Clearly distinguish critical alarms on hard copy
printouts and VDU displays and reports.
Non-critical. Display on VDU.
BMS component. Printout on alarm printer and display on VDU.

Clearly distinguish BMS components alarms on hard
copy print outs and VDU displays and reports.
N. Alarms shall remain on the OIW VDU alarm queue until the alarm has been acknowledged
by the operator and returned to the normal state. If the alarm returns to normal before
operator acknowledgment, then it shall be identified as such via different colour designation
on the alarm queue. If the alarm is acknowledged before is has returned to normal, then is
shall also be identified via a different colour designation.
O. It shall only be necessary to acknowledge an alarm at one OIW.
P. It shall be possible to assign alarms to different OIW on a scheduled basis.
Q. The BMS Specialist shall configure the alarms and their priorities in accordance with the
requirements of the Employer.
3.9 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: REPORTS
A. Reports shall be output when requested by the operator and when scheduled by the operator.
B. Reports shall be provided as detailed throughout these specifications and shall be output at
the VDU at the OIW, the printer designated by the operator at the report printer or the
screen at the POT whichever is selected by the operator. The default output device for
reports shall be the report printer at the OIW.
C. The operator shall be able to select reports to be output in the following manner:
1) For a specific point.

2) For a specific item(s) of equipment.
3) For all points located on a specific floor or area of the building.
4) For all equipment serving a particular floor.
5) For all points monitored, controlled and calculated.
6) For after hours operation of the AHU.
7) For a specific schedule.
8) For a specific or group of trended points.
9) For a specific or group of totalised points.
D. Reports shall all have the time and date at which they were output recorded on them.
Reports shall be formatted in such a manner as to make them easily understandable to the
operator.

E. A menu of reports shall enable the operator to access any report on the BMS. Each report
shall contain the date and time.
F. The operator shall be able to configure customized reports. Standard and customized
reports shall be configured through the BMS. Use of third party reporting packages is not
allowed.
G. The BMS Specialist shall configure the reports in accordance with the requirements of the
Employer.
3.10 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: EVENT MESSAGES
A. The operator shall create messages up to 64 characters in length, at minimum, which shall
be displayed upon the occurrence of a particular event. There shall be capacity for 1000
event messages at any one time and the operator shall be able to associate a single message
with more than one occurrence and shall be able to associate more than one event message
with a particular event.
B. The event message shall be output at all devices selected on-line by the operator using an
interactive procedure.
C. The operator shall be able to associate one or more event messages with the following
events:
1) An alarm
2) A change of status.
3) The return to normal of an alarm condition.
4) An operator entered schedule.
5) Any other event initiated by the BMS or monitored by the BMS.
3.11 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: VIDEO DISPLAY UNITS DISPLAY
A. VDU displays of system diagrams are discussed in the Section titled “VDU system diagram
display package” of these specifications.
B. VDU displays shall form the basis of the menu penetration means of operator access.
C. The time and date and the building kW shall appear on the VDU at all times and when there
are system diagrams displayed on the VDU the outside air temperature and relative
humidity shall be displayed.
D. Icons shall be used in conjunction with cursor control where possible to simplify access to
data and the execution of operator commands.
E. System diagrams shall appear on the VDU complete with all associated data within five (5)
seconds of the completion of the operator entry/ menu selection.
3.12 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: WEB ACCESS
A. Operators and other authorized personnel shall have access to specific functions of the BMS
via a standard web browser interface, subject to password access assigned by the Employer.

B. Web based access to the BMS shall provide monitoring and limited control specific to the
user. The information displayed on the web pages shall be refreshed at least once every 10
seconds.
C. Where a Web page provides for the operator to input changes, the activation of the changes
shall require the operator to click on a "submit" button or similar feature before the changes
are sent. All web access actions shall be immediately echoed to all other OIW.
3.13 BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL
A. The Distributed Control Panels, Workstations and Unitary Controllers shall run under the
control of proven real-time executive operating software systems. These operating systems
are collectively referred to as the BMS operating systems.
B. The BMS operating Systems shall include:
1) Controllers Monitoring and Control Software

2) Controller Application Software
3) Data Analysis and Storage Software.
4) Data Presentation Software.
C. The operating sequences and all databases related to monitoring and control functions shall
reside at the associated DCP and/or UC. Copies of these databases, operating sequences,
schedules and other programmable software shall reside at the PC at the OIW. It shall be
ensured that at all times there is no mismatch between software resident at the DCP and/or
UC and the software copy resident at the PC.
3.14 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS
A. The sequences of operation shall be resident at the controllers.
B. Where terms are used, such as “operator determined”, “operator changeable”, etc., which
indicate an operator originated decision; it shall mean that an operator shall be able to
amend a value, such as a setpoint, alarm limit, time delay, etc. through an interactive
approach. The term "interactive" is used to mean that the system shall operate in a
conversational mode whereby the operator shall receive English language prompts in the
form of:
1) Tables into which the operator enters data.

2) Questions that are responded to by the operator.
3) Selections that are made by the operator based on a list of suggested alternatives that
is generated by the BMS.
C. The procedure by which an operator amends a value or implements a selection shall be such
that the operator can readily execute the task without reference to instruction manuals and
without knowledge of the BMS control language.
D. All setpoints, alarms limits, deadbands, software time delays, report configuration and
requests, operating time limits, schedules, etc. shall be operator definable through an
interactive procedure via the OIW, OIW, POT and HHWT. In addition, the setpoints and
schedules shall be changeable via the BMS/telephone and BMS/web facilities.

E. The equipment that is fed from emergency power and which is controlled by the BMS shall
operate normally under emergency power conditions and shall be monitored and controlled
by the BMS under emergency power conditions. Ensure that all equipment furnished under
this sub-contract that is associated with the control of equipment on emergency power is fed
from the emergency power service and can maintain normal equipment operations when the
equipment is on emergency power. Following a loss of normal power, the BMS shall
resume normal equipment control and monitoring functions for that equipment on
emergency power within 20 seconds of the availability of emergency power and similarly
when there is a return to normal power. If necessary provide an uninterruptible power
source in order to meet this 20 seconds resumption of operation requirement.
F. The BMS Specialist shall identify on the cable and containment shop drawings which
components are to be fed from emergency power and which components are to be fed from
a UPS source.
G. The BMS Specialist shall provide an easy to use means of defining the operating sequences
such as a high-level control language or a graphical/flowcharting facility.
H. The means provided for the creation of the operating sequences shall be suitable for the
implementation of the sequences detailed on the control diagrams that form a part of these
sub-contract documents.
I. If the BMS Specialist requires additional instrumentation to that indicated in the BMS Point
Schedules and Diagrams in order to implement the operating sequences as detailed on the
control drawings then the BMS Specialist shall include such additional instrumentation
within the tender price. Such instrumentation shall meet the requirements detailed in the
Section titled "BMS Field Instrumentation" or, where specifications are not provided, details
of such instrumentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
J. The operating sequences shall be written in a readily understandable high level control
language such as Pascal, Basic, C or equivalent or they shall be constructed using an easily
understood graphics interface package. Provide adequate English language notation in the
software to assist the operator understand the intent of the programmed sequences.
K. The control language shall be capable of implementing 32-bit floating-point calculations

using. At minimum, the following arithmetic operators:
1) Addition
2) Subtraction
3) Multiplication
4) Division
5) Roots
6) Exponentials
7) Natural logarithms
L. The control language shall, at minimum, be able to implement the following logic
operations and relational operations:
1) and
2) or
3) not
4) nand
5) nor
6) If then else statement
7) less than

8) less than or equal to

9) equal to
10) greater than or equal to
11) greater than
12) not equal to
M. The BMS Specialist shall be responsible for the stable operation of all control loops. The
BMS Specialist shall provide self-tuning PID control algorithms. Verify that the control
loops are stable.
N. If any BMS or system component should fail during the operation of a system, then the
BMS shall execute the procedure detailed in the sequences of operation. Where a failure
mode is not provided for a BMS controlled item of equipment the BMS Specialist shall
obtain details of the required failure mode from the Employer.
O. Where there are multiple filter banks the BMS Specialist shall furnish a differential pressure
switch across each filter bank. The BMS Specialist may elect to monitor each filter alarm
individually or may elect to wire the differential pressure switches such that if any filter is in
alarm a general filter alarm shall be monitored by the BMS.
P. Any information required by the BMS Specialist for the implementation of the software
shall be requested in writing from the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the time it is
required. Submit the request for information in the form of tables or forms for the
Employer’s personnel to complete and return.
Q. The operating sequences detailed in this section shall only apply when the BMS is
controlling and monitoring the system in the BMS software control mode.
R. In cases where outside air duct cross-sectional area exceeds a certain amount, multiple
damper sections rather than a single section shall be furnished and shall be controlled in
groups. Refer to the mechanical trade documents to determine the number of damper
sections and the number of actuators.
S. Where indicated on the control diagrams, the BMS Specialist shall interlock motorised
dampers with fans such that when the dampers are closed the associated fans stop.
T. The BMS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the operating sequences as requested
by the Engineer without additional costs until the substantial completion of the entire BMS.
U. The sequences of operation are detailed on the control drawings that form part of these
documents. Where sequences have not been specifically identified for a mechanical,
electrical or public health system/component, the BMS Specialist shall obtain instruction
from the Engineer and shall implement the required sequences at no additional cost to the
Employer.
3.15 BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLERS MONITORING & CONTROL

SOFTWARE
A. Scan rates at the DCP and/or UC shall meet the following requirements:
1) Each analogue and digital input point shall be scanned at least once every 5 seconds.
2) If a point is in alarm, then the alarm shall be annunciated at the OIW within 2 seconds
of the termination of the time delay period following detection of the alarm condition.

B. DDC outputs shall be updated at a frequency defined by the operator. The operator shall be
able to select a frequency, at minimum, in the range of 2 seconds to 256 seconds.
C. The operator shall be able to define a minimum time delay between successive starts of
equipment so that disturbances created on the building electrical system are minimised in
frequency and amplitude.
D. BMS analogue and digital outputs shall change as the result of either an operator entered
command or a BMS generated software command. These two modes of BMS output are
referred to as the BMS MANUAL CONTROL mode and the BMS SOFTWARE
CONTROL mode and differ as follows:
1) In the BMS manual control mode, the signal to a final control element such as a valve
or a damper actuator and to a relay such as a motor control relay shall change as the
result of a command manually entered at one of the operator terminals. When an
output is in the BMS manual control mode, there shall be no means by which it can
switch to the BMS software control mode or by which the value or state of the BMS
output can change without operator intervention.
2) In the BMS software control mode, the signal to the final control element or relay
shall be changed automatically as the result of software such as a schedule, operating
sequence or Applications Package such as the Optimised Scheduling feature.
E. The operator shall be able to select the mode of output control for each analogue and digital
output.
F. The operator shall be able to define the minimum time delay between the stopping of a piece
of equipment and its subsequent restart. This time delay shall be in effect for motors in the
BMS software control mode and for motors in the BMS manual control mode.
G. If there is a discrepancy between the actual and BMS commanded state of a motor then,
unless the discrepancy arises because of control of the motor by the fire alarm system or
because of a power failure, the motor control relay shall be set automatically to the OFF
state, an alarm shall be generated and the motor shall be placed in the BMS manual control
mode.
1) If the discrepancy has arisen because of override control by the fire alarm system,
then the motor shall be restarted by the BMS in accordance with the procedure
detailed in the paragraph titled "Equipment Restart Following a Fire Alarm".
2) If the discrepancy has arisen because of a power failure, then the motor shall be
restarted by the BMS in accordance with the procedure detailed in the paragraph
titled "Equipment Restart Following a Power Failure".
3) In all cases a motor shall only restart following an operator manually entered
command
H. The BMS shall not override any hardwired interlocks such as those provided at motor
starters for overload protection, damper interlock, pressure interlock, etc. and those provided
to facilitate control by the Fire Alarm System regardless of the BMS output control mode.
I. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere in these Specifications, the modulation of final control
elements by the BMS in the BMS software control mode shall be based on a Proportional-
Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithm. The control constants for the PID algorithm
shall be definable by the operator. If self-tuning algorithms are provided, it shall still be
possible for the operator to manually tune the control loops. The software shall incorporate
facilities to enable the bumpless transfer of a modulating output from BMS manual control

to BMS software control and vice versa and the prevention of integral wind-up. PID
algorithms shall maintain the system operation within the desired tolerance around the
setpoint. Setpoint tolerances shall be as follows:
1) Supply air temperature control, + or - 0.5 Deg. C.

2) Space temperature control, + or - 0.5 Deg. C.
3) Duct static pressure control, + or - 50 Pa
4) Water differential pressure, + or - 15 kPa.
5) Space static pressure control, + or - 10 Pa
6) Relative humidity, + or - 3%
J. Software shall automatically inhibit the generating of an alarm on an analogue input when
the status of an associated digital input indicates that an alarm condition is to be expected.
Such would be the case, for example, when an air handling unit is off as it would be
expected that the supply air temperature would be outside the alarm limits established for
the operating state. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to link any analogue
value to a digital input so as to inhibit unnecessary alarms. Points with their alarms locked
out shall continue to be displayed on reports and VDU displays. The alarms shall remain
locked out for an operator defined time delay following the start-up of the associated
equipment
K. If for any reason the operator wishes to terminate the monitoring of a particular digital or
analogue input, then it shall be possible to take the point out of service via an interactive
procedure. If the point is the monitored variable in a control loop, then the control loop
shall be disabled, any sequence dependent on the point shall also be disabled and all
associated BMS outputs shall go to the BMS manual control mode.
L. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to add, delete and modify points
monitored and controlled by the BMS.
M. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to configure control loops. The operator
shall define Setpoints for control loops or they shall be derived from software logic as
detailed in the sequences of operation.
N. All configuration tools shall be built into the BMS graphics software and all components of
the system shall be programmable from any OIW via the web browser including the
downloading of programs to the DDC controllers.
3.16 BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLER APPLICATION SOFTWARE
A. Applications software functions associated with the control and monitoring of the
mechanical and electrical systems by the BMS shall be resident at the DDC controllers and
OIW PC as appropriate. The application of these features shall be in accordance with the
details provided in the Sequences of Operation. The BMS Specialist is to implement all
applications programs. Where additional information is required the BMS Specialist shall
request the information in writing to the Employer at least two weeks before it is required by
the BMS Specialist.
B. These application software packages shall include but not be limited to the following:
1) Provide the following programs for the optimization of energy usage:
a. HVAC control

1) Provide the following programs for the calculation of data:
b. Electrical Energy usage and demand

c. Psychometric properties
d. Equipment operating time
1) Provide the following programs for the restart of building mechanical

systems:
e. Equipment restart following a fire alarm

f. Equipment restart following a power failure
C. HVAC Control
1) BMS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish Optimal Run (start/stop)

Time, Supply Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization applications.
2) Optimization applications to be coordinated through energy supervisory management
routines. These routines to coordinate control action required by optimization
applications between themselves, all other energy features, and all application
features within the system.
3) Each control system to support English or metric units of measurement and be
assigned a unique identifier which is to be used to request operator-relevant HVAC
control status data. Each control system to be capable of supporting Optimal Run
Time, Supply Air Reset, and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization.
4) Control systems and their associated points and parameters to be online definable.
Any additions, modifications or deletions to be made online. Each system to be
individually identified with a unique English language descriptor.
5) Each system to provide a savings profile summary which is to document, but is not
a. Period start date as defined by operator

b. Calculated optimal start time daily saving values
c. Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values
d. Calculated optimal start time daily saving values during current period
e. Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values during current period
f. Calculated SAR (Supply Air Reset) daily saving values
g. Calculated SAR saving values during current period
h. Calculated ESQ (Enthalpy Switch-over) daily saving values
i. Calculated ESQ saving values during current per.
j. These documented savings values to be automatically historically stored for the
current defined period and a minimum of twelve past periods.
1) Optimal Run Time (ORT) Program is to:
k. Control start up and shutdown of HVAC control equipment
l. Provide the most efficient operation during potentially energy wasteful periods
of the day based on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal
requirements and interior room mass temperatures
m. Start up systems by using outside air temperature and room temperatures to
"learn" the building's thermal characteristics through a dynamic adaptive
modeling technique
n. Predict and self-adjust the HVAC control system for how long building takes
to cool down under different conditions, using the adaptive model

o. Determine how early it can shut down the system without adversely affecting
ventilation, by using the outside air temperature
p. Automatically determine the seasonal mode and worse case condition for each
day, by analyzing multiple building mass sensors
q. Analysis to require only easily obtained occupancy schedule data and desired
mass temperatures for implementation.
1) Supply Air Reset (SAR) Program is to:
r. Monitor cooling loads in building spaces

s. Monitor single zone unit discharge temperatures
t. Adjust HVAC control discharge temperature to the most energy efficient levels
that still satisfy the measured load
u. Raise cooling temperatures to highest possible value, and still cool and
dehumidify the warmest monitored room served by fan.
D. Electrical Energy Usage and Demand
1) Provide software to monitor and report electrical energy usage and instantaneous
energy demand. This feature shall also store data for recall via the historical data
trend package.
2) The BMS shall monitor the demand kW, kVA and kWh at the switchboards. The
BMS shall also monitor and provide reporting on kWh usage of controlled equipment
within the building based on equipment operating time and monitored kW for each
piece of equipment. If an item of equipment is not monitored then it shall be possible
for the BMS Specialist to input the kW of the equipment as a constant to be used in
the calculation. The kW value shall be obtained from the manufacturer’s literature
and shall be verified by the manufacturer.
3) The BMS shall provide a 15-minute interval counter for the metered inputs.
4) This software feature shall generate a report available on demand and on a scheduled
basis:
a. Demand (at each meter) at time of report.

b. Usage for present day to time of report.
c. Usage on previous day.
d. Usage for present week to time of report.
e. Usage for previous week.
f. Usage for present month to time of report.
g. Usage for previous month.
h. Usage for year to time of report.
i. Usage for previous year.
j. Peak demand for the present day, week, month and year to time of report.
k. Peak demand for the previous day, week, month and year.
1) In addition to the above reporting of data the operator shall be able to

assign any monitored or calculated value to the real-time plotting and
historical data trend features.
2) As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall
implement all energy management calculations as requested by the
Employer. Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to
the acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the energy
management calculation feature. The written request will clearly

indicate the information required from the Employer and the format in
which it is to be provided.
E. Psychometric properties
1) Provide a software package to determine the following properties of ambient air:
a. Wet bulb temperature.

b. Dew point temperature.
1) The above parameters shall be calculated using the monitored values of

ambient air-dry bulb temperature and relative humidity
2) This software package shall also calculate the enthalpy of ambient air
and ducted return air on the basis of the dry bulb temperature and
relative humidity monitored in ambient air and the ducted return air.
3) These psychometric calculations shall be based on sea level data and
shall cover the dry bulb temperature range of +10 Deg. C. to +60 Deg.
C.
4) The psychometric chart shall be displayed on the OIW VDU and shall
be dynamic. With the input of any two variables all other psychometric
data shall be automatically displayed on the psychometric chart.
F. Equipment operating time
1) Provide a software package that will accumulate the operating times for motors as
selected by the operator using an interactive procedure. Any piece of equipment that
has its status monitored by the BMS shall be selectable for inclusion in this feature. It
shall be possible to concurrently monitor the accumulated operating time for every
item of equipment monitored and/or controlled by the BMS. Data shall be stored at
the local controllers and shall be uploaded to the OIW at regular intervals. In the
event of loss of communications between the OIW and the local controller the local
controller shall continue to monitor and store data such that the data can be
downloaded when the communication is restored. The number of starts and stops of
motors shall also be accumulated.
2) The operator shall be able to establish on-line, using an interactive procedure, a value
for the accumulated operating time at which a suitably worded message shall be
output to the operator advising that the reporting limit has been reached for a specific
motor. The message shall be output at the designated alarm printer.
3) The operator shall be able to change the accumulated total for any motor to any value.
4) The accumulated operating times shall be updated at least every 15 minutes.
5) The operator shall be able to obtain a report on demand and on a scheduled basis
detailing the accumulated operating times.
6) Operating times and the number of equipment starts/stops shall be input by the BMS
equipment-scheduling program to the Employer's Facility Management System and
shall be the basis of maintenance programming.

G. Equipment restart following a fire alarm
1) Provide and implement a software program that will restart equipment, following the
return to normal condition that was shut down by the FAS or by the BMS as the result
of a fire alarm. The only equipment that shall be shut down by the BMS as the result
of a fire alarm shall be the VAV terminal units and FCU. The FAS shall shut down
all other equipment on an as required basis.
a. If an item of equipment is shut down by a source other than the BMS when
there is a fire alarm in effect then the BMS shall assume that the cause of the
shutdown is the FAS and shall not indicate an alarm.
b. The FAS shall communicate to the BMS a list of all equipment that it has shut
down as the result of a fire alarm.
c. If an item of equipment was presumed by the BMS to have shut down as a
result of the fire alarm but is not on the FAS list then an alarm shall be
annunciated for that item of equipment to indicate equipment failure. An alarm
shall also be generated if an item of equipment on the list does not have the
required status.
1) Following the receipt by the BMS of a return to normal message from

the fire alarm system the operator shall be able to initiate the restart of
all equipment shutdown by the FAS and BMS with individual manually
entered commands to each item of equipment and with a single
command that shall restart all equipment scheduled to be operational at
the time of the operator restart command. Prior to the return to normal
of the fire alarm system the operator shall not be able to execute the
restart command. The restart of the equipment shall be subject to all the
software protection such as the minimum "off" time and the operator
defined time delay requirements between successive equipment starts.
implement the restart following a fire alarm function. Submit in written
to the Employer, at least 4 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a
request for the order in which motors are to be restarted, the delay times
between successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’ times.
The written request will clearly indicate the information required from
the Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
H. Equipment restart following a power failure
1) Provide and implement a program that will facilitate the restart of equipment
following a power failure.
2) This program shall be based on the BMS detection of a power failure and the return
of power. This feature shall operate on a per BMS basis and not a site wide basis and
shall be implemented for both emergency, normal power and UPS power.
3) When there is a loss of normal power, the BMS shall de-energise all units under its
control. When power is restored the BMS shall restart equipment on the basis of the
following as selected by the operator:
a. Manually entered operator command. A single command shall initiate the start
of all equipment controlled by a BMS or the equipment shall be started
individually as selected by the operator.
b. Automatically by the BMS when the return of power is detected by the BMS,
either utility power.

1) Whichever method of restart is selected the motors shall be started in a

predetermined order and the start up shall be subject to all the software
protections such as the minimum "off" time and the operator defined
time delay requirements between successive equipment starts, to prevent
surges in the electrical distribution system.
implement the restart following a power failure function. Submit in
written to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing,
a request for the order in which motors are to be restarted, the delay
times between successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’
times. The written request will clearly indicate the information required
from the Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
3) In the case of standby power, the BMS shall only restart equipment that
is scheduled to operate at that time of day and which is permitted to
operate under standby power conditions.
3.17 BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA ANALYSIS AND STORAGE SOFTWARE
A. Data analysis and storage software shall reside at the terminal servers such that all PC on the
BMS Management level Network can present data in the same format. These features shall
comprise the following:
1) Dynamic Trending
2) Historical data trends
B. Dynamic Trending
1) Provide a software package that emulates, at minimum, a 3No. point strip chart
recorder. This program shall concurrently display 3No. or more (maximum of 6)
plots of variables in a graphical format. The graphs shall be plotted as the values are
sampled in a similar fashion to a chart recorder and when the plot reaches the right
hand side of the X-axis, the X-axis shall scroll to the left so as to accommodate newly
sampled data.
2) The variables to be plotted shall be selected by the operator from any input, output
point, BMS calculated value or any setpoint. It is envisaged that the primary use of
this facility will be for the tuning of control loops and the observance of control loop
performance. Typically this would require, for example, the concurrent plotting of
the loop setpoint, the monitored variable and the BMS output to the final control
element.
3) Each of the plotted variables shall be uniquely and clearly identified using a means of
differentiation such as different colors for each variable or different symbols for the
plotted points for each variable.
4) The X-axis shall be the time axis and shall have a scale selected by the operator using
an interactive procedure or shall be scaled automatically to accommodate a minimum
of 30 plotted points for each variable. The plot rate shall be selected by the operator
using an interactive procedure and shall have the following minimum ranges:
a. Plot rates for monitored variables shall range from their BMS scan rate to at
least once per day.
b. Setpoints shall be plotted at the same rate as the associated variable.
c. Plot rates for BMS outputs shall range from their BMS update rates to at least
once per day.

d. Plot rates for calculated points shall range from the rate at which the
calculation is performed to at least once per day.
1) The Y-axis shall be the value of the plotted variable. If plotted variables
have different ranges then provide separate Y-axes. The Y-axis for each
plotted variable shall be defined by the operator using an interactive
procedure or shall be scaled automatically using a technique that
displays the data in an optimum manner.
2) It shall be possible to have a minimum of 100 active trend plots at any
OIW on the network.
implement all trend logs as requested by the Employer. Submit in
writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing,
a request for points to be placed on the dynamic trending function. The
written request will clearly indicate the information required from the
Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
C. Historical data trends
1) Provide a software facility for the collection and storage of data at the data servers
and its subsequent retrieval and display in tabular and graphical form as selected by
the operator.
2) The operator shall be able to assign on-line, using an interactive procedure, any BMS
input or output point, calculated variable or setpoint to the historical data trend
facility. It shall be possible to have data collection and storage concurrently, at
minimum, for 250,000 variables and it shall be possible to have data collection for
each variable at 2 separate sampling rates.
3) Each variable shall be sampled at an operator-defined frequency using an interactive
procedure. The sampling frequencies shall be in the following ranges at minimum:
a. For BMS monitored points the sample rate shall be selectable individually for
each variable at between once per day and once per second or once per scan,
whichever is the less frequent.
b. Setpoints shall be sampled at the same rate as their associated variable.
c. For BMS outputs the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each
variable at between once per day and once per second or once per output
change, whichever is the less frequent.
d. For calculated points the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each
calculated value at between once per day and once every calculation.
1) Storage shall be provided for at least 10,000 pieces of sampled data for
each variable assigned to this feature. Recall of data shall be in either a
tabular form or in a graphical form and shall be displayed on the VDU
or output on one of the printers as selected by the operator. Whichever
form of output the operator selects it shall be possible to concurrently
output data for a minimum of 3No. variables. The time period to be
covered by the data output shall be selected by the operator using an
interactive procedure. When the storage capacity for a variable is full
the newly sampled data shall over-write the data first stored for that
variable. It shall be possible to store data for the same point at different
collection rates. For example, it shall be possible to store 10,000 values
of ambient temperature collected once per hour and it shall be possible

to store 10,000 values of ambient temperature collected every noon and

midnight.
2) Data output in tabular form shall clearly distinguish between the
variables and shall indicate the time and date at which each piece of data
was sampled.
3) Data output in graphical form shall meet the same requirements as
detailed above for the real-time plotting of data.
4) It shall be possible at any time to obtain a listing of which points have
been assigned to this feature and their sampling rates.
5) It shall be possible to output the historical data in a Microsoft Excel
format in a hardcopy and in an electronic format.
implement all historical data storage as requested by the Employer.
Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the
acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the historical data
trending function. The written request will clearly indicate the
information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to
be provided.
3.18 BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA PRESENTATION SOFTWARE
A. Data presentation software shall reside at the terminal servers such that all PC on the BMS
Management level Network can present data in the same format. These features shall
comprise the following:
1) Video Display Units system diagram displays
B. VDU System Diagram Displays
1) Provide a software package to enable the operator to configure, modify and delete
system diagrams similar in scope to those on the control diagrams that form part of
these sub-contract documents. Real-time data shall be superimposed on the system
diagrams and shall be updated at intervals between 10 and 20 seconds. The data shall
be positioned on the display at points indicative of the instrumentation locations on
the system.
2) Provide a library of commonly used symbols in accordance with CIBSE standards
including all symbols used in the compilation of the system diagrams for this project.
3) Each system diagram shall indicate real-time data including analogue and digital
input and output points, setpoints and calculated values of the associated system. The
BMS Point Schedules and System Diagrams detailed on the control diagrams shall
provide a guideline for the selection of data to be displayed on a particular system
diagram. Preferably the status of motors, e.g. on, off, failed, etc., shall be indicated
by colour changes such as green for on, blue for off and red for failed. The system
diagrams shall also distinguish between outputs in the BMS manual control mode and
in the BMS software control mode. Where necessary to enhance the understanding of
the data displayed use alphanumeric text. The graphics shall be fully animated such
that they clearly indicate the status of motors.
4) Provide a hierarchy of VDU displays that will enable an operator, for example, to
progress from a diagram of the building, to a particular floor in the building and to a
particular zone on the floor. The selection at each stage shall be by cursor control
using a mouse or keyboard arrow buttons.

5) Provide icons on displays to enable easy access from one display to a related display.
For example, provide a target box on the system diagram for a group of VAV
terminal units that will enable one-step access to the associated air-handling unit.
6) A system diagram shall be provided, at minimum, for the following:
a. Each of the systems detailed in the point definition sections of these sub-
contract documents. This shall include at minimum each air handling unit and
each extract and supply fan system, each chilled and condenser water system
and each system monitored and controlled via a third party interface.
b. Each VAV/FCU terminal unit. This shall show the location of each VAV and
FCU on the floor, the zone temperatures, the mode of operation, e.g. occupied
mode, unoccupied mode, standby mode, etc. of the terminal units. The zones
covered by each VAV and FCU terminal unit shall be outlined and zones with
temperatures in alarm shall be red.
c. As for b. above but for the lighting.
d. As for b. above but for the combined lighting and VAV/FCU terminal units.
e. As for b. above but for the FAS.
f. As for b. above but for the security devices
g. Combined security, FAS and lighting on each floor. This shall show the
location of each security and fire alarm device on the floor, the status of each
security and fire alarm device and the status of each zone of lighting. A
device(s) that has indicated a security or a fire alarm shall be clearly identified.
It shall be possible by clicking on the appropriate icon on the full floor display
for the operator to zoom in on half of a floor.
h. All other schematics as detailed throughout these sub-contract documents.
1) The BMS Specialist shall submit a complete set of the proposed system
diagrams at the shop drawing stage of the project. The BMS Specialist
shall modify the system diagrams as requested by the Engineer
following shop drawing review at no additional cost to the Employer.
PART 4 - BMS CONTROLLERS
4.1 BMS CONTROLLERS: GENERAL
A. There shall be 3 types of BMS control panels:
1) Communications Control Panels (CCP)

2) Distributed Control panels (DCP)
3) Unitary Controllers (UC)
B. All BACnet controllers shall be based on native BACnet and shall support all applicable
BIBBs from the data sharing, alarm event, schedule, trend and device manager groups.
Standard BACnet object types supported by the controllers shall include:
1) Binary input and output and value

2) Analogue input, output and value,
3) Multi-state input and output
4) Loop, calendar, notification class, command, file, program, schedule, group, event
enrolment and device.

5) Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically approved by the
Employer.
C. All LonWorks controllers shall use SNVTs which are approved by the LonMark
Association and which are published by the LonMark Association. Configuration properties
shall be standard configuration property types (SCPTs) as defined by the LonMark
Association.
D. Following a loss of power the PC, CCP, DCP and UC shall reboot in an orderly fashion and
attain a normal operating status within 2 minutes of the return of power. This shall be
accomplished without operator intervention.
4.2 BMS CONTROLLERS: COMMUNICATION CONTROL PANELS (CCP)
A. The Communication Control Panels shall be programmable controllers on the BMS primary
LAN and shall undertake two roles:
1) A native BACnet/IP to LonWorks gateway between the BMS Management level and
LonWorks controllers at the BMS Automation Level. These shall only be provided if
the BMS Specialist is unable to offer native BACnet controllers. These gateways
shall allow peer-to-peer communication of all the LonWorks controllers with any
other LonWorks or BACnet controllers in the system.
2) A Gateway interface to thirds party monitors/controllers, if the data communicated
from the third party system cannot be provided in the form of BACNet Objects.
B. The CCP shall incorporate software as necessary to provide communications on the network
including Network Interface Cards if necessary. Additionally, if the CCP acts as a gateway,
then the CCP shall incorporate all software as necessary to perform this function including
any change of protocol between the networks. The BMS specialist shall provide the gateway
and complete documentation to the BMS specialist.
C. Communication Control Panels shall also meet the following requirements:
1) Provide integral network communication connections.

2) CCP shall be totally independent of any other LAN/BMS Management level Network
nodes for their operating functions.
3) CCP failure shall not place any BMS component or any component controlled by the
BMS in a situation that may cause damage to equipment or harm or discomfort to
building occupants and operations staff. The failure of a CCP shall not affect the
operation of any other network node.
4) The failure of any CCP shall be annunciated as a critical alarm at the OIW.
5) Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal strips. Each
termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed in the shop and record
drawings.
6) Each CCP shall have, at minimum, a 16-bit microprocessor.
7) All CCP shall be powered from a UPS source, but memory shall be battery backed
RAM. Battery shall be rechargeable with a minimum life of 7 years and shall be
capable of providing data retention for a minimum of 60 days.
8) Provide a real-time clock at each CCP. The real-time clock at the CCP shall be
synchronized from the real-time clock at the terminal server at least once every 24
hours.
9) Provide a hardware or software watchdog timer.

10) Provide interoperability documentation for the CCP. All the data related to the CCP
shall be presented along with their respective BACnet object ID created in the system,
along with their PICS, BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and write
data via integration of the CCP with another system in future. This may be part of the
overall interoperability documentation.
11) The CCP shall have a port for the connection of POT and HHT.
12) The CCP shall be housed in the enclosure panels as detailed in the “PANELS &
ENLCOSURES” Paragraph.
4.3 BMS CONTROLLERS: DISTRIBUTED CONTROL PANELS (DCP)
A. The DCPs shall be standalone, shall reside on the automation level and shall meet the
1) DDC controllers shall be freely programmable and shall have an I/O capability to
handle major items of equipment such as air handling units.
2) DCP shall interface via Point Interface Modules (PIM) to the field instrumentation
and final control elements.
3) DCP may be used for any equipment monitored and controlled by the BMS. A
dedicated DCP shall be provided at minimum to monitor and control the following:
a. A single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated DCP).
b. Other major items of equipment.
1) The DCP shall control its own communications so that the failure of any
one node, including any PC, shall not inhibit communications on the
network between the remaining nodes. Provide integral network
communication connections.
2) DCP shall be totally independent of any other primary and secondary
LAN nodes for their monitoring and control functions. DCP shall
monitor and control entire systems, multiple DCP for a single system
shall not be allowed.
3) Where a DCP receives data from other nodes, such as an outdoor air
temperature, which is used for a global system program strategy
executed at that DCP, then alternative control strategies shall be
automatically initiated, based on operator definable default values, if
there is a loss of communication of the required data.
4) DCP failure shall not place any BMS component or any BMS controlled
component in a situation that may cause damage to equipment or harm
or discomfort to building occupants and operations staff. The failure of
a DCP shall not affect the operation of any other network node.
5) The failure of any DCP shall be annunciated as a critical alarm at the
OIW.
6) Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal
strips. Each termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed
in the shop and record drawings.
7) Each DCP shall have its own power supplies that shall be rated such that
they will adequately accommodate all foreseeable uses of the DCP.
8) Each DCP shall have, at minimum, a 16-bit microprocessor.
9) All operating sequences, schedules and trend data for equipment
controlled by the DCP shall reside at the DCP.

10) Provide each DCP with a battery back up for the protection of volatile
memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Provide a 10-hour minimum full
function battery support capability.
11) Provide a real-time clock at each DCP. The real-time clock at the DCP
shall be synchronized from the real-time clock at the terminal server at
least once every 24 hours.
12) The DCP shall have a port for the connection of the POT.
13) DCP shall be housed in enclosures that shall meet the requirements
detailed in Section titled “Panels and Enclosures” of these specifications.
The DCP shall be placed at the same location as the equipment they
control. The BMS Specialist shall provide a suitably rated enclosure for
all associated BMS components, including the controllers, relays, wiring
guides, terminal strips, etc. The installation of the control enclosure and
the installation of all cable and containment between the field
instrumentation, including any current sensing relays in the MCC panels,
and the DCP shall be by the BMS Specialist.
14) Interfaces to field instrumentation and final control elements shall have
Point Interface Modules (PIM) that shall:
c. Enable the DCP to receive signals from the digital and analogue
instrumentation.
d. Enable the DCP to output control signals to the final control elements.
1) PIM shall be incorporated into the DCP by one or the following

methods:
e. Plug in type modules with specific or universal input/output capabilities.

f. Integral to the DCP controller board.
1) PIM shall accommodate the following point types:

g. Analogue and digital inputs.
h. Analogue and digital outputs.
i. Pulse inputs.
1) Analogue input PIM shall have a minimum 10-bit analogue-to-digital

conversion and shall interface to all of the signal types listed in the Point
Schedules. Provide LED indication of the status.
2) Analogue output PIM shall have a minimum 10-bit digital-to-analogue
conversion and shall meet all of the output signal requirements detailed
in the Point Schedules. Provide LED indication of the status.
3) Digital input and output PIM shall have electrical isolation and all relay
contacts shall be suitably rated for the application. Provide LED
indication of the status.
4) All PIM shall be easily exchanged and the failure of one PIM shall not
affect any other PIM. Field terminations shall be such that the removal
of a failed PIM shall not require the removal and reconnecting of field
device cable terminations.
5) Provide LED on the PIM to indicate the status of each PIM.
6) All PIM shall be such that all output points can be manually positioned
via an on board on-off-auto or potentiometer dial as applicable to the
individual point.

7) Control shall be based on either three term algorithms, i.e. proportional

plus integral plus derivative, or two term algorithms, i.e. proportional
plus integral, unless specified otherwise.
8) DCP mounted on vibrating equipment, such as on air handling units,
shall have vibration isolation protection that ensures their satisfactory
operation.
9) DCP shall have opto-isolation or equivalent.
10) DCP shall be BACnet or LonWorks controllers and shall comply with
all of the requirements of ASHRAE SSPC/135 and ANSI/EIA-709.1
respectively.
11) The BMS Specialist shall provide interoperability documentation for the
BACnet DCP. All the data related to the DCP shall be presented along
with their respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with
their PICS, BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and write
data via integration of the DCP with another system in future. This may
be part of the overall interoperability documentation.
12) The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the LonWorks
controllers (if provided) including details of all SNVTs, SCPTs,
UNVTs, UCPTs and External Interface Files (XIF). The LonWorks
interoperability data shall also include their respective BACnet object ID
generated in the system against their LonWorks SNVT/SCPT data and
method statements to read and write data via integration of the DCP with
another system in future. This may be part of the overall interoperability
documentation.
4.4 BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER: GENERAL
A. Unitary Controllers (UC) shall be "freely programmable" controllers with pre-packaged

operating sequences maintained in EEPROM or flash EPROM.
B. Unitary controllers shall reside at the BMS Automation Level.
C. Customization of "freely programmable" controllers shall be possible to the extent that

variable operating parameters, such as sequences of operation, setpoints, control loop
parameters, control constants, and schedules shall be changeable on-line by the OIW
operator and from the HHWT anywhere on site.
D. UC shall be on a BACnet or LonWorks BMS LAN. If LonWorks UC are provided they

shall have a 3120 or 3150 Neuron microprocessor controller.
E. UC shall provide an interface via PIM to the field instrumentation and final control elements
of the following types of equipment:
1) 1No. VAV terminal unit.

2) 1No. fan coil unit
3) Up to 6No. miscellaneous fans.
4) Up to 4No. miscellaneous pumps.
5) Up to 2No. self-contained A/C units.
6) Lighting control relays.
7) Miscellaneous input monitoring.
F. Panels meeting the requirements of DCP shall control all other types of equipment and
systems.

G. The UC shall be a node on the primary BMS LAN if it is a native BACnet/IP controller and
shall be a node on the secondary BMS LANs if it is a LonWorks controller. The UC shall
control its own communications so that the failure of any one node shall not inhibit
communications on the network between the remaining nodes and the BMS Management
level Network.
H. UC shall be totally independent of other Management and BMS Automation Level

components for their monitoring and control functions.
I. UC failure shall not place any BMS component or any BMS controlled component in a
situation that may cause damage to equipment or harm or discomfort to building occupants
and operations staff. The failure of a UC shall not affect the operation of any other
Management and BMS Automation Level components.
J. The failure of any UC shall be annunciated as a critical alarm at the OIW.
K. Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal strips. Each
termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed in the shop and record drawings.
L. UC shall be powered from the electrical service that serves the equipment monitored and
controlled by the UC. The BMS Specialist shall furnish transformers suitably rated for the
application. The UC shall be housed in an enclosure that provides adequate physical and
electrical protection.
M. Each UC shall have, at minimum, an 8-bit microprocessor.
N. Provide each UC with a battery back up for the protection of volatile memory for a
minimum of 72 hours. Batteries shall be rated for a 7-year life. The UC serving VAV
terminal units and FCU shall not be placed on UPS power.
O. Provide a real time clock at each UC. The real-time clock at the UC shall be synchronized
from the real-time clock at the terminal server at least once every 24 hours.
P. UC shall be housed in enclosures that shall meet the requirements detailed in Section titled
“Panels and Enclosures”. The UC shall be placed at the same location as the equipment they
control. The BMS Specialist shall provide a suitably rated enclosure for all associated BMS
components, including the controllers, relays, wiring guides, terminal strips, etc. The
installation of the control enclosure shall be by the BMS Specialist and all cable between the
field instrumentation and the BMS DDC controllers shall be by the BMS Specialist.
Q. Interfaces to field instrumentation and final control elements shall have integral PIM that
will:
1) Enable the UC to receive signals from the digital and analogue instrumentation.
2) Enable the UC to output control signals to the final control elements.
R. PIM shall accommodate the following point types:
1) Analogue and digital inputs.

2) Analogue and digital outputs.
3) Pulse inputs.
S. Analogue input PIM shall have a minimum 8-bit analogue-to-digital conversion and shall
interface to all of the signal types listed in the Point Schedules.

T. Analogue output PIM shall have a minimum 8-bit digital-to-analogue conversion and shall
meet all of the output signal requirements detailed in the Point Schedules.
U. Digital input and output PIM shall have electrical isolation and all relay contacts shall be
suitably rated for the application.
V. UC shall control and monitor all points associated with a system. Multiple UC shall not be
used to control and monitor a single system.
W. All applications programs shall reside at the UC.
X. Operating sequences for UC shall be resident at the UC. Database changes shall be
undertaken from the OIW and POT. Schedules and trend data shall reside at the UC.
Y. Control shall be based on either three term algorithms, i.e. proportional plus integral plus
derivative, or two term algorithms, i.e. proportional plus integral, unless specified otherwise.
Z. UC mounted on vibrating equipment, such as on FCU, shall have vibration isolation

protection that ensures their satisfactory operation.
AA. UC shall be native BACnet or LonWorks controllers and shall comply with all of the
requirements of ASHRAE SSPC/135 and ANSI/EIA-709.1 respectively.
BB. The BMS Specialist shall provide interoperability documentation for the UC. All the data
related to the UC shall be presented along with their respective BACnet object ID created in
the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and
write data via integration of the UC with another system in future. This may be part of the
CC. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the LonWorks controllers (if
provided) including details of all SNVTs, SCPTs, UNVTs, UCPTs and External Interface
Files (XIF) together with all addresses. The LonWorks interoperability data shall also
include the respective BACnet object ID generated in the system against their LonWorks
SNVT/SCPT data and method statements to read and write data via integration of the UC
with another system in future. This may be part of the overall interoperability
documentation.
4.5 BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER (UC): VAV TERMINAL UNITS
A. Each VAV terminal unit shall have a UC. The number and location of terminal units and
airflow rates shall be as indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.
B. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the following components for each VAV
terminal unit for interface and mounting of the UC:
1) Damper to be controlled by the UC.

2) Suitable means of mounting the UC inside or on the exterior of the VAV terminal
unit. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide a suitably constructed enclosure
with electrical barriers as required by the applicable codes and standards.
3) Multi-point averaging type flow sensor at the air inlet to the terminal unit and
calibration curve (differential pressure versus flow rate). Calibration curve shall be
maintained in a sturdy plastic pouch that shall be available on the underside of the
terminal unit.

C. The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each VAV terminal unit to
the VAV terminal unit manufacturer for factory installation by the VAV terminal unit
manufacturer:
1) Unitary controller. This shall incorporate a pressure transducer as required to monitor

the differential pressure signal generated by the multi-point averaging type flow
sensor at the inlet to the VAV terminal unit.
2) Damper actuator (this may be integrated with the UC controller)
3) 24 Vac control transformer.
D. The BMS Specialist shall furnish the temperature sensor and shall connect the temperature
sensor and its housing to the VAV terminal unit controller in the field and shall provide
cables of minimum length 15m. The sensor housing and cables shall be coiled and hung
alongside the VAV box above the ceiling during construction and enclosed in plastic wrap.
E. Provide the terminal unit manufacturer with the following documentation to coordinate the
mounting of the UC and related components:
1) Multi-colour point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring and tubing of the UC
and other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
2) Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable the
terminal unit manufacturer to undertake the installation satisfactorily.
F. The BMS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility before
commencement of fabrication to ensure that the terminal unit manufacturer's installation
procedures are satisfactory. The terminal unit manufacturer shall prepare a drawing of the
wiring for the UC and all associated instrumentation and final control elements based on the
information provided by the BMS Specialist. The terminal unit manufacturer and the BMS
Specialist shall both certify on the drawing that the drawing is correct and the drawing shall
be submitted as a shop drawing for review by the Engineer.
G. UC for each production run shall be at the terminal unit manufacturer’s factory at least 2
weeks prior to the scheduled shipment dates to the job-site. Obtain the terminal unit
shipping dates from the MEP Specialist.
H. The BMS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility at the completion of
the initial production run, prior to the shipping of any terminal units to the project site, to
inspect the installation of the UC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
I. The BMS Specialist shall enter all data into the UC and shall test the UC on site. The BMS
Specialist shall calibrate the pressure sensor and the flow rate reported by the controller
following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling plenum. This shall be done in
conjunction with the air-balancing Specialist and shall be based on the flow sensor
calibration curve (differential pressure versus flow rate) provided by the terminal unit
manufacturer. The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor.
J. It shall be the responsibility of the BMS Specialist to verify the following with the VAV
terminal unit manufacturer prior to the tender submittal:
1) The pressure differential generated by the multi-point sensors is compatible with the
instrumentation to be provided by the BMS Specialist for the specified accuracy
requirements.
2) The damper assembly is compatible with the actuator to be provided by the BMS
Specialist.

K. Provide a wall mounted space temperature sensor for the monitoring of the terminal unit
space temperature. The sensor shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1) RTD or thermistors sensors.

2) Temperature reported at the OIW shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C.
3) Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There shall be no logos,
trademarks or names visible on the enclosure and there shall be no evidence of their
removal.
4) Sensor shall have an LCD display. Temperature reported at the LCD shall have an
accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C. and the difference between the LCD and the OIW
reported temperatures shall not differ by more than 0.2 Deg.C. Cover shall be
removable to allow access to the plug for the POT.
5) The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall be space temperature and
space temperature set point.
6) The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be amended
as instructed by the Engineer at no cost to the Employer.
7) Temperature sensor housings with LCD display shall be intelligent and shall
communicate with their associated UC via a digital communications network over
screened twisted pair or equivalent LAN communication cable. This communications
network may use a proprietary protocol.
8) The temperature sensor enclosure shall be temporarily mounted alongside the VAV
box and shall be subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out design. Those
temperature sensor enclosures that are wall mounted shall be located 1500 mm above
finished floor level. Coordinate exact locations with Architectural Plans.
L. Provide differential pressure transducers for the monitoring of the terminal unit airflow rate.
The sensors shall be an integral component of the UC. The differential pressure transducer
shall meet, at minimum, the requirements:
1) Monitor the differential pressures generated by a multi-point averaging device located

in the air duct. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the multi-point
averaging sensors. Coordinate with the terminal unit manufacturer for range of
pressure differential.
2) The pressure differential transducers shall be on the UC. The terminal unit
manufacturer as part of the factory installation shall provide tubing from these sensors
to the multi-point averaging devices.
3) The differential pressure sensors shall monitor the flow rates with an accuracy of + or
- 5 percent in the flow range of 0.5 to 15 meters per second (100 to 3,000 feet per
minute). The BMS Specialist shall calibrate each differential pressure sensor in the
field following installation.
4) Provide a one-micron filter on the pressure differential sensor if it monitors a moving
air stream.
M. Furnish damper actuators, for factory mounting, meeting the following requirements:
1) Direct shaft mounting.

2) Adequate torque to properly operate the damper from fully open to fully closed
without binding.
3) Locking “V” groove or similar means to prevent slippage between actuator and shaft.
4) Removable without the requirement to remove any ductwork or flexible connections.
N. The VAV box UC shall each have the capability of monitoring and controlling the following
parameters for VAV terminal units:
1) Space temperature.

2) Air flow rate.

3) Damper modulation.
O. PI or PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within + or - 0.5 Deg. C. of the
space temperature setpoints.
P. The operator shall be able to access the UC by connecting the POT to the secondary LAN at
the space temperature sensor enclosure. If there is a wall mounted temperature enclosure it
shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain access to the ceiling plenum in order to
obtain an operator interface to the UC. At minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake
the following functions via the POT when connected to the UC at the associated temperature
sensor enclosure, via the POT when connected at the temperature enclosure, the DCP and
the CCP and via the OIW and the HHWT:
1) Change a space temperature setpoint for a single terminal unit.

2) Change a space temperature setpoint for a group of terminal units.
3) Change an alarm limit/value.
4) Change the operating mode for a single terminal unit.
5) Change the operating mode for a group of terminal units.
6) Change the schedules for a single terminal unit.
7) Change the schedules for a group of terminal units.
8) Set the air damper on a terminal unit to:
a. The maximum cooling flow rate setpoint.

b. The closed position.
c. The fully open position.
d. Minimum cooling flow rate setpoint.
1) Turn the fan on/off for a single VAV terminal unit.

2) Turn the fans on/off for a group of VAV terminal units.
Q. The POT shall be plug connectable at the space temperature sensor housing.
R. The BMS Specialist shall install data into the UC as necessary for the correct operation of
the terminal unit including:
1) Terminal unit-UC LAN address.

2) Air damper flow rate setpoints.
3) Occupied mode space temperature setpoints.
4) Unoccupied mode space temperature setpoints.
5) Control constants.
6) Engineering units conversion factors.
7) Select the button to be an occupied/unoccupied switch, a valet parking interface or no
function.
8) Default operating schedules.
9) Definition of terminal unit type.
10) Other parameters as necessary to define the operation of the terminal unit in
accordance with these specifications.
S. Following installation of the terminal unit, the BMS Specialist shall calibrate on-site the
instrumentation associated with the following monitored parameters:
2) Airflow rate sensor.

T. Following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling space the BMS Specialist shall
undertake the following tasks:
1) Physically connect the UC into the BMS LAN.

2) Enter all parameters as detailed above.
3) Verify that the UC modulates the air duct dampers from fully open to fully closed and
vice versa within the specified time and verify either visually or by feel that the
damper closes fully under UC control.
4) Verify that the terminal unit-UC is satisfactorily integrated into the BMS LAN.
5) Verify that the operating sequences are correct and that there is stable modulation of
the air damper.
6) Assist the Air Balancing and MEP Specialists as required for the complete
commissioning, calibration and operational verification of the AC and terminal unit
systems.
U. UC shall be native BACnet or LonWorks controllers and shall comply with all of the
V. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the BACnet DCP including the
PICS and details of all BIBBs and addresses.
W. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the LonWorks controllers (if
Files (XIF) together with all addresses.
4.6 BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER (UC): FAN COIL UNITS
A. Each fan coil unit shall have a UC. The number, type and location of FCU shall be as
indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.
B. The FCU manufacturer shall provide the following components for each fan coil unit for
interface and mounting of the UC:
1) 24 Vac fan control relay interface.

2) Suitable mounting device for the temperature sensors for those FCU that have the
temperature sensor located in the recirculation port. The FCU manufacturer shall
provide a suitably constructed enclosure with electrical barriers as required by the
applicable codes and standards.
C. The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each FCU to the MEP
Specialist for installation by the MEP Specialist:
1) Unitary controller.
2) 24 Vac control transformer.
3) Temperature sensors for those FCU that have the temperature sensor located in the
recirculation port.
4) Chilled water valve and actuator. The MEP Specialist shall install the valve.
5) Provide the FCU manufacturer with the following documentation to coordinate the
mounting of the UC and related components:
a. Multi-colour point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring and tubing of
the UC and other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
b. Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable
the terminal unit manufacturer to undertake the installation satisfactorily.

D. Provide a wall mounted space temperature sensor for the monitoring of the space
temperature associated with the FCU. The sensor shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
1) RTD or thermistor sensors.

2) Temperature reported at the OIW shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C.
3) Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There shall be no logos,
trademarks or names on the enclosure and there shall be no evidence of their removal.
4) Sensor shall have an LCD display. Temperature reported at the LCD shall have an
accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C. and the difference between the LCD and the OIW
reported temperatures shall not differ by more than 0.2 Deg.C. Cover shall be
removable to allow access to the plug for the POT.
5) The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall be space temperature, space
temperature set point and fan speed.
6) The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be amended
as instructed by the Engineer at no cost to the Employer.
7) Temperature sensor housings with LCD display shall be intelligent and shall
communicate with their associated UC via a digital communications network over
screened twisted pair cable or equivalent. This communications network may use a
proprietary protocol. Enclosures associated with FCU that have speed control shall
also incorporate speed selection buttons.
8) The temperature sensor enclosure shall be temporarily mounted alongside the FCU
and shall be subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out design. Those
temperature sensor enclosures that are wall mounted shall be located 1500 mm above
finished floor level. Coordinate exact locations with Architectural Plans.
E. Provide the MEP Specialist with the following documentation within 2 weeks of receiving
the request from the MEP Specialist:
1) Multi-colour point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring of the FCU controller
and other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
2) Wiring instructions for those units controlled by the intelligent thermostats. The BMS
Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU that shall have programmable thermostats.
3) Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable the
MEP Specialist to undertake the installation satisfactorily.
4) The BMS Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU that shall have the temperature
sensor located in the recirculation port.
F. The BMS Specialist shall meet with the MEP Specialist before commencement of the UC
installation and cabling to ensure that the proposed installation procedures are satisfactory.
The MEP Specialist shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the UC and all associated
instrumentation and final control elements based on the information provided by the BMS
Specialist. The MEP Specialist and the BMS Specialist shall both certify on the drawing
that the drawing is correct and the drawing shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review
by the Engineer.
G. UC for each production run shall be handed over to the MEP Specialist at least 2 weeks
prior to the scheduled shipment dates to the job-site. Obtain the FCU shipping dates from
the MEP Specialist.
H. The BMS Specialist shall periodically meet with the MEP Specialist to inspect the
installation of the UC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
I. The BMS Specialist shall enter all data into the UC at the site after the FCU has been
installed.

J. The UC shall monitor and control the following parameters for FCU:
2) Fan on/off control.
3) Cooling coil valve.
4) Setpoint reset (applicable only to those units with wall mounted enclosures having a
setpoint reset capability)
5) Fan speed control selection (applicable only to those units with wall mounted
enclosures having a setpoint reset capability)
K. PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within + or - 0.5 Deg. C. of the space
temperature setpoints.
L. The operator shall be able to access the UC by connecting the POT to the UC LAN at the
space temperature sensor enclosure. It shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain
access to the ceiling plenum in order to obtain an operator interface to the UC. At
minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake the following functions via the HHWT
when communicating with the BMS Management level Network, via the POT when
connected at the temperature sensor housing, at the DCP and at the CCP and via any OIW:
1) Change space temperature setpoints for a single FCU.

2) Change an alarm limit/value.
3) Change the operating mode for a single FCU.
4) Change the schedules for a single FCU.
5) Turn the fan on/off for a single FCU.
6) Set the cooling coil valve to fully open and fully closed and any intermediate
position.
M. The BMS Specialist shall install data into the UC on site as necessary for the correct
operation of the FCU including:
1) FCU-UC LAN address.

2) Occupied space temperature setpoints.
3) Unoccupied space temperature setpoints.
4) Control constants.
5) Engineering units conversion factors.
6) Default operating schedules.
7) Definition of FCU type.
8) Other parameters as necessary to define the operation of the FCU in accordance with
these specifications.
N. The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor at the project site.
O. Following the installation of the FCU the BMS Specialist shall undertake the following
tasks:
1) Physically connect the UC into the BMS LAN.

2) Enter all parameters that may not have been entered before shipment of the FCU to
the site.
3) Verify that the UC modulates the cooling coil valve from fully open to fully closed
and vice versa.
4) Verify that the FCU-UC is satisfactorily integrated into the LAN.
5) Verify that the operating sequences are correct and that there is stable modulation of
the cooling coil valve.
6) Calibrate the temperature sensor.

P. UC shall have opto-isolation or equivalent protection.
Q. UC shall be native BACnet or LonWorks controllers and shall comply with all of the
R. The BMS Specialist shall provide interoperability documentation for the UC. All the data
related to the UC shall be presented along with their respective BACnet object ID created in
the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and
write data via integration of the UC with another system in future. This may be part of the
S. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the LonWorks controllers (if
Files (XIF) together with all addresses. The LonWorks interoperability data shall also
include their respective BACnet object ID generated in the system against their LonWorks
SNVT/SCPT data and method statements to read and write data via integration of the UC
with another system in future. This may be part of the overall interoperability
documentation.
4.7 UNITARY CONTROLLER COMPATBILITY TESTS FOR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Prior to shipping any VAV/CAV terminal units to site, the BMS Specialist and the
VAV/CAV terminal unit manufacturer shall perform the tests and inspections detailed
herein. A full report must be submitted to the Engineer for approval before shipping the
equipment. The Engineer may reject any result that is found to contradict the sub-contract
requirements.
B. Physical Inspection:
1) Inspect installation of damper actuator on the unit (Verify rigid installation. Observe
full open to full close stroking of actuator motor without binding.
2) Inspect installation of cabling and sensor tubing from the Unitary Controller (UC) to
end devices.
3) Inspect mounting of controller on unit. Verify accessibility for service after
installation.
C. UC Flow Rate Performance (VAV boxes only):
1) Verify all UC software parameters are provided to meet the specifications.

2) Verify the ability to provide complete shut off of the air-cooling damper.
3) Verify the accuracy of the multipoint flow sensor is within specification tolerances at
various air positions between the minimum and maximum ranges of the terminal unit.
Use at least six damper positions (lab reading vs. controller reading vs. damper
position). Chart this performance on a table indicating accuracy deviations and also
chart on a graph (l/s or m3/s vs. % damper position) indicating lab and controller
readings on the same graph.
4) Move the flexible air duct inlet (simulate a kink in the flexible ductwork) to verify
there is not a requirement for straight lengths of ductwork to maintain airflow rate
sensor accuracy.
5) Verify the controller operation is stable at low flow inlet conditions (less than the
multipoint flow sensor rated accuracy limit). Record minimum inlet velocity at
which accurate sensor accuracy and control was maintained.

6) If cold air is available in a controlled and conditioned space, verify that the controller
can maintain space conditions at + or - 0.5 Deg. C. around the setpoint (VAV boxes
only).
7) Set the air damper to maintain a fixed flow rate setpoint. Vary the inlet static
pressure from 25 to 400Pa. in 25 Pa upward increments. Record the flow rate
setpoint, UC controller reading of airflow rate, and the laboratory reading at each
setpoint. Vary the inlet static pressure from 400 Pa to 25 Pa in 25 Pa downward
increments noting the same readings. Plot the performance of this test to verify lack
of hysterisis effects. Perform this test at minimum and maximum air-cooling flow
rate setpoints.
D. UC Electrical Performance:
1) Reduce the input voltage on the UC to below 85% for an extended period. Note if
controller performance is affected.
2) Reduce the input voltage on the UC slowly to witness at what voltage the UC will
shut down and verify that the shut down was orderly.
3) Increase the input voltage on the UC slowly to witness at what voltage the UC will re-
enable itself and verify that the restart was orderly.
4) Verify that during the operation of the UC, electrical noise is not induced back into
the electrical system. This shall require an oscilloscope.
4.8 BACNET ROUTERS
A. Provide all BACnet routers as necessary to meet the requirements of these specifications.
B. BACnet routers shall be native BACnet only. Proprietary and other standard protocols shall
not be provided. Routers shall be provided as necessary to connect one medium to another,
e.g. BACnet Arcnet to BACnet MS/TP, etc.
C. The BACnet routers shall, at minimum, support BIBBs for data sharing, alarm and event
management, scheduling, trending and device and network management.

PART 5 - THIRD PARTY INTERFACES
5.1 GENERAL
(SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY FOR EACH BMS - NOTE THAT NOT ALL
INTERFACES WILL BE SOFTWARE INTERFACES AND THAT IN SOME
INSTANCES THE BMS SHALL MONITOR INFORMATION AVAILABLE IN OTHER
THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS VIA HARDWIRED INTERFACES. THESE INTERFACES
ARE TO BE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED IN THIS SECTION.)
A. The CCP used for third party systems integration shall be software programmable gateways
that shall provide a native BACNet/IP to third party ELV building system gateway if the
third party ELV building system does not provide data in a BACNet Object format meeting
all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135.
B. At minimum the third party protocols shall include Modbus, JBus, N2, OPC, and
LonWorks.
C. The third party ELV building system shall have a communications port and shall exchange
information with the Management Level Network in a BACNet/IP format.
D. The Third Party Supplier scope shall include the following:
1) Provide third party controller with a communication data port necessary for the data
exchange with the BMS.
2) Provide the Gateway that shall provide a native BACNet/IP to third party ELV
building system only if the third party ELV building system does not provide data in
a BACNet Object format meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard SSPC
135.
3) Connect the Gateway if provided to the Third Party System.
4) Provide to the BMS supplier the BACNet Objects IDs of all BACNet Objects that are
to be transferred to the BMS, as well as complete documentation and information
required for the mapping.
5) Map the BACNet Object IDs as received from the BMS supplier to the third Party
Controller.
E. The BMS Supplier Scope shall include the following:
1) Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between the
Communication Control Panel (CCP) and the Third Party System Gateway or directly
to the Third Party System Data Port if third party ELV building system provides data
in a BACNet Object format meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard
SSPC 135.
2) Map the BACNet Object IDs as received from the Third Party System Supplier to the
BMS
3) Provide the Third Party System Supplier with the BACNet Objects IDs of Objects to
be transferred to the Third Party System, as well as complete documentation and
information required for the mapping

5.2 THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION TESTS
A. The interface between the BMS and each third party ELV building system shall be
demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the mechanical contractor who shall
liaise with each party concerned. It shall be conclusively demonstrated that a BMS
workstation on the Management Level Network can communicate with the third party
system and vice versa.
B. The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and the third party
system shall verify, at minimum, that:
1) All data communicated from the third party system to the Management Level
Network is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply completely with ASHRAE
SSPC/135.
2) All data points mapped from the Management Level Network to the third party
system are displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.
3) All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering units and
significant digits on the third party system and the BMS workstation.
4) All points mapped from the third party system to the Management Level Network
meet all of the specifications detailed in the BMS specifications for points directly
monitored/controlled by the BMS.
5) Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
6) Both systems restart and communications between the two systems resume following
a power failure without operator intervention.
5.3 INTERFACE BETWEEN BMS AND CHILLERS
A. Each chiller shall have a microprocessor based unit controller. A chiller system controller
(Chiller Plant Manager) shall communicate with the individual chiller unit controllers. The
chiller system controller shall supervise all of the chiller unit controllers and shall have a
data port for the exchange of information with the BMS Automation Level.
B. The chiller system controller/BMS Automation Level interface shall, at minimum, enable
the following data to be transferred from the chiller system controller to the BMS at the
Automation Level Network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Entering Chilled Water Temperature (monitoring point).

2) Leaving Chilled Water Temperature (monitoring point).
3) Evaporator Pressure (monitoring point).
4) Auxiliary Oil Pressure (monitoring point).
5) Bearing Pressure (monitoring point).
6) Gear Pressure (monitoring point).
7) Evaporator Differential Pressure (monitoring point).
8) Evaporator Temperature (monitoring point).
9) Suction Temperature (monitoring point).
10) Pre-Alarm (Monitoring Point).
11) Gear Box High Temperature Setting (Monitoring Point).
12) Gear Box Low Temperature Setting (Monitoring Point).
13) Oil Compressor Status (Monitoring Point).
14) Flow Safety (Monitoring Point).
15) Motor Safety (Monitoring Point).
16) Motor Run Status (Monitoring Point).
17) Rear Thrust Bearing Temperature (Monitoring Point).
18) Front Thrust Bearing Temperature (Monitoring Point).

19) Gear Oil Temperature (Monitoring Point).

20) Current Limit (Control Point).
21) Chilled Water Supply Temperature Reset (Control Point).
22) Chilled Water Pump Run Status (Monitoring Point).
23) Chilled Water Pump Alarm (Monitoring Point).
24) Condenser Water Pump Run Status (Monitoring Point).
25) Condenser Water Pump Alarm Status (Monitoring Point).
26) Cooling tower fan status.
27) Entering Condenser Water Temperature (Monitoring Point).
28) Leaving Condenser Water Temperature (Monitoring Point).
29) Shutdown/cycling messages
30) Record of last 4No. cycling or safety shutdowns for each chiller
31) Any other information available from the chiller system controller as selected by the
Employer.
C. The chiller system controller/BMS Automation Level interface shall, at minimum, enable
the following data to be transferred from the BMS Automation Level to the chiller system
controller (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Chilled water supply temperature setpoint reset.

2) Chiller demand limit reset.
5.4 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE EMERGENCY GENERATORS
A. The interface between the generator and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall
be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The emergency
generator shall have a microprocessor based monitoring and control system with a data port
to enable the exchange of information with the Management level Network.
B. The digital communications interface between the emergency generator monitoring and
control system and the Management level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following
monitoring information to be transferred to the Management Level Network (SPECIFIER
TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Generator set summary alarm (If available at the generator control centre the BMS
sub-contractor may alternatively monitor this point via a volt free contact)
2) Generator set engine oil pressure
3) Generator set high water temperature
4) Generator set low fuel level
5) Generator set battery voltage
6) Generator set overcrank alarm
7) Generator set overspeed alarm
8) High oil temperature
9) Low fuel pressure alarm
10) Generator set winding temperature alarm
11) Generator set bearing temperature alarm
12) Generator set engine run status
13) Low coolant level alarm
14) Generator set loss of field alarm
15) Engine fail to start alarm
16) Engine speed
17) Flue gas temperature
18) Phase-to-phase and phase-to neutral voltages
19) Phase-to-phase currents

20) Neutral current

21) Frequency
22) Load (kW)
23) Demand (kVA)
24) Power factor
25) kWh supplied
26) Hours run
27) Load shed priority signal.
28) Any other information available from the diesel generator controller as selected by
the Employer.
C. The digital communications interface between the emergency generator monitoring and
control system and the Management level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following
monitoring information to be transferred from the Management Level Network to the
emergency generator controller (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY): SPECIFIER
TO PROVIDE DETAILS OF ANY EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION REQUIRED
FROM OTHER ELV SYSTEMS TO THE EMERGENCY GENERATORS SUCH AS THE
STATUS OF THE GAS TURBINES.
5.5 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. The interface between the fire alarm and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall
be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The Fire Alarm
System shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable the transfer of
information to the Management level Network. The communication shall be uni-directional
from the FAS to the Management Level Network only. The FAS shall be on its own wide
area network.
B. The start and end of any message shall be uniquely identified and the message shall indicate
the following information at minimum (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Time
2) Date
3) Zone of incidence
4) Indication of whether it is a fire alarm, return to normal or Fire Alarm System fault.
5) In the event of a fire the Fire Alarm System shall communicate a list of all equipment
shut down and started by the Fire Alarm System.
C. There shall be no transfer of data from the Management Level Network to the Fire Alarm
System.
D. The BMS shall automatically shut down all VAV and CAV terminal units and FCU serving
the zone of incidence in the event of a fire alarm and shall automatically restart equipment
following a return to normal message, as detailed in the Part titled “Equipment Restart
Following a Fire Alarm” in this Section of the documents.
E. The BMS shall generate an alarm if the status of any equipment differs from that
communicated by the Fire Alarm System to the Management Level Network.

5.6 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. The interface between the lighting control system and the BMS shall be by means of
hardwires and shall be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR
The lighting controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable
the exchange of information with the Management Level Network.
B. The interface between the lighting controller and the Management level Network shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the lighting controller
to the Management Level Network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Lighting relay status for each individual relay.

2) Lighting load (kW) for each zone.
3) Lighting consumption (kWh) for each zone.
4) Monitor zone lighting levels.
5) Any other information available from the lighting controller as selected by the
Employer.
C. The interface between the lighting controller and the Management level Network shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the lighting controller
from the Management Level Network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Lighting relay on and off control for each zone.

2) Set zone lighting levels.
3) Change the schedule for any lighting zone.
4) Ascertain the lighting status (on/off) and dimming status of any lighting zone.
5.7 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD)
A. The interface between the VSD and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall be as
listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The variable speed drive
(VSD) controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port that enables the
exchange of data between the VSD controller and the BMS Automation Level.
B. The interface between the variable speed drive controller and the Automation level Network
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the BMS
Automation Level (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Start and stop control.

2) Speed control.
3) Speed reference feedback.
4) Motor operating status.
5) VSD alarm.
6) Motor power in kW.
7) Motor kWh.
8) Motor current.
9) Motor voltage.
10) Hours run.
11) DC link voltage.
12) Thermal load on motor.
13) Thermal load on VSD.
14) Heat sink temperature.
15) Any other information available from the VSD controller as selected by the
Employer.

C. The interface between the VSD controller and the Management level Network shall enable,
at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level
Network to the VSD controller (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Speed control signal.

2) Start/stop control signal.
5.8 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE UPS
A. The interface between the UPS and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall be as
listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The UPS controller shall
be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable the transfer of data between the
UPS controller and the Management Level Network.
B. The interface between the UPS controller and the Management level Network shall enable,
Network to the bms (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Bypass Voltage X-Y

2) Bypass Voltage Y-Z
3) Bypass Voltage Z-X
4) Bypass Voltage X-N
5) Bypass Voltage Y-N
6) Bypass Voltage Z-N
7) Critical Voltage X-Y
8) Critical Voltage Y-Z
9) Critical Voltage Z-X
10) Critical Voltage X-N
11) Critical Voltage Y-N
12) Critical Voltage Z-N
13) Critical Current X
14) Critical Current Y
15) Critical Current Z
16) Critical Bus Frequency
17) Critical Bus KVA
18) Critical Bus KW
19) Critical Bus Capacity
20) UPM DC Voltage
21) UPM Battery Amperage
22) UPM Input Voltage X-Y
23) UPM Input Voltage Y-Z
24) UPM Input Voltage Z-X
25) UPM Battery Discharging
26) UPM Low Battery Warning
27) UPM Output Overload
28) UPM Fuse Failure
29) UPM Ambient over Temperature
30) UPM DC Ground
31) UPM Blower Failure
32) UPM Control Power Failure
33) UPM Overload Shutdown
34) SCC Output Overload
35) SCC Emergency off
36) SCC Load on Bypass

37) SCC Static Switch Disabled

38) SCC Output Over/under Voltage
39) SCC UPM Summary Alarm
40) Any other information available from the UPS controller as selected by the Employer.
C. The interface between the UPS controller and the Management level Network shall enable,
Network to the UPS (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) XXXXXX.
2) XXXXXX.
3) XXXXXX.
4) XXXXXX.
5.9 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND PACKAGED A/C UNITS
A. The interface between the packaged AC units and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires
and shall be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The
Packaged A/C unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to
enable the exchange of data between the BMS Automation Level and the Packaged A/C unit
controller.
B. The interface between the Packaged A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation Level
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Packaged
A/C unit controllers to the BMS Automation Level (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS
NECESSARY):
a. Unit Enable/disable
b. Unit Status
c. Unit Alarm
d. Unit Enable/disable Control
e. Fan Status
f. General Alarm
g. Unit Supply Air Temperature
h. Unit Static Pressure Sensor
i. Refrigerant System Alarm
j. Compressor Status
k. Dirty Filter Alarm
l. Unit Capacity
m. Any other information available from the packaged A/C controller as selected by the
Employer.
C. The interface between the Packaged A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation Level
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the BMS
Automation Level to the Packaged A/C unit controllers (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS
NECESSARY):
1) Stop/start enable.
2) reset temperature setpoint.
5.10 INTERFACE BETWEEN BMS AND COMPUTER ROOM A/C UNITS

A. The interface between the computer room AC units and the BMS shall be by means of
The Computer Room A/C unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a
data port to enable the exchange of data between the BMS Automation Level and the
Computer Room A/C unit controller.
B. The interface between the Computer room A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation
Level shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the
Computer Room A/C unit controller to the BMS Automation Level (SPECIFIER TO
AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Cooling Stages
2) Dehumidification
3) Humidification
4) High Temp Alarm
5) Low Temp Alarm
6) Air Flow Loss
7) High Hum. Alarm
8) Low Hum. Alarm
9) Change Filters
10) Local Alarm
11) High Head Pressure
12) Humidity Status
13) Temperature
14) Humidity
15) Unit Status
16) Any other information available from the computer room A/C unit controller as
selected by the Employer.
C. The interface between the Computer Room A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation
Level shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the BMS
Automation to the Computer room A/C unit controllers (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS
NECESSARY):
1) Stop/start enable.
2) Reset temperature setpoint.
5.11 INTERFACE BETWEEN BMS AND SWITCHBOARD ELECTRONIC METERS
A. The interface between the switchboard electronic meters and the BMS shall be by means of
The switchboard electronic meters shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port
to enable the exchange of data between the Management Level Network and the meter.
Meters shall monitor all incomers of all MDBs and SMDBs. Additionally there shall be
hardwired interfaces between the BMS and the low voltage distribution boards as detailed
below.
B. The interface between the meter and the Management Level Network shall enable, at
minimum, the following information to be transferred from the meter to the Management
Level network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) RMS Current per phase.

2) RMS Voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral.
3) Current demand.

4) Peak current.
5) Watt-hours, three phase total.
6) Watts per phase and three-phase total.
7) KVA per phase and three-phase total.
8) Watt demand.
9) KVA demand.
10) KVAR per phase and three-phase total.
11) KVAR demand.
12) Power factor per phase and three-phase total.
13) Power factor average.
14) Peak readings for watts, KVA and KVAR.
15) KVARH Lag.
16) KVARH Lead.
17) Frequency.
18) Any other information available from the metering system as selected by the
Employer.
C. The interface between the meter and the BMS Automation Level shall enable, at minimum,
the following information to be transferred from the Management Level Network to the
meter (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) XXXXXXXX
2) XXXXXXXX
5.12 HARDWIRED INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND LOW VOLTAGE

SWITCHEBOARD
A. The BMS shall have the following hardwired interfaces with the low voltage switchboards:
1) ON and OFF control of all circuit breakers in the MDBs and the SMDBs.
2) Open, closed and trip status for all feeder circuit breakers of all MDBs and SMDBs.
3) kW reading for all feeders of all MDBs and SMDBs. Provide necessary
instrumentation.
PART 6 - FIELD INSTUMENTATION: INPUT DEVICES
6.1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
A. Outside Air Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Ventilated white PVC sun screen.

2) Wall mount weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.
3) 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of
resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
4) Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of  0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg.F.).
5) Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet monitoring
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration
6) Temperature Range of 0 Deg. C to 50 Deg C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F).
6.2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – SINGLE POINT

A. Provide duct mounted, single point, temperature sensor as follows:
1) In ducts less than 1 m2 in cross-sectional area.

2) In ducts greater than 1m2 in cross-sectional area if there is no heating coil and no
cooling coil and no mixing of air flows of different temperatures upstream.
B. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Stainless steel probe of length between one-third and two-thirds of the duct width.
3) Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg.
F.).
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
5) Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
6) Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F).
6.3 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – AVERAGING TYPE
A. Provide duct mounted, averaging, temperature sensor as follows:
1) In ducts greater than 1 m2 in cross-sectional area..
B. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Probe length of 3.66m (12 feet) minimum or 3.25m per m2. (one linear foot per
square foot) of duct cross-sectional area., whichever is greater.
2) Copper sheathed construction.
4) Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of  1.0 Deg. C. (2.0 Deg. F.)
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
6) Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
7) Suitable supports at all bends and at intermediate points to prevent movement in the
air stream.
8) Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F.).
6.4 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: WALL MOUNTED – PUBLIC SPACES
A. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the following:
1) White protective enclosure. There shall be no manufacturer's logos, name or

thermometer on casing.
2) Location shall be selected by the Engineer. No sensor shall be mounted until the
Employer gives specific location instructions.
3) 10,000 ohm at 25 Deg. C. (77 Deg. F.) thermistor or 100/1,000 ohm platinum RTD
with a minimum temperature coefficient of resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
4) Monitored temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of  0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg.
F.).
5) Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required
6) Temperature range of 10 Deg.C. to 60 Deg.C.

7) Sensor shall have and LCD display.
6.5 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: WALL MOUNTED – PUBLIC SPACES
A. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the requirements for temperature
sensors as specified in section: "BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER: VAV
TERMINAL UNITS".
6.6 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: WALL MOUNTED – FCU APPLICATION
A. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the requirements for temperature
sensors as specified in section: "BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER: FAN
COIL UNITS CONTROLLERS".
6.7 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: THERMOWELL MOUNTED
A. Thermowell mounted temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
1) Rigid stainless steel probe of length which is, at minimum, 20% of the pipe width.
3) BMS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of  0.25 Deg. C. (0.5
Deg. F.) accuracy.
4) Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required with a temperature
range that is appropriate for the application.
a. Range for chilled water and condenser water applications shall be:
Between 0 Deg.C. and +5 Deg.C. (+32 Deg.F. and +41 Deg.F.) at the
low end and
Between +40 Deg.C. and +50 Deg.C.(+104 Deg.F. and +122 Deg.F.) at
the upper end.
b. Range for hot water shall be selected such that it is between 30 Deg.C. and 50
Deg.C. (54 Deg.F and 90 Deg.F.) above and below the hot water temperature
range.
1) Where necessary to meet monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-

wire or 4-wire configuration.
2) Moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
3) Stainless steel thermowell.
4) Provided with thermal grease to aid temperature sensing.
5) Sensors required for the determination of temperature differential shall
be matched with a maximum variation over the entire temperature range
of 0.1 Deg.C. (0.2 Deg.F.).

6.8 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: STRAP-ON
A. Provide strap-on mounted temperature sensors as indicated within the Field termination
schedules and/or control diagrams or where thermo well mounted sensors cannot be
mounted. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) 6.35mm (0.25”) Stainless steel probe, 50 mm (2”)

2) Thermistor or RTD compatible with BMS, sealed in probe with a three part moisture
protection system
3) BMS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of 0.5 C (1.0F).
4) ABS housing with conduit entrance. (Optional metal or weather proof available)
6.9 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
A. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Non-corroding outdoors screen to minimize wind effects and solar heating.

2) Wall mount weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.
3) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to relative humidity range of 0% to 100%.
4) 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5) Humidity sensor shall be replaceable.
6) Operating temperature range shall be appropriate for the climate. Sensor and
transmitter shall be rated for operation in ambient temperatures of, at minimum, 5
Deg.C. (9 Deg.F.) below and above the lowest and highest recorded temperatures for
the location respectively.
6.10 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
A. Duct mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Duct mount moisture resistant enclosure with conduit fitting.

4) 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5) 8 inch probe length.
6) Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F.)
6.11 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: INDOOR AIR - WALL MOUNTED
A. Wall mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Wall mount enclosure with white cover. There shall be no manufacturer's logos,
name or thermometer on casing.
4) 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5) Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F.).
6) With LCD display.

6.12 COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS: OUTSIDE

AIR
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for exterior
wall mounting. Web bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the
1) Stainless steel probe with an IP65 to BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum wet bulb temperature range of -7
Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (+20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
3) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum dry bulb temperature range of -
29 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (-20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
4) Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of 0.5 Deg. C.
(1.0 Deg. F.).
5) Monitored wet bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracyof3% of
reading.
6) Sensor shall have a solar screen.
6.13 COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT

MOUNTED
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for duct
mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing for an interior
application and an IP65 to BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
4) Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of 0.5 Deg. C.
(1.0 Deg. F.).
reading.
6) Probe shall be a minimum of 200mm.
6.14 COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS: INSIDE AIR
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for duct
mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing.

4) Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of  0.5 Deg. C.
(1.0 Deg. F.).
reading.

6.15 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
A. Duct mounted static pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Input range shall be appropriate for the application. Select range such that it covers
from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of the duct up to a static pressure
of between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be
encountered in the duct relative to the duct exterior. Typically:
a. For low pressure duct consider using a range of 0 to 500Pa (0 to 2” wc.)

b. For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6” wc.)
c. For high-pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500 Pa (0 to 10” wc.).
1) 4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range

compatible with BMS system.
2) 1% Full scale output accuracy
3) Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
4) Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
5) Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input or 7
kpa (20 psi) whichever is greater.
6) LCD Display
6.16 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: SPACE
A. Space mounted static pressure sensors shall be designed for room pressure monitoring
applications with all electrical and pressure connection on back of unit. I addition, unit shall
meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Input range of –50 to +50 Pa. (-0.2” to + 0.2” wc.)

2) 4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range compatible with
BMS system.
3) 1% accuracy of range
4) Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
5) Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
6) Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input or 7 kpa (20 psi)
7) LCD Display
6.17 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: VAV APPLICATIONS
A. Provide static pressure sensor that meet the requirements for a "differential pressure
transducer" as specified in section: "BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER:
VAV TERMINAL UNITS".
6.18 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: WATER
A. Pressure sensors shall meet the following requirements:
1) Input range of 0 to 1400 kPa.

2) 4-20 mA output proportional to water pressure.
3) 0.5% accuracy of range.
4) Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 38 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 100 Deg. F.).

5) Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.

6) Over pressure input protection of two times rated input.
7) An IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to
BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
8) Stainless steel wetted parts.
9) Burst pressure of 5 times rated input
10) Long-term stability of .25 percent of full scale.
11) Construction of pressure transmitter and associated components shall be rated for at
least twice the maximum static pressure.
6.19 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR – AIR (FILTER/COIL MONITORING)
A. Differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Output shall be 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc or 0-5Vdc output proportional to pressure input

range compatible with BMS.
2) Select range as required, taking into consideration pressure drop across filter or coil.
Typically 0 to 500pa (0-2” wc) range for low-pressure commercial duct.
3) Operating temperature range of 0 DEG C to 60 DEG C (32 DEG F to 140 DEG F).
4) With LCD display
6.20 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR - WATER
A. Water differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Cast aluminium an IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application

and an IP65 to BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2) Output of 4-20 mA proportional to the pressure sensed.
3) Over pressure protection of five times the rated input.
4) Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.
5) Operating range shall be suitable for the application. Select range such that it covers
from zero differential pressure up to a differential static pressure of between 20% and
50% in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be encountered. Remember
that if the sensor is used for the control of a chilled water bypass and is located
across, for example, a chilled water AHU coil, the pressure drop of both the coil and
the associated valve at full design flow have to be taken into account.
6) Accuracy of  2% of full-scale reading.
7) Valved tappings shall be installed by the Mechanical contractor. Furnish the valves
to the Mechanical contractor.
6.21 MULTIPOINT AVERAGING AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION – DUCTS,

PLENUMS, FAN INLETS.
A. Multipoint averaging airflow measuring station shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Sensor and sensor measuring flow range shall be appropriate for the application.
2) Multipoint averaging flow sensor complete with sensor, sensor housing and mounting
brackets. Sensor tubing shall be connected or removed without removing ductwork.
3) Sensing grid shall be of stainless steel construction.
4) Internal materials of the transducer shall be suitable for contact with air.
5) Integral signal integrator to minimize primary signal to noise from the output signal.

6) Output signal of 4-20 mA proportional to input pressure, into a 600 OHM load.
7) Temperature range of -18 Deg C to 60 Deg C (0 Deg F to 140 Deg F).
8) 5% accuracy of the measured value.
6.22 AIR FLOW SENSOR
A. Provide airflow rate sensors and transducers as indicated in the Field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Air flow rate sensors and transducer shall meet, at minimum, the
1) Hot wire anemometer type.

2) Self-compensation for changes in air temperature.
3) Probe and transducer housing shall be constructed of durable PVC.
4) Probe shall be adjustable from 50-185mm (2” - 7.3”).
5) Power supply shall be 24 Vac/dc.
6) Output signal of 4-20 mA or 0-10Vdc proportional to air flow speed equal to 0-16m/s
(3150 ft/min) or 0-8 m/s (1575 ft/min) jumper selectable.
7) Air temperature range of –10 DEG C to 60 DEG (14 DEG F to 140 DEG F)
8) 5% accuracy of measured value.
6.23 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - AIR
A. Air differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) An IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to

BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2) SPDT switch rated for 10 amps minimum at 120 Vac.
3) Setpoint trip adjustment with scale to indicate setting. Switches used for filter
differential pressures shall also have a display of the monitored differential pressure.
4) Deadband adjustment.
5) Select range such that it covers from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior
of the duct up to a static pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum
static pressure that could be encountered in the duct relative to the duct exterior.
Typically:
a. For low pressure commercial duct use a range of 0 to 500pa (0 to 2 inches

w.g.)
b. For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6 inches w.g.)
c. For high pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500Pa (0 to 10 inches w.g.)
1) Temperature range of -18 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (0 Deg. F. to 160 Deg.

F.).
2) Manual reset.
6.24 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - WATER
A. Water differential pressure switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) 316 stainless steel body.

2) Local display gauge.

3) End to end accuracy not to exceed  1.0% over entire range.

4) Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero an span adjustment.
5) Over pressure input protection to a minimum of five (5) times rated input.
6) The differential pressure transducer shall be rated to withstand the maximum rated.
pressure of the system in which it is installed.
7) Range to be coordinated with the chilling unit manufacturer.
6.25 DAMPER END SWITCH
A. Damper end switch shall meet the following:
1) Adjustable axle mounted collar for easy setup and adjustment

2) Electrical enclosure with ½" knockout allowing for easy installation
3) Dual, opposed switches for fully opened or fully closed position
4) Switches will have the option to be set as normally closed (NC) or normally opened
(NO) by user.
6.26 LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH
A. Liquid level float switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Polypropylene float, PVC cable, hermetically sealed mercury switch.

2) 13 amp running current @ 120 VAC, 11 amp current @ 240 VAC.
3) SPDT type.
4) Operating temperature of 0 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F. to 160 Deg. F.).
5) Operating pressure of 180 kPa.
6.27 TURBINE WATER FLOWMETER – UNI-DIRECTIONAL - INSERTION TYPE
A. Turbine flowmeter shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Stainless steel insertion probe with non-metallic rotors.

2) 24 ± 4 VDC @ 30 mA.
3) 2% accuracy of actual reading from 0.4 to 20 ft/s.
4) Turndown ratio of 30:1.
5) Combined linearity and repeatability not to exceed 1.5 percent.
6) Pulse output proportional to flowrate.
7) Insertion type with dual turbine blades.
8) Suitable for maximum flowrate in line.
9) Rated for as necessary to withstand the maximum pressure of the system.
10) Suitable for temperatures in the range of 0 Deg.C. to 50 Deg.C.
11) Wall mounted local flowrate display panel to indicate instantaneous flowrate.
6.28 TURBINE WATER FLOWMETER - BI-DIRECTIONAL - INSERTION TYPE
A. Turbine flowmeter shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Stainless steel insertion probe with non-metallic rotors.

2) 24±4 VDC @ 90 mA supply voltage.
3) 2% accuracy of actual reading from 0.4 to 20 ft/s.
4) Turndown ratio of 30:1.

5) DC linearity of 0.1% of span.

6) Pulse output proportional to flowrate.
7) Insertion type with dual turbine blades.
8) Suitable for maximum flowrate in line.
9) Rated for as necessary to withstand the maximum pressure of the system.
10) Temperature range-standard: 82 Deg. C. (180 Deg. F.) continuous, 93 Deg. C. (200
Deg. F.) peak.
11) Bi-directional flow.
6.29 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETER
A. Electromagnetic flowmeter shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) No moving parts.
2) Microprocessor-based.
3) 4-20 mA output.
4) Full lugged flanged.
5) Accuracy shall better than 5% of flowrate over a 33:1 turndown at all flow rates
above 1 fps.
6) The integrally mounted meter housing and flow meter sensor with a an IP54 to BS
60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to BS 60529
housing for an exterior housing. The flow sensor coil housing shall be steel and
withstand 3500 kPa external pressure in all conditions.
7) Electronics shall be remote mounted within the central plant either wall or column
mounted adjacent to the bypass piping area.
8) Flow meter transmitter shall be furnished in -an IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing
for an interior application and an IP65 to BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing,
with a character, 2 line 16 digit backlit display. The alphanumeric display shall
indicate user-defined flow units and flowrate. All menu advice and commands shall
be visible on this display.
9) The flow meter shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from -40 Deg F to 200
Deg F and at pressures from full vacuum to 2100 kPa.
10) The meter shall feature non-volatile sensor memory (EEPROM)) which shall contain
all the characteristics of the sensor (i.e. calibration factors, coil frequency, gain
settings) as well as user defined parameters on site. This memory shall facilitate
automatic transfer of pre-programmed data to new electronics in the event of a
transmitter fault, without requiring renewed calibration/programming.
11) The flow meter shall have a switching power supply having an operating range from
77-265 VAC 50 Hz (12-60 VDC). Power consumption shall not exceed 20 VA.
12) Carbon steel body.
13) Flow meter shall distinguish between direction of fluid flow.
14) Construction of flowmeter and associated components shall be rated for at least twice
the maximum static pressure.
6.30 CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
A. Current sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
1) Rated and sized for the applicable load.

2) The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete operating
range.
3) Current relay shall have input and output isolation via current transformer.
4) Current relay shall be self-powered with no insertion loss.

5) Relay shall be in a dustproof housing.

6) Accuracy to be <2% of full-scale max.
7) Temperature rating of –15 Deg C to 60 Deg C (5 Deg F to 140 Deg F).
8) Option: Provide LED indication of relay status.
B. Whenever the status of a single speed motor is monitored it shall be done via a current
sensing relay. Differential pressure switches shall not be used for this purpose. The BMS
contractor shall provide current sensing relays at the MCC starters. The BMS contractor
shall provide the current sensing relays for motors with local starters and no MCC starter.
6.31 CURRENT METERING SENSOR
A. Current monitoring shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) 4-20 mA, 0-10 or 0-5 Vdc output proportional to current draw.

2) Reverse polarity protected and output limited.
3) 50/60 Hz operation.
4) Accuracy of better than 1%.
5) Operating temperature range of 0 Deg C to 70 Deg C. (-20 Deg F to 120 Deg F).
6.32 VOLTAGE SENSING RELAY (TYPE VS-01)
A. Voltage sensing relays shall continuously monitor 3-phase power lines for phase loss, phase
reversal and low voltage. Voltage sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Dustproof ABS plastic housing.

2) The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete operating
range.
3) Relay shall have over current and over voltage protection.
4) Automatic reset with adjustable reset delay.
5) Adjustable trip delay.
6) Transient protection - 2500 VRMS for 10 ms.
7) Accuracy -  0.1% of setpoint.
8) Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20 Deg. F. to 120 Deg.
F.).
6.33 VOLTAGE METERING SENSOR – 3 PHASE
A. Voltage monitoring (phase-to-phase (or line-to-neutral) voltage) of 3 phase electrical

systems shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Rated for the appropriate voltage and frequency.

2) Output to the BMS of 4-20mA proportional to voltage for each of the 3 phases.
3) Accuracy -  0.5% of FS voltage.
4) Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20 Deg. F. to 120 Deg.
F.).

6.34 KW AND KWH TRANSDUSER
A. Provide kW and kWh transducers as identified in Field termination sheets and/or control
drawings. Transducer shall include, at minimum, the following:
1) True RMS conversion.

2) 24 Bit DSP signal processor.
3) On board potential transformers for up to 600 Vac applications.
4) Configurable via RS-232C on personal computer.
5) RS-485 data port for communication with BMS.
6) 4-20 mA proportional to KW demand output.
7) Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc @150mA for
kWH output.
8) Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc @150mA for
phase loss output.
9) Accuracy 1% or better of full scale.
10) Operating temperature of 0ºC to 70ºC (32ºF to 158ºF).
11) Provide disconnect/shorting bar and Current Transformer compatible with amperage
being sensed.
6.35 CONTROL RELAYS – LATCHING
A. Latching Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Pickup rating, time and hold rating as required for individual applications.
2) Rated for a minimum of ten (10) million mechanical operations and a minimum of
500,000 electrical operations.
3) Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output.
4) Located in the DCP, UC or other local enclosures.
5) Malfunction of an BMS component shall cause the controlled output to fail to the
positions identified in the failure procedure within the operating sequences.
6) 10 amp contact rating.
7) Pin type terminals.
6.36 CONTROL RELAYS – MOMENTARY
A. Momentary Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Coil ratings of 120 VAC, 50 mA or 10-30 VAC/VDC, 40 mA as suitable for the

application.
2) Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output.
3) Located in the DCP, UC or other local enclosures.
4) 10 amp contact rating.
5) LED status indication.
6.37 ELECTRONIC TO PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
A. Provide electronic to pneumatic transducers as identified in the field termination sheets

and/or controls drawings. Transducers shall include, at minimum, the following:
1) Accept a control signal of 4-20mA or 0-10Vdc compatible with BMS.

2) Output rating of 21-103 kPa (3-15psig) consuming 141 ml/s (515 scfm) maximum @
138 kPa (20 psig) supply.
3) Snap track mounted for panel applications or with an optional ABS enclosure.
4) Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF)
5) Male barb fittings for flexible tubing.
6.38 AIR QUALITY SENSOR – WALL MOUNTED
A. Provide wall mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the Field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Measurement of volatile organic compounds (VOC) containing, at minimum, the

following gases:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
f. Ammonia
1) Microprocessor based using a semi conductor element based on the

Taguchi gas principle.
2) White attractive ventilated cover.
3) 20-30 Vac/dc power supply, 100mA @24Vdc, 220mA @24Vac, 6VA
max.
4) Analog stepped output standard (0-10 Vdc) or optional 4-20mA and
adjustable relay.
5) Programming and selection via internal push buttons and jumpers.
6) Temperature range of 0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF).
6.39 AIR QUALITY SENSOR – DUCT MOUNTED
A. Provide duct mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Measurement of air stream volatile organic compounds (VOC) containing, at

minimum, the following gases:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
f. Ammonia
1) Microprocessor based using a semi conductor element based on the

Taguchi gas principle.
2) 20-30 Vac/dc power supply, 100mA @24Vdc, 220mA @24Vac, 6VA
max.
3) Analog stepped output standard (0-10 Vdc) or optional 4-20mA and
adjustable relay.
4) Programming and selection via internal push buttons and jumpers.

5) Temperature range of 0C to 40C (32F to 104F).

6) 200 mm (8”) duct probe.
6.40 CARBONE DIOXIDE (CO2) SENSOR
A. Provide a space or duct carbon dioxide gas detection sensor as indicated within the field
termination schedules and/or control diagrams. Carbon dioxide detection sensors shall
meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Set-up to be fully microprocessor based via plug and play LCD.

2) 4-20 mA, 0-10 or 0-5 Vdc output compatible with BMS proportional to 0 to 2000
ppm (adjustable to 10,000 ppm in 500 ppm increments) of carbon dioxide
concentration
3) Power supply to be 20-30Vac/dc @ 80 mA max for 24 Vac and 36 mA avg @24
Vdc.
4) No maintenance or period sensor replacement needed. The sensor shall have a 5-year
calibration interval, utilizing the Automatic Calibration Logic Program (ACLP).
5) Standard accuracy to be 3% of reading or 75 ppm, whichever is greater.
6) Operating temperature of 0ºC to 50ºC (32ºF to 122ºF).
7) With audible alarm
6.41 CARBONE DIOXIDE (CO) SENSOR
A. Provide CO monitoring systems for the enclosed levels of the parking garage. Provide
complete coverage of the enclosed levels of the parking garage and provide systems for each
level. A CO monitoring system shall not cover an area on more than one level and the
failure of any component shall not affect more than one level.
1) Sensors shall be of the electrochemical type.

2) Locate sensing points on walls and columns at 1.5 to 2m (5-6ft) above floor level.
Locate one sensing point per 700 m2 (7500 ft²). Do not locate sensing points closer
than 2m to traffic lanes.
3) Sensor range shall be of 0 to 300 ppm for 7% accuracy cell or 500 ppm for 3%
accurate cell.
4) Provide two (2) relay contacts, at minimum, per sensor, to indicate CO warning level
(initially set at 50ppm) and CO alarm level (initially set at 200ppm) for each sensing
point.
5) Unit shall be complete with 85 db audible alarm and have visual output reading via an
LCD display of the gas sensed.
6) Provide 4-20mA, 0-10 or 0-5Vdc output of Carbon Monoxide sensed compatible with
BMS system.
7) The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop drawing stage and shall
be amended as directed by the Owner and/or Engineer.
8) Sensor shall be factory calibrated and will only require calibration after a minimum
one (1) year service.

6.42 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION MONITORING
A. Provide refrigerant leak monitoring as identified within the point schedules and/or control
diagrams. Refrigerant leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Power consumption: AC - 325 mA, DC - 250 mA.

2) Operating temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 70 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F. to 158 Deg. F.).
3) Operating humidity range: 10% to 95% non-condensing.
4) Measuring range of 0-1000 ppm proportional to 4 to 20mA output range for each
sampling point.
5) Volt free contacts to indicate an alarm condition.
6) Meeting all applicable BSI standards including BSI standard 97/700630 DC
(Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements.
Refrigerant compressors (prEN 12693))
7) Refrigerant gas system detection supplier/contractor shall be familiar with standard
practices of safety and installation for refrigerant gas detection systems.
8) Submit details of refrigerant monitors, breathing apparatus, control panel and
diagrams as part of the submittal process.
9) System shall detect the presence of the of the following types of refrigerants
regardless of refrigerant type using sequential sampling and multi-point monitoring
method:
a. CFC
b. HCFC
c. HFC
1) Diluted samples due to ventilation airflow currents shall employ multi-

point monitoring techniques strategically located according to regulation
guidelines. In multiple chiller applications it shall be considered
whether mechanical room size and layout can adequately be monitored
to comply with regulation with a multi-point system. System design
considerations shall also be incorporated in leak detection monitoring
sensing locations for early warning indication to prevent a major loss of
refrigerant without alarm should a leak occur. Sensing ports shall be
piped in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations with 8mm
(1/4") copper tubing and fittings.
2) System shall annunciate to the BMS and locally alarm (audible and
visual) upon detection of alarm conditions. Provide silencing alarm
button at control panel. Provide approved appropriate signage at all
entry points to the chiller room. Initial alarm shall comply with
recommended Allowable Exposure Level (AEL). Adjustable 3 level
alarms for each point shall be supplied with common alarm output
contacts. Provide local digital indication of ppm level for a minimum of
X 3 sample points. A sample point shall be located close to each chiller
and the refrigerant pump out unit location. Engineer shall approve each
location. Sample point if in alarm shall flash the associated LED.
Provide local alarm horns and visual (stroboscopic) beacons at the
following locations to activate upon alarm to an approved detail:
d. Outside of entrance doors to chiller machine room.

e. Inside rooms without an escape route other than through the chiller room.
f. At each chiller location.

g. At any other location in the chiller room as necessary to ensure that a person at
any location in the chiller room and room that can be entered from the chiller
room can see the visual alarm and hear the audible alarm and at any other
location required to meet the applicable codes.
1) System shall shut down all electrical equipment (chiller systems and
associated pumps, AHU, FCU, SRAC, etc.) and sequence emergency
extract equipment as required to meet regulations. Where combustion
equipment is employed, refrigerant vapour monitoring system shall
automatically shut down the combustion process in event of refrigerant
leakage if other alternative acceptable conditions are not applied.
Ventilation system, chiller and associated pumps and other equipment
shut down as a result of the refrigerant leak alarm shall return to normal
operation when the refrigerant monitoring system is no longer detecting
refrigerant levels above setpoints and alarms have been silenced.
2) Oxygen deficiency shall not be acceptable in lieu of TLV-TWA
monitoring for human safety exposure. At the TLV-TWA level the
system shall activate purge ventilation equipment.
3) Analyser shall be microprocessor based and employ infrared (IR) sensor
technology to sense to one part per million (ppm) and shall be
compound specific and/or monitor multiple compounds and be
calibrated for refrigerant in use by approved chiller system. Any
installed unit shall be switchable to monitor another refrigerant type by
changing one part and re-calibration. System shall be factory calibrated.
4) Provide a sequential sampling system integrated into one or more
analyser enclosures. Microprocessor shall sequentially control required
flow valves and communicate output signals to allow monitoring from
multiple remote sampling locations. Unit shall read and hold output
value of infrared sensor and control corresponding four point sequential
sampling assembly. Each sampling point shall have adjustable sampling
time and adjustable levels of alarm with sample line capability up to 500
feet.
5) System shall auto zero calibrate at one hour intervals and/or via operator
control. Zero calibration shall be achieved by drawing clean
uncontaminated air. Sampling of outside intake plenum shall be
acceptable if it meets requirements. Include built-in sample pump and
differential pressure flow switch for low flow indication. Provide a
separate 4-20 mA dc analogue output for each sampling point for BMS
monitoring or one digital communications link for the output of
refrigerant level for BMS monitoring. Unit shall be insensitive to
vibration and temperature variations and shall provide for a continuous
sample. Intermittent dump and purge, batch type samples with long
response time shall not be acceptable. Response time shall be 20 to 90
seconds typical. Electrochemical sensing technology employing
depletion sensors and short-term life sensors, which deplete as a normal
part of their operation or storage shelf life shall not be acceptable.
6) System shall have self-diagnostics and supply common malfunction
output. Loss of sample flow at either sample or ZERO line and
electrical malfunction shall annunciate to the BMS.
7) Provide two (2) additional particulate filters and zero gas filter
cartridges.
8) Provide self-contained breathing apparatus that is OSHA approved and
certified meeting the following requirements:
h. Certified for 60 minutes of use.

i. Complies with BSI requirements.

j. Furnish in clearly marked wall mount metal enclosures to be located inside
each room that does not have an escape route apart from through the chiller
room, outside one exterior door serving the chiller machine room, within the
chiller room at locations such that no point in the chiller room is more than 20
metres from an escape door or a SCBA and at all other locations required by
the code. Locations of SCBA to be approved by the Engineer.
1) Provide an emergency shut-off control button outside each chiller plant

room entrance/exit door. Button shall be mounted at 1200mm above
finished floor adjacent to refrigerant leak detection alarm light.
Activation of any one of the buttons shall de-energize all chillers and
other electrical equipment within the chiller plant room. Button shall be
manually reset.
6.43 WATER LEAK DETECTION
A. Provide water leak monitoring as identified within the Field termination schedules and/or
control diagrams. Water leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Corrosion and abrasion resistant.

2) Adjustable height.
3) Configured for normally open or normally closed as required by the application.
4) Form C output relay rated at 5 amps @ 120 Vac / 30 Vdc.
5) Operating temperature range of -40ºC to 85ºC (-40ºF to 185ºF).
6.44 AMBIENT LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR
A. Provide ambient light level sensors as indicated within the field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Light level sensor shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Light sensor shall have a 12 – 35 Vdc power at maximum 22mA current draw.
2) 4-20 mA output proportional to the ambient light level where 4 mA is light and 20
mA is dark.
3) Photo sensitive resistor with analog transducer.
4) Mounted on the exterior of a North wall on the roof.
5) Temperature range of -25ºC to 75ºC (-13ºF to 167ºF)
PART 7 - FIELD INSTUMENTATION: VALVES AND VALVES ACTUATORS
7.1 VALVES GENERAL
A. Furnish all valves controlled by the BMS as detailed in the mechanical trade documents and
as indicated on the control drawings which form part of these sub-contract documents. The
MEP Specialist shall install valves, except those for instrumentation. All other valves such
as check valves, relief valves, pressure reducing valves, self regulating valves, manually
operated valves, etc. shall be furnished and installed by the MEP Specialist. Provide details
of the manufacturer's installation requirements to the MEP Specialist. Coordinate the valve
body type and pipe connections with the mechanical trade.

B. Refer to the Mechanical plans and drawings and to the control drawings which form part of
these sub-contract documents for the design conditions on which to base sizing and ratings
of the valves and their actuators.
C. The complete valve (body and trim) shall be rated for a pressure that is at least 50% greater
than the maximum pressure to which it will be exposed. Where noted in this Section, the
valve shall be rated for a higher pressure. The complete valve shall be rated for a
temperature that shall be at least 50 deg. C. (90 deg. F.) greater than the maximum
temperature to which it will be exposed. The Manufacturer shall certify that each complete
valve is suitable for and meets all relevant standards for the application.
D. All valves shall be rated appropriately for the fluid, temperature and pressure and, at
minimum, shall have a 16 bar rating. Valves shall comply with BS 5793 and BS EN 60534.
E. Valves of similar types shall be by the same manufacturer.
F. Valves shall have the manufacturer's name and the pressure rating clearly marked on the
outside of the body. Where this is not possible manufacturer's name and valve pressure
rating shall be engraved on a minimum 50mm (2 inch) diameter stainless steel tag that shall
be attached to the valve by a chain in such a manner that it cannot be unintentionally
removed.
G. Valves 13mm to 50mm (0.5 inch to 2 inches) shall have screwed ends. Screwed ends shall
comply with BS 21:1985 (Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where
pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - metric dimensions). Valves 63mm (2.5
inches) and larger shall have flanged ends. Flanged valves shall be furnished complete with
companion flanges, gaskets and bolting materials. Flanges, gaskets and bolting materials
shall meet the appropriate BSI requirements.
H. Verify and certify that the materials of construction of the pipe, weld, flange, bolts and valve
will not cause any galvanic corrosion.
I. Valves shall be suitable for continuous throttling.
J. Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the following for each
valve:
1) Associated system.
2) Manufacturer and model number.
3) Valve size and line size.
4) Flow rate, flow coefficient (CV) - and pressure drop at design conditions
5) and
Valve authority, flow rate and pressure drop across the valve at design conditions and
pressure drop across the associated mechanical equipment, e.g., coil, heat exchanger,
etc., at design conditions.
6) Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).
7) Leakage rate.
8) Maximum pressure shut-off capability.
9) Actuator manufacturer and model number.
10) Valve body pressure and temperature rating.
11) Normally open/closed and failure positions.
K. Where necessary to achieve the required performance and pressure drop a control valve may
be sized up to two nominal sizes below line size.

L. Valve bodies shall be cast iron, carbon steel, stainless steel or bronze subject to
requirements for valve body pressure and temperature rating and suitability of material for
application. Valve trim shall be stainless steel.
M. Valve seats shall be replaceable. Valve seats shall be metal, ceramic filled PTFE or
equivalent and must assure tight seating.
N. The BMS Specialist shall certify that the materials of construction are appropriate for the
application. In particular, valves used for the control of glycol solutions shall have a trim
that is suitable for a glycol solution.
7.2 TWO WAY CONTROL VALVES
A. Provide two-way globe control valves as indicated on the mechanical trade documents.
B. Pressure drop shall not exceed 35 kPa and shall conform to the following requirements:
1) Valves shall be selected such that the valve authority (N) shall not be less than 0.5 as
defined by the relationship: N=P1/(P1+P2); where:
a. P1= pressure drop across the fully open valve,

b. P2= pressure drop across the remainder of the circuit (e.g. a coil, DRV,
isolation valves, strainers)
C. Valve shall be capable of tight shut-off when operating at system pressure with the system
pump operating at shut-off head. Leakage rate shall not exceed 0.01% of the rated valve
capacity.
D. Valve shall be straight pattern type. Angle valves shall only be furnished where the piping
configuration does not permit the use of a straight valve.
E. Valves shall be single seat globe type. Double seat valves shall not be furnished.
F. Two-port valves when used to control heater and cooler batteries shall have an equal
percentage or modified parabolic characteristic. Two-port valves when used in liquid
applications systems not detailed above shall have a linear / linear characteristic.
G. Actual valve kvs values shall not deviate from the quoted kvs value by more than ±10%.
H. The kv of the valve shall not deviate from the stated characteristic curve by more than
±10%.
I. Valve shall have a minimum rangeability of 50:1.
J. Suitable for continuous throttling.
7.3 THREE WAY CONTROL VALVES
A. Provide three-way control valves as indicated on the mechanical trade documents.
B. Pressure drop shall not exceed 35 kPa and shall conform to the following requirements:

1) Valves shall be selected such that the valve authority (N) shall not be less than 0.5 for
diverting valves and 0.3 for mixing valves as defined by the relationship:
N=P1/(P1+P2) where:
a. P1= pressure drop across the fully open valve

b. P2= pressure drop across the remainder of the circuit (e.g. a coil)
C. Three way control valves shall be of the mixing or diverting pattern type as indicated in the
mechanical documents. The inner valve shall have a V-port parabolic or linear plug and
stainless steel trim. Valves shall have metal-to-metal stainless steel seats to assure tight
seating.
D. Mixing valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each inlet port and the outlet port
and diverting valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each outlet port and the inlet
port when operating at system pressure.
7.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly valves shall be the full lug type.
B. The pressure drop across modulating butterfly valves at maximum design flow shall not
exceed 20 kPa .
C. Disc pins, where required to secure shaft to disc, shall be 316 stainless steel.
D. The butterfly valve manufacturer shall certify compliance with bubble tight shut-off
requirements at a differential pressure not less than the full rated design working pressure
and temperature specified with the downstream flange removed with flow in either
direction.
E. Valve manufacturer shall guarantee zero leakage to the shaft.
F. Where indicated in the Mechanical Trade documents provide linked butterfly valves that
shall comprise two butterfly valves meeting the above requirements mounted on a flanged
cast iron tee with a single actuator which shall modulate one valve open as it closes the
other such that when one is fully open the other is fully closed and vice versa.
7.5 VALVES FOR INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrumentation, such as pressure sensors and flow rate monitors, which is provided for the
monitoring of parameters associated with liquid in pipes or tanks, shall be removable and
replaceable without the requirement to shut down a pump and without the requirement to
drain the pipe or tank and without causing liquid to leak from the pipe or tank. To facilitate
this, the BMS subcontractor shall furnish valves for installation by the mechanical trade.
B. Instrumentation that is mounted external to the pipe or tank and which is connected to the
pipe or tank by one or more sampling lines shall have a manual two-way on/off valve in
each sampling line meeting the following requirements:
1) Ball type valve

2) Valve body shall be 316 stainless steel
3) Ball and stem shall be 316 stainless steel
4) Zero leakage.

5) Rated for 1050 kPa or for a pressure 50% greater then the system working pressure,
whichever is the greater.
6) Rated for a minimum of 50 deg. C (90 deg. F.) greater than the highest fluid
temperature.
7) Brass or stainless steel trim.
8) Valve seats shall be metal, reinforced TFE or equivalent and must assure tight
seating.
9) Valve shall be Whitey 40 Series or 80 Series or approved equal if it meets the
requirements detailed above.
C. Valves for insertion flow meters shall be full port gate valves sized for the flow meter in
accordance with the flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. If the flow meter manufacturer
offers the valve as an accessory then it shall be purchased by the BMS subcontractor from
the insertion flow meter manufacturer and shall be installed by the mechanical trade in
accordance with the insertion flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. The valve shall meet
the pressure and temperature requirements detailed for the control valves and shall have
zero leakage at the system maximum pressure.
7.6 VALVES ACTUATORS - ELECTRIC
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide actuators for valves that are furnished by the BMS
Specialist. All control valve actuators shall be modulating type.
B. Actuator shall be motor driven type. Valve stem position shall be adjustable in increments
of one (1) percent or less of full stem travel.
C. Actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train, mechanical travel stops and two
adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.
D. Actuator gear assembly shall be made of hard-anodised aluminium or steel or material of

equivalent durability. No plastic components shall be acceptable for the gear drive
assembly. Disassembly of the gears shall not be required to remove the motor.
E. Actuator shall be rated for continuous duty and have an input voltage of 220 Vac, 50 Hz or
24 V.
F. Actuator housing shall have a minimum IP 54 to BS 60529 rating. Actuators on valves

located in mechanical rooms or outdoors shall have covers of aluminium or a material of
equivalent strength and shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of bolts when removing the
cover from the base. Housings for valves located in a plenum and used for terminal unit or
fan coil unit heating/cooling coils, may be constructed of reinforced plastic. Materials of
construction for all actuator components shall be non-corroding.
G. Actuator motor shall be fully accessible for ease of maintenance.
H. Actuator shall be sized to meet the shut-off requirements when operating at the maximum
system differential pressure and with the installed system pump operating at shut-off head.
I. Actuator shall control against system maximum working pressures.
J. Actuator shall fail as indicated on the control drawings that form part of these sub-contract
documents. Provide spring return to de-energised position on loss of power or loss of
control signal if so required by the sequences of operation.

K. Actuator shall accept control signals compatible with the BMS analogue or digital output
subsystem as appropriate. The valve stem position shall be linearly related to the control
signal.
L. Actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft and valve
position.
M. Actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and vice
versa in less than two minutes.
N. Actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibration without operations
failure. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.
O. Actuator shall be equipped with an integral position potentiometer to indicate the stem
position of the valve where required by the control sequences. All valve actuators shall
have integral end position indicators.
P. Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed only in the location/orientation approved
by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve location.
Q. Actuator shall have a manual declutch lever to enable manual operation of the valve. It
shall be possible for an operator to manually modulate valves located in mechanical rooms
in the event of loss of power. The operator shall be able to manually modulate the valves
without having to climb a ladder or other non-permanent structure. It shall be ensured that
the valve installation is such that the valve cannot declutch under the influence of gravity
and/or vibration.
PART 8 - FIELD INSTUMENTATION: DAMPERS AND DAMPERS ACTUATORS
8.1 DAMPERS GENERAL
A. Provide actuators for all motorised dampers excluding motorised fire and/or smoke rated
dampers. All motorised damper actuators furnished by the BMS Specialist shall be
modulating actuators.
B. Multiple section two position dampers shall be controlled by one BMS output unless
indicated otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
C. Multiple section modulating dampers shall be controlled in sequence unless indicated

otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
D. Actuators shall be mounted to allow complete access for maintenance and removal.
Wherever possible provide damper actuators mounted on the exterior of the duct/damper
section. The installation of actuators within air streams will be permitted only where
damper configurations and site conditions require. Obtain approval for proposed
installations of actuators within ductwork, plenums, airstreams, etc. Furnish access doors
where required to allow access.
E. Damper actuators shall be configured for normal and failure positions as indicated in the
operating sequences and as indicated on the MEP Specialist Mechanical Drawings and
Specifications. Provide damper end switches on 2-position actuators and position feedback
for modulating damper actuators.

F. Provide actuators sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and industry

standards for accurate and stable control of airflow in each application.
G. Provide damper actuator installations to comply with the acoustical requirements for the
project. Noise generated from damper actuators in air streams shall not be detectable in
occupied building spaces.
H. Damper actuators shall be controlled by the BMS where necessary to meet the required
sequences of operation. If the FAS also controls a damper then the FAS control shall
override the BMS control of the damper.
I. Dampers shall be provided by the Mechanical Specialist.
8.2 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Provide electric damper actuators for all motorised dampers. Electric actuators shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
1) Stroke by the rotating motion of a reversible, overload-protected synchronous motor.

Actuators shall be directly coupled to damper drive blades with no intermediate
linkages or shall be rotary type actuators directly coupled to the damper drive shaft.
2) Protected against overload by an integral magnetic clutch or stall protection by non-
overloading impedance protected motor.
3) 220 Vac + or - 10%, 50 Hz or 24 Vac power supply with 2 limit switches with
electrically isolated contacts
4) One actuator for each damper section. Provide additional actuators to ensure
sufficient torque to meet the specified close off leakage requirements. Damper
actuators shall not be stacked.
5) Actuators shall be motorised/driven in both the open and closed directions. Where
required by the sequences of operation, actuators shall have a spring return to the de-
energized position upon loss of power. Damper normal and failure positions shall be
as identified within the sequences of operation.
6) BMS controlled actuators for modulating Motorised Dampers shall be controlled by a
0-10 Vdc, or 4-20mA signal. Provide actuators that are fully compatible with the
BMS analogue output subsystem. BMS controlled actuators for two position
dampers shall be controlled by 24Vac, 24Vdc or single-phase 220 Vac power
switched by the BMS.
7) Complete with mounting brackets suitable for extended shaft mounting or direct
damper drive shaft mounting.
8) Stroke dampers from fully closed to fully open in accordance with the following:
9) Service Timing Requirement
a. Two position normal service 75 seconds

b. Modulating normal service 120 seconds
c. Emergency service (stair pressurization, smoke containment, etc.) 15 seconds
1) Actuators for non-fire and/or smoke rated dampers shall be rated for
operation at ambient temperatures of minus 40 Deg.C. to 50 Deg.C. (-40
Deg. F. to 122 Deg. F.).
2) Complete with damper/actuator stroke position indicator.
3) Manual drive release mechanism and manual positioning mechanism.
B. Actuators shall be quiet in operation such that noise from actuator operation is not
detectable in any occupied spaces.

8.3 DAMPER ACTUATORS HARDIWRED INTERLOCKS
A. Provide all required hardwired interlocks between fans and any motor actuated dampers as
identified within these sub-contract documents.
B. Power for interlocked dampers shall be obtained from the associated air handling fan motor
control circuit. Coordinate actuator power supply wiring and fire alarm system override
control of dampers with MEP Specialist.
C. Where dampers are specified to be hard wire interlocked with fan motors the BMS
Specialist shall provide the damper position switches. Provide the damper end switch(s)
hard wire interlocked to achieve the operational requirements as specified in the Point
Schedules and the sequences of operation, and as indicated in the MEP Specialist Drawings
and Specifications. Provide damper end switches hard wire interlocked to prevent fan motor
operation in both the hand and auto position of hand/off/auto motor control circuit. Damper
position switches shall be set to indicate the open position when they are open by more than
80%.
D. Provide for each damper that is controlled by both the BMS and the FAS, a terminal strip
and associated control relays such as to allow control and monitoring as follows (as
applicable):
1) BMS two position open-closed control - contact closure of a BMS relay, thermostat
or interlocking device shall control the damper. Contact opening shall close the
damper.
2) BMS modulating control - modulating signal from the BMS of 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA
output to achieve the required sequence.
3) Damper open/closed status - allows FAS monitoring or interlock of damper open and
damper close status.
4) Damper open/closed status - allows BMS monitoring or interlock of damper open and
damper close status.
5) Override open control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized smoke
detector shall override any BMS modulating or open/closed control to open the
damper.
6) Override closed control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized smoke
detector shall override any BMS modulating or open/closed control to close the
damper.
7) Furnish and terminate cabling as follows:
a. Between all damper actuators and the associated damper terminal strip.
b. Between the BMS and the damper terminal strip for any damper monitored
and/or controlled by the BMS.
c. Between the damper terminal strip and interlocked motors, thermostats,
pressure switches, generators, pumps, etc.
E. Coordinate exact FAS interface requirements and terminal strip locations with the MEP
Specialist.
PART 9 - EXECUTION
9.1 TRAINING

A. Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as assigned by the
employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions in at least one-half
day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session and any prerequisite
requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training outline shall be submitted
with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages. Training shall not commence unless
the Engineer has approved a training outline. Training shall be coordinated with the
Employer’s designated training coordinator.
B. Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on" instruction and
shall be given by the Specialist at the BMS Specialists facilities and on-site as detailed
below. The trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the manufacturer, shall be
experienced with the hardware and software and shall be experienced trainers. The resumes
of the trainers shall be submitted to the Employer and Engineer for approval. The resumes
shall indicate clearly the experience and expertise of the proposed training staff with regard
to both their technical and training capabilities. The BMS Specialist shall certify the
proposed training staff as specialist trainers. The BMS Specialist shall advise the Employer
of the recommended qualifications for the potential trainees.
C. Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the BMS Specialist’s facilities. These
training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they shall be presented in
accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the Employer. Follow up
training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using the installed components that
shall be given during the period immediately prior to the acceptance testing. Further follow
up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site during the warranty period. These
training sessions during the warranty period shall be scheduled with the Employer.
D. Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and any audiovisual
equipment required to execute the training.
E. Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of the attendees and
prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students. Training sessions shall be
designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the attendees scheduled to participate
and shall differentiate between the requirements of supervisory, operations and maintenance
personnel. The training shall be specific to this project and shall cover, at minimum, the
following:
1) Data base features.

2) Operating sequence programming.
3) Operator interface features.
4) VDU graphics set up and modification.
5) An overview of the BMCS topology.
6) Information access.
7) Executing operator commands.
8) Operator definable values.
9) Report customization.
10) Event message generation and modification.
11) Maintenance and calibration of instrumentation (Maintenance personnel only)
12) Use of the Portable Operator Terminals (POT) and the Hand Held Wireless Terminals
(HHWT)
13) Interfaces between the low voltage Building Systems.
14) Other subjects necessary to ensure that the operators, maintenance and supervisory
staffs will be able to operate the BMS without any on-going assistance from any
outside party.

F. Provide sufficient training to the Employer’s staff such that they shall be able to map
BACnet object Ids to the terminal server and shall be able to add points to the data storage,
analysis and retrieval functions.
9.2 BORING AND PATCHING
A. Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install BMS components
shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the BMS Specialist shall provide boring and
patching of work in those instances where the BMS Specialist has caused damage requiring
boring and patching. The BMS Specialist shall provide boring and patching for all
installation work undertaken by the BMS Specialist. Boring and patching shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
1) Before boring any structural components, obtain the Engineer's approval.

2) Make boring with clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be inconspicuous in
covered areas and visually undetectable in areas normally accessible to the tenants.
3) Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.
9.3 FIRE STOPPING
A. The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by the MEP
Specialist on behalf of the BMS Specialist but if the BMS Specialist damages fire stopping
installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the BMS Specialist requires that fire
stopping be replaced or added, the BMS Specialist shall seal all conduit, cable, or cable tray
penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop shall meet, at minimum, the
1) Comply with all applicable codes, regulations and statutory requirements.

2) Approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
3) Firesafing system or device used shall not derate the ampacity of electrical cables
passing through it.
9.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with the
manufacturers recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment within
which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and supporting of
components with all trades.
B. Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat and workmanlike
manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
9.5 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. General Requirements:
1) All components shall be tested by the BMS Specialist to ensure compliance with the
specifications before they leave the BMS Specialist's premises and shall be tested
again on-site by the BMS Specialist before the commencement of acceptance testing.
The BMS Specialist shall not ship components to the project site until they have been
found to be fully compliant with the specifications and the BMS Specialist shall not

request the commencement of acceptance testing until such time as the BMS
Specialist has made a complete and thorough checkout of all equipment on site.
2) Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made available for
inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Use of any component by
the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of the system or acceptability
of any component. Availability and demonstration of the systems shall not be
withheld and the use of components shall not imply the start of the Defects Liability
Period.
3) Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be included in this
scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
4) The BMS Specialist shall make available all equipment, calibrated instruments and
ladders, as necessary to satisfactorily demonstrate the acceptability of the components
and systems. Instrumentation to be used for the verification of monitored parameters
shall be calibrated or supplied by an approved laboratory or manufacturer. Provide
copies of the calibration data with the component test sheets.
5) Installation, engineering, software and system personnel shall be available on-site
during the commissioning tests. These personnel shall be familiar with the installation
and shall undertake all tests as requested by the Engineer in order to verify that the
BMS components individually and in total meet the specifications.
6) The BMS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be conducting the
commissioning tests on behalf of the BMS Specialist has been actively involved (on
site) throughout the commissioning of the control system. Software shall be
developed, tested and demonstrated over a time span short enough to guarantee
continuity of personnel.
B. Factory Tests/Software Tests:
1) When the BMS Specialist has written and tested the software and prior to loading
software into controllers on site, the BMS Specialist shall demonstrate to the
Engineer that the software functions in accordance with the specifications. This shall
be accomplished by in-house simulation of plant operating conditions using switches,
potentiometers, voltmeters and lamps etc., via the BMS graphical interface.
2) The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations on a clause-by-
clause basis with the specification, with reference to all applicable correspondence,
and with variation orders issued by the Employer.
3) Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no additional cost to
the Employer prior to the shipping of the components to the project site.
4) The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any scheduled factory
testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time whether the Engineer shall
witness the tests. If the Employer decides that the tests shall be witnessed the
Employer shall select a representative and the BMS Specialist shall pay the costs of
the representative to attend the tests.
C. Inspection During Installation:
1) Prior to commissioning tests, the BMS shall be available for use by the Employer and
Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of any
component of the BMS or the commencement of the Defects Liability Period.
2) Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the installation
period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing work. The Engineer will
generate Field Observation Reports on the findings of the inspection. The Engineer
shall advise the BMS Specialist during the inspection of any concerns noted with
respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as soon as possible
after the inspection is completed. The BMS Specialist shall take corrective action to
meet the requirement of the specifications.

3) Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during inspections shall not
relieve the BMS Specialist of any of the specification requirements and shall not
imply that a deviation from the specification has been accepted.
D. Component Testing/Point To Point Testing:
1) Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the Engineer, perform a
complete and detailed operational check of each BMS component. Tests shall be
documented as detailed below and shall cover all of the testing requirements detailed
in this Section for the commissioning tests. The Engineer shall undertake such
random testing as the Engineer considers necessary to verify the acceptability of the
components.
2) All component testing involving the verification of air and water flow rate monitoring
shall be scheduled in conjunction with the air and water-balancing Specialists. In
particular, this shall apply to the verification of all control and monitoring parameters
for terminal units.
3) Point to point checks shall be proven from the field device/interface operation to the
controller/outstation and from the controller to the presentation of the point on the
graphics. The results from the point-to-point tests shall be submitted for approval on
pre-defined schedules.
4) Point to point checks shall verify:
a. Correct location of the field device for the application.

b. Correct installation of the control device/interface with reference to the
manufacturers literature and check that sufficient access has been provided for
maintenance.
c. That the control device has the correct range for the application, that the range
is correctly entered in the controller and the display of values is correctly
engineered on the operator's terminal.
d. Correct operation of the controls device/interface, including any associated
alarm and alarm text.
e. Correct installation of each valve and damper actuator, and ensure that each
valve and damper actuator is stroked correctly when checked against the BMS
output.
f. Calibration of the control device.
g. Labels provided on the control devices and mechanical equipment are correct.
E. Systems Testing:
1) Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has been successfully
undertaken and approved by the Engineer.
2) System testing shall be undertaken by the BMS Specialist and the BMS Specialist
shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system performance verification sheets.
The completed system performance verification test sheets shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
3) The BMS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system performance verification
tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests for the verification by the
Engineer shall not be scheduled until the BMS Specialist has verified that all systems
are operating in accordance with the specifications.
4) The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the BMS Specialist and shall
be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the Engineer’s portion of the
system performance verification test sheets as each test is successfully undertaken.
The BMS Specialist shall remedy any deficiencies that are observed during the
system performance verification tests and retesting shall be scheduled at a time
suitable to the Engineer. If there are deficiencies remaining after the follow-up

systems performance verification testing that require further testing by the Engineer,
then the expenses of the Engineer incurred in providing the additional follow-up tests
to verify compliance with the specifications, including travel, subsistence,
accommodation and normal consulting fees, shall be paid by the BMS Specialist at no
additional cost to the Employer.
5) The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:
b. Each and every point on the system including calibration checks and the
stroking of actuators.
c. All dynamic graphics comply with the mechanical and control specifications.
d. All system programs comply with the specification under the normal modes of
operation, emergency power, building fire detected and fireman's override
operating modes.
e. All system alarms comply with the specification.
f. System stability.
g. Dynamic tests to prove control stability and that environmental conditions are
being maintained.
F. Test Coordination:
1) Testing of the BMS during the systems and integrated testing shall be coordinated
with all other trades associated with the system being tested. The system shall be
tested as a complete entity during these tests. The BMS portion of the systems shall
not be tested in isolation.
G. Testing Of Third Party Interfaces:
1) The BMS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for the interface
between the BMS and equipment furnished by others prior to the delivery of the
associated hardware and software components to the project site. There shall be no
software development on site except that associated with the entry of database items
such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
2) The third party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer at the BMS
Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any BMS microprocessor based
components at the project site. The demonstration shall include all hardware and
software components associated with the interfaces.
3) The third party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the testing and
acceptance by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.
4) The BMS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects are provided at
the BMS Management level network in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications.
H. Test Documentation:
1) Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets shall be prepared
in an appropriate format for the various categories of component and system to be
tested. Component test sheet forms included within this section indicate a minimum
acceptable standard. The final format of the proposed test forms shall be submitted
by the BMS Specialist for approval at the shop drawing stage. The component and
system performance verification sheets attached to this Section of the sub-contract
Documents are provided to the Specialist for information and to serve as a guide for
the minimum standards required. These attached examples of component and system
test sheets are generic in nature and may not accurately reflect the actual sequences of
operation that are to be implemented and not all systems and component types are
covered by these example test verification sheets. It is the responsibility of the BMS

Specialist to provide test verification sheets for each component and system that
accurately reflect the sequences of operation and appropriate data for the components
and systems as furnished under this sub-contract.
2) Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each BMS component
within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer, together with a proposed
schedule for system commissioning tests, at least X weeks prior to the proposed
system commissioning tests. The Engineer shall determine on the basis of the BMS
Specialist's component testing, whether or not it is appropriate to commence system-
commissioning tests. It shall be the Engineer’s decision as to whether the system
commissioning tests can proceed as proposed by the BMS Specialist or whether
deficiencies have to be remedied and additional testing undertaken before the system
commissioning tests can proceed.
3) At minimum, component test sheets will be prepared to cover each of the following
items:
a. Digital input point

b. Digital output point
c. Analogue input point
d. Analogue output point (one for each type of final control element, e.g. valve,
damper, etc.)
1) System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum, each
of the systems detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets
shall be based on the sub-contract requirements and not on the system as
installed.
2) All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and in
hard copy.
9.6 ACCEPTANCE AND TURNOVER DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with requirements of
Division 1:
1) System user manual.

2) Systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece of equipment,
trouble-shooting charts, and preventive maintenance instructions, technical data sheet
for each instrument referenced for each application.
3) As-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings, equipment
wiring and or piping connection drawing.
4) Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system
supplied. This to include:
a. System block diagram (hardware).

b. Software "functional" flow diagram.
c. Memory map of all units.
d. Specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a distributed
processing architecture is provided. These are to be clearly indicated in
functional form.
e. Source and object lists of software program.
1) Tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
2) Password at all levels.

3) Meets LonMark™ Interoperability Association Standards or ASHRAE

SSPC 135 standard as applicable.
4) Interoperability documentation.
5) System construction inspection procedures.
6) Points calibration procedures.
7) Calibration technical procedures.
8) Plant operational system test procedures.
9) Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
B. The BMS sub-contractor shall handover all programmes, database, configuration and
network data to the Employer.
C. All other documentation as detailed in these specifications.
D. The BMS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any
other BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the data
in any of the previously mentioned standards to another system. The system documentation
shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the BMS’s incorporation into another BACnet system
in the future.
E. The BMS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for the BACnet
components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along with their
respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS,
addresses and method statements to read and write data via integration of the components
with another system in future.
F. The documentation shall include comprehensive and complete details of the LonWorks
components (if provided) including details of all XIF, SNVTs, SCPTs, UNVTs, UCPTs and
External Interface Files (XIF). The LonWorks interoperability data shall also include their
respective BACnet object ID generated in the system against their LonWorks SNVT/SCPT
data and method statements to read and write data via integration of the LonWorks
components with another system in future.
G. Provide latest copy of ASHRAE standard SSPC/135.

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches,
and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In
a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
side.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - Page 1 of 14

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings
of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this
Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in
the "Quality Assurance" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of
this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared,
as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
forms.
F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.

A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB, or having at least 5 years of successful experience on projects with
testing, adjusting and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Engineer's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures
plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in
this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's
standard forms approved by the Engineer.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards.
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more

frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and

equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record

Documents."
D. Examine Engineer's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create
undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was
performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and
charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data
and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing
valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations
are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.

J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that
they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
O. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves are properly
connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts,
and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this
Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this
Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the fresh air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume systems and process
exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this
Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan
as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's

written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds

varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial
numbers, and nameplate data.
3.7 CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record
compressor data.
3.8 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.9 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on
a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.11 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance
measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each
system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.12 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design
values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm o.c.).
f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. ( (sq. m)).
g. Design airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
h. Design velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.
a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa).
e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
K. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by
plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm).
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
L. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing
and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. General provisions applicable to Division 16 work and other Sections of the

Specification that refer to this Section.
2. Supporting devices for electrical components.
3. Electrical identification.
4. Covers, brackets and supports.
5. Electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
8. Touchup painting.
B. Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the complete electrical systems, equipment and materials shown on the
Drawings and/or described in the Specification together with all associated ancillary work,
support work and builder's work in connection.
1.3 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of the local
codes of practice, local power authority regulations and [Requirements for Electrical
Installations – IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) as published by the Institution of
Electrical Engineers National Electrical Code (NEC / NFPA 70) as published by the
National Fire Protection Association where not in contradiction with the local codes of
practice and regulations, herein referred to collectively as 'the Regulations'.
1. Saudi Consolidated Electric Company (SEC)

2. Sixteenth edition of IEE wiring Regulations. (BS 7671: 2001).
3. International Electrotechnical Committee (IEC) standards.
4. National Electrical Code (NEC) - U.S.A. and National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA).
5. NFPA 130 “Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems”.
6. British “ Code of Interior Lighting “ issued by the “Chartered Institution of Building
Services “ (CIBSE).
7. Saudi Telecom company (STC) & Telephone National Standards CCITT.
8. ANSI/TIA/EIA –568-A data cabling standards.
9. Electrical equipment and material will be in compliance with IEC, BS, ANSI,
NEMA, UL or other equivalent & approved Standards
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - Page 1 of 14

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
B. Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which

material or construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the
Regulations, immediately inform the Engineer in writing. Consequent to Engineer's
approval, supply the materials and perform the work as though called for to minimum code
standards.
C. Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be manufactured and
installed in compliance with the relevant recommendations of the following or other equal
and approved standards:
1. IEC: The International Electro-technical Commission

2. ISO: The International Standardization Organization
3. CCITT: The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee
4. CCIR: The International Radio Consultative Committee
5. CISPR: The International Special Committee on Radio Interference
D. Local standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over the Standards.
1.4 POWER SUPPLY
A. The Local Power Authority will provide incoming power supply and connection at 13.8kV
to the location shown on the Drawings.
B. Power Supply: Liaise with the Local Power Authority to confirm:
1. Characteristics of supply and system earthing.

2. Location of incoming supply shown on the Drawings.
3. Space requirements and associated builder's work for the Authority's installations.
4. Make necessary arrangements at the earliest opportunity to ensure connection as and
when required, and inform the Engineer in the event of any foreseen delay.
C. kWH-metering: Liaise with the Local Power Authority and provide necessary
instrumentation, enclosures and accessories required by them to effect a complete kWH-
metering installation.
D. kWH-metering: SEC’s electricity metering will be at MV level
E. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:
1. Medium voltage: 13.8 kV, 3phase, 3 wire low impedance neutral earthing.
2. Low voltage: 380/220 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed neutral.
3. Frequency: 60 Hz.
F. Distribution systems are to be supplied or derived from the voltage system previously
described, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
1.5 TELEPHONE PUBLIC EXCHANGE LINES
A. The Local Telephone Authority will bring telephone public exchange lines into the premises
to the location shown on the Drawings and/or to be agreed with the Authority. Liaise with
the Local Telephone Authority to confirm location of connection of public telephone
exchange lines into the premises.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
1.6 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment Spaces and Rooms: Verify that dimensions, structure, ventilating and cooling
arrangements and other provisions in equipment spaces and rooms are suitable for
installation, operation and maintenance of proposed equipment. Note any discrepancies on
the shop and construction drawings.
B. Equipment is to be designed for the system voltage and frequency previously described,
unless otherwise specified. Special provisions are to be made for equipment sensitive to
power supply frequency and voltage variations and for equipment operated at other
voltages/frequencies or by direct current sources.
1.7 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A. Equipment, including transformers, switchgear, cables, relays, lighting fixtures, motors etc.,
is to be designed and derated for continuous and trouble free service under the following
climatic conditions:
1. Altitude: above sea level.

2. Maximum ambient temperature: 50 degrees C (in the shade).
3. Maximum relative humidity: 100 %.
B. Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are required for particular
equipment, they are described in the specification of the equipment concerned.
1.8 DRAWINGS
A. Equipment locations shown on the Drawings indicate approximate locations and general
layout of equipment. Exact and final locations and layouts together with dimensions,
weights, mounting methods and accessories, where relevant, are to be shown on Contractor's
shop and construction drawings.
B. Symbols: In order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity on the
Drawings, the symbols used for various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted
devices, take up more space on the Drawings than the device does on the wall. Because of
drafting limitations these locations must be considered as being indicative rather than exact
physical locations of the devices. The devices shall be installed with prime regard for
convenience of operation and the proper usage of the wall space rather than to coincide with
the scaled locations of the symbols. In locating the outlets, follow the criteria provided on
detail Drawings where provided, and coordinate with furniture. Do not scale from design
Drawings.
C. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings are to be used as a guide only to defining basic
positions, circuiting, loading and switching arrangements. Actual layouts and details of
routing of circuits are to be shown on the Contractor's shop and construction drawings.
D. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical Work, such
as motor control centres/panels, cables to motors and other similar electrically operated
equipment are shown for convenience and reference only.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and construction
drawings and other information required by the Specification, before ordering equipment or
materials and before executing any related work on site.
B. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment, covers and supports.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings:
1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-metering

equipment.
2. Shop and construction drawings must demonstrate that the design requirements are
understood by indicating all equipment and material proposed to be supplied and
installed and by detailing fabrication and installation methods proposed to be used.
Shop and construction drawings are to clearly state the name and location of the
work, the names of Engineer and Contractor, submission date, cross-references to the
Drawings and Specification and the specific reference number, location, service and
function of each item.
3. Shop and construction drawings are to be submitted at a scale of 1:50 for general
layout plans, and 1:10, or 1:20 as approved by the Engineer for sections, details,
elevations, congested layouts, etc. Drawings shall include but not be limited to the
following:
a. Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades concerned,

showing sleeves and openings for passage through floor structure.
b. Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric, showing
locations of cables, conduits, bus ducts, shafts, mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, ceiling spaces and all other critical locations
c. Plans showing equipment layouts including all details pertaining to clearances,
access, sleeves, electrical connections, location and elevation of pipes, ducts,
conduits, etc.
d. Plans, sections and elevations of electrical spaces to illustrate compliance with
Standards for allocation of spaces for maintenance, movement, installation, etc.
requirements.
E. Coordination Study: Carry out a short circuit and protection coordination study, for the
electrical distribution network, and submitted to Engineer for approval.
F. Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original catalogues

or catalogue cuts, characteristics, model number, application and operating criteria of all
equipment and materials, together with other information necessary to satisfy Engineer that
proposed equipment and systems are suitable and adequate.
G. List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials, including all items for
which choice of manufacturer is at own discretion, is to be submitted for approval.
H. Assembled Equipment: Any assembled equipment to be supplied for the project is to be

assembled by the manufacturer or his authorized assembler. Submit the necessary
documents to substantiate the above including the assembler staff training, quality control,
etc. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any local assembler if the information
submitted is not sufficient. The Engineer's rejection in that respect is final and not subject to
discussion.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
I. Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine test certificates and
reports for equipment and devices. Complete test results are to be submitted in clearly
identified and organised booklets, indicating item of equipment, make, model, type, date of
tests, type of tests, descriptions and procedures. Include in the test reports the Quality
Assurance Certification, the standards to which the equipment comply, and the standards to
which the equipment was tested.
J. Factory Testing: Locally manufactured/assembled equipment is to comply with the relevant

standards recommendations and are to be witnessed by Engineer. If the manufacturer's test
certificates/tests are not complying with the standards, then independent laboratory tests are
to be carried out on equipment in accordance with the Specification and the Standards, and
as required by Engineer. The Engineer's requirements in that respect are final and not
subject to discussion.
K. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of spare parts to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's
unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
L. Tools And Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of tools and
instruments to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
M. Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all equipment
and devices to be labeled and the suggested details, lettering, position and fixing methods of
each label indicating its application.
N. Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major items of
equipment for which samples cannot be submitted are to be demonstrated in existing
installations or by manufacturer's information, test certificates and reports.
A. Comply with related Standards, specified therein.
B. Installations are to be carried out by qualified personnel.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other
structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.
1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities

and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company

providing electrical power and other services.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access
Doors."
E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate

installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
F. Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical identification markings
and devices, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
1.12 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in the work
prior to submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or materials cease to be
available, submit alternative items of equal quality and type for approval.
B. Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and material characteristics

where required are compatible with the requirements of the Local Power Authority or other
Authorities having jurisdiction and are acceptable to them. Inform Engineer of any
modifications necessary to comply with the Local Power Authority's requirements.
C. Manufacturers' Standards: Equipment is to be the latest standard product of the

manufacturer. Component parts are to be the product of a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise approved and provided that components made by other manufacturers are of a
standard design and are interchangeable.
D. Approved Manufacturers: Listing of approved manufacturers in the Specification does not

necessarily constitute approval of their standard products as equal to those specified.
Ascertain that listed manufacturers are able to supply equipment and material in conformity
with the Specification.
E. Factory Assembly: Equipment generally is to be supplied in complete factory assembled

units ready for installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for transportation or other
purposes is to be arranged to limit site work to simple reassembly and inter-wiring of
control and power cabling.
F. Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials are to be stored in an approved location,

under cover, free from humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment sensitive to heat and
humidity is to be kept in climatically conditioned areas until installed and handed over.
G. Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate operable defective
equipment during the Defects Liability Period until it can be removed from service for
repair or replacement.
H. Warranty: Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the

manufacturer (including his agreement to replace promptly, defective equipment or parts
thereof, as instructed by the Engineer) covering materials and workmanship for the period
stated in the Specification, starting at substantial completion. Assign the benefits of such
warranty to the Employer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
I. Spare Parts: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide spare parts required
by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
J. Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide sets of
tools and instruments required by the Specification, together with suitable means of
identifying, storing and securing same.
K. Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices etc. to indicate
duty, service or function, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Labels are to have English.
Alternative methods of labelling may be submitted for approval. Fix labels with non-
corrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent permanent surfaces or as approved by
Engineer.
L. Systems used before substantial completion are to have all consumable elements, such as
lamps etc. and defective equipment replaced by new, within 7 days prior to the date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 14-mm diameter
slotted holes at a maximum of 50-mm centers in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded
C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or
click-type hangers.
E. Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs
have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category.
Use colors prescribed by these Specifications.
B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size to meet Standards.
1. Type: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded,

acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Color: Black letters on orange/yellow background.
3. Legend: Indicates voltage.
C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl
tape, not less than 25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick.
D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape

with the following features:
1. Not less than 150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
F. Equipment Nameplates: Non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and firmly fixed
to equipment at factory. Nameplates are to indicate name and address of manufacturer,
model, serial number, basic characteristics and ratings of equipment and are to include
elementary diagrams etc., all in accordance with the Standards.
G. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
H. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1.6-mm minimum thickness for signs
up to 129 sq. cm and 3.2-mm minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black
letters on white background.
I. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs,

punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the
application.
J. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-

acetate butyrate signs with 1-mm, galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size
appropriate to the application. 6-mm grommets in corners for mounting.
K. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or No. 10/32
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.3 COVERS FOR TRENCHES
A. Covers in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or shown on the
Drawings, are to be flanged checkered steel plates with angle or channel- section frames,
suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and finished with zinc chromate primer and
two coats gray enamel.
2.4 BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, RAILS AND TRACKS
A. Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations are to be
galvanized steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic inserts
and lead anchors are not acceptable unless approved for specific light duty installations.
2.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."
B. Equipment Foundations and Bases: Reinforced concrete, as approved by Engineer after

submission of design calculations. Dimensions, levels and surface finishes are to be suitable
for equipment installed, as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
2.6 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY EMPLOYER
A. Meter: Electronic kilowatt-hour/demand measuring to record electricity used and highest

peak demand over a time period according to electric utility. Meter is designed for use on
the type and rating of circuit indicated for its application.
1. Kilowatt-Hour Display: Digital liquid crystal.

2. Kilowatt-Demand Display: Digital, liquid crystal type to register highest peak
demand.
3. Enclosure to have hasp for padlocking or sealing.
4. Memory Backup: Self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of
72 hours, minimum.
5. Sensors: Current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum
range and accuracy for the ratings of the circuits indicated for this application.
a. Type: Solid core.
B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Recommended by metering equipment manufacturer for use

with sensors indicated.
2.7 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment

finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Installations Generally:
1. Carry out Electrical Work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification and
Regulations, ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements, to
provide safe and protected systems with equipment readily accessible for operation,
maintenance and repair.
2. Installations are to be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated and
coordinated with all other work.
3. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types specified or
recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the equipment or accessories.
B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
C. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel

system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of 90-kg design load.
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical
components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies
and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or

clamps.
F. Install 6-mm- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar
hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the
raceway with an approved fastener not more than 600 mm from the box.
J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-
drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and
fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves
during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid
masonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided
with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of
its proof-test load.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical
identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:
1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive

marking tape. Make each color band 50-mm wide, completely encircling conduit,
and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 15-m
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 8-m maximum intervals in congested
areas.
3. Colors: As follows:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.

b. Security System: Blue and yellow.
c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used
for voltage and phase identification.
F. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power
and communication lines. Locate 150 to 200 mm below finished grade. If width of multiple
lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 400 mm, overall,
use a single line marker.
G. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where needed to ensure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved
plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for
system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
H. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background

with minimum 9-mm- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations.
3.5 FIRE STOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Fire stopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
System."
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than
100 mm larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment
manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie
locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use 21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete
and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
3.7 SUPPORT FRAMES FOR SWITCHGEAR
A. Support frames for switchgear located over cable trenches, where shown on the Drawings or
required by equipment design, are to be installed prior to pouring concrete.
3.8 HOLES AND ANCHORS
A. Drilling for anchor bolts is to be carried out using appropriate electric drills and in approved
positions.
B. Holes and chases in in situ concrete are to be cast in. Do not cut hardened concrete or drill
holes larger than 10-mm diameter without prior approval.
C. Holes and Chases in Pre-cast Concrete: do not cut or drill pre-cast concrete without prior
approval.
D. Holes in Structural Steelwork: Do not cut or drill structural steelwork without prior
approval.
E. Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:
1. Size of holes: 300-mm square.

2. Depth of vertical chases: 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls, 1/3 leaf thickness.
3. Depth of horizontal chases: 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.
F. Cutting Masonry:
1. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.

2. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spalling, cracking or other damage to surrounding
structure.
3. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified dimensions.
4. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only; do not set back to
back; offset by a distance not less than wall thickness.
G. Preformed Holes in Masonry: Submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts etc. which
exceed 450-mm width.
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire stopping has been
disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades
involved.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.
3. Electricity-metering components.
4. Concrete bases.
5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
6. Touchup painting.
B. Test Employer's electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy, and

usability of output data.
1. Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by the

metered feeder.
2. Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the "off"
condition.
3. Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a
measurable meter indication. Use a test load placement and setting that ensure
continuous, safe operation.
4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual
electricity used based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements
of supply voltage at the test load connection. Record test results.
5. Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup; then
retest. Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of entire system is
verified.
3.11 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats
to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for
timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed

finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. The following Sections contain special requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for ground earth pits.
2. Division 13 Section "Lightning Protection" for additional grounding and bonding
materials.
4. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes complete installations to earth every source of energy and to provide
protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based on the TN-S system arrangement,
including:
1. Transformer neutral earthing.

2. Main earthing terminals or bars.
3. Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment.
4. Extraneous conductive parts.
5. Standby generator neutral earthing.
Earthing requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special

requirements of systems described in other Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and may
be used interchangeably: "earth" and "ground"; "earthing" and "grounding".
B. Earth: Conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero.
C. Earth Electrode: Conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing
electrical connection to, Earth.
D. Exposed Conductive Part: Any part which can be readily touched and which is not a live
part, but which may become live under fault conditions.
E. Extraneous Conductive Part: Any conductive part not forming part of the electrical
installation such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes,
heating tubes etc. and non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators,
cooking ranges, metal sinks etc. and non-insulating floors and walls.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - Page 1 of 10

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
F. Protective Conductor: Conductor used for some measure of protection against electric shock
and intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
1. Exposed conductive parts.

2. Extraneous conductive parts.
3. Earth electrode(s).
4. Main earthing terminal or bar(s).
5. Earthed point of the source(s).
G. Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: Earth electrodes located at such distance from
one another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly
affect the potential of the other(s).
H. Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: The terminal or bar provided for the connection of
protective conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if
any to the means of earthing.
I. Equipotential Bonding: Electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous conductive

parts at a substantially equal potential.
J. Earthing Conductor: Protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of an

installation to earth electrode or to other means of earthing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not
limited to, manufacturer’s catalogues for each type of product indicated including the
following:
1. Ground rods.
2. Connecting clamps.
3. Earthing conductors, protective conductors, and bonding conductors.
4. Connectors and other accessories.
5. Exothermic welding kits and tools.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1. Test procedures used and test conditions.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connections.
2. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-section, depth of
laying and covering.
3. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
4. Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms, switchgear,

distribution panelboards etc., indicating fittings used, insulation, plates and marking,
passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves, grooves, niches etc.,
giving sizes and dimensions of component parts.
E. Records: Submit the following:
1. Scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all

components of earthing system.
2. Nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.
3. Date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used.
F. Samples: Submit samples of conductors, as requested by Engineer.
G. Calculation as specified in this section to ensure proper earthing system as per specified
standard.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing

lightning protection systems similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Standards: Carry out work in accordance with the following:
1. IEC 60364-3 and 60364-4-41: Electrical Installations in Buildings.

2. Latest edition IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations in Buildings – London.
C. Comply with BS EN 52305 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

1. BICC (England)
2. Furse (England)
3. G.E.C. (England)
4. Copper weld (U.S.A)
A. Component parts of earthing system are to include the following:
1. Earth electrode (rods, tapes etc.)

2. Main earthing terminals or bars.
3. Earthing conductors.
4. Protective conductors.
5. Equipotential bonding conductors.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
6. Electrically independent earth electrodes for special systems.

7. Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other materials.
B. Earth electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried earthing
tape or cable, which is to have a total combined resistance value, during any season of the
year and before interconnection to other earthed systems or earthing means, not exceeding 5
ohms. Distance between two rods is not to be less than twice the length of one rod driven
depth.
C. Ring type earth electrode is to consist of earthing conductors, in a closed loop, buried in
exterior wall foundations underneath the water-proofing, or alternatively at 0.6 m around the
perimeter of the building foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing
conductors to this ring. Insulated connection flags into the building, of same material as
earthing conductors, are to be located at positions of service entrance and main switchboard
rooms, terminating in bolt-type earth points (studs) or test- links for connection of main
earth bar(s). Additional earth rods connecting with the earth ring are to be provided, as
necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to an acceptable value.
D. Functional earth electrode is to be provided separately from, but interconnected to, other
earth electrode(s) through suitably rated (470 V) spark gap. Functional earth electrodes are
to be used for earthing electronic equipment (communication equipment, digital processors,
computers etc.) as required by the particular Section of the Specification and
recommendation of manufacturer.
E. Alternative Earth Electrode: other types of earth electrode may be used, after approval,
including:
1. Cast iron pipes with special surround material

2. Copper plate(s)
3. Tape mats (strips).
F. Main earthing bar is to be provided at point of service entrance or main distribution room,
and as described in the Specification or shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing
conductors, protective conductors and bonding conductors to the main earthing bar. Provide
two insulated main earthing conductors, one at each end of the bar, connected via testing
joints to the earth electrode at two separate earth pits. Conductor is to be sized to carry
maximum earth fault current of system at point of application with final conductor
temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C for at least 5 second. Main earthing conductors are to
be minimum 120 mm2 or as otherwise required by the particular Section of the
Specification.
G. Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main earthing
conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
H. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective conductor is
common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be the largest
of the conductor sizes.
1. Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with Table 54F of IEE Regulations.
I. Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like. Where
armored cable is specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective conductor, if
approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
J. Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective conductor from one

piece of equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive parts of
equipment are not to be used as protective conductors, but are to be connected by bolted
clamp type connectors and/or brazing to continuous protective conductors which are to be
insulated by molded materials.
K. Earth Fault Loop Impedance: For final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault
impedance at every socket outlet is to be such that disconnection of protective device on
over-current occurs within 0.4 seconds. For final circuits supplying only fixed equipment,
earth fault loop impedance at every point of utilization is to be such that disconnection
occurs within 5 seconds.
1. Use appropriate tables and present same for approval by the Engineer (IEE
Regulations: Tables 41A1 and 41A2, Appendix 7 and Regulation 543).
L. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts of the

building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting, metallic
conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armor to nearest earthing terminals by
equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding conductor shall not
be less than half of the protective conductor connected to respective earthing terminal with a
minimum of 4-mm2.
M. Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other
metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to main
earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable between point
of entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding is to be
made on the premise side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be less than
half that of the earthing conductor connected thereto, and minimum 6 mm2.
N. Identification: Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every

bonding conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in accordance with the
Regulations, as follows:
1. SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE.
O. Identification: Protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination of

green-and-yellow colors of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colors, as
approved.
P. Identification: Source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) is to be identified

along its entire length by continuous black insulation labeled 'neutral earthing'.
2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Buried Earth Conductors: Bare annealed copper strip conductors 25 x 3 mm, or annealed
stranded copper conductors 120 mm2 cross-section.
B. Earthing Conductors: Insulated or bare copper conductor as described in the Specification

for the particular application.
C. Protective Conductors: Single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables, having
rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor forming part of
a multi-core cable, color coded.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
D. Protective Bonding Conductors: Bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded copper
cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in Article
"General Requirements" hereof.
E. Main Earthing Bar: Hard drawn copper, 40 x 4 mm where formed into a closed loop, and 50
x 6 mm where open-ended. Earth bar is to be labeled 'Main Earth Bar' and is to be drilled,
for connection of conductors, at a spacing not less than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with
copper alloy bolts, nuts and washers and wall mounting insulators.
F. Testing Joints (Test Links): Copper or copper alloy, with bolted end connections,
disconnectable by use of a tool, and suitably sized for earthing conductors or earth bar
connection. Links are to be fixed to porcelain or other approved insulating supports.
Contact surfaces are to be tinned.
2.4 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS AND EARTHING ACCESSORIES
A. Copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with points of
connection, and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity.
B. Bolted Connectors and Clamps: Bolted-pressure-type connectors and clamps, or

compression type. Bolts, nuts and washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze or copper
silicon alloys.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rod: 16-mm diameter high strength, low carbon steel core of high tensile strength
(600 N/mm2), with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper molecularly bonded into steel core,
0.25 mm minimum thickness. Driving head is to be high strength steel. Couplings are to be
long length silicon bronze, internally threaded. Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure
uniform layers of copper and strength. Earth rod is to be complete with couplings, head and
bolted connector of sufficient size, and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables
terminated thereto.
1. Minimum Length of Rod: 2.5 m, extendible as necessary to obtain required earth

resistance
B. Tape Mats: Where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth electrode is to consist of
parallel and perpendicular copper strip, 2.4 m apart, welded together by exothermic welds to
form a grid. Tape is to be 25 x 3-mm strip conductor.
C. Earth Pit: Precast, square or circular section concrete handhole (minimum 450 mm internal
diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 150 mm below top of earth rod.
Earth pit is to be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing conductor.
Cover is to have inset brass plate with inscription 'Earth Pit - Do Not Remove'.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRANSFORMER SUBSTATION EARTHING
A. MV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth bar of
each item by bare conductor and the earth-electrode by two insulated earthing conductors,
one at each end of bar, via testing joints. Earthing conductor is to be minimum 50 mm2.
B. Outdoor ring main units, which are individually mounted, are to be connected to earth
electrode by one insulated earthing conductor, bolted at earthing terminal.
C. LV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth bar of
each item by bare conductor and the earth electrode at two extreme ends by two insulated
earthing conductors through testing joints. Earthing conductor size is to be minimum 120
mm2.
D. Transformer earthing terminal is to be connected to LV main earthing bar by bare copper

earthing conductor not less than 20 mm2 per 100 kVA of transformer rating, with a
minimum of 35 mm2.
E. Transformer neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor (color

black) to LV side main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be sized for maximum
earth fault current for 1 second with final conductor temperature not exceeding 150 deg. C
or sized not less than 30 mm2 per 100 kVA of transformer rating, and with a minimum of
50 mm2. Where a neutral is directly connected to earth electrode, an insulated
disconnecting device is to be provided at the transformer.
F. Lightning arresters are to be directly connected to earth electrode, following the shortest
path. Each lightning arrester is to be connected at a dedicated earth rod.
3.2 EARTHING OF MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS, LIGHTING

INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. Main earthing bar is to be provided in main distribution room and connected to earth
electrode by two insulated conductors (minimum 120 mm2) via testing joints.
B. Earthing bars of main distribution boards are to be connected, by bare earthing conductor,
directly to main earthing bar at main distribution room and by protective conductor run with
incoming feeder from respective supply point.
C. Distribution, lighting and power panelboards are to be connected by protective conductors

run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in panelboards with
respective main distribution board earthing bar.
D. Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch
circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket outlet
terminal is to be connected.
E. Final Ring Sub-Circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit is to be in the
form of a ring having both ends connected to earth terminal at origin of circuit in
panelboard.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
F. Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such as
switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective earth
conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
3.3 GENERATOR PLANT EARTHING
A. Generator neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor through the
neutral earthing link or device to main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be
suitably sized to carry maximum earth fault current for time it takes the system protection to
operate with final conductor temperature not exceeding 150 deg. C, but not less than 30
mm2 per 100 kVA of generator rating, with a minimum of 50 mm2.
B. Generator earthing terminal is to be connected to main earthing bar by bare copper

conductor of cross section not less than 20 mm2 per 100 kVA of generator size, with a
minimum of 35 mm2.
C. Switchgear (ATS) and Control Gear: Earthing terminals or bars of switchgear and control
gear are to be connected by separate protective conductors to respective normal and
emergency main distribution board earth bars.
D. Extraneous conductive parts including steel frames, battery racks, day-tank, pumps and
piping are to be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main earth bar in
compliance with bonding regulations.
3.4 MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY
A. Main earthing bar or loop is to be conveniently located in mechanical plant rooms, and
connected by earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor control centre at its
earthing bar, and to motors, switches and other electrical equipment etc. at their earthing
terminals, using 20 x 2 mm bare copper strips or 35 mm2 bare copper conductor
(minimum size) or as required to carry maximum earth fault current for 1 second with final
conductor temperature not exceeding 200 deg. C. Conductors are to be securely fixed,
recessed in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar or
loop is to be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
B. Main earthing bar or loop is to be connected at two extremely separate points to earth
electrode, directly through two test joints by insulated earthing conductors, or connected to
main earth bar by protective conductors.
C. Motor and other equipment earth terminals are to be connected also by protective earth
conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel or
distribution unit.
3.5 ROAD LIGHTING
A. Earthing Cables: separate protective earthing cables for lighting column circuits are to be
run with power circuit, terminated at LV supply position in lighting control panel and
looped into column earthing terminals. The last column is to be bonded via an earthing bolt
to a single 14 mm diameter copper covered steel rod, 2.5 m long, driven into ground
adjacent to column. Bonding is to be 16 mm2 stranded bare copper conductor.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
B. Connections between rods and earthing conductors are to be made by the Cadweld process
producing a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for connection to removable items
of equipment only.
3.6 SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
A. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide 16mm2 minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 6.4-by-50-by-300-mm grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.7 INSTALLATION
A. Continuity: Ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and

mechanically secure.
B. Earth Rods: While siting earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with individual
rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than 600 mm from
foundations of buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient size is to be drilled
before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal filler
that will not corrode, is to be provided around the rod.
C. Buried earthing conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.8 m from ground surface.
D. Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main earthing
terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit fastened to building structure by approved
supports and extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be protected against mechanical
damage and corrosion.
E. Protective Conductors: Separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable, are to
be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.
F. Protective Bonding: Remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at threads,
contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings designed to make
secure bonds.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Protection against Corrosion: Protect bolted connections against corrosion either by filling
with vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper capping.
B. Connections: Earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth

connection is permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be
employed.
C. Connections: Where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use
bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or
compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
D. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds

that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable.
E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and checked
against specified resistance.
B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
C. Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.
D. Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against calculated
impedance figures.
E. Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.
3.10 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it
as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching,
storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include
application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2
Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes low voltage (LV) feeder cables, branch circuit wiring, control and
signal cables, termination, jointing and splicing.
1. Division 7 Section “Fire Stopping” for fire stopping material and installation
equipment.
2. Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Material and Methods”.
3. Division 16 Section “Cable Trays” with its related section.
4. Division 16 Section “Raceway and boxes” with its related section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities,

de-rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
B. Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by Engineer, other accessories.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of trays, feeder, sub-feeder cables and
branch circuits, with indication of any equipment to show and verify coordination
between various trades.
2. Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.
5. Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with
final conduit routing.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by
manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test requirements of
the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - Page 1 of 8

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications
prior to work commencing on site.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice
and terminate low-voltage cables.
B. Standards: Wires and cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved standards
and are to bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured.
Wires and cables not having this identification will be rejected.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying capacities
and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
A. Deliver wires and cables properly packaged in factory packed or fabricated containers,
wound on factory reels.
B. Store wires and cables in dry areas, and protect from weather, fumes, water, debris, etc.
C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable
insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is
maintained.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and
as approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. B.I.C.C. (England)
2. Pirelli-General (England)
3. Siemens (Germany)
4. Saudi Cables (Saudi Arabia)
5. Jeddah Cable Company (Saudi Arabia)

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.2 GENERALLY
A. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other feeders
are to have copper conductors. Cable conductors are to be stranded for sections 4 mm2 and
above, based on IEC 60228 Class 2. Signal and control cables are to have solid conductors
unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords are to have finely stranded conductors.
Conductors of single-core cables 25-mm2 and above are to be compacted. Multi-core
cables 35-mm2 and above is to be sectoral shape.
B. Conductor sizes are to be metric and as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with cross-
sectional area smaller than specified will not be accepted.
C. Building wiring insulation is to be color coded or otherwise identified as required by the

Regulations and as follows:
1. Neutral is to be light blue.

2. Protective earth is to be green or green/yellow striped.
3. Phase colors are to be brown, black, grey or use color coding in accordance with local
regulations and standards.
D. Maintain color coding throughout installation. Phase-conductors for which outer jacket is
not color-coded are to have engraved alphanumeric mark (L1, L2, L3) or color coded heat-
shrinkable sleeves.
E. Buried Cables: Cables buried directly in the ground are to be armored type, unless otherwise
indicated in particular Sections of the Specification or on the Drawings.
2.3 LV WIRES AND CABLES
A. Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires): Unless otherwise specified, single
conductor cables for wiring in conduit are to have annealed copper conductors, compacted,
generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant PVC/E to IEC 60227 (type 5 to BS 7655), suitable for wet locations and for
conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables are to be 450/750 V grade.
B. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have annealed, copper conductors,
compacted, insulated with PVC/E to IEC 60227 (type 5 to BS 7655), flame retardant,
moisture and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 85 deg.
C, laid up, bedded with suitable filler and sheathed with PVC. Armored cables are to have
single layer of galvanized steel wire armor with PVC over-sheath. Cables are to comply
with IEC 60502 and IEC 60811.
C. Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires): Unless otherwise specified, single
conductor cables for wiring in conduit are to have annealed copper conductors, compacted,
generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant PVC to IEC 60227 (or to BS 7655), suitable for wet locations and for conductor
temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables are to be 450/750 V grade.
D. Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single-core circular stranded,
annealed copper conductors, compacted, insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for wet locations and conductor
temperatures of 90 deg. C. and PVC over-sheath. Armored cables are to have taped
bedding, single wire aluminum armor and PVC over-sheath.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
E. Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single core annealed copper
conductors, compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C, laid up
and bedded with suitable non-hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation and flame
retardant PVC over-sheathed, color black. Armored cables are to have single layer of
galvanized steel wire applied helically over extruded PVC bedding (which may be an
integral part of filling) and over-sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST2, color black to
IEC60502.
F. Low Smoke and Fume (LSF) Cables: 600/1000 V grade, copper conductor, compacted,
insulated with extruded LSF material in compliance with BS 6724 for armored cables and
BS 7211 for un-armored cables. Materials used in construction of LSF cables are to be
nominally free from halogens (fluorine, chlorine and bromine). When material is tested in
accordance with BS EN 50267, Part 1 and IEC Publication 60754, Part 1, the acidic gas
evolved during combustion is to be less than 0.5%. When tested in accordance with BS EN
50267, method 141D or ASTM method S2863, the oxygen index of bedding and sheathing
materials is not to be less than 30. Completed cable is to meet the requirements for tests
under fire conditions when tested in accordance with BS EN 60332-1, Part 1 and NMV 1.5
of BS EN 50266 Part 3. Cores and cross sectional area are to be as shown on the Drawings.
Phases are to be color coded in conformity with the Standards, and overall cable sheath is to
be extruded black LSF material.
G. Flexible cable for connection to appliances, window fans, pendants etc. is to be 300/500 V
grade to BS 6500, three or four core, with tinned finely stranded copper wires, EPR
insulated, twisted and Sheathed With Chlorosulphonated Polyethylene (CSP) Compound
And With Strengthening Cord.
H. High Temperature Cable - Type FP 200 gold, or approved equal): Solid or stranded plain
annealed copper conductors to BS 6360 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation to
BS 6899 (0.6 mm radial thickness), laminate aluminum/screen and low smoke zero halogen
(LS0H) composite sheath with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire. Cable is to be
rated 300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, to operate continuously at
150 deg. C and for short durations at 200 deg. C. It is to be certified to have passed IEC
60331 and IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 flame resistance fire retardant and reduced flame
propagation tests and to comply with category CWZ of BS6387.
I. Fire resistant cable (similar to Perilli FP400- or equal): plain copper stranded circular
conductor complying with BS 6360 with fire resistant insulation comply with BS 7655
operating temperature 90 degree C, galvanized steel wires armor and extracted low smoke
zero halogen (LS0H) over sheath. Cables are to be rated 600/1000 V. It is to be certified to
have passed IEC 60331, IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 and IEC fire retardant and reduced
flame propagation test and to comply with category CWZ of BS 6387. Cables are to be
used to feed the fire pumps.
2.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES
A. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm2, 2.5 mm2 or
stranded 4 mm2 plain circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/E to IEC 60227
(PVC type 5 to BS 7655), rated for 70 deg. C, of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores are to
be laid up together and filled with non-hygroscopic material, PVC over-sheathed, to form
compact and circular cable for use in switchgear, control gear and generally for control of
power and lighting systems. Armored cable is to have extruded PVC bedding which may be
an integral part of the filling, galvanized steel wire armoring, and over-sheath of PVC type
ST2 to IEC 60502, color black. Core identification is to be white printed numbers 1, 2, 3
etc. over black insulation.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
B. PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, are to be generally 300 V
rating, polyethylene insulated, color-coded, tinned copper conductors (0.6-mm diameter),
twisted together into pairs. Multi-pair core assembly is to be covered with binder tape,
spirally wound 0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided with drain wire and
overall PVC sheath.
C. Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables, are to be
insulated for same voltage grade.
2.5 CONNECTORS (LV POWER)
A. Connector - Type A-1: Pressure indent type, for terminating or making T-taps and splices on
conductors 10 mm2 and smaller. Connector is to be non-ferrous copper alloy applied to
conductor by mechanical crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating sleeves or phenolic
insulating covers.
B. Connector - Type A-2: Bolted pressure split type for terminating or making T-taps and
splices on conductors 16 mm2 and larger. Connector is to be cast non-ferrous copper alloy
applied to conductor by clamping with minimum of two screws and provided with phenolic
insulating cover.
C. Connector - Type B-1: Pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
Connector is to be steel encased spring with shell, insulated with vinyl cap and skirt, type
Scotchlok brand, as manufactured by Minnesota Mining & Mfg. Co. or other equal and
approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires
and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Before pulling wires in conduit check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general) is free
of burrs and is dry and clean.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Building wires and cables are to be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts indoors
and in conduit outdoors, unless otherwise shown the Drawings.
B. Circuits: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, final branch circuit wiring is to be run
inside trunking or conduits, D.C. wiring is to be run in separate conduits from A.C. wiring,
and emergency lighting and power circuits are to be run in separate conduits from normal
circuits.
C. Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards is to be arranged as
shown on the Drawings. Loads on various phases of panelboards are to be balanced. Ensure
that the lighting load and other loads are balanced with a difference of not more than 10%
between the phases.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
D. Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in conduit
and trunking indoors, and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.
E. Bunching of wires in raceways is to be in accordance with raceway filling factors permitted

by the Regulations.
F. Lubricants are to be used for pulling wire or cable if character of pull would otherwise
damage conductors, insulation or jacket. Lubricants are to be approved by the Engineer.
G. Pull conductors into raceways simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the
same raceway.
H. Support: Cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers are to be supported at upper
end of risers and at intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve any stresses on
conductors, where required.
I. Wiring At Outlets: Leave a slack of at least 200mm at each outlet.
J. Extra Length: At every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through is to
be left slack to allow inspection and for connections to be made. Cables terminating in
outlet boxes are to be left with at least 250-mm extra length for terminations.
K. Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, are to be permanently accessible or made
only in boxes or cabinet gutters.
L. Connectors for terminating or making T-taps and splices are to be Type A-1 on conductors
10 mm2 or smaller, Type A-2 for conductors 16 mm2 and larger, and Type B-1 for branch
circuit and fixture wiring.
M. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.
N. Switch legs for local wall switches are to have distinctive color, selected as complementary
to cable color coding used in the project.
O. Terminations: Conductors of wires and cables up to 16mm2 are to be tightly twisted and
where possible doubled back before being clamped with set screws. Where two or more
wires are looped into same terminal these conductors are to be tightly twisted together
before inserting into terminals. In no case is bare conductor to be allowed to project beyond
any insulated shrouding or mounting of a line terminal. Cables sizes 16 mm2 and larger are
to terminate in tunnel lugs with setscrew, or by using bolted or sweated compression
connectors.
P. Tagging: Tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of
panelboards or distribution cabinets. Tags are to identify cable or circuit number and
conductor size in accordance with the Schedules.
Q. Tagging: Where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device, outlet box or
ceiling junction box, each circuit is to be tagged as a guide in making connections.
3.3 FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATION (0.6/1 KV)
A. Cables generally are to be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses, clamped to
steel racks or cable trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts are to be installed in steel
conduits.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
B. Fixing: Single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces are to be fixed
directly to walls or ceilings but must be accessible. Where two or more cables are run in
parallel, they are to be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other approved
special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.
C. Clamps: Where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved galvanized
cast steel clamps (or molded plastic clamps for single core cables) are to be used at distances
not exceeding 20 diameters.
D. Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub-feeders. Cables are to be supplied in
lengths sufficient for straight-through un-jointed termination to termination pull.
E. Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, are to be laid in
heavy duty PVC duct banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in concrete, in
masonry or in floor finishing.
F. Buried cables liable to mechanical damage are to be drawn through PVC conduit or asbestos
cement pipe. If steel conduit is used, all three-phase conductors, neutral and protective earth
circuits are to be in the same conduit.
G. Exposure to Heat: Route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or to
corrosive agents. If such condition is unavoidable, cables are to be type designed for
particular condition.
H. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections. Insulating
cover is to be purpose made and is to provide minimum insulation level equal to that of
conductor insulation.
I. Glands for various single-core and multi-core cables are to be purpose made and suitable for
rigid mounting to equipment enclosure.
J. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping material
according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
K. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths
are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or
manholes.
B. Recommendations: Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct specified
materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and bonds as
applicable.
C. Jointing: Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable
manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations and through-
joints are to be submitted prior to commencing work on site. Samples are to be constructed
in the presence of the Engineer and are to be available for test and inspection in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent damage
to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit or
equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.
A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and
Standards.
B. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test
equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 500 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on installations with nominal voltage over
500 V up to 1000 V.
C. Insulation resistance for LV power and lighting installations is to be carried out in

accordance with IEE Regulations 613-5 through 613-8 and 713-04.
D. Insulation resistance for control and signal cables is to be minimum 10000 Megohm-km for
PE insulated cables and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all measured core-core
and core-earth, in accordance with the Regulations.
E. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to
determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
F. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.
G. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then
retest to demonstrate compliance.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16124 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for
medium-voltage electrical distribution systems above 1000V rating.
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable and
termination supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable markers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying

capacities, de-rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
B. Samples of each cable and, if requested by the Engineer, other accessories.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1. Exact routing layouts, showing coordination between various trades.

2. Details of supports and fixings for trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchgear, etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings
at enclosures.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued
by manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, Standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test requirements
of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications
prior to work commencing on site.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables and accessories certifying that

the products furnished comply with requirements.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES 16124 - Page 1 of 6

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
I. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of cables and accessories with requirements
based on comprehensive testing of current products.
J. Maintenance Data: For cables and accessories to include in the maintenance manuals
1. Include periodic tests of cables in service.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install,

splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.
B. Standards: Cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved Standards, and are to
bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured. Cables
not having this identification will be rejected.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by the Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying
capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
A. Deliver medium-voltage cable on factory reels complying with applicable Standard.
B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a dry location. Protect from weather,
fumes, water, debris, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. B.I.C.C. (England)
2. Cables de Lyon (France)
3. Pirelli-General (England)
5. Saudi Cables (Saudi Arabia)

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
6. Jeddah Cable Company (Saudi Arabia)
2.2 15 kV MV CABLE
A. Three Core MV Cable (17.5 kV maximum between phases), XLPE insulated, for use on
systems with voltages up to 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 60502, and have the
following characteristics:
1. Conductor: Copper, circular, stranded and compacted.

2. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
3. Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 thick.
4. Insulation Screen Part: Non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-conducting
material, readily strippable.
5. Metallic Part: Layer of copper tape applied with 30% overlap.
6. Filling and Bedding: Polypropylene extruded over laid up cores to form compact
circular bedding.
7. Outer Sheath: Flame retardant extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 60502.
8. Embossing: "Electric cable 15000 V".
B. Short-circuit: 21.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 150mm2Single Core MV
Cable (17.5 kV maximum between phases), XLPE - insulated, for use on systems with
voltages between 12 kV and 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 502, and have the following
characteristics:

2. Conductor Screen : Extruded semi-conducting layer.
3. Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 mm thick.
4. Copper Screen: Layer of copper wires with copper tape applied in opposite
direction bedding. Inner tape covering and separation sheath of extruded PVC.
5. Over-sheath: Flame retardant extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 502.
6. Short-circuit rating 21.7 kA (minimum) for one second for 185 mm2 cables and 40
kA (minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.
C. Armored cable, where required or shown on the Drawings, is to have single layer of
aluminum wire or two layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over-sheath.
D. Cable joints to be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints equal to cable in

characteristics, in terms of insulation, stress distribution and water-tightness. Materials
and methods of jointing are to be approved before confirmation of order.
2.3 33 kV MV CABLE
A. Three Core MV Cable (36 kV maximum between phases), XLPE insulated, for use on
systems with voltages up to 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 60502, and have the

2. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
3. Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 thick.
4. Insulation Screen Part: Non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-conducting
material, readily strippable.
5. Metallic Part: Layer of copper tape applied with 30% overlap.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
6. Filling and Bedding: Polypropylene extruded over laid up cores to form compact
circular bedding.
7. Outer Sheath: Flame retardant extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 60502.
8. Embossing: "Electric cable 33,000 V".
B. Short-circuit: 21.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 150mm2Single Core MV
Cable (36 kV maximum between phases), XLPE - insulated, for use on systems with
voltages between 18 kV and 30 kV, is to comply with IEC 502, and have the following
characteristics:

2. Conductor Screen : Extruded semi-conducting layer.
3. Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 mm thick.
4. Copper Screen: Layer of copper wires with copper tape applied in opposite
direction bedding. Inner tape covering and separation sheath of extruded PVC.
5. Over-sheath: Flame retardant extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 502.
6. Short-circuit rating 21.7 kA (minimum) for one second for 185 mm2 cables and 40
kA (minimum) for one second for 300 mm2 cables.
C. Armored cable, where required or shown on the Drawings, is to have single layer of
aluminum wire or two layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over-sheath.
D. Cable joints to be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints equal to cable in

characteristics, in terms of insulation, stress distribution and water-tightness. Materials
and methods of jointing are to be approved before confirmation of order.
2.4 EXECUTION
2.5 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways to receive medium-voltage cables for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cables. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.6 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for feeder and sub-feeder cable
installation requirements applicable to this Section.
B. Install cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where

necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips
that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment
to cable.
E. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
F. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."
G. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped 75-mm bed of clean sand at bottom of
trench. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping from those items by a minimum
of 100 mm of tamped earth. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in
direction, and buried splices.
H. Install "buried cable" warning tape 305 mm above cables.
I. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around
walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to
prevent sag.
J. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping
material according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
K. Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."
2.7 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's
lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes,
handholes or manholes.
B. Recommendations: Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct specified
materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and bonds as
applicable.
C. Jointing: Qualifications of operatives are to be submitted to Engineer prior to work

commencing on site. Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary
to cable manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations
and through-joints are to be submitted to the Engineer prior to commencing work on site.
Samples are to be constructed in the presence of the Engineer and are to be available for
test and inspection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit
or equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance
with manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.
A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations
and Standards.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
B. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test
equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 1000 V megger on installations
with nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V, and 5000 V megger on MV installations
(up to 13.8 kV) for initial checks.
C. Testing: On installation of medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has

been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C. output voltage and ampere
range sufficient to test MV cables. Cables are to be laid in position (trench or duct
bank), jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with ends free of equipment
and clear of ground.
2. MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied between core under test and
the screen in steps, pausing one minute or more each step (first step being the A.C.
rms rated voltage of the cable, followed by two equal steps) up to maximum test
voltage. At each step, and for the last 5-15 minutes duration at maximum test
voltage, the ammeter (normally a micro-ammeter) is to be monitored closely and
recorded. If, except as voltage is increased, the current starts to increase, test is to
be stopped and the installation inspected and tested for the fault.
3. MV Cable Testing: Each cable/core is to be tested independently. Maximum D.C.
test voltage for grounded neutral system is to be 3 times rated A.C. rms voltage of
cable.
4. MV Cable Testing: Alternative test is to apply A.C. rms voltage up to 1.5 times
A.C. rms rating of cable (26 kV for 17.5 kV cable), applied for 15 minutes, by an
approved A.C. test set. Readings are to be within same range and in accordance
with IEC 60502.
D. Correct malfunctioning cables and accessories at Project site, where possible, and retest
to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
2.9 PROTECTION

and Installer, to prevent entrance of moisture into the cables and to ensure medium-
voltage cables are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes boxes and raceways including conduits, wireways, and related
installations and accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders,
branch circuit wiring and wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"

2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box
supports.
3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, manufacturers'
catalogues with specifications of raceways including conduits, trunking, boxes, etc. and
related accessories
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing of conduits, trunking etc. with indication of boxes, accessories and
expansion joints, size and type of conduits and boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation of trunking, trays etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection of conduits to metal enclosure,
connection of flexible conduits, vapour-tight installations in cold rooms,
weatherproof installations outdoors etc. and earthing connections.
C. Samples of each type of raceway, box, and accessory.
A. Regulations and Standards: Conduits, wireways, cable trays and fittings are to be designed,
constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical protection for
wires and cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of products are to be as
specified.
1.5 COORDINATION
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - Page 1 of 14

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements
to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Conduit, Wireways, and Related Accessories:
a. EGA Tubes (England/Saudi Arabia)

b. G.E.C. (England)
c. Siemens (Germany)
d. Simplex (England)
e. Marshall Tufflex (England)
f. Decoduct (England/UAE)
g. MK (England/Saudi Arabia)
h. Matsushita (Japan)
2. Metallic Outlet Boxes
a. Same manufacturer as conduit or other approved, and to the satisfaction of

Engineer.
3. Moulded Plastic Outlet Boxes
a. Egatube (England)
b. M.K. (England)
2.2 RIGID HEAVY GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT
A. Material: Heavy gauge drawn and welded steel, threaded at both ends, to CEE 23, BS 4568
Part 1 and BS 31 Class B (threaded), with class 4 protection for rigid steel conduit, zinc
coated inside and outside by hot-dip process or sherardizing.
B. Fittings Generally: Threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron.
Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated. Fittings and components
are to comply with CEE 23, BS 4568 Part 2 and BS 31.
C. Locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure are to be heavy hexagonal or castellated
pattern, for fastening.
D. Bushings for terminating conduits are to be smooth rounded brass rings.
E. Miscellaneous fittings including reducers, chase nipples, three piece unions, split couplings
and plugs are to be standard fittings designed and manufactured for the particular
application.
2.3 LIGHT GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT (ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING-EMT)

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Material: Welded steel, non-threaded type, galvanized externally and protected internally
with corrosion resistant enamel, and to U.S. Federal Specifications.
B. Corrosion Resistance: Conduits used in corrosive atmospheres are to be copper silicon alloy,
highly resistant to corrosion.
C. Fittings Generally: Threadless pressure type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast
iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.
2.4 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): rigid high grade mild strip welded steel, hot dip
galvanized over the entire length including factory made treads after cutting with organic
corrosion resistant polymer inside coating and to US federal Specification, UL 1242 and
ANSI C80.6.
B. IMC Fittings Generally: Threaded fittings and connectors and terminations with rigid
coupling, concrete tight where required, and with red lead coated threads where site cut.
Factory made bend are to be provided where site bending is not possible.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Welded steel, non-threaded type galvanized externally
and protected internally with corrosion resistant enamel, and to U.S. Federal Specifications,
UL 797 and ANSI C80.3.
D. EMT Fittings Generally: Threadless pressure type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated. Factory made
bend are to be provided where site bending is not possible.
E. Corrosion Resistance: Conduits used in corrosive atmospheres are to be copper silicon alloy,
highly resistant to corrosion.
2.5 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
A. Material: Steel, cold rolled and annealed, non-threaded type, formed from continuous length
of helically wound and interlocked strip steel, with fused zinc coating on inside and outside,
and to BS 731.
B. Liquid-tight flexible conduit is to have PVC jacket extruded over core.
C. Fittings Generally: Threadless, hinged clamp type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.
D. Straight Connectors: One piece body, female end, having hinged clamp and deep slotted
machine screws for securing to conduit, male end having thread and locknut.
E. Angle connectors of 45 or 90 degree and terminal connectors are to be as specified for

straight connectors, except that body is to be two-piece with removable upper section.
2.6 RIGID HEAVY GAUGE PVC CONDUIT

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Material: Rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride with high impact and high temperature
resistance, flame retardant, non-hygroscopic and non-porous, to CEE 26, BS 4607 and BS
60998, DIN 49016 or other equal and approved standards conforming to IEC 423, 614-1 and
614-2-2.
B. Fittings Generally: Unbreakable, non-inflammable, self extinguishing, heavy moulded

plastic. Expansion couplings are to be telescoping double tube type, with at least two inner
water-tight neoprene rings.
C. Assembly: Conduits, boxes and accessories are to be assembled by cementing, using

manufacturer's recommended products and appropriate connectors or spouts. Where no
spouts are available use smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.
2.7 FLEXIBLE PVC CONDUIT
A. Material: Flame retardant, heat resistant, non-hygroscopic PVC, high resistance to impact,
ribbed on circumference for flexibility.
B. Fittings Generally: Unbreakable, non-inflammable, self extinguishing, heavy molded

plastic. Expansion couplings are to be telescoping double tube type, with at least two inner
water-tight neoprene rings.
2.8 STEEL CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
A. Sleeves Through Outside Walls: Cast iron, with end and intermediate integral flanges, and
internal diameter larger than diameter of through-conduit. Length is to correspond to wall
thickness. Space between sleeve and conduit is to be packed with oakum to within 50 mm
of both faces of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with plastic compound or lead, held in
place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to flanged ends of sleeve.
Alternatively, sleeves are to be O.Z/Gedney, Type WSK or other equal and approved, with
cable or conduit bolted pressure sealing.
B. Supports and Hangers: Galvanized malleable cast iron straps or structural steel sections with
hot dip galvanized bolts and nuts.
C. Expansion Joint for Embedded Steel Conduits - Type A: Watertight, flexible conduit with
end fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length is to allow movement within range of joint
and is not to be less than 20 times diameter of conduit. Conduit is to be covered with thick
rubber tubing with 5 mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumper with earth clamp
is to electrically connect both sides of joint. Fitting is to be O.Z/Gedney, Type DX or other
equal and approved.
D. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type B: Sleeve with fittings to permit
telescoping of one conduit into sleeve. Movable conduit is to be fitted with watertight
bushing. Joint is to be weatherproof, of galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding jumper
with earth clamp is to electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting is to be
O.Z/Gedney, Type DXX or other equal and approved.
E. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type C: PVC sheathed flexible steel conduit
terminating in pull boxes and securely fixed on each side of structural expansion joint.
Bonding jumper is to electrically connect both sides of joint.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
F. Tags: 50 mm diameter steel with indented lettering, rust inhibiting treatment and baked
enamel finish.
2.9 WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Components are to include wireway base, clip-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall
flanges, panel to trunking rubber grommets, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary
hangers, supports and accessories.
B. Steel Trunking: To BS 4678 Part 1, galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick,
protected internally and externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium
with top coat of enamel.
C. PVC Trunking: high impact, heavy duty, self-extinguishing, rigid PVC with grooved double
locking action of the clip-on cover. Design is to be approved by Engineer before ordering
materials. Trunking is to be capable of receiving functional slot-in hangers and
demountable separators to segregate wiring systems as needed.
D. Sizes: As required to accommodate number of conductors permitted by the Regulations

and/or as shown on the Drawings.
2.10 WEATHERPROOF WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Type: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel trunking and cover, similar to Simplex, Power Center
type or other equal and approved.
B. Construction: Trunking is to have outwardly turned flanges to receive cover, and internal
sleeve coupling between sections, permitting cutting of trunking on site.
C. Gaskets: Neoprene bonded cork gaskets are to be fitted throughout, between any two
attached surfaces.
D. Screws: Removable flanged covers are to be secured with galvanized steel holding screws.
2.11 SKIRTING TRUNKING
A. Type: Comprising wireway base, snap-on cover, couplings, end plates, wall flanges, elbows,
tees, adapters, if required, and necessary clamps, hangers, supports and accessories. Wires
and cables are to laid from front and held in place by clamps.
B. Steel Skirting Trunking: Sheet steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, protected internally and
externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium with top coat of enamel.
C. UPVC Skirting Trunking: High impact resistant, flame retardant UPVC (unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride) to BS 476 Part 5 and Part 6.
D. Partitions: Trunking is to be partitioned continuously into compartments for separate

circuits. Size of each compartment is to be determined by size and number of conductors
housed, in accordance with the Regulations and/or as shown on the Drawings.
E. Dimensions: As shown on the Drawings and as required to accommodate specified wiring

devices.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.12 PLUG-IN OVERHEAD LIGHTING TRUNKING (LIGHT DUTY)
A. Regulations: Trunking is to conform to the National Electrical Code for overhead

distribution of lighting circuits and low current circuits.
B. Components comprise wireway base, snap-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall flanges,
panel to wireway rubber grommet, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary hangers and
supports.
C. Construction: 1 mm (0.04 inch) thick, galvanized steel, gray enameled (ANSI-61 gray).
Sizes are to be selected to comply with the NEC and provide at least 25% space for future
wiring.
D. Laterals are to be supplied with 15 A, 277 V grounding receptacles spaced to correspond

with equipment layout and wired to correspond with control requirements shown on the
Drawings.
2.13 OUTLET BOXES, GENERAL
A. Surface or recessed boxes are to be suitable for type of related conduit or cable system.
Shapes and sizes of boxes are to be of compatible standards as switches and socket outlets
specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices", and lighting fixtures selected and of
various types and mounting methods required.
B. Unused openings in outlet boxes are to be closed with knock-out closers manufactured for
the purpose.
C. Floor outlets and plates are to be water-tight and impact resistant.
2.14 UNDERFLOOR TRUNKING
A. For installation in floor screed, laid on unfinished concrete floor, secured and grouted flush
with screed.
B. Material 3.3 m (10-foot) lengths of 2 mm thick (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel, protected
by corrosion resistant coating on inside and outside surfaces. Single, double or triple
systems, as required, are to be as shown on the Drawings. Dimensions are to be as
indicated.
C. Ducts are to have 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) openings spaced at 600 mm (24 inch) with screw
plugs for receiving initial or future installation of outlet boxes. Screw plugs are to be
replaced by brass ferrules, inserted and securely fastened by crimping tool, for installation
of pedestal type outlet boxes.
D. Ducts are to be supplied with approved standard manufacturer's fittings, couplings,

adjustable duct supports, duct to conduit adapters, horizontal 45 and 90 degree bends,
vertical 90 degree bends, terminal bushings to cabinets, cross-under, offsets, plugs, ferrules
and complete set of tools for installation and maintenance after installation.
E. FLUSH OUTLET BOXES: factory designed, with accessories necessary to accommodate

specific outlets shown on the Drawings or cable outlets as required for signal or control
services, with cord-grip nipples.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
F. SUPPORTS are to be capable of adjustment for height and arranged for maintenance of
alignment and spacing of raceways during concreting.
G. RECESSED SERVICE FITTINGS: Modular fittings that match with preset inserts and
include covers/ receptacles, outlets and associated device plates to provide service indicated
at each location. Covers are to be flush with floor and have a recess to match floor finish
and level with the area. Boxes covers are to be firmly held in place and non-rocking.
Coordinate with architectural designs and materials approved for finishes and for electrical
devices. Internally mounted receptacle / outlets are to be as shown on drawings.
H. MANUFACTURERS: obtain underfloor trunking system from:
Man: Legrand
Ref: 89620
2.15 METALLIC OUTLET BOXES
A. Recessed and Concealed Boxes: Galvanized pressed steel, with knock-outs for easy field
installation. Special boxes are to be punched as required on Site.
B. Exposed Surface Mounted Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs.
C. Outdoor Surface or Recessed Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and PVC
gaskets to ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non-ferrous, corrosion resistant
screws.
D. Floor Boxes - Type A: Watertight, cast iron or cast metal alloy with corrosion resistant
finish, adjustable mounting, standard duty, round or square, factory drilled and tapped for
required conduit sizes, and with brass cover and flange with brushed finish free from
markings other than required for mounting screws.
E. Floor Boxes - Type B: Non-standard size, flush floor mounted, cast metal alloy, with
watertight neoprene gasketed and hinged cover, and with drilled and tapped conduit entries
and adjustable mounting. Metal barriers are to separate services for power and low current.
2.16 MOULDED PLASTIC OUTLET BOXES
A. Type: Boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems are to be heavy gauge pressure
moulded plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self extinguishing, with softening point not less than
85 deg. C. Boxes are to have provision for securely terminating conduits and are to be
manufacturer's standard for required application.
B. Fittings: Boxes are to have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting
devices or accessories, push-fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips to provide
additional support for pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets are to be provided
for weatherproof installations.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with
3.2 CONDUIT, WIREWAYS, AND BOXES, GENERAL
A. Use: Unless otherwise specifically indicated all light and power circuits, communications,
signal and low current systems wiring are to be drawn inside conduits or wireways up to the
various electric power consuming equipment as shown on the Drawings.
B. Separate conduits and wireway installations are to be used for medium voltage cables, low
voltage feeders and sub-feeders, normal light and power circuits, emergency light and power
circuits and communication, signal and other low current systems wiring. Cables of different
voltages are not to be mixed within the same conduit or wireway as per the regulations.
C. Boxes: Junction, pull, and splice boxes of ample capacity are to be provided as indicated or
required. Boxes are to remain permanently accessible.
D. Recessed steel electrical boxes installed in fire resistant walls, on opposite sides of the wall,
shall be separated by a horizontal distance of not less than 610 mm.
E. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or
lead anchors.
F. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of Engineer, allowing for
thickness of finishings, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishings to
original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
G. Boxes Mounting Heights and Location: As specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring
Devices".
H. Tools and accessories for forming and installing conduit and wireway systems are to be
purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
I. Fixing: Conduits and wireway installations are to be concealed as much as possible.
J. Sizes of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, are to be selected in
accordance with the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of conductors and
the space factor as recommended by the regulations. Minimum size of conduit for all
applications is to be 20 mm diameter, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
K. Mechanical Continuity: Conduits and wireways are to be effectively joined together and
connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm mechanical assembly.
Earthing jumpers are to be installed on steel conduits where required to ensure effective
electrical continuity irrespective of whether a separate protective earth conductor is required
or not.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
L. Metal conduits and enclosures are to be mechanically fastened, and to be connected to

electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to form low electrical resistance continuity and firm
mechanical assembly.
M. Dissimilar Metals: Use of dissimilar metals is to be avoided throughout the system to

eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, treat surfaces
with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.
N. Miscellaneous fittings such as reduces, chase nipples, 3 – piece unions, split couplings and
plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application
are to be installed as necessary.
O. Conduits are to be tested with a mandrel. Conduits that reject a mandrel are to be replaced.
Restore conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition.
3.3 CONDUITS AND WIREWAYS APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Conduits and wireways installations are to be as described below, unless otherwise shown
on the drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
B. Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit is to be used for all exposed installations comprising
lighting, power, low current, communication and signal system wiring, including
mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and service areas. Use rigid steel
conduit in areas classified as hazardous explosive area. Flexible conduit is not acceptable.
C. Electrical metal tubing (EMT) is to be used for exposed installations over false ceilings
when the false ceiling is used as a return plenum.
D. Electrical metal tubing (EMT) is to be used for exposed and above false ceiling wiring
installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route lighting circuits, fire alarm and
security installations.
E. Electrical metal tubing (EMT) is to be used for all installations in elevator machine rooms
and shafts, electrical equipment rooms, mechanical rooms, parking floors, kitchen, laundry
and solid waste rooms.
F. Conduit termination in sheet metal enclosures is to be fastened by lockouts, and terminate

with bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
G. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used for lighting and power circuits, low current,
communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in concrete masonry earth,
underfloor, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or described in the particular
section of the Specification.
H. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used above false ceilings for lighting and power
circuits, low current, communication and signal system wiring, when the false ceiling is not
used as return plenum – and in furred walls. Use flexible PVC conduits from outlet boxes to
fixtures in conjunction with the use of PVC conduits.
I. Flexible conduit of same material as corresponding conduit system is to be used for

connection to motors, vibrating and non-rigidly fixed equipment and to fixtures installed in
false ceilings.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
J. Flexible steel conduit is to be used in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to fixture
over false ceilings when used as a return plenum. Conduits are to be liquid tight in damp
areas.
K. Liquid-tight flexible steel galvanized conduit is to be used in one or more of the following
conditions:
1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmospheres where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
L. Exposure to Damage: Conduit considered being subject to undue risk of damage by shock or
corrosion is to be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Copper silicone alloy tubes may
be used in corrosive atmospheres.
M. Crossing: Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts, vents or openings.
N. Clearances: Install conduits at least, 150 mm clear of and preferably above pipes of other
non- electrical services. (Hot water pipes, etc.). Wherever possible, install horizontal
conduit and wireways runs above water and steam piping.
O. Sleeves: Obtain approval for positioning sleeves where conduits pass through reinforces
concrete. Additional opening may be allowed in finished slabs, but are to be drilled. Fix
sleeves rigidly to maintain position and alignment during construction work.
P. Waterproof Construction: Conduits are not to cross waterproof construction unless

permitted by Engineer. Specially designed and approved fittings are to be used.
Q. Expansion Fittings: Provide in each conduit and wireways run every 30 meters, or wherever
structural expansion joints are crossed.
R. Make good all holes for conduits passing through walls, floors and ceilings with cement or
similar fire-resisting material to full thickness.
S. Bends: Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting or outlet and fitting are not
to contain more than the equivalent of 2 quarter bends (180 degree total).
T. Bending is to be made without damaging conduit or tubing and without reducing internal
diameter. Methods of field bending are to be approved.
U. Cut ends are to be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges.
V. Conduits entering cold stores are to be made vapour tight, so that vapour from outside
cannot enter conduit.
W. Draining: Arrange conduits so that condensed moisture can drain to screwed plug at lowest
point.
X. Before wiring, conduits are to be swabbed through. Do not draw cables into any section of
system until conduit and draw boxes are fixed in position, and the raceway installation is
completed.
Y. Capping: Conduits are to be properly capped until wiring conductors are drawn in.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
Z. Conduit and fittings installed outdoors are to be watertight and highly resistant to corrosion.
Use appropriate fittings, threaded and hubbed boxes, gaskets with screw on covers and the
like.
AA. Terminations: Do not terminate or fasten rigid conduits to motor frame or base.
BB. Length and radius of flexible conduit used for motors and vibrating equipment are to permit
bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or insulation.
CC. Flexible conduit for slide rail mounted motor is to have sufficient slack to allow for
movement of motor over entire slide rail length.
DD. Pulling Wire: Install 3 mm galvanized stranded steel wire or equivalent strength cord with
wooden blocks fastened at ends, in empty service conduits (power, low current and signal).
EE. Standard elbows are to be used for conduit sizes over 40 mm. For smaller sizes, field bends
may be used provided no damage occurs to conduit.
FF. Tags: Fit to conduits entering or leaving floors, walls or ceilings for identification of conduit
and circuits. Tags are also to be placed at suitable intervals throughout the system.
GG. Non – ferrous conduit is to be installed for circuits operating above 60 Hz.
3.4 STEEL CONDUITS
A. Termination: Conduit entering sheet metal enclosure or outlet boxes, when not terminated in
a threaded hub, is to be securely held in place by two lock-nuts, placed inside and outside
enclosure, and terminated with an insulating bushing.
B. Running Threads: Do not use running threads at joints and terminations, but use 3-piece
unions or split couplings.
C. Additional threaded cuts on galvanized steel conduits are to be painted with zinc based
coating resistant to corrosion.
D. Damage to protective coating of conduits is to be repaired to original degree of protection.
E. Outdoor Mounted Steel Conduit: Apply anti-corrosion coating of zinc-chromate based paint
and two weather resistant finish coats of enamel, of approved colour, or other equal and
approved coating.
F. Galvanized conduit run in screed is to be painted with heavy coat of emulsified bitumen.
G. Galvanized steel conduits buried in ground or placed in wet or damp locations are to be
coated with two heavy coats of hot bitumen. Conduits are to be covered by at least 600 mm
of earth if buried in planting soil and by 300 mm if under walkway.
H. Plugs: Use hardwood or threaded iron plugs for blanking ends of steel conduit not used.
3.5 PVC CONDUITS
A. Coupling of conduit and/or termination into spouted fittings are to be made watertight and
permanent using special cement.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
B. Termination: Connect conduits terminating in switchgear, fuseboards, trunking, adaptable

boxes or other non-spouted enclosures etc. with smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.
C. Ends of conduit and conduit fittings are to be cleaned and jointed using PVC cement
D. Semi-Permanent Adhesive: Use in joints requiring expansion couplers.
E. Bends: Conduits not exceeding 25 mm diameter may be cold bent using bending springs.
Conduits over 25 mm are to be hot bent by an approved method.
3.6 EMBEDDED CONDUITS
A. Conduits In Concrete Slabs: Place conduits parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing
steel, between bottom reinforcing and top reinforcing steel. Fasten conduits to reinforcing
steel by positive wire, fasteners at the proper distance from the concrete face. Embedded
conduit diameter is not to exceed 1/3 of slab thickness. Special cases shall be referred to
Engineer.
B. Conduits In Partitions or Side Walls: Horizontal or cross runs are to be avoided.
C. Pull-boxes are not to be used. If unavoidable, pull-boxes may be approved if located

inconspicuously.
D. Conduits in floor of beds on grade: Encase in concrete, minimum thickness 50 mm or to

thickness allowed by architectural detail.
E. PVC conduits in reinforced concrete structures are generally to be installed after placing
reinforcement and before concreting, if protected against damage, or are to be placed in
grooves formed in the concrete, if approved.
3.7 EXPOSED CONDUITS
A. Conduits on walls are to be run neatly, horizontally or vertically.
B. Supports: Use approved clamps, hangers or clips fastened by machine screws to expansion
sleeves in inserts or to lead anchors.
C. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting steel conduits is not to be greater than:
Conduit Size Maximum Spacing of Supports

mm metres
1. 20 3.00
2. 25 3.60
3. 32-38 4.25
4. 50-63 5.00
5. 75 and larger 6.00

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
D. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting PVC conduits is not to be greater than:
Conduit Size Maximum Spacing of Supports

mm metres
Conductors Rated Conductors Rated

60 deg.C and below more than 60 deg.C
1. 20 1.25 0.60
2. 25-50 1.50 0.75
3. 63-75 1.80 0.90
4. 90-125 2.00 1.00
5. 150 2.50 1.25
E. Bends and Fittings: Firmly fasten conduit at each side of bends and within 900 mm of each
outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
F. Outlets: Do not run more than the permissible numbers of conduits to any surface wall
outlet.
G. Exposed conduit work is to be installed so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or
ventilation ducts or outlets.
3.8 CABLE TRUNKING
A. Installation: Secure trunking of all sizes at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. Joints are not
to overhang a fixing by more than 500 mm.
B. Trunking passing through walls and ceilings is to have the cover fixed solidly for 25 mm
either side of walls and for 150 mm either side of floors and ceilings.
C. Vertical sections of trunking over 900 mm long are to have staggered insulated tie-off studs
to support weight of cables.
D. Cabling Provisions: Separation of power, low current and control circuits is to be by two
channel trunking or by barriers inserted in trunking before installation of cables. Cable
retaining straps are to be provided at not more than 600 mm centers. Openings in front of
trunking are to facilitate drawing-in cables.
E. Coupling: Trunking parts are to be mechanically and electrically coupled without causing
abrasion to wiring.
F. Earthing: Do not use metal trunking as earth continuity conductor. Provide protective
conductor in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.
3.9 UNDERGROUND DUCTS
A. Lay and assemble ducts in accordance with Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and
Utility Structures".

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
3.10 PROTECTION

and Installer that ensure coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at the
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.
3.11 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16139 - CABLE TRAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cable trays, cable ladders and related installations and accessories
necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders, branch circuit wiring and
wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire stopping

materials and installation requirements.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable tray / ladder
supports not specified in this Section.
3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and cables"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers' catalogues with specifications of cable trays / ladders and related

accessories.
2. Samples of each type of tray / ladder and accessory.
3. Certified copy of factory test reports performed in conformance with standards
approved for cable tray/ladder types indicated specified.
to, the following:
1. Detail fabrication and installation of cable tray / ladder, including plans, elevations,
and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements.
Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods,
splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, fittings and
earthing connections.
C. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Include scaled
cable tray / ladder layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and
mechanical elements.
D. Design Calculations: Verify loading capacities for supports.
E. Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1
CABLE TRAYS 16139 - Page 1 of 5

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with related BS Standards. EN/ISO 1449 – Part 1 – 1991 or equivalent for sheet
steel and BS EN ISO 1461-1999 for hot galvanizing.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Employer or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray / ladder with other installations.
1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Niedax (Germany)
2. Swifts (U.K.)
3. Tolmega (France)
4. B-Line Systems, Inc. (U.S.A.)
5. MP Husky Corp. (U.S.A.)
6. Mono-Systems, Inc. (U.S.A.)
2.2 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS
A. Components: To include cable trays or ladders (as shown on the Drawings), bends, elbows,
tees, couplings and plates, rubber grommets, hangers, bracket supports and other system
accessories required for safety and protection of the cable installations.
B. Trays: Provide to carry the maximum load of cables with a factor of safety 300%.
C. Trays: Heavy gauge perforated sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, minimum
1.5 mm thick, with sides not less than 45 mm deep, and as shown on drawings. Fittings are
to be same material as tray. Covers, where shown on the Drawings, are to be minimum 1.0

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
mm thick galvanized sheet steel, Snap-On or bolt type, forming a rigid assembly with the
tray.
D. Ladders: to be hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, fabricated from 2mm mild carbon
steel. Ladder side channels are to be minimum 127 x 32 mm, strengthened by reinforcing
inserts for torsional rigidity. Rungs are to be slotted to take cable cleats or ties and conduit
clamps. Rungs are to be minimum 50 x 25 mm channels, spaced at 300 mm centers.
E. Galvanizing to be in accordance with BEN ISO 1461 (335 g/m2), applied after fabrication,
with local coat thickness of 45 μm.
F. Bolts and Screws: Cadmium plated or electrolytically galvanized.
G. Coating applied to cable tray or cable ladder is to be applied after priming coat.
H. Sizes: Trays and ladders are to be standard metric sizes,150, 300, 450, 600 and 900 mm
wide, and at least 2.4 m length of section. Size of tray or ladder is to be determined by
number and sizes of cables in accordance with the Regulations and / or as shown on the
Drawings. Tray or ladder is to have strength and rigidity to provide support for cables
contained within. Deflection between supports is not to exceed 1/350 under full loading
capacity.
I. Earthing connector for plastic coated trays or ladders is to be provided on each coupling
between adjacent sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable tray / ladder level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions,
Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Each run is to be completed before installation of cables.
C. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays / ladders. Fix trays / ladders using approved
suspension rods or steel angle brackets at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m and generally as
shown on the Drawings.
D. Cables: Secure to tray / ladder with purpose made straps or saddles and arrange in one layer
only, evenly spaced, or as shown on the Drawings, with minimum spacing of one diameter
of the larger of the two adjacent cables or of a trefoil formation of single core cable circuit.
E. Fasten cable tray / ladder supports securely to building structure as specified in Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Design supports, including fastenings to the structure, to carry the greater of the
calculated load multiplied by a safety factor of 4. Submit calculations for approval.
F. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray / ladder and to
equipment. Support cable tray / ladder independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of
cable tray / ladder on equipment enclosure.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
G. Install expansion connectors where cable tray / ladder crosses a building expansion joint and
in cable tray / ladder runs that exceed 27 m. Make changes in direction and elevation using
standard fittings.
H. Make cable tray / ladder connections using standard fittings.
I. Locate cable tray / ladder above piping, unless accessibility to cable tray / ladder is required
or unless otherwise indicated.
J. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
K. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through fire stopping-
sealed cable tray / ladder penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
L. Workspace: Install cable trays / ladders with sufficient space to permit access for installing
cables. Minimum clearance of 250 mm is to be maintained between top of tray / ladder and
ceiling, beams and other services and between tray / ladders in multi-tier formation.
M. Barriers: Where tray / ladders carry conductors of different systems, such as power,
communications and data processing, or different insulation levels, such as 600V, 5000V,
and 20, 000 V use separate cable tray / ladders. In case of absolute necessity, install
insulating barriers to separate the systems after obtaining the Engineer’s approval.
N. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground cable trays / ladders according to manufacturer's instructions.

torque-tightening values.
3.3 WARNING SIGNS
A. After installation of cable trays / ladders is completed, install warning signs in visible
locations on or near cable trays / ladders.
A. Grounding: Test cable trays / ladders to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and
grounding connections.
B. Grounding: Do not use metal trays / ladders as earth continuity conductor. Connect trays /
ladders by flexible tinned copper straps to nearest bare earthing conductor and at maximum
30-m spacing.
C. Anchorage: Test pullout resistance for toggle bolts and powder-driven threaded studs for
each type and size of anchorage material.
1. Furnish equipment, including jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales,
required for reliable testing.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2. Obtain Engineer's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90

percent of rated proof load for fastener.
D. Replace malfunctioning units.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of cable tray / ladder installation, including fittings, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
3.6 PROTECTION

and Installer that ensure cable tray / ladder is without damage or deterioration at the time of
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
/ ladder manufacturer.
recommended by cable tray / ladder manufacturer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wiring devices, lighting switches, socket outlets, cord outlets,
automatic and manual lighting control equipment, dimmers, outlet boxes and plates, etc.
B. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with
one set of approved Standards.

2. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for boxes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each item.
to, the following:
1. Exact indication of position of each item and outlet box and fitting on layout
drawings, with box and equipment types and sizes.
2. Installation details of special devices including fans etc.
3. Wiring diagrams of special items.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of device for approval, unless otherwise agreed in
writing by the Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
A. Comply with related Standards.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - Page 1 of 6

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish 2% (with minimum of one each) extra materials for all products that match those
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLATES, GENERALLY
A. Blank Plates: Blank plates are to be installed on outlet boxes, specified under Division 16
Section "Raceways and Boxes", on which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus
installed does not have suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be
attached by a bridge with slots for horizontal and vertical adjustment.
B. Floor outlets and plates are to be watertight and impact resistant.
2.2 PLATES AND CORD-OUTLETS
A. Design: Square, rectangular or round designed to cover outlet box and to closely fit
electrical device, and with polished chromium plated recessed head fixing screws.
Combination plates are to be used for grouped outlets and devices.
B. Cord extension plates are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material and finish as
plates.
C. Plastic Plates: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color, for
general use in service areas (back of the house) and toilets.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Logic Plus
D. Metal Plates: Heavy gauge, minimum 1 mm thick, refer to AR specification for finish
selection.
E. Cable/cord outlet (electric outlet) is to be used for up to 45 A, 250 V rating for connection
of power/control cable of fixed appliances. Plate is to have threaded cord grip to anchor
cable securely to cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable clamp for
termination of cable/cord within.
F. Ceiling and wall Lighting outlet is to consist of steel outlet box 75mmx75mm installed flush
mounted or recessed in concrete, cover plate, and necessary accessories ready for
connection to lighting fixture.
G. Floor mounted outlet is to consist of watertight steel outlet box 75mmx75mm with IP 55
and necessary accessories ready for connection to lighting fixture.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.3 SWITCHES
A. Generally: Quick-make, quick-break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting molded
base, with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive loads up to
full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
B. Types: Single, two-way or intermediate, single pole or double pole, as shown on the
Drawings.
C. General Lighting Switch (S1): 10 A, 240 V a.c., rocker operated, grid-switch with plastic
plate, for service area and indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Logic Plus
D. Push Button Switch (S2): As type (S1) but with push button controls (push to make, push to
break).
1. General Lighting Switch (S3): similar to
E. Weatherproof Switch (S4): 10 A, 250 V, for installation outdoors, wet and dusty areas, with
weatherproof plate, synthetic gasket, weatherproof outlet box, on/off indication, IP 56
enclosure.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: MasterSeal
F. Double Pole Switch (S20): Rated 20 A or (as shown on the Drawings), 250 V a.c., tumbler
operated, to BS 3676, with stainless steel or molded plastic plate (as required in application
area), marked (etched) with equipment controlled (i.e. cooker, air conditioner, water heater)
and with red neon pilot light for "on" position. Switch is to be mounted to flush or surface
box, as required or as shown on the Drawings, and provided with cord outlet and cord
extension to equipment controlled.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Logic Plus/Insignia
G. Water heater outlet and 20 A double pole switch.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: K5423 WH WHI, or other equal and approved.
2.4 SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Generally: To have injection molded plastic base with self-adjusting, non-expanding

contacts to prevent permanent distortion, arranged for side and/or back connection and with
screw terminals accepting at least three parallel branch-circuit wires.
B. Types: General-purpose socket outlets are to conform to standard British practice.
C. Duplex sockets are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with break-off feature
for two-circuit connection.
D. Weatherproof socket outlets are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in surface
mounted cast metal/polycarbonate box and with cover comprising spring-retained gasket

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
hinged flap. Enclosure is to be pre-designed box and cover for type of socket outlet
specified.
E. Standard German Socket Outlet - Type R01: for plug with 3mm round pins at 19 mm
centers, single phase, two wires and with side earthing, in accordance with German
standards and rated 16 A, 250 V a. c. for indoor general installation, as shown on the
Drawings.
1. Man: M.K.
2. Ref: Logic Plus - K4150
or other approved equal
F. Standard European (German type) Weatherproof Socket Outlet - Type R05 (220 V
SERVICE): 16 A, 250 V, 2 pole with grounding accordance to IEC 60884-1, enclosed in
flush mounted polycarbonate box with flush mounted frame and with cover comprising
spring- retained gasket hinged flap.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Masterseal 56483
G. Power Socket - Type R41: single switched outlet, single phase, three wires, 32 A, 250 V,
2P+E, IP44, body made of impact resistant poly carbonate. Contact pins and sleeves are
solid bran with stainless steel springs, with matching plug.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Commando K9643
H. Industrial Socket Outlet - Type R44: Similar to (R41) but three phase, four wire, 32A, 415
V and 3P + N+E, with matching plug.
1. Man: M.K.
2. Ref: 9640 RED
I. Pendent socket cube with one or four weather proof socket 16A/230V with helix cable. for
socket cube details refer to kitchen consultant catalogue cuts.
2.5 PLUGS
A. Type: Compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact resistant
molded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and cord grip and
of shapes Providing Easy Hand-Grip for Removal.
B. Quantity: Supply number equal to 20% of total number of each type of socket outlet
supplied.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.6 SPECIAL DEVICES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment. Exact
locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any condition
that would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer. Locate
switches at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or not. In locating outlets
allow for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of finishing, window
trim, paneling and other engineering features.
B. Mounting heights for outlet boxes and similar equipment are to be uniform within the same
or similar areas. Mounting is to be as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer.
Unless otherwise shown or instructed, mount lighting switches and socket outlets generally
at 1200 mm and 300 mm from finished floor level respectively. Mount switches with long
dimension vertical and operating handle, if of the toggle type, up when in the on position.
C. Additional outlets to those shown on the Drawings are to be provided as required by

equipment manufacturers for control or other wiring.
D. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, allowing
for thickness of finishing, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishing to
original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
E. Appearance: Install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished wall
surface. Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface without
gaps, and fully covering the box.
F. Grouped Outlets: Arrange neatly so that use of fittings is convenient and clear.
G. Waterproof and Explosion-Proof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation

and connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
H. Damaged Fittings: Reject damaged fittings or plates with damaged finish. Protect fittings
and plates against damage after installation and until handed over.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated,
identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
2. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use
machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and
durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Single pole switches are to switch the phase wire. Do not run neutral wire through switches
having neutral shunt or bridge.
B. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or
lead anchors.
C. Connection Of Appliances:
1. Where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring
to incoming terminals inside appliance.
2. Where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install the connecting wiring
in flexible conduit firmly fixed to outlet box cover plate and to terminal box on
appliance.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-

tightening values.
A. Visual Inspection: Fittings and equipment are to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
B. Megger tests are to include switch and socket outlet tests together with insulation resistance
of wiring installations.
C. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.
D. Equipment is to be insulation tested and observed, under full-load for not less than 3 days
operation, with respect to undue heating and performance in general.
3.5 CLEANING
Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and
multipole lighting relays and contactors.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc.
as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.

2. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming system
equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for
lighting control devices.
B. Samples: Occupancy sensors, manual switches and plate for color selection and
evaluation of technical features.
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals

A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total
responsibility for compatibility of lighting control system components specified in this
Section, and in Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components
specified in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - Page 1 of 9

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

Include coordination with the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Panelboards."
2. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls."
3. Division 16 Section “Interior Lighting.”
4. Division 16 Section “Wiring Devices.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Contactors and Relays:
a. Automatic Switch Co.

b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.
c. Cutler-Hammer Products; Eaton Corporation.
d. Furnas Electric Co.
e. GE Lighting Controls.
f. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.
g. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc.
h. Square D Co.; Power Management Organization.
i. Zenith Controls, Inc.
2. Time Switches:
a. Diversified Electronics, Inc.

b. Grasslin Controls Corp.
c. Intermatic, Inc.
d. Leviton Manufacturing.
e. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
f. Tork, Inc.
g. Zenith Controls, Inc.
3. Photoelectric Relays:
a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
b. Area Lighting Research, Inc.
c. Fisher Pierce.
d. Grasslin Controls, Corp.
e. Intermatic, Inc.
f. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
g. Rhodes: M H Rhodes, Inc.
h. SSAC, Inc.
i. Tork, Inc.
4. Occupancy Sensors:
a. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.

b. BRK Electronics.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
c. Bryant Electric.
d. Honeywell, Inc.; Home and Building Controls.
e. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.
f. Lightolier.
g. Lithonia Control Systems.
h. MyTech Corporation.
i. Novitas, Inc.
j. RAB Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
k. SenTec, Inc.
l. Sterner Lighting Systems, Inc.
m. Tork, Inc.
n. Touchplate.
o. Unenco Electronics (A Hubbell Co.).
p. Watt Stopper, Inc. (The).
2.2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all line voltage solid-state equipment.
2.3 TIME SWITCHES
A. Description: Solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display.
B. Description: Electromechanical-dial type.
1. Astronomic dial.
2. Two contacts, rated 30-A unless otherwise indicated.
3. Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2-A unless otherwise indicated.
4. Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
5. Skip-day mode.
2.4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. Description: Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input.
B. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 37 673 lx, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn-off

levels.
C. Time Delay: Prevents false operation.
D. Indoor Ceiling- or Wall-Mounting Units: Adjustable for turn-on/turn-off levels,

semiflush, calibrated to detect adequacy of daylighting in perimeter locations, and
arranged to turn artificial illumination on and off to suit varying intensities of available
daylighting.
E. Indoor Skylight Units: Housed in a threaded plastic fitting for mounting under skylight.
F. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped
with sun-glare shield and ice preventer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
2.5 Photoelectric Cells
A. Photoelectric Cells: Omnidirectional cadmium sulfide, hermetically sealed, with 2:1

on/off adjustment possible by moving light level selector, set to operate at illuminance
levels shown on the Drawings. Unit is to include timer giving 3-minute delay to prevent
false switching. Temperature range is to be -10 deg. C to +80 deg. C.
B. Safety: Control is to be designed such that in case of failure, unit fails in the on position.
C. Contacts are to close or open as illumination level increases to set level with respect to
requirements shown on the Drawings.
D. Enclosure: Heavy duty cast metal, with translucent dome of 'Lexan' (by G.E.) or other
equal and approved, to protect against high ultra violet rays, and 180 deg. swivel base and
16 mm threaded conduit mounting. Enclosure is to be weatherproof and protected
against high winds and storms.
2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives control power from a separately mounted

auxiliary power and control unit, and operates power-switching contacts in that unit.
B. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives 24-V dc power from a remote source and, on
sensing occupancy, closes contacts that provide signal input to a remote microprocessor-
based lighting control system.
C. Switch-Box-Mounting Units: Unit receives power directly from switch leg of the live ac
circuit it controls and operates integral power switching contacts rated 1000 W at ac,
minimum.
D. Operation: Turns lights on when room or covered area is occupied and off when
unoccupied, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Time Delay for Turning Lights Off: Adjustable over a range from 1 to 15 minutes,
minimum.
2. Manual Override Switch: Turns lights off manually regardless of elapsed time
delay.
3. Ambient-Light-Level Control: Adjustable for setting a level of ambient
illumination above which sensor will not turn lights on when occupancy is sensed.
4. Isolated Relay Contact: Operates on detection of occupancy or vacancy, as
indicated, to activate an independent function.
E. Auxiliary Power and Control Units: As follows:
1. Relays rated for a minimum of 20-A normal ballast load or 13-A tungsten filament
or high-inrush ballast load.
2. Sensor Power Supply: Rated to supply the number of connected sensors.
F. Passive-Infrared Type: Detects occupancy by a combination of heat and movement in

zone of coverage. Each sensor detects occupancy anywhere in an area of 93 sq. m by
detecting occurrence of 150-mm minimum movement of any portion of a human body
that presents a minimum target of 232 sq. cm to the sensor.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
G. Ultrasonic Type: Emits a beam of ultrasonic energy and detects occupancy through use
of Doppler's principle in discerning movement in zone of coverage by sensing a change
in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy.
H. Dual-Technology Type: Uses a combination of passive-infrared and ultrasonic detection

methods to distinguish between occupied and unoccupied conditions for area covered.
Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls each function (on or
off) is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
2.7 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS
A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Consistent with type of load served, including
tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
2.8 Manual Switches and plates
A. Switches: Modular, push-button, low voltage type:
1. Color: Match wiring devices color and according to engineer selection.
2. Integral pilot light: Indicates when circuit is on.
3. Locator Light: Internal illumination locate switch in the dark.
4. Control wiring for low voltage communication.
5. Uses of push-button include but not limited to:-
• Toggle button on-off.
• Single button dimmer (UP/Down or on/off).
• On and Up button.
• Off and Down button.
• Scene Button (e.g Scene 1).
• Multi Scene Button (e.g. Scene 1, Scene 2, Scen3 , Off)
Switch Push buttons programming and arrangement to be proposed by the

manufacturer and submitted for engineer approval.
6. Wall Plates: Match those specified in division 16 “Wiring Devices” to materials,

finish and color. Use multi-gang plates if more than one switch is indicated at a
location.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
2.9 Remote Lighting Relay Control System
A. Remote Lighting Relay Panel (RLRP): Comprise set of heavy duty long life service
relays, rated 20 A, 220 V a.c. for switching tungsten or fluorescent lighting loads, SPST
maintained (mechanically latched), with 24 V a.c. split-coil (1/2-on and 1/2-off) for
control by remote push button on/off switches, via 24 V control transformer.
B. Push Button Switch (LS): SPDT, momentary contact, normally open switch with pilot
light and red jewel Lens, Rated 3 A, 25 V A.C.
C. Master Selector Switch Panel (MSSP): Comprise set of push button switches type (LS),
assembled in one unit comprising box and cover, with individual switch per circuit
controlled, and one master switch for all-circuit control.
D. System is to allow local and remote centralized switching of group of lighting circuits
and from any number of individual points. System is to use low voltage (low current)
control circuitry to operate relay switches on branch circuits.
E. Manufacturers: System is to be by G.E. Remote Control Products or other equal and

approved.
2.10 Contactor Control Panels In Connection With BMS
A. General: Control panels are to be of equivalent construction to panel boards with respect
to cabinet and interior standards of manufacture, and are to be surface mounted with see-
through door and lock.
B. Construction: Non-standard modular, factory assembled cabinets, designed to receive

appropriate contactors, measuring devices, terminals, relays and the like as required in
conformity with the Drawings for operation of system locally and remotely from central
control and monitoring system (BMS) console.
C. Control: Switching relays controlled remotely by the BMS are to be provided with over-
riding manual local individual controls. Appropriate interface components are to be
provided and coordinated with the BMS described elsewhere in the Specification.
D. Relays, switching components, pilot lights, control transformers, fuses etc. are to be
neatly arranged and mounted inside dust-tight and, where necessary, water-tight cabinets.
Control and indication devices are to be continuously visible and accessible for
monitoring and control.
E. Equipment is to be electrically front shielded and enclosed by sheet metal barriers,

readily accessible and demountable. Wiring is to be neatly arranged, clipped and
terminated in pressure type terminals. Hardware is to be non-corroding and robust
material, approved by the Engineer.
F. Control panels are to incorporate three ammeters, one per phase for local readings.
G. Current transformers are to have auxiliaries to enable connection to BMS
H. Contactors are to be class AC-2 and AC-3 to IEC 60158-1 and generally as described
under paragraph 16140 thereof. Each contactor is to be protected by an equally rated
circuit breaker of suitable short-circuit capacity at point of application.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
I. Overcurrent relay is to be provided with all other accessories. Upon detecting fault on
monitored control panel, corresponding plug-in breaker unit is to trip, and fault signal is
to be sent to BMS.
J. Instrument and instrument transformers are to be provided as required and/or as indicated

on the Drawings.
K. Current Transformers: Bar primary type to IEC 60185 class 0.5 for metering. Current
rating is to be the next higher standard value above maximum demand load current.
L. Ammeters and Voltmeters: Long scale, switchboard type, with shadow proof covers for
semi-flush mounting. Meters are to be approximately 100 mm square with scale covering
approximately 250 degrees.
M. Voltmeter Selector Switches: Rotary type with cam operated contacts, and having 7
positions (off, R-Y, Y-B, B- R, R-N, Y-N, B-N).
N. Test blocks and plugs are to be provided for testing all instruments and instrument
transformers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and

requirements in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of
unit for wall-mounting devices.
A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for low-
voltage connections and Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Systems" for digital
circuits.
B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section

"Raceways and Boxes."
C. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section

"Raceways and Boxes," unless run in accessible ceiling space and gypsum board
partitions.
D. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
E. Ground equipment.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
F. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days'
advance notice.
B. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling,
and nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.
C. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six
months.
D. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.

2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and
capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating
functions.
a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational

conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional
observations.
E. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
F. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout
Procedures]."

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up

to three Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes,
and adjust sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
SECTION 16150A - PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each item of parking control equipment. Include manufacturer's standard
details and installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each item of parking control equipment. Include plans, elevations, and
details of typical members and other components. List all components of the system, supported by
catalogues and manufacturer's technical data. Show layout and installation details, including
anchorage details and mounting methods.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for parking control equipment operator, signal, and control
systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show
locations of connections to electrical service provided in other Sections.
available for equipment with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and other information
specified or required by Engineer.
F. Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment components to include in the maintenance
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of

the parking control equipment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of the type of
units required for Project, and whose installations have resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Gate Arms: Two replacement breakaway gate arms for each gate installed. Include
required accessory components.
1.5 COORDINATION
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 16150A - Page 1 of 7

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
A. Parking control system is to be fully coordinated with traffic requirements and traffic sign types.
1.6 POWER SUPPLY
A. Provide an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) at 240 V, 50 Hz in the control room to serve
detectors or detector-counters and central control equipment. All required power supply
equipment and cabling from this source is to be provided under this Section of the work.
Changeable signs, barriers etc., are to be served power from emergency lighting panel boards at
240V, 50Hz.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:
1. Automatic Systems (Belgium).

2. Dambach (Germany).
3. Federal APD (U.S.A.).
4. Magnetic Autocontrol (Germany).
5. Scheidt & Bachmann (Germany).
6. Siemens (Germany).
2.2 DESIGN AND OPERATION
A. General Requirements: Central control is to provide integrated, segmented, car parking system to
minimize inconvenience to users and redundant traffic circulation, achieved by programming
system control to allow efficient use of parking spaces (taking into consideration standby reserved
spaces for outstanding traffic in approaches, free space for seasonal users and other circumstances)
using re- programmable system.
B. Automatic Functions: Parking control system is to perform the following automatic functions
(with the possibility of manual over-ride):
1. Direct traffic, by activating changeable signs, to free parking areas.

2. Open and close entrance barrier gates via magnetic card reader or ticket dispenser
activation, and prevent passage of more than one vehicle at a time.
3. Count total incoming and outgoing vehicles at CCU for each block individually, through
pulses transmitted from main entrance and exit loop detectors and activate/de-activate main
entrance changeable signs accordingly.
4. Count incoming and outgoing vehicles at CCU for each zone (floor) individually, and
activate zone (floor) signs accordingly.
5. Report status of car park full/vacant condition at CCU for each zone (floor).
C. Entrance components are to include the following:
1. Changeable signs (provided by others) custom designed for each entrance.

2. Anti-passback magnetic card reader.
3. Vehicle presence detector and automatic ticket dispenser.
4. Automatic rising barrier gate with built-in vehicle presence detector for automatic closing.
5. Attendant key for manual barrier open/close over-ride control.
D. Exit components are to include the following:

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
1. Automatic rising barrier with built-in vehicle presence detector for automatic closing after
exiting.
E. Operation of changeable signs is to be in accordance with the Drawings. Queuing cars and season
parkers are to be catered for by programming the CCU. 'Full' sign status is not to prevent season
Parker (allocated definite space on any floor), proceeding normally through automatic operation of
barriers. The same privilege is to be given to cars within queuing space or entrance road to car
park, as pre-programmed (normally 0.5 - 1% of car park capacity).
2.3 AUTOMATIC RISING BARRIER
A. Components: Gate arm linked to control cabinet enclosing motor mechanism, control logic
circuitry, built-in self tuning loop detector for automatic barrier closing and electrical connections
for control and power circuits.
B. Cabinet: Outdoor type, welded cold rolled galvanized sheet steel (minimum 1.5 mm thick)
finished with epoxy paint, air-drying enamel or other approved anti-corrosive finish, color selected
by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard range, and with one gasketted door with flush-
mounted T-handle.
C. Gate Arm: Lightweight aluminum, minimum 3 m long, finished in painted diagonal stripes.
D. Gate Arm Drive: Single-phase, instant reversing motor connected by double V-belts to heavy
duty 60 to 1 single reduction speed reducer. Direct gear drive and chain drive are not acceptable.
Power is to be transmitted to gate arm drive shaft through activating crank and connecting rod.
Cranks, connecting rod and main shaft are to be solid steel bar, cadmium plated. Cams are to be
provided to allow adjustment of gate arm travel. Gate arm motor is to have built-in overload
switch protection.
E. Switches: Auto/manual and on/off switches are to be located behind lockable door.
F. Loop Detector: Self-tuning, incorporating tailgate recognition system capable of distinguishing

two cars.
G. Operation: In automatic mode, gate controller is to provide one-way traffic control. Barrier is to
be automatically closed by in-built loop detector, and count pulse is to be transmitted to counting
device at CCU. Gate controller is to discriminate between open commands initiated by ticket
dispenser, card reader and cashier CPU.
2.4 LOOP DETECTORS
A. Type: Solid-state device capable of generating two different loop frequencies, selectable via front
end DIP- switch, to minimize cross talk and interference. Detector is to include tailgate
recognition system to provide accurate count of passing vehicles, and one 3 A, 220 V contact
actuated by in-built relay to control remote functions.
B. Enclosure: Approved weatherproof construction, with gasketted and bolted removable cover for
access for repair and adjustment. Alternatively, unit may be placed inside weatherproof cabinet
with other major equipment/devices.
C. Sensitivity is to be automatically maintained with optimum value, regardless of rain,

environmental conditions and presence of steel reinforcement beneath loops, and is to be settable
in high, medium and low modes.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
D. Tuning is to be fully automatic, with detector capable of re-tuning to loop to which it is connected
when reset or when mains power supply is turned on. Detector is to tune to any loop in the
inductance range 20 to 1000 micro- henries.
E. Operational led indicators are to be included for presence detection, detector in-tune, sensitivity
mode and power supply status.
F. Loop Wire: Stranded bare copper conductor, of size, number of turns and method of installation
in accordance with loop detector manufacturer's recommendations.
2.5 DIFFERENTIAL COUNTER
A. Type: Solid-state summation device, to automatically maintain count of available parking spaces
by accepting single inbound and outbound traffic counts (pulses) from entry and exit detectors.
Counter is to be programmed to display spaces available as variably pre-set at CCU with
allowance for reserve spaces and is to send output signal upon reaching zero count.
B. Functions: When parking zone (floor) or block is full, differential counter is to:
1. Activate respective entrance 'full/vacant' changeable sign.

2. Report signal at CCU.
C. Characteristics:
1. Counting Speed: 150 impulses/sec.

2. Count Input Response: 0.7 ms.
3. Count Occurrence: At end of impulse.
4. Life Expectancy: More than 50 million impulses.
2.6 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT (CCU) AND INDICATING PANEL
A. Type: Microprocessor-based, comprising entry keyboard with LCD display panel, season card
encoding terminal, alphanumeric report printer, interfaces and connections necessary for
automatic or manual control of operating functions of parking equipment. CCU is to comprise
individual differential counting assembly for each zone (floor) for system reliability and control of
respective changeable signs.
B. Functions: CCU is to be multi-function unit to perform the following:
1. Receive signals from entrances and exits of each car park and each zone (floor) separately,
to keep decrement/ increment count of total traffic (transient and seasonal) and zone (floor)
traffic.
2. Monitor status on indicating panel for each zone (floor).
3. Effect output control signals to changeable full/ vacant signs at various positions, in
response to requirements of system operation and to deactivate gate barriers or ticket
dispensers and magnetic card readers in case of default and by intentional instruction.
4. Receive data from cashier computers, card readers, ticket dispensers and barrier operations
for audit.
5. Provide reports for daily, monthly and annual car park transactions.
C. Control Assembly: Modular, designed to facilitate system phasing, expansion and servicing, and
consisting of plug- in solid state cards, all enclosed in housing, using standard 19-inch rack
system. Housing is to be made of steel, treated against corrosion and finished with epoxy enamel

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
or other approved finish of color to be selected by the Engineer. Components are to be easily
accessible for operation through hinged front panel, and for maintenance through removable side
panels.
D. Man-machine interface equipment for card encoding/ decoding and primary programming is to be
purpose-made and compatible with the system, and as proposed by manufacturer.
E. Indicating panel is to have 'full' sign display, laid out in general pattern of parking zones (floors),
as schematically shown on the Drawings, indicating status (full or not full) of each zone (floor) of
car park, and is to contain one display for each parking zone (floor), arranged on an anodized
aluminum base plate with zone (floor) reference inscriptions. Housing is to be surface wall
mounted steel box, treated against corrosion and finished with epoxy enamel or other approved
finish, of color selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard range. Access for
maintenance is to be through hinged and lockable, framed glass front panel fixed to trim.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT - VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGNS
A. Lot "Full" Signs Single-faced signs consisting of illumination source contained in welded steel
bodies with extended hood and baked-enamel finish. Sign copy shall be [4 inches (102 mm)] tall
as required by the client/ engineer .
1. Operation: Automatic by system controller.
B. Led Display composed of high intensity outdoor Led module, driving circuit, controlling circuit,
frame and other parts. It shall receive the parking space statistics from the controller, displaying
the total available parking spaces in real time. Internal procedure can be revised at any time
according to the user’s demands, displaying other information.
C. Signs shall have a minimum cone of vision of 30 degrees and 7 pixel high x 5 pixel wide character
format.
D. The VMS housing will be constructed from seamlessly welded high grade 2mm, aluminum. The
face of the aluminum housing shall be punched to form a contrast mask. This serves to make the
VMS more legible as well as protect the face of the VMS from damage and vandalism.
2.8 PARKING SYSTEM CABLING
A. Conduits and Raceways: As described in relevant Division 16 Sections.
B. Signal Cables: PE insulated, single or multi-pair, as described in Division 16 Section "Conductors

and Cables".
C. Power supply cables to various equipment of system are to be PVC insulated, single core in
conduit, and multi-core, non-armored in duct banks, as described in Division 16 Section
"Conductors and Cables".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before installation, examine areas to receive parking control equipment. Verify that critical
dimensions are correct and conditions are acceptable. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates for anchor bolts and other items encased in concrete or below finished surfaces
so as not to delay the Work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install parking control equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions,

placement drawings and to the approval of the Engineer. Coordinate placement of anchors and
accessories encased in concrete with Division 3 Sections.
B. Loop Detectors: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to related equipment operated by detector.
C. Builder's Work: Coordinate positions and foundations for gates, dispensers, readers, etc. Prepare
detailed drawings, indicating curbs and any service lines, cable ducts, handholes/cable boxes, etc.,
and templates required for construction. Obtain Engineer's approval before executing any work.
D. Fixings: Supply steel frame bases, holding-down bolts, nuts, washers etc., before construction of
foundations and bases.
E. Before pulling cables or wires, fix all major equipment in final position and complete all
raceways, duct-banks, conduits, handholes/cable boxes and covers.
F. Changeable Signs: Check and confirm positions of changeable signs as shown on the Drawings,
and provide conduit outlets and control wiring necessary for their operation.
G. Electrical Work: Coordinate provision of all necessary electrical components provided by others,
and to which control and power wiring is to be provided.
A. After installing clean-finished surfaces, touch up shop-applied finishes as required to restore

damaged areas.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, which ensure parking control equipment is without damage or deterioration at the time of
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain parking control equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section
Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures.
1. Train personnel on procedures to follow if operation fails or malfunctions.
3.6 TESTS ON SITE
A. Equipment and Labor: Provide all testing equipment and specialists for testing system.
B. Tests are to include insulation resistance, continuity, loop characteristics, signal measurements and
analysis, logic routines etc. in accordance with manufacturer's test plan, to be submitted two
months before testing, and fully cove performance of components.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
C. Operational tests are to be carried out on system for one week, to test performance of system as if
fully operational at peak periods, with all normal and abnormal functions checked and analyzed.
Trained staff is to be stationed at various positions to carry out operations and report results.
Operations are to include, without limitation, actual vehicular movement over detector loops,
performance of counters, cashiers equipment, central control unit and the like, issue of tickets,
card reader operation and consequent operations etc. as well as auditing and management
functions.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
SECTION 16231 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes standby/emergency power plant installation comprising the following:
1. Stand-by generating set(s), with associated auxiliaries, exhaust system, start-up

system, cooling system, fuel system, batteries and charger etc.
2. Fuel storage and transfer system
3. Instrumentation, protection and control equipment
4. Inter-plant cabling and wiring
5. Earthing.
6. Connection to BMS system and master control station (MCS), including interface
elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification
Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.
7. Connection to fire alarm control panel including interface elements such as relays,
transducers, etc, as detailed in Division 13 Specification fire alarm section and/or
shown on the drawing.
8. Synchronization switchboard.
9. Manually operated overhead hoist

muffler and exhaust piping supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for muffler and exhaust pipe insulation.
3. Division 15 Section "Fuel Oil Piping" for interior fuel piping and fuel storage tank.
4. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping" for coolant piping external to engine
generator.
5. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for combustion air and radiator fan discharge
connections.
6. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"
7. Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches, including sensors and
relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generator sets.
8. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables"
9. Division 16 section "Grounding and Bonding"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - Page 1 of 15

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
1. General description and characteristics of engine- generating sets, standards with

which components comply, site rating and overload capability, overall efficiency, and
fuel and lubricant consumption at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% of rated load.
2. Description and operating criteria of engine; type, model, manufacturer, fuel and
lubricating oil types and specific consumption, starting conditions and starting
periods from cold to full-load pick-up, governor and response characteristics due to
sudden load changes, super-charger, fuel injection system, cooling system and
radiator, air filters, fuel filters, oil filters and pumps.
3. Description and operating criteria of generator, exciter and voltage regulator, with
loading response and short-circuit characteristics, insulation, cooling and accessories.
4. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and other
components specified, weights and forces, mounting methods, vibration protection
etc.
5. Battery type, make, charge/discharge characteristics, capacity and constructional
features.
6. Battery charger, method of charging, equalizing and trickle charging.
7. Daily fuel tanks, pipes and accessories; materials and construction.
8. Exhaust system and silencers; materials and construction.
9. Control instruments, protection, alarms, cut-outs, indicating lamps, indicating
instruments and all other devices or components.
10. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
11. Synchronization system where specified for two or more sets are in parallel, including
technical data, instruments, governor and voltage regulation, with characteristic
curves etc.
12. Calculated noise levels in dBA at typical points within engine room and at various
locations inside and outside.
13. Details of sound attenuator.
14. Details for foundation and vibration.
to, the following:
1. Certified manufacturers' dimensional drawings, templates and installation instructions

for equipment and accessories, showing weights and distribution of forces, location
and size of cabling (power and control), piping connections to equipment, and other
pertinent data.
2. Plans and elevations of all equipment.
3. Separate unit wiring diagrams, schematics and interconnecting wiring diagrams.
4. Constructional details of daily service fuel tank, including outline drawings showing
piping arrangements, connections and dimensions.
5. Complete execution drawings of associated auxiliaries.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Routine Tests and Factory Test Reports: Fully assembled plant or equipment is to be tested
at the factory, before shipping. Complete performance tests are to be carried out under site
simulated conditions, in accordance with the Standards and as described in the
Specification, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
E. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection records
relative to compliance with performance requirements.
F. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Demonstrate compliance with specified

requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
G. Sound measurement test report.
H. Field test report of tests specified in Part 3.
I. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at the Project for ready
access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
2. Detail operating instructions for both normal and abnormal conditions.
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice
and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer
may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with ISO 3046, ISO 8528, IEC
60034, IEC 60085 and CISPR, or equivalent NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and DIN Standards and
recommendations of ABGSM (Association of British Set Manufacturers) where such
standards meet with or supersede the ISO and IEC Standards.
C. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
D. Seismic Zone: Comply with Code requirements for seismic risk zone 2A, as per UBC code.
A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective
wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent
damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from
such hazards.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

equipment.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1

hours.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation of
the plant. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation together with
current prices. Pack with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing
contents.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Caterpillar (U.S.A.)
2. Cummins (Onan) (U.S.A./ U.K.)
3. Deutz (Germany)
4. Kohler (U.S.A.)
5. M.T.U. (Germany)
6. MAN-B&W (Germany)
7. Volvo (Sweden)
8. Wartsila (Finland)
Complete documentation for the factory manufacturing the equipment is to be submitted

including but not limited to, local and international experience, quality certificates, quality
assurance plan and organization.
B. Approved Manufacturers for Synchronizing Panels: Subject to complete coordination and

approval of the generator set supplier, obtain the synchronizing panel from the same
manufacturer as the main low voltage distribution boards.
2.2 PLANT DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Class: Diesel generator set is to be class G3 voltage drop / free drop at 100%
loading) to IS08528-1.
B. Generator Set Assembly: Compact package type, with all equipment mounted on one rigid
steel bed frame suitable for skidding. Radiator is to be mounted on the set or remotely as
shown on the Drawings. Design is to permit easy operation, maintenance and repair.
C. Vibration reduction is to be achieved by appropriate design and careful balancing at factory.

Compact set is to have approved anti-vibration isolators of steel spring or resilient neoprene

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
between rotating equipment and bed-frame, limiting transmission of vibration to building to

a maximum of 0.04 mm amplitude throughout the operating vibration frequency range.
D. Noise reduction is to be achieved by approved methods at source of noise, with sound level
measured at nearest façade of the building limited to 50 dBA at 20 Hz down to 41 dBA at
10,000 Hz.
E. Cold Starting: Engine is to be fully equipped to start and pick up initial load specified at
specified minimum ambient temperature. Provide coolant heater.
1. Cold starting aids, such as engine jacket water heater, lubricating oil heater, intake-air
heater, battery and all devices, accessories, connections, thermostatic switches and
off-duty disconnects with pilot lights and necessary protection, are to be
supplemented as recommended by the manufacturer and approved.
F. Equipment ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings or the next higher standard ratings
provided by the manufacturer. Ratings are to be net [Standby][Prime power with no
limited operational hours (with capability of 10% overload for one hour in every 12
hours] to consumer, excluding fan and any auxiliaries, auxiliary drives and losses, delivered
at specified frequency, voltage and power factor and under worst climatic conditions on site.
G. Generator shall be located in a seismic Zone 2A area. Generator design and installation shall
prevent any damage due to a Zone 2A event.
2.3 DIESEL GENERATOR SET
A. Components: Set is to basically consist of diesel engine, brushless synchronous generator

with direct flexible coupling to engine and single or parallel control cubicle as required and
B. Governing is to be to ISO 3046/IV or BS 5514, electronic type governor with limits of

speed control as specified.
C. Starting and Stopping: When in the automatic mode the set is to start and stop automatically
by a signal sensed through an auxiliary contact in the load transfer switchgear. The set is to
stop, after an adjustable cool- down period (2 - 30 minutes).
D. Duty: Plant is to reach full speed within 10 seconds from start impulse and accept
immediately 60 % of net rated output (load being mixed, steady and inductive, with motor
starting loads as shown on the Drawings). Transient voltage variation is not to exceed 15 %
under any step-load application for which the system is intended, up to full rated load,
recovering to within +/-2% within a few cycles.
E. Failure to Start: Should engine fail to start following a start impulse, the system is to come
to rest for a few seconds. Two further starting attempts are to be automatically made with
intermediate 20-second maximum periods of rest. Should the set fail to start after three
attempts, an alarm is to sound and a 'start failure' signal illuminate.
F. Hand operation is to be possible for testing or normal operation through a

test/manual/off/auto selector switch.
G. Regular Exercising: While on 'auto', the set is to start regularly and automatically every
week and is to operate for 30 minutes before stopping.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.4 DIESEL ENGINE AND AUXILIARIES
A. Design: Diesel engine is to be designed for type of load and application required. Engine
and governor are to be selected to meet operating requirements and response specified.
B. Engine Type: Compression-ignition type, with direct solid-injection, turbo-charged after-

cooled, for ratings over 100 kW, water cooled, with air-cooled radiator inline or V-type
cylinder arrangement suitable for direct coupling to driven machine.
C. Engine Cycle: 4 stroke cycle.
D. Engine Speed: 1500or insert rpm.
E. Type of Fuel: diesel oil.
F. Flywheel is to be suitably sized for type of service and constraints specified, and capable of
being rotated at 125% of rated speed without failure. Torsion vibration dampers are to be
provided.
G. Engine rating is to be such that alternator can deliver net specified rated output as specified
earlier, with temperature rise not exceeding rise allowed by the Standards.
H. Accessibility: It is to be possible to:
1. Remove rocker-box covers without disturbing fuel injection pipes or other

components.
2. Remove and replace pistons and piston rods, liners, big and small end shells and caps
without dismounting engine.
3. Bar engine over by hand for spill timing check and adjustment.
I. Measuring Instruments: Engine mounted instruments are to include, at least, water

temperature gauge, lubricating oil temperature gauge and pressure gauge, speedometer and
running time meter. It is to be possible to measure, with extra instrumentation, coolant
temperature at lower end of radiator, air depression after air filter, air boost and temperature
using methods recommended by manufacturer. Instrument accesses are to be normally
sealed by threaded blanking caps. Speed is to be sensed via a magnetic pickup off the
Engine Thy Wheed Ring Gear.
J. Cooling System: Engine is to be water cooled with gear- driven water pumps. System is to
be pressurized, with heavy-duty tropical radiator cooled by reverse flow fan. Fan cowl and
hand protection guards are to be fitted. Coolant temperature is to be controlled by one or
more thermostats as determined by design of system. Radiator is to be sized for continuous
performance at 110% rated load at worst operating ambient conditions with a 7 to 8 deg. C
temperature differential. Radiator is to be non-ferrous metal, incorporating pressure valve,
radiator cap and drain cock and with integral expansion tank. Direct acting modulating
thermostatic diversion valve is to control engine cooling water temperature. Under normal
operation, by-pass is not to be fully closed. Treated or fresh cooling water and anti-
corrosion and anti-freeze additives are to be used as recommended by Manufacturer for
Specific Conditions of Installation.
K. Cooling Airflow: Obstructions in path of cooling air flow (openings, louvers, grilles, mesh,
ducts, bends etc.) are not to reduce air flow below that needed at full rated output. Fan and
radiator characteristics are to be selected accordingly. Advise if additional booster fans are
required and provide necessary control gear for automatic operation.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
L. Cylinders are to have removable liners. Wet type liners are to have witness hole between
liner sealing rings of each cylinder for early detection of coolant or oil leakage. Each
cylinder is to have drilled and tapped hole and valve for connections of pressure indicator.
M. Lubricating Oil System: Pressurized circulating type, using two engine-driven, gear type
lubricating oil pumps with full flow filters and replaceable elements and lubricating oil heat
exchanger. Filter system is to have spring loaded by-pass valve to permit oil circulation if
filters become clogged. Audible and visual alarms are to cut-in when valve starts opening.
Lubricating oil cooler is to be shell and tube heat exchanger with water from engine radiator
as the cooling medium. Direct acting thermostatic diversion valve is to control oil
temperature. Under normal operation by-pass is not to be fully closed.
N. Fuel system is to have injection pump and injectors that are easily removable and
replaceable for servicing. Engine is to have integral, gear type, engine driven transfer pump
to lift fuel against a head of 2.5 m and supply it through filters to injection pump at constant
pressure. Fuel filter elements are to be easily replaceable.
O. Exhaust system is to be complete with flanged, bolted, galvanized, seamless steel pipe
sections, long sweep elbows, flexible expansion sections, clean-outs, residential silencer,
wall thimbles and supporting steelwork. Silencer is to be independently supported. Indoor
hot exhaust parts are to be insulated with mineral wood / rock wool material, not less than
50 mm thick, retained by wire ties and cladded with sheet metal aluminum (22 - SWG)
covers to protect insulation. Exhaust system is to be designed to reduce back-pressure to
below maximum specified by the manufacturer, in relation to exhaust pipe length shown on
the Drawings.
P. Electric Starting System: Engine starting is to be manual by push-button or automatic

through control system at control panel. System is to consist of heavy-duty 24 V D.C.
starter motor, heavy-duty battery and battery charger. Cranking motor and battery are to be
rated for cranking the engine when cold and at lowest temperature recorded. Starting pinion
is to automatically disengage when engine fires.
Q. Storage Battery: Lead-acid, sealed-in-plastic type, complete with battery rack and inter-cell
connectors. Battery is to have sufficient capacity to provide minimum four cranking
periods.
R. Battery Charger: 25% over-rated, solid state, full-wave rectifier type, adequate to fully
recharge depleted battery in not more than 8 hours and to automatically control rate of
charge (providing a high-charge rate to a depleted battery and reducing to a trickle-charge
rate when battery is fully charged). Ammeter is to be provided to indicate charging rate,
which is to be adjustable. Battery charger is to be mounted in control cubicle, unless
otherwise approved.
S. Electronic Governor is to provide isochronous governing, paralleling and load sharing of

generator sets. Governor is to have zero percent (isochronous) setting and adjustable droop
from zero percent to 10% droop. System is to include power supply unit, magnetic speed
pick-up, control module and actuator using fast response D.C. motor drive or equally
approved alternative. Governor is to be designed for fast-response and high precision of
speed (frequency) control, automatic paralleling and load sharing and is to include speed
adjustment to +/-5% of normal, while running, and with remote control interface.
Frequency deviation under 25% sudden load change is not to exceed 0.5 Hz, recovering to
stable speed condition of +/-0.1 Hz in 0.5 seconds.
T. Governor over-speed trip is to automatically close fuel pump racks in event of engine over-
speed. Device is to be separate and independent from governing mechanism.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
U. Protective system is to comprise automatic engine shutdown and generator trip with visual
and audible alarms in event of over-speed, low lubricating oil pressure, high cooling water
temperature and over cranking.
2.5 GENERATOR (ALTERNATOR)
A. Type: Synchronous, low reactance, high efficiency, revolving field type, with brushless
exciter and flexible coupling, sized to pick up effective load without exceeding transient and
steady-state voltage deviation limits specified up to its full nominal rating and designed for
the performance stipulated in the Specification. It is to be two-bearing construction with
bearings of the sleeve or sealed ball type.
B. Leads and Cables: Phase leads are to be brought out fully insulated to a terminal cable box
of heavy gauge sheet steel, protection IP 44. Control and protection cables are to be brought
out to a separate terminal box.
C. Maximum voltage difference between the three phases at 100%-balanced load is not to
exceed 1%. With unbalanced load up to 8% on one phase at unity power factor and zero
load on other phases, the line-to-neutral voltages are not to differ by more than 2%.
D. Characteristics:
1. Number of Phases: 3.
2. Rated Voltage, Frequency, and Net Rated Output: As shown on the Drawings.
3. Rated power factor: 0.8.
4. Winding Connection: Re-connectable with ends brought out and fully insulated.
5. Maximum Unbalanced Load Current, (negative sequence component of current) with
none of the Phase Currents Exceeding Rated Current: 8% of the rated current.
6. Overload 10% of name plate rating for 1 hour every 12 hours.
7. Rotor: Salient pole type, incorporating damping grid.
8. Excitation: Brushless, with rotating armature rectifiers and discharge resistors.
9. Voltage Regulator: Automatic, with readily accessible controls for voltage level.
10. Insulation: Class H for stator and class H for rotor & exciter, with class F
temperature rise, unless other indicated on the drawings.
11. Enclosure: Drip proof and screen protected (IP 21 to IEC 60529).
12. Cooling: Built-in centrifugal fans.
13. Maintained Short Circuit: 250% for 2 seconds.
14. Over-speed: 120% (minimum) for 2 minutes.
15. Total harmonic factor (THF) at no load 3%max.
16. Waveform Distortion Factor at no Load: 5% max.
E. Voltage Regulation: Overall voltage deviation within normal speed variations is to be within
limits specified from no-load to full-load, from hot to cold and with load power factor from
0.8 lagging to unity. Regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds capacity
of generator. Voltage build-up is to be positive and rapid even when full load is suddenly
applied. Line-to-line voltage waveform deviation factor is not to exceed +/-5%. Total
harmonic content is not to exceed 5% and that of one harmonic not to exceed 2%. Radio
interference suppression is to be within the limits set by the Standards, grade (N).
F. Exciter: Armature is to be 3-phase, directly mounted to generator shaft and connected to

generator field windings through six solid state, hermetically sealed, silicon rectifiers,
accessible for maintenance or repair. Exciter is to have field suppression system to
eliminate any source of diode failure resulting from high inductive loads and surges.
Exciter field windings are to be stationary. Exciter-regulator combination is to maintain

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
output voltage within limits specified for any load up to 110% generator rating and under
any sudden load changes specified.
G. Voltage Regulator: Solid state, volts/Hz type, utilizing silicon semi-conductor devices in
control and power stages, with built-in Electro-magnetic interference suppression and
designed for single or parallel operation. Manual adjustment to +/-5% of regulated voltage
level is to be possible by a potentiometer at control panel. All components are to be sealed,
moisture and heat resistant, with a suitable environmentally protected enclosure. Voltage
regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds capacity of generator and is to
sustain a 3-phase short- circuit current at the generator terminals for the period for which the
short-circuit protection operates and at least for 3 seconds. Voltage regulator power is to be
supported by generator voltage and current to maintain excitation field power.
H. Two-position switch is to be provided for selection of manual or automatic mode of

regulated voltage control.
I. Sets Operating In Parallel: Cross-current compensation and necessary paralleling modules

are to be provided to effect sharing of active and reactive loads equally between generators.
2.6 INSTRUMENTATION, PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Generating Set Instruments, Protection And Controls: Control relays, sensing equipment,
switchgear protective relays and devices and start, stop and shutdown controls are to be
provided as necessary for operation specified. Generating set, instruments, protection and
controls are to be mounted preferably in one control cubicle.
B. Instrumentation is to be of the digital type.
C. Instruments and controls for a non-paralleled set are to include at least the following:
1. Voltmeter and 7-position selector switch.
2. Ammeter and 4-position selector switch.
3. Frequency meter.
4. Off/test/manual/auto duty switch.
5. Manual-start and stop push buttons.
6. Kilowatt-hour meter.
7. Power factor meter.
8. Service-hour running counter.
9. Plant exerciser.
10. Potentiometer for voltage level control.
11. Speed raise/lower device.
12. Cool-down time setting controls.
13. Illuminated indicator panel with LEDs at least for low oil pressure, high water
temperature, over-speed, fail-to-start, generator overload, reverse-power, generator on
load, battery low charge state
14. Lamp test push-button.
15. Indicating gauge and low level fuel alarm.
16. Battery charger, on/off switch, pilot lights.
17. D.C. ammeter.
18. Alarm sounder and reset controls.
19. Anti-condensation heater.
D. Protective gear is to ensure orderly engine stop or shutdown with reset relays, as required
for safety and operational reliability, and is to include the following:

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
1. Output [Power air circuit breaker (PACB) with solid state trip unit, in accordance
with Division 16 Section "Switchboards", (electrically operated and electrically
tripped by shunt release) for over-current and external earth fault protection.
2. Over-voltage protection with voltage and time lag adjustment.
3. Loss-of-field/ under excitation protection.
4. Phase unbalance via negative phase sequence protection.
5. Restricted earth-fault protection, with current adjustable settings between 0 and 20%
of rated current, and time adjustable settings 0 to 3 seconds.
6. Reverse power relay (for sets operating in parallel).
E. Control and Protective Gear Cubicles: Generator set mounted instrument and/or control
cubicles are to be resiliently mounted, preventing transmission of vibration to the
components. Separately mounted instrument and control cubicles are to be self-supporting,
floor mounted and freestanding. Cubicles are to be sheet steel construction, ventilated
indoor type, vermin and dust-proof, (IP 42 to IEC 60947-1), with lockable hinged doors and
instrument panels, separate compartments for control devices, protective relays, circuit
breaker(s) and neutral earthing device. Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures are to be
cleaned, phosphatized, primed with heavy-duty rust inhibiting primer and finished with two
coats of enamel. Wiring is to be 600 V, modularly arranged, with connections made at front
terminal blocks with no live conductors exposed. Wires are to have approved numbered
ferrules at each terminal. Printed circuit plug-in boards, where applicable, are to be of
industry standards, accessible and withdrawable, mounted in standard racks.
F. Load Shedding: An automatic microprocessor based load shedding system is to be provided

for load connection / disconnection according to load priorities and generator power
availability as described on the drawings.
G. Step Loading: An automatic step loading system is to be provided for sequential application
of emergency loads with an adjustable (0- 30 sec) time delay between each two steps as
described on the drawings. The system is to comprise all necessary control equipment
including under over/ voltage sensing relays, time delay relays, interface devices and wiring
with respective circuit breakers.
H. For parallel operation of generator sets provide the following:
1. Automatic synchronizing switchboard, with automatic switching and automatic active

and reactive load-sharing modules, as required for paralleling as specified here below,
together with sequential starting system based on demand load sensing, to allow
automatic starting and transfer of load from one set to another without break in
supply.
2. Semi-automatic paralleling facilities including single check synchronizer, auto-close
attachment for circuit breaker, common busbar and synchroscope to adjust speed of
incoming generating set(s).
3. One neutral earthing switch per set, interlocked in cascade, such that switch of the
first generator to start and be connected to the bus, is closed. The switches shall be
make-before type so that the neutral switch never floats in case the generator with the
neutral closed fails or is shut off the system.
I. Relays: Front adjustable, sealed type, with dust-tight enclosures, removable covers, test
terminal blocks and plugs for testing relay without removal from case. Removal from
casing is to automatically short-circuit respective current transformer secondary windings.
J. Instruments are to be housed in enameled metal cases for switchboard flush installation,
with scales and markings protected and sealed. Indicating meters are to be minimum 76 mm
square. Accuracy is to be within 2% unless otherwise specified. Voltmeters and ammeters

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
are to be moving iron type for A.C. measurements and moving coil type for D.C.
measurements.
K. Current Transformers: Class 2 for measuring and protection.
L. Voltage Transformers: Single phase, dry type, 0.5 accuracy class.
M. KWH Meter: 3-element type for unbalanced 3-phase, 4- wire loads, fitted with 6-digit
cyclometer.
2.7 FUEL STORAGE AND TRANSFER
A. Day-tank Construction: Closed cylindrical steel, inclined at least 3 degrees from horizontal
and fitted with drain plug, inlet and outlet pipe connectors and breather pipe.
B. Day-tank breather pipe is to have replaceable paper air filter or breather caps with air filters.
C. Day-tank instruments are to include float switch, solenoid valve and dial-type level indicator
to give alarm on over-fill and low-level.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Manually Operated Overhead Hoist: Chain operated, self aligning, low headroom type,
comprising trolley with gear mechanism combined into a compact unit, designed to run on
lower flanges of I-beam runway. Hoist is to have shock resistant suspension, positive action
Western type local brake; lifetime lubricated sealed bearings and load safety hook. Trolley
is to have four alloy cast iron wheels. Safety factor is to be minimum of 5. Capacity of hoist
is to be as indicated on the Drawings, and is to be tested to 1.5 times rated capacity.
B. Power and Control Cables: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables", and
Section “Control/Signal Transmission Media" of the Specification and as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Earthing Equipment: Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged
engine generator performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of cooling-system piping systems and electrical connections. Verify

actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required for packaged engine
generators. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
manufacturers' equipment drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance, including
removal of drivers and accessories.
C. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases or building
structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
• All the exhaust piping and duct inside the generator room should be fixed directly to
the ceiling. The ventilation and the silencers must be taken into consideration for the
selection of the generators. If the static pressure of the generator fan is not enough,
booster fans should be foreseen. The noise outside the generators room should not
emerge from the background noise more than (3dB) during the night at the closet
sensible are.
• Inlet and outlet sound attenuators should be calculated for not having more than (50
dB) at the façade of the building and/or at any eventual neighbor. The pressure drop
for each silencer shall not exceed 45 Pa.
• Outside the generator room, the exhaust pipe should be fixed on vibration isolators.
D. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations,

particularly in making connections and adjustments.
E. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
F. Generating Set: Install to maintain alignment and minimize engine and generator stresses.
Protect instrumentation and control equipment including engine mounted instruments from
machine vibration. Mountings and method of mounting are to be as recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer.
G. Engine exhaust piping is to be slightly sloped away from engine to avoid condensation
returning to engine and is to have drain plugs or clean-out at lower end as required.
H. Engine Hot-Air Exhaust Duct: Install approved canvas duct with metal frames between
radiator and louvered opening in wall for radiator exhaust air.
I. Tank Vent Pipe: Extend to nearest outside wall of building and carry up to at least 2 m
above ground level with end at least 1 m away from any building opening. Slope vent pipe
back to tank without traps and support securely. Provide replaceable dust filter and
gooseneck bend or approved weatherproof vent cap at top of pipe.
J. Pipe Hangers And Supports: Fasten securely to building structure with approved masonry
expansion bolts, minimum 20 mm diameter and install in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
K. Earthing: Install earthing system in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding" of the Specification.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and

maintenance.
2. Connect water supply to cooling system.
3. Connect cooling-system water supply and drain piping to diesel engine heat
exchangers. Install flexible connectors at connections to engine generator and remote
radiator.
4. Connect exhaust-system piping to diesel engines.
B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

specified in applicable Standards.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials

and Methods."

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any loss or damage to
Engineer.
B. Earthing resistance tests if any are to be carried out to verify specified requirements.
C. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of
each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air,
exhaust, and fluid leaks.
D. Load tests are to be carried out at low loads to overload conditions, at various power factors.
Measurements are to include voltage and frequency deviations and regulating time under
various step loading conditions, temperature measurements and pressure measurements at
various locations, and in accordance with an approved plan under conditions equal to worst
site ambient conditions.
E. Tests are to include:

1. Full load test for 8 hours continuous, immediately followed by 10% overload test,
without interruption.
2. Insulation measurement.
3. Functional tests for voltage sensing, automatic start and synchronization, transfer of
load and load sharing as applicable.
4. Operation of engine shutdown and alarm signaling and indication, under simulated
fault conditions.
5. Measurement of vibration transmission to building structure.
6. Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and
specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. Verify
acceptance of charge for each element of battery after discharge. Verify
measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
7. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
F. Load Banks: If actual loads are not made available at time of acceptance testing, provide
load banks to carry out complete test cycle of the system under loading and switching
conditions necessary to prove compliance with the Specification.
G. Piping System: Using carbon dioxide or nitrogen from pressurized cylinder, test each
system to 1.5 times normal operating pressure. Do not subject equipment, apparatus or to
pressure exceeding prescribed test pressure obtained from nameplate data or from
manufacturers' published data. Apply tests before connecting piping to equipment. Remove
or disconnect and blank off relief valves, instruments and devices that might be damaged by
test pressure. Maintain test pressure on system for 24 hours during which time there is to be
no noticeable drop in pressure. Check for leaks using soap solution. Isolate source of
pressure during testing.
H. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a
label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
K. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to applicable
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Battery Equalization: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
3.8 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Clean components
internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16264 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. Division 16, Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. Division 16, Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division 16, Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes three-phase, on-line, static-type, uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
system installation, comprising the following:
1. Complete rectifier/charger-battery-inverter system with automatic static switch and

maintenance by-pass circuit
2. Remote monitoring panel & necessary interface for data on faults/monitoring to the
Building Automation and Control Systems (where specified under Mechanical
Works).
3. Input isolation transformer for UPS units rated at 80 kVA and above
4. Batteries
5. Interplant power and control cabling
6. Connection of normal a.c. power from assigned terminals/switch/circuit breaker, as
shown on the Drawings
7. Earthing system.
8. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers,
etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown
on the Drawings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 - Page 1 of 11

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
1. Manufacturers’ catalogues, detailed description, compliance with the Standards,

dimensions and weights, system operation, operating characteristics, methods of
operation, protective and control provisions, heat losses, ambient conditions and
limitations on electronic components etc. beyond which such components may suffer
partial or permanent damage.
B. Batteries calculation
to, the following:
1. Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control and indicating
devices and instruments, exact dimensions and weights, cabling etc.
2. One-line diagram with ratings of each piece of equipment, cabling, grounding etc.
3. Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and the like.
4. Installation and mounting details.
5. Batteries arrangement and mounting details.
6. Rating/de-rating selection calculation to be included.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with

requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Test Certificates: Submit type test and routine test certificates. System is to undergo a
functional and load test program approved by the Engineer, and is to undergo a minimum 72
hours 'burn-in' test, under site simulated conditions, prior to shipment.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements,
and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.
H. Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at

Project site for ready access.
2. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
I. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At project close-out, submit record drawings of installed UPS,
in accordance with requirements of the Specification.
A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of UPS

manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer
may disqualify a manufacturer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
C. Standards: Installation is to comply with relevant IEC, BS, EIA, NEMA and IEEE or equal
Standards. Materials and components are to be manufacturer's latest design, and Standards
used are to be approved prior to manufacture. Radio frequency interference (RFI)
suppression is to be in accordance with CISPR and IEC 60315–4 recommendations.
A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have
been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.
B. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers' ambient

temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
A. Temperature limits within which equipment is to be designed to operate are zero to +40 deg.
C at 100% rated output. Equipment is to be capable of operating under up to 55 deg. C
ambient conditions with derating factor of 1.25% per deg. C over 40 deg. C.
1.8 WARRANTY

1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation of
UPS system. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation together
with current prices.
manufacturer.

equipment.

hours.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Power Ware Chloride (Finland)

2. GE (Italy)
3. Merlin-Gerin (France)
5. Socomec (France)
A. System is to be of the programmable type, microprocessor based with CPU and memory
capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status change, etc. The UPS shall permit setting
parameters for the environment and type of usage to be specified by the Engineer. UPS is to
be of the self-diagnostic type, equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system
operation. The self-test shall identify the parts of the UPS requiring repair in case of a fault.
The system shall be provided with multi-password levels to limit access to software and
data.
B. General: System is to be interposed between normal a.c. power supply and critical load, to
secure a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up for 60 minutes in case
of failure of normal a.c. supply and maintain output voltage, frequency and phase deviation
within specified tolerances.
C. System is to be non-redundant. UPS is to be true on line (continuously supplying load

through the inverter), with automatic no-break transfer to or retransfer from alternate source
(bypass) in case of failure or overload on rectifier- battery-inverter system.
D. Normal a.c. power supply will be available from one protected source fed from either
normal a.c. network or from a.c. Characteristics of output of generator set (when provided)
and UPS system are to be coordinated for best results. Study and advise on special
requirements of generator characteristic output and stability.
E. System overall efficiency is not to be less than 93 % at full load and 90 % at half load.
F. Noise level of complete assembly is not to exceed 65 dB(A) at 1.0 m distance anywhere
within UPS room.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Under normal conditions inverter(s) are to be synchronized and phase locked to normal a.c.
supply. Upon loss of normal a.c. supply, battery is to continue supply of no-break power to
inverters, which then free-run on self- generated UPS frequency reference. Upon restoration
of normal a.c. supply, inverters are to re-synchronize to a.c. line, gradually (at slew rate), if
frequency and voltage deviation of normal a.c. supply is within preset limits specified.
B. Automatic Transfer To Bypass: Static transfer switch is to automatically transfer critical

(100%) load from inverter to by-pass source (which is normal a.c. supply) if:

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1.1
1. Inverter output voltage characteristics fall outside specified limits.

2. Critical load exceeds overload rating of UPS.
3. Over-temperature is sensed.
4. Manual (push button) command is given.
5. Transfer to by-pass mode is to be inhibited, and an alarm initiated if voltage,
frequency and/or phase shift of bypass power is outside acceptable tolerances.
C. Re-Transfer To Inverter: Re-transfer of critical load from auto by-pass source to inverter
(UPS mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:
1. Inverter output voltage characteristics return to within specified tolerances.

2. Original load current reduces to within rated full load capacity of UPS.
3. Re-transfer selector switch is in automatic position.
D. Lock-out feature is to inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside preset
tolerances or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase locked or if UPS
output is not restored to normal conditions.
E. Normal Power Restored: When normal power is restored following an outage,

rectifier/charger is to initially draw no power except for transformer in-rush current. After
approximately 15 seconds (walk-in time), input power requirements are to rise to power
level to drive critical load and recharge battery.
F. Provide maintenance disconnecting switch fully rated to carry the full load input current of
the UPS.
2.4 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. Rectifier/Charger Input:
1. Nominal Input Voltage: 400 V, three phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz.

2. Voltage input variation: +10%, -15% from nominal.
3. Frequency: +/-5% from nominal.
4. Transformer Exciting Current In Rush: Less than 600 % nominal current.
5. Power Factor: 0.8 lagging at full load and nominal input voltage.
6. Total Harmonic Feedback: Maximum 7 % (total).
7. Current Limiting: 115% max. of that required to operate inverters and charge
battery at full rated load, adjustment possible between 100% and 125%.
8. Walk-in Current in Rush: 25% to 100% FLC in 15 seconds.
B. Rectifier/Charger Output:
1. Float and Equalize Operation: Adjustable, automatic, compatible with battery.

2. Regulation: +/-1% max. from 0-100% load.
3. Ripple: +/-2% rms. (0 to 100% resistive load).
C. Static Inverters:
1. Nominal net system power output rating: with load power factor 0.7-lag to 0.9- lead.
2. Nominal output voltage: 400 V, three phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, adjustable +/-5% of
nominal.
3. Output voltage regulation:
a. Balanced load: +/-1% (0 - 100% load)

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
b. Unbalanced load (3-phase output only): +/-3% (at 100% unbalance)

4. Phase Displacement: 120 deg. (+/-5 deg.) at 100% load unbalance.
5. Output Voltage Waveform: 5% max. total harmonic, 3% max. single harmonic.
6. Frequency Stability: Normally synchronized to input line frequency over +/-2
adjustable range; free running at +/-0. Full battery voltage variation, load and p.f.
range; slew rate not to exceed 0.1 Hz/sec.
7. Dynamic Output Voltage Tolerance Sudden Full Load Removal: +/-5% max.
recovering application or to within 1% in less than 30 milliseconds.
8. Over-load Rating: 125% for 10 minutes, 150% for 60 seconds, 1000% for 5 cycles,
105% continuous.
D. Automatic Static Transfer Switch:
1. Transfer Time: 150 microsecond (overlapping) maximum.

2. Total Sensing and Transfer/Retransfer Time: 2 milliseconds, maximum.
3. Retransfer Mode: automatic/inhibit (selectable).
4. Retransfer Delay: 2 - 32 secs. in auto mode (selectable).
5. Transfer Point: +/-10% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
6. Retransfer Point: +/-5% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
7. Transfer Inhibit Point: +/-20% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
2.5 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Materials and Parts: Electronic devices are to be solid state, hermetically sealed. Indicator
lights are to be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions are to be seen by
operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors. Power connections and remote
alarm and control wiring are to be accessible at terminal boards. Power semi- conductors
are to be fused. Metal surfaces including copper and aluminium heat sinks and busbars are
to be treated with permanent protective coating. Electro-mechanical power devices and
relays are to be vacuum impregnated, insulated for maximum operating voltage conditions,
and enclosed in dust-tight enclosures. Cables are to be fire resistant high temperature grade.
B. UPS is to be provided with a socket connection for a serial interface to be linked to a

portable PC, to a modem or to the BMS system for communication with the UPS. It shall
enable interrogation of the UPS about status, faults, data stored, reprogramming, etc.
C. Housing: Equipment is to be housed in a free-standing, well ventilated, totally enclosed

modular assembly with front accessible lockable doors, giving easy access for maintenance,
inspection and adjustments, and with provisions for handling and lifting during and after
installation. Enclosures are to be suitable for industrial, tropical environments; protection IP
21 to IEC 60529, of galvanized sheet steel construction treated against corrosion and with
light grey RAL7032 baked paint or epoxy finish to approved standard.
D. Sub-assemblies and components are to be mounted on pull- out and/or swing-out trays, of
the plug-in type where possible. Where it is not possible to mount components in pull-out or
swing-out trays, they are to be easily accessible inside the enclosure. Assemblies shall be
replaceable without requiring any adjustments or settings in the UPS.
E. Ventilation: For units rated over 5 kVA, an integral, forced-air, cooling system is to be
provided in each UPS module to remove dissipated heat efficiently, and ensure components
operate within environmental ratings. Air is to enter bottom of cabinet through replaceable
filters, and exhaust through the top. At least two fans are to be provided for ventilating each
enclosure. No degradation of performance is to occur in the event of a single fan failure.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
Temperature sensors, mounted on semi-conductor heat sinks, are to initiate alarm if

maximum working temperature is exceeded.
F. Rectifier/charger unit is to have mainline circuit breaker and two-winding dry-type, Class H
insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding, high efficiency
(98%), regulating transformer and is to be automatic with soft start-up (walk-in) feature,
using silicon controlled rectifiers (thyristors) with control logic circuitry to control firing
angles to thyristors to suit power output requirements and protect against primary power
surges, lightning transients, under-voltage and over-voltage conditions. Output is to be
passed through LC filters to d.c. bus.
G. Rectifier/charger unit is to be capable of supplying full load power to inverter, and to charge
the battery from a discharge condition to 95% charge within ten times discharge period, and
maintain full charge at floating voltage until next operation. Charger current is to be voltage
regulated and current limited. Where three-phase supply is involved, rectifier is to be at least
six-pulse type for UPS ratings up to 80 kVA, and 12-pulse type for 80 kVA ratings and
above.
H. Inverter is to employ Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) technology in three leg,
pulse width modulation (PWM) design with high frequency switching technique, and
complete with output transformer and filters. Inverter start-up is to be automatic, to reach
full voltage within milliseconds and deliver power to the load within 2 seconds. Inverter is
to start at any load including short-circuit. Output transformer is to be two-winding dry-
type, Class H insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding, high
efficiency (98%),
I. Inverter oscillator is to operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within specified
tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase-locking to normal power supply
frequency. When inverter is phase-locked to normal power supply, and latter fails,
oscillator is to automatically revert to free running state (quartz oscillator) and maintain
specified limits.
J. Automatic static transfer switch is to be continuously rated at full load (100% FL), hybrid
type (make-before-break), solid state transfer device with logic thyristor assembly isolatable
or completely removable for maintenance. When signal to close switch is initiated,
thyristors are to instantaneously conduct power to prevent deviations and breaks in load
voltage outside specified tolerances.
K. Maintenance By-Pass Switching: Manual (make-before- break) by-pass switch is to allow

load to be transferred to by-pass source without interruption of output, and provide isolation
of UPS and static switch during maintenance. Test position is to permit testing of static
switch while load is being fed from bypass power circuit. Transfer inhibited warning circuit
is to be provided to give an alarm indication in case by-pass supply is beyond acceptable
tolerances.
L. Protection: UPS modules are to have built-in or inherent electronic current-limiting

protection against permanent self damage effective down to short-circuits. Fast acting,
current limiting devices are to protect against failure of any solid state component. Internal
failure in any UPS module is to cause immediate isolation from input and output by
operation of static interrupters or causing shut down of faulty module. Protection is to be
provided against, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Input over and under voltage and power line surges

2. Output over voltage and voltage surges
3. Sudden abnormal changes in output load conditions

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
4. Short-circuits at output terminals

5. Inverter and rectifier overcurrent
6. Auxiliary Control Circuit Overcurrent.
M. UPS Output Neutral: Designed to continuously carry twice the full load phase current.
N. Input Filter Disconnection: UPS control system is to disconnect the input filters in case of
interruption of utility power supply failure while the UPS is operating at light loads (less
than 25%).
O. Battery: High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic
encased, sealed lead- acid (gas recombination) type cells with automatically re-closing
explosion proof safety vents. Electrolyte specific gravity is not to exceed 1.25 when fully
charged at 25 deg. C. Ampere-hour rating is to be sufficient for emergency period specified
with all inverters operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 V
per cell. Cells are to be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life is not to be
less than 10 years, with a capacity drop down to not less than 80% under normal expected
service. Batteries configuration is to be minimum of two strings in parallel; each string is to
be capable to supply the demand load for half the backup period.
P. Battery Racks: Steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at points of contact with
battery cases. Racks are to be painted with electrolyte resistant paint, are to be of
appropriate design for space in which installed, and directly accessible for maintenance.
Cables are to be rubber insulated electrolyte resistant type.
Q. Mimic Panel: UPS assembly is to include a mimic diagram with digital and LED displays,
indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.
R. Local panel instruments are to include at least the following (digital readings):
1. Inverter input voltmeter, measuring d.c. bus volts.

2. Battery ammeter, measuring charge/ discharge current.
3. A.C. voltmeter to measure inverter output voltage, normal supply voltage or system
output.
4. UPS output ammeter and frequency meter.
S. Local Panel Indicators are to include at least the following:
1. System on battery supply

2. Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output and normal
a.c. supply input.
3. Static switch on normal a.c. supply (bypass mode).
4. Static switch inhibited.
5. Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for transformers,
rectifier/charger and inverter (alarm to automatically transfer load to by-pass circuit).
6. Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified rating failure of
any stage, d.c. bus earth fault, inverter output earth fault.
T. Local built-in controls are to include at least the following:
1. Inverter on/off.
2. Battery input circuit breaker.
3. Auto/manual reset-test switch.
4. Manual reset switch.
5. Hybrid switch transfer test push-button.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
6. Re-transfer auto/inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of load to

inverter after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-transfer of load to
inverter until hybrid switch is in auto-mode.
7. Battery automatic/equalize recharge timer, 0 - 30 hours adjustable, with
automatic/boost/equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel only and to be
used only with manufacturer's recommendation for type of battery specified).
8. Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices (accessible to
maintenance personnel only).
9. Indicator test/reset switch.
10. Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only).
11. Alarm test-accept-reset.
U. Local built-in alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if required, are to
include at least the following:
1. Fan failure: Alarm only.

2. Over Temperature: Alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a safe
preset period.
3. D.C. Volts out of Limits: Alarm with indication.
4. Fuse Failure: Alarm.
5. Battery on Load/Disconnected: Alarm only.
6. Overloads: Alarm only with a trip command if prolonged, for each rectifier/inverter
unit.
7. Normal a.c. Supply Failure: Alarm only.
8. Hybrid Switch Operation to by-pass Mode: Alarm only.
9. Low and High Output Voltage: Alarm only.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
B. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases or building
structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
C. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations,

particularly in making connections and adjustments.
D. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Provide direct interference free grounding circuit in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and wiring according to Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical

3.4 BATTERY EQUALIZATION
A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record

individual-cell voltages.
A. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to manufacturer's
written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and performance of each
component of the UPS:
1. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.
b. Component type and labeling verification.
c. Ratings of installed components.
2. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm
functions.
3. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.
B. Power Supply Output Disturbance: Provide microprocessor based instrument, and monitor
and record power supply output disturbance of voltage and frequency. Instrument details
are to be submitted for approval.
C. Test Periods are to be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by Engineer, to verify and
obtain realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and switching conditions
within the criteria specified.
D. Data logging is to include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes and spike
bursts, drop-outs; high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on cassette tape
for subsequent re-entry into instrument's memory for display or print-out.
E. Tests are to include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload condition, and
measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave shape, and harmonic
content and frequency stability.
F. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.
G. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and
inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and
inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16265 - CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”

2. Division 16 Section “Lighting Control Device and Dimming”
3. Division 16 Section “Interior lighting”
4. Division 16 Section “Panel boards”
5. Division 16, Section "Grounding and Bonding".

6. Division 16, Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes normal-transfer battery inverters that automatically sense loss of
normal ac supply and use an electronic switch to transfer loads from normal to battery-
inverter supply, and that automatically retransfer to normal supply when normal power is
restored.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers,

wiring, etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or
shown on the Drawings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features and components for each product
specified. Include wiring diagrams and elevation view of front panel showing control
and indicating devices. Include data on ratings, and a detailed description of operating
modes and any load limitations that may apply.
B. Record of field tests covering tests and commissioning efforts required by Part 3 of this
Section.
C. Maintenance Data: For central battery inverters to include in maintenance manuals

A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of

Central Battery system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER 16265 - Page 1 of 7

S08035 -SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
B. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a

locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional
advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare
parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy
Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
C. Standards: Installation is to comply with relevant IEC, BS, EIA, NEMA and IEEE or
equal Standards. Materials and components are to be manufacturer's latest design, and
Standards used are to be approved prior to manufacture. Radio frequency interference
(RFI) suppression is to be in accordance with CISPR recommendations.
A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions

have been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.
B. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers' ambient

temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer

agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section
during the specified warranty period
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation
of the system. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation
together with current prices.
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Thomas&Betts – EMERGI-LITE (UK).
2. EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEMS (UK).
3. ORBIK (UK).
2.2 GENERAL

S08035 -SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
The Central Battery System (CBS) shall be fully automated, digitally controlled and consists of
LCD meter indicating battery voltage, battery current or battery compartments temperature.
Voltage is default, others displayed using push buttons. Display mode for charger, inverter, and
alarms shall be indicated by LED.
Following are the system ratings:
Input Power Supply:……………………………. 400V/230V - 3 Phase, AC 60Hz.
Output Power Supply – Normal Mode…………. 230V - 1 Phase, AC 60Hz.
Output Power supply – Battery Mode…………. 230V - 1 Phase, AC 60Hz.
Backup Battery Duration:……………………… .1.5 hour – Full load.
2.2 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS & COMPONENTS
A. ENCLOUSER (HOUSING: The enclosure (housing) shall be made of 1.6mm coated

sheet steel with powder coated RAL 7032 finish and IP21 protection class. Plinth base
feature to prevent build up of moisture/corrosive materials and aid mechanical handling
by fork or pallet truck. Large cabling compartments shall be provided with removable
metal flange at the top of the enclosures. Facial panel for mounting control/display
panel shall be fixed separately. The enclosure shall meet the requirements of sections
11 and 13 of EN 60598-1. The enclosure shall be resistant to heat and fire. Electronic
components and batteries shall have complete access through removable front and rear
doors. All outgoing circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug-
in type terminals suitable for conductor’s sizes as per site requirement.
B. RECTIFIER/CHARGER UNIT: is to be voltage regulated type, with inherent current

limit to prevent overcharging or damage to the system in the event of battery failure or
fault, designed to compensate for mains input variations, battery cell ageing and
temperature fluctuations. Unit is to have protective main line circuit breaker and to use
silicon controlled rectifiers (thyristors) with control logic circuitry to control firing angles
of thyristors to suit power output requirements and protect against power surges,
lightning transients, under and over voltage conditions. Output is to be passed through
LC filler. Unit is to be capable of supplying power to charge battery from discharge
conditions to 95% charge within ten times discharge period and maintain full charge at
floating voltage until next operation, outputs to have low AC ripple currents for
maximum battery life, charging voltage shall be automatically adjusted to optimize the
battery life. Battery chargers and rectifiers shall comply with the relevant requirements of
EN 60146-1-1 and EN 50272-2, and to have the following characteristics:
Nominal input voltage : 400V, 3 phase, 5 wires, 60Hz or

230V, 1 phase, 3 wires, 60Hz, (as shown on the Drawings).
Voltage input variation : + 10%, -15% from nominal.
Frequency : +/- 2% from nominal.
Output voltage regulation : +/- 1% max for 0-100% load.
Output ripple : +/- 2% rms (0 to 100% resistive load)

S08035 -SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
C. INVERTER: is to employ pulse width modulation design with high frequency switching
technique with necessary output filters. The inverter output is to be sinusoidal with
stable frequency and regulated amplitude in order to compensate the variations of the
battery voltage and the load’s consumption. The inverter is to automatically shut down
when the input voltage drops below an unsafe value, to be recommended by the
manufacturer, for protection of the electronic components. Inverter is to have the
Nominal output voltage : 230V, 1 phase, 4 wire, 60HZ.
Load power factor : 0.7 lag to 0.9 lead.
Output voltage regulation :
Balanced load : +/- 2% (0-100% load)
Unbalanced load : +/- 5% (0-100% load)
Output frequency stability : +/- 1% (0-100% load).
Output voltage waveform : 5% max total harmonic distortion

3% max single harmonic.
Overload capacity : 125% for 10 minute

150% for 1 minute
1000% for 5 cycles
105% continuous.
2.3 CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER SYSTEM
A. Equipment Description: Factory-fabricated standard product from a single manufacturer.
B. Load Description: Supply power without noise, vibration, pulsation of load, or abnormal
output or visual appearance for the following loads types, in any combination and at any
percentage of unit capacity:
1. Fluorescent lights.
2. Incandescent lights.
3. Halogen lights.
D. Operation: Unit normally supplies power to output circuits from a single, external,
normal supply source. When normal power fails, unit automatically transfers from
normal source to internal battery source and feeds output circuits through the inverter.
When normal power is restored, load automatically retransfers to normal supply and
battery is recharged.
E. Inverter: Solid-state type, with the following features:
Output Voltage: Automatically regulated to within plus or minus 5 percent.

S08035 -SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
Output Frequency: Automatically regulated to within plus or minus 1 Hz, from no load
to full load at unit power factor over the operating range of the battery voltage.
1. Total Conversion Efficiency: 75 percent, minimum.

Output Waveform of Unit: Sine-wave with maximum 5-percent total harmonic
distortion throughout the battery operating-voltage range, from no load to full load.
2. Battery Charger: Solid-state, automatic, 3-charging-rate type.
F. Minimum Charger Efficiency: 85 percent.
1. Equalizing Charge: Automatically applied to battery every 90 days.
G. Battery: Valve Regulated Lead Acid type designed for maintenance-free operation,
including no addition of water for the service life of the battery. Battery must support
the total lighting load connected to the system for 1.5 hours with lifetime of 10 years.
Lead Acid cells shall be supplied with transducers to monitor battery compartment
temperature.
H. Instrumentation and Controls: Include the following minimum array:
1. Ready normal-power on light
2. Charge light.
3. Inverter supply load light.
4. Battery voltmeter.
5. AC output voltmeter.
6. Load ammeter.
7. Test switch to simulate ac failure.
8. Meter accuracy within 2 percent or scale range.
I. Control Substation (ECBSS): feeds and controls up to 40 lighting fixtures. The ECBSS
shall monitor and control the fittings via a combined power/data cable. Each ECBSS
can monitor up to 8 local maintained, switched maintained and/or non-maintained
circuits.
J. 4-Way Power Feeding Module (PFM): Module for Feeding Maximum 4 Mains
Luminaires to connect them to the Central Battery System. The module is to be
provided for mains luminaires connected to the system. The maximum current per
luminaire is 1A at 220 volt.
K. Addressable Interface Module: is to be provided for each luminaire connected to the

system. The maximum wattage of light fitting is 75W.
L. Output-Branch Circuit Breakers: Quantity, ratings, and characteristics as shown on

drawings.
M. Dimming Systems: System must be compatible with digital and analogue dimming
systems.
N. Remote Access: Software and test reports must be accessible remotely via LAN or
internet connection. The system must be capable of exporting data to BMS in
LONWORKS or BACNET format.

S08035 -SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
O. Testing: Automatic, periodic and mandatory tests of emergency lighting lamps and
control gear must be carried out to verify the correct operation of the central battery
system. The periodic test is to be programmed via a standard desk top PC and the
output of the test is to be printed out by the printer
P. Exit and Emergency Lighting Fixtures: are to be equipped with all devices that make
them part of the central battery system.
Q. Environmental Conditions: ambient temperature of the installation (switch room)

should be in the range 15 – 25deg C, humidity 40 – 60% and altitude without extra
ventilation 2500 meters.
2.3 FINISH
A. Cabinet: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish over corrosion-resistant prime

treatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Clearance: According to manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than 900 mm
in front of unit.
B. Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits

according to manufacturer’s writing diagrams and as indicated.
C. Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the installation, connection, tests, and adjustment of the unit.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment and components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical

A. Supervised adjustment and pretesting is to be under supervision of factory-authorized

service representative, pretest system functions, operations, and protective features.
Adjust to ensure operation complies with specifications. Load the system using a
variable load bank simulating KVA, KW, and power factor of loads for which unit is
rated.
B. Provide the services of a qualified testing agency to perform the tests listed below
according to manufacture’s recommendations upon completion of installation of
system. Load the system using a variable load bank simulating KVA, KW, and power
factor of load for which unit is rated. Use instruments that have been recently calibrated
according to approved standards.
- Simulation of malfunction to verify to protective device operation.

S08035 -SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
- Tests of supply on emergency duration, demonstrations of low-battery voltage

shutdown, and transfers due to normal source failure and restoration.
- Tests of harmonic content of input and output current fewer than 25 percent, and 100
percent of rated load.
- Tests of voltage output under specified transient-load condition.
- Tests of efficiency at 50-percent, and 100-percent rated load.
- Functional tests of Remote Status and Alarm Panel.
- Functional tests of Battery-Monitoring System.
C. Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.
3.4 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and abrasions in finish to match
original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to

demonstrate adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the system and to train Owner’s
personnel.
B. Conduct a minimum of 8 hours of training as specified under Instructions to Owner’s

Employees in the Project Closeout Section of these Specifications.
C. Schedule training with at least a 7-day advance notification
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Battery Equalization: Manually equalize charging of battery cells according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

S08035 -SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
SECTION 16280 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes automatic power factor correction equipment rated 600 V and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and
operating weights of multiple capacitor cells or elements; and data on features, ratings, and
performance.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and
workspace requirements and required clearances.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail internal and interconnecting wiring and differentiate between
C. Factory Test Reports: Evidence of product's compliance with specified requirements.
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

Include the following:
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at Project site.
2. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal conditions.
A. Comply with:
- IEC 60831-1&-2, IEC 60871-1&-2 and IEC 60931-1&-2.
- IEEE 18 and NEMA CP 1.
1.5 COORDINATION
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 16280 – page 1 of 6

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
A. Coordinate sensor-communication module package with SCADA and with monitoring equipment
specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for successful
transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
1. Fuses: 10 % of each type and rating, but not less than 3 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

a. Schneider Electric. (France)

b. Schneider Electric / Square D. (USA)
c. ABB (Germany / USA)
d. Siemens (Germany / USA)
e. General Electric Co.; Business Information Center (USA)
f. Eaton (USA)
2.2 CAPACITORS, GENERAL
A. Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase groups and
mounted in metal enclosures.
B. Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated in
thermosetting resin inside plastic container.
C. Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.
D. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in each phase
and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the following:
1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A, minimum.

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor manufacturer.
3. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has opened, but is
still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the enclosure.
E. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.
F. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid leakage from capacitor
cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated.
1. Indoor Enclosures: IP 21 to IEC 60529 or NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.

2. Outdoor Enclosures: IP 54 to IEC 60529 or NEMA 250, Type 4, equipped with watertight
conduit connections.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
G. Anti Harmonic Reactors are to be provided in series with the capacitors and properly tuned to limit
the harmonic currents in order to avoid over loading the capacitors. The reactor rating is not to
exceed 7% of the capacitors to be protected.
2.3 FIXED CAPACITORS
A. Description: Integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Internal Wiring: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single set of
pressure terminals.
2.4 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION UNITS
A. Comply with IEC 60831-1, 2 and IEC 60871-1, 2 and IEC 60931-1, 2 or NEMA ICS 2.
B. Description: Capacitor banks, contactors, controls, and accessories factory installed in

independent enclosures. Units include a separately mounted current transformer to sense current in
the power circuit being corrected and to provide input to unit controls.
C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any
value between unity and 0.80 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on circuits
being corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10
seconds, operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are
opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting.
Switch only one capacitor bank at a time.
D. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:
1. Undervoltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for power
supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually controlled
capacitor-bank switching.
E. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the capacitor
application.
F. Buses: Plated copper.
G. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting wiring, and
capacitors.
H. Inductors: Air-core-type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching surges to within
contactor ratings.
I. Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum fault
current to which they may be exposed.
J. Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel.
K. Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with controls or
main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.
L. Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure.
1. Indicated target and actual power factors.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
3. Mounting: Flush or semiflush in unit door.
M. Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting conditions.
N. Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit.
1. Operating handle can be padlocked.
O. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication modules, and network

interface units, matched to and compatible with SCADA system. Communication module
transmits data to remote monitoring devices. Data includes actual corrected power factor] and
number of capacitor steps connected.
2.5 FACTORY FINISH
A. Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.
A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with IEC 60831-1,2 and
IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA CP 1. Include the following:
1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, leak, and
dissipation-factor tests.
2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in

Division 3.
B. Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Connect remote monitoring communication module to electrical power monitoring and control
data network through appropriate network interface unit.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control
testing.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

equipment installation and connections. Report results in writing. Include the following:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuits have been energized, connect and observe units
to confirm proper operation.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
2. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Inspection: Perform external and internal inspections of capacitor equipment for damage and for
compliance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's documentation. Check electrical and
mechanical bolted connections for required torquing.
D. Testing: Perform the following and certify compliance with test parameters:
1. Test insulation resistance between capacitor terminals and case. Follow manufacturer's
written instructions or those below:
a. Use test voltages 500 V minimum, for equipment rated 250 V and less, and 1000 V
minimum, for equipment rated more than 250 V.
b. Apply test voltage for 60 seconds.
c. Investigate, report, and resolve insulation resistance less than that stated by
manufacturer's literature or less than allowable 25 megohms for equipment rated
250 V and less and 100 megohms for equipment rated more than 250 V.
2. Measure capacitance of pole-to-pole capacitor combinations and compare with

manufacturer's published values. Report readings, and investigate and resolve
discrepancies more than 10 percent of manufacturer's nominal values.
3. Energize circuits and demonstrate electrical operating features of automatic power factor
correction units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Verify accuracy of remotely monitored parameters transmitted from automatic power
factor correction units by communication module.
E. Correct deficiencies shown by inspections and tests on site where possible, and retest; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units and retest.
F. Report of Tests and Inspections: Written record including adjustment settings.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for optimum automatic power factor correction.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean components internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 1 Section [Demonstration and Training

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 Rev 1
SECTION 16312 - SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes secondary unit substations, each consisting of the following:
1. Incoming section.
2. Transformer section.
3. Secondary distribution section.

3. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for cable terminations at
switchgear.
4. Division 16 Section "Busways" for busway connections between transformers and
secondary distribution equipment.
5. [Necessary interfaces for onnection to BMS system, including interface elements
such as relays, transducers, wiring, etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specifications,
BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings].
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
1. Manufacturers' catalogues, detailed description of construction, provisions for

extension, compliance with the Standards, dimensions and weights, operating
characteristics, operating curves and error curves (VT, CT) for all switchgear,
power transformer, control gear, protective gear, metering gear etc.
2. Details of miscellaneous items including pilot lights, cabling or wiring, incoming
and outgoing feeder terminal fittings, supports, labels, interlocks, bracing etc.
B. Shop And Construction Drawings: submit drawings for approval including, but not
1. Plans and elevations, with indication of switchgear mounted components,

dimensions and weights.
2. Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
3. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and
busbars and types and locations of protective gear (relays, metering instruments,
CTs, VTs) etc.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS 16312 - Page 1 of 11

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
4. Schematic and elementary diagrams of control circuits.

5. Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.
6. Physical arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, instrument transformers,
busbars, connections etc.
7. Dimensions and weights of control power supply and other auxiliary equipment or
components.
C. Technical Literature: submit the following for approval prior to equipment manufacture:
1. Schedule of selected circuit breakers, relays and control gear, with complete
identification of each component and its characteristics.
2. Protection coordination scheme, including pick-up settings and time-grading,
together with time-current curves and range of adjustments etc. as required to
coordinate with upstream and downstream protective devices of the complete
system.
D. Type Test Certificates: are to be submitted to verify compliance of main equipment with
the relevant IEC Standards, including the following:
1. Impulse withstand-voltage tests

2. Power frequency withstand-voltage tests.
3. Temperature-rise tests.
4. Short time current tests.
5. Verification of making and breaking capacity.
6. Mechanical endurance/operation tests.
7. Verification of degrees of protection for persons against contact with live and
moving parts.
8. Internal arc tests.
9. Protection degree test to IEC 60529.
E. Routine Tests: each complete switchgear unit is to undergo routine tests at the
manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test
reports, prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed
rating of equipment under site conditions.
F. Routine Tests and Special Test for power Transformers are to include measurement of
noise level, winding resistance, voltage ratio, check of polarity/ vector group, impedance
voltage, load loss, no-load loss, no load current, induced overvoltage withstand test and
separate source voltage withstand test.
requirements.
I. Maintenance Data: For switchgear to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing switchgear

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
B. Standards: equipment and component parts are to comply with the following Standards:
1. Common Clauses for HV Switchgear and Control Gear Standards: IEC 60694.
2. A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages above 1 kV
and up to and including 52 kV: IEC 62271-200.
3. HV A.C. Circuit Breakers: IEC 62271-100.
4. Insulation Coordination: IEC 60071.
5. HV a.c. Fuse-switch combinations and Fuse-Circuit-Breaker Combinations: IEC
62271-105.
6. A.C. Disconnectors (isolators) and Earthing Switches: IEC 62271-102.
7. HV Switches: IEC 62271-103.
8. Surge Arrestors: IEC 60099.
9. Metering and Protective Current Transformers (CTs): IEC 60044-1.
10. Metering and Protective voltage Transformers (VTs): IEC 60186.
11. Relays: IEC 60255.
12. Reading Instruments: IEC 60051.
13. Watt-Hour Meters: IEC 60521.
14. Power Transformers: IEC 60076, & 60726.
15. Climate Conditions: IEC 60721-3-3 & 60721-3-4.
16. Insulating oil: IEC 60296.
17. Sulfur hexa-fluoride: IEC 60376.
18. Fuses: IEC 60282 -1.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer

agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section
during the specified warranty period
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path
as indicated.
B. Store so condensation will not form on or in switchgear.
C. Apply temporary heat where required to obtain suitable service conditions.
D. Handle switchgear using factory-installed lifting provisions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear with other construction.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete, reinforcement,

and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
A. Spare Parts: provide spare parts, as recommended by the manufacturer, for one year
maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for emergency replacement
due to accidental breakage or failure. Spare parts are to include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Two sets of each type of lamp, fuse, auxiliary switch, trip coil, control switch,
selector switch, neon indicator and the like.
2. HV and LV Bushings
3. Drain blug
4. Fragile parts which are subject to external damage
5. Oil Sampling Kit
B. Tools And Instruments: provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and maintenance including levering crank, manual charging
handle, manual shutter operator, testing jumpers and HV test bushings, set of rail
extensions, digital micro ohm-meter, set of mobile lifting and handling equipment etc. as
necessary for the type of switchgear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. A.B.B. (Sweden/Germany)
2. A.E.G. (Germany)
3. Cutler Hammer. (U.S.A.)
4. G.E. (U.S.A.)
5. Merlin-Gerin (France)
2.2 OUTDOOR COMPACT PACKAGE SUBSTATION
A. Type: single integrated metal housing, comprising three totally segregated compartments,
accommodating MV switchgear, transformer and LV switchgear. Degree of protection
is to be IP 54 for switchgear (MV or LV) enclosures and IP 23 for transformer housing.
MV and LV connections to corresponding transformer terminals are to be insulated and
inaccessible without the use of tools.
B. Package is to be designed and constructed for shipping, lifting and handling as one piece.
C. Housing is to be weatherproof, suitable for outdoor installation at particular location,

rodent and vermin proof, high quality hot-dip galvanized sheet steel. Alternative housing
materials may be submitted for approval.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
D. Insulation: roof and walls of housing are to be thermally insulated to maintain

temperature inside enclosure within acceptable limits.
E. Ventilation: compartments are to be naturally ventilated through louvred openings of size

appropriate to vent the heat dissipated by equipment or transmitted by outside radiation.
F. Access: lockable double swing doors are to give access independently to MV and LV
compartments. Access to transformer is to be through demountable bolted panels. It is to
be impossible to reach equipment or live parts from outside the housing.
G. Finish: metal parts of housing are to be cleaned, primed with rust inhibiting and
waterproofing primer and finished with corrosion and weather-resistant enamel and final
coat of air drying enamel. Alternative finish may be used subject to approval.
H. Signs: heavy cast metal identification and danger signs, each not less than 200 x 300 mm,
are to be installed on all sides of substation.
I. Lighting and convenience power outlets are to be provided within the compartments, via
a fused circuit.
J. Earthing: exposed conductive parts are to be earthed via earth bars, with one earth bar for
MV and one earth bar for LV compartments.
K. Arrangement: package and compartment arrangement are to be compatible with space

shown on the Drawings, taking into consideration routing of MV and LV cables.
L. MV Switchgear Compartment Components: compartment is to include metal-enclosed

ring main switchgear unit with SF6 switching and SF6 insulated bus-bars or vacuum
switching and air insulated copper bus-bars comprising two incoming motorized switch-
disconnectors for ring main network feeders, one transformer protection fuse switch
combination or circuit breaker, cable terminal fittings behind dead front panels, and front
mounted switchgear operating handles, control, indication and metering devices.
M. MV Switchgear Compartment Characteristics:
1. Rated voltage: 36 kV.

2. Nominal service voltage: 33 kV.
3. Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
4. Rated impulse-withstand voltage (peak): 170 kV.
5. Rated one minute power frequency-withstand voltage (RMS): 70 kV.
6. Rated short time-withstand current: 25 kA for 1 seconds.
7. Busbar current rating: as shown on the Drawings.
8. Insert kA value (2.5 x short time withstand current above).
9. Rated peak withstand current: 63.
N. Mv Switchgear Compartment Switch-Disconnector: general purpose, 3-pole, load- break,

short-circuit make, category B to IEC 60265.
O. MV Switchgear Compartment Switch-Disconnector Ratings:
1. Rated normal current: as shown on drawings.

2. Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak): equal to rated peak withstand current.
3. Rated short time current: 25 kA for 1 sec.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
P. MV switchgear compartment switch-disconnector operation is to be mechanically or

electrically operated. Switching mechanism is to be manual, spring charged, quick-make,
quick-break, with speed of switching independent of operator. Main switch and earth
switch operations are to be separated and safety interlocked with the manual handle
inserted in separate access holes for on/off operation of main switch and earth on/earth
off operation of earth switch. Handle design is to ensure delay between closing and re-
opening of main switch or earthing switch, to provide an anti-reflex operation. It is to be
impossible to move earth switch inadvertently into or from earth position except when
main switch is in the open position. Indication of switch position is to be mechanical,
directly connected to moving contacts. Each switch is to have padlocking device in the
open, closed and earth positions. Where specified, operation is to be electrically charged
by suitably rated universal motor. Motor operation is to be a.c. 380/220 V, 60 Hz fed
from the nearest Ups. Insertion of manual spring charging lever or hand- crank is to
automatically disconnect the motor.
Q. MV Switchgear Compartment Fuse-Switch Combination: to consist of trip-free, load-

break, short-circuit make fuse-switch combination, with operational requirements as for
switch-disconnector. Fuse is to be separately located in fuse chamber with interlocked
earthing switches providing upstream and downstream earthing of the fuse assembly.
Automatic trip switching is to be actuated by fuse spins which actuate common trip-bar in
switch mechanism. Once operated, striker pins remain in ejected position, preventing
reclosure of switch until fuse has been replaced. Single phasing is not to be possible.
Fuses are to be totally enclosed, current limiting, cartridge type, high-breaking capacity,
with striker pins, and withdrawable from front of unit.
R. MV switchgear compartment fuse-switch combination ratings:
1. Rated normal current: 400 A

2. Rated prospective short circuit breaking current: 25 kA to IEC 60420.
3. Rated prospective short circuit making current: 63 kA.
4. Rated current of fuse link: 100 A.
S. MV Switchgear Compartment Circuit Breaker: is to be SF6 type.
T. Circuit breakers are to have the following ratings:
1. Rated Normal Current: As shown on Drawings.

2. Rated Short-Circuit Breaking Current at Nominal Service Voltage and Percentage
D.C. Component in Accordance with IEC 62271: 25 kA.
3. Rated Short-Circuit Making Current (peak): 63 kA.
4. Rated Duty Operating Sequence: O - 3 min - CO-3 min - CO.
5. Rated Transient Recovery Voltage (TRV) for Terminal Faults (peak): 30 kV.
6. Rated Cable Charging Breaking Current: 31.5 A.
7. Rated (single) Capacitor Breaking Current: To be stated by manufacturer (400 A
minimum).
U. MV Switchgear Compartment Incoming/Outgoing Cables: type and size are to be as

V. MV Switchgear Compartment Cable Terminal Connectors: stress-relieving, epoxy sealed

end, bolted type, complete with all accessories. Manufacturer may propose alternative
arrangement.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
W. MV Switchgear Compartment Potential Indicators: neon indicators are to be provided at

front of each unit, one per phase, using capacitive potential divider to indicate voltage at
switch- disconnector cable terminals.
X. MV switchgear compartment accessories are to include the following:
1. Two N.C. and two N.O. auxiliary contacts on each switch shunt trip release on
fuse-switch combination
2. Earth fault indicator, operated by core-balance type current transformer, located
near and outside cable box/terminations with indicator visible from front and with
automatic reset.
3. Shunt trip release on fuse-switch combination.
Y. Sealed liquid Immersed Power Transformer Type: 3-phase, two-winding, liquid

immersed, sealed type, rated for continuous operation under site ambient conditions at
full rated power, naturally cooled (ONAN), with off-load, manual, externally operated
tap-changer, lockable in all positions on primary side.
Z. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Standards: transformer is to comply with

IEC 60076-1, 60156, 60296, 60354 and 60404-2.
AA. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Construction: variable volume steel tank,
with corrugated wall design forming integral cooling pockets, heavy rolled and welded
steel bottom and base frame and hermetically sealed bolted-on cover. Tank is to be
completely filled with insulating liquid drawn in under vacuum. Tank cover is to have
provision for two thermometers or temperature sensors, lugs for lifting, four lashing lugs
and filler- pipe with valve. Tank is to have drain valve at bottom, earthing bolt on cover
and earthing pad on base-frame, and a rating plate.
BB. Sealed Liquid Immersed power transformer Noise Level: in general A-weighted sound
pressure level measured at 1 m at any direction from transformer is to be less than 56
dBA (without fan).
CC. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Windings: copper or aluminum.
DD. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Bushings: porcelain, tank-cover mounted, or
tank-side mounted to manufacturer's standard, and as approved, with plug-in or bolt-on
arrangements as described hereof.
EE. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Finish: surfaces are to be steel grit blasted,
caustic washed and phosphatized, primed with waterproof primer and finished with
weather-resistant enamel and final coat of air- drying enamel. Alternative finish may be
used subject to approval.
FF. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Characteristics:
1. Rated power (net site rating): As shown on drawings.

3. Type of insulating liquid: mineral oil.
4. Highest Voltage:
a. MV Side (primary): 36 kV.
b. LV Side (secondary): 1.1 kV.
5. Rated voltage:
a. MV side (primary): 33 kV.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
b. LV side (secondary): 400 V.

6. Winding connections: Dyn11 neutral insulated and brought out.
7. Impedance voltage at rated current: 5 % up to 1250 KVA and 6% for higher
ratings.
8. Rated Short Duration Induced and Separate Source AC withstand voltage: 70 kV
(on MV side).
9. Rated Short Duration Induced and Separate Source AC withstand voltage: 3 kV
(on LV side)
10. Time for Separate Source Test at full test voltage: 60 seconds
11. Time for Short Duration induced voltage test: 60 seconds at full test voltage for
any test frequency up to and including twice the rated frequency; or according to
IEC 60076-3 for higher frequencies
12. Rated Lightning Impulse Withstand-Voltage: 170 kV.
13. Short-Circuit Apparent Power of the System at Location: 500 MVA.
14. Duration of short-circuit-withstand: 2 seconds.
15. Terminal connection system:
a. MV Side: open bolted terminals with cable sealing ends (epoxy joints) for
cables from below.
b. LV Side: fully enclosed terminal box with cable sealing ends and removable
non metallic plates, for cables from below.
16. Tap-changer positions: at +/-2.5% and +/-5%
GG. Accessories are to include the following:

1. magnetic liquid level gauge with N.O. low level alarm contact
2. dial type thermometer with N.O. alarm and trip contacts and maximum pointer
3. Pressure relief device with N.O. contact.
The above accessories may be replaced by a digital protective unit for transformer monitoring and
protection against oil level, oil temperature and oil pressure with thermometer for indication of oil
temperature, oil level indicator, 2 N.O. contacts for oil temperature alarm and trip, 2 N.O. contacts
for oil level alarm and trip and one N.O. contact for oil pressure trip functions.
HH. LV Compartment Construction: dead front type, consisting of main circuit breaker,
busbars, outgoing circuit breakers, where shown on the Drawings, instrumentation and
accessories.
II. LV compartment main circuit breaker is to have solid state trip unit with long-time, short-
time and ground-fault pick up and time- delay adjustments and with high instantaneous
over-current trip, to correspond with transformer rating and LV interrupting capacity at
location, time and current coordinated with MV protection on primary side and circuit
breakers or protective devices downstream, generally as described in Division 16 Section
"Switchboards" of the Specification and as shown on the Drawings.
JJ. LV compartment shunt trip device is to be provided, operated by pressure relief device
and thermometer.
KK. LV compartment busbar assembly is to comprise fully insulated set of 3- phase and
neutral copper busbars. Neutral is to be fully rated. Earth bar is to be provided at lower
end of compartment.
LL. LV Compartment Outgoing Circuit Breakers: to be type and rating shown on the
Drawings, time/current coordinated with upstream and downstream LV distribution

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
circuit breakers and generally as described in Division 16 Section "Switchboards" of the

Specification.
MM. LV compartment instrumentation is to include voltmeter, voltmeter selector switch, three

ammeters and maximum demand indicator on incoming phases with associated CTs and
VTs, generally as described in Section 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS of the Specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and components
may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved, provided the
required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the identification of the units
indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings
and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
C. Cable Trenches: ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings.
D. Built-In Items: ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable
trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are
properly installed.
E. Equipment: install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports And Terminations: install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends
and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
Authorities requirements.
H. Earthing: ensure that earthing installation is as described in Division 16 Section

"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 CONNECTIONS

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
A. Equipment: inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to the
Engineer.
B. Components: check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and relays.
C. Before energization carry out at least the following tests:
1. Insulation resistance on MV equipment including busbars, bushings, through

insulators and feeder terminations, using a 5000 V megger, between phases, and
between phase and earth, with control and protection circuit, lamps and similar
components disconnected.
2. Insulation resistance on every cable and insulator, power, control and relay circuit
of the LV systems, using appropriate megger range.
3. HV test, using power frequency HV test set, to 80% of IEC withstand voltage for
1-minute, between phases and phase to earth for each MV switchgear and
transformer, disconnected.
4. HV testing of feeder cables and terminations, as appropriate.
5. Earth pit resistance and earth loop resistance at substation.
6. Contact resistance on switchgear, bus connection and the like, using appropriate
micro-ohm meter.
7. Polarity and ratio checks on CTs.
8. Calibration checks and adjustment on ammeters and voltmeters.
9. Primary and/or secondary injection to check relay operation, using appropriate test
sets.
10. Tripping of circuit, once only, via the protective relay circuits.
11. Power transformer insulating oil test, at nearest laboratory, unless not
recommended by manufacturer or not required by the Engineer.
D. After energization carry out inspection and checking as follows:
1. Close circuit in sequence, load gradually to peak loads and observe overheating,
using appropriate instruments/sensors.
2. Observe overheating of transformer and switchgear and take and record readings
bi-hourly for 72 hours.
3. After a prolonged test run, isolate circuit breakers, inspect isolating contacts, and
main contacts or contact mechanism whilst slowly closing circuit breaker, and take
necessary measurements for comparison with manufacturer's standards.
4. Inspect for loose bolts, switch contacts and the like.
5. Follow manufacturer's instructions for testing and commissioning and record all
readings.
E. Cables: with circuit breaker in disconnected position, ensure that HV testing of feeder
cable and respective termination is carried out as required under cable tests.
F. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and
record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
3.5 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed equipment. Remove paint-splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel in the following:
1. Train Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Employer with at least seven days' advance notice.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
SECTION 16341 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes medium-voltage switchgear and associated auxiliary equipment.
B. Description Of Work: medium voltage (MV) switchgear installations comprise the

following:
1. Ring main unit type MV switchgear.

2. Control power supply.
3. Equipment supports.
4. Earthing of switchgear.
5. Ancillary work.
6. Connection to BACS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers,
etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BACS schedules and /or shown
on the Drawings.

3. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for cable terminations at switchgear.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
1. Manufacturers' catalogues, detailed description of construction, provisions for

extension, compliance with the Standards, dimensions and weights, operating
characteristics, operating curves and error curves (VT, CT) for all switchgear, control
gear, protective gear, metering gear etc.
2. Details of miscellaneous items including pilot lights, cabling or wiring, incoming and
outgoing feeder terminal fittings, supports, labels, interlocks, bracing etc.
to, the following:
1. Plans and elevations, with indication of switchgear mounted components, dimensions

and weights.
3. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and busbars
and types and locations of protective gear (relays, metering instruments, CTs, VTs)
etc.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 16341 - Page 1 of 12

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
4. Schematic and elementary diagrams of control circuits.

6. Physical arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, instrument transformers,
busbars, connections etc.
7. Dimensions and weights of control power supply and other auxiliary equipment or
components.
C. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to equipment manufacture:
1. Schedule of selected circuit breakers, relays and control gear, with complete
identification of each component and its characteristics.
2. Protection coordination scheme, including pick-up settings and time-grading, together
with time-current curves and range of adjustments etc. as required to coordinate with
upstream and downstream protective devices of the complete system.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the relevant
IEC Standards, including the following:
1. Impulse withstand-voltage tests

2. Power frequency withstand-voltage tests.
3. Temperature-rise tests.
4. Short time current tests.
5. Verification of making and breaking capacity.
6. Mechanical endurance/operation tests.
7. Verification of degrees of protection for persons against contact with live and moving
parts.
8. Internal arc tests.
9. Protection degree test to IEC 529.
E. Routine Tests: Each complete switchgear unit is to undergo routine tests at the
manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test reports,
prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed rating of
equipment under site conditions.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: For switchgear to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing switchgear

performance.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following Standards:
1. Common Clauses for HV Switchgear and Control Gear Standards: IEC 60694.
2. A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages above 1 kV
and up to and including 72.5 kV: IEC 62271-200.
3. HV A.C. Circuit Breakers: IEC 62271-100.
4. Insulation Coordination: IEC 60071-1.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
5. HV a.c. Fuse-switch combinations and Fuse-Circuit-Breaker Combinations: IEC

62271-105.
6. A.C. Disconnectors (isolators) and Earthing Switches: IEC 62271-102.
7. HV Switches: IEC 60265-1.
8. Surge Arrestors: IEC 60099-1.
9. Metering and Protective Current Transformers (CTs): IEC 60044-1.
10. Metering and Protective voltage Transformers (VTs): IEC 60044-5.
11. Relays: IEC 60255.
12. Reading Instruments: IEC 60051-1.
13. Watt-Hour Meters: IEC 62052-11.
14. Power Transformers: IEC 60076 (all parts).
15. Insulating Oil: IEC 60296.
16. Sulfur Hexa-Fluoride: IEC 60376.
17. Fuses: IEC 60282-1.
1.5 WARRANTY

1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated.
B. Store so condensation will not form on or in switchgear.
C. Apply temporary heat where required to obtain suitable service conditions.
D. Handle switchgear using factory-installed lifting provisions.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer or

provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear with other construction and room
dimensions. Advise the Engineer in case of conflict.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide spare parts, as recommended by the manufacturer, for one year
maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for emergency replacement
due to accidental breakage or failure. Spare parts are to include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Two sets of each type of lamp, fuse, auxiliary switch, trip coil, control switch,
selector switch, neon indicator and the like.
inspection, testing, operation and maintenance including levering crank, manual charging
handle, manual shutter operator, testing jumpers and HV test bushings, set of rail
extensions, digital micro ohm-meter, set of mobile lifting and handling equipment etc. as
necessary for the type of switchgear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. ABB (Sweden/Germany)
2. G.E. (U.S.A.)
3. G.E.C. (England)
4. Schneider Electric (France)
6. Cuttler Hammer (U.S.A.)
A. Busbars: Air-insulated, high conductivity, electrolytic copper, modular, designed to

withstand worst short-circuit conditions without allowing permissible temperature rise at
ambient conditions to be exceeded, in accordance with the Standards. Busbar connection
from one unit of switchgear to another is to be expansion/contraction compensated, plated
and bolted. Busbar supports are to be flame-retardant, track-resistant, glass polyester,
porcelain or equally reliable fiberglass reinforced epoxy to approved standards.
B. Busbars: Additional epoxy insulation is to be provided to busbars applied by the fluid-dip

process. Busbar connections are to be insulated with easily installed, performed vinyl boots,
secured by nylon hardware.
C. Earth Bus: Copper of not less than minimum size required by the Standards, designed to
withstand worst earth- fault current of power system without showing any signs of thermal
or mechanical damage or degradation. Earth bus is to extend full length of switchgear.
D. Power Cable Terminations: Fixed bolted type, unless otherwise specified, complete with
standard fittings and accessories for connection of incoming and outgoing cables. Cable
compartment is to be designed to permit cables to enter enclosure and connect at respective

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
terminals from below, or as shown on the Drawings. Terminations are to include

appropriate sealing ends, fittings and accessories for type of cable used, including stress
cones or other stress relieving accessories, heat shrinkable sleeving, end boxes or end
bushings and fittings of any kind necessary to support and protect specified cable ends.
E. Potential Indicators: Neon indicators are to be provided at front of each switchgear unit, one
per phase, using capacitive potential divider to indicate voltage state on cable terminals.
F. Interlocks are to be provided on switchgear so that:

1. Access to cable compartments cannot be made unless earthing switch is closed.
2. Earthing switch cannot be opened unless cable compartment is closed.
G. Keys and padlocks are to be provided for manually interlocking two or more units if
required. Electrical and mechanical interlocks are to be provided for automatic safe and
functional operation of the system as shown on the Drawings/Schedules.
H. Earthing facilities are to be provided for earthing and/or short-circuiting the feeder at its
terminals through built-in, safety-interlocked, quick-make earthing switch, without use of
loose attachments.
I. Metal cases of instruments and control devices are to be connected by bare copper
conductors of not less than 2.5mm2 cross-section to nearest earth bar.
J. Ferrules: Cable and wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at
each termination. Colour coding is to be as required by the Regulations and the applicable
Section of the Specification.
K. Test terminal blocks are to be provided inside insulating covered bases for instruments,
instrument transformers, relays etc. in LV compartments.
L. Components are to be interchangeable when of same rating and function.
M. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures and structure are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with two coats of baked
enamel, color standard gray (RAL 7033) unless otherwise approved. Finish is to be vermin
and fungus proof and suitable for worst climatic conditions on site.
N. MV Switchgear Ratings:
1. Rated Voltage: 36 kV.

2. Nominal Service Voltage: 33 kV.
3. Rated Frequency: 60 Hz.
4. Rated One Minute Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (rms) to Earth and Between
Phases: 70 kV.
5. Rated Impulse Withstand-Voltage (1.2/50 micro-sec) (peak): 170 kV.
6. Rated Normal Current of Busbars: (630A) as shown on the Drawings or specified
in article 2.5 "MV Switchgear Assemblies" hereof.
7. Rated Short Time Withstand-Current: 25 kA for 1 second.
8. Rated Peak Withstand-Current: 63 kA.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
2.3 RING MAIN UNIT TYPE SWITCHGEAR
A. Type: Indoor metal-enclosed type, factory built and dispatched as a complete assembly.
B. Insulation type:
1. SF6 switching and insulated copper busbars.
C. Components: Unit is to consist of two metal enclosed network ring main switch-
disconnectors and outgoing fuse- switch combination, as shown on the Drawings, with cable
terminal fittings behind dead-front panels, and front- mounted switchgear operation, control,
indication and metering devices.
D. Degree of Protection: IP 65 to IEC 298 and IEC 529 for MV switchgear and parts and IP41
for enclosure.
E. Switch-Disconnector: General purpose, 3-pole, load- break, short-circuit make, SF6

interrupter type, category B to IEC 265, providing positive break indication, as defined in
IEC 129, with contact position indicating device and reliable method of preventing any earth
leakage currents passing from terminals of one side to terminals of other side of the switch-
disconnector when in the open position.
F. Switch-disconnector operation is to be by handles at front of unit. Switching mechanism is

to be manual, spring charged, quick-break, with speed of switching independent of operator.
Switch-disconnector is to have on and off positions, lockable in either position. Reliable
mechanical indicator is to be provided for indicating the two positions.
G. Switch-disconnector earthing switch of the quick-make type, front operated (operation being
independent of operator), is to close onto cable terminals and be interlocked such that it will
close only after load-break switch- disconnector is opened. Earth blades are to be visible
through an inspection window. Access to cable compartment is to be prevented unless
earthing switch is closed.
H. Switch-Disconnector Ratings:
1. Rated Normal Current: 630 A.

2. Rated Short-Circuit Making Capacity: 25 kA.
3. Rated Short Time Current: 25 kA for 1 sec.
I. Fuse-Switch Combination: 3-pole, trip-free, of similar construction to switch-disconnector,

with set of three air- insulated fuses, in accordance with IEC 420. Automatic trip switching
is to be by fuse striker pins which actuate common trip-bar in switch mechanism. Once
operated, striker pins remain in ejected position, preventing re-closure of switch until fuse
has been replaced. Single phasing is not to be possible. Fuse-switch combination is to have
two earthing switches to earth both sides of fuses simultaneously by means of quick-make
earthing switches, interlocked to operate after main switch is opened.
J. MV Fuses: High-breaking capacity, totally enclosed, cartridge type fuse-links, current

limiting, with striker pins to cause switch to open. Fuses are to comprise fuse links and fuse
bases insulated to respective standards.
K. Fuse-Switch Combination Ratings:
1. Rated Normal Current: 400 A.

2. Rated Prospective Short-Circuit Breaking Current: 25 kA.
3. Rated Prospective Short-Circuit (peak) Making Current: 63 kA.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
4. Rated Current of Fuse Link: 100 A.
L. Accessories are to include the following:
1. 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts on each switch.

2. Shunt trip release on fuse-switch combination.
3. Automatic reset earth fault indicator operated by core-balance type CT located near
and outside cable terminals and visible from front.
4. Insulating rubber gloves, earthing equipment, fuse tongs, schematic diagram with
equivalent ratings and references, operating handle etc. placed inside compartment.
2.4 METERING INSTRUMENTS - INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
A. Instruments Generally: Housed in enameled, square steel cases for switchboard flush
installation, size 96 x 96 mm with 5 mm frontal, protected and sealed white background
dials with black pointers (in general) and anti- parallax shadow-proof glass covers.
Accuracy of instruments is to be class 1.5 unless otherwise specified. Moving parts are to
be damped, revolving on hard-stone bases, with zero adjustment screw.
B. A.C. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, operating from VT secondaries, and with the following
characteristics:
1. Measuring Range: 36 kV with red line marked on nominal voltage, 90 degrees

decimal scale.
2. Overload Factor: 1.2 times rated voltage continuous and twice rated voltage for 1
minute.
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position, rotary type, with cam-operated contacts, permitting
line-to-line and line- to-neutral voltage readings, and with off position.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, operating from CT secondary, and with the following
characteristics:
1. Measuring Range :1.25 CT primary amps, 90 degrees decimal scale

2. Overload Capacity: 1.2 times measuring range continuous, twice measuring range for
2 minutes, and fifty times measuring range for 1 second.
E. Power Factor Meters: Totally enclosed, 3-phase, electro- dynamic type, with cross-coil
meter movement and accuracy of 1% from at least 20% - 100% rated current at rated
voltage.
1. Measuring Range: 0.1 conductive-unity-0.1 capacitive
F. Current Transformers (CTs): Indoor dry type (cast- resin), with the following
characteristics:
1. Metering (general): Class 1, 5 A secondary.

2. Kilowatt-Hour-Metering: Class 0.5, 5 A secondary (check with power authority).
G. Rated primary current, core size and accuracy limit factors are to be determined in
accordance with nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level and burden. CT is to
perform under specified conditions without exceeding accuracy limit. Submit error curves
for approval. Thermal short-circuit rating is to be 100 times rated primary current with
dynamic short-circuit rating of 2.5 times thermal rating.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
H. Voltage Transformers (VTs): Magnetic, single-phase, indoor, dry type (cast-resin), with the
1. Rated Voltage:
a. Primary: 33/SQRT3 kV.
b. Secondary: 110/SQRT3 V.
2. Accuracy Class: 0.5.
3. Rated Voltage Factor: 1.2 continuous, 1.9 for 30 seconds.
I. Check associated burden and ensure VT can perform satisfactorily under specified
conditions. Submit error curves for approval.
2.5 MV SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES
A. MV switchgear assembly is to comprise the following
1. Reference: RMU.
2. MV Switchgear Type: Ring main unit
3. MV Switchgear Assembly is to comprise the following:
a. Two of incoming feeder unit(s).
b. Two of outgoing feeder unit(s).
c. Instrumentation/metering unit.
B. Incoming Feeder Unit each is to comprise the following:
1. Set of copper busbars, rated 630 A.

2. Switch disconnector
3. Earthing switch.
4. Set of cable termination and accessories.
C. Outgoing feeder unit is to comprise the following:
1. Set of copper busbars, rated equal to that stated in subparagraph 2.5B.1 above.
2. Fuse switch disconnector 400 A
1. Earthing switch.
2. Set of cable termination and accessories.
D. Instrument and metering unit is to comprise the following:
1. Set of copper busbars, rated equal to that stated in subparagraph 2.5B.1 above.
2. VT unit comprising three single phase VTs (Y-Y) with set of fuses 0.3 A, for
protection.
3. 3 CTs for consumer metering, as required.
4. LV terminal blocks and protective fuses or c.b.
5. Voltmeter with selector switch.
Unit is to comply with the Local Power Authority's requirements for consumer
metering.
2.6 MICROPROCESSOR BASED METERING AND MONITORING UNIT
A. General: A microprocessor based metering unit is to be provided on the incoming and/or

outgoing feeder panels of the MV switchgear as specified in items of Paragraph "MV

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
Switchgear assemblies" above and/or as shown on the drawings. Unit is to be capable of

monitoring and displaying the functions listed below as well as providing the protection
function indicated and the capability to municate data. Unit is to be similar to Cutler
Hammer type IQ DP-4000 or other equal and approved.
B. Direct reading metered values are to be displayed by the unit as follows:
1. AC amperes in each phase, +/-0.5% accuracy

2. AC voltage, phase to phase, phase to neutral, +/-0.5% accuracy
3. Megawatts, +/-1% accuracy
4. Megavars, +/-1% accuracy
5. Megavoltamperes, +/-1% accuracy
6. Power factor, +/-2% accuracy
7. Frequency, +/-0.1 Hz accuracy
8. Megawatt demand (5,10,15,30 minute interval field programmable), +/-1% accuracy
9. Megawatt , megavars and VA hours, +/-1% accuracy
10. %THD , +/- 1%
C. Control power is to be drawn from the monitored incoming AC line terminal connections.
Device is to have non-volatile memory and not require battery backup. In the event of a
power failure, the device is to retain preset parameters.
D. Unit is to allow user to disable undesired values or functions and to later reactivate them if
required. In the event of trip or alarm condition, a built-in reset button is to allow a manual
reset of the unit. Unit is also to be capable of being remotely reset via its communication
port.
E. Addressable communication card is to be provided, capable of transmitting all data,

including trip data, over a two wire local area network to the BACS (refer to Division 15
specifications).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable trenches
or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level, before
grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends and
termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power A's
requirements.
H. Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in Division 16 Section "Grounding

and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
B. Diagram and Instructions: Frame under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.
1. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control

and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
2. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of the maintenance manual.
3. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
components, and major loads.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to the Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness and as recommended by the
manufacturer and check phasing of buses, contact alignment and clearances.
C. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
D. Before energization carry out at least the following tests:
1. Insulation resistance on busbars (with circuit breakers in disconnected position),

circuit breakers, bushings and insulators, feeder terminals etc., using at least a 5 kV
megger for MV circuits and a 1000 V megger on all control and protection circuits,
with relays, lamps and the like components disconnected, to ensure satisfactory
insulation resistance as recommended by the Standards and approved practices.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
2. High voltage tests on busbars, circuit breakers in disconnected position, switches,

VTs and insulators, by applying HV a.c. test voltage between phases and phase to
earth at 80% of the IEC voltage withstand test for 1- minute.
3. Resistance across closed contacts of circuit breakers using appropriate micro-ohm
meter.
4. Polarity check and ratio tests for CTs.
5. Calibration checks and adjustment for ammeters and voltmeters.
6. Primary and/or secondary injection tests to check relay operation, using appropriate
test sets, followed by tripping of circuit-breaker once only, through its protective
relay circuit.
E. Cables: With circuit breaker in disconnected position, ensure that HV testing of feeder cable
and respective termination is carried out as required under cable tests.
F. After energization carry out inspection and checking as follows:
1. Breakers are to be closed, one at a time, with as little load on the feeder as possible;
check meters as load is increased and any indication of overheating detected by
appropriate instruments or sensors.
2. Open and withdraw circuit breaker after a prolonged test run, inspect and check
circuit breaker conditions, isolating contacts, contacts on all instruments and control
switches, connections at terminal blocks etc., busbar connections and busbars for any
indication of overheating; check for loose connections and bolts etc. and finally re-
apply megger tests to ensure same quality of insulation as before energization.
3. Close circuit breaker slowly, while in the disconnected position and inspect contacts
and/or contact movement and compare with design figures.
G. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and
H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after the
end of the Defects Liability Period, perform an infrared scan of switchgear assembly. Make
bus joints and connections accessible to a portable scanner and perform scanning during a
period of normal working load as advised by Employer.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform one additional follow-up infrared scan at same
locations as before, 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or
detects significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
scanning device used for electrical distribution equipment.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all connections
checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed switchgear. Remove paint-splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
installation. Refer to Division 1.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
SECTION 16350 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes distribution and power transformers with medium-voltage

primaries.

2. Division 16 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for transformers integral to
substations.
3. Division 16 Section "Busways" for busway connections between transformers and
secondary distribution equipment.
4. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for cable terminations at
transformers.
5. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays,
transducers, etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specifications, BMS schedules and /or
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include full technical data on features, components, ratings, and
performance for each type of transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections,
and elevation views. Show minimum clearances and installed devices and features.
Submit Manufacturers' catalogues.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting
field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the products

D. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the relevant
IEC Standards.
E. Routine Tests: Each transformer unit is to undergo routine tests at the manufacturer's
works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test reports, prior to
shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed rating of
equipment under site conditions.
F. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 16350 - Page 1 of 7

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
1. Plans and elevations, with dimensions and weights.

3. One-line diagram of power system.
G. Sound-Level Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's sound-level tests applicable

to equipment for this Project.
requirements.
I. Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing transformers

performance.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following Standards:
1. Common clauses for HV switchgear and control gear standards: IEC 694.
2. Power transformers: IEC 60076. 60076-11.
C. Switchboard shall be located in a seismic Zone 2A area. Switchboard design and

installation shall prevent any damage due to a Zone 2A event.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing

to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
A. Temporary Heating: For indoor, dry-type transformers, apply temporary heat according
to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit
throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is
continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of transformers with other construction.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete, reinforcement,

and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. A.B.B. (Sweden/Germany)
2. Cuttler Hammer (U.S.A.)
3. France Transfo (France)
4. G.E. (U.S.A.)
5. GEC Alsthom (France)
7. Trafo-Union (Germany)
or other equal and approval.
2.2 DRY TYPE CAST RESIN POWER TRANSFORMER
A. Type: 3-phase, indoor type, two winding, solventless cast epoxy resin, vacuum pressure
impregrated windings, with minimum class F insulation on inner LV cores and class B on
outer MV cores, rated for continuous operation under worst site ambient conditions at full
load, and complying with IEC 60726-11. Temperature rise is not to exceed 70 deg. C
over an average ambient of 40 deg. C for class B insulation and 90 deg. C over an average
ambient of 40 deg. C for class F insulation.
B. Insulation and Encapsulation: Humidity resistant, explosion and fire-resistant, self-

extinguishing, tropicalized, giving non-toxic gases in the event of fire.
C. Tapping is to be provided on MV side by means of re-connectable links (off-circuit),

giving 5 tapping position +/-2.5% tapping on transformers with 6% impedance voltage .
D. Rubber sound isolation pads are to be provided between core and coil assemblies, and
between base and housing.
E. All electrical transformers shall be provided with roller anti vibration pads, which shall
be placed under transformers’ rollers in order to avoid the transmission of vibration from
the transformers to the surrounding environment.
F. Sound level : All transformers with their accessories shall be designed and manufactured
to reduce noise and vibration to acceptable level. The average surface sound level of
transformers shall not exceed 66 db (maximum sound level) for the 2000 kVA
transformer. The transformer shall be subjected to noise measurement as per IEC 60076-
10.
G. Cooling fans, where specified, are to permit 30% increase in rated power.
H. Mounting and Handling: Transformer base and structure are to have lifting hooks or lugs,
towing and lashing eyes or lugs and provision for roller wheels.
I. Temperature monitoring is to be provided by externally mounted tripping units giving

alarm and trip at two stages with about 20 deg. C temperature difference, actuated by

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
three embedded thermistor sensors in LV windings (hot-spot). Additional thermal

monitoring/control is to be provided for cooling fan operation.
J. Terminals: Arranged as described in paragraph 2.2K hereof and/or as shown on the

Drawings, and are to be compatible for copper or aluminum cable termination.
K. Earthing bolts or copper pads are to be provided on main frame of transformer. Earthing
busbars are to be provided on LV and MV sides of housing.
L. Housing: Sheet steel construction, IP 21 with provision for roof fans for indoor
installation.
M. Characteristics:
1. Rated Power (net without fans): as shown on drawing.

3. Rated Voltage:
a. MV Side (primary): 33 kV.
b. LV Side (secondary): 415 Voltage V.
4. Winding Connections: Dyn11 neutral insulated and brought out.
5. Impedance Voltage at Rated Current: 5 % up to 1250 kVA and 6% up to 2500
kVA.
6. Rated Power Frequency Withstand-Voltage: 70 kV.
7. Lightning Impulse Withstand-Voltage: 170 kV.
8. Short-Circuit Apparent Power of the System at Location: 500 MVA.
9. Duration of Short-Circuit-Withstand: 25 kA for 1 seconds.
10. Terminal Connection System:
a. MV Side: cable sealing ends, bolted, from above.
b. LV Side: cable glands and fittings, bolted from above as shown on
drawings.
N. Accessories are to include the following:
1. Earthing switch, fault-making type, on MV side of housing, interlocked with door,

visible from outside the enclosure, with trip contact for tripping MV circuit breaker
before closing earthing switch.
2. Fans and fans control for extra rating of transformer.
3. Four re-orientable roller rim wheels and attachment accessories.
O. The transformer shall be located in a seismic Zone 2A area and shall be designed for
Uniform Building Code Zone 2A. The transformer design and installation shall prevent
any damage due to a Zone 2A event.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings
and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable
trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are
properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends
and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
Authorities requirements.
H. Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in Division 16 Section

"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to Engineer.
B. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
C. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
D. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's

tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is suitable for
energizing.
E. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated and
signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
F. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement.
G. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and
installation.
H. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's
1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity,

and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been
removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and covers for dry-
type transformers.
2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's
published torque values.
3. Insulation Resistance: Perform meg-ohmmeter tests of primary and secondary
winding to winding and winding to ground.
4. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes.
5. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from
20 deg C standard.
6. Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured ratios
deviating more than 0.5 percent from calculated or measured ratio for an adjacent
coil is not acceptable.
7. Winding Resistance: Measure for windings at nominal tap setting. Measured
resistance, deviating more than 1 percent, from that of adjacent windings, is not
acceptable.
8. Liquid-Filled Transformer, Insulation Power-Factor Test: Determine overall
dielectric loss and power factor for windings' insulation. Limit test voltage to line-
to-ground voltage of windings being tested.
I. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data.
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified
requirements.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and installation
requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other

spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original
finish.
B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment

throughout normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and secondary voltages
and tap settings and submit with test results.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for
the following:
1. Service disconnecting means.

2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.
3. Motor circuit protector for fire pump.

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle
switches used for disconnecting means.
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for circuit breakers.
C. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with
one set of approved Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated.
to, the following:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances

and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Current and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.

C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - Page 1 of 4

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1

with requirements.
D. Samples: Submit samples of each type of equipment for approval, unless otherwise agreed
in writing by the Engineer.
E. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit
breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
A. Comply with related Standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other
construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain
required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Spare Fuses for Fused Switches: 10%.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Cutler-Hammer. (U.S.A.)
2. G.E. (U.S.A.)
3. G.E.C. - Henley Ltd. (England)
5. Westinghouse (U.S.A.)
or other equal and approved.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.2 SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (DISCONNECTING SWITCH)
A. Rating: 500 V, 2, 3 or 6 pole, load break, short-circuit make, in accordance with IEC 60947-
3, utilization category 22 for heating and lighting loads, category 23 for motor circuits, and
with ampere rating shown on the Drawings.
B. Design: non-fused, air-break switch disconnector, single throw, safety type, housed in
separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on each pole.
C. Operating Mechanism: quick-make, quick-break, independent of operator, with external

operating handle mechanically interlocked to prevent opening the door unless switch is in
open position. Switch disconnector is to have provision for bypassing interlock. Position
of handle is to be positive and clearly indicated on cover.
D. Enclosure: general purpose sheet steel for indoor use IP 42, and weather-proof type cast-
metal or sheet steel for outdoor installations IP 65, unless otherwise required or shown on
the Drawings. Locking of operating handle is to be possible in open and closed positions.
2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breaker: Refer to respective type specifications in Division 16 Section

"Switchboards".
B. Enclosures: Meet environmental conditions of installed location in accordance with IEC

529.
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosures

before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of equipment. Exact locations

are to be determined from detail drawings. Any condition that would place equipment in an
unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer.
B. Waterproof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and connection to

conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
C. Damaged Equipment: Reject damaged equipment. Protect equipment against damage after
installation and until handed over.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and
indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values.
A. Visual Inspection: Equipment is to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
B. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.
C. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switch Equipment.
2. Bypass/isolation switch.
1. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer

switches for fire pumps.
2. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps" for automatic
transfer switches for fire pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and
devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.
C. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch,

power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer
switch and bypass/isolation switch.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply with
requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit closing
and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance with
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List
all factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions, including
software, where applicable.
TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 - Page 1 of 5

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy the
Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch and related
control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with IEC 60947-6.
D. Comply with UL 1008, NFPA 70 and 110.
E. Comply with NFPA 99.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Obtain automatic transfer switch equipment from one of the
following:
1. Conventional Transfer Switches:

a. Asco (U.S.A.)
b. Caterpillar, Inc.; Engine Division. (U.S.A.)
c. Cummins Corp. (U.S.A.)
d. Kohler Co. (U.S.A.)
e. Socomec (France)
2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH EQUIPMENT (ATS)
A. Type: Conforming to IEC 60947-6 or UL 1008 and to applicable standards. Wall or floor
mounted, galvanized sheet steel cubicle of equal construction to control cubicle, comprising
double throw single switch and controls necessary for automatic transfer of power supply
from normal source to stand-by source, voltage and frequency sensing control relay and
time delay relays to signal generator start and stop, auxiliary switches and indicating lights
etc. as necessary for the required operation of the system. ATS is to be class PC utilization
category AC-33A and having rated short time withstand and short circuit current to IEC
60947-01 and based on short circuit level at equipment location.
B. Operation: When voltage and/or frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable setting
(80- 100%) of normal supply, for an adjustable period of 1 - 300 seconds, power failure
relay is to actuate engine starting control, whilst normal mains contactor is to open. After an
adjustable period of 0 - 10 seconds from sensing stabilized rated voltage and frequency of
generator at the ATS, (Voltage pick-up adjustable from 85% to 100% nominal); frequency
pick-up adjustable from 90% to 100% nominal, the emergency contactor is to close. Upon
restoration of normal mains supply to above the preset limits, adjustable between 90% and

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
100% of rated voltage and/or frequency, for an adjustable preset period of 2 - 30 minutes,
the ATS is to transfer the load to normal position.
C. Engine Shutdown: Initiate after retransfer of the load to normal source. (Refer to generator
set controls upon shut-down).
D. ATS dedicated for fire pumps are to meet the requirement of NFPA 20, installation of
“Central Fire Pumps”, NFPA 70. National Electrical Code” and are to be listed by the
underwriter laboratories UL-508, “Industrial Control Equipment”. Integrated fire pump
ATSE and control panel is acceptable.
E. Selector Switches are to be provided as follows:
1. Operating selector switch is to include the following:

a. Normal: Generator set is set for automatic operation and the generator set starts
if a power outage occurs, as described above.
b. Test: Stimulates a power outage, starts and runs the generating set as Normal
position.
c. Stop: Shuts down the generating set and prevents it from starting. This is used
when servicing the generator.
2. Another selector switch is to be provided for two positions, "With load" and "Without
load" for testing or exercising:
a. "With Load": the generating set is to carry the load during testing or exercising
periods.
b. "Without Load": generating set is to start but not assume the load.
F. Pilot Lights are to indicate the positions of ATS.
G. Instruments are to include voltmeter and ammeter with selector switches.
H. Automatic Retransfer: Selector switch marked “Auto”, “Manual” is to be provided. On

manual position, automatic retransfer is disabled, while it is enabled in the auto position.
I. Wiring: Moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper conductors,
modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with suitable numbering strips
and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Flexible wiring is to be used on all
hinged/draw-out components.
J. Connections are to be made at a front terminal block with no live metal exposed. Power
cables are to terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized to receive
specified cables. Cable glands and gland plates are to be provided.
K. Metal Cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected by flexible
protective conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar or terminal.
L. Earthing: Earthing bar is to be provided for connection of protective earthing conductors,

using set-screw or bolted anti-turn pressure terminations.
M. Ferrules: Wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.3 ATS WITH MANUAL BYPASS SWITCHES
A. Provide Manual Bypass Switches to combine manual and automatic transfer operation with
a drawout isolation system. Bypass switch is to consist of non-automatic Kirk-key
interlocked switches or circuit breakers, fully rated, manually operated and rated for same
loads as automatic transfer switch.
B. Bypass switch is to provide bypass to either normal or emergency source by use of a

selector switch and a permanently mounted external lever, mechanically interlocked to
prevent paralleling of sources.
C. An engine start switch is to be provided to allow generator set to be started when bypass is
on emergency sources.
D. Bypass switch is to be of the make-before-break type. A dead source lockout is to prevent

any possibility of bypassing the load to an unenergized source.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounted Switch: Level and anchor unit to floor.
B. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."
3.2 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS
A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications
requirements of transfer switches as recommended by the manufacturer. Increase raceway
sizes at no additional cost to Employer if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment as indicated and as required by the Standards.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing in addition to tests

recommended by the manufacturer:
1. Before energizing equipment, after transfer-switch products have been installed:

a. Measure insulation resistance phase-to phase and phase-to-ground with
insulation-resistance tester. Include control circuits. Use test voltages and
procedure recommended by manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
c. Inspect For:
1) Physical damage.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2) Proper installation and connection

3) Integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
d. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
e. Perform manual transfer operation.
2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function

for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
b. Verify time-delay settings.
c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
d. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-
switch operations.
e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,
transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and
engine cool-down and shutdown sequence.
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each
tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean equipment internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Main Distribution Board(s) work for low voltage (LV) distribution,
ancillary mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and supports.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.
C. Requirements of the following Sections apply to this Section:

3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MDB: Main distribution board.
B. CT: Current Transformer.
C. VT: Voltage Transformer.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. RMS: Root mean square.
F. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and
may be used interchangeably: "Switchboard" and "Main Distribution Board".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards including
all components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating compliance with the
Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article, equipment characteristics, details of
construction, operating data, dimensions and weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous
items including incoming and outgoing feeder terminal arrangement, connections at busbars,
isolating, earthing, interlocks, control devices, indicating and metering instruments etc.
Boards are to be factory assembled and tested and shipped as complete package (s).
to, the following:
SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - Page 1 of 14

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
1. Plans and elevations with indication of built-on equipment, exact dimensions, and
weights.
2. Arrangement of boards inside rooms allocated, indicating spaces and clearances.
3. Arrangement of equipment inside board.
4. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and busbars
and types and locations of protective gear (relays, instruments, CTs, VTs etc.)
5. Schematics and wiring diagrams of control circuits. Differentiate between
6. Foundation details and grouting holes installation details.
7. Arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, terminal fittings, instruments, busbar
connections etc.
8. Utility Company’s metering provisions with indication of approval by utility
company.
9. Mimic-bus diagram.
C. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to placing orders for
equipment manufacture:
1. Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range, features and

characteristics, short- circuit ratings, time-current curves etc.
2. Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-fault
currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based on specific
coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective
short-circuit currents at various points.
3. Test methods on site and references, including testing equipment for microprocessor
controlled trip units.
D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish, for color selection.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide
evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer’s type and routine test
records, in accordance with the Standards specified in "Quality assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
H. Manufacturer’s field service report.
I. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final main distribution board load
connections have been made, for record.
J. Maintenance Data: For main distribution boards and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 include
the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for main distribution boards and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with minimum five years of

successful installation experience on projects utilizing main distribution boards units similar
to those required for this project.
B. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of main

distribution boards, of types, sizes, and capacities required, and whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:
1. IEC 60439-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies: Type-Tested
and Partially Type-Tested Assemblies.
2. IEC 60947-1: Low voltage switchgear and control gear part 1 : general rules.
3. IEC 60947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Circuit Breakers.
4. Relevant IEC Standard for other components, where not otherwise specified.
5. IEC 60831-1&2 for power factor correction capacitors.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable local regulations/code

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These will have precedence over other
codes/standards nominated for the project, unless otherwise approved in writing.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for main
distribution boards, including clearances between main distribution boards, and adjacent
surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
F. Seismic Zone: Comply with Code requirements for seismic risk zone 2A, as per UBC code.
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. Deliver
MDBs and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate
handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for MDBs
and components to protect equipment from damage. Inspect equipment to ensure that no
damage has occurred during shipment.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect
from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover main distribution boards to provide protection
from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside main distribution boards; install electric heating (250-
W per section) to prevent condensation.
D. Handle MDBs carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Remove
packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of excessive
hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained therein. Do
not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and
structures to provide pathway for moving main distribution boards into place.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer or

provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
C. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000 m.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of main distribution boards and components with other
construction and electrical work, including conduit, piping, equipment, adjacent surfaces,
raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
1.9 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Contractor is to submit a complete coordination and protection study for all the electrical
system. The coordination shall be fully detailed to show the short circuit currents at each
panel location. The study shall show that the protective devices provided do ensure the
proper protection and coordination. Any breakers not satisfying the study shall be replaced
by proper ones to ensure proper system operation. The coordination study has to be
associated with a coordination study for earth fault currents throughout the system to ensure
proper selection of earth fault setting for all breakers to ensure discrimination and proper
protection of all system components.
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency replacement
and/or one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:
1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable (consumable)
contact set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and similar
devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection
and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as appropriate for
type of switchgear supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. A.B.B (Germany)
2. Cuttler - Hammer (U.S.A.)
3. G.E. (U.S.A.)
4. Merlin Gerin (France)
5. Moeller (Germany)
A. Generally: Main distribution boards are to be dead-front type, metal enclosed, multi-cubicle,
floor mounted, free standing, with 1000V rated insulation voltage, and 600 V rated
operational voltage, with fixed or draw-out switchgear, manually or manually and
electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings, with matching vertical sections to form a
continuous integral and rigid structure. Outgoing sections are to be of equal width.
B. Generally: Coordinate with Building Automation and Control System (BMS) supplier and
provide all necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, etc, necessary for the functions
specified in the BMS schedules and/or shown on the Drawings.
C. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet steel
enclosures, minimum thickness 2 mm, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and
finished with thermal polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating, gray color (RAL 7703
or ANSI 61) to approval. Switchgear is to be vermin, dust and rodent proof, IP42 protection
to IEC 60529 for indoor installations, with adequate lifting means and base-frames and
capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to floor without additional sills.
D. Ventilation: Compartments are to be ventilated, by approved methods complying with the

Standards.
E. Main distribution boards are to have a minimum short circuit withstand current rating 25%
higher or next available standard to the calculated short circuit at respective point of
application in the network and/or as shown on the drawings, for short circuit duration of (1
sec) to the approval of the Engineer.
F. Fastenings between structural members are to be bolted.
G. Extension of structure and busbars is to be possible at either end of switchboard for form 3
and form 4 type switchboards.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
H. Arrangement is to permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to enter enclosure as
indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without inconvenience to
installation or maintenance.
I. Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment are to be provided for
extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from enclosures as appropriate for type of
switchgear.
J. Spare and space positions are defined as follows:
1. Spare position: Fully equipped enclosure with switchgear

2. Space position: Fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear.
K. Busbars: Site rated for normal current as shown on the Drawings or at least site rated to
same rating of main circuit breaker frame size, and braced for a symmetrical rms short-
circuit duty as specified. Busbars are to be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature
rise to allowable insulation or equipment temperature ratings, and to maximum 90 deg C.
Connections and buswork are to be bolted with copper alloy hardware and are to be
accessible for inspection and maintenance unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer. Contact surfaces are to be Electro-silver plated.
L. Connections from busbar to switchgear are to be rated to carry full continuous current rating
of switchgear frame and are to be insulated.
M. Full size neutral is to be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus is to be insulated and
separate from earth bus and connected to it with removable links, at every bus section.
Links are to be of the same cross-section of the earth bus.
N. Earth bus is to extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance with
the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at each end), and
required number of feeder protective earth connectors.
O. Earth bus is to be half size of phase buses
P. Switchboard Type: Switchboard(s) are to be of the following type(s):
1. Form 3b.
2. Incoming: Withdrawable type PACB.
3. Tie: Withdrawable type.
4. Outgoing: Fixed MCCB type unless otherwise shown on drawings.
Q. Withdrawable metal enclosed circuit breaker section is to consist of compartmented unit(s),

stationary part with rear busbar and cable connection compartments and front draw-out
circuit breaker assembly. Partitions between sections are to be bolted steel plate and
partitions between compartments are to be tough solid insulating removable bolted barriers.
Each unit is to have hinged lockable front door with grip-handle and door mounted
instrumentation.
R. Drawout circuit breaker assembly is to have disconnecting contacts, wheels and interlocks
to prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open position, and to
prevent closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three positions (connect, test,
disconnect). Racking mechanism and rail assembly are to be approved worm and lever
mechanism. It is to be possible to close the unit door with breaker in any of the three
positions and when removed. External position indicator is to be provided. Fixed
disconnecting primary contacts are to be accessible and replaceable from front and are to be

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
silver plated copper. Moving primary disconnect contacts are to consist of self-aligning,
silver plated, spring pressure, finger-cluster, copper contact fitted on line and load studs of
circuit breaker.
S. Pull Sections: An additional cable pull section is to be provided, depending on actual

configuration shown on the Drawing, and subject to Engineer’s approval.
T. Front and rear accessible, front and rear aligned, individually mounted fixed MCCB
distribution sections as basic construction for form 3 and form 4 switchboards, are to be
compartmentalized construction, consisting of front modular circuit breaker compartments,
busbar system compartments and rear cable termination compartments (as per the form type
selected), with insulating barriers between front compartments and busbar compartments
and between rear compartments and busbar compartment (removable for maintenance).
MCCBs are to be closely coupled to busbars (to minimize chances of bus-side faults), and to
rear cable terminals, through compatibly frame-sized insulated connectors. MCCB modules
are to be covered on the front, by recessed frame-type bolted covers, 1.5 mm minimum
thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides and rear are to be covered with
removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.
U. Switchboard shall be located in a seismic Zone 2A area. Switchboard design and installation
shall prevent any damage due to a Zone 2A event.
2.3 POWER AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (PACBs)
A. Type: Encased in high strength, high temperature resistant, molded plastic insulating
materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosure at point of
application, tested to approved standards, manually operated for normal functions, and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Trip power is to be derived from main
power circuit, with sufficient tripping energy to reliably trip circuit breaker. Fixed mounted
circuit breaker is to be rear connected.
B. Construction: Manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings,

with two-step, spring charged, stored energy mechanism, quick-make, quick-break type,
electrically and mechanically trip-free, to prevent maintaining circuit breaker closed against
over-current condition whether under manual or automatic operation. Electrically operated
circuit breakers are to have integrally mounted, spring charging motor mechanism
automatically recharged upon closing. Both manually or manually and electrically operated
circuit breakers are to have mechanical built-in charging lever and are to include open and
close direct acting push buttons. Stored energy provision is to allow open/close/open
sequence of operation without use of external energy. Circuit breaker is to have arc-
quenching device on each pole and replaceable arcing contacts.
C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip device, where
required, control power is to be 120V ac obtained from in-built MDB control power
transformer connected and fused on line-side of circuit breaker. Where shunt trip and/or
under voltage release are required, a sufficient capacitor trip device is to be provided.
D. Rating: 3-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 750 V rated insulation voltage,
600 V rated operational voltage, with continuous current rating (frame size) as shown on the
Drawings, ranging between 1600 and 5000 A (1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000 A and 5000
A), , fully rated (100%) for service under worst site conditions. Breakers are to be rated for
a symmetrical rms service short-circuit breaking capacity as shown on the Drawings, to IEC
60947-2 sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity) at specified voltage and
frequency, meeting IEC 60947-2, sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
utilization category B), tested in an enclosure substantially the same as the enclosure in
which they are to be installed.
E. Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for
compatible frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and with
transparent, sealable cover. Trip unit is to measure sinusoidal and non–sinusoidal current
wave forms (fundamental to thirteenth harmonic) by continuously sampling each phase
through out every cycle. Trip unit is to be direct acting trip device, current transformer
operated, with flux transfer shunt trip that requires no external power. It is to have
adjustable current setting (0.5 - 1.0 times trip unit rating) with adjustable long-time delay,
short-time pick-up and short-time delay, earth-fault pick-up and time delay instantaneous
over current pickup. Current setting range is to be by means of replaceable trip-units within
the maximum frame size rating. Once removed, circuit breaker is to remain in the trip-free
position. Earth-fault trip is to be adjustable, range 10% to 60% of normal current rating of
the circuit breaker and a maximum of 1200A, with adjustable time delay between 0.1 and
0.5 seconds. Short time delay is to be adjustable in steps, 2 - 9 times current setting, with
pre-settable or adjustable time band having maximum delay of 0.3 to 0.5 seconds.
Instantaneous trip is to be adjustable in steps at least 2 – 13 times the trip unit rating. Over-
ride protection is to allow full sensitivity up to interrupting capacity of Circuit Breaker.
F. Trip Unit shall have the metering functions for each phase comprising:
1. Voltage.
2. Frequency.
3. Energy.
4. Total power.
5. Peak power demand.
G. Trip Unit shall have protective relays including:
1. Over-voltage and under voltage.

2. Voltage unbalance.
3. Current unbalance
4. Reverse power.
H. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker operation,
long time over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short time over current
trip, ground fault trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to count long time, short
time, instantaneous and ground fault trips.
I. Position Indicators: Positive with trip indication target. Target indicator is to be mechanical
and is to give indication even when control power has been lost.
J. Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for every phase.
Current sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall be encased in epoxy
filled plastic housing to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally
mounted in breakers.
K. Neutral Current Transformer: Provide on the neutral conductor of each main, tie or outgoing
circuit having earth fault protection. Rating and characteristics of the neutral current
transformer are to be suitable for proper operation of the earth fault protection system.
L. Circuit breaker accessories are to include the following:

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
1. Padlocking or key-locking provisions for all positions (disconnected, test, connected,

closing blocking, open)
2. Overload, short-circuit, and ground fault trip LEDS
3. Trip indicator and reset button
4. Operations counter.
5. On/off pilot lights.
6. Shunt-trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control.
7. Bell alarm for remote over-current trip indication.
M. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for remote
monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.
N. Electrical Interlock: If electrical interlock is required between power air circuit breakers (as
shown on the drawings), the mechanical closing button of the circuit breaker is to be
disabled in the connect position and an additional electrical push button is to be provided for
the closing of the circuit breaker through the breaker’s shunt close coil. The electrical
interlock is to be provided on both shunt trip and close coils of the circuit breaker in order to
perform simultaneous tripping and inhibit closing functions on the interlocked breaker.
2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. MCCBs generally are to be electronic solid-state trip type. All circuit breakers are to be 3-
pole unless otherwise shown on drawings.
B. Construction: Totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high quality, high
temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation at 70
deg. C within enclosures, to approved standards, provided with quick-make, quick-break,
trip-free switching mechanism manually operated by front toggle type handle and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have
common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Contacts are to be non-
welding silver alloy with arc quenching metallic devices of approved construction. Cable
terminals are to be solder-less anti-turn box lug or clamp type with set screws suitable for
copper or aluminum cables.
C. MCCB shall be of such a design to accept various types of remote and automatic control
devices for operation under a control/logic system and/or the BMS.
D. Thermal over-current trips are to be compensated to allow for ambient temperature higher at
breaker than at protected circuit or device. Compensation is to be applicable between 25
and 50 deg. C. In case of adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment is not to exceed
maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings.
E. Electronic trip circuit breakers are to have solid state trip units with long time delay setting
range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short time delay range 3 to 10
times maximum trip rating with maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous
protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip units are to be
insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +55 deg. C. Earth fault
protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is to be adjustable between 0.2
and 0.6 normal phase current pick-up with maximum time delay of 0.2 seconds, and is to be
suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided on
cover for testing the trip unit.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
F. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
G. Interchangeable Trips: Circuit breakers 250 A to 400 A frame size are to have
interchangeable electronic trip units.
H. Sealing: Non-interchangeable trip circuit breakers are to have sealed covers. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trips are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.
I. Circuit breaker ratings are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with continuous
duty at site conditions, and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC60947-2,
sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity), and maximum trip rating as
shown on the Drawings. Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are to
meet IEC 947-2 test sequence I, II, III and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B
(with intended short time withstand capability).
J. Accessories: Circuit breaker design is to allow addition of electrical operator, control and
interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and auxiliary switches,
padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and the like.
2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS
A. Generally: Instruments are to be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush
installation. Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments is
to be within 2% unless otherwise specified.
B. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal system
voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit
amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
E. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
F. Provide p.f. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary
current, core size and accuracy are to be determined in accordance with nominal current of
plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and secondary
fuses and disconnecting device.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
2.6 POWER FACTOR (PF) CORRECTION
A. Generally: Multi step automatic PF correction system is required to bring up power factor of
LV system to better than 0.92.
B. Location of capacitor bank is to be indoors, as close as possible to nominated switchboard

requiring PF improvement, and to be totally enclosed in sheet metal cabinets with
appropriate ventilation.
C. Capacitor bank is to be prefabricated, complete with capacitors, contactors, busbars and

power factor regulator, to effect automatic control and sensing of power factor for switching
in and out the number of steps required to improve PF to at least the figure indicated above,
and discharge resistors to enable discharge of capacitors after disconnection.
D. Steps are to be rated at maximum 40 kVA, 3-phase, operating for loads between 100 kVA
and 2000 kVA having PF below 0.85 (refer to the Drawings for total rating and
configuration).
E. Capacitors are to be dry-type, operating on rated low voltage, made of metalized

polypropylene (self-healing dielectric) foils coated with thermosetting resin, or equal
construction, proved in operation for at least 5 years, under prevailing ambient conditions.
Capacitors are to comply with IEC 60070 and IEC 60070A, with a loss factor not exceeding
0.3 x 10(-3) (a consumption of about 0.4 watts per kVAR).
F. Switching of capacitors is only to be performed by the fast closing contactors on capacitor

bank units (with surge limiting reactors as necessary). Switching arrangement of capacitors
is not to allow excessive transient capacitive switching at source, i.e. circuit breaker feeding
the bank.
G. Anti harmonic reactors are to be provided in series with the capacitors and properly tuned to
limit the harmonic currents in order to avoid over loading the capacitors. The reactor rating
at 50 Hz is not to be less than 7% of the capacitors to be protected.
H. Accessories: Each capacitor is to have its own connection terminals, HRC fuses, contactor,
indicator lamp and set of discharge resistors.
I. Regulator is to be housed in front door of one cubicle, and is to have setting knob for PF
selection between 0.8 and 1.0, manual control position, and signal lights. Regulator controls
are to be solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:
1. Under voltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for
power supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually
controlled capacitor-bank switching.
3. Three pole contactors rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the
capacitor application.
4. Plated copper buses.
5. Fuses for protection of capacitor banks rated to protect contactor, interconnecting
wiring, and capacitors.
6. Air-core-type inductors connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching
surges to within contactor ratings.
7. Mechanical bracing for current carrying parts adequate to withstand the maximum
fault current to which they may be exposed.
8. LED indicating lamps on front panel, to identify the energized capacitor banks.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
9. Hinged door with hand-operated catch and interlocked with controls or main circuit
breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.
10. LED or liquid crystal digital type display unit mounted in the enclosure door
11. Current Transformer if required.
J. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in each

phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Interrupting capacity is to be 200,000 A,
minimum.
K. Fixed Capacitors: are to be integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated. Internal Wiring is
to be factory made, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single set of pressure
terminals
L. Instrument transformers are to be provided at incoming circuit breaker(s) of MDB.
2.7 WIRING
A. Arrangement: Wiring is to be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards with
suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
B. Connections are to be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal exposed.
C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected, by bare copper
conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar.
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed for
multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables are to
be used in proximity to higher temperature components and as flexible cable.
E. Ferrules: Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each termination.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp are to be provided in
switchboard, controlled by thermostat and/or hygrostat.
B. Schematic and wiring diagram is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive main distribution boards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install main distribution boards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable
requirements of applicable standards or codes approved.
equipment manufacturers’ drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from main distribution board units and components.
D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
E. Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable trenches
or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
F. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level, before
grouting in holding-down bolts.
G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends and
termination fittings required for power and control cables.
H. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with an

approved scheme.
I. Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat and two
finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site, or as required by
Engineer.
J. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for main
distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency
procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear
acrylic plastic. Mount on front of main distribution boards.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION

warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Main Distribution Board Nameplates: Label each main distribution board compartment
with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant
screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for main distribution boards with ground

continuity to main electrical ground bus.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings, types, sizes,
and wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and clearances.
C. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer’s torque

tightening specification.
D. Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical inspection
and electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests the Engineer may
require to check compliance of installation with the Specification, including, but not limited
to, the following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.
E. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check insulation
resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and between neutral and
earth.
F. Primary Injection Tests: Provide portable test equipment to test time-delay characteristics of
circuit breakers by simulating an overload or fault condition. Measure and record all test
results and ambient conditions and compare with manufacturer’s data.
G. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-current
primary injection test-sets and reports all readings.
H. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance with the
Standard specified (IEC 439 or BS 5486: Part 1) for FBAs assembled from standardized
components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine tests are also to be carried out
on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by Engineer.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of main distribution boards.

Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air
to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Panelboards for distribution and subdistribution of electric power and for protection of
circuits, including fixing and supporting materials and materials for termination of feeders,
sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following types:
1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

2. Distribution panelboards.
B. Connection to BMS system (as required/shown on drawings), including interface elements

such as relays, transducers, etc. as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS
schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MCB: Miniature circuit breaker.
B. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.
C. LP, PP, SDP: Final branch circuit panelboards, power panelboards and subdistribution
panelboards respectively, for secondary lighting and power distribution with either
miniature circuit breaker (MCB) or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) protection on sub-
feeder or branch circuits, as shown on the Drawings.
D. DP: Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCCB protection on main
incoming and outgoing feeder circuit breakers Type 1 or Type 2.
E. Distribution panelboards or final branch circuit panelboards supplied from emergency

source are prefixed with the letter E.
F. ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker.
G. RMS: Root mean square.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - Page 1 of 12

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected

2. Types of panelboards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and ratings
compensation at and above 40 deg C ambient conditions and corresponding
temperatures within the enclosures.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panelboard.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short- circuit series combinations of
circuit breakers.
B. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test
records in accordance with the Standards.
to, the following:
1. Exact composition of each panelboard, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip ratings
of circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panelboards, indicating main feeder and branch circuit
conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and
materials used.
D. Details of Electrical Closets: Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and ventilation of
the installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting construction.
E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards submit final versions after load
balancing.
G. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current protective

devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over-current
protective device.
H. Coordination Study: Contractor is to submit a complete coordination and protection study

for all the electrical system. The coordination shall be fully detailed to show the short circuit
currents at each panel location. The study shall show that the protective devices provided do
ensure the proper protection and coordination. Any breakers not satisfying the study shall be
replaced by proper ones to ensure proper system operation. The coordination study has to be
associated with a coordination study for earth fault currents throughout the system to ensure
proper selection of earth fault setting for all breakers to ensure discrimination and proper
protection of all system components.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Comply with
1. IEC 60439-1 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies".
2. IEC 60974-1 Low voltage switchgear part1:general rules.

3. IEC 60947-2 Low voltage switchgear part2: circuit breaker
4. IEC 60898 "Miniature circuit breakers"
5. Other components where not specified are to comply with the relevant IEC standards
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction
that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of
equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
1.7 SCHEDULES
A. Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of panelboard
using the following criteria:
1. Type of construction (MCB or MCCB), referring to type of branch circuit breakers.

2. Voltage, number of phases and wires.
3. Branch circuit breaker trip rating and wire size.
4. Main circuit breaker trip rating and frame size (maximum continuous rating) for
MCCB and MCB.
5. Short-circuit interrupting capacity (IC) in kA.
6. Special arrangement or provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. ABB (Italy)
2. Alsthom (Unelec) (France)
3. General Electric Co (U.S.A.)
5. Siemens - ITE (Germany or USA)
6. Square D Co. (U.S.A.)
7. Moeller (Germany)
A. Rated insulation voltage is to be in accordance with the respective standards.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
B. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 42 for indoor
installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 60947-1 and IEC
60529, and are to be factory designed and assembled.
C. Earthing bar is to be half size the phase busbars.
D. Neutral bar is to be sized as the phase bus bars.
E. Protection is to be fully rated throughout the systems.
F. Series (cascade) coordinated protection (integrated equipment short-circuit ratings) will only
be acceptable within final branch circuit panelboards, between branch circuit breakers and
the main incoming circuit breaker, in accordance with an integrated series combination chart
prepared by the manufacturer, tested and certified in the country of origin by an
internationally authorized organization, where short-circuit ratings are beyond available
fully rated types specified, and with the approval of Engineer.
G. Circuit breakers are to be non-fused type.
H. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panelboards are to have one main incoming circuit breaker or
molded case switch as shown on drawings and the required number of branch circuit
breakers, arranged as shown on the schedules, including spare circuit breakers and spaces
for future expansion. Three-phase panelboards are to be designed for sequence phase
connection of branch circuit devices.
I. Branch Circuit Numbering: On 3-phase panelboard schedules, circuits 1 and 2 are to be

connected to red (R) phase, 3 and 4 to yellow (Y) phase, 5 and 6 to blue (B) phase etc., to
conform with branch circuit numbering shown on the drawings.
2.3 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES
A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved
manufacturer's standards and sizes.
B. Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, are to be Electro-galvanized sheet steel
of gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the standards. Welded joints are to
be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to conform to the standards, adequate
for the utilized cables/wires subject to the engineers’ approval and in no case less than 100
mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have pre-designed angles or threaded end studs to support
and adjust mounting of interior panelboard assembly.
C. Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus compartments, to
form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps
engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable).
Screws where used are to be oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims for flush mounted
panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for surface
mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to box.
D. Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder lock
and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and multiple point latch
mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
E. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and
alkali solvents, grease, aging and corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of
Engineer.
F. Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, are to be

provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors are
specified. Directories are to be typed to identify panelboards and clearly indicate circuit
number and description of load.
G. Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5 mm thick, fully
weatherproofed (IP 55), without knockouts, but with removable sealed/gasketed bottom
gland plates and gasketed doors.
2.4 BUSBARS
A. Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on total maximum operating
temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted or
clamped contact surfaces are to have maximum current density not exceeding requirements
of the approved standards. Aluminum is not to be used for busbars or panelboard parts.
B. Design: Busbars are to be shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that branch circuit
devices can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional
machining, drilling or tapping. Busing is to be full size without reduction. Busing and
blank plates are to allow installation of future circuit devices, where indicated on the
drawings.
C. Rating: Busbar rating is to be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame size.

Where no main circuit breaker is required, busbars are to have main lugs or
disconnect switch, with nominal rating equal 1.25 times the upstream circuit breaker
trip ratings, and as shown on the drawings.
D. Short-circuit Duty: Busbars are to carry at least 125% of the maximum short-circuit
level at point of application for one second, without showing any signs of
degradation.
E. Terminals and connections are to be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure type.

Screws and bolts used for making copper/copper connections are to be hard copper
alloy with lock washers (riveted bus connections are not acceptable).
F. Neutral bar is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-less
box type set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each branch
circuit and one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw for main
incoming neutral wire. Neutral is to be fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.
G. Earthing bar is to be copper, brazed to panelboard cabinet, with bolted pressure

connector for main conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel terminal for each
outgoing conductor, to provide secure and reliable contact with all metal parts and
enclosure.
2.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Type: Tested to approved standards, totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high
quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal
operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and provided
with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation of main
contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole
breakers are to have common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles.
Ampere rating is to be clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp type with set
screws, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
B. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, circuit
breakers up to and including 150/160 a frame size, are to be thermal-magnetic type, having
bi-metallic inverse time delay over-current element for small overloads and instantaneous
magnetic over-current trip element for operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole.
Circuit breakers 250 and larger are to have adjustable instantaneous trips.
C. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation so

that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or automatic
operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-quenching devices
of metallic grid construction.
D. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is
set to operate.
E. MCCBs for LPs, PPs, SDPs and DPs Type 2: Comply with IEC60947-2 test sequences I, II,
utilization category A, and are to have rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacities
(sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panelboard location, with preferred
ratings in accordance with following tables.
F. MCCBs for DP Type 1: Rated for maximum voltage of 600v A.C., 250 v D.C. and
utilization category b (with an intended short time withstand capability), and are to have
rated service short circuit breaking capacities (sequence ii) with suitably selected frame
sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard
location and schedules shown on the drawings, with declared ratings as percentage (100%,
75% or 50%) of the ultimate ratings as quoted by the circuit breaker manufacturer marked
on the circuit breaker rating plate.
G. Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which
corresponds with its maximum trip range listed below and which is to be related to
minimum acceptable short-circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully rated interrupting
duties: normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L), as specified.
H. Frame sizes are generally to be selected with minimum interrupting capacities at specified
voltages and rated frequency, in accordance with the following table:
Trip range Minimum Symm. rms rated Rating

frame size(amperes) breaking capacity (ultimate in kA) volts(A.C.
)
N H L
Thermal-magnetic
15-100 (1p) 25 - - 220/240
15-100 (2,3p) 25 - - 380/415
15-160 (2,3,4p) 35 60 100 380/415
Electronic
100-250 (2,3,4p) 35 60 150 380/415

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
160-400 (2,3,4p) 35 60 150 380/415

300-600 (2,3,4p) 40 60 150 380/415
400-800 (3,4p) 50 60 150 380/415
800-1250 (3,4p) 50 70 150 380/415
I. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
J. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers 150/160 A frame sizes to 600
A frame sizes are to have interchangeable trip units.
K. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
L. Compensation: Thermal over-current trips are to be ambient temperature compensated

between 25 and 50 deg C.
M. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers 250 A frame size and larger, are to be
solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating,
short time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum clearing time
of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating.
Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20
and +55 deg C. Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is to
be suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided
on cover for testing the trip unit.
N. Accessories: Circuit breakers are to be designed to accommodate standard attachments

including shunt-trip, under-voltage release, combined auxiliary and alarm switches, and
electrical operator to any circuit breaker of rating (frame size) 100 A and over. Padlocking
devices are to be provided, where shown on the Drawings.
O. Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) are provided as add-on or built-
in earth leakage accessories, where required(for equipments/devices installed in wet areas)
and as shown on the Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-
current and short-circuit protection, is to be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip
current sensitivity on breakers for branch circuits is to be 100mA for lighting circuits and
30mA for others, and for main breakers ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings. Circuit
breakers are to include current transformer with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip
free mechanism to ensure circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth faults.
P. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements. When
operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current is to be less than 1/2
cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with breaker
construction.
Q. Current limiting circuit breakers are to have, on each pole, adjustable inverse time-delay
over-current characteristics for overload protection and instantaneous trip for short-circuit
protection. Operation of main contacts is to be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces
between contacts created by fault current. Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms
value of prospective short-circuit current.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.6 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)
A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 60898.
B. Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities (to IEC 60947-2) are to be as follows:
1. 6 - 100 a MCB : 6, 10 or 16 kA at 240/415 v A.C.
C. Construction: MCBs are to be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up to 70

degree C within panelboard enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and are to be constructed
from high quality, high temperature, molded insulating materials. Guaranteed duties and
characteristics are to be submitted for temperatures above 40 deg C.
D. MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and suitable for
mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
E. Operation: Under overload conditions, thermal tripping is to provide close protection of

insulated conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic trip is to operate at 7 - 10
times normal rated current (type 3 characteristic). Magnetic operation is to be in the current
limiting region and opening time is not to exceed 5 milliseconds.
F. Ratings: Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100 a,
calibrated at 40deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. De-rating above 40
deg C is not to exceed 1% per deg C and loading is not to exceed 70% of circuit breaker
rating.
G. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to be add-on
devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable
sensitivities of 30 ma, 100 ma and 300 ma are to be available for all ratings of 2-pole and 4-
pole circuit breakers.
H. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, are to include alarm switch, auxiliary switch,
shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to be modular additions to the
circuit breakers.
2.7 MOLDED CASE SWITCH (MCS)
A. Molded Case Switch: Non-automatic on/off switching device of equal construction to

equivalent circuit breaker, having no over-current or fault protective elements, but marked
with maximum current withstand and voltage rating.
2.8 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (DP)
A. DP TYPE 1: to be from 1 to IEC 60439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 690 V a.c.,
240 V d.c., surface mounted to wall or free standing , with doors (unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings), suitable for ratings of main breaker (or MCS on main incoming as shown
on the drawings) and busbars ranging from 400 A to 1250 A, 3-phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire
where specifically indicated), suitably and orderly arranged for any selected combination of
branch MCCBs ranging from 150 A to 1250 A frame size and short-circuit interrupting
ratings as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers smaller than 225 A frame size, where
indicated, may be grouped on an integral sub-assembly mounted to main chassis.
B. DP TYPE 2: to be Form 1 to IEC 60439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 690 V
a.c., Panelboard is to be recessed or surface mounted type, as shown on the Drawings,

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
complete with trim and door, adjustable trim fixation for flush panels, and with ratings of
main circuit breaker (or MCS on main incoming as shown on the drawings) and busbars of
100 A, 150/160 A, 250 A.., 3-phase, 4-wire, with 2 or 3-pole branch circuit breakers, 100 A
or 150/160 A frame size.
C. Construction: Sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and minimum 2 mm
thick for trim or trim and door. Fronts are to be single or twin covers to shield circuit
breakers, terminals and live ends.
D. Interior of panelboard is to be pan assembly consisting of galvanized sheet steel chassis

minimum 2 mm thick, folded, flanged and reinforced, with busbars vertically arranged and
mounted on molded insulators.
E. Molded insulators are to have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and insulation
grade of 3.5 kV for one minute.
F. Circuit breakers are to be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit breakers)
and bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus connectors.
2.9 FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating of 690 V and a rated operational voltage of 400/230
V.
B. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
DIN rails in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one piece
insulated bolt-on/comb-type phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with
spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation is to
be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second
without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards. Panelboards are to
comply with BS 5486 Part 12.
C. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
busbars in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one-piece
insulated phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with spade connectors for
fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation is to be high thermal
rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second without
overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards.
D. SPN type panelboards are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service voltage, single-phase
and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main incoming.
E. SPN type main circuit breaker is to be double-pole MCB, with or without earth leakage
device (RCD), as shown on the Schedules.
F. Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings between 6 A
and 50 A, with ICs as required in the Schedules.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
G. TPN type panelboards are to be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum service voltage, 3-
phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or 4-pole MCB , MCCB or MCS
main incoming, as shown in the Schedules or on the Drawings.
H. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6 A and 100 A, with IC
as required in the Schedules.
I. TPN type panelboard main circuit breakers are to be MCB or MCCB, 100A continuous
current rating, with trip range from 25 A to 100 A, or 225 A MCCB with trip range 70 A to
225 A, normal (N) or high-break (H) duty with/without RCD as shown on the Drawings.
J. Short-circuit Rating: TPN panelboards may only have integrated equipment (series) short-
circuit ratings in accordance with clause paragraph F of Article 7
"Moeller (Germany)
K. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS" hereof.
2.10 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS; SPLIT-BUS MCCB/MCB TYPES
A. Assembly is to be as specified for MCB or MCCB type of branch circuit panelboard, but
with split-bus arrangement, part of which is controlled by in-built submain contactor or
circuit-protective device for group control of a number of branch circuits. Panelboard is to
have main circuit breaker for protection and isolation.
B. Contactors: 2 or 3-pole, Electro-magnetic type, class AC 5a or AC 5b to IEC 60947-4,

designed to withstand large initial currents of discharge lamps or tungsten lamp loads
respectively, and rated not less than overload setting of protective device upstream.
Contacts are to be double break, silver cadmium plated, having self-cleaning wiping action.
Control is to be provided by phase-neutral (maximum 220 V) split-coil, for on/off activation
by local and/or by remote direct-wired, on/off push buttons. Contactor is to be mechanically
latched. Control circuit is to be fused. Auxiliaries are to include local pilot light, parallel
remote indicating circuit, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixing Generally:
1. Align, level and securely fasten panelboards to structure

2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panelboards at least 25mm from wall ensuring
supporting members do not prevent flow of air
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panelboards
4. Close unused openings in panelboard cabinets.
B. Panelboard Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet have
been completed.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
C. Wiring Inside Panelboards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent tension on
circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are to be split and bolted type, fully
insulated.
D. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush
with wall surface finish.
E. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of
waterproof compound prior to installation.
F. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 1880 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
H. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing
panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
I. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
J. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four empty conduits from
panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the
future. Stub four empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION

warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main

electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values.
A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on
panelboards after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and standards.
Inspect conditions within panelboards and verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
B. Circuit Breakers: Tests are to include operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check
automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by applying
necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as
applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and report
ambient temperature inside enclosure.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
C. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and
between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth. Record all readings, using
500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment on
systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
D. Routine tests on site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all
panelboards assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the
works of the manufacturer.
E. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
F. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16450 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes bus assemblies and fittings.

2. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for bus drop cables.
3. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for bus duct termination provisional.
4. Division 16 Section "Medium Voltage Transformers" for bus duct termination provisions.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting position, mounting method,
vertical supports, materials, firestops, and weatherstops for each component.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of enclosed bus assemblies including plans,
elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other construction elements. Detail
connections to switchgear, switchboards, transformers, and panel boards. Detail supports and
connections to building.
C. Coordination and Construction Drawings: Include floor plans and sections to show enclosed bus-
assembly layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.
requirements.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus-assembly components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Standards:
- NEMA BU1, BU1.1, BU 1.2.

- UL 857.
- ANSI/IEEE C37.23.
- IEC 61439-1 and IEC 60439-2.
- IEC 60529.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 16450 – page 1 of 6

S08035-SPC-000-EL-01 Rev 1
A. Deliver, store, and handle bus assemblies according to Standards recommendations.
A. Field Measurements: Verify existing dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances and
locate obstructions within manufacturing and installation tolerances of enclosed bus assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged with
1. Plug-in Units: 2 percent of installed units, but not less than one unit of each type installed.
2. Hook stick operator for plug-in units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. EATON / Cutler-Hammer. (U.S.A.)
2. G. E. (U.S.A.)
3. Klockner Moeller (Germany)
4. Siemens Sentron Busway (U.S.A.)
5. Power Bar (PB) (Ireland)
6. LS (Korea)
2.2 BUSWAY, GENERAL:
A. Busway shall be:
1. Plug-in and feeder types, indoor, for tap off applications, feeder type for non tapped
straight runs and direct connections between equipment, as applicable and / or shown on the
drawings, complete with manufacturer's recommended fittings and accessories where indicated
and as required for a complete, functioning and safe installation .
B. Busway is to include bus bars, electrical insulators, enclosures, switchboard flanges, elbows,
offsets, cable tap boxes, transformer flange connections with flexible copper braid link, generator
flange connection with flexible copper braid link and vibration absorber,, power take-off sections,
expansion joints, end closures, supports, and other components and accessories needed to form
complete systems.
C. Ratings: three phase with voltage and current ratings and requirements for neutral and ground
conductors as indicated and specified. Short circuit ratings of busbars shall be in excess of those
indicated for each location.
D. Busway Conductor Material: hard drawn Copper with not less than 98 percent conductivity.

S08035-SPC-000-EL-01 Rev 1
E. Busways: tin plated and insulated over entire length, with flame retardant 130 deg C class epoxy
insulation.
F. Hot Spot Temperature Rise: not in excess of 55 deg C above an ambient temperature of 40 deg C
at any point in the busway when busway is operated at rated load current and system frequency.
2.3 BUSWAY (225 to 5000A)
A. Type: Indoor, 600/1000 V grade, 3-phase, 5-wire with fully sized neutral and half size earth bar,
insulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated and of compact design to provide degree of protection
of IP54 to IEC 60529, with ratings as shown on the Drawings at site maximum ambient
temperature conditions. Busbar is to comply with approved standards. Short-circuit capacity is to
be at least equal to value at main protective device, for 1 second. Where indoor busway is partially
running through outdoor / wet areas, these portions are to be IP66 rated.
B. Construction: Prefabricated, insulated flat copper conductors, with minimum 2 mm galvanized

sheet steel flanged housing, totally enclosed, non-ventilated, extruded aluminum type. Housing is
to be bonderized inside and outside and finished with gray baked electrostatic paint. Joints
between sections are to have special insulation, flanged and pressure bolted, easily dismantled and
giving equally strong mechanical connection to busbar sections. Any one section of the busway is
to be removable without disturbing adjacent sections.
C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next shall are to be arranged in joint stacks
incorporating busbar conductors, and each joint stack shall is to be arranged for tightening with a
single bolt. Joint design shall is to be such that any length or fitting of a run may be removed
without disturbing the connecting lengths.
D. Reactance: Busbar is to be specially built and assembled to provide low reactance.
E. Accessories: Busbar is to be complete with necessary factory made adaptor boxes, junction boxes,
bends, expansion connections, fittings, fire barriers etc. as may be required to provide complete
system between terminal points indicated on the Drawings. Fixing and mounting materials are to
be galvanized steel. For vertically mounted busbars, spring suspension type hangers are to be used
for equalizing weight of trunking between all supports.
F. Terminal adaptors or chambers are to be factory made. Coordinated components at both ends are
to match equipment connected thereto. Connections are to be made with insulated copper bars of
equivalent sections and of exact shapes to fit and be fixed with bolts and spring washers.
G. Busbar is to be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths and shapes. Busbar cutting
on site is not acceptable.
H. Plug-In Openings: five, dead-front, hinged cover openings per side of each 3 m (10 ft). length of
busbar. Openings shall be useable simultaneously.
2.4 PLUG-IN DEVICES:
A. General: compatible with the connected busbar and of types as indicated. Plug-in devices shall
are to be equipped with spring reinforced contact fingers arranged so they will not make contact
with bus bars during plug insertion until the device housing is positively earthed to the busbar.
Plug-in devices shall are to lock in position mechanically and make positive earthing contact
before to the power connection when in the fully inserted position. Provide Safety interlock are to
be provided on bus plugs having "on" and "off" positions to prevent insertion when they are in the
"on" position. Mounting hardware shall is to be captive on bus plug housing.

S08035-SPC-000-EL-01 Rev 1
B. Plug-in units (tap off units) are to be of rating shown on the Drawings, and comprise circuit
breaker, made by same manufacturer of the busbar unless otherwise is approved by the engineer,
housed in sheet steel enclosure complete with stabs, stab shields and earthing stab. No cables are
permitted for connection of the breaker to the busbar stabs. Protective interlocks (releasable) are to
be provided to prevent opening of cover whilst circuit breaker is plugged in and in the closed
position, to prevent insertion or removal of unit when circuit breaker is in the closed position, and
to prevent closing circuit breaker with cover open. Circuit breaker is to be as described in
Division 16 Section "Panelboards".
2.5 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. General: as recommended by busbar manufacturer and conforming to Division 16 section "Basic

Electrical Materials and Methods".
B. Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: adjustable for leveling and spring tension and arranged
to permit relative movement between floor and busbar.
C. Rigid Floor Supports: adjustable for leveling.
D. Expansion Section: capacity and conductor provisions same as adjacent busbar section. Arranged
to absorb expansion and contraction of bus bars and housing.
E. Fasteners to connect busbar supports to the building structure as follows:
1. Expansion Anchors: carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

2. Toggle Bolts: all steel spring head type.
3. Powder. Driven Threaded Studs: heat. treated steel, designed specifically for the intended
service.
2.6 FIRE STOPPING:
A. General: materials approved for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers. Refer to Section
"Basic Electrical material and methods" and Division 7 "Fire Stopping".
B. Wall and Floor Flanges: sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum thickness close fitting to busbar
arranged to close the wall or floor opening at the busbar penetration.
C. Two-Part Sealant: formed-in-place sealant as recommended by manufacturer and approved by

Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUSBARS:
A. Install busbars and accessories as indicated and in compliance with applicable requirements of
applicable codes/regulations. Conform to manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.
B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in the approved applicable standards.

S08035-SPC-000-EL-01 Rev 1
C. Expansion Fittings: install at locations where busbar crosses a building expansion joint. In
addition, install at intervals in long runs or risers not exceeding manufacturer’s recommendations
for the type and material of busbar installed.
D. Fire Stops: install fire stops where busbar penetrates fire- -rated walls and floors. Seal between
busbar and opening and around opening with sealant or sealing mortar having fire rating not less
than that of wall, or floor penetrated. Where busbar manufacturer's sealing and stopping devices
are not fire rated, provide fire stopping as required to satisfy authority having jurisdiction and
Engineers approval.
E. Weather Seal: install integral weather seal where busbar penetrates exterior wall or roof. Provide
appropriate flange and seal around openings to make weather tight.
F. Floor Penetrations: provide a minimum 75 mm (3-inch-high) curb around busbar penetrations of

floors to prevent water from spills and leaks from contacting busbar.
G. Support busbar from the building structure independently from other suspended items.
H. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection, spacing, and installation of supports.
I. Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be adequate to support busbar
load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four or 90 kg ( 200 lb), whichever is greater.
J. Fastening Supports: unless otherwise indicated, fasten supports securely to the building structure
as specified in Division 16 Section "Supporting Devices".
K. Support at Connections to Equipment: where busbars connect to equipment, provide flanged

fittings fastened to the busbar and to the equipment. Support the busbar separately. Do not carry
the weight of the busbar on the equipment enclosure.
3.2 EARTHING:
A. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for busbars as indicated and
specified in Division 16 Section “Grounding and bonding”.
B. Tighten bonding and earthing connections to comply with tightening torques specified in
applicable Standard or to assure permanent and effective earthing.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Test busbar runs prior to energizing as follows and provide written report of tests.
B. Phasing: verify that proper phase relationships exist between source, busbar, and connected
equipment using phase rotation meter and verifying phase continuity from source to equipment.
C. Insulation Resistance: measure IR for all busbar components with 1000 Volt d.c. mega-ohmmeter
and compare in report with manufacturer's stated acceptable values. Measure each phase to phase
and each phase to earth. Any reading should be better than 50 mega-ohm meter.
D. Energize busbar and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
E. Test Failures: correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest. Verify that
equipment meets the specified requirements.
3.4 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR:

S08035-SPC-000-EL-01 Rev 1
A. Upon completion of installation of busbars, remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair
damaged finish including chips, scratches and abrasions.
B. Galvanized Finish: repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Paint Finish: repair damage using matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT:
A. Align busbar runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists. Provide support
stiffeners at locations where indicated and where there is excessive movement.
B. Check bus plug circuit breaker trip settings, fuse ratings, and starter overload elements against
connected loads and revise as required to conform to recommended values.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion perform an infrared scan of bus
assembly including joints and plug-in units.
1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of bus assembly, one at four months and the other at
11 months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying bus assembly checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and scanning
observations after remedial action.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."

S08035-SPC-000-EL-01 Rev 1
SECTION 16482 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes motor control centers and panels for use on ac circuits rated 600 V
and less.
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for electric motors.

4. Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for conduits.
5. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for wires and cables.
6. Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for switch
disconnectors.
C. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS Schedules and/or shown on the
drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include dimensions, ratings and data on features and components.
B. For Variable Frequency Drives: Submit manufacturer's performance data including

dimensional drawings, customer connection drawings, power circuit diagrams, installation
and maintenance manuals, warranty description, VFDs FLA rating, certification agency file
numbers and catalogue information.
C. Shop and Installation Drawings: Submit for each motor control center, and prior to ordering
materials and equipment, specified in this Section. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,
and component lists. Show ratings, including short time and short-circuit ratings, and
horizontal and vertical bus ampacities.
1. Complete technical schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings

on all motor starters, motor protection relays, sensing units, control accessories, etc.
2. Instructional details of equipment, particularly motor control centers and panels.
3. Installation details of motor control centers and panels and of control and sensing
accessories.
4. Exact routing of power and control cables, wiring and conduits.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16482 - Page 1 of 12

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV A
5. Feeder termination details at motor control centers, starters, motors, isolating

switches, control and sensing accessories etc.
6. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting wiring diagrams (of all power and control
circuits) pertinent to class and type specified for motor control center. Schematic
diagram of each type of controller unit indicated.
7. Wiring Diagrams: Submit for approval detailed control wiring diagrams and a list of
control equipment with descriptive literature.
8. Free hand field wiring diagrams or sketches will not be accepted.
D. Maintenance Data: For products to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain motor control devices through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with the Following Standards: ANSI; NEMA; BS; VDE; DIN; IEC; UTE.
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated.
B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in motor control centers. Provide temporary
heaters as required to prevent condensation.
C. Handle motor control centers according to Standards recommendations. Use factory-

installed lifting provisions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control
circuits to which they connect.
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and
characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty
cycle of the motor and load.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Spare Indicating Lights: Furnish 6 of each type required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. AEG (Germany)
2. Allen-Bradley Co. (U.S.A.)
3. Cutler Hammer (U.S.A.)
4. General Electric(U.S.A.)
5. Klockner Moeller (Germany)
8. Square D (U.S.A.)
2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
A. Furnish complete variable frequency drives as specified herein for the fans and pumps
designated to be variable speed. All standards and optional features shall be included within
the VFD enclosure, unless otherwise specified. VFD enclosure shall be NEMA MC 1 with
inlet air filters. Drive shall be mounted on a floor stand.
B. VFD shall convert three-phase, 50 hertz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency,
three phase power for stepless motor speed control from 10% to 100% of the motor's 50
hertz speed. Input voltage shall be as specified on the drawing schedules.
C. VFD shall include a converter and an inverter section. The converter section shall convert
fixed frequency and voltage AC utility power to DC voltage. All VFDs shall include input
line reactors or an isolation transformer as required. The inverter section of the VFD shall
invert the DC voltage into a quality output waveform, with adjustable voltage and frequency
for stepless motor speed control. The VFD shall maintain a constant V/Hz ratio. The VFD
and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL.508. The complete drive, including all specified
options, shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency such as UL or ETL.
D. Power line noise shall be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch as defined in
IEEE 519 1981 Edition, "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static
Power Converters". The total voltage distortion shall not exceed 5 percent.
E. The VFD shall not emit radiated RFI in excess of the limitations set forth in the FCC Rules
and Regulations, FCC Part 15 for Class A computing devices. The VFD shall carry a FCC
compliance label. PWM type drives shall include RFI filters.
F. Motor noise as a result of the VFD shall be limited to 3 dB over across the line operation
measured at 1 meter from the motor's centerline.
G. VFD's full load amp rating shall meet or exceed NFPA 70, NEC Table 430-150.
H. Protective Features will include:

1. Individual motor overload protection for each motor controlled.

2. Protection against input power under-voltage, over-voltage, and phase loss.
3. Protection against output current overload and instantaneous over-current.
4. Protection against over-temperature within the VFD enclosure.
5. Protection against over-voltage on the DC bus.
6. Protect VFD from sustained power of phase loss. Under-voltage trip activates
automatically when line voltage drops more than 10 percent below rated input
voltage.
7. Automatically reset faults due to under-voltage, over-voltage, phase loss, or over-
temperature.
8. Protection against output short circuit and motor winding shorting to case faults, as
defined by UL 508.
9. Status lights or digital display for indication of individual fault conditions.
10. Controller capable of operating without a motor or any other equipment connected to
the drive output to facilitate start-up and troubleshooting.
11. Input line reactors shall be provided to minimize harmonics introduced to the AC line
and to provide additional protection to AC line transients.
I. Interface Features for the VFD will include:
1. Door mounted Hand/Off/Auto selector switch to start and stop the VFD. In the Auto
position, the VFD will start/stop from the controller. In the Hand position, the VFD
will run regardless of the remote contact position.
2. Manual speed control capability.
3. Local/Remote selector switch. In the Remote position, motor speed is determined by
the follower signal. In the local position, motor speed is determined by the manual
speed control.
4. Power/On light to indicate that the VFD has tripped on a fault condition.
5. Digital meter with selector switch to indicate percent speed and percent load.
6. A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Run mode.
7. A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Fault mode.
8. A 0 to 10 V output signal to vary in direct proportion to the controller's speed.
9. VFD to have terminal strip and N.C. safety contacts such as freezstats, smoke alarms,
etc. VFD to safety shut down in drive or bypass mode when contacts open.
J. Adjustments will include the following:
1. Maximum speed, adjustable 15 to 100 percent base speed.

2. Acceleration time, adjustable 3 to 60 seconds.
3. Deceleration time, adjustable 3 to 60 seconds with override circuit to prevent
nuisance trips if decal time is set too short.
4. Current limit, adjustable 0 to 105 percent.
5. Overload trip set point.
6. Offset and gain to condition the input speed signal.
K. Service conditions will cover:
1. Ambient temperature, 0 to 50 deg C.

2. 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.
3. Elevation to 1,000 meters without derating.
4. AC line voltage variation, -10 to +10 percent of nominal.
L. Special features will include the following features in the VFD enclosure while maintaining
its UL to ETL listing:

1. Manual by-pass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor from the
VFD to the power line or from the line to the controller. The by-pass circuitry shall
be mounted in a separate section of the VFD enclosure. Motor overload protection
shall be provided in both drive and by-pass modes.
2. A door interlocked, pad lockable drive disconnect switch shall be provided to
disconnect power from the VFD only (the disconnect shall be clearly marked as
such).
3. A motor circuit protector, MCCB, shall be provided as a means of disconnecting all
power to both the VFD and by-pass circuits as well as providing short circuit and
locked rotor protection to the motor while in the by-pass mode.
4. The disconnect and by-pass functions may be accomplished via disconnects,
contractors and overloads, or with a four position Drive/Off/Line/Test switch with
motor starter and by-pass fuses.
2.3 STARTERS
A. Starters for three phase motors to be magnetic type to automatically disconnect motor from
power supply in case of supply failure, excessive voltage drop, overcurrent and lack of
balance in phases. Overload trips to be provided for three phases.
B. Motor Data: Obtain from equipment supplier before ordering any motor starter, or check
motor nameplate for full load current rating and allowable temperature rise in order to select
proper overload thermal element for motor starter.
C. Short circuit protection device fitted to starter to be independent of controller and overload
protection.
D. Control voltage for starters and control circuits is not to exceed 110 V.
E. Step Down Control Circuit Transformers: Two winding isolating type.
F. Control Circuit Protection: Use high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers.
G. Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated
by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
H. Control devices on starters to be as follows unless otherwise indicated or required by driven

equipment: start stop push buttons, one red pilot light for "running", one green pilot light for
"stopped" and one reset push button.
I. Starter type A for single phase motors not exceeding 1/2 HP to be surface or flush mounted,
manual two pole toggle type, for non reversing across the line starting, fitted with one
overload element.
J. Starter type B for three phase motors not exceeding 10 HP to be direct on line, non
reversing, magnetic type, with manual reset, 3 pole overload relay and low voltage
protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.
K. Starter type C for three phase motors over 10 HP, but not exceeding 50 HP, to be automatic
star delta magnetic non reversing type, with 3 pole overload relay and low voltage
protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.

L. Starter type D for three phase motors over 50 HP to be multiple step auto transformer non
reversing magnetic type, with 3 pole overload relay, low voltage protection, unless
otherwise required by local regulations.
M. Individually mounted starters to be totally enclosed in sheet steel enclosure with baked
enamel finish. Design is to suit location and application. It is to be impossible to open
enclosure door unless isolator is in open position.
N. Nameplates: Starters and controls to have engraved nameplates identifying system or

defining its function.
O. Contactors: Comply with IEC 60947-4, utilization category AC3, and be 3-phase, 4-pole,
magnetic type, 600 V rating, capable of interrupting at least ten times rated current inductive
or non-inductive loads under normal service conditions and are to have replaceable main
arcing contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors are to withstand, without welding or
burning of contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal rating for 4 seconds upon closing
and are to be capable of closing on the heaviest short-circuit of the system and withstand the
short-circuit for period required by upstream short-circuit protective device to operate.
Three N.O. and three N.C. spare contacts are to be provided on each contactor.
P. Starter Co-Ordination: Motor starter devices shall be of type 2 co-ordination to IEC 60947-
4-1.
2.4 COMBINATION STARTERS SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
A. Components to comprise magnetic starter switch disconnector and short circuit protection
devices required by the Standards, in approved sheet metal enclosure to suit application.
B. Switch Disconnector Operating Mechanism: Quick make, quick break, with external
operating handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover necessitating disconnecting
switch to be in OFF position for access to inside of enclosure. Means are to be provided for
by passing interlocks. Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover.
C. Short circuit protection gear to be HRC fused cartridges or molded case circuit breakers of
appropriate current rupturing capacity. Switch disconnectors are not required if circuit
breakers are used for the short circuit protection. In this case the circuit breaker will perform
the disconnection function.
D. Operation of circuit breaker to be possible from outside of enclosure. Position of breaker

ON/OFF/TRIPPED to be clearly indicated by position of handle.
E. Manual-Off-Automatic Selector Switches: except as otherwise indicated, install in covers of

magnetic controllers of motors started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with
other equipment. Make control connections so that only the manual and automatic control
devices that have no safety functions will be bypassed when the switch is in the manual
position. Connect motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety type
control devices such as low and high-pressure cut-outs, high-temperature cut-outs, and
motor-overload and over current protectors. Make control-circuit connections to a manual-
off-automatic switch or to more than on automatic control device in accordance with a
wiring diagram that is Manufacturer and Engineer approved according to Mechanical
Requirements.

2.5 PUSH BUTTONS
A. Push buttons to be one unit momentary contact START/STOP with normally open or
normally closed contacts as required by wiring diagrams and with lockout attachments.
Heads to be color-coded and STOP button to be protected. Push buttons controlling one
piece of equipment to be housed in separate enclosure.
2.6 RELAYS
A. Relays to be multi-pole with normally open or normally closed contacts, electrically

operated at 110 V maximum, and magnetically held. Contacts to be double break silvered
type, interchangeable from normally open to normally closed without additional parts.
Relays are to be rated at 10 A, 600 V.
2.7 CIRCUIT PROTECTORS AND SWITCHES
A. Motor Circuit Protector: Molded case, magnetic break type with adjustable instantaneous
setting suitable for motor protection.
B. Motor circuit protectors are to be in compliance with IEC 60947-2, utilization category B,
sequence II (service capacity) for motor control centers and sequence III (ultimate capacity)
for motor control panels and combination starters unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
C. Molded Case Switch: Similar to circuit breakers but without overload/short circuit
protection. Short time rating of switches is to be not less than the short circuit current at
switch location for 3 cycles. Switches are to have a suitable self-override instantaneous
protection and to be in compliance with IEC 947-3.
D. Main incoming switches to be equipped to provide earth fault under voltage and phase
sequence protection through shunt trip coil. Earth fault detection and interruption to be time
coordinated with those of main incoming breaker on main distribution board.
2.8 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
A. Type: Totally enclosed, IP 42 for indoor installation, and IP 55 for outdoor installation and
in wet areas (e.g. pump rooms), free-standing sectionalized type, modular, compartmented,
form 3 to IEC 60439 with separate withdrawable section for each motor starter and separate
fixed section for main incoming breaker / switch and each outgoing feeder circuit breaker.
Sections to be designed to allow other sections to be easily added or removed.
B. Construction: 2 mm thick sheet steel, adequately reinforced and braced for maximum
rigidity, sand blasted, rust inhibited after fabrication and sprayed with one coat primer and
two coats enamel internally and externally.

C. Components: Motor control center to include the following:
1. Main incoming circuit breaker or isolating switch as shown on the Drawings for
terminating incoming supply cables and isolating the busbar system.
2. Main copper horizontal full-length busbars rated as main incoming circuit breaker or
as shown on the Drawings.
3. Branch copper vertical full height busbars of adequate capacity to distribute power to
each circuit breaker and starter served.
4. Neutral copper busbar rated at half capacity of main busbar and distributed
throughout whole motor control center.
5. Earth copper busbars minimum 25 x 6 mm extending full length of motor control
center.
6. One voltmeter with commutator, range 0-415 V.
7. Ammeters on main supply with necessary current transformers.
8. Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating lights, switches, relays, contactors
and accessories as shown on the Drawings.
9. Interconnecting and interlock wiring.
D. Wiring: Motor control center wiring to be class II type B to NEMA ICS.
E. Busbars to be adequately isolated and braced to sustain maximum possible short circuit
current.
F. Compartment doors to be interlocked so that isolators or breakers must be in OFF position

before door can be opened.
G. Spare Positions: Fully equipped cells, ready for connection to motors, are to be provided in
adequate number.
H. Space Positions: Fully equipped cells ready to receive control unit are to be provided in
adequate number. Space positions to have blank cover plates.
I. Starters, switches, other components and electrical devices to be clearly labeled in English
as to number and function, with incised letters on black Bakelite with white laminated core.
Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.
J. Incoming line connections to be made with solderless, terminal four bolt type clamps.
K. Labels: Starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in English
as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.
L. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be firmly fixed within motor control centre, showing each
component and cross- referenced with component labels.
M. Submit for approval electrical schematic diagram of whole installation suggested layout of
motor control centre, interior wiring details and complete technical literature on all proposed
components, prior to fabrication or purchase.
2.9 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS
A. Type: Wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type, IP 42 for indoor installation.

B. Construction: Minimum 1.5 mm thick hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with one coat
etch primer and one coat stove enamel internally and externally.
C. Panels installed outdoors and in wet areas to have weatherproof totally sealed water and
dustproof IP 55 enclosures.
D. Components: Panels are to contain necessary breakers, starters, push button switches,
selector switches, relays, indicating lights, interconnecting and interlock wiring and all
devices and accessories required for automatic or manual operation of equipment as
specified under equipment concerned.
E. Labels: Starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in English
as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.
F. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be mounted in permanent approved manner on inside of

panel door. Diagrams are to show each component cross referenced with component labels.
2.10 CONTROL SWITCHES
A. Float Switch: Level operated, heavy duty, bracket mounted type, suitable for application in
open tanks, complete with 178 mm spun copper float, brass rod, two stops, floor mounting
stand, lever and counterweight. Switch to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure and 2 pole
double throw silver contacts that open on liquid rise:
1. Man: Square D Company

2. Ref: Type BW 3
B. Pressure Switch: Industrial, heavy-duty bellows actuated type, suitable for water service,
with contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to 8 kg/cm2. Switch to be good
for 1720 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have
oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts and setting adjustment:

2. Ref: Type ACW-1
C. Low Suction Pressure Switch: Industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm actuated type,
suitable for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling pressure, preset at factory to 3
kPa. Switch to be good for 690 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom
connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw
contacts, range adjustment knob, sealing cap and range locking nut:

2. Ref: Type AMW-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of
supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load;
and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
C. Push-Button Stations: In covers of magnetic controllers for manually started motors where
indicated, start contact connected in parallel with sealing auxiliary contact for low-voltage
protection.
D. Hand-off-automatic Selector Switches: In covers of manual and magnetic controllers of

motors started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with other equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor control centers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Anchor each motor control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level
and grout sills flush with motor control center mounting surface.
C. Install motor control centers on concrete housekeeping bases conforming to Division 3

D. Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch as indicated.
E. Power and Control Wiring: Run in separate conduits unless otherwise specified.
F. Rigid conduits are not to terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame or base.
G. Flexible conduits to be used at motor connections. Allow sufficient slack to permit motor to
slide over adjustable length of motor base.
H. Flexible Conduits: Length and radius to be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables
without damage to conductor or its insulation.
I. Flexible Conduits: Do not use in place of rigid conduits except at motor connections, unless
otherwise specified.
J. Support conduit with conduit supports in an adequate approved manner.
K. Conduits are not to cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They are to be run a
minimum 100 mm away from pipes of non-electrical services.
L. Conduits: Install so that moisture can drain to lowest point. Provide screw plug at all low
points for draining.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs according to
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor control centers,
including control sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood
or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor control
centers.

C. Starters: Fix detailed wiring diagram inside enclosure cover to clearly indicate circuits.
D. Starters: Identify control and power wires either by distinctive colored insulation, engraved
tags or other approved method.
A. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
B. Protect circuits with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers. Auxiliary supply for
controls other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts
on main isolator.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic control devices according to an

indicated wiring diagram or one that is manufacturer approved, where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor control circuit in both hand and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-
temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.5 EARTHING
A. Earth motors by connecting green insulated conductor from earthing bushing in starter to
motor frame. Run earth conductor together with circuit wiring and terminate in motor
terminal box, provided earth terminal in box is connected to motor frame. If this is not
feasible, extend earth conductor through insulated bushed opening in terminal box and
connect to motor base.
B. Earth equipment by connecting non-current carrying metal parts of system to earth source.
Non-currents carrying metal parts include conduits, cable trays, outlet boxes, cabinets,
enclosures, doors, grilles, and barriers protecting or shielding electrical equipment from
direct access.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten motor control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
A. Testing: After installing motor control center and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform recommended visual and mechanical inspection and electrical

test. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
B. Circuit Breakers: Co-ordinate earth fault detection and interruption with those of main
incoming breaker on main distribution panel.

C. Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and correct setting.
D. Low Suction Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and
correct setting.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor control centers. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
Clean devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION

SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior
building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, mounting provisions and
connection to circuit wiring and to corresponding lighting control equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including manufacturer's
name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions, operating
characteristics and principles
2. Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of installation and
to the Specification
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution curves,
coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation factors etc.
4. Dimensions of fixtures.
5. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical
ratings and photometric data.
6. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric
performance.
7. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
8. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
9. Types of lamps.
B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the

Manufacturer/Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative and the Contractor.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit Drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling
features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and
pertinent to the installation.
2. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
3. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - Page 1 of 12

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
4. Wiring details, circuit and panelboard references, special lighting control

arrangements and control schematic diagram etc.
5. Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights,
method of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. Detail wiring for
fixtures and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
6. Upon completion, provide as-built (Record) drawings.
D. Samples: Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required, together
with color and texture samples of each fixture.
E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and sections drawn to scale and
coordinating fixture installation with ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and other
components in the vicinity. Include work of all trades that is to be installed near lighting
equipment.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that products

G. Dimming Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast certifying

that ballasts are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are used.
H. Compatibility certification from lighting fixture, lamp and control-gear manufacturers

respectively clearly certifying, Compatibility with each other equipment.
I. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Fixture Design and Standards: The Specification and the Drawings are a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless
otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturer's standard series, designed and
manufactured for the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with the
Schedule of Lighting Fixtures and complying with IEC 60598 and CISPR 15.
B. Mockups: Provide lighting fixtures for room or module mockups. Install fixtures for
mockups with power and control connections.
1. Obtain Engineer's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.

3. Remove mockups when directed. Fixtures may be reinstalled in the Work with
approval of Engineer.
4. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
C. All lighting fixtures to have test certification from approved and certified, photometric
laboratories.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain dimming controls from a single source with total responsibility
for compatibility of lighting control system components specified in this Section and in
Division 13 Section “Lighting Controls”.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
E. All luminaries and lighting fixtures shall be provided with a permanent label within the
luminaire clearly identifying, the name of the manufacturer, the model name and model
number, the country of origin, the IP rating of the fixture the type, rating and number of
lamps to be used and the year of manufacture.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Design Layout: Fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified
fixtures to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans are
to be checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural members, ducts,
pipes, other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required. Certain fixtures are shown
in provisional positions, pending preparation of final equipment layout drawings. Such
fixtures are to be located in coordination with final equipment layout so that illumination is
as intended by the design.
B. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting
fixtures with specific ceiling system in each area and other construction to ensure that space
exists for installation and removal of lighting fixture.
C. In general the lamps in the luminaries used for the normal lighting is to be selectively
allocated for emergency lighting also.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Lamps: 20 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Diffusers and Lenses: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
3. Louvers: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of each
type.
4. Battery and Charger Data: For emergency lighting units.
5. Ballasts/Control gear: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
6. Globes and Guards: 5 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
7. Lamp Holders: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1
of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated
for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on Drawings. The products are
to be the latest standard of a reputable manufacturer and full compliance with the
specifications.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
A. Generally: Construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the Regulations and
Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory.
Manufacturer's name, factory inspection stamp and official quality label is to be fixed to
each fixture supplied.
B. Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires): Manufacturer's standard, as given in Lighting Fixture

Schedules shown on the Drawings, or equal.
C. Sheet Steel Housings: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker
when required by the Specification or the Standards.
D. Sheet Steel Reflectors: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E. Aluminum Reflectors: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.7 mm thick, unless
otherwise approved.
F. Fabrication: Metalwork is to be mitred, welded and ground smooth without tool marks or
burrs. Flat metal parts are to be stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication.
Metal parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
G. Rust-proof Ferrous Base: Ferrous metal parts are to be bonderized (treated with corrosion
resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat before
application of final finish.
H. Finish for Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: Approved baked enamel paint. Paint color on
fixture frames and trims are to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
I. Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: White baked enamel paint having reflection factor not
less than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, are to be highly polished, anodized
aluminum with reflection factors not less than 97%.
J. Mechanical Resistance of Finish: After finish has been applied on steel surfaces and cured,
it is to withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or
loosening from base metal.
K. Resistance of Finish to Ultra-Violet: Finish is to withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultra-

violet RS lamp placed 100 mm from surface without discoloring, hardening or warping, and
is to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.
L. Heat Resistance: Finishes, wires and components inside fixtures are to be certified materials
to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
M. Wiring Inside Fixtures: Not less than 1.5 mm2, and insulated for 240 V application.
Insulation is to have acceptable characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside
fixtures. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type, fixed, insulating, terminal blocks.
N. Hinges: Fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have concealed hinges and
catches, and stain-less steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally durable products may
be submitted for approval.
O. Suspension Aligners: Provide for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and horizontal
alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
P. Recessed Fixtures: Construct to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting fixture or
ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
Q. Recessed Down Light Fixtures: shall be provided with “trims” to architectural approval and
shall not have visible fixing screws or clips.
R. Outdoor Fixtures: Non-ferrous metal or specially molded material for outdoor use.
S. Removal of parts for maintenance is to be possible without removing fixture housing.
T. All down lighters to be provided with heat tempered safety glass.
2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Lamp Holders Generally: To IEC 400, heavy duty, molded white plastic with non-corroding
spring contacts.
B. Lamp Holders for Industrial Fittings: Spring loaded turret type, heavy duty, dust protected.
C. Ballasts Generally: To IEC 60921. Only single or two-lamp ballasts are to be used in any
one fixture. Two-lamp ballasts are to be lead-lag, series type. Equipment is to be enclosed
in sheet steel casing with corrosion resistant finish.
D. Ballast thermosetting compound is not to soften, liquify or support combustion under any
operating condition or upon ballast failure, and is to fill ballast enclosure and dampen
vibrations. Temperature rise, under normal operating conditions, is not to exceed 55 deg. C
above maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg. C.
E. Ballast Protection: Each ballast is to have one-time external fuse and fuse holder rated in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Ballast Type: Electronic type power factor corrected to above 0.9, having manufacturer's
lowest case temperature. Sound rating is not to exceed level given in the Standards.
G. Ballast Rating: Ballast is to be manufactured and certified for the specific lamp it controls
and for operation from nominal power supply, with voltage and frequency equal to nominal
voltage and frequency of distribution network.
H. Capacitors: To IEC 61049, having snap-type connectors and fastening, bolt type M8, for
fixing to fixture.
I. Starters, if required, are to comply with IEC 60155, and are to be selected in conjunction
with respective ballast and lamp.
J. Electronic ballasts for use on 16 mm, 26 mm and 38 mm diameter krypton or argon filled
tubes are to be used in conjunction with electronic dimming controls. Dimming is to be
possible down to 5% of normal output. Ballasts are to be as manufactured by Helvar or
Osram or other equal and approved, with service life in excess of 10000 hours.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
2.4 INCANDESCENT LAMP FIXTURES
A. Incandescent Lamp Sockets: To IEC 60061 and IEC 60238, high-grade porcelain, heat
resistant plastic to CAT T2 BS EN 61180; E27 (ES) screw sockets for lamps not exceeding
200 W and E40 (GES) screw sockets for lamps 300 W and over.
B. Body shall be cast aluminium alloy or pre-galvanized sheet steel with non-toxic paint.
2.5 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Fixtures
A. Type: Fixtures are to be complete units including integral ballasts (and ignitors for HPS
lamps where indicated) and lamps of required number and type, and are to have lighting
distribution characteristics equivalent to model and manufacturer indicated in the fixture
description.
B. Accessories: Fixtures are to have mounting accessories, such as suspension rods or chains,
rails or brackets, and protective glass covers with gaskets for protection against dust and
humidity or type of corrosive atmosphere predominant in the location.
C. Ballasts and ignition devices are to be power factor compensated to at least 0.9 lagging, and
type specially selected for lamp type and size used. Lamp is to be able to start with at least
+/-10% variation from nominal line volt-age and continue in normal operation with dips
attaining 20% for four seconds. Compensation is to ensure there is no great increase in
operating current during starting and that gear losses do not exceed 10% of normal wattage.
RF suppression circuit is to be provided.
2.6 LAMPS
A. Rated voltage of incandescent and PL lamps is to be equal to nominal voltage of distribution

network. Lamps with different rated voltages are not acceptable.
B. Incandescent Lamps for General Lighting Service (GLS): To have screw base type ES for
lamps 200 W and below and type GES for lamps 300 W and above. Inside frosted (IF)
lamps are to be used unless otherwise specified. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 800
hours and luminous output above the following:
1. 950 lumens for 75 W lamps

4. 3100 lumens for 300 W lamps.
C. Reflector Lamps (R): For indoor and outdoor use, with silver reflector and prismatic lens.
Light beam is to be narrow (spot), wide (flood) or extra-wide (wide flood) as indicated in
the fixture description.
D. Tungsten-Halogen Lamps: Tubular, quartz, resistant to high temperatures. Guaranteed rated

life is to be above 2000 hours and luminous output above the following:


S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
E. Straight Tubular Fluorescent Lamps: To IEC 60081 (SSA 138 and SSA 139) and, unless
otherwise specified, are to be switch start type, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the fixture
description and with improved fluorescent internal coating. Color of light is to be warn
white color with temperature 3000 K, unless otherwise specified. Lamps are to be low
energy type. Lamps are to be low energy type with tube diameter 26 mm. Guaranteed rated
life is to be above 8000 hours and luminous output above the following:
1. 1300 lumens for 18 W lamps (600 mm long)

3. 5200 lumens for 58 W lamps (1500 mm long).
F. Circular Fluorescent Lamps: 32 W, 305 mm diameter, or 60 W, 406 mm diameter as shown

on the Drawings.
G. SL Lamps: Compact, low pressure, discharge lamps, integral with control gear, housed in
opal prismatic glass bulb, with ES screw base, and rated as indicated in the fixture
description. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000 hours and luminous output, for clear
prismatic lamps, above the following:

Lamps are to be type SL as manufactured by Philips or other equal and approved.
H. PL-C Compact Lamps: Single ended, compact-miniature lamp, consisting of four narrow
fluorescent tubes welded together, with integral instant starter and capacitor and with special
two-pin plug-in base and socket. Color by the light is to be warn white 3000 K. Guaranteed
rated life is to be above 5000 hours and luminous output above the following:

4. 1800 lumens for 26 W lamps (170 mm long).
Lamps are to be type PLC as manufactured by Osram, Philips or other equal and approved,
with warm color impression.
I. High Pressure Mercury Vapor Lamps: To IEC 60188, and to include quartz discharge tube
in an internally coated ovoid outer tube. Coating is to be yttrium vanadate phosphor with
color temperature of 3300 deg. K. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000 hours and
luminous output above the following:

J. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: Type SON-T (tubular), with guaranteed average rated life
(down to 80% output) above 10000 hours, lamp shall be provided with E40 base. Control
gear shall be provided from same manufacturer as the lamp, and having initial luminous
output above the following:


S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1

K. Metal Halide Lamps: Comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular hard-glass
outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with iodide additives
indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in three spectral
bands; blue, green and yellow-red with high color rendering.
L. Metal Halide lamps rated 150 Watts and less shall be ceramic discharge tube type with UV
stop outer bulb and have control gear from the same manufacturer as the lamp. The light
output shall have a Color Rendering Index class of 1 and the minimum lumen output and
color temperatures after 100 hours “burning-in” shall be as follows:
i. 35 Watt- 3300 Lumen @ 3000 o K
ii. 70 Watt- 6 000 Lumen @ 4000 o K
iii. 150 Watt- 13,500 Lumen @ 4000 o K
M. Metal Halide lamps rated above 150 Watts shall be provided with UV stop outer jacket and
shall have control gear from the same manufacturer as the lamp. The lamps shall also be
suitable for operation with HPSV control gear. Guaranteed average rated life (down to 80 %
output) shall be not less than 18,000 hours. The light output shall have a Color Rendering
Index class of 2 and the minimum lumen output and color temperatures after 100 hours
“burning-in” shall be as follows:
i. 250 Watt- 20,000 Lumen and 4200 o K
ii. 400 Watt- 40,000 Lumen and 4200 o K
iii. 1000 Watt- 80,000 Lumen and 4000 o K
N. Metal Halide lamps are to be to IEC 60188 with E40 base. Lamp voltage 230V. Permissible
base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C (482 deg. F), and maximum bulb
temperature not greater than 550 deg. C (1022 deg. F).
O. Low Voltage Halogen Dichroic lamps: are to be 12V, 20W/35W/50W as per the
requirement. The lamps shall be provided with a certified UV stop and a clear flat glass
sealed lens. Certified average rated life shall be not less than 4000 hrs. Color temperature
shall not be less than 3000 o K
2.7 CONTROL GEAR
A All control gear shall be certified to contain r.f.i. Suppression and comply with EN 55015
and EN 55022.
B All control gear shall be certified to have transient protection in compliance to IEC 929.
C All control gear shall be certified to contain harmonic compliance to EN 61000.
D All control gear shall be suitable for 230V, 50 Hz.
E All control gear shall be provided with input supply over current protection device.
F All control gear shall be metal encased.
G All control gear shall be from approved internationally reputed and recognized
manufacturers and shall be procured through the lighting fixture manufacturer.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
H All control gear shall be certified to be suitable for operation in an ambient of +55 o C (122
deg. F).
I All control gear for fluorescent lighting shall be electronic type.
J All control transformers for low voltage lamps shall be electronic type.
K All control gear for fluorescent lamps and other discharge lamps shall be electronic type
unless specifically permitted otherwise.
L All control gear interconnection wiring shall utilize LS0H insulated insulation wires.
M All control gear shall have permanent label indicating name of manufacturer, model
number, country of origin, approvals, rating and operating temperature information.
N Total power losses on control gear shall be tested and certified less than 5 % of lamp rating
by recognized and approved independent testing laboratory.
O Control gear for discharge lamps shall have “anti-cycling” feature to prevent multiple re-
strike in the event of lamp failure.
P All control gear shall be provided with p.f improvement to ensure a level not less than 0.95.
Q Control gear shall use only copper conductors. Aluminum windings/wires are not permitted.
R Starter/capacitors shall be metal can type, protected against fire/explosion and material used
shall be non-toxic and certified “environment friendly”.
S Al control gear shall be certified to be compatible with the lamp used, by the manufacturer.
2.8 ILLUMINATED LIGHT BOXES FOR ADVERTISEMENTS AND SIGNAGES.
A Enclosure shall be either 2mm aluminum sheeting or 2mm thick pre-galvanized sheet steel
with sufficient bracing and with non-toxic paint powder coating of approved color.
B Enclosure is to be IP 20 and provided with adequate ventilation openings, which are protected
by brass wire mesh against rodents and insects.
C Illuminated face may be high temperature, transparent or translucent material (as per
requirement) and shall be tested and certified to be non-inflammable and also non-toxic in
case of exposure to fire.
D Internal illumination shall be done with approved lamp source and control gears necessary.
E All internal wiring shall consist of LS0H insulated wires and cables.
F All lamp holders and connector blocks shall be ceramic or high temperature hydrocarbon
material certified to withstand 105 o C, non-inflammable and non-toxic.
G Lamp holder positions shall be permanently aligned by using standard luminaires and not as a
field assembly of components.
H R.f. suppression shall be provided for all control gear used herein.
I All control gear used herein shall be suitable for an ambient of 50 o C.
J Fixing screws shall be of captive type, which is held in place and do not fall off during
maintenance.
K Any gaskets used shall be non-inflammable type.
L Each light box shall be provided with an input over current protective device suited to the
electrical protective device “upstream” in the circuit and also an earth leakage circuit breaker.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
M All supports and packing within the light box shall be metal and usage of any inflammable
material is not allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Generally: Install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at
uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Make final height
adjustment after installation.
B. Ensure that luminaire is positioned so that it can be removed and re-fixed without having to
disturb other equipment.
C. Ensure that luminaires are fed from plug-in type ceiling roses, which are located within
“hand-reach” of the luminaire unless directed otherwise.
D. Fixture Support: Provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets and
flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers
etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on outlet boxes
to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when required, for proper installation.
Provide one point of support in addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually
mounted fixtures longer than 600 mm.
E. Stem Hangers: Provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures. Stems
are to have suspension aligners and are to be of suitable length for suspending fixtures at
required height.
F. Suspended Ceilings: If ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures without

strain or deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure.
G. Solid Ceilings: Coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture dimensions
and structural elements.
H. Continuous Rows: Arrange fixtures so that individual fixture can be removed without
dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.
I. Cover Plates: Install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or structure
when left unused.
J. Flush Recessed Fixtures: Install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture and
between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
K. Ventilation: Keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the design
of the fixture.
L. Earth metal frames of as described in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
M. Tightness: Ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when installed, and
completely weatherproof for installations subject to weather conditions.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
N. Lamps for Permanent Installation: Place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to hand-
over and when instructed by Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service are not to be used
for final lamping of fixtures.
O. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to
manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each
fixture.
P. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 150 mm from fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
A. Visual Inspection: Check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and nameplates

etc.
B. Illumination Measurements: Taken at selected locations, to determine level and uniformity.
C. Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.
D. Electrical Data: Measure power factor, current and voltage at start for installations with
discharge lamps.
E. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
F. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
G. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
H. Tests: As follows:
1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.
3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Report results in writing.
I. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
J. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01-REV 1
SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts,
poles/support structures, and accessories and related power distribution and control,
protective earthing and related builder's work including column foundations, cable pits,
cable trenches and ductwork.

2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts,
emergency lighting units, and accessories; and for exterior luminaires normally
mounted on buildings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common

support, including pole, post, or other structure, and mounting and support accessories.
B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and

ballast(s), when applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position
and protect lamps, and to connect lamps to power supply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete data for
approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaire or fixture, lamp and
control gear including manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material
specification, overall dimensions, operating characteristics and principles, and any
modification to a standard product if applicable
2. Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including shape,
base/mounting flanges, bolts, nuts etc, cross-sections, design criteria and
calculations, brackets, finishes, provisions for cabling, cut-out or circuit-breaker
etc.
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar curves, coefficients of
utilization, efficiency and depreciation factors.
4. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - Page 1 of 10

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
5. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and
photometric data.
6. High-intensity-discharge luminaire ballasts.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1. Layout of equipment in exact positions with mounting and construction details,

concrete foundation dimensions and reinforcement, routing and sections of duct-
banks and trenches, backfill and packing material, earthing rods etc.
2. Cabling and wiring diagrams, single line drawings, loads, phase distribution,
protection and control, earthing and the like.
3. Calculations of illumination and glare levels, based on CIE methods.
C. Samples: submit fully equipped sample of luminaire or other materials or components if

required by Engineer.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying that products

requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Standards: Luminaires generally are to comply with IEC 60598 and the applicable CISPR
recommendations. Manufacturer is to verify compliance with these standards and the
applicable local regulations and design standards.
B. Technical Requirements: Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for
improvement in construction details, but no changes are to be made without the written
approval of the Engineer.
C. Ambient Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, equipment is to be designed and derated

for continuous and trouble-free service at 50 deg. C ambient temperature and 100%
relative humidity, with temperature reaching 70 deg. C in direct sunlight and with high
content of ultra-violet rays. Equipment is to withstand full load operation whilst exposed
to sun.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES
A. Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 300 mm above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on poles until just before pole installation. Handle
poles with web fabric straps.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide items necessary for maintenance, and up to 5% (or nearest whole
unit) of installed quantities of each type of lamp, control gear, fuses, luminaire covers,
special bolts or nuts, lamp-holders and the like which are subject to burning, breakage or
failure.
B. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for every 100 of each
type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

indicated for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on plans.
2.2 LIGHTING COLUMNS
A. Construction: Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet steel, electrically
welded, and of height specified. Columns up to 12-m height are to be one piece section.
Columns above 12 m and up to 20-m height may be supplied in two piece sections, of the
slip joint type with sufficient overlap to ensure correct vertical alignment of column after
assembly. Columns are to have minimum wall thickness of 3 mm at base. Sheet steel is
to have minimum rupturing resistance of 37 kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24
kg/mm2.
B. Top of column is to be designed to receive single or double arm brackets or other

arrangement required, supporting number of luminaires shown on the Drawings. Bracket
arrangement is to be designed to ensure that failure, due to wind induced oscillations,
does not occur and that rotation from desired alignment is not possible.
C. Column Design: Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints, welds, bolts etc. are to
be designed to withstand gust wind velocity of 160 km/hr blowing in the most
unfavorable direction at a height 10 m above ground level, with column fully equipped.
Fatigue of steel is in no case to exceed half elasticity limit, taking into account dynamic
stresses due to vibrations. Steel flange plate, of adequate thickness, is to be solidly
welded onto lower edge of column as shown on the Drawings, and is to have specified
number of holes for holding down bolts together with central cable access hole not less
than 150 mm diameter.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
D. Access door of weatherproof construction is to be positioned at column base and is to be

suitably sized to insert and service the supply cable terminations and protective device.
Door is to be flush fitting with retaining mechanism and positive locking arrangement
with removable hexagonal key. Column is to be reinforced at door opening. Opposite
each door, a non-hygroscopic baseboard of suitable size to accept appropriate equipment
is to be fixed to inside of column by purpose-made brackets. Stainless steel earthing stud
with washers and nuts is to be welded inside the column near the access door.
E. Finish: Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed; inside and outside surfaces of
column are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel
components of columns to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness of
zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2 on both inside and outside surfaces of column.
Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91 121 or BS 729. Any damage to galvanizing is to be
rectified during erection by wire brushing affected area and treating with approved rust
converter to the satisfaction of Engineer. Flange plate and inside and outside of column
base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.
F. Protection and Wiring: Columns with one or two luminaires are to be connected over one
phase and neutral. Columns with three or more luminaires are to be connected over 3
phases and neutral, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bolted terminals and cable
lugs are to be provided with 3 phases and neutral terminals, for incoming and outgoing 3
phase 4-wire cable, and of the sizes shown on Drawings. One circuit breaker, single pole
6 A is to be provided for each phase leading to a luminaire. Circuit breakers are to be
compensated and rated for 50 deg. C ambient with interrupting capacity of at least 9 kA,
and are to be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at baseboard. Wiring is to be PVC
insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor temperature. Cable is to be at least 4 mm2
copper conductor.
2.3 ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
A. Construction: Totally enclosed, dust protected and splash proof, conforming to at least IP
54 of IEC 60529, shock resistant and specially designed to house required lamps,
electrical gear and accessories. Body is to be corrosion resistant, extruded, pressure die-
cast or fabricated aluminum alloy.
B. Finish: Exposed metal parts of luminaires are to be factory finished, stove enameled, with
suitable corrosion resisting paint capable of resisting heat emitted by lamp during
continuous operation, and under full sunlight conditions. Color is to be agreed with
Engineer.
C. Mirror Reflectors: 99.5% purity, glazed and anodized aluminum or die-cast, super-purity
aluminum vapor-deposited, and coated with transparent layer of silicon protection against
wiping.
D. Luminaire Protectors: Heat and shock resistant glass, mounted into suitable frame
assembly fixed to body by captive screws, and secured by extra safety clamps to allow
replacement of protector and reflector. Ozone resistant ethylene propylene or approved
equivalent rubber is to ensure sealing of the front glass.
E. Lamp Sockets: High-grade porcelain, mounted in support brackets with provision to

adjust lamps vertically and axially. Lamp support and locking system are to grip and
prevent lamp movement in operation.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
F. Ballast and control-gear are to be mounted in luminaire in separate compartment isolated

from lamp, and with encloterminal blocks fitted with quick-disconnect electrical leads.
Where required, control gear is to be contained in the pre-wired box, having an enclosure
of IP 65, and mounted on luminaire ring separately from luminaires. Control gear is to be
plug in type for operation at 220 V, a.c. single phase, 60 Hz. Ballast is to be specially
selected for particular type of lamps used, and lamps are to be able to start with at least
+/-10% variation of nominal voltage and continue in normal operation with dips attaining
20% for four seconds. Control gear losses are not to exceed 10% of normal lamp
wattage. RFI suppression device is to be provided. Power factor is to be compensated to
at least 0.9 lagging.
G. HRC fuse cartridges, suitably rated and conforming to IEC 269 or BS 88, are to be
provided, complete with base, for protection of the luminaire. Fuse is to be rated to
withstand starting current and is to be preferably located in control gear enclosure.
H. Terminal Blocks: Suitable screw-tunnel type, clearly marked with arrangement to

facilitate maintenance, quick replacement and easy disconnection of individual
components.
2.4 LAMPS
A. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: Type Sont (tubular), with guaranteed average rated life
(down to 80% output) above 10000 hours, and having initial luminous output above the
following:
B.
C. Metal Halide Lamps: Comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular hard-
glass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with iodide
additives indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in
three spectral bands; blue, green and yellow-red with high color rendering. Lamps up to
150 W are to be provided with electronic ballast. Lamps are to be to IEC 60188 with E40
base. Guaranteed average life is not to be less than 10000 hours and luminous outputs,
after 100 hours burning, are to be above the following:

Permissible base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C, and maximum bulb
temperature not greater than 550 deg. C. Lamp burning position for 2000 W, 220 V lamp
is to be possible up to 75 degrees.
2.5 FLOODLIGHTS

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
A. Type: Totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant, IP 64 of IEC 60529.
B. Housing: High pressure die-cast aluminum alloy, closed on front by hinged framed
protector highly resistant to thermal and mechanical shocks, and set in position by at least
eight heavy duty stainless steel spring clamps with silicon sealing gasket. Enclosure is to
be in accordance with IEC Publication 60598-2-5 and BS 5489, and is to be suitable for
operation in an ambient temperature of 70 deg. C.
C. Reflectors: High purity (over 99% reflectance) anodized aluminum, secured in precision
aligned internal tracks to provide beam distribution required.
D. Connection box is to be located at rear of floodlight body with gland connections to

accept 4 mm2 PVC/PVC three core cable. Lamp and control gear to be mounted in two
separate and isolated compartments.
E. Control Gear: Plug-in type, 220 V, 60 Hz, power factor compensated to at least 0.9
lagging. Ballasts and ignitors are to be type specially adapted for make of lamps selected.
Ignitors are to be electronic thyristor type. Lamp is to be able to start with at least +/-
10% line voltage, and with normal operation dips up to 20% for four seconds.
Compensation is to ensure that there is no large increase in operating current during
starting. Control gear losses are not to exceed 10%. Cables for internal wiring in control
gear compartments are to be single core 2.5 mm2 copper conductors with high
temperature insulation and sheath.
F. Finish: Exposed metal parts of floodlights are to be painted with corrosion and heat
resistant paint, resisting operating temperatures attained in direct sunlight while lamp is
burning.
G. Mounting: Floodlights are to be located as shown on the Drawings and mounted on

specially designed brackets to allow swiveling in any desired direction and locking firmly
in final position. Protractor scale is to be provided for accurate setting.
H. Earthing Terminals: Bolted earthing terminal is to be provided in each fitting.
2.6 COLD CATHODE LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. Cold Cathode Lamps: are to be 25 mm diameter 48, 100 or 200 mA, lead glass with 1.25
mm (0.05″) min wall thickness, with a minimum 21% lead content, tri-phosphor coated,
surface and cove mounted, straight, curved and circular runs, dimmable and non-
dimmable type at the various areas as shown on the drawings, premium, warm white
delux colour (3000°K), unless otherwise shown on the drawings, and subject to the
Architect and Engineer’s approval, suitable for operations on 220V, 60 HZ power supply,
with minimum flux output of 150, 300 or 600 lumen per linear foot of lamp length for 48
mA, 100 mA or 200 mA ratings respectively.
B. Cold Cathode Lamps: are not to depreciate more than 20% of output lumens after 10,000
hours of normal operation. Lamps are to be processed with a high speed mechanical
pump of at least 100 liters free air capacity, backed up by a 3-stage oil diffusion pump
able to produce a vacuum of 10-7 and accurate gauges and meters for measuring and
controlling pressures, temperatures, carrier gas and mercury. Completed lamps are to be
silicon coated and aged for a minimum of 50 hours. Suitable for external installation,
Lamps showing end darkening, stains, discolorations, spiraling or sputtering are to be
rejected.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
C. Lamp Holders: are to be surface mounted, suitable for external installations, architectural
grade, UL listed, glazed white porcelain with bronze spring contacts.
D. Transformers: are to be UL listed, 220 V, 60 Hz high efficiency, low noise, midpoint

earthed, mounted in galvanized steel properly painted & finished enclosure, high power
factor (0.9) unless dimming is required, suitable for operation at 50°c ambient conditions
low noise type, with suitable and sufficient output voltage power and current ratings as
required for the connected lamp lengths. Transformer data are to be submitted for
approval. Secondary cables from transformers to lamps to be provided by the cold
cathode supplier.
PART 3 - POWER DISTRIBUTION
3.1 LOW VOLTAGE FEEDER PILLAR
A. Description: this work shall consist of supplying, complete with the necessary base,
mounting, testing and putting into satisfactory operation of feeder pillars which shall
generally be used to feed electrical lighting and other installations as required.
B. Construction: the feeder pillar shall be totally enclosed fully self-contained dust-proof,
weather proof and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to dust, rain and sunlight.
C. Cabinets: shall be reinforced free standing structure, manufactured from 3 mm nominal

thickness steel with bolted reinforcement corner construction and shall be of the dwarf
type with a bolting down root for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base suitable for all
incoming and outgoing cables from below ground level on a duct system. Cabinets shall
have two hinged lockable opening doors to provide full front access to the cabinet shall
be sized according to the equipment being installed. The roof of the cabinet shall be
slanted and shall have water drip edges provided.
D. Characteristics: the feeder pillar shall be complete with all equipment and fittings
incorporating moulded case circuit breakers controlling the main supply in and the
outgoing circuits. The pillar shall have the following main characteristics:
Voltage 1000 volts.
Moulded Case Circuit Triple/single pole rated as shown on Drawings
Breakers (MCCB) For Incoming and outgoing circuits.
Interrupting Capacity 35000 amperes RMS symmetrical
E. Contactors: shall be triple-pole, inductive type, rates as shown on the project drawings.
F. Busbars: are to be fully insulated, and adequately rated.
G. Internal Cabling: to be PVC/PVC single core 1000 volt grade with copper conductors and
rated as required taking into account manufacturers recommended temperature and
"bunching" derating factors. All internal wiring shall be suitably "laced" or clipped.
H. Control: the LV panel circuits serving the street lighting shall be supplied through triple
pole contactors which shall be photo-electric controlled. An over-ride facility shall be
provided for maintenance. The photo-electric controls shall consist of an omni-

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
directional cadmium cell thermal relay of high quality employing solid state photo-
variable conductance elements giving a 2:1 on/off ratio with sensitivity to switch on
lights when the daylight illumination reduces to 70 lux.
I. Feeder Pillars: shall have a 50 mm x 6 mm high conductivity copper main earth bar for
grounding purposes complete with test (see "earthing"). Also, permanently fixed to the
inside of the door there shall be a distribution diagram showing all circuit connections,
MCCB ratings, cable sizes and references, etc.
J. Feeder Pillar: shall be secured against unauthorized access by means of wedge locks
protected by brass plugs and operated by a special key to be agreed with the Engineer or
as applied by the local authority. The pillar final finish and final colour shall be to the
approval of the Engineer and similar to the colour of Power Distribution Boards.
3.2 LV CABLING
A. Cables: shall be multicore with copper conductors, PVC or XLPE insulated 1000 V and
shall be as specified under section 16120.
PART4 -EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment: Install equipment to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and

repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this but no
changes are to be made without the approval of Engineer.
B. Column Bases: Install columns on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. Before
commencement of construction, ensure that bases are suitable for column installation.
C. Holding Down and Plumb Adjusting Nuts, Washers, Locknuts or Nyloc Nuts: Stainless
steel or cadmium plated.
D. Columns: Erect columns so that luminaires are located on a line parallel to theoretical
profile of road. Alignment of columns, both horizontally and vertically, is to be
secured to the satisfaction of Engineer. Brackets are to be set at 90 degrees to
longitudinal axis of road.
E. Install poles as follows:
a. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
b. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque
level recommended by pole manufacturer.
c. Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
d. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or
expanding concrete grout firmly packed in entire void space.
e. Use a short piece of 13-mm diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
F. Luminaries Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach luminaires and

supports to allow aiming for indicated light distribution.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
G. Mounting Adjustments: After demonstrating to Engineer that specified lighting

requirements have been met, carry out final setting and locking in position of the
floodlights.
H. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.
I. Lamp luminaries with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Replace malfunctioning lamps.
J. Cabling Conduits and Ductwork: Carry out in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Conductors and Cabling". Cable ducts are to be directly buried except at crossings
with other service work or roads.
4.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
A. Visual inspection is to include inspection of condition of each piece of equipment,

quality of workmanship, alignment, perpendicularity, labeling and the like, all in
conformance with the Specification.
B. Insulation resistance and continuity tests are to be carried out on each circuit and piece
of equipment before energization, with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps
not installed.
C. Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with
lamps installed, including recording voltage at terminals of ballasts on final columns of
each circuit and at distribution panel or the like.
D. Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation, and are to
include measurement of lighting and uniformity levels on required illuminated
surfaces.
E. Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with
the Specification.
F. Earthing resistance tests are to include measurement of earth electrode resistance at

final points of circuits and continuity of protective conductors.
G. Results of tests are to be recorded on site and signed by witnessing parties.
H. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
I. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing
luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows:
a. Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination performance is

indicated. Use calibrated photometers.
b. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
c. Check excessively noisy ballasts.
J. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating

and interpreting results.
K. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat

procedure until units operate properly.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1
4.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Equipment:
a. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values.
B. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and

Bonding."
a. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and foundations.

Connect luminaires to grounding system with conductor as shown on plans or in
accordance with Regulations.
A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by

manufacturer.
B. Adjust amiable luminaries and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide
required light distributions and intensities.

S08035-SPC-11A-EL-01 REV 1

Specs For Station - and - Buildings - Construction - Spec PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specs For Station - and - Buildings - Construction - Spec PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RIYADH METRO PROJECT

STATIONS AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01000 TRAFFIC CONTROL

DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 5

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 5

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

09634 STONE FLOORING

10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS

12481 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13651 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 3 of 5

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 4 of 5

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16341 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 5 of 5

SECTION 01000 – TRAFFIC CONTROL

A. This Section includes:

1. Traffic Control Requirements.

a. Identify existing services and access to adjacent properties

B. Method statement for dust control.

1.3 GENERAL TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

a. A minimum width of 3 m shall be provided.

TRAFFIC CONTROL 01000 - Page 1 of 5

2. The access locations to be maintained are not shown on the Drawings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Traffic Safety Supervisor

1. Provide a competent Traffic Safety Supervisor approved by the Engineer, to

a. Supervisor shall be available at all times,

TRAFFIC CONTROL 01000 - Page 2 of 5

h. Conduct an initial traffic safety meeting with Contractor, Subcontractor

1. Provide the Engineer with minutes summarizing all discussions.

1. Persons acting as flagmen shall be:

a. Physically and mentally qualified

a. Shall be equipped with a STOP/GO sign conforming to these Specifications.

1.5 DUST CONTROL

A. Contractor shall prevent nuisance conditions from developing as a result of dust.

C. Submit for approval by the Engineer.

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1. Painting shall not constitute an approved substitute for reflectorization.

TRAFFIC CONTROL 01000 - Page 3 of 5

1. Barricades made of wood will not be permitted.